PUB.

(ENROUTE)

SAILING DIRECTIONS

★

★

2009

164

NEW GUINEA

Prepared and published by the

NATIONAL GEOSPATIAL-INTELLIGENCE AGENCY

Bethesda, Maryland

© COPYRIGHT 2009 BY THE UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT

NO COPYRIGHT CLAIMED UNDER TITLE 17 U.S.C.

ELEVENTH EDITION

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing Office

Internet: http://bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800

Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail Stop: SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001
Pub. 164 III

Preface

0.0 Pub. 164, Sailing Directions (Enroute) New Guinea,

Eleventh Edition, 2009, is issued for use in conjunction with

Pub. 160, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean

and Southeast Asia. Companion volumes are Pubs. 161, 162,

and 163.

0.0 Digital Nautical Charts 4, 5, and 14 provide electronic chart

coverage for the area covered by this publication. 

0.0 This publication has been corrected to 25 April 2009, including Notice to Mariners No. 17 of 2009.

Explanatory Remarks

0.0 Sailing Directions are published by the National GeospatialIntelligence Agency (NGA), under the authority of Department

of Defense Directive 5105.40, dated 12 December 1988, and

pursuant to the authority contained in U. S. Code Title 10,

Sections 2791 and 2792 and Title 44, Section 1336. Sailing

Directions, covering the harbors, coasts, and waters of the

world, provide information that cannot be shown graphically

on nautical charts and is not readily available elsewhere.

0.0 Sailing Directions (Enroute) include detailed coastal and

port approach information which supplements the largest scale

chart produced by the National Geospatial-Intelligence

Agency. This publication is divided into geographic areas

called “Sectors.”

0.0 Bearings.—Bearings are true, and are expressed in degrees

from 000° (north) to 360°, measured clockwise. General

bearings are expressed by initial letters of points of the compass (e.g. N, NNE, NE, etc.). Adjective and adverb endings

have been discarded. Wherever precise bearings are intended

degrees are used.

0.0 Charts.—Reference to charts made throughout this publication refer to both the paper chart and the Digital Nautical

Chart (DNC).

0.0 Coastal Features.—It is assumed that the majority of ships

have radar. Available coastal descriptions and views, useful for

radar and visual piloting are included in geographic sequence

in each Sector.

0.0 Corrective Information.—Users should refer corrections,

additions, and comments to NGA’s Maritime Operations Desk,

as follows: 

0.0 1. Toll free: 1-800-362-6289

0.0 2. Commercial: 301-227-3147

0.0 3. DSN: 287-3147

0.0 4. DNC web site: http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/dnc

0.0 5. Maritime Do0.0 main web site: http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/mari

0.0 time

0.0 6. E-mail: navsafety@nga.mil

0.0 7. Mailing address: Maritime Domain

0.0 National Geospatial-Intelligence

0.0 Agency

Mail Stop D-44

0.0 4600 Sangamore Road

0.0 Bethesda MD 20816-5003

0.0 New editions of Sailing Directions are corrected through the

date of the publication shown above. Important information to

amend material in the publication is available as a Publication

Digital Update (PDU) from the NGA Maritime Domain website.

0.0NGA Maritime Domain Website

http://www.nga.mil/portal/site/maritime

0.0

0.0 Courses.—Courses are true, and are expressed in the same

manner as bearings. The directives “steer” and “make good” a

course mean, without exception, to proceed from a point of

origin along a track having the identical meridianal angle as the

designated course. Vessels following the directives must allow

for every influence tending to cause deviation from such track,

and navigate so that the designated course is continuously

being made good.

0.0 Currents.—Current directions are the true directions toward

which currents set.

0.0 Dangers.—As a rule outer dangers are fully described, but

inner dangers which are well-charted are, for the most part,

omitted. Numerous offshore dangers, grouped together, are

mentioned only in general terms. Dangers adjacent to a coastal

passage or fairway are described.

0.0 Distances.—Distances are expressed in nautical miles of 1

minute of latitude. Distances of less than 1 mile are expressed

in meters, or tenths of miles.

0.0 Geographic Names.—Geographic names are generally

those used by the nation having sovereignty. Names in parentheses following another name are alternate names that may

appear on some charts. In general, alternate names are quoted

only in the principal description of the place. Diacritical marks,

such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to

specific letters in certain foreign languages, are not used in the

interest of typographical simplicity. Geographic names or their

spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political

status of an area by the United States Government.

0.0 Heights.—Heights are referred to the plane of reference

used for that purpose on the charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Index-Gazetteer.—Navigational features and place-names

are listed alphabetically in the back of the book. The approximate position, along with the Sector and paragraph numbers

(e.g. 1.1), facilitate location in the text.

0.0 Internet Links.—This publication provides internet links to

web sites concerned with maritime navigational safety, including but not limited to, Federal government sites, foreign Hydrographic Offices, and foreign public/private port facilities.

NGA makes no claims, promises, or guarantees concerning the

accuracy, completeness, or adequacy of the contents of the web

sites and expressly disclaims any liability for errors and omissions of these web sites.

0.0 Light and Fog Signals.—Lights and fog signals are not described, and light sectors are not usually defined. The Light

Lists should be consulted for complete information.

0.0 Ports.—Directions for entering ports are depicted where

appropriate by means of chartlets, sketches, and photos, which

facilitate positive identification of landmarks and navigational

aids. These chartlets and sketches are not always to scale, however, and should be used only as a general informational guide

in conjunction with the best scale chart. Specific port facilities

are omitted from the standard format. They are tabulated in

Pub. 150, World Port Index.

0.0 Radio Navigational Aids.—Radio navigational aids are not

described in detail. Publication No. 117 Radio Navigational

Aids and NOAA Publication, Selected Worldwide Marine

Broadcasts, should be consulted.
IV Pub. 164

0.0 Soundings.—Soundings are referred to the datum of the

charts and are expressed in meters.

0.0 Special Warnings.—A Special Warning may be in force for

the geographic area covered by this publication. Special

Warnings are printed in the weekly Notice to Mariners upon

promulgation and are reprinted annually in Notice to Mariners

No. 1. A listing of Special Warnings currently in force is

printed in each weekly Notice to Mariners, Section III, Broadcast Warnings, along with the notice number of promulgation.

Special Warnings are also available on the Maritime Division

website.

Wind Directions.—Wind directions are the true directions 

from which winds blow.

Reference List

0.0 The principal sources examined in the preparation of this

publication were:

0.0 British Hydrographic Department Sailing Directions.

0.0 Various port handbooks.

0.0 Reports from United States Naval and merchant vessels and

various shipping companies.

0.0 Other U.S. Government publications, reports, and documents.

0.0 Charts, light lists, tide and current tables, and other documents in possession of the Agency.
Pub. 164 V

Contents

Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . III

Chartlet—Sector Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VII

Conversion Tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII

Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XI

Sector 1

Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Sector 2

The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Sector 3

The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Sector 4

The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Sector 5

South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Sector 6

South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Sector 7

Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Sector 8

The Louisiade Archipelago . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Sector 9

Islands North and Northeast of East Cape—North Coast of Papua New Guinea—East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya . . 183

Sector 10

North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Glossaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Index—Gazetteer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
 Pub. 164 VII 0.0SECTOR LIMITS—PUB. 164
VIII Pub. 164

Conversion Tables

 Feet to Meters

Feet 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.30 0.61 0.91 1.22 1.52 1.83 2.13 2.44 2.74

 10 3.05 3.35 3.66 3.96 4.27 4.57 4.88 5.18 5.49 5.79

 20 6.10 6.40 6.71 7.01 7.32 7.62 7.92 8.23 8.53 8.84

 30 9.14 9.45 9.75 10.06 10.36 10.67 10.97 11.28 11.58 11.89

 40 12.19 12.50 12.80 13.11 13.41 13.72 14.02 14.33 14.63 14.93

 50 15.24 15.54 15.85 16.15 16.46 16.76 17.07 17.37 17.68 17.98

 60 18.29 18.59 18.90 19.20 19.51 19.81 20.12 20.42 20.73 21.03

 70 21.34 21.64 21.95 22.25 22.55 22.86 23.16 23.47 23.77 24.08

 80 24.38 24.69 24.99 25.30 25.60 25.91 26.21 26.52 26.82 27.13

 90 27.43 27.74 28.04 28.35 28.65 28.96 29.26 29.57 29.87 30.17

 Fathoms to Meters

Fathoms 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 1.83 3.66 5.49 7.32 9.14 10.97 12.80 14.63 16.46

 10 18.29 20.12 21.95 23.77 25.60 27.43 29.26 31.09 32.92 34.75

 20 36.58 38.40 40.23 42.06 43.89 45.72 47.55 49.38 51.21 53.03

 30 54.86 56.69 58.52 60.35 62.18 64.01 65.84 67.67 69.49 71.32

 40 73.15 74.98 76.81 78.64 80.47 82.30 84.12 85.95 87.78 89.61

 50 91.44 93.27 95.10 96.93 98.75 100.58 102.41 104.24 106.07 107.90

 60 109.73 111.56 113.39 115.21 117.04 118.87 120.70 122.53 124.36 126.19

 70 128.02 129.85 131.67 133.50 135.33 137.16 138.99 140.82 142.65 144.47

 80 146.30 148.13 149.96 151.79 153.62 155.45 157.28 159.11 160.93 162.76

 90 164.59 166.42 168.25 170.08 171.91 173.74 175.56 177.39 179.22 181.05

 Meters to Feet

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 3.28 6.56 9.84 13.12 16.40 19.68 22.97 26.25 29.53

 10 32.81 36.09 39.37 42.65 45.93 49.21 52.49 55.77 59.06 62.34

 20 65.62 68.90 72.18 75.46 78.74 82.02 85.30 88.58 91.86 95.14

 30 98.42 101.71 104.99 108.27 111.55 114.83 118.11 121.39 124.67 127.95

 40 131.23 134.51 137.80 141.08 144.36 147.64 150.92 154.20 157.48 160.76

 50 164.04 167.32 170.60 173.88 177.16 180.45 183.73 187.01 190.29 193.57

 60 196.85 200.13 203.41 206.69 209.97 213.25 216.54 219.82 223.10 226.38

 70 229.66 232.94 236.22 239.50 242.78 246.06 249.34 252.62 255.90 259.19

 80 262.47 265.75 269.03 272.31 275.59 278.87 282.15 285.43 288.71 291.99

 90 295.28 298.56 301.84 305.12 308.40 311.68 314.96 318.24 321.52 324.80

 Meters to Fathoms

Meters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

 0 0.00 0.55 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.73 3.28 3.83 4.37 4.92

 10 5.47 6.01 6.56 7.11 7.66 8.20 8.75 9.30 9.84 10.39

 20 10.94 11.48 12.03 12.58 13.12 13.67 14.22 14.76 15.31 15.86

 30 16.40 16.95 17.50 18.04 18.59 19.14 19.68 20.23 20.78 21.33

 40 21.87 22.42 22.97 23.51 24.06 24.61 25.15 25.70 26.25 26.79

 50 27.34 27.89 28.43 28.98 29.53 30.07 30.62 31.17 31.71 32.26

 60 32.81 33.36 33.90 34.45 35.00 35.54 36.09 36.64 37.18 37.73

 70 38.28 38.82 39.37 39.92 40.46 41.01 41.56 42.10 42.65 43.20

 80 43.74 44.29 44.84 45.38 45.93 46.48 47.03 47.57 48.12 48.67

 90 49.21 49.76 50.31 50.85 51.40 51.95 52.49 53.04 53.59 54.13
Pub. 164 XI

Abbreviations

The following abbreviations may be used in the text:

Units

°C degree(s) Centigrade km kilometer(s)

cm centimeter(s) m meter(s)

cu.m. cubic meter(s) mb millibars

dwt deadweight tons MHz megahertz

FEU forty-foot equivalent units mm millimeter(s)

grt gross registered tons nrt net registered tons

kHz kilohertz TEU twenty-foot equivalent units

Directions

N north S south

NNE northnortheast SSW southsouthwest

NE northeast SW southwest

ENE eastnortheast WSW westsouthwest

E east W west

ESE eastsoutheast WNW westnorthwest

SE southeast NW northwest

SSE southsoutheast NNW northnorthwest

Vessel types

LASH Lighter Aboard Ship ro-ro Roll-on Roll-off

LNG Liquified Natural Gas ULCC Ultra Large Crude Carrier

LPG Liquified Petroleum Gas VLCC Very Large Crude Carrier

OBO Ore/Bulk/Oil

Time

ETA estimated time of arrival GMT Greenwich Mean Time

ETD estimated time of departure UTC Coordinated Universal Time

Water level

MSL mean sea level LWS low water springs

HW high water MHWN mean high water neaps

LW low water MHWS mean high water springs

MHW mean high water MLWN mean low water neaps

MLW mean low water MLWS mean low water springs

HWN high water neaps HAT highest astronomical tide

HWS high water springs LAT lowest astronomical tide

LWN low water neaps

Communications

D/F direction finder MF medium frequency

R/T radiotelephone HF high frequency

GMDSS Global Maritime Distress and Safety System VHF very high frequency

LF low frequency UHF ultra high frequency

Navigation

LANBY Large Automatic Navigation Buoy SPM Single Point Mooring

NAVSAT Navigation Satellite TSS Traffic Separation Scheme

ODAS Ocean Data Acquisition System VTC Vessel Traffic Center

SBM Single Buoy Mooring VTS Vessel Traffic Service

Miscellaneous

COLREGS Collision Regulations

IALA International Association of Lighthouse

Authorities

No./Nos.

PA

Number/Numbers

Position approximate

IHO International Hydrographic Office PD Position doubtful

IMO International Maritime Organization Pub. Publication

loa length overall St./Ste. Saint/Sainte
1

Pub. 164

1. 

Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes)

1.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 1 — CHART INFORMATION
3

Pub. 164

SECTOR 1 

ISLANDS BETWEEN MINDANAO AND SULAWESI (CELEBES)

1.0 Plan.—This sector describes Pulau Miangas, Kepulauan

Nenusa, Kepulauan Talaud, Kepulauan Kawio, and Kepulauan

Sangihe, in that order. 

General Remarks

1.1 Winds—Weather.—The monsoons blow more steadily and with greater strength in the Molucca Passage than in the

Celebes Sea. High winds and squalls are not common. Very

rarely a tropical cyclone passes to the N and causes strong

winds and swells in the passage.

1.1 From December to February, the winds blow from the N,

chiefly, but occasionally from the NW. This monsoon is well

developed and reaches its greatest strength in February. In

March, N winds continue to prevail. In April the winds are

lighter, mostly from the N, but veering to the E at times.

1.1 Southwest winds set in during May. By June, the East Monsoon has become established, with its prevailing direction from

the S and SSE. The East Monsoon blows with somewhat

greater strength and steadiness than the West Monsoon in this

area. During July, August, and September the prevailing winds

are S and SW. The greatest strength of East Monsoon is

reached in August.

1.1 During October the prevailing winds continue from the S

and SW, becoming more variable than in September, with some

N breezes.

1.1 November is the transition month, during which the winds

are light and variable, becoming N by the close of the month.

In December the West Monsoon is well established with winds

from the NW and NNW.

1.1 In general, there is more clear sky and favorable weather

during the West Monsoon than in the first part of the East

Monsoon season. However, by August the dry season has set in

continuing through October, with small cloudiness but a considerable amount of haze. 

1.1 Tides—Currents.—Lack of information prevents a detailed

discussion of the tidal currents of this area, although knowledge of the vertical movements of the tides is now well established. 

1.1 Though both the vertical and horizontal movements are due

to the same cause, it is useless to attempt to predict the characteristics of one from those of the other. 

1.1 Attention is called, however, to the fact that the strong tidal

currents in the various straits are caused by waters piling up at

the entrances to the passages. 

1.1 Caution.—When navigating through this area, one should

bear in mind that it is subject to volcanic eruptions. For instance, in 1922, a submerged volcano was reported 75 miles

WNW of Pulau Sangihe (3°33'N., 125°33'E.), and in 1892, a

tremendous eruption of Awu volcano on Pulau Sangihe occurred. The volcano on Pulau Ruang (2°18'N., 125°22'E.),

one of the southernmost islands of Kepulauan Sangihe, has

often caused great damage.

1.1 Numerous fish traps exist W of Kepulauan Sangihe.

Off-lying Islands

1.2 Pulau Miangas (Palmas) (5°34'N., 126°35'E.), an

isolated island about 75 miles E of Tinaca Point, the S end of

Mindanao, is mostly low and covered with coconut palms, the

land being only about 1.5m above high water (See Pub. 162,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) Philippine Islands). The NE part

rises to a series of hills, the highest of which is 111m high at

Gunung Batu. The NE corner is a sheer steep-to cliff 46m high.

1.2 The island is surrounded by a wide reef extending up to 0.2

mile from the N and E sides. The edge of the reef is very steepto, except on the SE side.

1.2 A break in the reef in front of the village of Miangas on the

SW shore is the best and practically the only landing place for

small boats. The beach near the village is sloping and consists

of sand and coral; there are numerous rocks near the beach.

1.2 The island has been sighted visually from a distance of 25.5

miles and picked up on radar from a distance of 24.5 miles.

1.2 Miangas Light is shown from a white framework tower on

Mount Gunong; a racon is situated at the light. 

1.2 Baronto Island, an islet 12.8m high and covered with coconut palms, is on the fringing reef about 183m SE of the S extremity of Pulau Miangas. Foul ground extends about 183m S

from the islet.

1.2 Tides—Currents.—As far as is known Pulau Miangas is in

an area where a constant SW to SSW current may be expected,

with a last-known maximum velocity of 2.5 knots. A strong S

current splits on the bank close N of the island causing dangerous rips and whirlpools in that vicinity, and a considerable

eddy to the S. The mean range of tide is reported to be 1.1m.

1.2 Anchorage.—A recommended anchorage for moderatesized vessels is within the N extremity of Baronto Island

bearing 248° and the E extremity of Pulau Miangas bearing

023°; this anchorage is clear of strong current, but further out

the velocity is about 3 knots; when anchored in depths of less

than 29m the vessel is clear of the current, but is subject to

eddies and tide rips.

1.2 A more difficult anchorage offering protection from NE

swell is available off the break in the reef in front of the village

of Miangas, about 183m from the boulder line, in 31m. This

anchorage is dangerous because the rapidly shoaling bottom

forces a vessel to lie very close to the reefs.

Kepulauan Nenusa

1.3 Kepulauan Nenusa (Nanusa) (4°45'N., 127°08'E.),

consisting of a group of seven islands, is about 52 miles SSE of

Pulau Miangas and 17 miles NE of Kepulauan Talaud. All of

the islands are hilly and wooded; the only bare spot is the

summit of Pulau Merampit (Marampit), the largest and highest

of the group, rising to 165m. The most conspicuous point is the

106m conical peak on Pulau Kakolotan (Kakaroetan).

1.3 Pulau Merampit, Pulau Karatung, and Pulau Kakolotan are

inhabited. Pulau Intata and Pulau Kakolotan are on the same
4 Sector 1. Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) 

Pub. 164

reef which dries, at the S end of the group. Ondengbui, a flat

bare rocky islet, is on the outer edge of this reef close N of

Pulau Intata. There are also some rocks between Pulau Intata

and Ondengbui. Pulau Malo, a low island SW of Pulau

Kakolotan, is fringed by a wide reef which dries.

1.3 Good drinking water is available only at Pulau Merampit.

1.3 The water around the islands is very clear; the bottom, consisting mostly of sand and stones, can sometimes be seen at a

depth of 29m.

1.3 A light is shown on the N side of Pulau Karatung. It was reported that Pulau Malo was a good radar target at a distance of

19 miles.

1.3 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained by vessels

with local knowledge during the Northwest Monsoon, S and

SE of the village of Karatung on the E side of Pulau Karatung.

During the Southeast Monsoon, there is anchorage off the N

side of that island.

1.3 Vessels with local knowledge may obtain anchorage off the

SW extremity of Pulau Merampit, although the depths are

great and the bottom steep; the depths are too great off the villages of Merampit and Lalune on the S side of the island.

1.3 Good anchorage may also be obtained by vessels with local

knowledge, in a depth of 49m, N of the reefs on the W side of

Pulau Kakolotan. During the Northwest Monsoon, vessels lie

better S of the passage between Pulau Kakolotan and Pulau

Malo, or S of Pulau Malo.

1.3 Caution.—An 8.8m shoal is about 1 mile N of Pulau Karatung, and is well marked by discoloration under favorable conditions. Napu Arampua (Napoe Arampoea), a 3m shoal, is 4

miles S of Pulau Karatung. The passage between Pulau Kakolotan and Pulau Malo is encumbered with reefs and should not

be used.

1.3 A shoal, with a depth of 28m, lies about 2 miles S of Pulau

Kakolotan.

Kepulauan Talaud

1.4 Kepulauan Talaud (4°08'N., 126°46'E.) consists of

Pulau Karakelong, Pulau Salebabu, and Pulau Kaburuang, all

thickly wooded and inhabited islands, about 20 miles SW of

Kepulauan Nenusa. The coasts are mostly steep and rocky,

interrupted in places by small sandy beaches or marshy flats.

1.4 The villages on these islands are almost exclusively on the

coast. Agriculture, coconut cultivation, and fishing are the

main industries. Copra and lumber are exported.

1.4 Tanjung Ambora-besar (4°33'N., 126°45'E.), marked by a

light, shown at an elevation of 42m, and on which a conspicuous tree was reported to stand, is the N extremity of Pulau

Karakelong, the largest and northernmost of the group. In the

N and wider half there is a ridge running in a N-S direction,

with Gunung Duata, the summit 680m high, about 15 miles

from Tanjung Ambora-besar, and Berawang, 480m high and

prominent, about 7 miles from the same point. The island’s

coasts are generally steep-to, except on the S side, where a

bank encumbered by reefs joins it to Pulau Salebabu. The

coastal reef is mostly narrow and steep-to; the least swell

causes heavy breakers on it.

1.4 Teluk Esang (4°28'N., 126°43'E.), about 4.75 miles SSW of

Tanjung Ambora-besar, has low shores and a village at its

head. Good anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 46m,

with the N entrance point of the bay bearing 002°, at a distance

of 0.8 mile.

1.4 Batumbalango Bay, about 5 miles SSW of Teluk Esang,

affords anchorage on its N side, in a depth of about 31m.

1.4 Fair anchorage is also available at Meriri Bay, close S of

Teluk Esang, and in Teluk Ambia, close N of Batumbalango

Bay.

1.4 Nusa Dolong, an islet, is about 0.75 mile offshore close NW

of Tanjong Labo, about 6 miles S of Batumbalango Bay, near

the middle of the W coast. A prominent white tombstone is on

the islet. Nusa Topor, another islet, is about 1 mile SSE of Nusa

Dolong. Reefs extend from both of these islets, and a 1.8m

shoal is about 0.3 mile WSW of Nusa Topor.

1.5 Beo (4°14'N., 126°47'E.) (World Port Index No.

52480), at the S end of Teluk Beo, about midway along the W

coast of Pulau Karakelong, is the principal settlement of the island.

1.5 A light is shown from a pole 118m NW of the village flagstaff. A conspicuous tree stands on the coast about 0.25 mile

SW of Beo and is visible from seaward.

1.5 A pier, about 130m long, which is almost dry at HW, extends

from the shore at the village. A coral and mud bank is W of the

pier and two detached reefs are on the coastal bank, 0.75 mile

and 1.5 miles, respectively, NNW of the pier.

1.5 Recommended anchorage is about 1 mile NW of the jetty.

Anchorage may also be obtained, in 69m, on a line with the

prolongation of the pier and the ascending road behind it, but

the bottom is very steep. Both of these anchorages are exposed

from SW through NW.

1.5 On the N coast, a serviceable anchorage is off Kampung

Mamahan in a small cove close E of Tanjung Ambora-besar.

With local knowledge, vessels can anchor in Bambung Bay,

entered close SW of Tanjung Masareh.

1.5 On the E coast anchorages can be found at Gemeh and

Arangkaa, 5 miles and 6.5 miles, respectively, ESE of Tanjung

Ambora-besar. Amat village and Toa Batu village, 3 miles and

6 miles, respectively, S of Arangkaa, also offer anchorage.

1.6 Selat Lirung (3°58'N., 126°41'E.), the strait separating Pulau Karakelong and Pulau Salebabu, is 1.5 miles wide

at its narrowest point.

1.6 Anchorage.—The only safe year-round anchorage is off

Kampung Kiama, close E of Tanjung Dapapat. A 3m shoal is

about 1 mile offshore of this anchorage.

1.6 Caution.—Several shoals and two islets, Sara-kechil and

Sara-besar, are in the S part of Selat Lirung. Napu Mapao, a

7.6m shoal, is about 2 miles NW of Sara-kechil. Several other

shoals of 7 to 18m are between Napu Mapao and Sara-kechil.

Shoal patches of 2.7 to 7.8m extend about 1.5 miles NE from

Sara-besar. A 3m shoal is about 0.5 mile off the S side of Pulau

Karakelong and about 2.75 miles NNE of Sara-kechil.

1.6 A disturbed sea is usually N of the N entrance to the strait,

even when it is calm elsewhere.

1.7 Pulau Salebabu (3°56'N., 126°40'E.) about 15 miles

long, is close SW of Pulau Karakelong. A mountain ridge runs

through the entire length of the island with several prominent

peaks; Ajambanna, which rises to 366m is the highest and is in

the middle of the island. This area is readily recognized by its
Sector 1. Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) 5

Pub. 164

saddle-like formation. It is surrounded by a very narrow shore

reef, which widens out somewhat at the N end and on the S

half of the E coast.

1.7 The W coast is rocky and steep with projecting rocky points.

The villages on the island lie on the E coast.

1.7 Kampung Lirung (3°56'N., 126°42'E.) is on the NE coast

of Pulau Salebabu. Good anchorage, safe during both monsoons, can be obtained off the town, in a depth of about 29m,

with the flagstaff of the village bearing 214°. The best landing,

free of rocks, is on the sandy beach near the flagstaff. 

1.7 Tides—Currents.—At Selat Lirung there is both a diurnal

and a semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates. Neither the

spring highs nor the spring lows of the two tides coincide. The

highest water level occurs in April or May and in October or

November; the lowest water level occurs in January or February and in July or August. The maximum rise and fall that can

be expected are, respectively, about 0.9 above and 0.9m below

mean sea level.

1.7 The currents caused by the semidiurnal tides set NW along

the coast around HW and SW around the coast around LW;

they can attain a velocity of 2 to 3 knots.

1.7 Anchorage.—Salebabu Anchorage is in a small bay about

4.5 miles S of Kampung Lirung. The greater part of the bay is

encumbered by a reef that extends from the shores on all sides.

Limited anchorage is in a clear space in the middle. Vessels can

also anchor off the bay, in 29 to 49m, with Kampung Salebabu,

at the NW corner of the bay, bearing about 304°. This is clear

of the shoals fronting the shores in the approach to the bay.

With E and SE winds some shelter is obtained from Pulau

Kaburuang, and complete shelter is obtained during the North

Monsoon.

1.7 During NE winds. vessels will find anchorage in Teluk

Sereh, at the village of Sereh in the middle of the W coast of

Pulau Salebabu; however, the depths here are 49 to 101m.

1.7 Anchorage is also available off the village of Kampung

Kalongan on the W side of Pulau Salebabu, about 1.25 miles

SE of Tanjung Salonggan, the N extremity of the island. This

anchorage has depths of 40 to 49m, but it is only sheltered

from E winds. A 5m shoal is 0.35 mile W of the rocky point N

of the village.

1.8 Selat Kaburuang (3°50'N., 126°43'E.), between

Pulau Salebabu and Pulau Kabruang, is about 2.25 miles wide

at its narrowest part and is clear except for a 4m shoal 1.25

miles WSW of the N end of Pulau Kaburuang.

1.8 Tides—Currents.—Strong currents have been experienced

in Selat Kaburuang.

1.8 Pulau Kaburuang (3°47'N., 126°47'E.), the southernmost

island of the group, is 8.5 miles long and has two conspicuous

summits, Gunung Padian, 405m high, and Gunung Towoa

481m high. The coast is generally rocky, but broken in places

by sandy beaches. The coastal reef is narrow and steep-to. A

4m patch lies 1.25 miles WSW of the N point of the island; a

2.7m shoal is close off Kampung Peret, a village 1.25 miles

NW of the S end of the island.

1.8 Anchorage.—While there are no recommended anchorages

along the coast of this island, vessels can find anchorage in

calm weather, but depths of more than 82m will be found more

than 91m from the edge of the coastal reef.

1.8 Napu Mbalu (Saaru) (Northumberland Reef), 6 miles SSE of

Pulau Kaburuang, is a small islet about 1.8m high composed of

coral. It is surrounded by a reef with drying rocks. A conspicuous stranded wreck is situated on the islet. A vessel was

reported (2004) sunk in position 3°43.0'N, 126°47.0'E, approximately halfway between Napu Mbalu and Pulau Kaburuang.

Kepulauan Kawio

1.9 Kepulauan Kawio (4°35'N., 125°35'E.), consisting

of Pulau Marore, Pulau Kawio, Pulau Kemboling, Pulau

Memanuk, Pulau Matutuang, Pulau Kawalusu, and Pulau

Dumarehe, lies between 4°13'N and 4°45'N, and between

125°19'E and 125°42'E. Pulau Marore, Pulau Kawio, Pulau

Kemboling, and Pulau Kawalusu are inhabited; the others are

visited from time to time by copra-gatherers or fishermen. The

inhabitants are engaged mainly in fishing and agriculture.

1.9 Tides—Currents.—During October and November, a SSW

current will be experienced in the vicinity of the islands. The

velocity, but not the direction of the current, is affected by the

tides. The velocity varies between 0.5 and 2.5 knots near the

islands.

1.9 Caution.—Most of the islands are surrounded by fringing

reefs. Pulau Marore and Pulau Kawalusu appear to be steep-to

in places.

1.10 Pulau Marore (4°44'N., 125°29'E.), the northernmost

island of the group, is 140m high at its N end and appears as

two islets when approached from E. A light with a racon is

shown at an elevation of 180m on the summit of the island.

Batu Bawaikang, four rocks, the westernmost of which is 35m

high, are close off the N point of the island. Anchorage can be

obtained off a small village at the SW end, but tidal currents

may be troublesome.

1.10 Pulau Kawio and Pulau Kemboling, 5 miles SW of Pulau

Marore, are less than 0.25 mile apart and are connected by a

drying coral reef. Pulau Kemboling is 108m high.

1.10 Tides—Currents.—Strong tidal currents are in the vicinity

of the islands.

1.10 Anchorage.—Anchorage has been found on the W side of

the islands, W of the opening between the two, in 37m, coral,

with the SW point of Pulau Kemboling bearing 155° and the W

point of Pulau Kawio bearing 004°. Anchorage has also been

found, in 27m, coral and coral sand, with the SW point of

Pulau Kemboling bearing 164° and the W point of Pulau

Kawio 357°. On the E side of the islands there is an anchorage,

in 55m, with the N point of Pulau Kemboling bearing 281° and

the S point of Pulau Kawio 296°.

1.11 Marie Reef (Ehise), 10 miles E of Pulau Kemboling,

is a large coral reef with a sandy patch always above-water.

The height and extent of this patch change with prevailing

winds and currents. Some rocks are on the NW side of the reef.

Pulau Memanuk (Pulau Memanoek) (4°36'N., 125°38'E.),

62m high and covered with palm trees, is 12 miles ESE of

Pulau Kemboling. The depths are very irregular in the vicinity

of the island. A shoal with a least depth of 11m is about 1.25

miles E of the island. A 9m shoal and a shoal with a least depth

of 4m are 1 mile and 2 miles, respectively, S of the island.
6 Sector 1. Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) 

Pub. 164

Pulau Matutuang (Pulau Matoetoeng) (4°27'N., 125°42'E.),

about 10 miles SSE of Pulau Memanuk, is 67m high, flattopped, and covered with coconut palms. There is a fringing

reef; two rocks are off the NW end of the island, outside of the

reef.

1.11 Tides—Currents.—Strong tidal currents are in the vicinity

of Pulau Matutuang.

1.11 Anchorage may be found, in 46m, off the E side of the island, staying clear of the coastal reef at the SE point, where

shoal water extends for a considerable distance off.

1.12 Pulau Dumarehe (Doembarehe) (4°14'N., 125°42'E.)

12 miles S of Pulau Matutuang, is a 45m high rocky islet covered with vegetation.

1.12 Anchorage may be found, in a depth of 69m, S of the islet,

but currents may be strong. Shoals of 10 to 20m are 6 to 10

miles SSE of the islet. A rock standing high out of the water is

SE of the islet. The reef on the S side of the islet appeared to

extend about 0.25 mile off. A small tree-covered islet lies close

W of Pulau Dumarehe.

Pulau Kawalusu (Pulau Kawaloesoe) (4°14'N., 125°20'E.),

22.5 miles W of Pulau Dumarehe, is 285m high. A light is

shown from the island. 

Louise Reef (Napo Taroare) (4°03'N., 125°21'E.) is about 11

miles S of Pulau Kawalusu and has a least depth of 11m. A

considerable current which gives rise to a violent sea sets

across the reef and it should be avoided.

Kepulauan Sangihe

1.13 Kepulauan Sangihe (Kepulauan Sangir), a group of

islands lying between 2°N and 4°N, and between 125°E and

126°E, include Pulau Sangihe, the largest island and all the

islands S of it to and including Pulau Biaro, about 76 miles S.

They are heavily wooded and mountainous, except on places

along the coast where they are low and flat; some marshes are

on Pulau Sangihe. Tuhana, on Pulau Sangihe, is the principal

town. Copra is the main export. There are no roads; communication between villages is by boat.

Islands and Dangers North and Northeast of

Sangihe

1.14 Pulau Lipang (3°55'N., 125°23'E.), about 10 miles N

of Pulau Sangihe, is 180m high and easily recognized from all

sides by its pointed summit which is covered with coconut

palms. Except for the N point, the island is reef-fringed for

distances of about 0.3 mile offshore. A 12m shoal is about 0.4

mile ENE of the steep N point of the island.

1.14 Anchorage may be found N of the island, or off a village

near a beach on the W side, where the bottom is steep and the

water deep. The currents here are irregular. A better place is N

of the island, but anchorage there is further offshore.

Pulau Buang (Pulau Boeang) (3°53'N., 125°43'E.), 20 miles

E of Pulau Lipang and covered with coconut palms, is the

northernmost of a chain of islands extending 7 miles S; it is

54m high. A light is shown from Boeang. Salehe, an islet, is

close N of Pulau Buang. Bowone Reef, with a least depth of

4m, is about 1.5 miles W of Salehe.

1.14 Pulau Melihang and Pulau Mekohahe, about 3.25 and 4

miles, respectively, SSE of Pulau Buang, are barren rocks. A

6.9m shoal is about 1.75 miles NW of Pulau Melihang, and a

bare rock is about 1 mile N. An extensive reef is close S of

Pulau Mekohahe. Pulau Balontohe, 50m high and Inis, 28m

high, are steep rocks about 2.25 miles SSE and 3.5 miles S,

respectively, of Pulau Mekohahe. This chain of islands is

uninhabited. Between and near the chain are several reefs and

shoals; therefore, navigation through the group is not advised.

1.15 Pulau-pulau Toade (Kepulauan Toade) (3°46'N.,

125°34'E.), consisting of two large inhabited islands and two

small islets, lie about 8 miles off the NE side of Pulau Sangihe.

The islands are all covered with coconut palms.

1.15 Pulau Manipa, the SW island, is 300m high. A coastal reef,

which dries, extends about 183m offshore. Anchorage may be

obtained off the S side of the island, in a depth of about 80m,

with the SE extremity of the island bearing 061°, at a distance

of 0.3 mile.

1.15 Pulau Boekide, located NE of Pulau Manipa, is 241m high.

Anchorage may be obtained 0.3 mile SE of the reef which extends from the SE extremity of the island, but the currents are

rather strong there. A 4.6m shoal lies about 1.75 miles ESE of

the SE extremity of the island.

1.15 Tides—Currents.—During November and December, the

general current between and E of the islands of Pulau-pulau

Toade have been observed to flow at a velocity of 1 to 2.5 knots

and to vary in direction by several points.

Pulau Sangihe 

1.16 Pulau Sangihe (Pulau Sangir) (3°33'N., 125°33'E.),

the largest island of Kepulauan Sangihe, is covered with coconut palms and is mountainous. Gunung Awu (Gunung Awoe),

near its N end, is an active volcano 1,359m high; earthquakes

occur frequently. The coast varies greatly; it is steep and rocky

in places and low and marshy in others. Fishing with the use of

torches at night is carried out in the area, and as a result numerous lights may be seen at night during calm weather.

1.16 Tides—Currents.—A 2 knot current has been experienced

along the W coast outside of the bays. Tide rips have been

observed off the NW end of Pulau Sangihe.

1.16 Caution.—A large area of fish havens, lying approximately

20 miles W of Pulau Sangihe and Pulau Siau, extends up to 35

miles W and in a N-S direction for 70 miles. 

1.17 North and E coasts of Pulau Sangihe.—The N coast

of the island between Tanjung Salimar and Tanjung Peliang, 8

miles SW, slopes gradually toward the interior, except at the

stretch near the villages of Kalasuga and Sawang, where it is

steep and rocky. The depths along this coast permit anchoring

almost anywhere, but there is no shelter.

1.17 Anchorage can be obtained, in 49 to 70m, 0.15 mile offshore

abreast of Sawang, which is not visible from seaward.

1.17 Tabukan (Taboekan), close SE of Tanjung Peliang, affords

anchorage, in 26 to 35m, with the flag pole at the village

bearing 236°. The depths outside the 50m curve increase rapidly, but within that curve they decrease gradually toward the

reefs and the shore. The roads are open from N through E to

SE.
Sector 1. Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) 7

Pub. 164

1.17 Teluk Petaar (3°39'N., 125°34'E.) is entered between

Tanjung Buhiase, its SE entrance point, and an unnamed point

about 0.5 mile further NW. These entrance points are marked

by beacons. A 222° range, consisting of beacons each in the

form of a cross, leads into the bay. A light is shown from the

village of Peta at the head of the bay. The bay affords room for

one vessel only, up to 119m long. The bay is narrow between

the shore reefs, but the depths shoal gradually.

1.17 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 24m, in the inner part

of the bay, where they can run a mooring line to an iron ring

near a warehouse on the shore. This must be done quickly as

strong winds and currents can be expected and there is the

danger of drifting onto the shore reef.

1.17 Large vessels may anchor, in about 77m, coral, on the range

and about 1 mile from the front range beacon mentioned above.

The holding ground is not good, however, and the currents,

which are semidiurnal, set SE across the entrance at the ebb at

a velocity of 3 knots. The flood current sets NW and it is

negligible.

1.18 Peta (3°39'N., 125°34'E.) (World Port Index No.

52450), at the head of Teluk Peta, has a postal substation.

Cargo is loaded from surf-lighters, but the work may be

impeded by swell.

1.18 Neither fresh water nor stores are available.

1.18 Teluk Sensong (3°38'N., 125°35'E.) lies 2.5 miles SSE of

Teluk Peta. The shores are fringed by a reef which makes

landing difficult.

1.18 Tanjung Lehe (3°37'N., 125°35'E.) lies about 1.5 miles SE

of Teluk Sensong. Sarahoengoe, an above-water rock, stands

on a reef about 1 mile S of the point.

Teluk Talengan (Teluk Mioeloe) (3°35'N., 125°34'E.) is

entered about 2 miles S of Tanjung Lehe. Anchorage may be

obtained, in depths of 55 to 64m. The sea is usually calm here,

although landing is difficult because of the shore reef, mud,

and mangroves.

Teluk Kuma (Teluk Koema) (3°34'N., 125°36'E.) affords

good anchorage, in 13.7m, with the S entrance point bearing

134° and the center of the village bearing 223°. There is much

surf on the beach during the North Monsoon.

1.18 Teluk Kulur (Teluk Koeloer), 1 mile further to the SE,

affords anchorage, in depths of 20 to 34m, in its outer part. The

village of Kulur (Koeloer), at the head of the bay, is difficult to

reach because of the broad coastal reef on which a heavy surf

may arise.

1.19 Teluk Manalu (Menaloe Bay) (3°32'N., 125°38'E.)

(World Port Index No. 52460), the bay formed by Lebessan,

Pulau Batuwingkong, and Pulau Tehang, is nearly always calm

and is entered between Tanjung Pako, the SE entrance point of

Teluk Kulur, and Pulau Batuwingkong. Pulau Batuwingkong is

connected to Tanjung Mahema, the N extremity of Lebessan,

by a drying reef. The anchorage in the bay is approached on

either side of Pulau Tehang. The channel between Pulau

Tehang and Pulau Batuwingkong is about 0.5 mile wide between the reefs on either side, with a least known depth of

8.5m in the middle. During the Northwest Monsoon season a

heavy swell is in this channel and its use is not recommended.

A 7.8m shoal is about 1 mile ESE of Tanjung Pako and a detached rock, 0.7 mile further SE, dries. Batu Malitehang, a reef

which dries, is near the middle of the bay.

1.19 Tides—Currents.—At Teluk Manalu, there is both a

diurnal and a semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates. The

spring highs of the two tides coincide. The highest water level

occurs in May and November. The maximum rise and fall that

can be expected are, respectively, about 1.3m above and 0.9m

below mean sea level.

1.19 The coast S of Lebessan (3°30'N., 125°40'E.) is very high,

rocky, and oddly shaped.

1.19 The strait between Pulau Sangihe and Pulau Beng-darat, S of

Lebessan, is broad and deep, but a 12.8m shoal, marked by

eddies, is in mid-channel. A coral reef with depths of 6m on its

outer ends extends out about 0.75 mile S from the S extremity

of Pulau Beng-darat. The 129m summit of Pulau Batuwingkong (Batoe Wingkong) and the coastal cliff at Lebessan in

range 346° leads through the strait. A deep passage is between

Pulau Beng-darat and Pulau Beng-laut; the shore reefs are

easily recognized. Many bare rocks are N and E of Pulau

Beng-laut (Beng Laoet).

1.19 A current with a velocity of 3 knots may be experienced in

the strait between Pulau Sangihe and Pulau Beng-darat; it sets

N with the flood and S with the ebb.

1.19 Anchorage.—A hill, 149m high, and another, 82m high, are

0.7 mile SW and 0.9 mile WSW, respectively, of Batu Malitehang. Anchorage can be taken, in 40 to 49m, mud, with the

149m hill bearing 180° and the 82m hill bearing 260°.

1.20 Dane (3°26'N., 125°41'E.), a steep rocky islet with a

very narrow coastal reef, is S of the above strait. A deep passage separates it from Pulau Sangihe.

1.20 Anchorage.—Off the village of Salurang (Saloerang), on

the coast of S of Lebessan, there is anchorage, in 55m, with the

SW point of Pulau Beng-darat bearing 124°, and white rocks N

of Pulau Beng-laut bearing 069°, but this location is rather

close to the reef. Landing is difficult during the Northwest

Monsoon because the coastal reef dries at that time.

1.21 South and W coasts of Pulau Sangihe.—Pulau

Lenggis (3°23'N., 125°38'E.), an islet, 110m high, is separated

from Pulau Sangihe by a narrow passage, navigable only by

native canoes at HW.

1.21 Teluk Ngalipaeng, W of Pulau Lenggis, is calm only during

the North Monsoon. Anchorage can be obtained, in 86m. The

village of Kampung Ngalipaeng is at the head of the bay, off

which is a wide shore reef.

Pulau Batunderang (Pulau Batoenderang) (3°22'N.,

125°37'E.), an island, 187m high, is W of Teluk Ngalipaeng

and is separated from the S extremity of Pulau Sangihe by a

passage which dries.

1.21 Pulau Bebalang (3°20'N., 125°34'E.), an island about 2

miles W of Pulau Batunderang, is 131m high. A 5.9m shoal is

about 1 mile SE of the island. A navigable channel is between

the island and Pulau Sangihe. Anchorage can be taken, in 80m,

about 0.25 mile off the village of Kampung Bebalang on the N

shore of the island, with the flagstaff bearing 146°.

1.21 Two islets, Pulau Mendako (Mendakoe), 79m high, and

Pulau Dakupang (Dakoepang), are on a reef N of Pulau Bebalang. A rock, awash, is 0.6 mile W of Pulau Dakupang; an 11m

shoal is about 1 mile SW of Pulau Mendaku.
8 Sector 1. Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) 

Pub. 164

1.21 The village of Kampung Lapango lies on the coast of Pulau

Sangihe E of Tanjung Boewoe (3°23'N., 125°34'E.). Anchorage can be obtained, in about 55m, about 91m off the drying

reef with the middle of the village of Kampung Lapango bearing 052°. Local knowledge is necessary.

1.22 Teluk Dago (3°26'N., 125°33'E.) (World Port Index

No. 52420) is entered between Tanjung Toade Manandu

(Manandoe) and Pulau Mahumu (Mahoemoe). Tandjung Toade

Manandu is rocky and has a small island W of it. A light is

shown from Toade Manandoe. Pulau Mahuma, with a summit

241m high, is a hilly island separated from Pulau Sangihe by a

channel that is navigable only by small native canoes. Inside

Teluk Dago, it is always calm E of Sama, a small islet off the

shore of the bay.

1.22 Anchorage sheltered from all but SW winds may be obtained, in about 49m, with Sama bearing 262°. At Dago, close

NE of Sama, a small mole extends out across the drying shore

reef. A flagstaff is at the foot of the mole. The reef at the head

of the bay and along the N shore of the bay occasionally dries

out for a distance of about 0.25 mile.

1.22 In the bight at the village of Kalinda, about 2 miles N of

Teluk Dago, the depths are too great and the bottom too steep

for anchorage.

1.23 Teluk Tamako (3°27'N., 125°30'E.) affords anchorage in front of the village of Tamako. Anchorage should be in

55m or more in about the middle of the bay with the two points

on the coast NW, Tanjung Kapehetang and Tanjung Lelapide,

in line. the holding ground is poor, however, and the main

engines should be kept ready for use. 

1.23 A light is shown from a beacon in Tamako about 0.15 mile

NNW of the pilot station.

1.23 Teluk Manganitu (3°34'N., 125°30'E.) is a bay bordered by

coconut palm covered hills 198 to 244m high. A shore reef

extends about 0.5 mile off the S part of the bay. A 2.3m shoal,

often marked by discoloration is 0.75 mile SSE of Tanjung

Kalehangeng. Safe anchorage is in the bay, in 53m, with Tanjung Totone bearing N and the small island of Bukide

(Boekide) bearing E, but W and S winds can be troublesome.

1.23 The coast between Teluk Manganitu and Teluk Tahuna is

steep, rocky, and fringed by a drying reef in several places.

Teluk Tahuna (3°36'N., 125°29'E.), is about 0.5 mile wide

and extends about 1.5 miles inland. Except for the shore reef

on the S side and the shore bank at the NE corner, there are no

dangers in the bay, so it can be entered even at night in clear

weather. A 520m hill close S of the bay is conspicuous and a

small white mosque with a red roof at the head of the bay is

prominent.

1.23 A light shows at a height from 130m near the S entrance

point of the bay.

1.24 Tahuna (3°37'40"N., 125°29'25"E.) (World Port

Index No. 52440) is the principal village of Kepulauan

Sangihe. A custom house is at the head of the pier. Copra is the

chief export. A light is shown from an iron support at the foot

of the pier when vessels are expected.

1.24 There is a pier, 29m long, with a depth of 3.1m alongside.

Large vessels, up to 70m long, remain at anchor and unload

into barges.

1.24 Tides—Currents.—There is both a diurnal and a semidiurnal tide in the bay, but the latter predominates. The spring

highs of the two tides coincide. The highest water level occurs

in May and November. The maximum rise and fall that can be

expected are, respectively, about 1.1m above and 0.8m below

mean sea level.

1.24 Anchorage can be taken off the village, in about 35 to 55m,

with the pier light bearing 355°. The holding ground is poor,

however, and the main engines should be kept ready for use. It

is usually calm, but during the North Monsoon, W winds may

spring up and last from 1 to 4 days; they are not dangerous to

vessels but cause much surf on the beach. The W winds, which

occur at other times of the year, as well as the often strong SW

winds, are of shorter duration and lesser intensity, but they may

hinder loading or unloading.

1.24 From Teluk Tahuna to about 1 miles S of Tanjung Dodah, the

land slopes gradually down to the shore with sand and stone

beaches, and then to Tanjung Salimar the coast is steep and

rocky. No dangers have been seen along this part of the coast.

The Karakitang Islands 

1.25 The Karakitang Islands (3°10'N., 125°29'E.) is a

collective name for the smaller islands and rocks lying between

Pulau Sangihe and Pulau Siau. Only Pulau Kalama, Pulau

Karakitang and Pulau Para are inhabited. When in this area, the

caution note in paragraph 1.1 regarding volcanic activity

should be borne in mind. The rocks which are off the W side of

Pulau Mahengetang are the result of an eruption in 1919.

According to the inhabitants, a column of water periodically

spouts high into the air.

1.25 The passage between Pulau Sangihe and this group of

islands, as well as the passage between Pulau Siau and the

group, is clear of dangers. The chart is the best guide for the

location of the various islands and the dangers near them.

1.25 Pulau Kalama (3°15'N., 125°27'E.), lying about 10 miles

SW of Pulau Batunderang, previously described in paragraph

1.21, is 362m high. Anchorage may be obtained S of a village

on the SW side of the island, in a depth of about 60m, about

0.15 mile offshore. The coastal reef here extends about 91m

offshore. A considerable current has been noticed near the

anchorage.

1.26 Pulau Karakitang (3°10'N., 125°31'E.), 249m high,

lies about 3.25 miles SE of Pulau Kalama. Teluk Behongang, a

bay on the N side of Pulau Karakitang extends halfway into the

island. It affords sheltered anchorage, in 80m, in front of the

village of Behongang. The extremities of the shore reefs are

easily distinguished. A stone mole with wooden superstructure

has a depth of 2m alongside and is a good landing place for

boats.

1.26 Pulau Mehengetang, 139m high, lies about 6 miles S of

Pulau Kalama. There is an islet close W, and three low rocks

within 0.25 mile WNW of the island. A village, with a flagstaff, is on the SW side of the island. Anchorage may be obtained off the village, in a depth of 37m, with a vegetation

covered islet on the reef bearing 339°, distant 0.3 mile.

1.26 Caution.—The whole area W and S of the island is reported

to be disturbed by eddies and tide rips.
Sector 1. Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) 9

Pub. 164

1.27 Pulau Para (3°05'N., 125°30'E.), along with Pulau

Siha, Pulau Salangkere, and Pualu Nitoe, lie in a group close

together about 9 miles SSE of Pulau Kalama. Anchorage may

be obtained, in 60m, 0.2 mile off the village on the SW point of

Pulau Para, with vegetation-covered rocks on the W coast N of

the inlet in range with the highest point of Pulau Salengkere

and the rocky point S of the village bearing about ESE. Local

knowledge is necessary. A strong current between Pulau Para

and Pulau Nitu is W of this anchorage.

1.27 The channel between the islands of Pulau Para, Pulau

Salengkere, and Pulau Siha should be navigated only by small

native canoes, but the area between these three islands and

Pulau Nitu is apparently deep and clear.

Pulau-pulau Nenoeng (Pulau-pulau Nenong) (3°04'N.,

125°40'E.), about 18 miles SE of Pulau Kalama, consists of a

49m high islet, with some above-water rocks lying about 0.25

mile N and S of it. A submerged rock lies about 1 mile SSE of

the islet. A coral bank, with a depth of 14.6m, often marked by

breakers and tide rips, lies 4 miles SW of the islet.

Pulau-pulau Sanggeluhang (Pulau-pulau Sanggeloehang)

(2°57'N., 125°29'E.), 80m high, with an islet 77m high on the

same reef close S, is 7 miles SSW of Pulau Para. Pulau

Bawondeke (Bowondeke), 56m high, is 1.5 miles W of Pulau

Sanggeluhang. A shoal with a least depth of 5m is about 0.5

mile NW of Pulau Sanggeluhang.

1.27 Tides—Currents.—An E set at the rate of 1.5 to 2.25 knots

has been experienced between Pulau Sanggeluhang and Pulau

Tahulandang (2°21'N., 125°22'E.), about 38 miles S.

Pulau Siau and Off-lying Islands

1.28 Pulau Siau (2°43'N., 125°22'E.), locally known as

Karang Etang, meaning "highest island", is in general high

with steep coasts and no beaches or landing places except in

the bight on the E coast. The island is covered with coconut

palms, out of which rise several jungle-covered conical peaks.

An exception to this is the bare peak of the volcano Gunung

Api, last reported active in May 1971. This volcano is 1,827m

high and is the highest point on the island.

1.28 The island is densely populated. Many of the inhabitants are

fishermen who also farm. There are coconut and nutmeg plantations.

1.29 Ulu (2°44'N., 125°25'E.) is at the N part of Ulu Road.

There is a pier at the village from which a light is shown on the

arrival of vessels. 

1.29 Anchorage can be obtained 0.15 mile offshore, in 80m, with

the charted conspicuous white pillar on the shore bearing N.

The bottom is very steep here, however, and it is advisable to

lay out a hawser to the shore. During heavy squalls anchorage

may also be found, in 48m, with the same white pillar bearing

010° and the flagstaff bearing 296°; a hawser to the shore

should not be necessary. From the beginning of January until

the middle of April this anchorage is not safe because of NE

and E winds. During that time and during the South Monsoon,

anchorage off the village of Sawang, 3.5 miles S, is preferred;

here the bottom is not so steep.

1.29 Elsewhere on Pulau Siau anchorage is off Ondong, at about

the middle of the W coast, in 101m, very close but somewhat to

the S of the shore reef. Anchorage will also be found, in a

depth of 84m, about 0.1 mile offshore with the center of the

village bearing 034°.

1.29 Pulau Pahepa, Pulau Gunatin, and Pulau Mahoro are E of the

S part of Pulau Siau. The channel between Pulau Siau and hilly

Pulau Pahepa is clear and has a least depth of 37m, and the

shore reefs are well-marked by discoloration. There is anchorage here with good holding ground, but the currents may attain

a velocity of 2.5 knots and eddies may be encountered. Off the

village on the W side of Pulau Pahepa there is anchorage with

shelter during the entire year. A drying reef connects Pulau

Pahepa with rocky Pulau Gunatin, the N side of which should

be given a wide berth. Pulau Mahoro, steep, rocky, and marked

by a light, 80m high, is E of Pulau Pahepa. There are three

small islets between the two. Anchorage is not recommended

near the islets because of reefs and strong currents, but between

the islets and Pulau Pahepa there is a limited area where

anchorage is possible. Laweang is 61m high and the southernmost of the islets. A coral reef with a depth of 0.3m extends

0.5 mile S; with a heavy swell the reef may uncover at LW.

1.30 Pulau Makalehi (2°44'N., 125°10'E.), an isolated

islet 228m high, is about 11 miles W of Pulau Siau. The islet is

covered with vegetation. The village of Makalehi is on a small

bay on the SW side of the islet. The bay is obstructed by reefs

and dries. The islet was reported to be a good radar target at a

distance of 23 miles.

Islands South of Pulau Siau

1.31 Pulau Tahulandang (2°21'N., 125°22'E.), about 15

miles S of Pulau Siau, is mountainous and rises to an elevation

of 805m. Its summit is the highest point of a crater which is

broken on the NNW side forming Minangan Bay. In the middle

of this crater there is an extinct volcano which is steep on all

sides. The S and E coasts are very steep-to. The large coastal

reef, which is not well marked by discoloration, extends 0.76

mile from the W end of the island. The channel between this

reef and the reef at Pulau Pasige is deep and clear. The W point

of Pulau Ruang bearing 180° will lead through this channel

when it is difficult to identify the reefs. There are coconut

plantations on the island. It is well populated and large trading

vessels are built here.

1.31 A light is shown from a white column near the flag pole at

the village of Tahulandang (Boehias), on the SW side of the

island. Vessels call at the villages.

1.31 Anchorage.—The coast reef is very narrow near the light at

Tuhulandang, and vessels may anchor close off it, in 80m.

Further to the NW there is anchorage, in 69m, further from the

reef. The currents which set through the narrows between

Pulau Tahulandang and Pulau Ruang are less troublesome at

the latter anchorage. When the sea is rough, anchorage may be

taken on the N side of Pulau Ruang, in 49 to 80m, laying out a

hawser to the shore.

1.31 Off the village of Haas, on the S side of the island, there is

anchorage, in 48m, about 0.2 mile offshore. From this anchorage the NE point of Pulau Biaro bears 181°, the road in the village bears 013° and the point to the E bears 083°. Local knowledge is necessary. It is an open roadstead and a fairly strong

current is sometimes experienced.
10 Sector 1. Islands between Mindanao and Sulawesi (Celebes) 

Pub. 164

1.31 On the N side of the island there is anchorage in Minangan

Bay, near the village of Minangan. Local knowledge is necessary. It is very deep here, but the shore reef is very narrow or

non-existent so that the shore can be approached closely. It is

well-sheltered during the South Monsoon and in the transition

periods between monsoons.

1.32 Pulau Ruang (Pulau Roeng) (2°18'N., 125°22'E.),

close SW of Pulau Tahulandang, consists entirely of an active

volcano 731m high. The summit is on the E side of the crater

and is easily recognized by several sharp rocky points. At a

distance, the volcano has the appearance of a table mountain

with steep sides. The last eruption occurred in 1904. A coral

reef extending from the W end of the island is the only coastal

reef. There are few inhabitants. 

1.32 The passage between Pulau Ruang and Pulau Tahulandang is

0.5 mile wide, but its use is not recommended because of

strong tidal currents which set SE with the flood and NW with

the ebb. A 1.8m midchannel shoal is at the E entrance.

1.32 Pulau Pasige (2°21'N., 125°19'E.), 4.5 miles W of Pulau

Tahulandang, is low, covered with mangrove, and uninhabited.

It is on the W end of an extensive drying reef which is

generally marked by breakers, even at HW. A light is shown

from the W side of the island.

1.33 Pulau Biaro (2°06'N., 125°23'E.), an inhabited island

10 miles S of Pulau Ruang, is the southernmost island of

Kepulauan Sangihe. It is hilly and has a very conspicuous

peak, Bukide (Boekide), 401m high on its E side. Toendoengkoehan is a small islet, 54m high, off the SW point of the island. The low NW point, where a 9m rock stands, should be

given a berth of 1.5 miles. The outermost shoal, with a depth of

5.8m, is about 1 mile NW of the point; the currents are strong

over the shoals in this vicinity. Another pillar-like rock stands

near Tanjung Meoh, the NE point of the island. From this point

a submerged ridge extends 1.5 miles N with a depth of 35m at

its outer end. Currents are strong over this ridge. A berth of at

least 0.5 mile should be given the E coast to clear several

offshore dangers close to the shore.

1.33 Anchorage can only be found on the N and NE sides of the

island. The bay on the N side should be approached with

caution because the depths decrease suddenly and the shore

reef cannot be distinguished at HW when the sea is calm.

Except for 4.6m reef about 0.2 mile from the shore reef, there

are no detached dangers in the bay, and anchorage is almost

anywhere 0.2 mile from the reefs.

1.33 In the bight on the NW side there is anchorage, in 70m, off

the village of Lamanggo, with Bukide bearing 139°; however

cross currents should be expected.

1.33 The passage between Pulau Biaro on the N and Pulau

Bangka and Pulau Talisei on the S is 18 miles wide and

apparently deep and clear. A depth of 88m is about 8 miles

SSW of Tanjung Buang the S point of Pulua Biaro and a depth

of 46m was reported 5 miles SSW of Tanjung Buang. A depth

of 62m was reported 6 miles WSW of Tanjung Buang and

depths of 64m were reported 4 and 3.8 miles W and WSW,

respectively, of Toendoengkoehan.

1.33 Pulau Bangka and Pulau Talisei are heavily wooded and

hilly, rising to heights of 348m and 359m, respectively. A light

is shown from Tanjung Arus (Tanjung Aroes), the N extremity

of Pulau Talisei. Pulau Bangka and Pulau Talisei, lying off the

N end of Sulawesi (Celebes) and forming the S side of Selat

Bangka, are further described in Pub. 163, Sailing Directions

(Enroute) Borneo, Jawa, Sulawesi, and Nusa Tenggara.
11

Pub. 164

2. 

The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and 

Kepulauan Sula

2.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 2 — CHART INFORMATION
13

Pub. 164

SECTOR 2 

THE NORTHERN MOLUCCAS—HALMAHERA, KEPULAUAN OBI, AND KEPULAUAN SULA

2.0 Plan.—This sector describes the W coast of Halmahera with

the islands off it, including the Bacan Islands and Kepulauan

Obi, and then the E coast of Halmahera, with the islands on the

W side of the Halmahera Sea, including Batanme.

The Northern Moluccas

2.1 The Northern Moluccas include Halmahera and its

adjacent islands; the Bacan Islands, Kepulauan Obi, and its adjacent islands; and Pulau Mayu and Pulau Tifore, which are

about mid-channel between Halmahera and Sulawesi. These islands are covered with rich tropical forests with many coconut

plantations along the coasts.

2.1 This group of islands is separated from the N part of Sulawesi by the Molucca Sea and Molucca Passage, which extends

to the N. Djailolo Passage separates the group from the islands

off the NW end of New Guinea. The Ceram Sea separates the

group from the islands to the S.

Pulau Maju (Pulau Mayu) (1°19'N., 126°23'E.) is marked

by lights shown from its E and W extremities. The island,

which lies about midway between Halmahera and the NE end

of Sulawesi, is hilly. At its center it is 413m high and has a

smooth rounded appearance. The island is reported to be a

good radar target. During the South Monsoon, anchorage may

be obtained, in a depth of about 40m, off the N side of the island. Kampung Pasir Putih is on the W extremity of the island;

the best landing place is E of it. A sunken wreck is reported to

lie about 30 miles NE of Pulau Maju. 

2.1 Pulau Tifore (1°00'N., 126°00'E.), about 24 miles SW of

Pulau Maju, is lower than the latter island, but rises to a 183m

hill in its NW part. It has been reported to be a good radar

target at a distance of 24 miles. Gureda, an islet 98m high, is

off the NW end of Pulau Tifore and is connected to it by a

drying reef. A reef, with a depth of 2.4m and marked by

discoloration, is close off the middle of the SW side of the

island. The village of Kampung Balibi is on the NE coast; fresh

water is available.

2.1 Tides—Currents.—The currents near the above islands and

in the open areas such as the Molucca Sea are dependent on the

winds. During the South Monsoon they set to the NNE; as a

rule they do not exceed a rate of 0.6 knot but may attain a rate

of 2 knots at times. During the North Monsoon they set to the

ESE and may also attain a rate of 2 knots, but generally do not

exceed 0.75 knot. The currents are stronger W of the islands

during the South Monsoon, and stronger E of the islands during the North Monsoon.

Halmahera

2.2 The sparse scattered population of Halmahera are of

the Alfuren and Papuan types and to a great extent they dwell

on the coast. The N part of the island is the most populated.

Coconut culture and forest produce are the principal means of

livelihood; fishing is only carried on in the rivers.

2.2 The island, although the largest of the Northern Moluccas, is

the least important and consists of four long narrow peninsulas

with deep intervening gulfs. It is in the N part of the group and

is about 190 miles long in a N-S direction.

2.2 Mountain chains intersect all four peninsulas. The chain of

mountains on the W side is of volcanic character, but Gunung

Gamkonora, 1,567m high, is the only active volcano.

2.2 Off-lying islands.—Kepulauan Loloda Utara (North

Loloda Island) (2°13'N., 127°47'E.), W of Tanjung Bisoa, the

N extremity of Halmahera, are moderately high and consist of

the four large inhabited islands of Pulau Doi, Pulau Tuakara,

Pulau Dagasuli, and Pulau Salangadeke, and several smaller

islets in their vicinity. Pulau Doi, the largest, is 330m high, and

has been reported to be a good radar target up to a distance of

23 miles. Extensive reefs extend both N and S from Pulau Salangadeke, the S island. The group is separated from the

Halmahera coast by a clear channel with a least width of 2.25

miles. Except for reefs extending from the islands and a 5m

shoal 0.5 mile N of the W part of Pulau Dagasuli, the channels

between the islands are clear. Local knowledge is necessary.

2.2 Vessels call at these islands for ebony. They have no definite

anchorages, but anchor in the most convenient place for picking up their cargo.

2.2 Anchorage is available, in 60m, in a small bay at the village

of Kampung Dama on the S side of Pulau Doi. The W shore of

this bay has a fringing reef, but the NE shore is clear. Local

knowledge is necessary.

2.2 Regulations.—For information regarding designated Archipelagic Sea Lanes, as defined by the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), lying N and W of Halmahera, see Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide)

Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia. 

Halmahera—West Coast

2.3 Tanjung Bisoa (2°13'N., 127°57'E.), the N extremity

of Halmahera, to Pulau Diti the coast trends in a SW direction

and is rocky and steep with perpendicular cliffs formed by

mountain spurs in places. Occasionally intervening sandy

beaches will be found. Tanjung Bisoa has a fringing reef, but

may safely be rounded at a distance of 1 mile; otherwise the

coast is steep-to.

2.3 Tides—Currents.—At Kampung Asimiro (1°59'N.,

127°45'E.), there is both a diurnal and a semidiurnal tide, but

the latter predominates. Neither the spring highs nor the spring

lows of the two coincide. The highest water level occurs in

May and November; the lowest in June or July and in December or January; the maximum rise and fall that can be expected

are, respectively, about 0.75m above and 0.75m below mean

sea level.

2.3 Pulau Diti (1°57'N., 127°43'E.) is a thickly-wooded coral

island near Halmahera coast about 22 miles SW of Tanjung

Bisoa. E of the island the coast forms a small bight, where

there is anchorage, in 29m Local knowledge is necessary.
14 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

2.3 From Pulau Diti the coast trends SSW for 18 miles to Teluk

Loloda, and has a wild and inhospitable aspect. It should be

given a wide berth by large vessels especially during the

monsoons, when rollers are experienced near the coast. Between the various points, which are formed by steep spurs of

mountain range, narrow beaches with small villages are found.

There is usually anchorage off these villages, but landing is

difficult.

2.3 The only good shelter for small vessels is in Teluk Barataku,

behind a rocky reef extending from the S point. Depth here is

73m. At the villages of Kampung Pumadada and Kampung

Gamkahe, 2.3 and 5 miles S respectively, of Pulau Diti, the

anchorages are entirely open.

2.4 Teluk Loloda (1°41'N., 127°33'E.) is formed by

Kepulauan Loloda Selatan (South Loloda Islands) and the

mainland of Halmahera. The three main islands of Pulau

Kahatola, Nusa Sidanga, and Nusa Adui are 226m, 222m, and

151m high, respectively, and uninhabited. A lighthouse, 30m in

height, has been established on Sidanga (1°40'N., 127°29'E.).

The double top of Nusa Adui, when seen between the other

two, appears conical. Of the mountain peaks in the interior of

Halmahera Gunung Loloda, 6 miles ESE of the bay, is

conspicuous when seen from any direction. It has a rounded

summit,1,094m high; close S of it is another lower peak.

2.4 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor S of Doeta Seta, which is

off the mainland of Halmahera, in 29 to 66m. A waterfall on

the E side of Pulau Kahatola or the summit of that island

bearing 273° leads into an anchorage. Vessels should not go

too far in, however, as the E part of the bay has many submerged reefs.

2.4 In Teluk Loloda there are numerous reefs; an extensive shoal

bank is in its E and S parts. Both the N and S entrances are

clear except for the reefs skirting the islands. The passage E of

Nusa Adui is not recommended because of the numerous rocks

and reefs in it. Sungai Loloda flows into the N side of Teluk

Loloda, but is navigable only by native canoes. Kampung

Loloda is a short distance up the river.

2.4 Directions.—Large vessels navigating from S to N keep in

mid-channel between Pulau Kahatola and Nusa Adui until the

N point of Nusa Adui is passed; then steer N, keeping near the

shore of Nusa Kahatola to avoid the shallow water and shore

reef of Doeta Seta to the E. This passage is deep and easy. The

shore reefs are steep-to and show up well. Current is negligible.

2.5 Between Tanjung Rongi Mhe (1°38'N., 127°32'E.),

at the S end of Teluk Loloda, and Tanjung Bobo, about 37

miles SSW, the coast is high and too steep to be accessible

except in the bights, where it is low and can be identified by the

plains extending inland from them. The active volcanoes form

the highest peaks of this desolate and mountainous land.

2.5 Tanjung Ligua Ma Dehe (1°33'N., 127°30'E.), 6 miles

SSW of Tanjung Rongi Mhe, is high and projects some

distance to the W. Close to its S side are some conspicuous

rocks. The coast immediately N of the point is rocky; then

almost to Teluk Loloda it forms a bight with a narrow sandy

beach.

2.6 Gunung Gamkonora (1°23'N., 127°32'E.), 1,567m

high and the highest peak along this stretch of coast, is still an

active volcano and emits a constant cloud of smoke. Between

this peak and Gunung Loloda is another peak, Ibu, which is

1,383m high. About 3 miles NE of Tanjung Bobo is the coneshaped peak of Jailolo (Djailolo), 1,036m high and with a

lower peak on its W side. Several other peaks are near the coast

between this peak and Gunung Gamknora. A lighthouse, 40m

in height, has been established (2003) at Tanjung Bobo

(1°02'N., 127°24'E.).

2.6 In the bight between the hills SE of Tanjung Ligua Ma Dehe

and Tanjung Duko, abreast of Gunung Gamkonora, the coast is

generally low, so that the lone conical hill, Ngidi Matjin, 117m

high and midway between the two points, forms a conspicuous

mark. South of Tanjung Duko the coast is rocky.

2.6 The Ibu River discharges 3.5 miles S of Tanjung Ligua Mahe

Dehe. Anchorage may be had, in 12.8m, off the mouth of the

river about 0.5 mile from the shore, with Tanjung Ligua Mahe

Dehe bearing 348° and the peak of Ibu 092°. It is open to W

winds and, in a Northwest Monsoon, a vessel should not go

closer in as the swell may rise suddenly. In the Southeast

Monsoon, vessels may anchor 0.15 mile closer, in depths of

9.1m. North of the anchorage, the bottom is stony, but to the S

it is sandy.

2.6 Teluk Sahu (1°09'N., 127°24'E.) is a large bight with a steep

beach, on which is the village of Kampung Susupu. When anhoring in front of the village it is advisable to keep in depths of

29 to 40m because rollers come up with the slightest W wind.

Small vessels find shelter in the heavily sanded mouth of a

small river which enters the sea S of Susupu. The narrow plain

with Teluk Sahu is fertile and thickly populated. 

2.6 Salo Island (1°05'N., 127°24'E.), close W of the high coast

between Teluk Sahu and Tanjung Bobo, is very conspicuous.

2.7 Teluk Jailolo (Teluk Djailolo) (1°02'N., 127°28'E.),

entered between Tanjung Kailupa and Tanjung Guai, a point

3.25 miles SE, is deep. The most conspicuous hills are Jailolo,

1,036m high, and three small hills at Tanjung Guai, 199 to 250m

high. Babua, a small coral islet 18m high, is 0.5 mile NW of

Tanjung Guai. The village of Kampung Jailolo, on the N side of

the bay, cannot be seen from offshore. A light is reported to be

shown from a metal framework tower at Jailolo. 

2.7 The shores of Teluk Jailolo are fringed with drying reefs and

shoals which extend, in places 0.6 mile offshore; beacons mark

the edge of the reef in places near Kampung Jailolo.

2.7 Directions.—A vessel approaching Teluk Jailolo from S

should keep Buku Kiematubu (Kie Matubu), the 1,757m peak

of Pulau Tidore, bearing 186° astern until near Babua, which

can be rounded closely. After passing Babua, continue into the

bay with Babua and Buku Kiematubu in range 190°, astern.

The current in Teluk Jailolo is negligible.

2.8 Teluk Tofiri (0°59'N., 127°30'E.), the next bight S of

Teluk Jailolo, has a low shore and is encumbered with dangers.

Tofiri, a sandbank above water is 2 miles offshore about 3

miles S of Tanjung Guai. A reef which dries and a 5.8m shoal

are 0.7 and 0.9 mile, respectively, NNE of Tofiri. Babua in line

with the mountain Jailolo, bearing 338°, leads NE of these

dangers.
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 15

Pub. 164

2.8 Several shoals with depths of 1.8m or less are within 0.75

mile of the coast.

2.8 Tanjung Sidangoli (0°53'N., 127°30'E.), about 7 miles S of

Tanjung Guai is the N limit of Teluk Dodinga. South and E of

this point a number of low mangrove-covered islands and reefs

front the coast.

2.8 Pasir Lamo (0°53'N., 127°27'E.), a shoal with 4m and

steep-to, is about 2 miles W of Tanjung Sidangoli.

2.9 Teluk Dodinga (0°49'N., 127°33'E.), between Tanjung Sidangoli and Tanjung Oba, is separated from Teluk Kau

on the E coast of Halmahera, by a narrow isthmus on which is

the village of Kampung Dodinga. A footpath leads from Kampung Dodinga through a long defile across the isthmus to Kampung Bobane Igu, on Teluk Kau.

2.9 About 3 miles W of Kampung Dodinga are several detached

reefs which extend up to 2 miles offshore. Another 2.7m shoal

lies 7.5 miles W of Dodinga. A reef, marked by a beacon is in

the S part of Teluk Dodinga about 2.75 miles N of Tanjung

Oba. Two shoals, 6.8m and 9m, are 0.35 mile NE and SE,

respectively, from the beacon; two other reefs, 8.2m and 10m

are 1 mile NW of the beacon; and still another group of reefs is

about 1 mile ENE of the beacon. There is good anchorage in

the inlet at Kampung Dodinga. It is easily approached by steering 078° for the two hills close S of the village. The current in

Teluk Dodinga is negligible.

2.9 Pulau Ternate, Pulau Tidore, and their nearby islands are

described beginning in paragraph 2.18.

Pulau Pilongan (Pulau Pilongga) (0°44'N., 127°37'E.), a

rock 41m high and partially covered with vegetation, lies about

4 miles W of Tanjung Oba and 1 mile off the E coast of Pulau

Ternate. The channel is clear on either side of this rock.

2.9 South of Teluk Dodinga, from Tanjung Oba to Tanjung

Dobegasi (0°33'N., 127°31'E.), a distance of about 11 miles,

the coast is low, but steep and clean, and can be approached to

a distance of 0.5 mile. Tanjung Dobegasi is low and fringed by

a narrow coast reef.

2.10 Pasir Raja (Pasir Radja) (0°36'N., 127°28'E.), 3.5 miles

NW of Tanjung Dobegasi, consists of a small cay covered with

sand and broken coral, with a drying atoll close N.

2.10 Between Tanjung Dobegasi and Tanjung Saselata (0°21'N.,

127°39'E.), the N point of Teluk Payahi, the hills follow the

coast line. About 2 miles NW of Tanjung Saselata are three

hills known as Karambuku, of which the westernmost is 296m

high. The N part of this coast is clear and has only a narrow

coastal reef extending from it; the S part is fronted by a number

of reefs and islands.

2.10 Close S of Tanjung Dobegasi is the village of Kampung

Akelamo, off which there is anchorage, in 66m, about 0.25

mile from the shore. About 6 and 7 miles farther S are two

inlets with the villages of Kampung Jehu and Kampung Lola,

off which there is anchorage, in 37m and 27m, respectively.

2.10 An uncharted reef, marked in 1944 by a beacon with a flag,

and by a beacon on its outer edge, is close offshore near Tanjung Nyarigiro (Tanjung Njarigiro).

2.10 Kepulauan Woda (0°23'N., 127°35'E.) is a group of islands

about 5 miles NW of Tanjung Saselata. The islands are separated from the coast by a good channel which leads to the

village of Kampung Gita. Gita is situated on the E coast of the

group. There is good anchorage, in 31m, mud, ENE of Pulau

Guratu, the island closest to the mainland. Local knowledge is

necessary.

2.11 Teluk Payahi (Bay of Pajahi) (0°18'N., 127°42'E.) is

an indentation of the coast between Tanjung Saselata and

Tanjung Safi, 6 miles to the SE. Anchorage, in 29 to 40m, mud,

is available off the village of Kampung Payahi (Pajahi) on the

NE shore of the bay. A flag pole with a concrete base is on the

beach at the village. South of the village the coast hills are

covered with jungle and coconut palms. A waterfall is 3 miles

S of the village.

2.11 Takat Main Main (0°18'N., 127°37'E.), consisting of two

reefs with depths of 3.7m and 5.8m, are 3 miles SW of Tanjung

Saselata. A drying patch is about 1.5 miles SE of Tanjung

Saselata, and a 0.9m shoal is 1 mile NE of the patch. Two

shoals of 1.3m and 1.8m lie within 1.5 miles S of Tanjung

Saselata.

2.11 From Tanjung Safi (0°16'N., 127°43'E.), the coast trends S

for 29 miles to Tanjung Tokaka. This stretch has a monotonous

appearance with few conspicuous mountains. Lenggiua, E of

Tanjung Safi, is 800m high. North of this peak the mountain

range ends in a steep drop, making a conspicuous gap between

it and the 406m summit close N of it. Lenggiua is also conspicuous because of the gap separating it from Sinopa, a 782m

mountain S of it. Tabrain is a 672m summit 4 miles S of Tanjung Safi, which can be seen from all directions. Southeast of

this peak is a range of peaks, of which the highest, Dufuk, is

786m high. At the S end of this range is the very conspicuous

peak, Dukur, 620m high. The next conspicuous hills are two

summits, 475m and 570m high, 5 and 4 miles, respectively, N

of Tanjung Tokaka. Then the hills rise to another ridge in a SSE

direction.

Nassau Reef (Takat Lem Lem) (0°12'N., 127°35'E.), 9 miles

SW of Tanjung Safi, is a small circular reef with a depth of

1.2m and great depths surrounding it. Under moderately-favorable conditions, this reef has been seen at a distance of 0.75

mile and from a height of 16m, when it appeared as a small

green spot. A ripple shows on it from time to time. The channel

on either side of this reef is deep and clear.

2.11 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 27m, off a small beach

at Kampung Maidi, about 8.5 miles S of Tanjung Safi. Local

knowledge is necessary. Coconut palms are near the village,

but mangroves line the coast N and S of it.

2.12 Between Tanjung Uwama (0°06'N., 127°41'E.) and

Tanjung Batu Lobang, a conspicuous rocky cliff about 5 miles

S, the coast forms a bay in which is the village of Kampung Lifofa. Vessels can anchor, in 29m, but local knowledge is necessary. The drying sand bank 0.5 mile S of Tanjung Uwama and

the 1.8m reef further to the E are generally easily seen.

2.12 Kampung Batula (0°01'S., 127°42'E.), about 2 miles S of

Tanjung Batu Lobang, cannot be seen from seaward, but close

to the SW there is a flagstaff, a shed with a metal roof, and a

round-topped tree S of a river mouth, all of which are easily

identified.

2.12 Temporary anchorage may be obtained with local knowledge

off Kampung Batula, in 29m. Other temporary anchorages are

at Kampung Semo, in 38m, and off Kampung Meloku, in 37m,

about 5 and 9.5 miles, respectively, S of Kampung Batula.
16 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

2.12 Tanjung Tokaka (0°13'S., 127°40'E.), with the village of Kampung Tokaka on it, is low and has a river mouth close N of it. The

description of the W coast of Halmahera continues in paragraph

2.14.

Selat Patinti (Patientie Strait)

2.13 Selat Patinti (0°30'S., 127°49'E.), separating Pulau

Bacan (Batjan) and Halmahera, is 7.5 miles wide at its N

entrance between Tanjung Dolit and Pulau Gilalang (Batu

Sambo). The channel, which is the usual route for vessels

between Ternate and New Guinea, is deep and clear, but very

restricted by Kepulauan Kusu, a chain of islands in its N part.

In the S entrance is Middle Sand (Gosong Tengah) (0°45'S.,

127°57'E.), a dangerous 2.1m shoal near the E edge of a bank

extending from the SE of Pulau Bacan. The drying reefs in the

strait can be recognized by a strong discoloration of the water,

but the other shoals show very little or no discoloration.

2.13 Tides—Currents.—The vertical tidal movement is not of

much importance as the shores and any dangers are steep-to.

Tidal information can, however, be obtained under Teluk Gane

and Sabatang Road, which is described in paragraph 2.30. The

currents in the wider parts of the strait are weak, but they are

rather strong in the channels between Kepulauan Kusu. In the

tidal currents between Kusa and Pokal velocities of 4.5 knots

have been observed at spring tide. At neap tide, velocities up to

3 knots have been observed, but there is no distinct relation

between the currents and the vertical tide movements at

Sabatang Road.

2.13 Directions.—When entering Selat Patinti from N, pass

about 2 miles W of Tanjung Dolit and then steer about 160° up

to Kepulauan Kusu. Then pass on either side of Pulau Pokal

(0°26.3'S., 127°43'E.) and set a course for Tanjung Buobe

(0°40'S., 128°00'E.). Leave this point 1 or 2 miles on the port

hand and steer to pass 1 mile W of Nusa Dowora-Lamo. This

course will lead clear of Middle Sand.

2.13 The E shore of Selat Patinti from Tanjung Tokaka to Tanjung Tawa (0°43'S., 128°04'E.), a distance of 39 miles, has

nothing conspicuous about it except the mountain peaks a short

distance inland. North of Kepulauan Kusa is a group of

mountains, of which Buku Uwatcain (Oewat Tjain) is 1,263m

high and can be seen in all directions. Pasegal, at the SE end of

the group, is 871m high and is especially conspicuous from the

W and SW. Near Tanjung Malabuha, 21 miles SE of Tanjung

Tokaka, are three conspicuous hills, 245 to 259m high. Near

Tanjung Buobe another range of mountains rises rapidly from

the hills both at its N and S ends. Gogosoma, the S and most

distinctive peak of this range is 950m.

2.13 Both N and S of Kepulauan Kusu the coast is clear and

steep-to, except for a 4.6m shoal nearly 1 mile S of Kampung

Oha (0°30'S., 127°55'E.).

2.13 Anchorage.—Gurua Boso (0°18'S., 127°44'E.) is a small

inlet 7 miles SE of Tanjung Tokaka. It has a least depth of 6.4m

in the entrance channel, but deepens to 11 to 13.7m inside. It

affords excellent shelter to small vessels. The only other anchorage on this coast is off Kampung Saketa, in a small bight

about 15 miles SE of Tanjung Tokaka, in a depth of about 28m.

There is a post office in Kampung Saketa. Local knowledge is

necessary.

2.13 Kepulauan Kusu (0°20'S., 127°44'E.) are a string of hilly

and heavily wooded islands lying on a ridge of less than 184m

that extends across Selat Patinti. Pulau Saleh Besar, the largest,

rises to a height of 330m. Deep channels separate these islands,

but the one between the N end of Pulau Saleh Besar and

Halmahera has several rocks and shoals in it. The channels

used for through navigation, on either side of Pulau Poka,

which is marked on its summit by a light, are deep and clear.

Halmahera—West Coast (Continued)

2.14 The W coast of Halmahera trends generally SE from

Tanjung Tawa for nearly 26 miles to Tanjung Libobo (0°55'S.,

128°27'E.), the S extremity of Halmahera. It can be identified

by a hill 172m high, standing 2 miles within the point and by

Babi, a low wooded islet thickly covered by vegetation, close

SE. This stretch of coast is low, with hills rising a short

distance inland. Tawaigili, 11 miles NW of Tanjung Libobo, is

273m high and fairly conspicuous.

2.14 Tides—Currents.—At Kampung Gane Di Dalam, there is

both a diurnal and a semi-diurnal tide, but the latter predominates. Neither the spring highs nor the spring lows of the

two tides coincide. The highest water level occurs in June or

July and in December or January, the lowest between July and

September and between January and March; the maximum rise

and fall that can be expected are, respectively, 0.4m above and

0.4m below.

2.14 The currents are strong in the vicinity of this end of the

island; when opposed by the wind, a rough sea may be raised.

This is also true for the passage between the point and Pulau

Babi, and also for the wider passage between Halmahera and

Pulau Damar.

2.14 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage may be obtained by

vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 24 to 29m, close off

Kampung Gam Ma Gugu, about 8 miles ESE of Tanjung Tawa.

2.14 A small vessel with local knowledge may obtain safe

anchorage in Teluk Gane, about 10 miles ESE of Tanjung Tawa

and fronted by Kepulauan Dowora. The coast of Halmahera on

either side of this bay can be safely approached to a distance of

1 mile. A narrow coastal reef, marked by discoloration, extends

from both entrance points. Kampung Gane Di Dalam is just

within the W entrance point, and can easily be identified from

S by its large mosque. Local knowledge is necessary at both

these anchorages.

2.14 Teluk Boleh Madjiko, entered about 3 miles S of Teluk

Gane, affords sheltered anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon.

2.15 Kepulauan Dowora (0°50'S., 128°08'E.) is a group

of islands on the E side of the S entrance of Selat Patinti, about

22 miles NW of Tanjung Libobo. Nusa Doworalamo (Dowara

Lamo) (0°51'N., 128°05'E.), 320m high and the SW island of

the group, has a rounded summit with a saddle formation when

seen from SW; about 1 mile ESE of this island is a 9m reef.

Sori (0°53'S., 128°08'E.), about 3 miles ESE of this island, is a

wooded rocky island surrounded by rocks. Pasir Bale is on a

reef 1 mile N of Nusa Doworalamo. Nusa Mano and Nusa

Waringin, about 4 and 5 miles, respectively, NE of Nusa

Doworalamo, each have a distinctive tree on them. The channel
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 17

Pub. 164

between this island group and Halmahera is deep and clear, although there may be quite a current.

Pulau Damar (Pulau Salomakie) (1°01'S., 128°23'E.), a

tree-covered island, is about 5.25 miles SW of Tanjung Libobo.

Kampung Kukupang, standing on piles on the NW extremity of

the island, has the only trace of civilization or buildings except

for the islets Katinai Besar and Katinai-Ketjil (Kecil), which

are within 1.25 miles of the NE coast. Anchorage can be obtained both E and W of Katinai Besar.

2.15 Tapa, an island with low hills close off the SW side of Pulau

Damar, is separated from Pulau Damar by a very narrow

channel with a least depth of 14.6m and clear of dangers. The

channel between Tapa and Pulau Joronga is also deep and clear

of dangers.

2.16 Pulau Joronga (Djoronga) (1°06'S., 128°23'E.),

nearly 2 miles S of Pulau Damar, is a low thickly-wooded

island which rises to heights of 221m and 235m in two hills at

its S end. From the S, the S hill appears flat, with a conspicuous crown of trees at the center. At the village of Kampung

Waringin, on the S side of the E end of the island, there is a

conspicuous plume-shaped tree. The island of Kubi, near the S

side of Pulau Joronga, is a hill with a double top 156m high.

Small hills are also found on Pulau Orangkaya (Orang Kaja)

and on Pulau Gumutu, 2.5 miles W of Kubi; with few exceptions the small islets near Pulau Joronga are low and wooded

and for the most part connected to each other by drying reefs.

2.16 Batu Anyer (Batu Anjer) (Black Rock), 8m high, is the

remains of an old crater and is composed of dark volcanic

stone and old coral; part of it extends underwater in the form of

a horseshoe. This rock is 4 miles SE of Tanjung Domoro ma

doto, the SE extremity of Pulau Joronga. Batu Anyer is on the

W end of a bank extending 5.5 miles further E. The depths here

are between 29 to 126m. Another bank, located 5 miles N of

Batu Anyer contains depths ranging from 35 to 113m.

2.17 Ganone (Little Geelmuiden) (1°05'S., 128°18'E.), an

islet with a small hill on which there is a tree with a round top,

is 1.75 miles W of the W end of Pulau Joronga. Two shoals,

slightly marked by discoloration with depths of 7m and 8.8m,

are 1.5 miles SW and NE, respectively, of the islet. Strong currents may be experienced near the islands occasionally.

2.17 Pulau Woka (Great Geelmuiden), 4.3 miles NW of Ganone,

consists of two islands connected by a coral reef. At the W end

of the NE island, a 108m hill gives the group the appearance of

a hat with a broad brim. The hill is planted with coconut and

banana trees, and has two large conspicuous trees with white

trunks. The shores of the low water island are fringed with

mangroves. The atoll has a depth of 35m, but a rock with a

depth of 1.5m is in the entrance. There is no anchorage near the

island.

Loleodjaha (Pulau Loleodjaha) (Five Islands) (1°01'S.,

128°09'E.) consists of several small islets on the edges of two

drying reefs, 3 miles W of Pulau Woka. Most of the islets are

no more than strips of sand with shrubs; on the northernmost

are a few coconut palms. The islets are difficult to distinguish

at night.

Islands West of Halmahera

2.18 Pulau Hiri (0°54'N., 127°19'E.), N of Pulau Ternate

and from which it is separated by a clear channel nearly 1 mile

wide, is about 1.75 miles long and rises to a conical peak,

685m high. The island is marked by a lighted beacon, 30m in

height. Several rocks above-water are off the NW side. The

small bight E of the N end of the island is recommended as an

anchorage for vessels with local knowledge.

2.18 Pulau Ternate (0°47'N., 127°23'E.), about 1 mile SSE of

Pulau Hiri, is composed almost entirely of Gunung Ternate, a

conical volcano 1,721m high. Except for the narrow coast reef

the shores are steep-to with no off-lying dangers. Vessels can

find anchorage almost anywhere under favorable conditions.

The lower slopes of the island are planted with coconut palms

and fruit trees.

2.18 Ternate Roads is an open roadstead on the SE side of Pulau

Ternate. Gamme Lamo Channel, between Pulau Ternate and

Pulau Tidore and the S approach to Ternate Road, has a least

depth of 33m in the fairway.

2.19 Ternate (0°47'N., 127°23'E.) (World Port Index No.

52510) lies about 2 miles NE of the SE extremity of Pulau

Tenate. Water is available here but provisions are scarce. Principal exports are copra, shells, cocoa, spices, resins, and dried

fish.

2.19 There is a coast radio station at Ternate.

2.19 Winds—Weather.—From July to October, the winds

usually blow from SW to SSW; during the other months of the

year the winds blow from W and NW to NE. East winds are

very rare. There is a sea breeze near the island but no land

breeze. Heavy squalls occur occasionally. Even during the dry

monsoon, showers occur from time to time. South winds cause

a broken sea when the currents set to the S.

2.19 Tides—Currents.—A strong current sets through the roads,

at times reaching a rate of 1.5 knots. High water is accompanied by a current setting to the N; LW is accompanied by a

current setting to the S.

2.19 Aspect.—A light is shown from a white mast near the root

of the pier. A minaret stands in the S end of the town.

2.19 An oil depot, marked by a light and which has a mooring

buoy which can handle vessels up to 10,000 dwt, lies on the S

side of Pulau Ternate about 4.5 miles WSW of Ternate.

2.19 A 374m long concrete pier can accommodate vessels up to

10,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 100m and a maximum

draft of 7m.

2.19 The Yani Wharf was reported to have a breadth of 12m and

an alongside depth of 7.6m in 1993. A 25-ton mobile crane is

available. There is also a wooden jetty for sailing vessels. 

2.19 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. A government pilot is

available. The vessel’s ETA should be given 6 hours in advance

through Ternate Coast Radio Station or directly by VHF to the

pilot station. Radio frequency information is obtained on VHF

channels 12, 13, 14, and 15. 

Port of Ternate

http://www.portina4.go.id/ternate.htm
18 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

2.19 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in a depth

of about 65m, about 0.3 mile E of the pier. Vessels should not

anchor closer in because the tides may be erratic and the coast

reef is difficult to distinguish. From December to April, there

may be a heavy swell in the roadstead.

2.20 Pulau Tidore (0°42'N., 127°25'E.), separated from

Pulau Ternate by Gamme Lamo Channel, about 1 mile wide, is

entirely of volcanic formation. Buku Kiematabu (Kie Matubu),

on the S half of the island, is a regular cone 1,757m high. On

the N half the mountains are lower and irregularly-shaped.

Along the coasts are several scattered villages with cultivated

slopes behind them. The principal village, Kampung Soa Siu,

on the SE coast, is easily recognized by its white houses and a

mosque. The coast reef fronting the village has been elevated

artificially by a barrier, at the end of which is a small pier with

a signal mast. A light shows 0.3 mile SW of Soa Siu.

2.20 Anchorage.—It is difficult to find anchorage off Kampung

Soa Siu; the best method is to approach the pier with anchor

cable veered out to 61m then proceed until the anchor catches

hold. There is a wooden jetty, about 61m long, about 1.75

miles NNE of Kampung Soa Siu. Better anchorage can be

found about 0.5 mile N of Soa Siu, in 18m. Fair anchorage may

be obtained anywhere N of the parallel of the Buku Kiematabu

summit.

2.21 Gamme Lamo Channel (Selat Gamelamo) is the

passage that separates Pulau Ternate and Pulau Tidore. A nasty

sea may occur in the W entrance, especially when the wind is

from the SW and the current sets SW. A tidal range of about

1.9m in the channel induces currents up to about 6 knots.

2.21 Pulau Maitara, about 1 mile in diameter and separated from

the NW side of Pulau Tidore by a clear but narrow channel, has

a conical peak, 386m high. It is covered with coconut palms on

its E side and is fringed by reefs on the N and S shores, extending about 0.25 mile out. These reefs are marked by discoloration. Anchorage may be obtained off the villages on the coast.

2.21 Pulau Pilongan (Pulau Pilongga), more than 1 mile off the E

coast of Pulau Tidore, is a partly-wooded rock, 42m high. It

was reported to be conspicuous even at night. The channel

between it and Pulau Tidore can be used at all times. A small

saddle-shaped formation on the N slope of Pulau Hiri, in range

with the NE point of Pulau Ternate, bearing 317°, will lead NE

of the islet.

2.22 Pulau Mare (0°35'N., 127°24'E.), 340m high, is 2

miles S of Pulau Tidore and is separated from that island by

Selat Mare, a deep channel clear of dangers in its fairway.

Tanjung Kovo, the S end of the island, is 113m high, and is

connected to the hilly land NE by a low ridge; it is quite

conspicuous. In the bight E of this point vessels will find anchorage, in 57m, off the village of Kampung Kovo. There is

also anchorage, in 50m, off the village of Kampung Mare, on

the NE side of the island, where there is a pier. A 12.8m shoal

is 0.5 mile E of the E side of the island.

2.22 Pulau Moti (0°27'N., 127°24'E.), about 5 miles S of Pulau

Mare, is a hilly island 980m high. Except for a very narrow

coast reef and a 1.8m shoal close off the SE side, it is steep-to.

Between its highest peak and a lower summit to the NW there

is a saddle formation which is quite conspicuous from the W.

The only anchorage is in 42m, off the village of Kampung

Kotta, on its NE side.

2.22 Pulau Makian (0°20'N., 127°24'E.), about 3.5 miles S of

Pulau Moti, is steep-to on all sides; a light is situated on the W

side of the island. The island has a crater near the center with a

pointed peak on one side rising to a height of 1,428m. The

saddle between the central heights and the 1,428m summit to

the S is very conspicuous when seen from the W or E.

2.22 Anchorage.—The only good anchorage is in 29 to 61m,

sand, off the village of Kampung Ngofakiaha on the NE side;

this anchorage can also be used during the North Monsoon.

Cargo is loaded by surf-lighters N of the village. Fresh water

and stores are not available. There is a small pier for boats.

Rollers may occasionally be troublesome at this landing place.

2.22 Anchorage can also be obtained farther seaward, in a depth

of about 100m, but the bottom is most irregular and uneven. 

2.23 The Kayoa Islands (0°03'N., 127°26'E.), consisting

of Pulau Kayoa (Pulau Kajoa) and Pulau Laluin and nearby

smaller islands, are 8 to 24 miles S of Pulau Makian. They

have the appearance of one rather flat island with a few elevations. Tigalalu (Tigalulu) (0°04'N., 127°25'E.), a peak near

the middle of the W side of Pulau Kayoa, 455m high, is the

highest peak of the group. With few exceptions, the waters

surrounding the islands is deep and clear right up to the drying

coastal reef. Pulau Miskin, a small islet off the N point of Pulau

Koyoa, is 50m high and very conspicuous. Pulau Djire is a

small wooded rock, 7m high, located on the narrow coastal reef

near Tanjung Wot Oko, near the NE point of Pulau Kayoa. A

4.6m reef, located 2.7 miles S of Tanjung Wot Oko, extends 0.5

mile off the NE coast. On the S extremity of Pulau Laluin, a

spit with a depth of 6.9m extends 1 mile out. Laluin is connected with Tanjung Guruapin, about 2 miles N, by a reef

which dries in places. Many coconut plantations are on the island, but the population is small.

2.23 Anchorage may be obtained in Guruapin Roads, S of Tanjung Guruapin, but a troublesome swell can develop quickly

here. The approach channel is marked by beacons. An inner

roadstead anchorage has a depth of 2.4m in the approach.

Kepulauan Goraitji (Guraichi Islands) (0°01'N.,

127°11'E.), W of the Kayoa Islands, includes Pulau Taneti and

the scattered islands up to 17 miles N of it. They are sparsely

populated, but coconut plantations are found on nearly all of

them. Although waters in the vicinity are deep, anchorage may

be found in several places; the bottom is composed of graygreen clay. There is a fairly strong current dependent on the

wind. Local knowledge is necessary. 

2.23 Pulau Taneti (0°06'S., 127°14'E.) is the largest island of the

group. The hills of this island, which rise to a height of 234m,

are not very conspicuous, but a tree on a small hill on the SW

point is visible. A 9.1m shoal, seldom marked by discoloration,

is about 0.75 mile N of the N part of the island.

2.24 Pulau Tolimao (0°01'S., 127°10'E.), about 5 miles

NNW of Pulau Taneti, is a hilly islet entirely covered by coconut palms. The reefs extend 2 miles E of this islet and are well

marked by discoloration. Detached shoals are 2 and 3 miles E

of Pulau Tolimao, with depths of 2.8 and 5m, respectively.

2.24 Pulau Lilai, about 2.5 miles E of Pulau Tolimau, is 172m

high with coconut palms on its summit. Pulau Temomadafa
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 19

Pub. 164

(Temo Ma Dafa), about 1 mile S of Pulau Tolimau, is lower

than that island and has a distinctive round-topped tree on its

NW end.

Pulau Gumorga (Pulau Gunange) (0°02'N., 127°13'E.),

144m high, is N of Pulau Lilai. On the SE end are the villages

of Kampung Tagono and Kampung Akedabo. A 5.5m shoal,

slightly marked by discoloration, lies 1.5 miles S of Gumorga.

2.24 Anchorage.—Larger vessels anchor, in about 73m, off

Kampung Tagono with the E point near Kampung Akedabo

bearing 013° and the S point near a shed bearing 337°.

2.25 Pulau Siko (0°04'N., 127°09'E.), about 8 miles NW

of Pulau Gumorga, slopes gently on the S side but presents a

rocky wall, 149 to 250m high to the N and E. Pulau

Tamakumafatu (Tomaka Ma Fatu) 1.5 miles to the SE, and

Pulau Gafi, 1.75 miles to the NE, have similar formations.

Adu, nearly 1 mile E of Pulau Gafi, consists of a group of rocks

with a sharp summit and is covered by trees. 

2.25 Pulau Laigoma (0°08'N., 127°13'E.), about 4.5 miles E of

Pulau Siko, is a horseshoe-shaped ridge of hills up to 119m

high. Tamo Tamo, about 1 mile W of Pulau Laigoma, is a steep

rock with only a few shrubs on it. Between Pulau Laigoma and

Tamo Tamo, a rock only slightly above water, is marked by

heavy surf with the least sea. Within a radius of 0.5 mile of

Tamo Tamo are three shoals with depths of 8.2 and 11m; are

marked by rollers.

2.25 Caution.—Wolf Rock (Terumba Gora) (0°12'N.,

126°54'E.), 12 miles WNW of Pulau Siko, can only be seen at

LW, when from close range, it appears as a circular yellow rock

about 9.1m in diameter. When the sea is comparatively smooth,

this rock may be recognized from a distance of 2 miles, but

during a heavy sea it is not so easily recognized. The depths

around the rock vary from 20.1 to 50m.

2.25 Goweba lies at the outer end of a chain of islets and rocks

extending 1 mile W from the NW end of Pulau Siko.

The Bacan Islands

2.26 The Bacan Islands, off the W side of the S end of

Halmahera and on the N side of Selat Obi, include Pulau Bacan

(Pulau Batjan), Pulau Mandioli, Pulau Kasiruta (Tawali Besar),

and the Latalata Islands. The highest point in these islands is a

2,110m summit on the S part of Pulau Bacan. Buku Sibela, the

range on which this summit is located, is quite conspicuous

because two valleys separate it from the other parts of the

island lying to the N and SE. The 765m and 824m peaks of

Buku Kabau, on Pulau Kasiruta, are conspicuous because of

their distinctive form. The 590m and 641m summits at the NE

end of Pulau Bacan are also easily recognized; the former has a

small but conspicuous grove of trees on it.

2.26 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the Bacan Islands do

not usually exceed a rate of more than 2 knots.

2.26 Caution.—In the narrow passages between the Bacan

Islands, the mariner should never depend on discoloration for

the marking of reefs; during strong tidal currents the shoals are

sometimes marked by strong ripples and whirlpools on the side

opposite to the direction from which the current is setting. Off

the more open parts of the coast the water is very clear during

the transition periods between the monsoons; the bottom can

be plainly seen at depths up to 16m. When the sea is calm the

detached reefs are not marked by discoloration. During the

strength of the monsoons, both outside the group and within

the islands, the water is choppy and discoloration cannot be

depended on to identify reefs.

2.27 The Latalata Islands (0°16'S., 127°04'E.), at the NW

end of the Bacan Islands, are hilly; the highest point, on Pulau

Latalata, is 423m high. The only danger in the channel between the Latalata Islands and Pulau Kasiruta is a 2.7m shoal

off the NW side of Pulau Kasiruta. Pulau Latalata and Pulau

Muari, the two largest of the islands, are separated by a narrow

channel, with a least depth of 11m. A light is shown from

Pulau Latalata, in position 0°15.5'S, 127°0.8'E. Pao-kecil, S of

Pulau Latalata, the southernmost and smallest of the island

group, is a very conspicuous cone. In the channel between Paokecil and Pao Besar, just to the N, is an 7.8m shoal.

2.27 Tolimago (0°09'N., 127°11'E.), a rocky islet with trees on it,

is midway between Pulau Muari and Pulau Taneti.

2.27 Tuapen (0°12'S., 127°02'E.) is a group of rocks 2.5 miles

NW of Pulau Latalata; the three largest are 49m high. An 8.2m

shoal is 1 mile S of these rocks.

2.27 Anchorage.—The best anchorage is in 49m in a small bay

on the E side of the N entrance to the channel between Pulau

Latalata and Pulau Muari. Anchorage can also be obtained off

the village of Kampung Busua on the E side of Pulau Muari, 2

miles SW of Tanjung Hufau. During the favorable monsoon,

anchorage is available in Teluk Gomo, on the NW side of

Pulau Muari, and in Teluk Bobo, on the SW side of Pulau

Latalata. Local knowledge is necessary for these anchorages.

2.28 The N side of the Bacan Islands is irregular but steepto. The currents along this side are weak, but some precaution

is necessary at the N entrance to Selat Sambaki, which is

discussed in paragraph 2.37. There are several anchorages on

this side, but the water is fairly deep. Detached dangers include

a 4m shoal off of Vuile Point, on the NE side of Pulau Kasiruta,

and a 8.2m shoal 1 mile NE of Tanjung Geti, on the NE shore

of Loid Bay.

2.28 Tawali Kecil (0°14'S., 127°18'E.), about 1.75 miles N of

Vuile Point, is 115m high and steep-to, except on the SW side.

Pasir Bale (0°14'S., 127°26'E.), a drying reef which is steepto, is 7.5 miles E of Tawali Kecil. A small part of it is reported

to be above water at all times and some shrubs are on it. A

black beacon is situated on this reef.

2.28 Teluk Loid, a large bight in the N coast of Pulau Bacan, has

high land on both sides. The islands, Nusa Raloid and Nusa

Babi, 180m and 158m high, respectively, are on the W side of

the bay. A small islet, Nusa Deket, is near the S end of Nusa

Raloid. The channels between these islands and the coast is

clear.

2.28 Anchorage is available, in 28m, off the village of Kampung

Geti (0°21'S., 127°29'E.) close W of Tanjung Geti.

2.29 Batu Sombo (Pulau Gilalang) (0°18'S., 127°33'E.) is

located about 1.5 miles E of Tanjung Seki, the N extremity of

Pulau Bacan. It is separated from the NE end of Pulau Bacan

by Gilalang Strait, a very narrow but deep channel. A large

wooded rock is on a drying reef at the E point of Gilalango.

The E side of Pulau Bacan, forming the W side of Selat

Patinti (Patientie Strait), is steep-to for the most part. On Tan-
20 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

jung Bilulu, the SE extremity of the island, two hills are conspicuous, especially from the N and NE. Middle Sand (Gosong

Tengah), a dangerous 2.1m shoal, is 3.5 miles NE of Tanjung

Bilulu. Vessels transiting Selat Patinti should steer well clear of

this shoal.

2.29 From Tanjung Gilalang, the coast of Pulau Bacan trends SE

for 11.5 miles to Tanjung Tuada (Ruige Point). The only detached dangers are those in the small bay 2.5 miles SE of Tanjung Gilalang, the reefs N of Tanjung Goro Goro, and the reefs

in Sabatang Roads. Kepulauan Kusu, NE of Tanjung Tuada,

has been previously described in paragraph 2.13.

2.30 Sabatang Roads (0°26'S., 127°39'E.), about 2 miles

NW of Tanjung Tuada, affords anchorage, in 13.7 to 16.4m,

between a drying reef N of a flagstaff and a 5.8m shoal patch

outside of the 10m curve. The flagstaff and a large tree in back

of the village are conspicuous. Local knowledge is necessary.

2.30 Tides—Currents.—At Sabatang Roads, the maximum rise

and fall of tide that can be expected are, respectively, about

0.75m above and 0.4m below mean sea level.

2.30 The coast between Tanjung Tuada and Teluk Babang, about

10 miles SW, is clear and steep-to. Three off-lying islets,

Kairu, Bori-kecil, and Bori, are close to the coast. The coast is

lined with coconut palms, jungle, and mangrove. Bori Island

(0°35'S., 127°36'E.) has a conspicuous flat hill; it is wooded,

and its shores are fringed with mangroves.

2.31 Teluk Babang (0°37'S., 127°36'E.) affords anchorage, in a depth of 51m, mud, off the village of Kampung Babang. The only danger in the bay is a rock which dries about

0.1m located 0.5 mile E of the village. A black beacon marks

this area. Sindapp, a 536m flat-topped conical hill NW of the

bay, and the mouth of Kali Sajung are conspicuous. A road

runs from Kampung Babang to Labuha, on the W shore of

Pulau Bacan.

2.31 A pier, serving an oil depot, is situated 0.25 mile SE of the

village; lights are shown from the root of the pier and 0.4 mile

NW of the pier.

2.31 Teluk Lapan (0°42'S., 127°40'E.) is the next bay SE of

Teluk Babang. These two bays form the head of a large indentation on the E coast of Pulau Bacan. Pulau Gamudja,

separated from the W shore of the bay by a clear channel, is

easily identified. There is a prominent yellow patch on the

slope of the land near here caused by hot springs emitting

steam and sulphur vapors. Anchorage can be obtained, in 46m,

in a small bight close N. Anchorage is also available, in 58m,

off the village of Kampung Songa, at the head of the bay and

W of a river mouth. A road runs from this village across the

island to Kampung Wajaua.

2.31 Anchorage, in 46m, can be obtained off the village of Kampung Tutupa, about 11 miles E of Kampung Songa. Rocks extend up to 0.75 mile offshore from a position about 1 mile NW

of Kampung Tutupa.

2.32 Between Kampung Tutupa and Tanjung Bilulu

(0°47'S., 127°54'E.), about 6 miles to the SE, are several

dangers, the outermost of which is an 11.9m shoal, 1.75 miles

offshore.

2.32 Two bays, Teluk Bilulu and Teluk Kapalmaloleo, are SW of

Tanjung Bilulu. Anchorage can be obtained, in 44m, mud and

sand, off the village of Kampung Kapalmaloloe on the latter

bay. A shoal of 5.9m is located close off Tanjung Kapalmaloleo, the point separating the two bays.

The S coast of Pulau Bacan is sparsely inhabited and of no

importance except to passing vessels. The charted dangers

include a reef 1.8 miles S of Kapalmaloleo, a 10.9m shoal, 2.7

miles further SW off of Tanjung Lemo, and a 2.3m shoal 1

mile W of Tanjung Liaro. Another 10.9m shoal is located 1.25

miles S of Tanjung Silang and the N side of Silang Bay is

shoaled. No details of the currents are available, but opposite

Selat Patinti and Selat Bacan, a set in or out may be experienced.

2.32 Buku Bibinoi (Zoutberg) (0°46'S., 127°43'E.) is a conspicuous peak 11 miles W of Tanjung Bilulu; it has the appearance

of a perfectly-shaped cone and is 960m high. Hills are very

close to the coast except at the head of Teluk Wajaua where the

land is lower. A small but conspicuous rocky island is off Tanjung Maregarango.

2.32 Teluk Silang and Teluk Wajaua, in which are villages of the

same names, may afford anchorage.

2.32 The description of the Bacan Islands continues in paragraph

2.38.

Selat Bacan (Batjan Strait)

2.33 Selat Bacan (0°48'S., 127°23'E.), together with Selat

Sambaki, described in paragraph 2.37, to the N, forms a direct

route through the Bacan Islands. Selat Bacan is wide and deep

at its S entrance between Tanjung Manggo, the SE extremity of

Pulau Mandioli, and Tangung Maregarango, the SW extremity

of Pulau Bacan (Pulau Batjan), about 9 miles ESE; farther N it

is cut up into narrow channels by the Obit Islands.

2.33 The inter-island vessels using Selat Bacan follow the Pulau

Bacan side of the passage; then they use Selat Udjung Masaran

(on the E side of Pulau Obit), then Selat Batu Ampat and Selat

Sambaki, leaving the latter passing E of Pulau Toduku.

2.33 On a clear day the double-topped summit, 812m high, of

Buku Maribenu can be seen from the entrance. Buku Amasing,

1,038m high with a rounded summit, is often hidden by clouds.

2.33 Tides—Currents.—As a rule the currents in Selat Bacan

and Selat Sambaki seldom exceed 2 knots, although in narrow

passages a current of 3 knots is possible during spring tides.

Slack water occurs at the time of H and LW at Ternate; a N set

is experienced when the tide is rising at that place and a S set

when the tide is falling.

2.33 Caution.—See paragraph 2.1 regarding lack of dependability upon discoloration to identify reefs.

2.33 A W extension of the bank fringing the coast of Pulau Bacan

was reported about 1.75 miles NE of the NW extremity of

Pulau Obit.

2.34 Teluk Labuha (0°38'S., 127°23'E.) is about 11 miles

N of Tanjung Maregarango. A drying reef with a conspicuous

tree on its E end is close to the N shore. The best anchorage is

in the NE corner, in 15m, soft mud. If there is too much swell,

vessels may find shelter in Teluk Belang Belang to the West.

2.34 There is a small pier at Kampung Penambuan, a settlement

about 3 miles S of Teluk Labuha.

2.34 Labuha (0°38'S., 127°28'E.) (World Port Index No. 52523)

is at the NE corner of Teluk Labuha. The Customs Pier here is
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 21

Pub. 164

used by vessels up to 40m long and is marked by a light. The

Government Pier, 0.3 mile NW, is also marked by a light and a

flagstaff is about 91m SE of it. The coastline SE of the

government pier was reported to be extending SW. The port is

a port of call for vessels trading among these islands and is a

center of trade in copra and damar, a resin.

2.34 A distinctive tree stands 0.8 mile W of the Customs pier at

the E end of Dorapedo, a drying reef close off the N shore. 

2.34 Two distinctive trees stand near the coast 1 mile S of the customs pier, close N of the mouth of Kali Mendawong.

2.34 Winds—Weather.—During the South Monsoon (July and

August), the wind can blow with considerable strength and

cause breakers, rendering communication with the shore

difficult at times. During the West Monsoon (January and February), a squall of great strength from the SE may occur occasionally but it never lasts more than 20 minutes. Otherwise

conditions are more favorable.

2.34 Tides—Currents.—At Teluk Labuha, there is both a diurnal

and a semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates. Because the

spring highs and the spring lows do not coincide, and their rise

is small, they do not affect navigation.

2.34 Anchorage.—The best berth is in a depth of about 15m, soft

mud, in the NE part of the roadstead. If there is too much swell

here, vessels may find shelter in Teluk Belangbelang. 

2.35 The Obit Islands (0°39'S., 127°21'E.), W of Teluk

Labuha, includes Pulau Obit, Pulau Patjitaka, Pulau

Parapotang, and some smaller islands. Although these islands

are hilly, they are comparatively low, wooded, or covered by

coconut palms. The narrow channels between them and the

shore of Pulau Mandioli are seldom used. The tin roof and

chimney of a copra drying plant at a small village on the SW

side of Pulau Parapotang, the westernmost large island of the

group, are conspicuous.

2.35 Selat Udjung Masaran (0°37'S., 127°24'E.), the E passage,

is between Pulau Obit and Pulau Bacan and is the principal

channel through the Obit Islands. Although the fairway is deep,

it is somewhat restricted by the islets Nusa Deket and Nusa Ra

in the S entrance and by the larger island Pulau Mambuat in the

N entrance. The main channel used by shipping is N of Nusa

Ra (0°38'S., 127°25.5'E.). Reefs extend about 0.5 mile of the

shore running 2 miles W of Labuha Roads and the edge of a

fringing reef on the W side of the strait S of Pulau Mambuat is

marked by beacons. There is a 5.8m shoal in the fairway, about

0.25 mile offshore, lying 1.5 to 2.5 miles SE of Tanjung

Paisumbaos. The usual route through this part of the strait is

between Tanjung Paisumbaos (0°36.5'S., 127°22.4'E.) and

Pulau Mambuat (0°36.0'S., 127°23.0'E.).

2.35 There is a stone landing and conspicuous mosque at Kampung Sangkuangklano on the NE shore of Pulau Obit, SE of

Tanjung Paisumbaos and Pulau Mambuat.

2.35 Teluk Belang Belang (0°37'S., 127°25'E.), N of Nusa Ra,

offers anchorage for large vessels, in 40m, off the village of

Kampung Belang Belang when anchorage at Labuha is untenable; this anchorage is out of the current.

2.36 Pulau Mandioli (0°43'S., 127°15'E.), on the W side

of Selat Bacan, is hilly but has a rather flat appearance and is

much lower than the larger islands of this group. The highest

point, Buku Gaku 331m high is the summit of one of the

conspicuous hills. A number of charted dangers surround the

island, most of which are close inshore. The farthest off-lying

dangers are off the NW part of the island. The islets Ambatin

and Samo are about 2 and 3.5 miles NW, respectively, NW of

Tanjung Sarawaki the NW point of Pulau Mandioli. Pasir Karo

is a white sandbank lying on the S of two reefs about 3 miles W

of the same point. A 7.9m shoal is about 0.5 mile SE of

Ambatin, and another is the same distance SSE of Pasir Karo.

Gamyaha (Gamjaha), 6 miles S of Pasir Karo, has least depth

of 14.9m. Two more reefs are located 2.8 and 3 miles S and SE,

respectively, of Pasir Karo.

2.36 The island is sparsely populated. During good weather

anchorage is available with local knowledge almost everywhere off the E coast of Pulau Mandioli, but in considerable

depths in some places. Local knowledge is necessary.

2.36 Three other passages between Pulau Obit and Pulau Mandioli lead N from Selat Bacan in addition to the principal and

recommended passage, Selat Udjung Masaran, which was previously described in paragraph 2.35. It should be remembered

that reefs in these passages do not show clearly by discoloration.

2.36 All of these passages lead out to the broad clean basin to the

N, then several channels lead to Selat Sambaki between Pulau

Kasiruta and Pulau Bacan.

2.37 Selat Sambaki (Sambak Strait)(0°25'S., 127°17'E.),

between Pulau Bacan and Pulau Kasiruta, is used by vessels

proceeding N from Selat Bacan, or may be entered by vessels

coming from the W and passing between Pulau Mandioli and

Pulau Kasiruta. The S entrance to the strait is cut up into

narrow channels by the Batu Ampat Islands, which include

Pulau Waring, Pulau Batu Ampat, Nusa Uwa, Pulau Tambelik,

Pulau Tuada, and a number of smaller islands. All of these

islands are wooded except Pulau Tuada, the northernmost,

which is covered with coconut palms.

2.37 Selat Batu Ampat, the middle of the three channels forming the

S entrance to Selat Sambaki is between Pulau Batu Ampat and

Pulau Tambelik. It is marked by beacons, and is the recommended

channel and is generally taken by vessels using this route. The

maximum velocity of current in this strait is 3 knots. Two detached

reefs, with depths of 1.5 and 2.7m, are on the W side of the

fairway about 0.5 mile N of the SE extremity of Pulau Batu

Armpat; the 1.5m reef is marked by a beacon with a white ball. A

rock, awash, and reef, which extends SW from the W extremity of

Pulau Tambelik, is marked by a beacon with a black ball.

2.37 Selat Herberg, the strait E of Selat Batu Ampat, is a less

desirable passage and more narrow than Selat Batu Ampat. It

should not be used by vessels exceeding 60m. Selat Nanung

(Selat Nanoang), the strait W of Selat Batu Ampat, is less

advisable because of strong currents.

2.37 When the three straits come together, just N of Pulau

Tambelik, the conspicuous drying sandbank Pasir Nondang

(close off Pulau Bachan shore, 0.75 mile NNE of the N point of

Tambelik) serves as a good check for position.

2.37 A 7.8m shoal extends NE from Pulau Tuada. Pasir Masarang, with a least depth of 0.3m, is in the middle of the fairway

of Selat Sambaki, about 4.5 miles farther N.

2.37 North of Selat Batu Ampat, the shore of Pulau Bacan is

fairly low and has a couple of drying reefs which extend up to
22 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

0.6 mile offshore. A 6.4m shoal is 2 miles N of these reefs and

1 mile offshore.

2.37 The shore of Pulau Kasiruta is higher and can be approached

more closely. The most conspicuous spot is a bare rocky place

N of Tanjung Semo Semo.

2.37 The N entrance to Selat Sambaki is divided into two clear

channels by Pulau Toduku (0°20'S., 127°17'E.). The E of

these channels is restricted somewhat by a group of islets extending from the shore of Pulau Bacan. Vessels using the strait

should note that a 6m shoal 1.3 miles off the coast of Pulau

Bacan, 2.7 miles S of Tanjung Batumangara. Another shoal

4.1m is close off of Vuile Point, the NE point of Pulau

Kasiruta.

2.37 Directions.—For passage through Selat Sambaki from S,

when the sand bank of Pasir Nondang bears E keep near the

coast of Pulau Bacan until past Tanjung Indari (0°26'S.,

127°18'E.), then bring Nusa Poko Poko (0°20.5'S.,

127°18.3'E.) in range 004° with the E point of Pulau Tawalikecil, NW of Pulau Kasiruta. This range clears Pasir Masarang.

2.37 The N end of Selat Sambaki has two channels, W and E of

Pulau Toduku. The E channel is generally used and is clear of

dangers in the fairway.

The Bacan Islands (Continued)

2.38 Pulau Kasiruta (0°24'S., 127°12'E.), on the W side

of Selat Sambaki, is about 18 miles long, irregular, and hilly.

The highest peak, Buku Kabau, on the NE quarter of the island,

is 824m high. The coast is also irregular and rocky, and has

many small inlets and bays. Several small islets front the coast,

especially on the W side. The outermost danger is a 2.7m shoal

about 1 mile offshore and 1.75 miles SW of Tanjung Sengga,

the NW point of the island.

2.38 Anchorage.—The safest anchorage is in Teluk Kasiruta, on

the SE side of the island and NW of Pulau Batu Ampat.

2.38 Several suitable anchorages are on the W side of the island,

although monsoons cause a high sea and surf. Teluk Imbu

Imbu has too steep a bottom for anchorage.

2.38 A basin, with a depth of 39m, is in Teluk Besori; it is reached

through a narrow channel between two islets. The large village

of Kampung Tyoba Dahahi is here.

2.38 Kampung Palamea, the largest village on the island, is on

Teluk Loleo, 4.5 miles farther N; it is somewhat sheltered by

the Lata Lata Islands.

2.38 Teluk Mamang, the next bay to the N, is easily entered between two rocky islets. It offers sheltered anchorage in all

winds, in a depth of 40m.

Kepulauan Obi

2.39 Kepulauan Obi (1°30'S., 127°35'E.), between Selat

Obi (Obi Strait) and the Ceram Sea (Seram Sea), consists of

the large island of Pulau Obi and several smaller nearby

islands. The highest point in the group, near the middle of

Pulau Obi, is 1,611m high. Only a few permanent settlements

are on these islands. Most of the inhabitants come from neighboring islands; the principal occupations are the gathering of

forest products and fishing.

2.39 The passages between these islands are deep in the fairway

and clear of dangers, except the passages between Pulau Gomumu and the S side of Pulau Obi, and between Pulau Bisa

and the N side of Pulau Obi.

2.39 From June to September, the E and S coasts of the islands are

inaccessible because of high seas; from December to February

the same applies to the W and NW coast. Because of this,

shipping confines itself principally to the village of Kampung

Laiwui, on the N coast of Pulau Obi.

2.39 Caution.—Severe tide rips are experienced to a distance of

about 30 miles W of a point located about 40 miles NW of

Kepulauan Obi.

2.39 Pulau Tobalai (1°38'S., 128°20'E.), 7.75 miles E of the E

end of Pulau Obi, is a tableland, 240m high, which descends in

a step-like formation to the SW. The thick jungle extends close

to the rocky shore in many places. The island is steep-to, and

Selat Tobalai, the strait separating it from Pulau Obi, is clear

throughout.

2.40 South coast of Pulau Obi.—The coast rises steeply

from the sea and is covered with jungle except at the small

villages along the coast which may be recognized by their

coconut plantations. A steep drop at the E end of the interior

mountain range is conspicuous. Other conspicuous points are

the 965m peak, about 20 miles W of the E end of the island,

and a gap near the coast S of it. The higher peaks of the island

are usually enveloped by clouds.

2.40 The best anchorage is at the village of Wai Lower (1°44'S.,

127°36'E.) during the favorable seasons. A strong current may

be experienced near the points along this coast, except at this

anchorage.

2.40 At Wai Lower, there is both a diurnal and a semidiurnal tide.

Neither the spring highs nor the spring lows of the two tides

coincide. The HHW level occurs between June and August and

between December and February; the lowest in May and

November. The maximum rise and fall that can be expected

are, respectively, 0.7m above and 0.8m below mean sea level.

2.40 Pulau Gomumu (1°50'S., 127°36'E.), about 5 miles S of

Pulau Obi, is hilly but has no conspicuous summits; it rises to a

height of 279m. The E and S sides are fronted by a drying

coastal reef.

2.40 Gomumu Anchorage (1°51'S., 127°36'E.), on the S side of

Pulau Gomumu, affords anchorage for a small vessel with local

knowledge. The narrow channel leads over a bar with a least

depth of 7m. Inside the bar, the bay opens out to a basin with

depths of 18.3m to about 29m. Farther in, a narrow channel,

with a least depth of 7m between the reefs on either side, leads

to an inner basin with depths of 9.1 to 18.3m. The reefs on

either side of the narrow channel leading into the inner basin

are easily distinguished.

2.40 There is a 4.1m shoal, extending 1 mile out, close E of this

area.

Pasir Radja (Pasir Raja) (Sophia Reef) (1°47'S., 127°32'E.),

a reef 4 miles NW of Pulau Gomumu, has a depth of 8.2m, but

can seldom be recognized by discoloration. It is the only

danger in the otherwise clear channel between Pulau Gomumu

and Pulau Obi.

2.41 West coast of Pulau Obi.—The S half of this stretch

of coast is comparatively low and the foothills are farther

inland. Abreast of Pulau Malamala, it becomes high and steep.
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 23

Pub. 164

The channel between Pulau Malamala and Pulau Obi is clear.

Pasi Turi, reported to be conspicuous, is a rock on a drying reef

1.25 miles WSW of Pulau Malamala.

2.41 Vessels coming from S must take care to avoid the 1.2m

shoal 2.5 miles S of Pulau Malamala; the shoal is only slightly

marked by discoloration. A drying patch is 0.5 mile offshore

from Pulau Obi, E of the shoal. A village, visible from seaward

is close NE of the drying patch. Tanjung Kawassi (1°37'S.,

127°24'E.) is conspicuous because of the coconut plantation

around it. Reefs, extending 0.75 mile out, run from the drying

patch to Tanjung Ake Lamo, 6 miles S.

2.41 Pulau Obilatu (1°24'S., 127°20'E.), separated from the NW

end of Pulau Obi by a clear channel 1.25 miles wide, is

mountainous and has some very conspicuous summits, the

easternmost and highest of which is a sharply-pointed cone,

840m high. The only good anchorages are found in the bays on

the N side of the island. The peninsulas between these bays, as

well as Pulau Tusa, an islet N of the E end of Pulau Obilatu, are

bare and have a reddish color. The reef S of this islet and the

2.5m shoal off the W bay can be located by their discoloration.

Squalls off the mountains occur at times, especially in the bays.

2.41 Vessels using the passage between Pulau Obi and Pulau

Obilatu and coming from the NE should avoid the S side of the

passage between Pulau Bisa and Pulau Obi because of the reefs

off Pulau Obi. When the S point of Pulau Belang Belang and

the NW point of Pulau Obilau come in range, course should be

altered to port, then steer between Pulau Obi and Pulau Obilatu

on a SW course. There are no off-lying dangers and practically

no shore reefs between these last two islands.

2.42 Pulau Belang Belang (1°20'S., 127°24'E.), NE of

Pulau Obilatu, is low with a slight elevation at the middle. The

N coast is steep and sandy, but the S coast and the coasts of

Telor, an islet close off its SW side, are muddy and covered

with mangroves. The S and W sides of Pulau Belang Belang

are fronted with reefs and shoals and a 2.5m charted shoal is

about 2 miles W of it.

2.42 Anchorage is available, in 53m, 0.3 mile offshore, with the

NE point of Pulau Belang Belang bearing 340°. Vessels approach the anchorage steering 324° with two high trees, near

the NE point, ahead.

2.42 The passage between Pulau Belang Belang and Pulau Obilatu is easy and clean, except for the 2.5m shoal W of Pulau

Belang Belang.

2.42 Pulau Tapat (1°10'S., 127°25'E.), 5.5 miles N of Pulau

Belang Belang, is the NW island of the group. It is covered

with jungle and rises to two fairly-conspicuous summits, 491

and 563m high.

2.42 Pulau Bisa (1°14'S., 127°36'E.), N of Pulau Obi and E of

Pulau Tapat, from which it is separated by a deep channel, is

covered with jungle, except at the few villages, where coconut

plantations may be seen. It is composed of a range of hills, of

which the highest summit, 467m high is at the NW end. Pulau

Jerum (Pulau Djerum), at the NE end of the island, consists of

a group of mangrove-covered mud banks on the broad drying

shore reef which extends from the E coast; a single conspicuous tree stands out above the others. Pulau Santare, at the

SE end of the island, is a low islet on the same shore reef; its

high trees make it fairly conspicuous.

2.42 Caution.—Kurier Reef (1°13'S., 127°49'E.), with a least

depth of 1.8m and steep-to on all sides, is 7.5 miles E of Pulau

Bisa. It consists of sand and coral, and is well marked by the

discoloration of the water.

2.43 North coast of Pulau Obi.—Nearer the N coast of

the island and separated from the principal range is a group of

mountains rising to a height of 1,290m; very often these peaks

are surrounded by clouds. The westernmost peak, 1,290m high,

appears as a perfect cone when seen from the N.

2.43 From Tanjung Leleo Basso (1°24'S., 127°26'E.) to Kadera,

about 4.75 miles E, the shore is sparsely wooded, hilly, and

somewhat reddish in color. The two small off-lying wooded

islets of Kerka (1°26'S., 127°27'E.) and Kadera, 30 to 40m

high are quite conspicuous. Then from Kadera to Tanjung

Anggai, 15 miles E, the coast is low and covered alternately

with jungle and coconut plantations. The inhabited section of

the coast begins at Tanjung Tabuedji, and along it are the villages of Kampung Baru, Kampung Laiwui, Kampung Badjo,

Kampung Ritja, and Kampung Anggai. Many reefs are in the

channel between Pulau Bisa and this stretch of coast. The large

drying reef N of Tanjung Tabuedji is marked by two groups of

bushes. Pulau Sambiki, near the shore opposite the SE end of

Pulau Bisa, is small sandy, and covered with coconut palms.

2.43 Aspect.—A 200m peak on the N side of Pulau Obi, about

1.25 miles S of the village of Ritja, is reported to be a conspicuous and useful landmark.

2.43 For 9 miles, between Tanjung Anggai and Tanjung Woka

(1°26'S., 127°53'E.), the hills are close to the coast and limestone rocks show in places. This stretch is fronted by many

reefs and shoals. The largest drying reef, with drying and shoal

patches NW of it, is about 3.5 miles offshore; on these outer

reefs are two small islets. Between the W side of Tanjung

Woka and Pulau Woka there is good anchorage. Pulau Woka is

partly covered with coconut plantations.

2.43 A light is shown 2 miles S of Tanjung Woka.

2.43 Between Tanjung Woka and Tanjung Parigi (1°34'S.,

128°06'E.), a distance of about 15.5 miles, most of the coast is

fronted by a barrier reef with islands and shoals within it. Except for the coconut plantations at some of the villages along

the coast and on portions of the islands, this entire coast is

covered with mangroves. Good anchorage can be found most

anywhere in fairly deep water within the barrier reef, through

which there are some deep passages. The reefs NW of Marosa

are well marked by discoloration.

2.43 Southeast of Tanjung Parigi, the low coast is covered with

jungle; there is hardly any beach.

2.44 Laiwui Roads (1°20'S., 127°38'E.), on the N coast of

Pulau Obi, is somewhat sheltered by Pulau Bisa.

2.44 The approaches to Laiwui Roads are encumbered by reefs,

some of which are only slightly marked by discoloration.

Laiwui Reef, which dries, is about 3 miles WSW of Laiwui.

Pulau Sambiki is a small sandy islet covered with coconut

palms off the N coast of Pulau Obi about 4.5 miles E of

Laiwui.

2.44 Vessels approaching the roads from E are advised to pass

close along the reef at Pulau Santare and along the SE end of

Pulau Bisa until a suitable bearing (between 190° and 170°) on

the conspicuous tin roof at Laiwui is obtained. When coming
24 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

from W, keep outside about the 200m curve surrounding Pulau

Obi until Laiwui lies between the above bearings. Anchor, in

about 20m, 0.2 mile from the coastal reef, E of the pier at

Laiwui.

2.44 Laiwui (1°20'S., 127°38'E.) has a small pier. 

2.44 Tides—Currents.—At Laiwui Roads, there is both a diurnal and semidiurnal tide. Neither the spring highs nor the spring

lows of the two tides coincide. The highest water level occurs

in June and December, the lowest in April or May and October

or November; the maximum rise and fall that can be expected

are, respectively, about 0.6m above and 0.45m below mean sea

level. There are no tidal currents in the roadstead. The water in

the vicinity of the roads is very clear and the bottom can often

be seen in depths of 11.9m.

2.45 The Lawin Islands (1°31'S., 128°43'E.) and Pulau

Kekik, 17 to 23.5 miles ENE of Pulau Tobalai, are a group of

small but heavily-wooded islands. Pulau Kekik (Pulau Kekek),

the westernmost, is 211m high and has the appearance of a

truncated cone from all directions. Toppershudie (Tema), a

small rocky islet 43m high and covered with shrubs, is 2 miles

NE of Pulau Kekik and on the S end of a bank of soundings.

2.45 Pulau Lawin, the middle islet of the three easternmost of the

group, is a circular hill 236m high. Nearby Watinger and

Laliola are both mainly flat, except for an 86m hillock at the N

point of Watinger. A light is shown on Laliola. Shoal water,

well marked by discoloration, extends SE from Laliola. These

three islands are on the S part of a bank of soundings. A 14.6m

shoal, not marked by discoloration, is 0.6 mile N of Pulau

Lawin. The only suitable anchorages, weather permitting, are

on the bank N of Toppershudie and in the N part of the channel

between Pulau Lawin and Watinger.

2.45 The whole group is uninhabited.

2.45 Pulau Pisang (1°23'S., 128°55'E.), nearly 13 miles NE of

Pulau Lawin, is very steep and has two summits, 430 and 464m

high. The island is reported to be a good radar target up to a

distance of 18 miles. It is uninhabited and hardly penetrable

due to its steepness and dense growth. Two detached rocks

surrounded by shoal water are 0.3 mile off the NW side of the

island, and another rock with shoal water around it is 0.4 mile

SE of the island. Contingent on the monsoons, good anchorage

may be found on the N or SE side of the island, although a

considerable current may be experienced on the SE side. Local

knowledge is necessary.

2.45 Kepulauan Boo (1°10'S., 129°22'E.), a group of islands NE

of Pulau Pisang, are described in paragraph 2.91.

Kepulauan Sula

2.46 Kepulauan Sula (1°50'S., 125°20'E.), a group of islands W of Kepulauan Obi and E of the central peninsula of

Sulawesi (Celebes), consist of three very large islands and

several smaller ones. The islands of Pulau Lifoematola, Pulau

Mangole (Pulau Mangoli), and Pulau Taliabu (Pulau Taliaboe)

form a chain extending in an E-W direction about 130 miles;

they are high and bold and are sparsely populated. Pulau

Sanana, extending in a S direction from abreast the middle of

Pulau Mangoli, has extensive coconut plantations.

2.46 The islands of Kepulauan Sula give a good radar return from

a distance of 24 miles.

Pulau Taliabu (Pulau Taliaboe) (1°50'S., 124°50'E.), the

westernmost and largest island of the group, has a range of

mountains rising to a height of 1,380m through its central and

W part. There are, however, no conspicuous peaks. This island

is described in Pub. 163, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Borneo,

Jawa, Sulawesi, and Nusa Tenggara.

Selat Tjapalulu (Selat Tjapaloeloe) (1°50'S., 125°20'E.), the

narrow passage separating Pulau Taliabu and Pulau Mangole,

is also described in Pub. 163, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Borneo, Jawa, Sulawesi, and Nusa Tenggara.

2.47 Pulau Mangole (Pulau Mangoli) (1°50'S., 125°50'E.)

is 62 miles long but comparatively narrow. It is mountainous

and has two mountain ranges with a conspicuous depression

between them. The highest peak, 1,147m high, is in the Lokoe

Mountains range on the E part of the island and is about 16

miles W of the E end of the island.

2.47 Vessels navigating along the coasts of Pulau Mangole should

expect either E or W currents.

The N coast of Pulau Mangole from Selat Tjapalulu to

abreast of the Tabulu Islands (Taboeloe Islands) is low.

Tanjung Wajteta (1°47'S., 125°22'E.), the NW extremity of

the island, is rocky. Except in bays and inlets, sandy beaches

will be found E of this point. Liku (Likoe) is a low islet

covered with trees. The channel between the Tabulu Islands

and the main shore is not recommended, because of the dangers in it. There are also shoals to the E of these islands, and

navigation within 2 miles of their E coast is dangerous.

2.47 About 9 miles E of the Tabulu Islands is the low and wooded

island of Koro, and between them are two off-lying dangers.

Between 3 miles WSW and 2.5 miles SW of Koro lies a submerged rock and a 0.3m shoal. East of Koro, to the E end of

Pulau Mangoli, the remaining dangers are close to the shore.

Two conspicuous masses of rock with reddish-brown sides are

on a drying reef, close to the shore at Tabobi and Fatsati, about

9 and 5 miles W of the E end of Pulau Mangoli.

2.47 Anchorage.—West of the Tabulu Islands, the only suitable

anchorages are in the bights of the coast. There is good

anchorage almost anywhere between the Tabulu Islands and

Tanjung Lampaoe during the Southeast Monsoon and during

the turning periods with due regard for the off-lying dangers

mentioned above. Vessels anchoring 0.2 mile off this coast, in

33m, have reported the current sets E and W with a maximum

velocity of 2 knots at spring tides during the South Monsoon.

2.47 The village of Liku, SW of the islet of the same name, is

situated on the W side of the entrance to a large bight. In the

inner part of this bight, SE of two small islets, is a small anchorage, with a depth of 6.8m.

2.48 South coast of Pulau Mangoli.—This coast can, in

general, be approached to within a short distance, but the sea is

quite rough during the Southeast Monsoon and eddies have

been observed off the headlands. The points along the coast, as

well as the mountains in the W part, are quite conspicuous.

2.48 Vesuvius Bay (1°52'S., 125°22'E.) is the NW part of the

large bay between Tanjung Sakomata and Tanjung Batu Kapitan, a high rocky point with a very conspicuous pillar-shaped

rock on a drying patch near it. In this large bay are the two islets, Pasilpah and Kena; the former is hilly on its W part, and

the latter has the appearance of a white sandy beach.
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 25

Pub. 164

2.48 Tides—Currents.—At Vesuvius Bay, there is both a dirunal

and a semidiurnal tide. The spring lows of the two tides may

coincide. The lowest LW level occurs in June and December;

the maximum rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, 0.7m above and 1.2m below mean sea level.

2.48 From Tanjung Batu Kapitan, the coast trends E for 22 miles

to Pulau Sambiki (1°56'S., 125°47'E.), a steep and high islet.

Tanjung Fargata (1°57'S., 125°32'E.), 5.5 miles E of Tanjung

Batu Kapitan, is high, round, and rocky. A string of shoals and

drying reefs extends nearly 3 miles W from Pulau Sambiki.

The village of Kaporo with its coconut plantations, 3.5 miles

W of Pulau Sambiki, is conspicuous.

2.48 Between Pulau Sambiki and the coast is a clear channel,

through which vessels can proceed to anchorages in the two

small bays NW of the islet. In the large bay E of Pulau Sambiki

anchorage can be found almost anywhere, have due regard for

the previously-mentioned shoal spots.

2.49 Selat Mangole (Mangoli Strait) (1°57'S., 125°55'E.),

separating Pulau Mangole and Pulau Sanana, is nearly 2 miles

wide. A 6.8m shoal is in the middle of the strait. A shallower spot

was formerly reported, but later surveys failed to locate it. Strong

currents of up to 3 to 4 knots, however, prevent very thorough

surveys. Strong eddies have been reported in the strait, especially

S of the 6.8m shoal. The Pulau Mangoli shore can be approached

rather close-to; the Pulau Sanana shore is fringed by a drying reef.

The best channel is N of the 6.8m shoal.

2.49 Numerous small houses and coconut plantations are scattered along the N shore of Selat Mangole and to the E. A shoal

with a depth of 5.5m and possibly less is close offshore abreast

of the village of Mangole (1°55'S., 125°57'E.).

2.49 Directions.—A vessel proceeding through Selat Mangole

from W should keep Pulau Sambiki astern, bearing 270°,

which leads N of a 0.4 shoal which is not marked by discoloration and is 2.5 miles ESE of that islet, and pass 0.33 mile S of

Tanjung Botu (1°56'S., 125°55'E.), then clear the reef extending from the NE side of Pulau Sanana; when Tanjung Wakapara, the NE point of Pulau Sanana is in line with Tanjung

Kabau, about 2 miles S, bearing 180°, course may be altered as

required.

2.50 The coast of Pulau Mangoli E of Selat Mangoli can be

followed at a short distance off, except for the only danger, a

0.4m shoal about 2 miles SW of Tanjung Gohadjodjara

(1°53'S., 126°14'E.).

Selat Lifumatola (Lifoematola Strait) (1°49'S., 126°21'E.),

between Pulau Mangoli and Pulau Lifumatola, is of no importance to navigation and should not be used without local

knowledge. It is only 0.3 mile wide and it is further restricted

by islets and shoals, so that the widest navigable channel is

only 137m at the narrowest part. Navigation is also made hazardous by the strong tidal currents. There are whirlpools and

eddies over the banks and shoals and, during the South Monsoon, there is a troublesome sea. The slack water period is

short. 

2.50 Pulau Lifumatola (1°49'S., 126°27'E.), the E island of the

Kepulauan Sula group, is uninhabited. It is hilly and rises

steeply from the sea; the highest point is 258m high. Limo is a

conspicuous little rocky islet lying close to the SE side. The

coast back of the islet, as well as Tanjung Dehekolano, the E

end of the island, is composed of conspicuous white masses of

limestone and is marked by a light; a racon is situated at the

light. NW of Tanjung Dehekolano are three narrow inlets;

suitable anchorage may be found in the southernmost of these

during the North Monsoon and during the turning periods.

2.50 Strong E or W currents may be experienced on the N and S

sides of the island. Around the S end they set either N or S and

cause strong eddies. Because of these eddies, and particularly

nasty seas if the wind and currents are opposite, the E point of

Pulau Lifumatola should be given a berth of 5 miles.

2.50 Tide rips have also been observed about 33 miles ESE and

20 miles ENE of Tanjung Dehekolano.

2.50 Pulau Lifumatola serves as a good radar target at a distance

of 28 miles, and Tanjung Dehekolano is reported to be a good

radar target at a distance of 17 miles.

2.51 Pulau Sanana (2°03'S., 125°59'E.), the southernmost

island of the Kepulauan Sula group, extends about 31 miles in

a S direction from abreast the middle of Pulau Mangole. From

E and W it appears as a single mountain range with a number

of conspicuous summits 488 to 678m high. The highest peak is

at the S end. In general the coast is low and has sandy beaches

with coconut palms, interrupted in places by rocky formations.

Except for the N end of the island and the N half of the W

coast, vessels can approach the island rather close-to.

2.51 The N coast is marshy and covered with mangroves. Large

vessels usually stay clear of this coast.

2.51 Sanana Bay (2°03'S., 125°59'E.) is a small indentation at

the NE end of Pulau Sanana. The entrance is only 91m wide,

but has a depth of 14.6m at mid-channel. The depths range

from 11.9 to 29m. There is a flagstaff 0.5 mile SW of the

village.

2.51 Directions.—Vessels should enter the bay keeping a beacon

(cone topmark), at the head of the bay, bearing 286°. Because

the currents set across the entrance, it is necessary to enter at a

fair rate of speed. Because of the space required for maneuvering once inside it is not advisable to enter when another vessel

is already in the bay. When about 0.2 mile from the beacon, let

go the starboard anchor in a depth of 15m. After the vessel has

swung, a hawser should be laid out to a post N of the pier on

the shore near the beacon.

2.52 Sanana (2°03'S., 125°59'E.), a small village in which

a government official is stationed, lies at the head of the bay. 

2.52 There is a large mosque in the village and a small pier, with a

depth of 0.6m at its head.

2.52 Water can be supplied from the stream on the S side of the

village. 

2.52 Tides—Currents.—At Sanana Bay, there is both a dirunal

and semidiurnal tide. The spring lows of the tide coincide. The

lowest water occurs in April or May and October or November.

The maximum rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 0.5m above and 0.9m below mean sea level. The

currents usually set across the entrance.

2.52 South of the village of Sanana, there are no suitable anchorages; the same is true for the S half of the W coast. On both

coasts are a number of villages in the midst of coconut plantations. A coast road connects the villages. Tanjung Patahoj, at

the middle of the W coast, is low and marshy. Tanjung Fatparoma, 7.5 miles further N is rocky. Between these points is a
26 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

ridge of shoals and reefs extending up to 2 miles offshore. Several other charted dangers front the coast N of the latter point.

2.52 At the village of Kabauw (Kaban), 1.5 miles N of Tanjung

Patahoj, a shallow lagoon indents the coast; a bridge crosses

the narrow entrance. North of here, anchorage can be found

almost anywhere clear of the reefs and shoals.

2.52 At the village of Kampung Molboefa, on the NW side of the

island, there is a deep basin within a drying reef. Vessels may

find temporary anchorage, in 10.9 or 11.9m, about 0.5 mile offshore, SW of the entrance to the basin. Care is necessary to

avoid the 5m shoal WSW of the village, the 0.5m shoal 1 mile

N, and the reefs off the entrance.

2.53 Morotai (2°20'N., 128°28'E.), an island about 10.5

miles E of the N end of Halmahera, is about 40 miles long and

is high over its greater part. The highest point (2°13.5'N.,

128°25'E.) is 1,250m high and is one of the summits of the

Sabatai Mountains (Sabalai Mountains), which stretches across

the island in a NE-SW direction. On the river banks and on the

flat SW part of the island are forests of sago trees; in the

interior are dammar forests. The island is frequented by people

who collect dammar gum and also fish among the islands off

the W coast. A number of villages are along the coast. It was

reported that the NE coast of the island lies 4 to 5 miles farther

NE than charted.

2.53 The NW coast of Morotai between Tanjung Wayabula

(Tanjung Wajabula) (2°17'N., 128°12'E.) and Tanjung Padangi,

about 24.5 miles to the NE, is steep and vessels can navigate

rather close inshore bearing in mind that a narrow coastal reef

exists in places. Along this coast are many mountain tops, but

because they have no distinctive features they are not much use

as landmarks.

2.53 Anchorage can be found almost anywhere along this coast,

but the depths are great. Anchorage can be obtained off the

village of Kampung Tijo (2°25'N., 128°18'E.), in 21m; off

Kampung Libano (2°29'N., 128°21'E.), in 27m; off Kampung Hapo (2°31'N., 128°24'E.), in about 28m; and off Kampung Berriberri (2°34'N., 128°26'E.), in 14m.

2.53 Teluk Sopi (2°35'N., 128°30'E.), the bay between Tanjung

Padangi and Tanjung Sopi, about 7.5 miles ENE, offers good

anchorage during favorable winds. Stay clear of the charted 6m

shoal in the outer part of the bay, 1.25 miles NE of Tanjung

Padangi. The village of Kampung Sopi is at the head of the

bay.

2.53 Tanjung Sopi (2°38.5'N., 128°34'E.), the N end of Morotai,

is marked by a light; it is a low but gradually sloping point with

a broader reef than that found on either side of it. Several

boulders are on the edge of the reef.

2.54 East coast of Morotai.—Between Tanjung Sopi and

Tanjung Selepia, 15 miles S, the shore reef is steep-to. From

there to Tanjung Posiposi (2°06.5'N., 128°34'E.), about 21

miles further SSW, the coast is foul. A barrier reef, which may

be distinguished by the heavy surf on it, extends up to 0.5 mile

offshore.

2.54 Winds—Weather.—High seas and rollers from the SE and

NE have been experienced. Heavy showers from the SSE,

called "Angin Lelei" by the natives, occur at the middle of the

South Monsoon. They come up about 1000 or 1100 without

any warning and are accompanied by a heavy sea.

2.54 Tides—Currents.—Strong currents may be experienced off

the NE end of the island. At Tanjung Gorango (2°30'N.,

128°41'E.), a rate of 3 knots has been observed on a rising tide.

2.55 Berebere (Berri Berri) (2°23'N., 128°40'E.), an anchorage, is in a bight of the E coast about 16 miles S of the N

point of the island. It is sheltered by a large drying reef on

which is the mangrove-covered island of Tabailengo. The

entrance between this reef and another drying reef to the N is

not safe because of several shoals which do not show by discoloration. Shoals of 7.8m and 2.3m are located 0.6 mile NW

and N respectively, of Tabailengo. Vessels can anchor, in 40m,

sand and coral, NW of Tabailengo, but care must be taken to

avoid the reefs and shoals on the W side of the bight and off the

S entrance. The village of Kampung Berebere, at the head of

the anchorage, is the center of the native trade in dammar gum

and copra.

2.55 Tanjung Boboro (2°19'N., 128°39'E.) and Kampung Busu

Busu, 7.5 miles S, the coast is fronted by a barrier reef. At

Tanjung Lefau, where a conspicuous small rock is on the coast

reef, there is a wide break in the barrier reef. A wide sandy

beach extends N from this point. Dangers are found near the

coast N and S of the barrier reef. The bight at Kampung Busu

Busu affords anchorage, but it is not very safe from October to

March, when heavy rollers come in.

2.56 South coast of Morotai.—Between Tanjung Posiposi (2°06'N., 128°34'E.) and Tanjung Gila, about 20 miles

WSW, the narrow coast reef is steep-to. Two reefs, extending

0.75 mile offshore, are 4.5 and 6.5 miles SW of Tanjung Posiposi.

2.56 A small basin for small vessels only is off Kampung

Samgowo (2°06'N., 128°33'E.) (World Port Index No. 52640)

close W of Tanjung Posiposi. Anchorage can be found outside,

but rollers are usually experienced. Vessels call here occasionally.

2.56 Kampung Sabati (Kampung Sabatai), 8.5 miles W of Kampung Sangowo, is at the mouth of the river of the same name,

which can only be navigated by small craft. During favorable

weather ,anchorage may be found off the village, in 48m, sand.

2.57 West coast of Morotai.—The coast between Tanjung

Gila and Tanjung Wayabula, 18 miles N, is fronted by numerus shoals, reefs, and islets which lie up to 5 miles offshore. The

reefs are well marked by discoloration, and the passages within

them are available to vessels of considerable draft. There is

nothing particularly conspicuous about the mountains, with the

exception of Bandera (2°07'N., 128°16'E.), a 201m coastal hill

8 miles N of Tanjung Gila.

Tanjung Gila (Tanjung Dehegila) (1°59'N., 128°15'E.) is a

low wooded tongue of land. A couple of palms on the W side

are conspicuous. Pulau Mitita is a thickly-wooded coral island

1.75 miles WSW of Tanjung Gila. Two detached 4m shoals are

0.75 mile and 1.5 miles, respectively, WSW of Tanjung Gila,

and a 4.8m shoal is between these two shoals.

2.57 The outermost danger in this vicinity is Pono Ponata, a 7.3m

shoal about 1.75 miles W of Pulau Mitita. Midway between

Pona Ponata and Goja Uku, a drying reef about 2 miles NNE,

is Lutu Lutu, a shoal with a depth of 5.8m. Midway between
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 27

Pub. 164

Pona Ponata and Pulau Mitita is Dododahohe, a reef that dries

0.3m and is marked by a light.

2.58 Islets off the W coast of Morotai.—Kokoyo (Kokoja), Kolorai, Dodola-kecil, and Dodola-besar are on a drying

reef which is 2.75 to 9 miles NNE of Pulau Matita. The two N

of these islets are not inhabited, but are covered with coconut

plantations; they can be reached from Kolorai by foot at LW. A

conspicuous tree is on the reef about 183m N of the NW end of

Dodola-besar. Between these islets and the shore to the E is

another group of islets, including Sumusuma, Ruke Rukete,

Bobogono, Rube, and Lungulungu.

2.58 On the next large drying reef to the N are the islets Lolebabesar, Loleba-kecil, Pulau Galogalo Besar, and Pulau

Galogalo-kecil, on which there are some houses and coconut

plantations. Close W of Pulau Galogalo Besar is the small islet

of Pelo. It is reported that shoal water extends S from Pelo. The

large village of Dowongi Kokotu is on the coast abreast of this

group and at the foot of Bandera hill.

2.58 Pulau Ngelengele-kecil (2°10'N., 128°13'E.) and Pulau

Ngelengele-besar, about 1.5 miles NW, on the larger reefs,

have large villages and coconut plantations. On the coast

abreast of the latter is the village of Kampung Tilei, with the

inhabited islet of Katjuwawa close off it.

2.58 The W coast of Morotai is fronted with numerous shoals and

reefs and there are also many shoals and reefs laying off the

off-lying islands and islets.

2.58 Anchorage.—A pontoon in ruins was reported about 2.75

miles NE of Tanjung Gila. A pier in ruins is about 4.5 miles

NNE of the same point, with a green copra shed and a mosque

about 0.5 mile and 1 mile NNW of the pier. Anchorage for two

122m long vessels may be obtained, in 10.9m, about 0.6 mile

W of the green shed.

2.58 Directions.—Vessels approaching from W should steer for

Tanjung Gila on a course of 100°. When the right tangents of

Kokoyo and Kolorai are in range, change course to 060°, steering for the ruined pontoon. When the W edge of the ruined pier

is in range with the green shed and mosque, bearing 027°, they

should be steered for. When about 0.6 mile from the ruined

wharf, course should be altered to 000° for the anchorage,

passing midway between the Morotai shore and the two small

islets about 0.7 mile SW of the ruined pier.

2.59 Wayabula Roads (2°17'N., 128°12'E.) (World Port

Index No. 52630), S and SW of the point of the same name,

can be approached from the W by passing S of Saminjamau

and keeping the S side of that islet on a 282° bearing astern.

Vessels then steer in mid-channel, in 20m, with a conspicuous

tree on Tanjung Wayabula bearing 038° and the head of the

pier at the village E of the pier bearing 073°. A more sheltered

anchorage is close N of the two drying reefs S of the village. To

reach this anchorage pass between the W reef and the 0.9m

shoal S of it, then haul N between the two reefs. Vessels call

here regularly. A mosque and a flagstaff are in the village.

Pulau Rao (Pulau Rau) (2°21'N., 128°09'E.), off the W side

of Morotai, has a mountain range along its E side. Its highest

summit, 475m high, is conical in appearance when seen from

SW. Close S of the summit is a lower and less conspicuous top

which terminates in a 281m hill near the SW side of the island.

The E side of the island rises rather steeply; the W side slopes

more gradually and ends in a wide plain covered with jungle

and coconut plantations in places. Saminjamau, at the S end of

the island, is a heavily-wooded islet with a rocky W side.

Tunane, at the N end, and Tjapali, near the E side, are two

small, rocky, and heavily-wooded islets. There are three caves

in the steep cliff in the vicinity of Kampung Aru, on the E coast

about 2.5 miles S of the N end of the island, which are visible

from seaward.

Selat Rau (Rao Strait) (2°20'N., 128°12'E.), the strait

between Pulau Rau and Morotai, has a least depth of 6m in the

fairway. A bank with a least depth of 7.9m extends about 0.8

mile from the W side of the strait. The channels each side of

the shoal are indicated by strong tide rips. 

2.59 Selat Morotai (2°17'N., 128°06'E.), the deep strait between

the N end of Halmahera and the islets and reefs off the W coast

of Morotai, is 6.5 miles wide, clear, and easily navigated. In its

S approach, however, a few charted dangers are found. Of

these, the 7.3m spots 1.75 miles W of Pulau Mitita have

already been mentioned. A 31m bank is in the N part of Selat

Morotai, about 3.75 miles WNW of the N end of Pulau

Ngelengele-besar. A 18.3m shoal is 2.5 miles SW of Pulau

Mitita. The Momow Reefs, two reefs with depthsof 6.7m and

7.8m, lie 9.5 and 11.75 miles, respectively, SW of the same

islet.

Halmahera (Continued)

2.60 Supu Bay (2°11'N., 127°59'E.), at the N end of

Halmahera, is entered between Tanjung Bisoa and Tanjung

Djodefa (Tanjung Jojefa), about 7 miles E. Both points have a

narrow fringing reef but may be rounded safely at a comparatively short distance. The bay is clear and affords suitable

anchorage, in 27m, off the village at the head. The shore reef is

widest near the village extending over 183m offshore; the

rocks visible at high water are within the edge of the reef.

2.60 In general, the E coast of Halmahera is densely overgrown,

hilly, mountainous, and inhospitable. At many points the coast

is a great wall of rock rising precipitously out of the sea. The

shoals and reefs off this coast are also steep-to. The islands

near the E coast are nearly all low. Morotai (described beginning in paragraph 2.53) and Pulau Sayafi (described in paragraph 2.71), being steep and high, are exceptions, as are Pulau

Pakal and Pulau Gei in Teluk Buli (described beginning in

paragraph 2.69).

2.60 From Tanjung Djodjefa (Tanjung Jojefa) (2°12'N.,

128°04'E.) to Tanjung Salimuli, a distance of about 14 miles,

the coast may be approached close-to, however, the 1.8m shoal

off Lapi and the 4.1m shoal NE of Tanjung Salimuli must be

avoided. Anchorage may be found during favorable weather

conditions at the villages of Saluta (2°04'N., 127°58'E.), Lapi,

and Tufa Ma Lole, but the water is deep and the bottom is

steep. Local knowledge is necessary.

2.60 Teluk Galela (1°53'N., 127°55'E.) is entered between Tanjung Salimuli and Tanjung Luwari (Tanjung Luari), about

10.75 miles S. Both of these points are low, but Tanjung

Luwari may be identified by Gunung Mamuya (Gunung Mamuja), a 930m conical mountain 2 miles S of it. The N shore of

the bay is close to the foothills of a mountain range. The W

shore is backed by a broad plain on the S part of which are the

two detached hills, Tarakan Itji and Tarakan Lamo, 280m and
28 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

380m, high, respectively. Temporary anchorage can be found

almost anywhere along the shore, in a depth of about 50m.

2.60 There are several shallow areas along the shores of the bay.

Off the coast E of Possi Possi, 0.5 mile and 1 mile ENE of

Limau, are 1.8m shoals. Another reef reaching 2.6 miles N of

Galela Roads extends 1 mile offshore with a depth of 4.1m.

East and SE of Tanjung Bongo are shallow reefs. Another 2.8m

shoal is located 0.7 miles WNW of Tanjung Luari.

2.61 Galela Roads (1°50'N., 127°51'E.), at the SW corner

of the bay, affords anchorage, in 29 to 50m, fine sand, between

the pier and the islet W of Tanjung Bongo. It is sheltered

during the Southeast Monsoon, but it is not safe during the

Northwest Monsoon because of rollers. Landing is possible,

however, even with the heaviest surf, S of the above-mentioned

islet.

2.61 Kampung Galela (1°50'N., 127°51'E.) is at the SW corner

of Teluk Galela. There is a boat pier S of the village. Some

buildings with zinc roofs in the N part of the village can be

seen for a considerable distance. Vessels call at Kampung

Galela regularly and at villages to the N to load wood. 

2.61 Tides—Currents.—At Galela Roads, there is both a diurnal

and a semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates. Neither the

spring highs nor the spring lows of the two tides coincide. The

maximum rise and fall that can be expected are about 0.6m

above and 0.6m below mean sea level. Currents in the vicinity

of the roads are negligible until about 6 or 8 miles off, when the

monsoon drifts become noticeable.

2.62 Kepulauan Tobelo (1°49'N., 127°56'E.) is a small

group of islands located offshore between Tanjung Luwari and

Pulau Miti, about 17 miles to the SE. The largest of these are

Pulau Tolonuu (Tonuu), Pulau Kokara-besar (Kakara Lamo),

Pulau Tagalaya (Tagaja), Pulau Kolorai, and Pulau Miti. They

are low coral islands, but are excellent landmarks because they

are covered with high trees. They are rocky to the E and NE.

Patola, a 3.2m reef, 1 mile E of Pulau Tagalaya, is the only

detached danger outside of the islands; it is usually marked by

discoloration and occasionally by breakers.

2.62 A clear channel runs between the foul ground that fronts the

Halmahera shore and the group of islands between Pulau Tolonuu and Pulau Kolorai. Clear passages are also found between

the islands.

2.62 Currents may be encountered outside the islands and along

the coast S of Pulau Miti, but among the islands and between

them and the shore there is no current of any consequence.

2.62 The high mountains of Halmahera are also conspicuous. Gunung Mamuya has already been described in paragraph 2.60.

Valsche Dukono, 4 miles SW of Gunung Mamuya (Mamuja),

is a 930m mountain that looks very much like Gunung Dukono, the 1,275m active volcano 5.5 miles S of Gunung Mamuya. Between these two is a double peak called Mede, about

1,097m high. East of Gunung Dukono is a lower chain with a

serrated appearance. Togohi, a 1,279m peak, is the most conspicuous and southernmost summit of the higher chain. South

of it the land drops to a broad plain, on which are the fairly

conspicuous mountains of Tokito, Tami, and Ah, from about

518 to 579m high.

2.62 Tami (1°31'N., 127°52'E.) has been reported to be a good

radar target up to a distance of 9 miles.

2.62 Anchorage.—Along the coast are several anchorages, all of

which require local knowledge. South of Tanjung Ruku, about

3 miles SE of Tanjung Luwari, there is anchorage, in 29m. At

Kampung Popilo, about 1 mile farther E, there is anchorage

between the off-lying islets of Mede and Popilo. Anchorage

can also be found, in 29m, outside the shoal patches at Kampung Wari, about 6 miles SE of Tanjung Luwari.

2.63 Tobelo Roads (1°44'N., 128°01'E.) is formed and

sheltered by Pulau Kumu and the reef which connects it to

Halmahera. The most conspicuous mark is a tin roof at the S

end of the village and abreast the S pier. 

2.63 An oil depot at Kapakupa (1°37'N., 127°59'E.), on the N

side of a small bay 4 miles NW of the N point of Miti, is served

by a pier; a light is shown near the root of the pier.

2.63 About 0.3 mile SW of the SW extremity of Kumu is the

small islet of Pulau Ubu Ubu. This islet is on a detached drying

reef on the SE side of the roadstead. A detached reef, marked

by a green conical beacon at its S end is close SE of Pulau Ubu

Ubu; a 1.8m shoal marked by a red conical beacon is midway

between Pulau Ubu Ubu and the shore; a 0.3m shoal is about

0.1 mile N of the N end of the reef on which Pulau Ubu Ubu

lies.

2.63 A detached reef, which dries, marked by a red conical beacon on its N edge, is about 0.4 mile SE of Pulau Kumu. The

reef fringing the S side of Pulau Kumu is marked at its W end

by a beacon. Tanjung Pilawana is about 0.6 mile NW of Kumu.

2.63 The limit of the roadstead is the arc of a circle, with a radius

of 2,100m and the head of the S pier as center.

2.63 Anchorage.—Large vessels anchor S of Pulau Ubu Ubu,

where there are depths of 14.6 to 18.3m. This anchorage

should be approached from seaward by way of the channel between Kumu and the detached drying reef SE of it. The anchorage is suitable for one vessel up to 122m long.

2.63 Small vessels should approach the roadstead by passing

between the SE side of Kumu and the detached reef, marked by

a daybeacon, SE of it, then NE of Pulau Ubu Ubu, then N of

the beacon marking the N edge of the reef extending from

Pulau Ubu Ubu and steer for the S pier, passing S of several

light brown shoal patches which can be easily seen; when clear

of the S shoal patch, vessels should haul sharply N, with Pulau

Tolonuu just open E of Tanjung Pilawana, and anchor before

the S end of Pulau Tagalaya closes behind Kumu.

2.64 Tobelo (1°44'N., 128°01'E.) has a small pier suitable

for boats at the S end of the village; another pier, with a depth

of 2.4m alongside, is N of the village. Copra is exported. 

2.64 Pulau Miti (1°34'N., 128°03'E.), about 9 miles S of Tobelo,

has the village of Kampung Miti on its W side and the village

of Kampung Mawea on the shore opposite. There is suitable

anchorage between the two villages. The best approach is

around the N end of Pulau Miti, between that island and the

drying reefs to the N. The shoals are well-marked by discoloration. Local knowledge is necessary for these anchorages. The

channels between Pulau Miti and the mainland are suitable for

small vessels only.

2.64 Vessels can also anchor close to the shore in the bight at

Kampung Gotana, a village SW of Pulau Miti.
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 29

Pub. 164

Teluk Kau

2.65 Teluk Kau (1°03'N., 128°53'E.), a large bay,

separates the N part of Halmahera from its NE peninsula. Nusa

Bubale (Nusa Bobale), a low island covered with high trees,

lies on the W side of the fairway in the entrance to the bay,

about 15.5 miles Sof Pulau Miti, and is easily recognized.

2.65 The bay, 4.5 miles wide at its entrance, extends 33 miles to

the SW to its head which is separated from Teluk Dodinga, on

the W coast of Halmahera, by a narrow isthmus. Generally

speaking, the W shore of the bay is rather low, while the E

shore is fairly high and steep. The inner part of the bay has a

greatest depth of more than 494m. The inner bay is open to

both monsoons and the sea rises quickly.

2.65 The plain on the W side of the bay S of the mountains of

Tokido, Tami, and Ah, continues S to Pegunungan Mata Mata,

of which the most prominent peaks are Gunung Tabobo, 929m

high, and Oosttop, 534m high, 9.5 miles E. The most conspicuous point on the E side is the 1,159m summit 19 miles E of

Nusa Bubale. Tilegan, 5.5 miles farther SW, is a 1,012m

summit at the W end of a long range. Papudo, 3.5 miles farther

W, is a detached 417m hill. Near the E shore of the bay is a

group of mountains, of which Subaim, a sharply-pointed

1,143m peak, is the highest; SE of it is the more gently-sloping

Wato Wato, 1,474m high.

2.65 Batu Kubu (1°28'N., 128°01'E.), a white patch at Tanjung

Domake, 10 miles N of Nusa Bubale, is conspicuous when

approaching the entrance to the bay. At Tunjang Tunowe, a

small bank extends offshore and causes tide rips.

2.65 Tides—Currents.—The lowest water levels occur between

January and March and between July and October. The maximum rise and fall of the tides that can be expected are, respectively, about 0.75m above and 1.2m below mean sea level.

2.65 The maximum rate of current on either side of Nusa Bubale

is 1.5 knots. When the wind blows in the opposite direction

toward that which the current sets, a difficult sea is experienced.

2.65 Anchorage.—There is anchorage, in 18.3m, sand, about 0.2

mile off the village of Kampung Bubale on the S side of Nusa

Bubale. This anchorage is protected even during the South

Monsoon.

2.65 The main channel leading into Teluk Kau is close E of Nusa

Bubale. It is deep in the fairway but has a 10m shoal on its W

side and its E side is formed by a shoal bank with a least depth

of 6.4m; this bank has not been closely examined and may be

shallower than charted. This shoal bank is separated from the

reefs along the shore of the entrance by another deep but

narrow channel. The channel W of Nusa Bubale cannot be

recommended because of the several shoals and the currents.

Coconut plantations border the W shore of the bay and its

entrance to Tanjung Boleu (Tanjung Bolu) (1°09'N.,

127°54'E.), about 12 miles SSW. 

2.66 Kampung Kau (1°10'N., 127°54'E.) (World Port

Index No. 52590), about 1 mile N of Tanjung Boleu, is a low

village with a small pier. Several stranded wrecks lie about 1.5

miles E of the pier.

2.66 The shore between Tanjung Boleu and Kampung Akelama,

about 18 miles WSW, is low, but is backed by Pegunungan

Mata Mata mountain range. At the W end of the bay spurs of

the mountains approach the shore, but there are no conspicuous

points. The isthmus between Teluk Kau and Teluk Dodinga on

the W coast of Halmahera is composed of low hills. At the SE

corner of Teluk Kau and on the E side opposite Kampung Kau,

mountain spurs also approach the shore; these latter have

already been mentioned with the general description of the bay.

The small islet of Roni (0°59'N., 127°56'E.), close to the E

shore, is 167m high and very conspicuous.

2.66 Loleo Lamo (1°13'N., 127°50'E.) is the bight W of Tanjung

Boleu. A large bank in its E part extends 2 miles offshore. In

the vicinity of this bank vessels should stay outside about the

20m curve. The bight affords sheltered anchorage during the

North Monsoon. A stranded wreck lies in the bight about 3.5

miles W of Tanjung Boleu.

2.66 Teluk Bobane (0°53'N., 127°40'E.) at the head of Teluk Kau

affords excellent anchorage, in 11.9m, in its E part with the

pier at Kampung Bobane Igu bearing 169°. A trail leads to

Dodingo, on the opposite side of the isthmus.

2.66 Anchorage can be found almost anywhere along the S shore

of Teluk Kau. The villages of Kampung Pintatu, Kampung

Ekor, Kampung Menamin, Kampung Saolat, and Kampung

Wadjoi are along this shore. Between the first two is a low

plain. Vessels can anchor off Kampung Ekor (0°49'N.,

127°50'E.), with the center of the village bearing 180° and a

white spot bearing 105°. Landing can be effected at high water

in the small river which flows out here. 

2.67 Ake Selaka Roads (1°02'N., 127°57'E.), about 2

miles N of Roni, can easily be recognized by the small offlying islet of the same name. Southwest of this islet there is

anchorage, in 40m, mud and sand. A reef is 1 mile N of this

islet and about 0.4 mile offshore. The reef is not marked by

discoloration. In steering for the anchorage, the coast can be

approached until Roni is shut in by the point N of it. This point

may be recognized by the 214m hill on it and the small rocky

islet close off it.

2.67 Kampung Ake Selaka (1°02'N., 127°57'E.) is a storage

place for the jungle products gathered by the people of the

coastal villages. Vessels call here regularly. 

2.67 Teluk Waisile (1°12'N., 128°06'E.) is on the E side of Teluk

Kau immediately inside the entrance. The bay is clear of shoals

in its central part, but it is very seldom used. In it are the

villages of Kampung Subaim, Kampung Dodaga, and Kampung Lolobata. 

2.67 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained anywhere in

Teluk Waisile, in the NE part of Teluk Kau, in a depth of about

30m, mud and sand. 

2.67 In the bend close E of Kampung Njaulaku (1°17'N.,

128°05'E.), at the entrance to Teluk Kau, there is anchorage, in

32m. At the village of Kampung Iga, 15 miles to the NE, good

anchorage can also be found.

2.67 In Teluk Bobolo, 11.5 miles W of Tanjung Lelai, anchorage

can be obtained on a small ridge, with a depth of 37m. This anchorage should be approached with 55m of chain veered out.

By steering 169° for the 518m summit close E of Gunung Bobolo, the anchor will catch hold about 0.5 mile offshore.

2.67 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, for information on

the mine danger area in Teluk Kau, including Teluk Waisile

and the approach channel to Lolobata.
30 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

2.68 From the entrance to Teluk Kau, the coast trends NE

for 43 miles to Tanjung Lelai (1°34'N., 128°43'E.), the low

NE extremity of the peninsula separating Teluk Kau and Teluk

Buli. At Tanjung Lelai, the coast reef extends more than 1.5

miles offshore. Gunung Bobolo, a 538m coastal hill at the bay

of the same name and Tatem, a 953m summit 6 miles farther to

the SW, are quite conspicuous.

At Tanjung Lelai, the coast turns to the S for about 31 miles

to Tanjung Wayamli. Tanjung Petak, 11 miles S of Tanjung

Lelai, may be identified by a flat hill with two summits, 148m

high, which have the appearance of an islet. Watida, W of

Tanjung Petak is a double-topped mountain, 908m high which

appears sharply pointed from E. East of Watida is a group of

sharp but smaller peaks. Near the coast 5 miles SSW of Tanjung Petak is a conspicuous 242m hill. South of this bay a

chain of hills follows the coast as far as Teluk Buli. The Watam

Mountains, 1,100m high, may be seen over these hills.

2.68 The monsoon drifts are the principal currents along this

coast. These currents are rather strong around the most salient

points.

2.68 Anchorage.—Dabo Bay, 2.5 miles S of Tanjung Lelai,

affords anchorage, in 26 to 29m. There are no inhabitants here.

Karang Patilang, a reef lying in front of the bay, has a least

depth of 3.6m and can always be recognized by discoloration

or breakers. A rock with 2.2m, is in the channel W of this reef

and a drying rock is 0.25 mile W of the reef. Teluk Akelamo,

the next bay to the S, affords better anchorage than Dabo Bay.

The anchorage at these bays offer shelter only during the

Northwest Monsoon.

2.68 At Kampung Tifonis, 2.5 miles S of Tanjung Petak, vessels

can anchor NW of a small drying sandbank. Local knowledge

is necessary.

Teluk Buli

2.69 Teluk Buli (0°48'N., 128°28'E.), between Tanjung

Wayamli and Tanjung Inggeland, 31 miles S, is surrounded by

mountains and highlands and is encumbered with numerous

reefs and shoals inside the 200m curve line. Because of these

dangers, the bay is navigated mainly by vessels enroute to Buli

Roads.

Tanjung Wayamli (Tanjung Wajamli) (1°04'N., 128°42'E.),

the low N entrance point ,can be identified by the coast hills in

its vicinity, especially by Onat, the 422m hill lying 2.5 miles

NW of the point.

2.69 The peninsula separating Teluk Buli and Teluk Weda is hilly

and mountainous. The most conspicuous summits seen from

Teluk Buli are Tadjam, a 723m conical peak; Damoli, 711m

high; Bial, 661m high; and the Waleh Mountains, a range

farther to the W, whose highest peak is 653m high.

2.69 Winds—Weather.—The weather is better during the Southeast Monsoon than during the Northwest Monsoon. During the

Southeast Monsoon the S part of the bay is sheltered, but

troublesome rollers may be encountered along the N coast.

Whirlwinds may be experienced inside the bay, but they are not

dangerous. Rain may be expected throughout the year.

2.69 Tides—Currents.—The lowest water level occurs in June

or July and in December or January. The maximum rise and

fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 0.6m above

and 0.9 below mean sea level. In the open sea fronting Teluk

Buli the currents consist of monsoon drifts. Between a line

joining the entrance points and about the 200m curve of the

bay, the currents are affected by tidal movements, and a current

of as much as 2 knots may be encountered. In the inner part of

the bay the tidal currents are noticeable, but they do not exceed

1 knot, except between the islands at the SE end, where they

may attain a velocity of 1.5 knots.

2.69 Directions.—When coming from N, round Tanjung Wayamli at a short distance so as to pass between that point and

Sailal, a 10.9m shoal 1 mile off it. Then follow the coast at a

distance of about 2 miles which will lead midway between

Semer and Metonga, two 4.5m shoals off Tanjung Mokali. A

0.9m shoal is E of Metonga. This course also leads N of the

shoals S of a line joining Metonga and Pulau Gei (Pulau Gee),

but farther into the bay alter course to pass S of Litin, a drying

patch. Then steer for the anchorage, in 22m, to the W of a 8.8m

shoal about 0.75 mile SSE of a large conspicuous shed near the

boat pier at Buli Roads. The channel, leading to the pier

between drying reefs, is marked by beacons. A 0.9m shoal is

about 1.25 miles E of Buli Roads.

2.69 When coming from E, steer to pass N of Pulau Leleve and

Sain, which are about 13.5 and 17 miles, respectively, NW of

Tanjung Inggeland, then pass S of Ronde Reef, an atoll-shaped

reef which dries and is marked by discoloration, then steer for

the anchorage in Buli Roads.

2.69 When coming from the S, give Tanjung Inggelang a wide

berth, then steer to pass between Pulau Inggelang and Pulau

Woto. Pass S of Pulau Wor, taking care to clear a dangerous

wreck about 0.7 miles SE and the 2.4m shoal about 0.75 mile

SW, respectively, of that islet; then steer to pass E and N of

Pulau Mia. Pinit and Toppo, drying reefs N of Pulau Mia, are

marked by discoloration. There is a clear channel to Buli Roads

passing W of Woi, a reef which dries and is marked by

discoloration, and W of Ronde Reef.

The N shore of Teluk Buli is fronted in places by reefs and

shoals, but suitable anchorage can be found almost anywhere.

Two villages, Kampung Watam and Kampung Wayamli, lie 3

and 12.75 miles, respectively, SW of Tanjung Wayamli.

2.69 Buli Roads (0°52'N., 128°17'E.) is in the NW corner of the

bay and N of Pulau Pakal and Pulau Gei. The shore is fronted

by patches of drying reefs. The channel leading between the

reefs to the boat pier is marked by private beacons. Kampung

Buli is the shipping place for copra and other jungle products. 

2.69 Teluk Sololo (0°47'N., 128°14'E.), SW of Buli Roads and at

the head of Teluk Buli, is deep and has few dangers. It is

uninhabited. In it and fronting it are several islands, of which

Pulau Pakal is the outermost and largest.

2.70 South shore of Teluk Buli.—There are more villages

on this side of the bay than on the N side. At Kampung Maba,

on the S side of the entrance of Teluk Sololo, there is safe

anchorage N of Maba Islet. Off Kampung Bicoli (Kampung

Bitjoli) opposite Pulau Wor there is anchorage in 18m. During

the Northwest Monsono, better anchorage may be found in the

lee of Pulau Wor, in a depth of 28m. The best landing place is

close E or W of Kampung Bicoli. Well-sheltered anchorage

may be found off Kampung Inggelang in the narrow channel

along the S side of Pulau Inggelang; however, the W end of this

channel is dangerous and unmarked. The channels S of Seal

Islet, and Tjef Islet, S and W of Pulau Inggelang, can only be
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 31

Pub. 164

navigated by native canoes. There is a boat pier at Kampung

Inggelang. During the Southeast Monsoon, suitable anchorage

may be found W of Tjef (0°34'N., 128°37'E.), in 9.1m. The

other villages along this shore are of little or no importance.

2.70 A 9.1m rocky shoal was reported about 4.25 miles ENE of

Pulau Inggelang.

2.71 The Sayafi Islands (Sajafi Islands) (0°31'N.,

128°50'E.), 7.25 miles E of Tanjung Inggelang, are separated

by clear and deep passages from the Halmahera coast and from

the bank described below. The only dangers in addition to the

reported rocky shoal mentioned above are an 11.9m shoal W of

the N end of Pulau Sayafi, and a shore reef which extends

farthest from the E side and S end of Pulau Luwo. Pulau

Sayafi, the N and largest island, is 124m high, and Pulau

Luwo, the S island is much lower.

2.71 About 8 miles NE of Pulau Sayafi and fronting Teluk Buli is

an extensive bank of soundings with irregular depths. Near the

edges of this bank are shoal spots of 11.9 to 24m. These shoal

spots are well marked by discoloration. Close off the SW side

of the bank is a smaller bank, with a least depth of 8.7m.

Pulau Yiew (Pulau Jiew) (Katherine Islet) (0°44'N.,

129°07'E.), on the E part of the larger bank, is a heavilywooded island, 58m high. Near its E end is a small but high,

wooded, and rocky islet; near its NW end is a lower barren

islet.

Togoplun (Recovery Islet) (0°40'N., 129°02'E.), a rock 7.5

miles SW of Pulau Yiew, is 24m high and practically bare.

From a distance it looks like a ship.

2.71 Canton Packet (0°39'N., 128°50'E.), 6.25 miles W of Togoplun, is a small drying rock near the SW edge of the bank. It is

often marked by breakers.

2.71 A submerged reef, about 0.7 mile in diameter and whose

existence is doubtful, has been reported about 13.5 to 15 miles

NE of Pulau Yiew; a depth of 18.3m has been reported about

7.5 miles ENE of the island.

2.71 Caution.—Volcanic disturbances have been reported in an

area 15 miles wide between position 0°18'N, 129°54'E, and

position 1°00'N, 129°00'E. A great disturbance was observed

in an area, with a radius of about 1 mile, centered about 12

miles E of Pulau Yiew. Vessels are warned to give these areas a

wide berth. 

2.71 Aurora Bank and Winchester Bank, located E of Pulau Yiew,

are described in paragraph 2.85.

2.72 From Tanjung Inggelang, the coast of Halmahera

extends S for 12.5 miles and then ESE for 16 miles to Tanjung

Ngolopopo. The latter stretch is the N side of a narrow tongue

of land extending in that direction from the SE end of the

peninsula between Teluk Buli and Teluk Weda. The most

conspicuous points are near Tanjung Ngolopopo.

2.72 This coast can be approached rather closely as it is steep-to

and the coastal reef is very narrow wherever it exists. About the

only anchorages are in 23m in a small bend, 3.5 miles S of

Tanjung Inggelang; in the same depth off Kampung Paniti, 9.5

miles S of that point; and, in 29m, off the villages off Kampung

Telepeu and Kampung Gemia, 6 and 6.5 miles farther SE. Anchorages off this coast require local knowledge.

2.72 Tides—Currents.—The maximum rise and fall of tide that

can be expected at Kampung Telepeu are, respectively, 0.5m

above and 0.5m below mean sea level.

2.73 Tanjung Ngolopopo (0°13'N., 128°54'E.) is steep

and rocky. About 1.25 miles W of the point is a fairly

conspicuous hill, 163m high. About 2 miles farther NW is

Guba, a very conspicuous 297m hill. Pulau Muor, 86m high, is

2.3 miles ESE of Tanjung Ngolopopo with Witimdi, two flat

rocks midway between. On the reef at the SE end of Pulau

Muor is Weilon, a small rocky islet.

2.73 Guba (0°16'N., 128°53'E.) has the appearance of a table

mountain when seen from E and W, but when seen from the S,

both Guba and Pulau Muormay be mistaken for Pulau Muor

from a distance, and at closer range Guba may be taken for

Tanjung Ngolopopo, and the hill on the point for Pulau Muor.

2.73 In the passage between Tanjung Ngolopopo and Pulau Muor,

the currents are sometimes very strong and cause heavy tiderips. During the transition periods of the monsoons, regular and

moderate tidal currents, setting NW and SE, have been observed to the N of Tanjung Ngolopopo.

2.73 A shoal, with a depth of 12.8m, has been reported about 7

miles E of the SE end of Pulau Muor.

Teluk Weda

2.74 Teluk Weda (0°10'N., 128°20'E.) lies between the SE

and S peninsulas of Halmahera, within a line joining Tanjung

Ngolopopo and Tanjung Libobo, about 72 miles SW. With the

exception of Veldman Rock, N of Kepulauan Widi, no dangers

are found more than 6 miles offshore, and there are few within

that distance.

2.74 Winds—Weather.—During the entire Northwest Monsoon,

the wind is light and the sea calm, except in the NW part,

where the wind which blows through the low valley W of

theLiember Mountains strikes. In February and March, when

the Northwest Monsoon is strongest, sudden strong winds are

experienced E of Tanjung Remdi, about 22 miles W of Tanjung

Ngolopopo, where they blow across the narrow tongue of land

starting at that point. At such times heavy rollers will be

encountered just beyond the lee of Tanjung Ngolopopo. The

turning period of the monsoons begins at the end of March, and

only to the N of the latter point will gentle N winds still be

experienced. In the beginning of the Southeast Monsoon heavy

showers from the SW occur occasionally. They last from 1 to 4

hours and are accompanied by a peculiarly thick and heavy

atmosphere. After the middle of June this monsoon is quite

strong and blows from the S and SSE. Most of the rain on the

shore of Teluk Weda falls during this monsoon, in contrast to

Teluk Buli, where most of the rain falls during the Northwest

Monsoon.

2.74 Tides—Currents.—In the bay, tidal currents are only noticeable close to the shore, and the monsoon drifts are not encountered until outside the line joining the entrance points.

2.75 North shore of Teluk Weda.—The principal peaks of

the peninsula between Teluk Buli and Teluk Weda have already

been described in paragraph 2.69. The highest of the Waleh

Mountains and Bial, a 661m mountain about 28 miles NW of

Tanjung Ngolopopo, are rather conspicuous because of their
32 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

steep W slopes. West of the former group of mountains, Sagea

and Liember, 843 and 1,262m high, respectively, may be seen

over the low coastal hills. Close to the shore S of Sagea is a

very dark conspicuous 210m hill which stands out well against

the background and has the appearance of an island from a

distance. West of the Liember Mountains is the valley through

which the winds of the Northwest Monsoon find their way into

the bay.

2.75 Navigation along this shore is not too difficult, because with

favorable conditions the reefs are well marked by discoloration

and the water is always clear. The easternmost dangers off this

shore are Karang Legli (0°14'N., 128°49'E.), two 1.8m shoals,

about 5 miles WNW of Tanjung Ngolopopo and 1.75 miles

offshore.

2.75 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents set along the coast but

are not strong; the flood current sets W and the ebb E. During

the Southeast Monsoon the sea along this shore is rather

troublesome.

2.76 Patani Roads (0°16'N., 128°45'E.), about 9 miles

NW of Tanjung Ngolopopo, affords anchorage with local

knowledge, in a depth of about 55m, with the small landing

pier bearing about 315° and the SW end of Pulau Muor in line

with the coast NW of Tanjung Ngolopopo bearing about 117°.

The village is not easily identified at a distance, but closer in, a

mosque with a white roof, behind a sandy beach, will be seen.

A 1.8m shoal is 1.5 miles offshore SE of the mosque. About

1.75 miles farther W and 0.4 mile offshore there is a drying

reef. Communication with the shore is difficult during the

South Monsoon, and the landing pier should not be used

because of two rocks close off it.

2.77 Kampung Patani (0°17'N., 128°45'E.) (World Port

Index No. 52560) is the center of the native trade for this section of the coast and the neighboring islands. Vessels call here

regularly. A small pier extends out on the drying reef abreast

the village.

2.77 Tides—Currents.—The maximum rise and fall of tide that

can be expected are, respectively, 0.6m above and 0.3m below

mean sea level.

2.77 Between Kampung Patani and Kampung Mesa, nearly 30

miles to the W, the coast is wild and sparsely populated, and

has a deserted appearance. Suitable anchorage, however, can

be found off the villages of Kampung Banemo, Kampung

Moreala, and Kampung Dote, 11.5 miles, 15 miles, and 25

miles, respectively, W of Kampung Patani. Local knowledge is

necessary in each case. Near the coast of Kampung Mesa are

three hills, which may be found useful landmarks when navigating along this shore. The westernmost and highest hill is

283m high.

2.77 Caution.—A 1.8m shoal is close to the shore 0.6 mile SE of

Kampung Moreala. At Kampung Sebonpopo, 1.5 miles NW of

Kampung Moreala, a drying reef extends 0.5 mile W from the

shore. Karang Matalel (0°22'N., 128°29'E.), another drying

reef, is 1 mile farther off. Near the edge of the 200m curve and

2.5 miles W of Karang Matalel is Karang Samlowos, an

extensive drying reef with a 0.9m shoal 0.5 mile SE of its

eastern end. Karang Mie is a similar drying patch lying farther

S. Karang Mela, still another drying patch with a 1.4m shoal

close NE of it, is about 1 mile SE of Kampung Dote.

2.78 Mesa Roads (0°24'N., 128°17'E.) can be recognized

by the small islets of Mesa and Mtu, which are low with high

conspicuous trees. Drying reefs are S and W of Mesa and S and

E of Mtu. East of the last mentioned reef are other detached

reefs. These reefs are not always marked by discoloration when

covered and not easily located. The anchorage is N of Mtu

(0°23.8'N., 128°18.0'E.), in 26m, sand. The best approach is on

a 330° bearing on the 283m hill mentioned above, until Mtu

and the middle of Mesa are in range bearing 280°, when the

shore can be followed. When the reefs are visible the

anchorage can also be approached from the S between the reefs

extending from Mtu and Mesa. Kampung Mesa is located NW

of Mesa. A boat basin leads N of this islet to a basin S of the

village. It was reported that Mesa is connected to the mainland

N of it.

2.78 Kokka Bay (0°27'N., 128°10'E.), 8 miles W of Mesa, has

two small basins in its E part formed by Tete (0°27'N.,

128°10'E.), a mangrove-covered islet, and the reefs extending

from it. The N basin affords anchorage, in 29 to 40m, but a

4.5m shoal N of Tete constitutes a danger which should be

avoided. Another good anchorage spot is in 31 to 33m, mud,

with the E side of Tete in range with Tanjung Waleh. In the N

part of the bay are two drying reefs with a 0.9m shoal E of

them. These are separated from the shore by a clear but narrow

channel. In this vicinity, anchorage can also be found in 29 to

40m. Karang Mela, another drying reef, is near the 200m curve

in front of the bay. A little over 1 mile W of Karang Mela is a

2.3m shoal.

2.78 The village of Kampung Sepa, with a conspicuous house at

its E end, is on the N shore of the bay. The village of Kampung

Waleh is E of Tanjung Waleh, the SE extremity of the bay.

2.78 At Kampung Sagea (0°28'N., 128°06'E.), about 2.5 miles

W of Kokka Bay, there is a slight bend in the coast where

anchorage can be obtained, in 33m, during the North Monsoon

and transition periods. Local knowledge is necessary. There are

five small wooden piers at the village. A dark hill near the

coast S of Sagea Mountain is a useful mark for approaching

vessels.

2.79 West shore of Teluk Weda.—This shore, formed by

the S peninsula of Halmahera, trends in a general S and SSE

direction. The mountains of this peninsula begin S of the valley

W of the Liember Mountains. Immediately W of the village of

Kampung Weda, there is a conspicuous row of five hills, 209 to

382m high. Above these, the coastal mountains of the W side

of Halmahera may be seen. The highest and most conspicuous

of these latter mountains were described earlier with the W

coast of Halmahera in paragraph 2.9.

2.79 Abreast of the S range of mountains and nearer the E coast

of the peninsula are two conspicuous round hills, 341m high

and 29 miles NW of Tanjung Libobo. The bank of soundings

along this side of the bay is wider than that on the N side, but

there are more shoal dangers that must be avoided; these shoal

dangers are not always marked by discoloration.

2.79 Communication with the shore on this side of the bay is

difficult during the Southeast Monsoon.

2.79 Tides—Currents.—The currents setting along the shore in

the N part of the bay are weak; farther S and near Kepulauan

Widi they become stronger. The currents set N with a rising

tide and S with a falling tide.
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 33

Pub. 164

2.80 Between Tanjung Uli (Tanjung Oeli) (0°28'N.,

127°58'E.) and Tanjung Foya (Tanjung Foja), 22 miles to the S,

the 200m curve extends further offshore than any other part of

Teluk Weda. The only danger outside this curve is the reef

Karang Pasir Tidore, described in paragraph 2.81, off Weda

Roads. The N side of Tanjung Silota, 12 miles S of Tanjung

Uli, is quite rocky. Some rocks and the small islet of Silota,

close S, make the point quite conspicuous. Between Tanjung

Silota and Tanjung Foya, about 10.5 miles S, there are a

number of shoals and reefs with a navigable channel between

them and the shore reef. The shoals have 3.2m or less of water

over them and several of the reefs dry at LW. The outermost

reef, Karang Elmoos, is 5.5 miles offshore.

2.80 The principal village along this part of the coast is Kampung

Weda. To the N are the villages of Kampung Kobe and Kampung Lelilef, and to the S the village of Kampung Sosowomo.

2.80 Weda Roads (0°20'N., 127°53'E.) is entirely open and

affords no shelter during the Southeast Monsoon. Kampung

Weda is a storage depot for copra and jungle products from this

part of Halmahera. The shore reef here is marked by two

beacons with ball topmarks. A flagstaff stands at the S end of

Weda. 

2.80 The Kolo Islands, the most important of which are Yef

(0°21'N., 127°54'E.) and Kulefu, close SW, are close offshore

NE of Kampung Weda. The E side of Yef, which is saddledshaped, is fringed by a drying reef. A rock is on the SE side of

this reef and two islets are on the NE side. The S edge of the

reef is marked by beacons.

2.80 Kulefu (0°20'N., 127°53'E.) 52m high, about 0.5 mile SW of

Yef, is covered with coconut palms and is fringed with a drying

reef whose edges are marked by a number of beacons. A 0.9m

reef, marked by discoloration is about 0.6 mile SE of Kulefu

and two reefs, marked by beacons, are 0.3 mile S of the islet. A

drying reef, marked by a beacon with a square topmark, is

about 0.8 mile SSW of Kulefu.

2.81 Karang Pasir Tidore (0°19'N., 127°59'E.), the outermost danger in this vicinity, is a drying reef 7 miles E of

Kampung Weda. A 1.8m shoal is 1.25 miles W of the N end of

this danger.

2.81 The outer anchorage off Kampung Weda has a depth of 34m,

coral. From here a wooded rock on the drying reef at the head

of Teluk Maidi can easily be seen just open W of Kulefo; this

berth is exposed to the South Monsoon. Small vessels will find

well-sheltered anchorage, in about 13.7m, between Kulefu and

the shore. This anchorage may be approached from N or S of

Kulefu. 

2.81 Directions.—To pass N of Karang Pasir Tidore, steer 270°

for the conspicuous steep slope of the 646m mountains in position 0°21'N, 127°45'E, about 5 miles N of Lenggiua, until Tanjung Foya bears 191°, then alter course SW and steer for the

southernmost and highest of the five hills W of Kampung

Weda bearing 244°. When the warehouse on the beach N of

Kampung Weda is open SW of Kulefu bearing about 313°,

steer for the anchorage, passing SW of the 0.9m shoal SE of

Kulefu.

2.81 To pass S of Karang Pasir Tidore, steer 287° for the conspicuous steep slope of the 646m mountain in position 0°21'N,

127°45'E; when abeam of Karang Pasir Tidore, steer for the anchorage.

2.82 Between Tanjung Foya (0°07'N., 127°55'E.) and

Tanjung Libobo, the coast is fronted by dangerous shoals and

reefs and there are few conspicuous points. This area is

sparsely populated; the few villages are Kampung Foya, Kampung Mafa, Kampung Latubi, Kampung Ake Lamo, Kampung

Wosi, Kampung Besui, and Kampung Gane di Luar. Coconut

plantations are N of Kampung Wosi, 17 miles S of Tanjung

Foya, but S of that place are mostly jungles with the greater

part of the shore lined with sandy beaches.

2.82 Of the islets that are on or near the shore bank, Pulau Sunam,

the outermost, is 35 miles SE of Tanjung Foya. This is a rocky

islet with high trees. Pulau Djodji, near the shore SW of Pulau

Sunam, is conspicuous because of the coconut palms on it.

Pulau Wamlonga, close to the shore 11 miles NW of Pulau Sunam, is almost joined to the shore and is not conspicuous. Tanjung Libobo (0°55'S., 128°27'E.) was discussed earlier with

the W coast of Halmahera in paragraph 2.14.

2.82 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be found almost anywhere between Tanjung Foya and the village of Kampung Gane di luar.

2.82 A good anchorage is off the village of Kampung Foya in the

bight S of Tanjung Foya. When approaching, it is advisable to

keep Tanjung Foya bearing 278° to clear the dangers off that

point. Off the village are several drying reefs and shoals, inside

of which is a more or less sheltered anchorage for small vessels. Communication with the shore is frequently cut off during

the Southeast Monsoon. A 0.9m shoal is located 2.2 miles

offshore.

2.83 Kepulauan Widi (0°35'S., 128°27'E.), about 16 miles

N of Tanjung Libobo, consists of several wooded islands and

numerous small islets and rocks, most of which are in two

compact groups on a couple of drying reefs. A detached island

is S of the W end of the W group, and another detached islet is

S of the E group. The channels between the two groups, and

between them and the detached islands, are deep and clear.

There are no permanent settlements but native fishermen come

here occasionally.

2.83 Dadawe Lagoon is located within Pulau Dadawe (Druvig

Island), the small detached atoll S of the W end of the W group

of islands. The lagoon is navigable by launches only.

2.83 Muiliyk Lagoon (Muilijk Lagoon) is located within Pulau

Muiliyk, the largest W island of the group. The lagoon is

navigable by launches only. The entrance is through a drying

reef on the SW side of the island. It is reported that a heavy

current may occur in the entrance, especially when the reefs

are uncovered. When the current is outgoing and there is a S

wind, there is much surf in the entrance.

2.83 Veldman Rock (0°27'S., 128°31'E.), about 8.5 miles N of

the E group of Kepulauan Widi, is a small coral reef with a

least depth of 0.5m. It is always marked by discoloration.

2.83 There are no convenient anchorages in Kepulauan Widi. The

islands should be given a wide berth because of the possibility

of strong currents in the area.

The Halmahera Sea

2.84 The Halmahera Sea (1°00'S., 129°00'E.) is the name

applied to the waters off the E side of Halmahera. The N part,

N of Pulau Gebe, is open to the Pacific Ocean, but the part S of

that island is more of an enclosed basin with deep channels
34 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

connecting it to the waters S of it. The deep and clear passage

between Pulau Gebe and Pulau Muor connecting the N and S

parts of the Halmahera Sea is known as Selat Jailolo (Djailolo

Passage).

2.84 Tides—Currents.—At Selat Jailolo, the Northwest Monsoon reaches its greatest strength in February and March. A

heavy swell will be experienced at any time during the year,

even during the South Monsoon. The monsoon drifts are felt in

the deep and open section of Selat Jailolo; they are quite strong

around the bank of soundings near Pulau Muor.

2.84 Directions.—Vessels coming from N and heading for Selat

Jailolo should identify Pulau Yiew, which has a high rock on its

E side and a lower small island on its W side. The bank

extending from Pulau Yiew can be safely crossed and even anchored upon. Shoal patches less than 20.1m show up by discoloration, but none of them are dangerous on this part of the

bank.

2.84 When past Pulau Yiew, steer straight for the middle of Selat

Jailolo, with consideration for prevailing monsoon and

currents. Pulau Muor and Weilon, off Tanjung Ngolopopo, and

the summit of Pulau Gebe are good points to check position.

2.84 Leaving Selat Jailolo steer nothing W of SSW. When Pulau

Vrooliyk, the E island of Kepulauan Widi, is passed, and

Libobo Hill, close W of Tanjung Libobo comes in view, course

may be set for Batu Anyer (Batu Anjer) (1°10.5'S.,

128°29.5'E.) which can be passed fairly close, then use any of

the broad channels between the islands to the S.

2.84 Caution.—Shoal depths have been reported in the passages

E of Halmahera. Mariners are advised to exercise caution when

navigating in this area. A rock, with a depth of 12.8m, was reported in Selat Jailolo in position 0°09.0'N, 129°05.5'E. Volcanic disturbances have been reported across the N part of the

Halmahera Sea in an area 15 miles wide between position

0°18'N, 129°54'E and position 1°00'N, 129°00'E. A great disturbance was observed in an area with a radius of about 1 mile,

centered about 12 miles E of Pulau Yiew. Vessels are advised

to give these areas a wide berth.

2.84 Kepulauan Widi should be given a berth of at least 5 miles

because of strong tidal currents around these islands.

The Halmahera Sea—East Side

2.85 Aurora Bank (0°43'N., 129°32'E.) and Ormsbee

Bank, with Winchester Bank between them, are the northernmost banks NW of New Guinea and on the E side of the

Halmahera Sea. Aurora Bank, the westernmost, is 24 miles E

of Pulau Yiew, which has been described in paragraph 2.71.

The least depths are 12.m on Aurora Bank, 23.8m on Winhester Bank, and 16.5m on Ormsbee Bank. The bottom is sand,

rocks, and coral. These banks are not marked by discoloration,

but breakers may be seen at times. The water on them is very

clear, so that the rocks on the bottom may be seen at the shallowest places. A 26m shoal, was reported to be located about 3

miles SE of Winchester Bank.

2.85 Pulau Sayang (0°18'N., 129°53'E.) and Ai, the northernmost island on this side of the Halmahera Sea, are low and flat,

but they are visible for quite a distance because of the thick and

high forests that cover them. Pulau Sayang has been reported to

be a good radar target up to a distance of 23 miles. About 4

miles W of Pulau Sayang the depths decrease from 18.3m to

less than 10.9m shoreward. The shoal places are marked by

discoloration because of the white sandy bottom. Hunter Bank,

5 miles E of Pulau Sayang, has a depth of 14.6m and is not

marked by discoloration. Pulau Wayag, lying SE of Pulau

Sayang, is described in paragraph 5.4.

2.85 Caution.—Two 18.3m shoals are about 7.75 and 10 miles

NNE, respectively, from the NW end of Pulau Sayang. A 20m

shoal, and a 21.9m shoal lie about 11 miles NE of the same

point.

2.85 The channel between Pulau Sayang and Pulau Wajag is wide

and deep. A vessel approaching from the W should steer on an

E course and pass about 1 mile N of Pulau Wajag which is

steep-to. In this area the water is very clear and the bottom can

be seen for a depth of 20.1m. Large schools of porpoises are

sometimes seen in this passage and may be mistaken for dry

rocks when motionless.

2.86 Pulau Gebe (0°05'S., 129°28'E.), about 19.5 miles

ESE of Pulau Muor, is a narrow and hilly island, 23 miles long

in NW-SE direction. The highest summit is 396m high at the

SE end. It is lower at the middle, then rises to El Fanum

(0°03'S., 129°24'E.), a double-peaked hill 285m high, then

lowers again to the NW. There is safe passage both E and W of

this island.

A light is shown from Tanjung Sofa, the NW extremity of

Pulau Gebe.

The NE coast of Pulau Gebe is subject to rollers and surf

during the North Monsoon and to surf during the turning

periods and the South Monsoon. This makes landing on this

coast practically impossible. Provided there is not much surf a

landing place may be found at the adjoining villages of Kampung Sanafi and Kampung Katjepi (Kampung Kacepi)

(0°07'S., 129°31'E.), which are mostly hidden by coconut plantations. There are openings in the coastal reef E and W of the

villages. Anchorage may be found, in 40m, about 91m off the

villages.

Pulau Gebe—Agent Contacts

Jakarta—General Agents

Telex:

Telephone:

73-42854

62-21-676547 and 672613

Jakarta—Local Agents

Facsimile:

Telephone:

62-21-7891224

62-21-7891234

Gebe—Local Agents

Facsimile:

Telephone:

62-21-7804589

62-21-7891234 ext. 3703 

Ternate—Local Agents

Facsimile:

Telephone:

Telex:

62-921-22819 

62-921-21686

73-73153 ATKTTE IA

Note.—Vessels should send confirmed ETA to local

agents in Gebe by fax or telephone.
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 35

Pub. 164

2.86 The SW coast of Pulau Gebe is covered with mangroves and

is almost uninhabited. Between Tanjung Oebulie (0°04'S.,

129°22'E.) and Tanjung Tuli Kalio, about 6.5 miles SE, is

Pulau Fau. A reddish conical hill 128m high is on this island.

2.86 There is an open pit nickel mine on the W face of El Fanum,

about 2 miles NE of Tanjung Oebulie. A small ore loading jetty

is close NE of the same point. The jetty has a depth of 3m

alongside. Ships load ore from lighters of 120 to 900 dwt at a

rate of about 2,000 tons per day, using ship’s gear. Tugs are

available. Fuel and fresh water are reported not available. Ore

vessels anchor about 0.4 mile NW of the jetty, in a depth of

about 66m. 

2.86 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory. There is no pilot at

Pulau Gebe. Vessels should advise their ETA to their general

agent and local agent at least 48 hours prior to arrival, confirming at least 24 hours prior to arrival.

2.86 Anchorage.—An anchorage N of Tanjung Tuli Kalio has a

depth of 29m. The best-sheltered anchorage is in the channel N

of Pulau Fau. The entrance is about 0.25 mile wide and there

are depths of 12.8 to 21.9m in the channel. Reefs are near both

entrances to the channel, but the W entrance is the best. The E

entrance can only be navigated when conditions are favorable

for identifying the reefs.

2.86 Fairly strong currents may be experienced at spring tides in

the vicinity of Pulau Fau, especially in the channel between it

and Pulau Gebe.

2.86 Anchorage may be found in the two bights at the SE end of

the island, but the depths are over 61m and a sea sets in during

SE winds.

2.87 Pulau Ju (Pulau Joe) (Pulau Yu) (0°03'S., 129°37'E.)

and Pulau Oeta (Pulau Uta), about 1.75 miles NNE, are islands

on separate banks E of Pulau Gebe. Pulau Ju is 55m high and

Pulau Oeta is comparatively low; both are covered with fairly

high trees. A wide and deep passage separates these islands

from Pulau Gebe. The village of Kampung Omnial is on the

rocky SW coast of Pulau Ju. Vessels anchoring here should

select a place W of the village because the bottom is too steep

in front of it. Local knowledge is necessary. Boats can enter the

lagoon at the SE end of the island. Pulau Oeta is not inhabited;

the coconut plantations on this island are maintained by

inhabitants of other islands. Vessels can anchor in favorable

weather off the SW end of Pulau Oeta, in 64m, about 183m

from shore, with the W point of the island bearing 005° and the

S point bearing 083°. An extensive shoal, having a depth of

7.9m on its outer edge, is usually marked by discoloration and

extends from the SE side of Pulau Oeta. This shoal narrows the

channel width to about 0.5 mile. Both islands are infested with

swarms of mosquitoes.

2.87 The passage between Pulau Ju and Pulau Oeta is deep and

clear, as is the passage between Pulau Ju and Pulau Gebe. The

shores of Pulau Gebe and Pulau Ju are steep-to. South of Pulau

Oeta the shoal water extending from that island can be avoided

by favoring the Pulau Ju shore when using that passage. In both

passages the current may be strong, especially near the SE

point of Pulau Gebe.

2.88 Pulau Gag (0°30'S., 129°52'E.), about 21.5 miles SE

of Pulau Gebe, is about 6 miles long and is very hilly; the

highest hills are 340m and 349m high. The island has been

reported to be a good radar target up to a distance of 30 miles.

The rocky W coast can be passed at a safe distance, but the N

and E coasts should be given a wider berth. An 11.9m shoal is

off the N coast, 10m and 7.8m shoals are off the NE part of the

island, and a number of shoals from 1.8 to 11.9m, known as

Fishing Bank, are SE of the S end of the island.

2.88 The island is most heavily wooded at the N part. It is practically uninhabitable because of swarms of stinging gnats. 

2.88 Anchorage.—Anchorage, open to the SE, may be obtained

on a muddy bottom, with depths of about 30m, to within 183m

of the shore. 

2.88 Madjet, a small islet on the coast reef at the N entrance point

of the inlet on the E side, is conspicuous because of tall trees.

A shoal of about 3.6m is about 0.5 mile W of Madjet in the

entrance of the inlet.

The Jef Doif Islands (Yef Doif Islands) (Pulau Bambu)

(0°46'N., 129°47'E.) are on and near the middle of the S side of

an extensive bank of soundings S of Pulau Gag. This bank has

very irregular depths; shoals of 6.9 to 20.1m are found near its

S and NW edges. Two 11m shoals have been reported 11 miles

E and ENE of Pulau Klaarbeek.

2.88 Pulau Klaarbeek, the northernmost island, is rocky and 112m

high, and its coast is exceptionally steep. A 5.2m shoal is close

S of Pulau Klaarbeek. Pulau Kommerrust, the easternmost, is a

low wooded coral island outside of the bank of soundings.

2.88 Pulau Schoteroog and Pulau Vlaming are two small heavilywooded coral islets close within the S edge of the bank; they

are surrounded by sandy beaches. The water on the bank is

very clear and the bottom can often be seen at a depth of 29m.

The islands are uninhabited.

2.89 Pulau Kofiau (1°11'S., 129°50'E.), 39 miles S of

Pulau Gag, is about 15 miles long in a E-W direction. The

greater part of it is low, but at the W end it rises in a group of

hills which attain an elevation of 255m. There are no conspicuous summits among these, however. Near the middle of the N

coast is a conspicuous 288m hill named Mata, with a 201m hill

close E of it. These two are dome-shaped when seen from the

N and S, but they appear conical when seen from the E. This

island as well as the smaller islands of this group, is heavily

wooded. With the exception of the inner bays on the S side, the

water around these islands is clear enough to see the bottom at

a depth of 18.3m. The sides of the group can be followed at a

distance of 0.5 mile, except for the NW side, which should be

given a berth of at least 1 mile.

2.89 The tidal currents in the passages attain maximum velocities

of 2.5 to 3 knots. When the wind and current are in opposite

directions, a choppy sea arises outside the archipelago.

2.89 The E part of Pulau Kofiau is totally uninhabited. A few inhabitants live in several small scattered settlements on the

smaller islands such as Pulau Jailolo and Pulau Deer. The principal occupation is fishing. Trading schooners call occasionally.

2.89 Anchorage.—Wambong-besar, on the S side of the E end of

Pulau Kofiau, offers good shelter against all but SW winds.

The anchorage, however, is rather narrow and suitable for only

a small vessel. It should be approached on a mid-channel

course through the bay. At the head of the bay is a small sandy

beach, on the W side mangrove trees grow out into the water,
36 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

and on the E side is a narrow coral strip with mangroves behind

it.

2.90 Tanjung Soos forms the E extremity of Kofiau; a light

is shown on Tanjung Soos. 

2.90 Pulau Deer (1°09'S., 129°50'E.), with the village of Kampung Deer, is separated from the N coast of Kofiau by a clear

channel. Vessels will find a sheltered anchorage off the village,

in 10.9 to 18.9m. A vessel may lie quietly here in all conditions

of weather. Local knowledge is necessary. The W entrance to

the channel is narrowed by the shore reefs; the E entrance is

wider.

2.90 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be for almost anywhere along

the N coast of Pulau Kofiau during the South Monsoon.

2.90 During the North Monsoon the clear channel between Pulau

Kofiau and Pulau Torobi offers excellent anchorage, in 14.6 to

26m. A 10m shoal is in the N entrance of this channel. A bank

with a depth of 31m is about 1.25 miles N of the N end of

Toribi. A deeper approach to this anchorage is through a channel along the N side of Pulau Kofiau and S of Pulau Jailolo and

the three islands E of it.

2.90 Many good anchorages are found among the smaller islands

SW of Pulau Kofiau. The islands facilitate navigation because

of the ease of taking bearings. The following are considered

safe entrances to the waters within the archipelago:

1. Between Pulau Toribi and Pulau Gebe-Besar, by

favoring the Pulau Toribi shore. Steer with the W point of

Pulau Tabek bearing 150°. There is a 7.3m shoal, 0.7 mile

offshore N of Gebe Besar, restricting this entrance.

2. Between the Walo Group and Keeim by favoring the

Walo Group.

3. Between the Walo Group and Pulau Tabek.

4. Between Ayuan (Ajoean) and Ayuan (Ajoean) Mangi

mangi. Keep to the Ayuan side.

2.90 Smaller vessels may also find anchorage in the inner bays of

Pulau Kofiau.

2.90 It is not advisable to anchor close to low mangrove shores

because these areas, especially in the S parts of the island,

abound in small flies whose bites can cause severe irritation

usually lasting about 3 days.

2.91 Kepulauan Boo (1°10'S., 129°22'E.), a group of islands on a bank of soundings W of the Kofiau Group, is separated from that group by a deep and wide channel. Pulau Boobesar, at the W end of the group, consists of two islands separated by a very narrow opening filled with reefs. These islands

are about 100m high and are flat on top. On the N coast there

are some rocky spots, but otherwise, only sandy beaches and

woods are seen. The S coast is mostly covered with mangrove

trees. The shoals off the W end are marked by discoloration. A

deep channel leads between Pulau Boo-besar and the next island to the E. Strong currents may be encountered in this channel.

2.91 A rocky 12.8m shoal was reported to lie about 4.5 miles

WNW of Pulau Boo-besar in position 1°09'S, 129°14'E.

2.91 Pulan Boo-kecil (Pulan Ketjill), the E island, and the smaller

islands between it and Pulau Boo-besar are low. The smaller

islands have more of an atoll shape and are thickly wooded.

The lagoons are shallow and suitable only for native canoes.

Off the W side of Pulau Boo-kecil is a clear basin with good

entrances leading in from N. Vessels can anchor in this basin,

sheltered in the N and partially-sheltered in the South Monsoon, in 29 to 73m.

2.91 Along the S edge of the bank is a long string of sand and

coral reefs with depths of 0.3 to 5m over them. They are

marked by discoloration. Passing vessels are advised to give

the S side of the islands a berth of 3 miles.

2.91 Strong currents with velocities up to 2.5 knots have been

observed near and among Kepulauan Boo. A difficult sea may

be experienced near the shallower places when the wind and

currents oppose each other.

2.91 There are no permanent settlements on these islands, but

they are sometimes visited by people from other islands. Water

is not available.

2.91 Dona Carmalita (1°18'S., 129°27'E.), about 5.5 miles S of

Pulau Boo-kecil, is an atoll-shaped bank with a least depth of

6.1m. Its edges are well marked by discoloration, and

sometimes by breakers. Breakers occur with even a slight

breeze blowing in the opposite direction to the tidal currents,

which may attain a velocity of 2 knots in a N or S direction. It

has been reported that large schools of porpoises lying on the

surface sometimes appear as rocks above water in this area.

2.91 Takat Sapa (1°10'S., 129°06'E.), with a least depth of 8.8m,

lies about 16 miles W of Kepulauan Boo, and is usually well

marked by discoloration, current rips, or breakers.

2.91 Pulau Pisang, S of Takat Sapa, was previously described in

paragraph 2.45.

Batanme

2.92 Batanme (Misool) (1°50'S., 130°10'E.), a large island, is about 32 miles SSE of Pulau Kofiau. It is on the outer

end of an extensive bank of soundings extending W from New

Guinea. The part of the island and its off-lying islands are low,

but the S part of the island and the off-lying islands to the S and

SE are high. Because the water over the bank on which these

islands lie is discolored by river water, discoloration is not a

sign of reefs and shoals.

2.92 In the open sea and in the channel between Batanme and

New Guinea, the monsoon drifts prevail, but near Batanme and

its surrounding islands tidal currents are encountered.

2.92 The N coast of Batanme is fronted by many dangers and by

wooded islands. The outermost danger, 13 miles N of the W

end of Batanme, is Mas Mas Oelit (Fitz Maurice Shoal), a

5.2m shoal; it is seldom marked by discoloration. A 29m bank

was reported to be about 6 miles WNW of Mas Mas Oelit; a

14.1m depth has been reported to lie about 6.5 miles N of Mas

Mas Oelit. Except at the W part of the island, the summits of

the range near the S side of Batanme are not of much use to

navigation, but the small islands are good marks for bearings.

It is reported that the long range of hills near the S coast are

obscured by haze during the Southeast Monsoon.

2.92 Caution.—Dangers in addition to those charted may exist

off the N side of Batanme. Vessels are warned to keep to the

recommended tracks through this area. False discoloration is

often seen.

2.93 Misool Marine Terminal (1°33'S., 130°31'E.) consists of the 200m-long FPSO vessel Brotojoyo. The terminal
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 37

Pub. 164

can accommodate vessels up to 85,000 dwt, but will not accept

vessels less than 20,000 dwt. Operations are handled jointly by

Pertamina and Petrochina Salawati.

2.93 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory unless proceeding to the

anchorage. The pilot normally boards in the anchorage. Tugs

are available.

2.93 Regulations.—Berthing is available during daylight hours

only, but unberthing is available 24 hours. The terminal

operates continuously throughout the year and has ability to

simultaneously receive and discharge cargo.

2.93 The vessel’s main engines must be maintained ready to allow

for immediate departure in the event of an emergency.

2.93 Vessels more than 20 years in age are not accepted unless,

during a previous transfer, the vessel loaded without incident.

2.93 An ETA should be sent on departure from last port of call

and 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours prior to arrival.

2.93 There is a restricted area established within 1.1 miles of the

terminal.

2.93 Anchorage.—An anchorage, with a radius of 1 mile and an

average depth of 38m, lies centered in position 1°33.5'S,

134°3'E. 

2.94 Waigama (1°50'S., 129°49'E.), the most important

village on the N coast of Batanme, is the station of a government official. A mosque and a flagstaff are at the village. The

village is about 7 miles ENE of the W end of the island.

2.94 The best anchorage is in a depth of 18m N of Wagajel, the

small peninsula E of Waigama. The N points of Pial and

Kaptjan Kecil should be in line bearing 252°. Pial lies on the

coastal reef 0.5 mile WNW of Waigama and Kaptjan Kecil, an

islet, lies 3.25 miles WSW of Pial.

2.94 Tides—Currents.—At Waigama, the maximum rise and fall

of tide that can be expected are, respectively, 0.5m above and

0.5m below mean sea level. The flood current sets in a W

direction. The maximum velocity recorded was 2 knots in the

more open parts and 3 knots in the narrow passages.

2.94 Directions.—Approaching from W, pass between Tanjung Fet

Dom, the W extremity of Batanme, and Pulau Kanari, an island

about 4.5 miles to the NW; then pass about 0.3 mile N of Pial, or

pass more than 1 mile N of Pial, and approach the anchorage with

the W tangent of Pian, an islet about 5 miles N of Waigama, in line

bearing 002°, astern, with the W tangent of the islet of Moeslat,

about 2 miles further N. There is a 6.9m shoal 0.8 mile N of the

Wagajel peninsula, with a 11m shoal close W of it. Another shoal

of 4.2m is located 0.8 mile NE of this peninsula.

2.94 Approaching from N, steer to pass about 1.75 miles W of Jef

Lie (1°36'S., 129°59'E.), then keep the E peak of Adola

(Adoea), 427m high, in line with the W side of Jef Kanjin,

about 8 miles SW of Jef Lie, bearing 198°; then pass W of Jef

Kanjin and proceed as given below.

2.94 Approaching from E proceed through the channel between

Kepulauan Kalies and Batanme to a position 1 mile N of the

detached reef, with a low white sand dune, 1.5 miles N of

Tanjung Haokep; then set course to pass S of Laitot and

Haowat, after which take passage between Pulau Bellis Darat

and Pulau Mut Mafela. The alignment of the N side of Pulau

Mut Mefela and the E side of Haitlal bearing 068° astern can

be followed until the rocky point W of Sungi Bano is in range

with the mountain Liem, bearing 192°. Steer for Liem on a

192° bearing until the N sides of Pial and Kaptjan-kecil are in

range, which will then lead to the anchorage. This course

passes S of a 4.2m shoal about 1.2 miles NE of Waigama in

position 1°49.0'S, 129°49.8'E.

2.95 Off-lying islands and dangers NE of Batanme.—

Kepulauan Penyu (Schildpad Islands), 16 miles NNE of the NE

point of Batanme, are a group of eight low islands covered with

high trees. They are in the N part of the channel between

Batanme and New Guinea and they divide the channel into two

parts.

2.95 Pentako Ef (1°25'S., 130°29'E.), the easternmost of Kepulauan Penyu, has a reef with depths of 1.8 to 2.7m extending

about 0.8 mile SE from it. A 1.8m shoal is about 0.75 mile

ENE and an 11.9m shoal is about 1.5 miles E of Pentako Ef. A

10m shoal was reported about 5.25 miles SW of Pentako Ef.

2.95 Hesketh Shoal (1°27'S., 130°22'E.), between Kepulauan

Penyu and Kepulauan Nusela (Noesela), is a mid-channel danger with a depth of 4.9m, rock.

Zeemeeuw Reefs (Karang Elang) (1°20'S., 130°31'E.),

between Kepulauan Penyu and New Guinea, are two patches

that dry at LW and are at that time marked by heavy breakers.

Tidal currents in this vicinity are irregular.

Kepulauan Dua (Kepulauan Doea) (1°32'S., 130°31'E.), a

group of small islands 5 miles SSE of Kepulauan Penyu, are

two low islands thickly covered by high trees. Madgal Reefs

are two dangerous reefs with 1.8 and 2.8m over them; they are

4 miles NE of Kepulauan Dua and SE of Kepulauan Penyu. A

depth of 16.1m, the position of which is approximate, was

reported about 0.75 mile WNW of the 1.8m shoal spot of

Madgal Reef.

2.95 A wreck with a depth of 13.7m is about 7.3 miles ESE of

Kepulauan Dua.

2.95 A 7.3m shoal is about 2 miles W of theNW extremity of

Mesloe Besar, the N island of Kepulauan Dua. Depths of 5.2m,

position approximate, were reported about 2.25 miles N and

2.25 miles W, respectively, from the same point.

2.95 A 0.3m shoal is about 9 miles SW of Kepulauan Dua.

2.96 The E coast of Batanme between Tanjung Yamtu

(Jamtoe) (1°40'S., 130°20'E.) and Tanjung Openta, about 12 miles

to the SE, is low and flat, but S of the latter point it rises sharply. A

depth of 4.5m is about 8 miles ESE of Tanjung Yamtu.

Teluk Tamulol (Teluk Tamoelol) (1°55'S., 130°25'E.), on

the S part of this coast, is virtually unnavigable because of the

numerous reefs in it. Vessels can, however, reach an anchorage

SW of Pulau Mustika (Moestika) in 31m. From E pass 1 mile S

of Ef Kasya (Kasja), then steer for the conspicuous Bayampop

hill on Mesemta Island bearing 272° until the E side of Pulau

Wagmab is abeam to port. Then steer for the S point of Pulau

Mustika. When Bayampop hill bears 235° steer W until the

conspicuous rocky islet of the N shore of the bay about 1.25

miles NW of Pulau Mustika bears 331°, then alter course for

the anchorage SW of Pulau Mustika.

Petrochina

http://www.petrochina.co.id
38 Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 

Pub. 164

2.96 There are many shoals in this area. When heading for the

anchorage these dangers, as marked on the chart, should be

noted. Off the SE side of Mustika are rocks awash and reefs

with depths ranging from 0.5 to 4.1m located as far as 1.6

miles offshore. Two shoals, N of the center of the island of

Lenkafal, with depths of 5.9m and 11.9m, are 2.4 and 3.0 miles

away, respectively.

2.96 West of Tanjung Openta are two conspicuous hills, Gunung

Pelana (Zadel Berg) (1°49'S., 130°22'E.) and Gunung Pencut

(Koepel Berg), 327m and 294m high, respectively. Bayampop,

a very conspicuous hill, 244m high is on Mesemta, an island

separated from the SE end of the main island by Panapana

Strait. This hill is sharp when seen from seaward, but appears

flatter when seen from N or S.

2.97 Off-lying islands and dangers off the E coast of

Batanme.—Among the islands which extend ESE from Mesemta, there are many deep channels, but they are not recommended because of the strong and irregular currents and the

very slight discoloration of the reefs. There is safe passage,

however, between Ef Pian (2°02'S., 130°45'E.) and the Sagof

group of islands about 2 miles W.

Ef Kasya (Seven Islands) (1°58'S., 130°47'E.), about 4 miles

NNE of Ef Pian are steep-to with a highest elevation of 53m.

Kepulauan Daram (Valsche Pisang Islands) (2°07'S.,

130°53'E.) are the easternmost of the chain of islands and

scattered rock extending from the SE end of Batanme. The

principal and easternmost island of this group is Pulau Daram

(2°09'S., 130°55'E.), 132m high and covered with forest. An

islet, 88m high, connected to the S side of the E end of Pulau

Daram, is also wooded, and when seen from S is striking

because of some steep yellow rocks. Bijenkorf Rots, a

detached rock in the shape of a beehive, is on the coastal reef

off the E end of Pulau Daram. The passage immediately N of

Pulau Daram is clear of dangers. The remaining islets of the

group are high masses of rock; the northwesternmost, Batu

Karang Hitam (Zwarte Rocks), are black rocks 4.2m high and

6.25 miles NW of the W end of Pulau Daram. The rocks about

0.75 mile ESE of Batu Karang Hitam and between them and a

25m high islet are only just above water.

2.97 Anchorage may be obtained during the Southeast Monsoon

off the N side of Pulau Daram.

2.97 A 2.7m shoal is about 3.25 miles SE of Batu Karang Hitam.

A 3m shoal and another with a depth of 2.7m are about 2.75

miles W and 1.25 miles SE, respectively, of the W end of Pulau

Daram. There is a 6m shoal 2 milesW of the W end of Daram.

A depth of 15.8m was reported 4 miles ESE of Pulau Daram.

2.97 Pulau Len Kafal (2°00'S., 130°35'E.), the largest of the islands of the string extending from Mesemta Island, is 336m

high and can be seen from a distance of 35 miles.

2.98 Tanjung Forongketo (2°01'S., 130°28'E.), the SE extremity of Batanme, is fringed by a reef which extends about

0.5 mile to the E and upon which there are several small islets.

An 8.2m shoal is about 1 mile SE and a 6.8m shoal is 0.8 mile

E of Tanjung Forongketo.

2.98 The archipeligo extending S from Tanjung Forongketo is

mainly small but high rocky islands, all uninhabited. Kepulauan

Jal (Djal), about 9 miles SW of Tanjung Forongketo, are low; the

rock WNW of these islands are always above water. Kepulauan

Jam, 2 miles SW of Kepulauan Jal (Djal) are also low; 1 mile NW

of them is a drying reef. A 4.9m shoal and a 6.7m shoal are about

1.25 and 1.75 miles SSE, respectively.

2.98 A very useful channel is between Ef Mo and Olobie Pale, a

conspicuous conical island about 9 miles S of Tanjung

Forongketo, but a 4.9m shoal well marked by discoloration is

between Olobie Pale and Wajaban Lenalos.

2.98 Boo (2°13'S., 130°35'E.), a narrow island, 142m high, is

about 7.5 miles SE of Olobie Pale. This island rises vertically

from the sea. Several above-water rocks are close off the E end

of the island. A 6.7m shoal is 1.5 miles E of Pulau Warakaraket, the next island S of Boo and a 4.9m shoal is almost 2

miles NE of Boo.

Teluk Lelintah (Lilinta Bay) (2°02'S., 130°18'E.), at the SE

end of Batanme, is encumbered with dangers. It is sheltered

during the Northwest Monsoon, but it is difficult to approach

during the Southeast Monsoon because of high seas. Kampung

Lelintah, the principal village, is in the SW part of the bay

close NW of Tanjung Wafani (2°03'S., 130°15'E.). Anchorage

can be found abreast of the village during the Northwest

Monsoon. The highest pointon the islet Tapalo (2°01.5'S.,

130°19.2'E.), in line with Ketjitot (2°03.0'S., 130°17.1'E.) on a

052° bearing, serves to indicate the close proximity of the

shoals and reefs extending from the shore near the anchorage.

Only a few houses are visible from seaward; the zinc roof of a

storehouse is the most conspicuous object.

2.98 Directions.—Vessels will encounter little difficulty approaching Teluk Lelintah from W. Discoloration should not be

depended upon to distinguish reefs with the exception of the

reef surrounding Fagom Genan. If Pulau Yaan (Pulau Jaan)

(2°08'S., 130°07'E.) is recognized and passed to the N,

Lelintah Road may be reached on a straight course of 067°

with Pulau Yaan bearing 247° astern. The short reef near

Kampung Lelintah is hardly visible.

2.98 A 10.1m shoal was reported about 15 miles WSW of Pulau

Yaan.

2.98 From S, the best channel is E of Yef Pelee (2°12'S., 130°15'E.),

an island about 7.5 miles S of Tanjung Wafani, then E of

Kaoenoet Sollon (2°10'S., 130°20'E.), a rock 62m high and about

2.5 miles NE of the E end of Yef Pelee, then between Batu and

Mate, about 2.75 miles farther NNE. A 6.7m shoal, slightly

marked by discoloration is on the W side of the part of the

passage, and a rock is close off the W end of Mate. Pass about 0.2

mile W of this latter rock, leading through a least depth of 10.9m,

then steer for the entrance of Lelintah Bay, avoiding a shoal with a

depth of 7.6m about 3 miles SE of Tanjung Wafani.

2.98 The easiest approach from E is N of Boo, then N of the chain

of islands of which Boo is the easternmost. Then the route for

the S approach, given above, should be followed.

2.98 The channels between Jaganan (2°03'S., 130°24'E.) and Japale,

NW of it, between Japaleand the coast of Batanme, and between

Gag and Ginjamato, SE of it, should not be used because of their

bends and the strong tidal currents which run in them.

2.99 The S coast of Batanme has some conspicuous summits in the range of hills close to the S coast. Those most easily

distinguished are Wieng, Liem, Adola (Adoea), and Foel,

which are 408m, 486m, 427m, and 531m high, respectively,
Sector 2. The Northern Moluccas—Halmahera, Kepulauan Obi, and Kepulauan Sula 39

Pub. 164

and lie near the W end of the island. Elban and Jadata, 407m

high, are near the middle of the S coast. Liem has the appearance of a cone when seen from W. Although these are the first

objects sighted by vessels coming from W, the high islands of

the archipelago S and SE of Batanme are soon picked up.

Native fishermen report that during the Southeast Monsoon

this coast is almost unapproachable because of the heavy seas.

2.99 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents off the S coast of Batanme sets E and W at a maximum velocity of 2 knots, which is generally less than that off the N coast. In the narrow channels,

however, the currents are sometimes stronger and very irregular.

2.99 This stretch of coast is almost deserted. Four large houses used

as temporary residences are at the village of Kampung Adola

(Adoea) (1°59'S., 129°54'E.). Telok Wagom lies about 9 miles

further E. Water can be obtained from a stream near its head. 

2.100 Pulau Tiga (2°02'S., 130°00'E.), lying W of Teluk

Wagom, is separated from the coast by a safe channel; the coast

reef here is not very well marked by discoloration.

2.100 Suitable anchorage may be found behind Joe, a small islet

SE of Teluk Wagom. The reef with a drying rock which extends from the E end of the islet is conspicuous because of the

breakers on it. The islet was reported to be a good radar target

up to a distance of 20 miles.

2.100 In the bay behind Jef Bie (2°04'S., 130°09'E.), the shallow

places are not marked by discoloration, but the E entrances are

easily navigated because in that area the reefs are indicated by

discoloration.

2.100 Caution.—Several charted reported depths of less than 183m

are located S of Batanme. A depth of 10.1m was reported in

position 2°12'S, 129°59'E. A depth of 11m is located in position

2°06'S, 129°41'E.
Pub. 164

3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda

3.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 3 — CHART INFORMATION
43

Pub. 164

SECTOR 3 

THE SOUTHERN MOLUCCAS—BURU, SERAM, AND KEPULAUAN BANDA

3.0 Plan.—This sector describes Buru, Seram, their off-lying

islands, and Kepulauan Banda, in that order. 

General Remarks

3.1 The Seram Sea (Ceram Sea) is the broad and deep

passage bounded on the N by Kepulauan Sula and Pulau Obi,

and the islands stretching then to Pulau Kofiau; on the S it is

bounded by Buru and Seram. With the exception of Karang

Bais (Leeuwarden Reef), off the NE point of Seram, there are

no dangers outside the 200m curve. Tidal currents will be

encountered close to the shores of the surrounding islands, but

in the more open sections of the passage, monsoon drifts

prevail. In the vicinity of Karang Bais, a constant E current has

been observed.

3.1 Winds—Weather.—The monsoons in the Seram Sea are not

quite so well developed here as in the seas to the W and S. The

East Monsoon especially is of relatively short duration, and

only moderately well developed.

3.1 In January, the prevailing winds are NW. They blow with fair

regularity, with an average velocity of about 6 knots. There is

little change in February. The West Monsoon weakens in

March. In April, the winds become variable, and in May the

East Monsoon sets in with winds most often from the SE, but

with little constancy.

3.1 The East Monsoon continues to be rather poorly developed

through June, but in July, August, and September it is fairly

well established with SE winds a half to two-thirds of the time.

The average velocity then is about 9 to 10 knots. It becomes

weaker in October and ceases by November, when the winds

are quite variable again, more often SE than any other direction.

3.1 During December, the West Monsoon becomes established

with NW winds of fair regularity and moderate force.

3.1 Locally the direction of the wind is much affected by islands,

in some places the land and sea breezes dominate. This is

especially true in the vicinity of Seram.

3.1 In the open sea, showery weather occurs frequently during

most of the year, but less often from August to November.

3.1 Haze is observed at all seasons, but is most pronounced in

August and October.

3.1 The character of the weather on the islands depends largely

upon the exposure to the monsoons; the S coast has its best

weather during the West Monsoon.

Buru

3.2 Buru (3°25'S., 126°40'E.) is the third largest of the

Molucca Islands and has the appearance of one large irregularshaped mass of mountains when seen from a considerable distance in any direction. Namlea Plain is a large valley in the E

part of the island. The summits of the mountains are not easily

distinguished from a distance; the higher peaks are often

hidden by clouds. The mountains are further described with the

coasts. The island is fringed by a reef in many places, but there

are depths of 183m close to the coast nearly everywhere.

3.2 Winds—Weather.—The weather conditions on the N and S

sides of Buru Island differ widely. On the N coast, the Northwest Monsoon brings rain while the Southeast Monsoon is

accompanied by a dry spell. On the S coast the reverse is true.

During the latter part of the turning period in the fall and

during December and January strong W or S winds and rain

storms may spring up suddenly, but they last only a few hours;

they cause a heavy sea.

Buru—North Coast

3.3 Coastwise navigation along this coast is safe because

there are no detached dangers outside the 20m curve, which is

close inshore.

Tanjung Karbau (Tanjung Karbou) (3°17'S., 127°07'E.),

the N entrance point of Teluk Kayeli, is marked by a light, and

is further described in paragraph 3.11.

Djikoe Merasa (Jikumerasa) (3°10'S., 127°02'E.) lies about

8.5 miles NE of Tanjung Karbau. Good anchorage, out of the

tidal current, may be obtained here; local knowledge is

necessary. This anchorage is unsafe during the Southeast

Monsoon. Terwissie (3°13'S., 127°02'E.), a 355m high treeless

mountain, stands 2.5 miles SSE of Djikoe Merasa, with a commanding hill, 194m high and with a tree on it, 2.25 miles SE.

All other hills in this vicinity are sparsely covered with trees.

3.3 Good anchorage, out of the tidal current, may also be obtained in Teluk Waeplau, about 9 miles ENE of Djikoe Merasa.

Local knowledge is necessary; this anchorage is unsafe during

the Southeast Monsoon.

3.3 From Teluk Waepluto Tanjung Hatawanu (3°04'S.,

126°47'E.), 7 miles ENE, the coast is a stretch of sandy beach

in back of which a plain rises gradually to the foothills of the

higher interior mountains. The foothills are covered with lightgreen vegetation.

3.3 Between Tanjung Hatawanu and Tanjung Wapoti (3°04'S.,

126°41'E.), 6 miles W, the coast is in great contrast to the

above stretch. It is rather high, steep, and rocky, and a spur of

the mountains approaches it. The highest point is a 621m

summit about 3 miles ESE of Tanjung Wapoti. East of this

spur, and separated from its steep E side by a gap, is a rather

high plain.

3.3 Between Tanjung Wapoti and Tanjung Bebek (3°06'S.,

126°18'E.), 24 miles to the W, the coast is sandy beaches

backed by plains which rise to light-green foothills. Wai Nibe,

the only river of any importance on this coast is 5 miles W of

Tanjung Wapoti. The very dark 911m peak E of the river is

easily distinguished from the other summits. The 1,458m peak

11 miles SE of Tanjung Bebek has the appearance of a large

block when seen from the N and the NE and as the summit of

the ridge from farther W. South of Tanjung Bebek a spur of the

mountains extends in a N direction and has two sets of steep

triple summits, each on a N-S line.
44 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

3.3 At Teluk Bara (3°10'S., 126°13'E.), entered between Tanjung Bebek and Tanjung Palpetu (Tangjung Palpetoe), about 12

miles E, the mountains come close to the coast, so the coastal

plain is considerably narrower. When seen from the N, the

range S of the bay has a number of conspicuous points. 

3.3 Kapalatmada (3°16'S., 126°12'E.), the highest peak,

2,429m high and about 12 miles SSW of Tanjung Bebek, is

fairly sharp and is the highest peak on the island. The next peak

to the W is 2,215m high and flat-topped. The 2,059m peak W

of the latter has a rounded summit. Gunung Tomahu (Tomahoe), the westernmost of the higher peaks, has a double top,

2,161m and 2,109m high; the E summit resembles a horn with

the point to the W. The 731m peak W of Gunung Tomahu is a

sharp well-wooded cone. A high spur with three conspicuous

summits, 702m, 352m, and 255m high, extends from Gunung

Tamahu to Tanjung Palpetu.

3.3 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set either E or W

along the coast. The greatest velocity on record is 2.5 knots.

The W current draws inward somewhat at Teluk Bara. Nothing

is known as to the relationship between the turning periods of

the vertical and horizontal tidal movements.

3.3 The lowest LW level occurs in June and December. The

maximum rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively,

about 0.5m above and about 1.0m below mean sea level.

3.3 Anchorage.—A number of villages are scattered along the

N coast but, with the exception of Teluk Bara, the bottom is too

steep for suitable anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon.

3.3 Teluk Bara affords anchorage during the Southeast

Monsoon, but during the Northwest Monsoon high seas and a

surf will be experienced. In the E part of the bay is the small

village of Kampung Bara inhabited by people from Halmahera

and Kepulauan Sula.

Buru—West Coast

3.4 A wide berth should be given to the N part of this

coast, which is foul up to 1.25 miles offshore. Between Tanjung Waeken and Tanjung Waflia, about 4 and 6 miles, respectively, SW of Tanjung Palpetu, three small but conspicuous hills

stand near the coast. The N one is partly bare and the middle

one entirely bare. Tanjung Waflia is low and covered with

coconut trees. Near the Tomahu Islands, where the mountains

come close to the coast, the coast is especially high. The conspicuous peak of Gunung Tomahu resembles a cone. The hilly

peninsula of Fogi, from which is a light is shown from the

summit, is located farther to the S. It is an excellent place for

landfall.

3.4 South of Fogi peninsula the rocky coast gives way to sandy

beaches. There are no conspicuous summits among the mountains, but in back of Tanjung Sarmana (3°25'S., 126°02'E.)

and Tanjung Walimen (3°29'S., 126°05'E.) the heavilywooded terrain rises rapidly. Tanjung Walwawat (3°37'S.,

126°11'E.) is the S point of a wide stretch of lowland, through

which the Wai Koema flows. The muddy waters of this river

discolor the sea water for a long distance offshore.

3.4 Strong currents set in a N or S direction along this coast.

With continuous winds in the Southeast Monsoon there is

usually a high running sea and rollers from the S.

3.4 Anchorage.—The channel between Buru and Pulau Tengah (3°14'S., 126°00'E.) offers excellent anchorage, in depths

of 24 to 39m, over mud and sand. Outside the 10m curve,

which is close to the shores, the depth in most places is more

than 20m. A 3m patch lies 1.2 miles from the S point of Tengah

in the middle of the fairway and a 9.1m shoal lies 0.4 mile E of

the same point. There are also several rocks in this approach. In

the middle of the broader section N of the latter spot is a 16.4m

shoal. The only settlement of any importance is situated at the

N end of Pulau Tengah; near it is a small and steep beach. The

anchorage near the village is in a depth of 29m. Local knowledge is essential.

3.4 The channel N of Pulau Tomahu can only be used by small

vessels.

3.4 The channel between Pulau Tengah and Pulau Tomahu is the

preferred entrance for large vessels. The drying reefs are

clearly marked here, while the S entrance is encumbered with

several submerged rocks with a depth of 0.9m. The tidal

currents inside the Tomahu Islands are weak. In the N entrance

to the channel between Pulau Tomahu and the coast and between Pulau Tomahu and Pulau Tengah, a vessel approaching

from the outside is soon clear of the tidal current which sets

across the entrances.

3.4 Off the village of Kampung Fogi, about 2 miles S of the Fogi

Peninsula there is suitable anchorage for a small vessel when

the reefs can be made out.

3.4 Close off a coconut plantation at Kampung Wamsasi

(3°33'S., 126°10'E.), anchorage may found in the open roadstead, 0.3 mile offshore, in a depth of about 15m, fine black

sand, good holding ground; this is the only anchorage free

from rollers during the Southeast Monsoon.

Buru—South Coast

3.5 Southeast of Tanjung Walwawat (3°38'S.,

126°12'E.) there are many detached dangers. A shoal of 9m is

located 3 miles ESE of Tanjung Walwawat. Shoals with least

depths of 7.8 and 11.9m are 1.5 miles and 3 miles SSW and

SE, respectively of Tanjung Fatufat (Fatoefat). Off the coast of

Bobo, just NW of Tanjung Fatufat (3°40'S., 126°17'E.), is a

rock awash and a 5.9m shoal. A 3.9m shoal and a long drying

reef are off the coast between Teluk Tifu (Tifoe) and Teluk

Leksula (Leksoela). The most conspicuous section of this coast

is the Plain of Mala, which extends into the interior of the

island. Here the sea is discolored for miles offshore by the

muddy waters of the river Wai Mala. The hills and mountains

lie close to the coast on either side of this plain. Sanane, the

296m hill on the W side of the entrance to Teluk Tifu, is especially conspicuous. With favorable weather anchorage is

available almost anywhere between Tanjung Walwawat and

Teluk Leksula, over a sandy bottom.

3.5 Tidal currents can be fairly strong along this coast.

Teluk Tifu (Tifoe) (3°43'S., 126°24'E.), 13 miles SE of

Tanjung Walwawat affords anchorage free from rollers, heavy

seas, and currents but it is only large enough for one vessel.

Because of the narrow entrance and the rollers and currents in

front of it during the Southeast Monsoon, it is sometimes

impossible to enter. During this monsoon, however, it is advisable, when possible, to enter early in the morning and depart as

early as possible, because the wind increases as the day advances.
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 45

Pub. 164

3.5 Pulau Ketjil is on the N side of the E end of the bay.

Kampung Tifu, with a pier, lies on the S side.

3.5 Signals.—A flag is displayed at the flagstaff on the E entrance point when it is inadvisable to enter; a red flag is displayed when there is already a vessel in the bay.

3.5 Directions.—A vessel should approach the entrance at a low

speed and enter with only sufficient speed for steerage way.

When Pulau Ketjil bears 060°, it should be steered for on that

bearing, then let go the starboard anchor when the point on the

NW shore, about 0.3 mile W of the head of the pier at

Kampung Tifu bears not less than 270°, or when the pierhead

bears about 094°, veering out about 49m of cable; after

swinging, a hawser should be laid out to a tree on Pulau Ketjil.

3.6 Kampung Tifu (3°43'S., 126°24'E.) is on a sloping

beach on the E side of Teluk Tifu. There is a pier for boats.

Vessels call here occasionally. 

3.6 Tides—Currents.—At Teluk Tifu the highest HW level occurs

in March and September and the lowest in June and December.

The maximum rise and fall of tide that can be expected are,

respectively, 0.6m above and 0.7m below mean sea level.

3.6 A shoal, depth not known and position approximate, and

another shoal, depth not known and existence doubtful, are 19

and 36 miles, respectively, S of Teluk Tifu.

3.6 A shoal with a depth of 3.9m is 3 miles SE of Teluk Tifu

about 0.3 mile offshore. About 2 miles SE of this shoal and 0.5

mile offshore there is a drying reef marked by discoloration.

Teluk Leksula (Leksoela) (3°47'S., 126°31'E.), 8 miles SE

of Teluk Tifu, is easily recognized by its two entrance points,

Tanjung Kabat Roit and Tanjung Kabat Ha, with the small

rocky islets in the channel between them. Midden Islet, at the

middle of the entrance, has the appearance of a flat cylinder. Of

the coast mountains, Mefa, 565m high, Miten, and Tef Dula are

fairly conspicuous. Batu Kapal (Batoe Kapal), lying 2.5 miles

ESE of Tanjung Kabat Roit, is a rock that forms a good mark

for making the entrance to Leksula Bay. This rock is at the S

end of a reef extending about 1 mile offshore.

3.6 A light, shown only when vessels are expected, is shown

from the NE side of the bay.

3.7 Kampung Leksula (Leksoela) (3°47'S., 126°31'E.)

(World Port Index No. 52740) is at the foot of hills, near a

small bight in the drying reef at the head of the bay. There is a

landing pier, with a depth of 1.8m alongside.

3.7 Anchorage can be found, in 35m, mud, in the middle of the

bay. During the Southeast Monsoon anchorage should be

somewhat farther to the E, in 20.1m. During the Northwest

Monsoon, anchorage should be more to the NW, in 28m. There

are no currents in the bay.

3.7 Anchorage.—Near the village of Kampung Nalbesi, about 3

miles E of Teluk Leksula, and near the village of Kampung

Wanala, 6.5 miles farther ESE, anchorage can be found during

favorable weather conditions This is outside the strength of the

tidal currents and local knowledge is necessary.

3.7 Directions.—With the bay well open steer for Midden Islet

on a NNE course until the light bears 038°, which will lead

through the channel between Midden Islet and the detached

reef, 0.2 mile SE of this islet.

3.7 Between Teluk Leksula and Tanjung Batupekat (Batoepekat) (3°51'S., 126°44'E.), the S extremity of Buru, about 14

miles to the E the coast is very similar in character to the coast

NW of the bay. The high rocky point Tanjung Batutulis

(3°50'S., 126°37'E.) is the most conspicuous point E of Batu

Kapal. Between Teluk Leksula and Tanjung Batutulis are

shoals ranging from depths of 0.9 to 7.8m and coral reefs extending as far as 2 miles offshore. The vicinity of Teluk Namrole is especially conspicuous because of the valley of the Wai

Tina, the 49m high rocky walls of Tanjung Batupekat, and the

small rocky islet of Klasi. Close inland of Teluk Namrole are

the Wa Leli Mountains, a range of hills with an elevation up to

553m.

3.8 Teluk Namrole (3°51'S., 126°43'E.) has a white coral

reef, Loktonal, at the middle of its entrance; the reef dries at

LW. A rather strong current has been observed in the deep

channel between Klasi and the shore. There is no shore reef in

front of the village of Kampung Namrole, on the NW side of

the bay. A small hill, round and flat, is near the shore E of the

village and is conspicuous because of its lighter color. To enter

the bay, steer N for the 553m summit of the Wa Leli

Mountains. If the summit is obscured by clouds, a useful alternate mark, on the same bearing, is a large round-topped tree,

which, on nearer approach, will be seen between two native

houses in the village. Anchorage will be found, in 29m, sand

and coral, in Teluk Namrole.

3.8 Directions.—Approach the bay with the summit of Wai Leli

bearing 000° and in line with Namrole village; if the summit is

obscured, a useful alternative mark on the same bearing is a

large round-topped tree which, on near approach, is seen

between two houses in the village. Pass W of Loktonal on this

leading line then steer for a white patch about 0.5 mile SW of

Wai Leli summit in line with a prominent knob on the ridge

behind it bearing 340°; this leads to the anchorage. 

3.8 Between Tanjung Batupekat and Tanjung Liboli (3°41'S.,

127°11'E.), the SE extremity of Buru, about 30 miles NE, the

coast is backed by a mountain range parallel to the coast. The

highest point of the range is Kaku Batakbual (Batak Boeal), a

1,731m peak 10 miles N of Tanjung Liboli. The summits of

this range are almost always hidden by the clouds.

3.8 Between Tanjung Batupekat and Tanjung Salia, 14 miles to

the ENE, the coast is fronted by a barrier reef with a number of

deep openings through it. Shoals, with least depths of 4.1 to

7.7m, are located as far as 3 miles offshore. Behind this barrier

reef, anchorage can be found almost anywhere, over a sandy

bottom.

3.8 Labuan Kabuti, on the NE side of Tanjung Salia, affords suitable anchorage during the Northwest Monsoon, in a depth of

42m. At Tanjung Polisini, 9.5 miles farther NE, there is anchorage, in 50 to 61m, close W of the mouth of Wai Lumara.

3.8 Pulau Oki (3°49'S., 126°51'E.), an islet, 149m high and

covered with vegetation, is about 1 mile offshore, about 7 miles

ENE of Tanjung Batupekat. Some rocks are close S of the islet.

Wayo (Wajio) Reefs with a least depth of 4m lie with the

shallowest part 2 miles ESE of Pulau Oki. The islet is reported

to be a good radar target up to a distance of 22 miles.

3.8 The 617m and 670m summits N of Tanjung Salia are good

marks. On both sides of Tanjung Salia there is an almost continuous line of sandy beaches with plains between them and the

hills. At Tanjung Liboli, the coast becomes rocky again.
46 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

3.8 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set parallel with the

coast. Eddies are experienced off Tanjung Salia, and between

Tanjung Liboli and Pulau Ambelau, an island described in

paragraph 3.9. These whirlpools are created by the E current

through the passage meeting the S current in Selat Manipa.

During the West Monsoon, there is sometimes a strong drift

setting E in this passage; during the East Monsoon, there is

sometimes a strong drift setting W in this passage.

3.9 Oki Roads (3°48'S., 126°51'E.), N of the islet of the

same name, is best entered by passing close E of that islet. If

bound to the W from the roads pass between the islet and the

4.9m coral patch N of it. Vessels proceeding E through the

inner channel should favor the coast N of Wayo Reef (Wajio

Reef) and Belobo Reef; the latter has a drying spot on the N

side. Kampung Oki, on Buru, N of Pulau Oki, is the most important settlement on this coast.

Pulau Ambelau (3°51'S., 127°12'E.) is 8.5 miles S of

Tanjung Liboli and is separated from Buru by a deep and clear

passage. It rises almost vertically from the sea, and may be

approached close-to as far as depths are concerned. The entire

island is wooded and very hilly. The highest summits, Nona,

559m high, and Baula, 608m high, are on the W part of the

islet. At Waloa, on the S coast, and at Nigeri Baru and Ulima

(Uilima) on the N coast, sandy beaches and the only flat land

on the island is found. Native canoes may find suitable anchorage in the small bay at Waloa; otherwise no anchorage has

been found anywhere.

3.9 Pulau Ambelau is a good radar target up to a distance of 22

miles. A lighthouse, 40m in height, has been established on

Tanjung Bartutui (3°54'S., 127°13'E.).

Buru—East Coast

3.10 Between Tanjung Liboli and Teluk Kayeli (3°19'S.,

127°07'E.), Buru is composed of high and wild mountainous land

with mountain spurs extending close up to the coast and forming

rocky points in places. Between these points are sandy beaches

and the coast slopes more gently. At Tanjung Pohonrea, 8 miles

NNE of Tanjung Liboli, there is a small round coastal hill, 157m

high which is very conspicuous. Teluk Kayeli, described in

paragraph 3.11, can easily be identified by approaching vessels,

because this bay, together with the Plain of Namlea to the W,

appear as a large break in the mountainous country.

3.10 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are strong along this

coast; the maximum velocity of the N and NW current was

observed to be 3 knots five days after new moon; the maximum

velocity of the SE and S current was about 1 knot.

3.10 Anchorage.—During the Southeast Monsoon, the E coast S

of Teluk Kayeli is absolutely not approachable. During the

Northwest Monsoon, fairly suitable anchorage may be found in

the following places:

3.11 In the bight at Kampung Ilat (3°35'S., 127°15'E.), 7

miles NNE of Tanjung Liboli, small vessels can anchor, in 50

to 70m, out of the strength of the current, but it is attended with

some difficulty. When approaching steer 270° for a small isolated house close N of the village and in the middle of the

shore of the bay. A stream is a little S of this house. When at

anchorage Pulau Ambelau is out of sight behind the land S of

the anchorage. In calm weather anchorage is available farther S

nearer Kampung Ilat, in depths of 35 to 40m.

3.11 Close N of Kampung Batujungkoar (Batoedjoenko)

(3°26'S., 127°15'E.) there is a point with some detached rocks

in the shallows off it. A suitable anchorage, in 21m, is available

about 183m NE of these rocks.

3.11 Teluk Kayeli (3°19'S., 127°07'E.), on the NE side of Buru,

is 4.5 miles wide between the two low entrance points Tanjung

Waat and Tanjung Karbau. A light is shown at an elevation of

14m from Tanjung Karbau.The land at these points rises

immediately to the hills in back of them; this and the low,

marshy inner shore, backed by the Plain of Namlea, make it

easy to recognize. There is little or no current in the bay.

3.11 The river Wai Apu (Wa Apu), discharging at the head of the

bay, gives a dirty gray muddy color to the waters of the bay, especially after heavy rains. The river has been navigated by a

motorboat for a considerable distance above the mouth. A least

depth of 3m was reported and the width varied from about 80

to 100m. The rate of the stream was estimated at from 3 to 4

knots. 

3.11 Kayeli Roads (3°22'S., 127°07'E.), in the S part of Teluk

Kayeli, is in a spacious bight with suitable anchorage, in depths

of 35 to 40m, mud and sand. When entering near HW the

drying reef on the E side of the bight should be given a wide

berth. On the S part of this reef are the islets Pulau Besar and

Pulau Kecil.

3.11 Namlea Roads (3°16'S., 127°05'E.), in the N part of Teluk

Kayeli, has irregular depths and a number of dangers, most of

which front the shore abreast of the village on the NE side. It is

free from rollers at all times but is encumbered by shoals some

of which are marked by beacons.

3.12 Kampung Namlea (3°17'S., 127°06'E.) (World Port

Index No. 52760) is the residence of a government official.

There is a boat pier with a depth of 1.8m at its head. Lighters

unload and load cargo on the beach. A mosque NW of the pier

is prominent from seaward. A light, shown only when vessels

are expected, is shown from the head of the boat pier.

3.12 The entrance of the channel leading to the inner roads is

marked by two beacons 0.35 mile W of the pierhead. A pole

beacon marks a 5.5m shoal about 1.75 miles W of the pier.

3.12 Tides—Currents.—At Namlea Roads the lowest LW level

occurs in May and June, and in November and December. The

maximum rise and fall of tide that can be expected are, respectively, about 0.4m above and 0.8m below mean sea level.

3.12 Anchorage.—The usual anchorage is about 0.5 mile WSW

from the head of the pier at Kampung Namlea. This anchorage

has a depth of 20.1m, but a 3.9m shoal and a 2.4m shoal are N

and SW, respectively, from it. A deep channel used by small

craft and lighters leads from the anchorage to the beach. There

is no difficulty in the approach to the roads, but the N entrance

point to Teluk Kayeli should not be rounded too closely because of 0.3m depths close to the point.

Selat Manipa

3.13 Selat Manipa (3°20'S., 127°22'E.), between Buru and

Pulau Manipa, about 14 miles E, is a wide, clear deep-sea

passage connecting the Seram Sea with the Banda Sea. It is

much used by vessels passing through this region. During con-
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 47

Pub. 164

tinuous winds, which cause a high sea in the strait, small vessels give preference to Selat Kelang, discussed in paragraph

3.15, even though the current may be almost as strong there as

in Selat Manipa.

3.13 Tides—Currents.—Strong currents flow through Selat

Manipa, but they are more or less influenced by the monsoon

drifts. Strong tide rips were reported mid-channel in the strait.

3.14 Pulau Manipa (3°19'S., 127°34'E.), about 14 miles E

of Buru, is mountainous and rises to a height of 632m at Kala

Huhun. On the S side is a narrow plain on which are several

villages where most of the island’s inhabitants live. There are

hardly any plantations. A large coastal reef, on which are the

islands Masawoi and Asamamonuke (Asamamonoeke), extends from the N end of Pulau Manipa. Other islands near

Pulau Manipa are Pulau Suanggi (Soeanggi), Tuban (Toeban)

and Luhu. The channel between Pulau Suanggi and Pulau

Manipa is clear; the channel between Pulau Manipa and the

large reef on which Tuban lies can be navigated with due care.

3.14 Suanggi Island Light (3°18'S., 127°28'E.) is shown from a

21m white iron framework structure on the summit of the

island. It is irregular during strong winds. The island is a good

radar target at a distance of up to 26 miles.

3.14 Anchorage can be found on the S, W, and NE coasts. Anchoring on the NE coast is not recommended, however, because strong tidal currents strike this coast from the N. A

current with a velocity of 5 to 6 knots has been observed by a

vessel anchored NW of Tanjung Samala, the SE point of the

island. Tidal currents with rates of 5 to 6 knots have also been

observed in the strait off Tanjung Saniani, the W point of Pulau

Kelang.

3.14 The best anchorage at Pulau Manipa is off the NW coast is in

Reede Hayasa (Hajasa) (3°17'S., 127°31'E.) which is entered

between Tanjung Hapale and Tanjung Hakuluane (Hakoeloeanoe). The head of this bight is encumbered with drying

reefs and shoals. Anchorage is available, in 16.4 to 46m; fair

shelter, during the Southeast Monsoon.

Selat Kelang

3.15 Selat Kelang (3°16'S., 127°39'E.), between Pulau

Manipa and Pulau Kelang, has a least navigable width of 4

miles and is deep and clear. The points of the islands forming it

can easily be recognized even at night. The tidal currents are

very strong making it advisable to maintain a mid-channel

course if navigating the passage at night. The maximum rate of

tidal current of from 5 to 6 knots has been observed in the strait

off Tanjung Saniani, the W extremity of Pulau Kelang and off

Tanjung Samala, the SE extremity of Pulau Manipa.

3.15 Pulau Kelang (3°12'S., 127°44'E.), NE of Pulau Manipa, is

mountainous; its highest peak, Tonu (3°13'S., 127°45'E.), is

828m high and is an old volcano. Kampung Sole, on the NE

side, is the largest village. Fishermen may be encountered all

around the island.

3.15 Tanjung Saniani (3°14'S., 127°38'E.), the W extremity of

Pulau Kelang, has a mosque with a conspicuous silver-colored

dome standing on its S side.

3.15 Anchorage.—Suitable anchorage can be found at the N end

of the island W of Tanjung Batugoso except during strong continuous winds during the Northwest Monsoon. On the S coast,

there is anchorage near Kampung Pamariki, 2.5 miles W of the

SE end of the island. On the E coast are several anchorages N

of the parallel of the mountain, Tonu.

3.16 Pulau Babi (3°10'S., 127°48'E.), off the NE side of

Pulau Kelang, is comparatively low. It is separated from Pulau

Kelang by Lobang Sole, a narrow strait which cannot be

recommended as a passage because of strong currents which

cause eddies.

3.16 Lobang Haja (3°09'S., 127°50'E.), the narrow strait

between Pulau Babi and Tanjung Haja, on Seram, can be

navigated by small vessels with local knowledge and draft no

greater than 3.3m. The currents attain a maximum rate of 6

knots and local knowledge is necessary. Shoals, with depths of

2.7m and 3.6m, are 0.6 and 0.4 mile, respectively, S of Tanjung

Haja.

3.16 Directions.—Vessels approaching Lobang Haja from S

should steer 015° for Tanjung Haja passing W of the abovementioned shoals. Then come to 357° to pass about 91m W of

Tanjung Haja, and continuing on that course past the point and

through the strait.

Selat Boano

3.17 Selat Boano (3°00'S., 128°00'E.), between Pulau

Boano and the NW coast of Seram, is a good passage, but tidal

currents will be experienced within it. When approaching from

NE, Tanjung Tanduru Besar (Tandoeroe Besar), the NW point

of Seram, is a conspicuous landmark. Tide rips may be seen off

the NE end of Pulau Boano. When passing through the strait,

favor the E side of Pulau Boano because it is steep-to. On the

NE side of Boano, N of Tanjung Pamali, shoals with depths of

2.8m and 5.9m, extend about 1 and 1.5 miles offshore, respectively.

3.17 Pulau Boano (2°58'S., 127°55'E.), 8.5 miles NE of Pulau

Kelang, is mountainous over its SW part. The highest point is a

conspicuous 624m high conical summit. The NE part of the

island is a low plateau, not over 59m high. The pointed SW end

of the island is rocky and very conspicuous. In contrast to the E

and SE sides of the island, many shoals and reefs front the NW

side. Because the bottom on the NW side is also very irregular,

it is advisable to keep at least 3 miles off, considering also that

the currents are also irregular. 

Pua (Poea) (2°56'S., 127°54'E.), an island 403m high, is

close off the NW side of Pulau Boano. The passage between

the two is obstructed by reefs. A 10.9m shoal and a 1.4m shoal

are 2 miles NW and 1.5 miles NNW, respectively, of the SE

point of Pua.

3.17 Several dangers lie off the W sides of Pua and Boano; this

coast should not be approached within 3 miles.

3.17 A light is shown at an elevation of 60m from Pulau Niene. 

3.17 Pulau Boano is rocky and infertile, and sparsely inhabited.

There are no inhabitants on the N and NW part of the island.

Seram (Ceram)

3.18 Seram is about 185 miles long and has irregular

mountains over its entire length. Its highest point, in about the

middle of the island, is Gunung Binaiya (Binaija) (3°10'S.,

129°27'E.), 3,055m high. Except for a few coastal reefs pro-
48 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

jecting from Seram and nearby islands, vessels can navigate

close to the shore.

3.18 Earthquakes occur often, more so on the S coast than on the

N coast. Mud volcanoes are found in the vicinity of Bula

(3°06'S., 130°30'E.) on the NE coast. Although violent tremors

have been recorded, there have been no decided volcanic

eruptions.

3.18 Winds—Weather.—The rainy season on the N coast occurs

during the Northwest Monsoon and the dry season during the

Southeast Monsoon. The reverse is true for the S coast. That

part of Seram forming the W side of Teluk Piru (3°21'S.,

128°10'E.) is subject to the same conditions as the N coast

because the high mountains of Ambon catch the moisture

carried by the Southeast Monsoon. Land and sea breezes will

be experienced on both the N and S coasts.

Sera—West Coast

3.19 The W side of Seram, as seen from the coast, appears

as a rising, hilly and mountainous territory, wood-covered with

no conspicuous summits. The W coast of the Hoalmoal

Peninsula between Tanjung Sial and Tanjung Haja, can be

approached close-to because the 10m curve is close to the

shore. The only other known dangers, other than the two shoals

S of Tanjung Haja (discussed in paragraph 3.16), are an 8.7m

shoal about 2.5 miles NNW of Tanjung Sial, and a rock awash

about 0.2 mile S of the same point. The points along this

stretch of coast are easily recognized. It is sparsely populated;

the only village of any importance is Kampung Supe (3°13'S.,

127°52'E.), abreast of Pulau Kelang. A strong current sets

around Tanjung Sial. Otherwise there is not much of a current

along the coast until the channels on either side of Pulau Babi

are reached.

3.19 Between Tanjung Haja and Tanjung Tanduru Besar

(2°52'S., 128°10'E.) the NW coast of the island has several

inlets and is generally hard to approach because of the many

islets and dangers. The hills are close to the coast in many

places, but E of Pulau Marsegu (Marsegoe) (3°00'S.,

128°03'E.) and at the villages of Kampung Kotana, Kampung

Kawa, and Kampung Lawawu, the shores of the bay are

marshy and covered with mangrove trees. The only coast hills

that are of value as landmarks are N of Asaudi (3°08'S.,

127°56'E.).

3.20 Asaudi Roads (3°08'S., 127°56'E.), 6.5 miles ENE of

Tanjung Haja, is safe during both monsoons. The best anchorage is in 39m, mud and sand, S of Asaudi and 0.65 mile from

the shore abreast of the village.

3.20 Teluk Kotania (3°03'S., 128°02'E.) is not navigable in its

inner part because of numerous reefs. Only small vessels with

local knowledge can find their way to the village at the head of

the bay. Anchorage can be obtained, in 40 to 50m, sand, in the

outer part of the bay W of the alignment of the E extremity of

Pulau Marsegu (Marsegoe) and Tanjung Wantebu bearing

021°.

3.20 The bay E of Pulau Marsegu is clear outside the shore reef

and may be preferred to Teluk Kotania. The depths are great

but anchorage may be found, in 40 to 55m, off the E side of

Pulau Marsegu or near the N edge of a drying reef extending

from the point E of that island. The best anchorage is in about

37m in the NE corner of the bay abreast of the mouth of the

river Wai Tosu (2°58'S., 128°07'E.).

3.20 Kawa Roads (2°56'S., 128°08'E.) provides suitable anchorage, during the Southeast Monsoon, in 29m, off the village of

Kampung Kawa, which is 6 miles NE of Pulau Masegu, and

with the small rocky islet of Sirih, 3.5 miles SW of Tanjung

Tanduru Besar, bearing 347°. At this place the bottom consists

of mud, sand and stones. In general, good holding ground may

be found in almost any depth. The bottom inside the 10m curve

rises steeply to the sandy beach.

Seram—North Coast

3.21 The N coast of Seram is not much frequented by

shipping. Navigation along this coast, however, is not difficult

because there are no dangers beyond 0.5 mile offshore except

at Teluk Wahai, Teluk Sawai (Seleman Bay), and Kepulauan

Tudjuh. Furthermore, the 20m curve is not more than about 1

mile offshore for practically the entire coast.

3.21 Between Tanjung Tanduru Besar (2°52'S., 128°10'E.) and

Kepulauan Tudjuh, about 50 miles E, the coast is deep and

clear. The mountains and hills are close to the sea at many

places and at intervals there small valleys with streams and coconut plantations. There are several coastal villages. Many of

the hills and mountains are easily identified. The most conspicuous are Little Dromedaris (2°52'S., 128°34'E.) and Great

Dromedaris (2°52'S., 128°32'E.), 473m and 697m high,

respectively, which are near the middle of this stretch of coast.

Nakaela, farther to the W, is 793m high and has a flat top. The

Cecelia Mountains, SE of Little Dromedaris, attain a height of

1,354m and are somewhat conspicuous. The Lumute Mountains (Loemoete Mountains), farther to the ESE, is one continuous range, 914 to 1,372m high. Tanjung Tanduru Besar, the

NW point of Seram, is particularly conspicuous because of the

high land which rises abruptly from the sea. Towile Bubui,

1,125m high, 16 miles ESE of Tanjung Tanduru Besar, and

Sarusi, 1,171m high, 37 miles ESE of the same point are reported to be easily identifiable from N at 45 miles.

3.21 Tides—Currents.—The current along the coast is very

weak; farther off the monsoon drifts prevail. When in the vicinity of Tanjung Tanduru Besar, remember that tidal currents set

in and out of Selat Boano. No currents have been reported in

the vicinity of Kepulauan Tujuh (Poelau Toedjoeh). Countercurrents prevail close inshore on the N coast of Seram during

the Southeast Monsoon.

3.21 Anchorage.—Between Tanjung Tanduru Besar and Tanjung Kalawai (2°51'S., 128°15'E.), 6 miles E, anchorage is out

of the question. From Tanjung Kalawai to Tanjung Hanua

(Hanoea) (2°52'S., 128°21'E.), 5.5 miles farther E, there is

anchorage close to the shore near the mouths of the streams.

From Tanjung Hanua E to Kepulauan Tujuh, anchorage can

generally be found near the points, although very close to the

shore in some cases. It is inadvisable to anchor with a shore

line because the currents are too strong. These anchorages are

only temporary.

3.22 At Kampung Noniali (2°52'S., 128°24'E.), 2.5 miles

E of Tanjung Hanua, there is temporary anchorage, in 55m,

about 180m offshore.
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 49

Pub. 164

3.22 West of Tanjung Lamana (2°50'S., 128°31'E.), 9 miles E of

Tanjung Hanua, there is temporary anchorage, in 42m, coral

and sand, about 0.3 mile from the drying shore reef.

3.22 North of Tanjung Uli (Oeli) (2°50'S., 128°40'E.), 10 miles

farther to the E, there is temporary anchorage, in 55m, coral

and sand, 0.25 mile offshore.

3.22 At Kampung Sukaradja, 3 miles SE of Tanjung Uli, there is

temporary anchorage in 37m over sand, with Rapapine Hill

bearing 192°.

3.22 North of Tanjung Makina (2°51'S., 128°45'E.), 5.5 miles E

of Tanjung Uli, there is anchorage, in 55m, coral and sand,

about 0.3 mile offshore.

3.22 Off Kampung Lisabata, 7.5 miles farther E, there is anchorage in 37m E of the mouth of the river Wai Ela and about 0.1

mile offshore.

3.22 Tides—Currents.—Kampung Taniwel (2°51'S.,

128°28'E.), 19 miles E of Tanduru Besar, the lowest LW occurs

in May and November. The maximum rise and fall of tide that

can be expected are, respectively, about 0.5m above and 0.8m

below mean sea level.

3.22 This tidal datum is applicable to the NW part of Seram and

nearby islands from Selat Manipa to Teluk Sawai (Seleman

Bay).

3.23 Kepulauan Tujuh (Poelau Toedjoeh) (2°45'S.,

129°01'E.), off the W entrance point to Teluk Sawai (Seleman

Bay), are six partly-inhabited islands which have been cleared for

coconut plantations. A large conspicuous tree is on Pulau Besar,

the NW and largest island. Telegraaf Reef (2°48'S., 128°56'E.), a

2.7m shoal 4 miles SW of Pulau Besar, and the shore reefs are

well-marked by discoloration. Lasi (2°48'S., 129°01'E.), a drying

reef of coral and mud, 4.5 miles E of Telegraaf Reef, is generally

not marked by discoloration at HW. The best channel through the

group, night or day, is between the islands of Tengah and Air. Air

lies 2.5 miles SSE of Pulau Besar and has a drying reef extending

1 mile off the S coast.

3.23 A depth, 4.9m, is about 0.5 mile SSW of Tengah. A shoal

with a depth of 9.1m is 2.2 miles N of Tengah.

3.23 Directions.—The islands of Kepulauan Tujuh are difficult to

distinguish at night from the W approach because the islands

blend in with the high Seram Coast. The islands can be safely

approached from E on a clear night.

3.24 Teluk Sawai (Seleman Bay) (2°51'S., 129°12'E.), SE

of Kepulauan Tujuh is 19 miles wide between the low points

Tanjung Namaa (2°47'S., 129°03'E.) and Tanjung Pamali

(2°48'S., 129°22'E.). At the head of the bay the mountains

come very close to the shore; this is particularly true at and W

of the peninsula on which the 180m Olat Hill (2°56'S.,

129°12'E.) is located. Two low mangrove-covered islets,

Radja (2°55'S., 129°10'E.) and Sawai (2°55'S., 129°11'E.), are

on a large drying reef off the end of the peninsula. Bare

limestone rocks rise vertically out of the sea at Tanjung Hatu

Supun (2°57'S., 129°10'E.), 2 miles W of Olat Hill. Somewhat

farther to the W, pyramidal Lusiala Hill (2°57'S., 129°06'E.)

rises to a height of 440m. The first conspicuous mark to be

made out is Saka, a blunt top, 1,492m high, directly S of

Lusiala Hill. Two miles E of Saka are two other peaks on an

approximate N-S line and are 1,658m and 1,925m high.

Sapolewa, a 214m hill near the SE side of the bay, is also very

conspicuous.

3.24 Anchorage.—Excellent anchorage can be found almost anywhere in the W part of Teluk Sawai. In Paoni Roads (2°52'S.,

129°05'E.), 4.5 miles S of Tanjung Namaa, there are four detached reefs of 1.8 to 2.4m, which cannot be located by discoloration of the water because of the discharge of the streams

in the vicinity. These reefs extend about 0.8 miles offshore.

Only the N of several creeks N of the village of Paoni is

accessible for boats, for a short distance. 

3.25 Campedak Bay (2°54'S., 129°04'E.) is on the W side

of Teluk Sawai S of Paoni Roads. The bay is about 0.25 mile

wide and extends a little over 1 mile S of its entrance between

Pulau Campedak (Tjampedak) and the shore E. There are

general depths of 18.3 to 35m and, except for the fringing

coastal reef, there are no off-lying dangers.

3.25 Seleman Roads (2°57'S., 129°07'E.), E and NE of Lusiala

Hill, can be approached on a 206° course direct for the conspicuous mosque at the village. This course leads between two

shoals of 4.9 and 9.1m and are not marked by discoloration of

the water.

3.25 Teluk Sawai (2°57'S., 129°10'E.), on the SW side of the

peninsula on which Olat Hill is located, is approached on the

same course used for Seleman Roads. When Lusahita, a small

islet on a drying reef N of Teluk Besi disappears behind the N

end of Radja, one can head into the bay.

3.25 Teluk Besi, on the E side of the same peninsula, is partially

obstructed by shoals and drying coral reefs fronting it. Two

islets, Lusahiti and Lusaolot, covered with coconut trees, and

Sialumaina, a sand bank covered with shrubs, are on the drying

coral reef. The best entrance is along the E shore, but there is

also a good channel W of Lusahiti, the westernmost of the islets, which can be used safely when the reefs are visible.

3.26 Teluk Wahai (2°47'S., 129°30'E.), 8 miles E of Tanjung Pamali, is an inlet in the drying coastal reef which affords

anchorage in reasonable depths. There is no anchorage between Teluk Sawai (Seleman Bay) and Teluk Wahai. Approaching from N, Teluk Wahai is difficult to locate, but the

metal roofs of the village on the rising ground are useful

marks. Pamali (2°48'S., 129°30'E.), a 54m coastal hill E of the

bay, is conspicuous.

3.26 Aspect.—The edges of the reef on the W side of the fairway

are marked by two white iron beacons with ball topmarks and

the E side by three black iron beacons with truncated cones as

topmarks. A light is shown from a wooden post near the outer

end of the pier at the village.

3.27 Wahai (2°48'S., 129°30'E.) (World Port Index No.

52660), a fairly large village, is built on rising ground in the S

part of the bay. The villages of Hatuwu and Hatiling are to the

E. Copra and jungle products are shipped from here. A pier,

which can accommodate a vessel 50m long with a maximum

draft of 3m, is situated at the village.

3.27 Anchorage.—The W corner of the shed on the pier, in range

with the middle black beacon bearing 154°, leads safely

through the entrance to the inlet. There is anchorage in a depth

of 45m. Larger vessels anchor just outside the entrance, W of

an 11.9m shoal patch on the E side.
50 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

Teluk Hatiling (2°48'S., 129°31'E.), 1 mile E of Teluk

Wahai, is formed on its W side by Tanjung Hewal. This bay is

more spacious than Teluk Wahai, but is seldom visited. A 6.7m

shoal is just outside the entrance. Tanjung Hewal, which

appears as an islet lying off the hilly land S, serves as a good

mark, but care must be taken to avoid the 6.7m shoal and the

drying reef E of the point.

3.27 Between Tanjung Hewal and Tanjung Lama (2°58'S.,

130°21'E.), 52 miles to the E, the coast is backed by a broad

rolling plain which rises gradually to the mountains of the

interior. The only conspicuous points are Tomo, the 407m hill

8 miles SW of Tanjung Hewal, and Talirin (Kapailoe), the

double-topped hill 3.75 miles SE of Tanjung Lama; the

summits of the latter hill are 249m and 271m high. The peaks

of the higher mountains S of this coast can be seen from offshore, but they are closer to the S coast than the N.

3.27 The coastline is low and wooded and is fringed by a narrow

and steep coastal reef with drying banks of mud and sand with

occasional coral. The points which are covered with trees and

bushes are conspicuous only when close inshore.

3.27 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents close offshore are fairly

strong. In depths over 180m, the monsoon drift may be

experienced and in June a constant E current with a velocity of

1 knot has been observed off the NE extremity of Seram.

3.27 Anchorage.—Suitable anchorage can be found anywhere

along this coast, but at the steeper places caution is necessary

because of the currents. The best anchorages are found in the

bights of the small villages of Kampung Pasahari, Kampung

Seliha, and Kampung Bengoi, 8, 19, and 42 miles E, respectively, of Tanjung Hewal.

3.28 Tanjung Lama (2°58'S., 130°21'E.), the NE extremity of Seram, and Tanjung Bobo (2°59'S., 130°23'E.), about 2

miles ESE, are low and distinctive, with steep-to coastal banks

of mud and sand. The bay formed between these points affords

sheltered anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon, in a depth

of 7m, NNE of the mosque in Kampung Hoti, at the head of the

bight.

3.28 Karang Bais (Leeuwarden Reef) (2°55'S., 130°26'E.), 6

miles NE of Tanjung Lama, is a drying reef on a small ovalshaped bank with depths of less than 183m; it is steep-to and

marked by discoloration. There are no other dangers around it.

Seram—East Coast

3.29 The E coast of Seram trends generally SSE for 62

miles from Tanjung Lama (2°58'S., 130°21'E.) to the SE extremity of the island. Vessels navigating off this coast will find

the two islands, Pulau Parang and Pulau Madorang, useful

landmarks. The conspicuous summits of the mountains will be

described below with the detailed description of the coast. The

tidal current off the E coast of Seram sets N or NE with a rising

tide and in the opposite direction with the falling tide. It is

believed that a combination of both monsoon drifts and tidal

currents will be encountered off this side of the island.

3.29 The part of the coast between Tanjung Lama and Tanjung

Ilor (3°25'S., 130°48'E.), 35 miles E, is alternately hilly land

and low plains. The most conspicuous are: Talirin (3°02'S.,

130°23'E.) 271m high, and S of Tanjung Lama; the 489m

Boela Hill, S of the bay of the same name; the two 134m and

149m hills on the W side of Teluk Waru; the 118m hill farther

to the NW; and the 98m hill, Keli Dukun (3°25'S., 130°44'E.)

on the S side of Teluk Waru. The most conspicuous summits

farther inland are Serawantufa (Serawantoefa), 513m high, SW

of Teluk Ingelas, and Keli Badir (3°29'S., 130°43'E.), the steep

295m hill S of Keli Dukun. Between these last two are several

other peaks; the central group are the Waelila Mountains, of

which the 806m SE summit is more conspicuous than the

921m NW summit. There are many streams along this stretch

of coast.

3.29 The narrow drying bank along the coast consists of mud and

sand and is steep-to. Outside this bank it is deep and clear,

except for the S side of Teluk Waru and reefs, extending 1 mile

offshore, with a least depth of 6.8m, running along the coast

3.5 miles SE of Tanjung Lama. Between Tanjung Bolifar and

Tanjung Nif, coastal reefs, with a least depth of 0.9m, extend

up to 0.75 mile offshore.

3.30 Teluk Ingelas (3°03'S., 130°27'E.), 7 miles SE of

Tanjung Lama, is spacious and clear; the shores are low but

rise close within and are bordered by a narrow steep-to bank of

mud and sand. Suitable anchorage with good holding ground is

found, in 11.9 to 12.8m, about 0.3 mile offshore. The anchorage can be approached on a 220° bearing on the summit of

Serawantufa. A bank of mud and sand projects from Tanjung

Sisal (3°04'S., 130°27'E.), the S entrance point. During the

Southeast Monsoon the bay is sheltered, and even during the

Northwest Monsoon it is more protected than Teluk Bula.

Teluk Bula (Teluk Boela) (3°06'S., 130°30'E.), 11 miles SE

of Tanjung Lama, is a bight forming an open roadstead with

anchorage, in depths of less than 22m, soft mud. The shore of

the bay is low with hilly land behind it. This bay affords shelter

in the Southeast Monsoon, but high seas may be experienced in

the Northwest Monsoon. Vessels do not normally anchor

because the holding ground in Teluk Ingelas is preferred.

3.31 Bula (3°06'S., 130°30'E.) (World Port Index No.

52680), a village in the S part of Teluk Bula, is a petroleum

shipping port.

3.31 A stone pier at the village is about 503m long and has the hulk

of a ship moored end-on to its head. A vessel berths close off the

hulk with lines secured to piles on the inshore side and to

hauling-off buoys on the port bow and quarter. The berth will

accommodate vessels up to 168m long with a draft of 10.1m.

3.31 Another pier extends about 0.3 mile N from an oil depot

close E of the stone pier.

3.31 A flagstaff stands near the root of the pier.

3.31 Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of about 21.9m, soft

mud, with the pier head bearing 174°, distant 0.2 mile. A vessel

approaching from S or E should steer for Serawantufa until the

pier is identified. It is suggested that only a daylight approach

be made due to lack of navigational aids. The holding ground is

not as stiff as in Teluk Ingelas.

3.31 Tides—Currents.—The lowest LW level occurs in May or

June and in November or December. The maximum rise and

fall that can be expected are, respectively, 0.6m above and

0.9m below mean sea level.

3.32 Waru Roads (Waroe Roads) (3°24'S., 130°40'E.), 20

miles SSE of Teluk Bula, is at the head of Teluk Waru, a large
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 51

Pub. 164

indentation in the coast. East of the roads the muddy shore bank

changes to coral reefs which dry in places. The roads afford safe

anchorage at all seasons, in 29m, mud. The village of Kampung

Waru (Waroe), built on the shore, has a pier for boats but it cannot

be approached at LW. A stranded wreck is close offshore 3.5 miles

NNW of Kampung Waru.

3.32 Pulau Parang (3°19'S., 130°47'E.), an island NE of Teluk

Waru and N of Tanjung Ilor, is separated from Seram by a clear

channel with a depth of more than 183m. It is 138m high and

has a rather broad flat summit. The island is fringed with several detached and fringing reefs which dry, and generally the

depths in the immediate vicinity of the island are very irregular.

3.32 Between Tanjung Ilor (3°24'S., 130°48'E.) and the SE extremity of Seram the coast is rather low. The N part of this section is

backed by a low plain through which the river Wai Masiwang

flows, but along the S and greater part the hills rise a short distance

inland. About 12 miles S of Tanjung Ilor is a 516m summit which

is more or less conspicuous. Gunung Selagor, a somewhat

detached mountain 793m high, is 18.5 miles S of Tanjung Ilor and

is particularly conspicuous when seen from E. Of the group of

mountains 3.5 miles farther SSE, Suru (3°46'S., 130°46'E.) is

723m high and has a steep E side, and Tunlean (3°47'S.,

130°46'E.) is 689m high and has a very steep side.

3.33 The bight between Tanjung Masiwang (3°27'S.,

130°50'E.) and Tanjung Danama (3°35'S., 130°53'E.), 3.25

and 11.5 miles respectively, S of Tanjung Ilor, has many dangers inside the 20m curve. A reef, Karang Ulin, is within the

20m curve and lies 0.75 mile E of Tanjung Masiwang. Pulau

Akat, low and covered with coconut trees, and a large tree near

the shore at the middle of the bight are conspicuous from

seaward. South of Pulau Akat, a channel leads to a limited

anchorage off Kampung Air Kasar, where there are depths of

8m. A boat pier, with a depth of 2.4m, is at Kampung Air

Kasar.

3.33 With the exception of a 3.9m patch 1 mile S of Tanjung

Danama, the coast S of that point is clear and steep-to as far as

the bight at Kampung Arnanan (3°50'S., 130°49'E.), NW of

the SE point of Seram. Two detached shoals with a least depth

of 0.4m are in this bight. This coast is covered with coconut

trees as far S as Tanjung Kopeng Watu, the only rocky point on

this stretch; S of this point are mangroves. Only temporary

anchorage can be found along this coast during the Northwest

Monsoon, and the depths are great. Except in the bight at Kampung Arnanan, where anchorage is also possible during the

East Monsoon, one cannot escape the currents.

3.33 At Kampung Kilgah (3°38'S., 130°52'E.), 2 miles S of Tanjung Danama there is a small inlet in the drying shore reef

which has depths of 10.9m and can be used by boats. Between

this village and Tanjung Kopeng Watu there is no coastal reef,

but sloping sandy beaches are found at several places.

3.33 Pulau Madorang (3°39'S., 131°04'E.), a small islet 11.5

miles ESE of Tanjung Danama, is on the SW side of a drying

reef which has very steep sides, but is on a bank with less than

183m. The islet is low but is covered with fairly tall trees.

3.33 There are no other dangers in the vicinity.

3.33 The E part of the S coast of Seram will be described

beginning in paragraph 3.47.

Ambon Island and the Uliasers

3.34 Ambon Island and three islands, Pulau Haruku (Haroekoe), Pulau Saparua (Saparoea), and Nusa Laut (Noesa Laoet),

collectively known as the Uliasers, are separated from Seram by

Selat Ceram. They are all high and hilly and when seen from S

appear as part of Seram. The passage between the islands and

Seram is safe, but a wide berth should be given to the S side

because of the reefs that project from Pulau Saparua and Pulau

Haruku. These islands are mountainous and earthquakes occur,

although no volcanic eruptions have been known. The most recent

earthquake occurred in 1950; the previous one in 1898 caused

great devastation in the port of Ambon.

Ambon Island

3.35 Ambon Island (3°37'S., 128°10'E.), the westernmost

and largest of the group, is almost divided into two parts, the Hitoe

Peninsula and the Laitimor Peninsula, which are connected only

by a low sandy isthmus.

The Hitoe Peninsula, the N part, is the largest. Salahutu

(3°33'S., 128°15'E.), a 1,060m double-topped peak, is at the NE

end of the Hitoe Peninsula and is the highest and most

conspicuous point. Numerous spurs with lower tops extend from

this peak; the most conspicuous is Setan (3°31'S., 128°14'E.) near

the N coast which rises to a sharp point, 564m high. At the SE end

and entirely separated from Salahutu are three very conspicuous

peaks of which Huwe, 368m high, is the highest. On the W side of

the Hitoe Peninsula are many peaks, but because of their similarity

in shape and height they are not easily distinguished from each

other.

3.35 The Laitimor Peninsula, the S part of Ambon Island, is not

as high as the N part. Horiel (3°43'S., 128°14'E.), the highest

point, is 581m high and has a fairly flat top. Suwal (Soewal),

5.25 miles farther to the SW, is 344m high and is conspicuous

because of a group of trees on its summit.

3.35 Ambon Island gives a good radar return at a distance of 27

miles.

Teluk Ambon (Baai van Amboina) (3°43'S., 128°07'E.) is a

large inlet, lying between the two peninsulas of Ambon described above. The entrance, open to the SW, is between Tanjung Alang and Tanjung Nusanive.

3.35 Tanjung Alang (3°46'S., 128°00'E.), the W entrance point

of Teluk Ambon, rises steeply out of the water and can be approached close-to. The point is reported to be a good radar target up to a distance of 22 miles. A white cross is reported to be

conspicuous at the village of Lilibooi, about 1.5 miles NE of

Tanjung Alang.

3.36 Tanjung Nusanive (3°47'S., 128°05'E.), the E entrance point of Teluk Ambon, lies about 6 miles E of Tanjung

Alang. The point also rises steeply out of the water and can be

approached close-to. A light, from which a radiobeacon transmits, is shown from a white metal framework tower about 0.5

mile NE of the point. A radio mast stands on the 463m high

summit 6 miles NE of Tanjung Nusanive. An airfield, with a

white memorial monument at its NW end, lies on the N shore

of Teluk Ambon, about 4.5 miles N of Tanjung Nusanive. A

light is shown from a white metal framework tower on Tanjung

Sikoela, about 1.25 miles SSW of the monument.
52 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

3.36 Teluk Ambon is very deep and, except for the upper end and

the inner bay, the bottom is steep, so that anchorage can only

be found close to the shore. The bay provides good shelter

during both monsoons. An area off the SE side of the outer bay

has been swept to depths of 18 and 15m; an area off the NW

side has been swept to a depth of 15m.

3.36 Tides—Currents.—During the Northwest Monsoon, a

moderate current will generally be encountered close to Tanjung Alang; it sets to the N and follows the coast around to the

N. A current may occasionally set out of the bay. Eddies occur

around Tanjung Nusanive; a strong current may be encountered along the coast to the E.

3.37 Ambon Roads (3°42'S., 128°10'E.), off the town of

Ambon (Amboina) on the SE side of Teluk Ambon and about

7.5 miles NE of Tanjung Nusanive, affords anchorage for vessels not exceeding 75m in length, in a depth of 46m, off New

Victoria Fort (3°41.3'S., 128°10.8'E.). The best anchorage in

the roadstead, however, is reported to be off the Coaling

Wharf (3°42.0'S., 128°09.7'E.) in depths of 50m.

3.37 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boards about 1

mile W of Joos Sudarso Pier. The pilot boat is stationed in

Teluk Ambon and can be requested by radio or by displaying

the International Code Flag G. A doctor boards with the pilot.

Radio pratique cannot be obtained. Tugs are available.

3.37 The limits of the roadstead are a line drawn in a 236° direction from Tanjung Batu Merah (3°41'S., 128°11'E.) and the

meridian 128°09'35''E.

3.37 Vessels are not permitted to enter or leave harbor between

sunset and sunrise without permission of the local Naval Control Officer.

3.37 Signals.—Berthing and tidal signals are displayed from the

flagstaff on Joos Sudarso Pier (3°41.6'S., 128°10.4'E.), as follows:

1. The signal DB—Vessel should proceed to the anchorage.

2. The signal A plus the third substitute—Vessel may

proceed to Joos Surdarso Pier.

3. The signal B plus the third substitute—Vessel may

proceed to the Coaling Wharf.

4. The signal C plus the third substitute—Vessel may

proceed to Digul Pier.

3.37 The following tidal signals are also displayed from the same

flagstaff:

3.37 Storm signals are also displayed from the signal mast.

3.37 A light is shown from a position about 0.9 mile SW of the

signal mast.

Ambon (Ambonia) (3°41'S., 128°10'E.)

World Port Index No. 52720

3.38 The town of Ambon lies 7.5 miles NE of Tanjung

Nusanive, on the SE side of Teluk Ambon. The town is

identifiable by a mosque with a cupola, not visible from all

directions, standing 0.25 mile SE of Joos Sudarso Pier

(3°41.5'S., 128°10.4'E.); a prominent landmark is the mosque

in the village of Batu Merah, 1 mile NE. the main exports are

spices and copra; the main imports are cloth, ironware, canned

goods, and timber.

3.38 Winds—Weather.—During the Southeast Monsoon (May

to September), sudden squalls are sometimes experienced; sea

or swell is often considerable. The working of cargo is rarely

affected except by heavy rains occasionally. The wettest

months are May, June, and July.

3.38 From November to January, prevailing winds are from the E;

from May to August, prevailing winds are from the W.

3.38 Tides—Currents.—At Ambon Roads the highest water

level occurs in April or May, and in October or November, and

the lowest in June and December. The maximum rise and fall

of tide that can be expected are, respectively, 0.9m above and

1.0m below mean sea level. A current, setting in a SW or NE

direction, may be experienced in the roads and at the piers; the

direction and velocity, which seldom exceeds 1 knot, apparently depend on the wind. Because eddies are occasionally

observed near the piers, the currents in the roads are not indicative of what to expect at the piers.

3.38 Aspect.—Joos Sudarso Pier, well protected by large rubber

fenders, has a frontage of 450m; a vessel with a maximum

length of 187m, a beam of 35m, and a draft of 12m can berth

here. Berth designations are given by the distance measured

from the SW corner of the pier. Vessels should have all anchors

ready to be used when coming alongside.

3.38 Gudand Arang Wharf (Pertamina), a concrete and wooden

jetty, 0.75 mile SW of Joos Sudarso Pier, is 65m long, with a

maximum depth of 5m at HWS; it is used by tankers. Vessels

lie quietly here even with a considerable sea and swell in the

bay. The wharf is connected by pipeline to three tanks a short

distance S and is the main refuelling wharf; vessels up to

10,000 dwt, with a draft of 8m, use the facility. General cargo

is handled. An extension WNW was under construction.

3.38 There is a port medical center and five hospitals. Deratting

and deratting exemption certificates can be issued. 

3.38 Directions.—A vessel approaching Ambon in the rainy season, with reduced visibility, will find it difficult to identify its

features. Approaching from W, the high land in the vicinity of

Tanjung Alang will be distinguished first. Coming from S or

just E of Tanjung Nusanive, the light-green hill Kapal (3°47'S.,

128°06'E.), 230m high and about 1.5 miles NE of the point,

will appear as an islet in front of the high land of the NW shore

of the bay.

Ambon Roads—Tidal Signals

Signal Meaning

Red flag (or white over red light) Flood tide

Blue flag (or red over white light) Ebb tide

White flag (or white light) Slack water

Port of Ambon

http://www.portina4.go.id/ambon.htm
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 53

Pub. 164

3.38 It is recommended to approach the anchorage with the anchor lowered and with 46 to 55m of cable out.

3.38 Caution.—An obstruction lies 0.25 mile NNW of Joos

Sudarso Pier. Piles uncovering at LW lie abreast from New

Victoria Fort.

3.38 Ambon Inner Harbor and its approaches, E of a line bearing

335° from Kampung Batu Merah (3°41'S., 128°11'E.), are

closed to navigation.

3.38 The inner bay is entered by a narrow channel swept to depths

of 7.9m and 7.0m over a least width of 137m. The inner bay is

swept over a large area to a depth of 10.3m. Several villages

are on the shores of the inner bay.

3.38 Lighted beacons stand 91m E and 0.3 mile SW of Tanjung

Martafons (3°39'S., 128°12'E.).

3.38 Irian Wharf, a T-headed concrete pier 152m long with a

depth of 11m alongside, which is used by the Indonesian Navy,

is on the S shore of the inner bay 0.75 mile ENE of Tanjung

Martafons.

3.39 South coast of the Laitimor Peninsula.—The S

coast of the Laitimor Peninsula is practically unapproachable

during the Southeast Monsoon. Teluk Seri is about 5 miles E of

Tanjung Nusanive. The small bight in front of Kampung Seri is

clear, but the bottom is too steep for anchoring. There is no

anchorage along the shore E of Teluk Seri. A conspicuous

house with a light-colored roof is at Kampung Hutumuri, a

village 13 miles ENE of Tanjung Nusanive.

3.39 Teluk Baguala (3°39'S., 128°17'E.), on the NE side of the

Laitimor Peninsula, is only safe as an anchorage during the

Northwest Monsoon. A shoal, with a least depth of 2.1m, is at

the middle of the entrance, and other dangers are near the NE

side of the entrance. The SW part of the entrance is clear. At

the head of the bay and on the E side of the isthmus separating

this bay from Ambon is the village of Kampung Paso.

3.39 Caution.—Teluk Seri and Teluk Baguala are still regarded

as dangerous due to mines laid during 1941-1945. Due to the

lapse of time, the risk in this area to surface navigation is now

considered no more dangerous than the ordinary risks of

navigation, but a real risk exists with regard to anchoring, fishing, or any form of submarine or seabed activity.

3.39 See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific

Ocean and Southeast Asia, for danger areas and locations of

swept channels in Teluk Seri and Teluk Baguala.

3.40 West coast of the Hitoe Peninsula.—The W and N

coasts of the Hitoe Peninsula can be approached close-to as far

as depths are concerned. The W coast is more rocky than the N

coast. Between Tanjung Alang and Tanjung Wairole (3°41'S.,

127°55'E.), the W extremity of the island, about 7.5 miles to

the NW, anchorage may be found, in 70m, close to the shore,

but there is no shelter during either monsoon and the currents

are strong. The Nusa Telu Islands (Noesa Teloe Islands),

including the small islets of Nusa Lain, Nusa Hatala, and Nusa

Ela, are off Tanjung Wairole; they are separated from that point

and from each other by deep channels. These channels should

not be used due to their narrowness and the sometimes strong

currents.

3.41 North coast of Ambon.—More suitable places for

anchorage are found on the N coast than on the W coast, even

though the bottom is steep and the currents strong. Safe anchorage during both monsoons can be found off Kampung

Said (3°35'S., 128°02'E.), 9 miles NE of Tanjung Wairole and

close E of low Tanjung Hulung (Hoeloeng). In the roads the

bottom consists of sand and stones and the depths decrease

gradually to the shore, but outside the roads the bottom drops

off steeply. A reef E of the road is usually marked by discoloration. The recommended anchorage is in 29 to 50m, with

a conspicuous stairway with low gray pillars bearing S and

Nusa Ela in behind Tanjung Hulung. This anchorage is out of

the currents.

3.41 There are no suitable anchorages W of Kampung Said nor E

as far as Kampung Hila (3°35'S., 128°05'E.), but then E along

the coast to Kampung Hitu Lama (Hitoe Lama) (3°35'S.,

128°10'E.) there are several anchorages, in 79 to 90m. To

anchor at Kampung Hitu Lama, steer for the mosque on a 145°

bearing until such depths are reached.

3.41 The only other possible anchorage is in front of Kampung

Liang (3°30'S., 128°19'E.) which lies in the bight just W of

Tanjung Honimua (Metiela), the NE point of the island. A reef

extends from this last point. Vessels anchoring at Kampung

Liang should steer for the mosque, bearing S, until depths of 70

to 90m are reached.

3.42 East coast of Ambon.—A large bight with Batu

Duear (Batoe Itam) (3°32'S., 128°21'E.) and Batu Lompa

(3°35'S., 128°21'E.), two large rock formations, as its entrance

points is on the E coast of Ambon.

3.42 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, for danger areas off

Kampung Waai (3°34'S., 128°19'E.). This area is still regarded as dangerous due to mines laid during the war of 1941-45.

Selat Horuku

3.43 Selat Horuku (Selat Haroekoe) (3°35'S., 128°23'E.),

between the island of Ambon and Pulau Horuku (Haroekoe), is

easily navigated even at night. The most prominent features are

the large rock formations, Batu Duear and Batu Lompa, previously mentioned in paragraph 3.42, and a group of trees on

the 333m mountain about 3.25 miles NNE of Tanjung Batu

Kapal on the Pulau Horuku side. In the middle of the N entrance to the strait, Nusu Pombo is on a large drying reef. The

channel W of this reef is preferred because a drying shoal patch

is 1.5 miles ENE of Nusa Pombo.

3.43 Tides—Currents.—For tidal information, see Ambon

Roads, previously described in paragraph 3.37. The currents in

Selat Horuku are tidal and set in a N or S direction with a

maximum velocity of 1.5 knots. The currents are strongest near

Tanjung Batu Kapal, the SW point of Pulau Horuku, and here

as well as on both sides of the reef at Nusa Pombo, tide rips

may be seen.

Pulau Horuku

3.44 Pulau Horuku (Haroekoe) (3°34'S., 128°30'E.), E of

the island of Ambon, is a hilly island which rises to a height of

601m at Huruano (3°35'S., 128°30'E.), the highest peak which

is near the middle of the island. This peak has a rounded shape

when seen from E or SE, and a conical shape when seen from
54 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

the N and NW. The S coast is very steep where the mountain

range from this peak extends to it. At Tanjung Waisu (Waisoi)

Besar, near the middle of the S coast, are two conspicuous

conical hills, and to the W is a high plateau. Close to Tanjung

Batu Kapal, the SW point, is a high and wooded rock with the

same name.

3.44 A light is shown on the NW coast of Pulau Horuku. About 7

miles to the SW, on Ambon, a light is shown at Waai from an

elevation of 14m. 

3.44 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available at Kampung Horuku,

2 miles NE of Tanjung Batu Kapal, in 50m, with the conspicuous high roof of the church bearing 100°.

3.44 Off Kampung Kabau, 3.25 miles farther N, there is a detached reef near the edge of which there is anchorage, in 50m,

with the southernmost of three mosques bearing 169°.

3.44 On the N coast there is anchorage, in 50 to 61m, off Kampung Pelauw with the mosque in range with the summit of

Huruano bearing 159°.

3.44 On the E coast, temporary anchorage is available, in a depth

of 28m, abreast of Kampung Hulaliu (3°33'S., 128°33'E.).

Teluk Aboru (Aboroe) (3°36'S., 128°31'E.), on the S coast

about 1 mile NE of Tanjung Waisu Besar, affords anchorage, in

29 to 70m, with a white house bearing 332°. This anchorage is

not safe during the Southeast Monsoon. Off Kampung Wasu

and Kampung Oma, farther to the W, the water is too deep for

anchorage.

Selat Saparua

3.45 Selat Saparua (Saparoea) (3°35'S., 128°35'E.), between Pulau Haruku and Pulau Saparua (Saparoea) is less than

0.5 mile wide in its narrowest part. It is easily navigated by

day, but its use by night is not recommended. A mid-channel

course should be maintained through the passage. The shore

reefs on either side of the narrow section is well marked by

discoloration.

3.45 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the strait are tidal and

set in a NW and SE direction with a maximum velocity of 3

knots. Tide rips have been observed in the bight NW of the

narrows.

3.45 Pulau Molana (3°38'S., 128°36'E.), S of Teluk Saparua, is

an uninhabited island 176m high. The sea bottom around it is

too steep to afford anchorage and there are currents near it.

Pulau Saparua

3.46 Pulau Saparua (3°33'S., 128°40'E.) is hilly and has a

more or less conspicuous gap across its narrowest part between

the two large bays in its coast. The higher hills are very similar

in shape, round or conical. Takuku (3°34'S., 128°37'E.), near

the W coast, is the highest and rises to a height of 360m. Booi,

the 324m hill near Tanjung Booi, the SW point of the island, is

particularly conspicuous. A small rocky islet is near this last

point. Generally the coast is rocky, except in Teluk Tuhaha

(Toehaha), the large bay on the N side, where the land is flat.

3.46 Anchorage.—Teluk Haria (3°35'S., 128°37'E.), an inlet on

the W coast, affords anchorage, but a few rollers may be experienced during the Northwest Monsoon. The church at Kampung Porto, on the N shore of the bay, is an excellent mark.

3.46 In Teluk Tuhaha, the large bay on the N side of the island,

anchorage can be found almost anywhere near the shore free

from dangers. A shore reef extends from the middle of the E

shore and the N part of the W shore. A detached reef with two

drying patches is off the latter shore. Vessels can anchor S of

Kampung Nolot, near the NE point of the bay; N of here the

currents are strong and variable. This end of the bay is thickly

populated.

3.47 Saparua Roads (3°35'S., 128°40'E.) is at the head of

the large bay on the S side of Pulau Saparua. Tanjung Ouw, the

E entrance point, rises steeply to 50m. The W side of the bay is

steep and has a narrow shore reef. The E side of the bay, NW of

Kampung Ulat, has a broader shore reef and a shoal with a

least depth of 31m is off of it. The middle of the bay is deep.

3.47 Vessels bound for the roads can steer 320° direct for the boat

pier, which will lead clear of a 2.1m reef on the SW side of the

bay. This reef is marked by a beacon. Large vessels can then

anchor near the 20m curve. A white tomb on the W shore is a

conspicuous mark. The roads are calm except during the

Southeast Monsoon, when a swell may be experienced; communication with the shore, however, is never interrupted.

3.47 A light is shown from a flagstaff on the pier head; however,

this light is not reliable.

3.47 Saparua (3°35'S., 128°40'E.) (World Port Index No. 52710)

has a boat pier, with a depth of 0.3m alongside. Vessels call

here regularly.

3.47 Nusa Laut (3°40'S., 128°47'E.), an islet 2.3 miles SE of

Pulau Saparua, is separated from that island by a deep channel.

Vessels using the channel should give the Pulau Saparau shore

a berth of at least 0.33 mile and that of Nusa Laut of at least

0.55 mile. Nusa Laut rises to a height of 358m. A drying reef

fringes the coasts.

3.47 Teluk Nalahia (3°38'S., 128°47'E.), a bay on the N side, affords the only anchorage in the island. Its shores are very hilly,

and it is sheltered during both monsoons. Vessels entering the

bay should steer 196° for a gap in the hills and anchor, in about

64m, abreast of the high round point on which Kampung

Nalahia is located. The village is 40m above sea level and is

reached by a steep road.

Seram—South Coast

3.48 Teluk Piru (Piroe Bay) (3°20'S., 128°10'E.), at the W

end of the S side of Seram is a large bay, bounded on the W by

the peninsula which terminates in Tanjung Sial and fronted on

the S by the Ambon Islands. The passage N of these islands is

deep and clear. Tanjung Sial is a sharp point with a drying rock

0.15 mile S of it. Because of a strong current in the vicinity, it

is advisable to give the point a wide berth.

3.48 A mountain range extends over the entire length of the

peninsula forming the W side of Teluk Piru. Its highest point is

Sahua (Sahuai), a 1,059m peak 21.5 miles NNE of Tanjung

Sial. The W shore of the bay is fringed by a narrow reef which

is steep-to. Tanjung Saala (BatoeKapal) (3°22'S., 128°01'E.),

13.5 miles NE of Tanjung Sial, can be recognized by rock lying

close of it.

3.48 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be found at many places along

this shore. At Kampung Luhu (3°23'S., 127°58'E.) there is anchorage outside the detached reef, in 40m, sand with the
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 55

Pub. 164

mosque bearing 250°. Another mosque is at Kampung Iha

close S but it has a pointed roof while the one at Kampung

Luhu has a round tin roof.

3.49 Loki Roads (3°17'S., 128°04'E.), in a bight formed

by the coast reef 5 miles NE of Tanjung Saala, affords

anchorage near the boat pier, in a depth of 23m. When entering

pass N of the reef marked by a beacon with a rectangle topmark in the middle of the roads. The village maybe recognized

by a church near the beach. Vessels call here occasionally. The

reef on the S side of the entrance is also marked by a beacon.

3.49 The inner part of Teluk Piru is entered either E or W of

Pulau Kasa (3°18'S., 128°09'E.), a flat but well-wooded islet

on a drying reef 5 miles E of Loki Roads. A light is shown

from the S end of the islet. Pulau Babi (3°13'S., 128°10'E.) is a

131m high islet close to the E entrance point of the inner part

of the bay. South of this islet and the shore to the E of it is a

string of reefs which dry when the water is at its lowest level.

Tetu, a drying reef marked by discoloration with a 2.3m patch

close S of it, lies 2.75 miles NW of Pulau Babi. Several reefs

with drying patches are 4.25 miles NW of Babi; Sasadau

(3°10'S., 128°06'E.), the northwesternmost is marked by an

iron beacon with a white ball topmark. The reefs S of Pulau

Babi are unmarked.

3.49 The points N of Pulau Babi are 61 to 152m high and are part

of a group of hills, of which Huhula (3°12'S., 128°12'E.),

643m high, is the highest peak. North of these hills, a wide

plain extends back from the E shore; this plain also runs back

of the N shore, but is much narrower there. A reef extends from

Tanjung Sisi (3°10'S., 128°10'E.), 3.5 miles N of Pulau Babi; a

5.5m shoal is close off Tanjung Terua (3°08'S., 128°11'E.), 5

miles NNE of Tanjung Babi.

3.49 Suitable anchorage may be found almost anywhere along the

shores.

3.49 Tides—Currents.—The currents in the bay appear to be entirely dependent upon the winds and run in one side and out the

other. A velocity of 1 knot has been reported in the vicinity of

Pulau Kasa.

3.50 Piru Roads (3°04'S., 128°11'E.), at the head of Teluk

Piru, is a small bight in the shore reef. The anchorage, described below, is in front of the entrance.

3.50 A reef that dries is a little less than 1 mile SSW of the pier at

Piru. It is marked on the W side by a beacon with a white

spherical topmark. A 9.1m shoal is about 0.2 mile WNW of the

reef.

3.50 Approaching the roadstead, pass W of the 9.1m shoal and

steer for the head of the pier on a bearing of 033° until 0.35

mile off it, then anchor, in 29m, off the reefs.

Piru (Piroe) (3°04'S., 128°11'E.) (World Port Index No.

52730) is on the shore abreast of the roads.

3.50 The bight NE of Pulau Kasa is not very much frequented.

Along its N shore are several narrow inlets with drying reefs at

their entrances. On the reef S of Teluk Latal, the westernmost

and largest of these inlets, is a shoal which is always above

water and on which a small tree stands. About 5 miles ENE of

Tanjung Tutualmatwai (Toetoealmatwai), there is a conspicuous 412m hill with a single round-topped tree on it.

3.50 Temporary anchorage may be found at a few places close to

the shore. The principal villages on the E shore are Kampung

Waisamu, Kampung Hatusua, Kampung Kairatu, and Kampung Seruawan. A vessel reported to find good anchorage, in

37m, good sandy holding ground, just W of the mouth of the

small river at Kampung Kairatu. A sandbar, dry at LW, fronts

the shore near the stream.

Selat Ceram

3.51 Selat Ceram (3°28'S., 128°34'E.) is the wide and

clear passage between Seram on the N, and Pulau Horuku and

Pulau Saparua on the S. Because the points on both sides of the

strait are conspicuous it can be easily navigated day or night.

The N side is a low narrow plain with hills immediately behind

it rising to a group of mountains, of which Gunung Toplana, a

1,346m peak, is the highest. Totaniwel, 1 mile SE of Toplana,

is a conical peak 1,260m high. The current in the strait is not

strong and usually runs to the W.

3.51 The only anchorage out of the current is in Teluk Tuhaha, on

the N side of Pulau Saparua, and which has previously been

described in paragraph 3.46. Although the bottom is very

steep, anchorage may be found off the villages of Kampung

Seruawan (3°26'S., 128°25'E.), Kampung Tohulala (Tihoelale) (3°27'S., 128°31'E.), and Kampung Rumakai (Roemakan) (3°27'S., 128°32'E.), on the Seram side of the strait. The

bottom is steep and a 0.9m shoal is off the latter village.

Seram—South Coast (Continued)

3.52 Teluk Elpaputih (Elpapoetih) (3°17'S., 128°51'E.) is

nearly 15 miles wide between its two entrance points Tanjung

Latu (3°25'S., 128°42'E.) and Tanjung Ailusiha (3°21'S.,

128°56'E.). Both of these points are low, but the latter has a

conspicuous group of tall trees on it; a low tongue of land

ending in Tanjung Kuako extends NW from it. The mountains

and hills are rather close to the W shore. Here Pohon Batu, a

383m summit with a small distinctive tree on the SW side of a

wide ridge and Batu Mani, a 652m table mountain 6 miles

farther N, are most conspicuous. The inner end and E side of

the bay are bordered by an alluvial plain covered with bamboo

trees. Hot springs are found in many places around the bay.

Earth tremors occur frequently.

3.52 Tides—Currents.—In front of the bay and along the coast

to the E, a monsoon drift will be experienced, although it is not

as strong as out in the open part of the Banda Sea. A countercurrent may be running along the coast.

3.52 Anchorage.—In general, the bottom is too steep in front of

the villages to serve as anchorage. Exceptions to this are Teluk

Meruru, an indentation at the W end of the bay, and off the villages of Kampung Makariki and Kampung Hururu (Hoeroeroe), on the E coast. A landing can usually be made during the

Northwest Monsoon, but during the Southeast Monsoon the

surf is generally so heavy that small-craft traffic between the

villages is impossible. On the W shore, close NE of Pohon

Batu, is a large settlement consisting of the villages of Kampung Paulohi, Kampung Mani, and Kampung Samasuru

(3°16'S., 128°46'E.). At Kampung Waija, on the N shore, there

is a coffee and cacao plantation which can be recognized by a

tin roof.
56 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

3.53 Teluk Amahai (3°20'S., 128°55'E.), directly N of the

E entrance point to Teluk Elpaputih, is formed by the tongue of

land Tanjung Kuako. Although this point serves as a breakwater, the sea may be choppy occasionally. Other than that, and

except for heavy afternoon showers that may come up during

the Northwest Monsoon, the bay is sheltered. Reefs with

depths less than 1.8m, extend up to 0.5 mile from the E shore.

Between these reefs and the W shore there is anchorage in

depths of 10.9 to 29m.

3.53 Two mooring buoys are about 0.5 mile SE of Tanjung

Kuako.

3.54 Amahai (3°20'S., 128°55'E.), at the head of Teluk

Amahai, is the residence of a government official. A pier for

boats, with a depth of 2.4m alongside, extends from the shore

abreast the village; the pier was reported in ruins. A light is

shown from the root of the pier and a flagstaff is close S. 

3.54 Between Teluk Elapaputih and Teluk Teluti, about 39 miles

E, the land along the coast becomes much higher to the E, but

there are no conspicuous summits. A conspicuous tree stands

on a 202m elevation 8.5 miles E of Tanjung Ailusha and 2.5

miles farther E is a conspicuous mosque in the village of Kampung Sepa (3°21'S., 129°07'E.), NW of Tanjung Oepa. Between Kampung Tamilaoe (3°23'S., 129°12'E.), 4.5 miles E

of Tanjung Upa, and the W point of Teluk Teluti, the coast is

fronted by many reefs; some of which, at the E end of this

stretch, dry at LW. There is a heavy surf on this coast during

the Southeast Monsoon. This surf, in conjunction with the

earth tremors, causes portions of the foreshore to break away.

Teluk Teluti (Teluk Taluti) (3°24'S., 129°45'E.) is about 24.5

miles wide between its two entrance points Tanjung Seitu

(Seitoe) (3°26'S., 129°34'E.) and Tanjung Mataia (3°26'S.,

129°58'E.). The former is low, but the land behind it rises

steeply; the latter is also low and has a plain in back of it. High

mountains surround the bay. 

3.54 Waja, 790m high, is the highest summit of the wide and

steep tongue of land forming the W side of the bay. Gunung

Binaija, a 3,055m peak and the highest part of Seram, is NW of

the bay. Pegunungan Manusela (Manoesela), a range of mountains on the N part of the bay, form a range extending E from

Gunung Binaija. In contrast to the W side, the N side has a low

narrow coastal plain which becomes wider in the valley of the

river, Wai Bobot (3°23'S., 129°58'E.), on the E side.

3.54 Anchorage.—The principal villages in the bay are Kampung Tehoru (Tehoea), Kampung Wolu (Woloe), Kampung

Laimu (Laimoe), and Kampung Bemu (Bemoe). Anchorage

can be found in several places close to the shore. Kampung

Tehua is not approachable during the Southeast Monsoon. The

wide rivers such as Wai Lau, Wai Kaba, and Wai Bobot can be

navigated only by small craft for short distances above the

mouth.

3.55 Tehoru Roads (3°22'S., 129°32'E.), on the W side of

the bay, is a suitable anchorage during the Northwest Monsoon, but less so during the Southeast Monsoon. Anchorage

can be found, in a depth of 20.1m, over sand and mud, with the

flag pole bearing 140° and 0.15 mile distant. There is also anchorage about 183m offshore, with a stern line to the beach and

the mosque bearing about 135°.

Between Teluk Teluti and Tanjung Undur (Oendoer)

(3°47'S., 130°36'E.), about 44 miles E, the mountains and hills

are not very conspicuous. Exceptions are Watu Lus (Watoe

Loes), 506m high, and the double top of Oson, 853m high,

which is back of Watu Lus and 19.5 miles ESE of Tanjung

Mataia. East of Tanjung Undur, the mountains are more conspicuous. The westernmost and one of the highest of the group

is 723m high and is visible for a great distance to the S and

SW; its sides are partly bare. When seen from the W, it appears

to have a flat top. The other mountains of this group are well

wooded.

3.55 Detached shoals become more numerous and the drying

shore reef becomes more apparent toward the SE point of

Seram.

3.55 Tides—Currents.—There is little or no current close to the

coast, but further outside the monsoon drift will be encountered, although it is weaker than that farther out in the Banda

Sea.

3.55 Anchorage.—There are many bights along this coast. The

villages can be located by the coconut plantations near them.

During the West Monsoon and the turning periods, anchorage

can be found almost anywhere. Reefs can only be distinguished at a short distance by discoloration.

3.56 Kisalaut Roads (Kisalaoet Roads) (3°36'S.,

130°19'E.), 24 miles SE of Tanjung Mataia, affords anchorage,

in 16.4m, sand, abreast of the village.

3.56 Near Tanjung Ultotin, 2 miles farther E, there is temporary

anchorage, in a depth of 16.4m, in the vicinity of a loading

place for lumber. Vessels call here occasionally.

Kilmuri Roads (Kilmoeri Roads) (3°40'S., 130°27'E.),

about 2 miles NW of the village of the same name and 6.5

miles SE of Tanjung Ultotin, affords anchorage, in depths of 10

to 20.1m, sand, between the shore and two reefs with depths of

1.2 and 3.9m. On the shore abreast of the roads in the village of

Selor.

3.56 Undur Roads (3°47'S., 130°36'E.), NW of the point of the

same name, affords anchorage, in 35m, between the shore and

a 6.7m shoal.

3.56 Teri (3°47'S., 130°43'E.), 722m high and standing 7 miles E

of Tanjung Undur, is a steep dome with partly barren sides.

From W it appears as a flat summit; from E the E side appears

highest. It can be identified from a great distance. Suru and

Tunlean, two peaks located E of Tori, have been previously

described in paragraph 3.32.

3.57 Pulau Gofa (3°50'S., 130°43'E.), a small low islet

covered with coconut trees and 7.5 miles SE of Tanjung Undur,

has anchorage to the E, in 20.1m. To approach this anchorage,

steer for Teri on a 354° bearing until Pulau Gofa is abeam.

Smaller vessels can then proceed more to the E and anchor between Tanjung Aran and a 6.7m shoal 1 mile S of it. Local

knowledge is necessary. During the Northwest Monsoon,

anchorage may be obtained in most places off this coast; the

reefs are marked by discoloration and can be seen from a short

distance. 

3.57 Kampung Guli Guli (Goeli Goeli), on the coast 3.5 miles E

of Pulau Gofa, can be reached by small craft through a channel

in the drying reef.
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 57

Pub. 164

3.57 The SE point of Seram is a low marshy peninsula with many

creeks and it is surrounded by a wide drying reef. The point is

more easily identified by the string of reefs and islands

extending E from it than by the mountains to the NW. Four

channels lead in a N-S direction through these reefs.

Islands Southeast of Seram

3.58 Tides—Currents.—Strong tidal currents, which may

attain a velocity of 3 knots at springs, run through the above

channels. They set S with the ebb and N with the flood. At

Geser it has been noted that the S currents set in 2 hours after

HW at full and new moon, and 1 hour after HW at quarter

points. In Selat Kefing they are accompanied by tide rips which

render navigation difficult. Winds blowing in the opposite

direction to the current sometimes cause a heavy sea. At the E

end of the string of reefs and on the N side of Kepulauan

Gorong, the currents are strong and variable and cause violent

tide rips. In the strait between the reefs and the westernmost of

Kepulauan Gorong it was noticed that the current set diagonally across toward the reefs on a rising tide.

Pulau Seram Rei (Pulau Ceram Rei) (3°52'S., 130°51'E.),

on a drying reef extending E from the SE point of Seram, is a

small low island covered with tall trees and surrounded by a

white sandy beach which is submerged at HW. There are also

several trees on the drying reef between this island and the SE

point of Seram.

3.58 Geser (3°53'S., 130°54'E.), a small flat island on a drying

reef 1.6 mile E of Pulau Seram Rei, is covered with trees. It is

separated from the other reefs by two straits, Selat Kefing on

the W side and Selat Kilwaru (Kilwaroe) on the E side.

3.58 A 9.1m shoal is on the W side of the S entrance to Selat

Kefing; a 7m shoal is on the W side, 0.85 mile SW of the S end

of Geser.

3.58 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, for danger area and

swept channel information in Selat Kilwaru.

3.59 Geser Roads (3°53'S., 130°54'E.), in Selat Kilwaru

on the E side of Geser island, affords anchorage abreast the

boat pier, in about 9.1m. It is inadvisable for more than one

vessel to anchor in the roads at the same time. The holding

ground is not good because the bottom is smooth stones. A

choppy sea may be experienced when the wind and the current

are in opposition. When the currents are strong and the sea is

rough better anchorage may be found in the N entrance to the

strait.

3.59 Selat Kilwaru is marked by beacons; those on the W side of

the channel are black and those on the E are white.

3.59 The E side of Selat Kefingis marked by a beacon with a

square topmark close N of the N end of the drying reef on

which Geser is located and by another beacon with a truncated

cone topmark on the SW edge of the same reef.

3.59 Tides—Currents.—At Geser, the lowest LWlevel occurs in

June or July and in December or January. The maximum rise

and fall of tide that can be expected are, respectively, about

0.7m above and 1.2m below mean sea level.

3.59 Current signals are occasionally shown from the mast at the

head of the boat pier at Geser. A red flag indicates N current, a

white flag slack water, and a blue flag a S current.

3.59 Directions.—Because it is not desirable to anchor with the

current setting in the same direction that the vessel is heading,

it is advisable to enter Selat Kilwaru against the current.

3.59 When coming from the S steer for the conspicuous summit

of Pulau Seram Laut on a 056° bearing until the S beacon on

Pulau Kilwaru (3°53'S., 130°54'E.), a low island about 0.5

mile ENE of Pulau Geser, is bearing about 020° (this beacon is

reported difficult to identify sometimes), then alter course

northward and be guided by the beacons to the anchorage.

3.59 When coming from N, stand in for Selat Kefing until the NE

point of Pulau Geser is in range with the SW side of Pulau

Seram Laut, then steer for Selat Kilwaru and proceed to anchor

with the aid of the beacons.

3.59 The beacon, topmarked with a black truncated cone, on the

NE end of the reef extending from Pulau Geser is very difficult

to see when approaching from E.

3.60 Geser (3°53'S., 130°54'E.) (World Port Index No.

52690) is on the island of the same name. The village is on

both sides of a lagoon, the entrance of which is crossed by a

bridge. A pier is on the N side of the entrance to the lagoon and

there is a 75m long stone mole on the N side of the village. A

government official has headquarters here. Forest produce and

copra are exported. A light is shown from a flagpole on the

outer end of the pier when vessels are expected.

Pulau Seram Laut (Pulau Ceram Laoet) (3°53'S.,

130°26'E.), the largest island on the string of reefs extending

22 miles E of the SE end of Seram, is rocky and largely covered with coconut trees. In the middle it is about 90m high. Kilwaru and Marlau, islands off the NW side and E end,

respectively, are both low. Of the other islets on the reef to the

E, Kifar, Kidang, Nukus, Grogus, and Pulau Koon are the largest and are covered with coconut trees. The remainder are

mainly small wooded rocky formations. There are passages

through the reefs 1 and 7 miles E of Pulau Seram Laut, but

these are not marked with navigational aids and are not recommended.

Kepulauan Gorong

3.61 Kepulauan Gorong (4°03'S., 131°20'E.), a group of

islands 22.5 to 38 miles ESE of the SE point of Seram, consists

of Pulau Panjang, Pulau Manawoka, and Pulau Gorong. The

first two are connected by a bank of soundings of less than

183m, but a deep-sea passage separates these two from Pulau

Gorong. There are no detached dangers far beyond the fringing

reef, except on both sides of the N part of Pulau Gorong where

they extend up to 1 mile off. Valuable woods are cultivated on

all of these islands and praus are built. Natives are engaged in

coconut and sago culture and fishing.

3.61 Tides—Currents.—Currents have been observed to set N

with a rising tide and S with a falling tide. South of Pulau Manawoka the latter current draws to the SSW, so that it sets across

the strait between Kepulauan Gorong and Kepulauan Watubela

to the S. At full moon, it may attain a velocity of 2.5 knots.

Strong tide rips occur in places.

3.62 Pulau Panjang (Pulau Pandjang) (4°01'S.,

131°14'E.), the NW island, is lower than the other two, rising

to a height of 100m. The villages are small and in places built
58 Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 

Pub. 164

on poles on the reefs. The coastline on the S and SW side is

rocky but has several short sandy beaches. The S part of the E

side is covered with mangrove trees. The entire island is heavily wooded and there are some scattered coconut plantations.

There is no anchorage near this island. The passage between

Pulau Panjang and Pulau Koon, to the N, is clear of dangers,

but there are violent currents and cross currents setting toward

the Pulau Koon reef on the flood.

Pulau Manawoka (4°07'S., 131°20'E.), SE of Pulau Panjang, is the highest mountain in the group and rises to a height

of 359m in Lololi, which resembles a table mountain but is

more pointed when seen from N or S. The coast is alternately

low and rocky. The W coast is almost uninhabited, but on the E

coast there are several villages with large coconut plantations.

Tidal currents set SSW with the falling tide S of the island at a

rate of 2.5 knots at springs. 

3.62 Amar Roads (4°05'S., 131°19'E.), on the NW side of Pulau

Manawoka, affords suitable anchorage on or near the 11.9m

bank N of the village, but the anchorage is not favorable at the

height of the monsoons, especially the North Monsoon, when a

heavy sea may be experienced. Landing is difficult at that time.

The village and its flagpole are hard to distinguish, but on the

approach of a vessel the national flag is hoisted. On the drying

reef E of the flagpole there are some large rocks which are

covered only at the highest HW level.

3.63 Pulau Gorong (4°01'S., 131°24'E.), the easternmost

island of the group, has a range of hills ranging up to 321m

high at Watu Keliang (4°00'S., 131°24'E.). Generally the

coasts are low and covered with coconut plantations. Tanjung

Assan, the NW point, is rocky; Tanjung Namalen, the NE

point, is sandy.

3.63 Ondur Roads (4°00'S., 131°23'E.), on the W side of Pulau

Gorong, has a shore which is fronted by reefs and shoals up to

0.5 mile offshore, however, a navigable channel, marked by

beacons, leads in a NE direction to the village. An outer shoal

on the N side of the channel has a depth of 3.9m. Larger vessels may find anchorage, in about 40m, in the outer part of this

channel. Local knowledge is necessary.

3.63 Kailakat Roads (4°03'S., 131°26'E.), near the S end of the E

side of Pulau Gorong, is in a small bay with a sandy bottom over

which the depths decrease uniformly to the head. The bay can be

recognized by a red bare spot close S of the rocky entrance point.

The spot is easily identified from the N, NE, or SE. Entrance can

be safely made on a 265° bearing on the white bridge over the

mouth of the stream S of the southernmost mosque. A 16m shoal

lies 0.8 mile ESE of the village of Kailakat. Local knowledge is

necessary for anchoring in this area.

Kepulauan Banda

3.64 Kepulauan Banda (4°25'S., 129°55'E.), a group of

islands about 65 miles SW of the SE end of Seram, are hilly

and mountainous and separated from each other by deep

passages. The only off-lying danger is Karang Saaru Arrungesi

(Rif Van Rosengain), which is discussed in paragraph 3.70.

3.64 About June and September, the sea for several miles around

assumes a milky white appearance, as though a thin mist

covers the surface. This is attributed to masses of microscopic

organisms which float near the surface of the water.

3.64 Earthquakes occur very often and violent eruptions of Vuuberg Volcano, on Pulau Gunung Api (Goenoeng Api), have

been recorded.

3.64 Except for Pulau Suanggi, all of the islands are inhabited.

The inhabitants engage in fishing and coconut and nutmeg cultivation.

3.64 Tides—Currents.—Because the Banda Sea is subject to

monsoon drifts, strong currents will be encountered in the

passages between the islands; their velocity depends on the

width of the passage. In the narrower channels of the main

group of islands tidal currents dominate. Current rips will also

be encountered.

3.65 Pulau Suanggi (Soeanggi) (4°19'S., 129°42'E.), the

NW island and most isolated from the group, is a large rock

107m high, with almost vertical bare sides and a wooded top.

Except on the W side, a coastal reef fringes the shores. A light

is shown from the summit of the island.

Pulau Run (Roen) (4°33'S., 129°41'E.), 13 miles S of Pulau

Suanggi, is 203m high at Gandulang Hill and has a coastal reef

on all sides. Except for the steep slope at the SW point, the S

slope of Gandulang Hill, and Run Hill near the N point, the

land rises gradually. The small low islet of Nailaka is on a

drying reef extending from the N end of the island.

3.65 Pulau Run is a good radar target at a distance of 18 miles.

3.65 Anchorage.—The only anchorage near Pulau Run is in a

depth of 70m in a bight of the coastal reef between Nailaka and

the E point of Pulau Run. This anchorage, however, is good

only during the West Monsoon.

3.66 Pulau Ai (4°32'S., 129°46'E.), 4.25 miles ENE of

Pulau Run, is 145m high and is fringed by a drying reef on all

sides. Generally, the island is steep, except for somewhat of a

slope on the N side. When seen from a considerable distance it

appears flat with the conspicuous and highest hill, Kota Perampuan, on the E side. The NE and NW points are high.

3.66 The sea bottom on the NE and S sides of the island are too

steep for anchoring. On the W side, there is a small area where

large vessels may find anchorage, in a depth of 68m, sand and

stones. It can be approached with the NW point of the island

bearing 060° until the S side bears 128°. Kampung Ai

(4°31'S., 129°46'E.), with the old Fort Revenge in its W part, is

on the N side of the island.

3.67 Pulau Banda Besar (Groot Banda) (4°33'S.,

129°55'E.), 10 miles E of Pulau Run, is fairly high. A chain of

hills and small mountains runs through the entire length of the

island. Bandera, a 536m mountain is the highest point, but it is

not very conspicuous. Peri, a 176m hill, is the highest elevation

of the tongue of land extending from the E end of the N side of

the island. Generally there is very little drying coastal reef

except of the N side of the W half of the island. Most of the

villages are on the N side. Kampung Lontor (4°33'S.,

129°52'E.), at the NW part of the island is built on the slopes of

an old crater. A stairway of about 200 steps leads from a landing place to the village. The bays on the S side of the island are

too deep for anchoring, and landing is difficult because of

breakers. The island is a good radar target at a distance of 27

miles.
Sector 3. The Southern Moluccas—Buru, Seram, and Kepulauan Banda 59

Pub. 164

Pulau Gunungapi (Goenoeng Api) (4°31'S., 129°52'E.),

close N of the W end of Pulau Banda Besar, is separated from

that island by Lontor Channel (Gat Van Lontor), which is

constricted by the reef extending N from Pulau Banda Besar.

The island is almost entirely the volcano, Vuurberg, which

rises to a height of 656m and has a bare upper part. Clouds of

smoke and fumes rise continuously from the two craters and

from crevices in the sides. On the NE side of the island is a

small peninsula formed by the steep Uluweru Hill (4°31'S.,

129°53'E.), which is 94m high. Only the W side of the island is

free of drying reefs. With due precautions, anchorage is available off the SW side of the island.

3.68 Pulau Naira (4°31'S., 129°54'E.), close E of Pulau

Gunungapi, is not as hilly as the other islands but rises to 250m

in Papenberg. It is separated from Pulau Gunungapi by Zonnegat, a channel whose N entrance is divided into two channels

by Kraka, an islet 26m high, where a light is shown from its N

tip. The S entrance to Zonnegat is practically obstructed by a

reef with greatest depths of 0.5 to 4.1m in a very narrow

passage. Oostgat, the wide channel between Pulau Naira and

Pisang, is deep and clear.

3.68 Pisang Islet (4°30'S., 129°56'E.), 66m high, is about 0.5

mile NNW of the N extremity of Pulau Banda Besar and is

covered with coconut trees, except for a large conspicuous bare

rock on its N point. Batu Kapal (4°29'S., 129°56'E.), a bare

islet, is about 0.3 mile N of Pisang Islet. Passage between the

two islets is not advised, but Selat Selamo, the passage

between the N point of Pulau Banda Besar and Pisang Islet, is

deep and clear of dangers, except for the 2.8m shoal extending

0.2 mile off the NW side of Tanjung Burang.

3.68 Pisang Islet has been reported to be a good radar target at a

distance of 21 miles.

3.68 Tides—Currents.—Strong tidal currents set through the

channels. In the roadstead S of Pulau Naira the current sets E

during the flood and W with the ebb at the rate of up to 3 knots.

3.69 Naira Roads (4°32'S., 129°54'E.) consists of two

parts, one S of Pulau Naira and the other in the S part of

Zonnegat, on the W side of Pulau Naira, close NE of the SW

extremity of the island. In the former, anchorage is available in

any desired depth over a bottom of sand, coral, and stones. The

roads in Zonnegat are rather deep for anchoring, therefore, it is

best to moor at the Government Pier. Squalls which come

down off Pulau Gunungapi make it advisable to moor with the

bow to the N and an anchor laid out ahead.

3.69 Tides—Currents.—At Naira Roads, the lowest LW occurs

in May or June and in November or December. The maximum

rise and fall of tide that can be expected are, respectively, about

0.8m above and 1.3m below mean sea level.

3.69 Aspect.—A light is shown from a white metal framework

tower at the head of the E pier when a vessel is expected or is

in the roads S of Pulau Naira. Two lights are shown occasionally from the Government Pier in Zonnegat. A light is also

shown on the NW point of Pulau Naira, 0.3 mile E of Kraka.

3.69 Directions.—The approach from the N to the roads S of

Pulau Naira is clear and should present no difficulty. Vessels

approaching from W by way of Lontor Channel (Gat Van Lontor) will find the passage rather narrow; the N side of this channel should be favored. There is a least depth of 7.8m in the fairway.

3.69 Vessels bound for the road in Zonnegat can pass either W or

E of Kraka. To pass W of the islet, steer for a village on the W

side of Naira 0.9 miles SE of Kraka, bearing 121° and open NE

of Pulau Vera, the NE point of Gunungapi; this will lead over

the bar SW of Kraka with a least depth of 11.9m. The shoals on

the starboard hand are usually marked by discoloration. To

pass E of Kraka Islet, bring the S end of the Government Pier

(3°32'S., 129°53.5'E.) in range with Pulau Vera. This will lead

in mid-channel through a least depth of 13.7m.

3.70 Kampung Naira (Bandanaira) (4°32'S., 129°54'E.)

(World Port Index No. 52780) is on the SW side of Pulau

Naira. There are two piers on drying reefs on the S side of

Pulau Naira and a Government Pier on the Zonnegat side, with

depths of 4.5 to 7.9m alongside. Vessels berth bow N using

their port anchors. This pier is used by inter-island ferries.

There are two old forts, Belgica and Nassau, in the village.

Pulau Rozengain (4°35'S., 130°02'E.), about 5 miles ESE of

Pulau Banda Besar, is fringed by a drying shore reef marked by

discoloration, except for a part on its SW side. It has two hills,

of which Lari, the N one, is 171m high and wooded. Kota Batu

Merah, the S one, is 170m high, bare, and conspicuous. Two

large rocks are on the coastal reef, one on either side of Tanjung Pulu the NE point of the island. The only village on the island is near a small sandy beach on the N side. There is no anchorage near the island.

Karang Saaru Arrungesi (Rif Van Rozengain) (4°38'S.,

130°03'E.), 2 miles SSE of Pulau Rozengain, dries about 0.9m

at LW springs on its N part. It is always marked by heavy

breakers. There is no anchorage in the vicinity.
Pub. 164

4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands

4.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 4 — CHART INFORMATION
63

Pub. 164

SECTOR 4 

THE BANDA SEA AND OFF-LYING ISLANDS

4.0 Plan.—This sector describes the Banda Sea briefly, then

Kepulauan Kai, Kepulauan Aru, Kepulauan Barbar, Kepulauan

Tanimbar, and the smaller islands in their vicinity.

The Banda Sea

4.1 The Banda Sea is generally regarded as being within the

area bounded as follows: on the N, the chain of islands extending

SE from the E extremity of Sulawesi to and including Seram; on

the E, the chain of islands between the SE end of Seram and

Kepulauan Kai, then to Kepulauan Tanimbar; on the S, the chain

of islands between Kepulauan Tanimbar and the NE part of Timor

then by the chain of islands between this part of Timor and the E

extremity of Flores; on the W, the chain of islands between the E

extremity of Flores and the S end of Sulawesi and by the SE side

of the latter island.

4.1 The islands of Kepulauan Banda would properly be included in

the description of this sea, but for the sake of convenience they

have been included with the islands adjacent to Seram and have

been previously described beginning in paragraph 3.64. The islands of Kepulauan Tukanbesi and Timor and Wetar together with

the islands W of them are described in Pub. 163, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Borneo, Jawa, Sulawesi, and Nusa Tenggara.

Pulau Kisar and the islands E of Timor are described beginning in

paragraph 4.70.

4.1 Tides—Currents.—Very little is known about currents in

the open part of the Banda Sea, except that the winds set up

perceptible surface movements. In the W part of the sea, S of

Kepulauan Banggai and Kepulauan Sula, the current sets ESE

at the rate of 0.8 knot to 2 knots during the Northwest Monsoon and sets NNW at a rate of 0.6 knot to 2 knots during the

Southeast Monsoon. During both seasons, most of the flow is

in the N part of the Banda Sea; in the S the rates are weak and

the direction of the set is very variable.

4.1 Regulations.—For information regarding designated Archipelagic Sea Lanes, as defined by the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), passing through the

Banda Sea, see the Indonesia section of Pub. 120, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia.

Kepulauan Lucipara

4.2 Kepulauan Lucipara (5°29'S., 127°31'E.), in the

central part of the Banda Sea about 110 miles SE of Buru

Island, consists of four coral islands named Mai, Laponda,

Kaurangka, and Selatan. These islands are on a reef about 5

miles long in a NW-SE direction.

4.2 Although the islands are uninhabited, turtle fishermen from

Buru Island and Ambon frequent them during October, November, December, and sometimes April.

4.2 The islands are wooded and bearings can be taken at a distance of as much as 15 miles. The tallest trees, more than 30m

high, are on Mai. The reef is so steep-to that there are no good

places to anchor, but boats may be landed at several places on

the lee side with a calm sea. Drinking water can be obtained

from well on the NW side of Mai. The islands are a good radar

target at a distance of 15 miles. Irregular currents and

whirlpools have been observed close S and NW of the islands. 

4.2 Caution.—The reefs surrounding Kepulauan Lucipara have

extended considerably and caution should be observed when in

the vicinity.

Beting Sekaro (Skaro Reef) (5°35'S., 127°28'E.), a reef

about 6 miles SW of Kepulauan Lucipara, is separated from

that group by a clear deep channel. The reef, about 3 miles

long, has two white sand banks that cover only during exceptionally HW. A stranded wreck on the NE side of the reef was

reported radar conspicuous.

Kepulauan Penyu

4.3 Kepulauan Penyu (Schildpad Islands) (5°23'S.,

127°47'E.), about 15 miles ENE of Kepulauan Lucipara,

consist of three low coral islands, Mai (not to be confused with

the island of the same name in the nearby Kepulauan Lucipara

group), Kadola, and Bingkoedoe. These islands are on a reef

and are separated from each other by clear deep channels.

Exercise caution when approaching these reefs because they

have extended considerably. Because of their high trees the

islands can be identified at a distance of 15 to 16 miles. The

steep coral reefs that fringe these islands make anchorage impossible.

Pulau Manuk

4.4 Pulau Manuk (Manoek) (5°33'S., 130°18'E.), about

150 miles E of Kepulauan Penyu, is a cone-shaped volcanic

island, 285m high, 1 mile long NNW-SSE and 0.5 mile wide.

In the center of the island is an open crater best seen from SSE.

No eruptions have been recorded, but sulfurous fumes have

been reported to rise from the crater and there is a large amount

of sulfur on the island. The lower part of the N side of the

island is wooded. On the W side of the island there is a small

sandy beach. A coral reef, projecting out about 183m in its N

part, skirts the shore between the beach and the NW extremity

of the island.

4.4 Small craft can anchor, in 81m, about 0.15 mile from the

sandy beach in calm weather and during the transition period

of the monsoons (April and November).

Kepulauan Watubela

4.5 Kepulauan Watubela (4°33'S., 131°43'E.), about 60

miles SE of the SE end of Seram, includes Ingar, Pulau

Watubela (Watoebela), Pulau Kaisiui (Kaisioei), Pulau Kurkap

(Koerkap), Pulau Baam, Pulau Tioor, and Pulau Uran (Oeran).

The first three are on a long steep-to submarine plateau with

depths of less than 201m. The remaining islands are on separate reefs surrounded by very deep water.
64 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

4.5 Pulau Ingar (4°21'S., 131°33'E.), the northernmost of the

group, is low and entirely surrounded by a white sandy beach.

It is uninhabited, but there are coconut plantations belonging to

inhabitants of Pulau Watubela. Pulau Watubela is covered with

large trees and there are several large villages. Dadan, its

summit, is 215m high and is distinctive from the E and W.

Pulau Kasiui (Kasioei), separated from Pulau Watubela by

Selat Horot Lomi, a strait which is about 0.5 mile wide, is the

largest island of the group. The use of Selat Horot Lomi is not

recommended because of strong tidal currents accompanied by

heavy tide rips; the fairway is narrowed to a width of about 0.2

mile by a reef extending from the S side of Pulau Watubela.

The highest of Pulau Kasiui’s several hills, 2.75 miles from the

SE end of the island, is 352m high. There are several villages

on the island. On Pulau Baam there are two hills; the N hill,

80m high, and the S hill, 62m high, are separated by a low

sandy area which makes Pulau Baam appear as two islands. A

wide drying reef surrounds the island. Pulau Kurkap (Koerkap), 6.5 miles E of the SE end of Pulau Kasiui, is low, flat and

surrounded by a wide drying reef. A detached reef which dries

is about 0.5 mile E.

4.5 Pulau Tioor (4°45'S., 131°44'E.), about 5.5 miles S of Pulau

Baam is almost entirely rugged hilly land rising to a height of

376m. The N coast and the greater part of the E coast is fringed

with a drying reef. Shoals with depths of 7 and 10m are off the

middle of the E side of the island, about 0.75 mile and 1.25

miles, respectively, offshore.

4.6 Pulau Uran (Oeran) (4°46'S., 131°52'E.), 6.5 miles E

of Pulau Tioor, is low, sandy, and mostly covered with coconut

trees. An extensive drying reef surrounds the island.

4.6 Pulau Baam, Pulau Kurkap, and Pulau Uran are all uninhabited, but have coconut plantations.

4.6 In the otherwise deep and clear passage between Pulau Tioor

and the northernmost island of Kepulauan Kai, to the S, there

are three shoals, with depths of 4.9m, 9.1m, and 10.9m, which

are 16 miles SSE, 21 miles SE, and 23 miles SE, respectively,

from the S end of Pulau Tioor.

4.6 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Kepulauan Watubela,

the flood current has been found to set E and the ebb current W.

The strength of the flood current is increased during the Northwest Monsoon and that of the ebb during the Southeast Monsoon. Between the islands the strength of the currents is often

considerable. In February and March, a current with a velocity

of 3.5 knots has been reported. When the monsoons are

blowing with their maximum velocity, strong rips are set up off

the N and S ends of the islands.

4.6 Anchorage.—There are no good anchorages in Kepulauan

Watubela but there are several places where temporary anchorage may be taken. Anchorage is available close NW of

Pulau Ingar, in 39m, stone bottom; currents here, however, are

strong. There is another anchorage off the NW end of Pulau

Watubela, but here too the currents are strong and the holding

ground poor. There is a 5.9m shoal off the NW end of Pulau

Watubela. During the Southeast Monsoon and the transition

period a comparatively-comfortable anchorage is off the village of Rumah Lusi (4°42'S., 131°44'E.), which is near the NE

end of Pulau Tioor. Anchorage is available in depths of 55m,

sand and stone bottom. There are depths of from 70 to 90m

close outside this anchorage. 

4.6 There is a 5m shoal extending from the N shore of Pulau

Tioor.

Kepulauan Kai

4.7 Kepulauan Kai, an archipelago between the parallels

of 5°07'S and 6°03'S and the meridians of 131°55'E and

133°11'E, may be divided into five groups, namely, Kepulauan

Kur, Kepulauan Tiga Saudara (Drie Gebroeders), Kepulauan

Tayandu (Tajandoe Islands), Pulau Kai Kecil (Nuhu Roa), and

Pulau Kai Besar (Nuhu Cut). The islands are formed almost

entirely of coral and limestone, covered with forests and coconut trees in great abundance. Except for Pulau Kai Besar, the

islands are comparatively low and most of them are encircled

by extensive reefs. There are no roads on the island, but some

of the villages are connected by footpaths. The inhabitants live

mainly in villages along the coasts and engage in coconut culture and boat building.

Kepulauan Kur

4.8 Kepulauan Kur (5°20'S., 131°59'E.) consists of four

islands, in order, from N to S, Pulau Bui, Pulau Tengah, Pulau

Kaimeer, and Pulau Kur (Koer). The first three islands are on a

drying reef, with Pulau Kur 7 miles farther S. The islands are

all wooded.

Pulau Bui (Pulau Boei) (5°07'S., 132°00'E.), about 23 miles

SE of Pulau Tioor and the northernmost island of the group, is

57m high, wooded, and uninhabited. A light is shown at an

elevation of 15m from the N side of Bui. A shoal, with a depth

of 4.9m, is about 9 miles NW of Pulau Bui and about 7.5 miles

E of this shoal are two shoal patches about 1.6 miles apart, with

depths of 9.1m and 10.9m, respectively.

4.8 Pulau Tengah (5°09'S., 132°01'E.), on the reef connecting

Pulau Bui and Pulau Kaimeer, is really a sand bar covered

entirely with coconut trees. The island may be temporarily

inhabited at certain seasons. Several shoal patches and reefs

with depths of about 1.8m are about 0.75 mile offshore along

the E coast of Pulau Tengah.

4.8 Pulau Kaimeer (5°10'S., 132°01'E.), composed mainly of

coral lime, rises in terraces to a height of 151m; the island has a

flat top, and from seaward has the appearance of a large fort.

The SE side is rocky and rises steeply from the sea. There is a

conspicuous small mosque about midway of the W side of the

island. The island is sparsely wooded, but there are several

coconut plantations on the W coast.

4.9 Pulau Kur (5°21'S., 131°59'E.), the southernmost of

the islands of Kepulauan Kur, is a hilly island about 5 miles

long in a NE-SW direction rising in its central part to a height

of 423m. Namsar, the highest hill and in the central part of the

island, appears to be very sharply pointed. Soar, a flat summit,

81m high, stands at the N end of the island. The land rises

steeply from the sea on the N and E sides, but on the W side,

where most of the villages are, the land slopes gently. The S

part of the island is very uneven and the S extremity shows a

broad cleft extending down to the sea. A reef with a maximum

width of about 0.5 mile skirts most of the island.

4.9 A light is shown from the NE tip of the island at an elevation

of 120m. 
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 65

Pub. 164

4.9 Anchorage.—During the Southeast Monsoon, mediumsized vessels can take temporary anchorage, in about 70m

sand, abreast the village of Nam, about 2.25 miles N of the S

end of Pulau Kur. There is an indentation in the coastal reef

here that provides a good natural harbor for small craft. On the

reef there are several fish dams built of blocks or coral.

4.9 Temporary anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local

knowledge during the Southeast Monsoon in an indentation on

the W side of the surrounding reef between Pulau Bui and

Pulau Tengah.

4.9 During the Northwest Monsoon temporary anchorage can be

taken, in 70m, E of the N end of Pulau Kaimeer; this anchorage

is reported undesirable because of the close proximity of the

coast reefs and the possibility of the anchor slipping off the

steep bank.

Kepulauan Tiga Saudara

4.10 Kepulauan Tiga Saudara (Drie Gebroeders) is a

group of three islands, the northwesternmost which is 11.5

miles SW of Pular Kur. These islands, named Pulau Manggur

(Manggoer), Pulau Wonin, and Pulau Fadol, are each surrounded by a reef but are separated from each other by passages free of dangers.

4.10 Pulau Wonin (5°35'S., 131°55'E.), the northernmost island

of the group, is about 0.5 mile in diameter, is 31m high, and is

covered with trees. The island is uninhabited, but there are

some coconut plantations on it.

Pulau Manggur (Manggoer) (5°35'S., 132°00'E.), the northeasternmost and largest of the group, is 1.25 miles long and

nearly a mile wide; it is 42m high and surrounded by a drying

reef extending out to a maximum of 0.45 mile. Several small

villages are on the N part of the island.

4.10 Pulau Fadol (5°40'S., 131°56'E.), the southernmost of the

group, is about 1 mile in diameter, 136m high, and about 5.25

miles SW of Pulau Manggur. The island is rather steep and, on

the E side, can be approached fairly close; on the other sides,

however, reefs project some distance from the island. There is a

village on the low N end of the island. The island is a good

radar target at a distance of 27 miles.

4.10 Anchorage.—The only suitable anchorage of Kepulauan

Tiga Sandara is off the NW side of Manggur during the Southeast Monsoon and off the SE side during the Northwest Monsoon.

Kepulauan Tayandu

4.11 This group consists of three large and four small

islands with a few outlying rocks. The islands are all coral

formations, densely wooded, and surrounded by extensive

reefs. The group extends 19 miles in a NE-SW direction and is

about 8 miles wide. The southernmost island, Pulau Taam

(5°44'S., 132°11'E.), is 134m high and round-backed. On the

other islands are low hills which can be seen at a distance of 12

to 15 miles. There is some good timber on the islands.

Pulau Tayandu (Tajandoe) (5°33'S., 132°19'E.), 86m high,

is the northernmost and largest of the group. Close N of

Tanjung Matot, the NE extremity of the island, is Matotjanat, a

small rocky islet. On the coastal reef off the NW side of the

island there are several rocky inlets, on some of which there are

a few shrubs and trees. The N side of the island is indented by

Lengiar Bay, an inlet where vessels can anchor with local

knowledge. There are several shoals and reefs in the bay,

however, which are hard to avoid because of discolored water.

Kampung Lengiar, a village on the shore of the bay, is

surrounded by a wall. Kampung Jembro (Yembro) (5°32'S.,

132°19'E.), a village on the NW extremity of Pulau Tayandu,

has a conspicuous mosque.

4.11 An islet, 1.8m high, lies about 1.5 miles N of Kampung

Jembro. A shoal, dangerous to navigation and over which the

least depth is unknown and whose position is approximate, lies

about 1 mile N of this islet.

4.11 Caution.—There are several dangers N and W of Pulau Tayandu. Rembang Reef, 6 miles N of Tanjung Matot, has a least

depth of 11.9m; it is composed of sand and stones and is

occasionally marked by discoloration. Depths of less than

14.6m lie within 1 mile N of it.

4.11 Telegraaf Reef, two shoal reefs lying close together that are

seldom marked by discoloration and with a least depth of

14.6m, is 3.5 miles N of Tanjung Matot. Huisman Reef, sand

and stones, with a least depth of 5.5m, is 6 miles NW of the

NW extremity of Pulau Tayandu.

4.11 A 14.6m shoal is 4.5 WNW of the NW extremity of Pulau

Walir, the next island S. There is also a 9.1m shoal 2.1 miles N

of the NW extremity of Pulau Walir.

4.11 There are probably other dangers within the bank of soundings in the vicinity of these islands.

4.12 The 86m summit of Gunung Raja (5°32'S.,

132°19'E.) and a church tower at Kampung Ohiil, about 1.25

miles to the S, are conspicuous on the W coast of Pulau Tayandu.

4.12 The passage between Pulau Tayandu and Pulau Walir is encumbered by reefs, some of which dry, and is suitable only for

small craft.

4.12 Pulau Walir (5°37'S., 132°18'E.), the next largest island of

the group, is close SW of Pulau Tayandu and is uninhabited.

Pulau Heniar (Heniaar) is on the reef E of Pulau Walir. The

village of Kampung Jamtil on the island has a conspicuous

mosque. Watleu is a small rocky islet on the S end of the reef S

of Pulau Walir.

4.12 Pulau Waratneu (5°35'S., 132°17'E.) is a small island

between Pulau Tayandu and Pulau Walir. A 9.1m shoal is 2.5

miles NW of Pulau Waratneu.

4.12 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor E or W of the line of

reefs between Tayandu and Walir. In the W anchorage vessels

should keep W of Pulau Waratneu. This is a good berth during

the East Monsoon. In the E anchorage, a vessel is safe during

the West Monsoon S of Tanjung Watloren (5°35'S.,

132°20'E.), the S point of Pulau Tayandu. To reach this anchorage, steer for Pulau Waratneu on a WNW course until the last

islet on the reef E of Pulau Walir disappears behind the E rocky

coast of Pulau Heniar.

4.13 Pulau Ree and Pulau Reejanat are islets on a reef

close W of Pulau Walir. The former is bold and 33m high; the

latter is a wooded sand bank. The water area between the islets

and Pulau Walir is too shallow and irregular to be used as a

channel.
66 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

Pulau Nusreen (Noesreen) (5°42'S., 132°16'E.), Pulau

Nuniai (Noeniai), and Pulau Nuwait (Noewait), on an extensive reef 2.5 miles SSW of the S end of Pulau Walir, are low

and sandy; the first two are covered with coconut trees. The

channels N and W of the reef on which the islands are located

are about 1.25 miles wide and free of dangers.

4.13 Pulau Taam (5°44'S., 132°11'E.), 2.25 miles SW of the W

end of Pulau Nuniai, is quite bold except at its NE extremity; it

has a maximum elevation of 134m. There are numerous rocks

on the reef that encircles the island. The most noticeable of

these rocks is Watfera, a large flat rock close off the W side of

Pulau Taam. A conspicuous tree on the rock gives it the appearance, when seen from the N, of a ship with a single mast.

A large white rock is on the reef 0.75 mile NNE of Watfera.

There are two villages on the W side of Pulau Taam.

4.13 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Kepulauan Tayandu,

LWSs sometimes coincide, with the result that a LW level of

1.1m below mean sea level can be expected, generally around

June and December. The highest HW level that can be expected is about 0.8m above mean sea level. This occurs at all

semidiurnal spring tides.

4.13 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor, in 40m, W of the village

of Ohitoom, about 1.5 miles NW of the S point of Pulau Taam,

and be sheltered against all winds except Southeast Monsoons;

this anchorage is especially uncomfortable when the winds are

blowing against a S current.

Kai Kecil Group (Nuhu Rowa) (Nuhu Roa)

4.14 The Kai Kecil Group of islands, E of Kepulauan Tayandu, consists of two large islands and a number of small islands, all of which are generally low and are located on a bank

of soundings with depths of less than 183m. The group occupies an area about 40 miles long and 20 miles wide.

Pulau Kai Kecil (Noehoe Efroean) (5°47'S., 132°44'E.), the

central and largest island of the Kai Kecil Group, is known as

Nuhu Tawun (Noehoe Tawoen) in its N part and Nuhu Tutut

(Noehoe Toetoet) in its S part. Pulau Kai Kecil is separated

from Pulau Kai Dulah, the second largest island of the group

and close E, by Rosenberg Strait.

4.14 Pulau Kai Kecil is about 22 miles long in a N-S direction and

about 7.5 miles wide. Its outline is irregular and it is deeply

indented in places. It is covered with trees and is generally low

except for a few moderate hills, the highest of which is Gelanit

(5°39'S., 132°41'E.), which is 3.5 miles S of the northernmost

point of the island and is 119m high.

4.14 The N coast of Pulau Kai Kecil, between the northernmost

point of that island and Tanjung Ngidiun (5°36'S., 132°36'E.),

the NW extremity 6 miles to the W, has alternate stretches of

cliffs and sandy beaches. Tanjung Ngidun is a narrow, rocky

headland that rises gradually to 79m. In the middle of this coast

is a large but unimportant bight the E shore of which is

composed of limestone cliffs averaging 12.2m high. Fronting

the coast is an extensive reef ending close W of Tanjung Ngidiun. There are a few villages along this coast.

4.15 Reefs and islands N of Pulau Kai Kecil.—Ender

Reef (Karang Ender) (5°20'S., 132°41'E.), the northernmost

danger of the Nuhu Efruan Group, is a sand and coral reef 1

mile long with a least depth of 5.8m; it is 6.5 miles NNW of

Pulau Maas and can be distinguished by discolored water.

4.15 Batavier Reef (5°24'S., 132°45'E.) is 3 miles NE of Pulau

Maas and has a least depth of 4.9m. This reef is about 0.5 mile

long and is reported to be marked by discolored water.

Datu Reef (Datoe Reef) (5°25'S., 132°43'E.), about 1 mile N

of Pulau Maas, is about 1.3 miles long. The least depth is said

to be 4.9m and it is marked by discolored water.

4.15 Tegal Reef (5°29'S., 132°49'E.), 3 miles NNE of Tanjung

Serbat, the N extremity of Pulah Kai Dulah, has a least depth of

6.8m. This reef is 0.8 mile long and marked by a lighted beacon and is marked by discoloration.

4.15 Caution.—There are many other dangers in the vicinity of

these reefs.

4.16 Pulau Baeer (5°27'S., 132°42'E.) and Pulau Maas are

two islands N of the N extremity of Pulau Kai Kecil. There are

numerous coconut trees on these islands. The islands are 0.33

mile apart and they are connected by a reef extending 1.75

miles E from Pulau Maas. Watlora Islet is on this reef a water

0.2 mile E of Pulau Maas. Sua Island (Soea Island) is nearly 1

mile SE of Pulau Maas.

4.16 Pulau Rumadan (Pulau Roemadan), nearly 3 miles NW of

Tanjung Serbat, is almost divided into two parts. Detached

reefs extend 3.5 miles W of the island. Pulau Dranan is a small

islet about 0.75 miles S of Pulau Rumaden.

Pulau Duroa (Doe Rowa) (5°33'S., 132°42'E.), S of Pulau

Rumadan, is the largest of the islands N of Pulau Kai Kecil. It

is surrounded by a reef extending 1.5 miles W and about 0.75

mile N and S of the island. An islet is on the reef S of the

island. A detached 2.7m shoal with an islet on it is close off the

SE side of Pulau Duroa. This shoal is marked by a beacon. The

reefs extending S of Doe Rowa and a 0.9m shoal, 1.3 miles SW

of the SW side of the island are marked by a beacon and a

lighted beacon, respectively. There are two villages on the NE

side of the island.

4.16 Pulau Duroa is separated from the reef S of Pulau Rumadan.

A shoal, with a depth of 6.7m, was reported in the channel,

about 3.5 miles due W of Pulau Dranan.

4.17 Pulau Ut (Oet) (5°35'S., 132°40'E.), 2 miles SE of

Pulau Duroa and 1 mile N of the N part of Pulau Kai Kecil, is a

narrow crescent-shaped islet, rocky at both ends with a low,

sandy formation in the middle. A reef extends about 0.75 mile

W of the islet, but it cannot always be distinguished by the

color of the water. Pulau Krus (Kroes), a low, rocky islet, is on

the reef close W of Pulau Ut; there is a small but conspicuous

sand beach on the N side of the islet.

4.17 Selat Duroa (Doe Rowa Strait) (5°35'S., 132°43'E.) is the

channel between Pulau Duroa and the N side of Pulau Kai

Kecil. On the N side of the channel is a reef that extends W and

S from Pulau Duroa and a detached reef that is more to the S.

On the S side of the channel are Pulau Krus (Kroes), Pulau Ut

(Oet), and Pulau Uber (Oeber), and a detached drying reef NW

of the latter island. A light is shown from a beacon standing on

a drying reef 0.5 mile NW of the NW side of Pulau Ubur. A

light shows from a beacon marking a drying reef on the N side

of the strait about a mile NNE of Krus. The navigable width of

the channel is about 0.25 mile; the least depth of 18.3m, which

is found at its E end.
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 67

Pub. 164

4.17 Tidal currents in the strait set E with the rising tide and W

with the falling tide.

4.17 Caution.—Several shoals with depths of 5.8 to 16.4m are in

the W approach to Selat Duroa, about 3 miles E of Pulau

Godon (5°34'S., 132°35'E.).

4.17 The N end of a 7.6m bank is about 1.5 miles off the reef that

extends NW from Pulau Ut and Pulau Krus. A 4.9m shoal

extends nearly 1 mile NW from Pulau Krus. A 4.2m shoal is

about 1 mile NW of the N point of Pulau Ubur.

4.17 The shoals on the N side of Selat Duroa are marked by

beacons. Vessels should keep about 0.35 mile S of these

beacons.

4.18 West coast of Pulau Kai Kecil.—The W coast of the

island is irregular and trends SSE for about 22 miles from

Tanjung Ngidiun (Ngidioen) (5°36'S., 132°36'E.) to Tanjung

Doan (5°57'S., 132°41'E.). This coast is generally rocky with

occasional sandy beaches and is fronted by a broad reef. The

coast is backed by hilly land. The villages along the coast can

usually be recognized by their small churches or mosques.

4.18 The coast from Tanjung Ngidiun for 5 miles S forms a bight,

with shores that are alternately small sandy beaches and cliffs

9.1 to 12.2m high. There are three villages along this stretch of

coast; a church is at Kampung Ngilgof, the southernmost. West

of this village the coast bends E and forms a tongue of land on

which there are two shallow coves on its E side that are closed

by reefs. Beyond the E of these coves the coast trends S.

4.18 Totoad Bight (5°43'S., 132°39'E.) is located S of the village

of Kampung Sulaer (Kampung Soelaer), where the coast forms

a wide bight, narrowing to a creek which penetrates Pulau Kai

Kecil in a S direction almost to its S coast. The entrance to the

bight is divided into two parts, both affording good anchorage,

by Pulau Wahru. In the N part, where the depths range from

10.9 to 39m, there is a small 0.5m detached reef and a long

narrow reef is farther E, near the coast. The S part of the

entrance has depths of 16.4 to 33m over a 0.5 mile width and is

the preferred anchorage. A strong current usually sets out of

the inlet. Kampung Totoad (5°45'S., 132°41'E.) has a conspicuous mosque and there is a small pier for boats. Two small

islets are off the point W of the village.

4.18 Directions.—Vessels approaching the anchorage in Totoad

Bight from N steer SW between Pulau Godon and Pulau Ngaf

until the W end of Pulau Nai bears 180°, then steer 180°,

passing close W of the 6.7m shoal 1.5 miles SW of Pulau Ngaf.

When Gelanit Hill bears 088°, steer for the W side of Pulau

Liek bearing about 151°. When the S end of Pulau Valtimas is

in range 266° with the S side of Pulau Hoa, head SSE or SE.

Vessels should navigate with caution due to the numerous

drying reefs and shoals in these waters; pass on either side of

the 3.9m shoal 2 miles SW of the S point of Pulau Uhiteer.

When the N side of Pulau Tonquin bears 264°, steer 084°,

which passes N of Pulau Liek. Then proceed to the anchorage,

heading NE. Care should be taken to avoid the 0.9m shoal 0.5

mile SE of Pulau Wahru (Wahroe) and the 3.2m and 5.9m

shoals 0.8 mile SW of this island.

4.18 There is a shorter route for vessels with local knowledge by

passing between Tanjung Ngidiun and Pulau Ngaf, then

following the coast as far as Pulau Wahru. It is essential that

the reefs are plainly visible.

4.18 The approach from the S offers no difficulty. The W coast of

Pulau Kai Kecil from Ngoersit, 0.5 mile W of Totoad, to

Watngit, about 3.25 miles further S, has a reef extending as far

as 0.75 mile offshore.

4.18 The coast between the entrance to Totoad Bight and the village of Kampung Watngit, 3.75 miles to the S, is low and sandy;

between that village and Tanjung Arat (5°55'S., 132°40'E.), 6

miles farther S, it gradually increases in height. There are

several villages along this coast.

4.19 Islands W of Pulau Kai Kecil.—A large number of

islands and reefs are off the W coast of Pulau Kai Kecil; some

of the islands are as much as 73m high. These islands and reefs

extend 6 to 17 miles from Pulau Kai Kecil. The positions of

these islands and reefs can best be ascertained by reference to

the chart, but particulars of a few are given below.

4.19 Pulau Godon (5°34'S., 132°35'E.), 1.75 miles NW of

Tanjung Ngidiun, is a low island about 0.5 mile long, covered

with coconut trees, and with a rocky S point. It is surrounded

by a reef extending about 0.5 mile to the N and SW. Pulau Er,

about 1 mile W of Pulau Godon, is a low sandbank covered

with coconut trees and surrounded by a reef extending 1.25

miles to the W. There is a conspicuous tree on the W side of the

islet.

4.19 To the N of Pulau Er, there is a large detached drying reef,

well marked by discoloration, about 0.75 mile long, the outer

edge of which is 5 miles NW of Tanjung Ngidiun. A vessel has

anchored on the N side of this reef, in 21.9m, coral. Approach

was made with the hill inside Tanjung Ngidiun in range with

the summit of Pulau Godon. There is a 5m shoal 0.75 mile N of

this detached reef.

4.19 Pulau Ngaf (5°38'S., 132°35'E.), about 2 miles SW of Tanjung Ngidiun, is surrounded by a reef extending about 0.5 mile

on all sides. A shoal patch in a depth of 6.8m, is about 1.5

miles SW of the S extremity of the island; Mittilir, a 4.5m

shoal, is about 3 miles to the S of the island.

4.19 An extensive reef on which there are several islets lies 7.75

miles S of Pular Er; the W edge of this reef extends nearly 1.5

miles out from its islets and Mitfeer, a 6.7m shoal, is 3 miles

SW of Pulau Nai, the 60m N islet on the reef. The other

principal islets and reefs on the W side of Kai Kecil are Uhiwa

(Oehiwa) (5°42'S., 132°37'E.); Uhiteer (Oehiteer), 1 mile SSE

of Uhiwa; Wahru (Wahroe) (5°45'S., 132°39'E.); Hoa, 0.8

mile S of Nai; Tonquin (5°47'S., 132°34'E.); Taroa (5°48'S.,

132°37'E.); Warbal (5°50'S., 132°35'E.); and Manir, 70m

high, 0.5 mile SE of Warbal.

4.20 Pulau Ur (Pulau Oer) (5°51'S., 132°32'E.) and Pulau

Utier (Pulau Oetice), two islands, 73m and 57m high, respectively, are on a reef 8 miles W of Tanjung Arat.

Pulau Nuhu Taa (Noehoe Taa) (5°55'S., 132°28'E.), about

2.75 miles W of Pulau Utier, is a low sandbank surrounded by

an extensive reef on the S end of which is Pulau Var, a rocky

islet 25m high. A 9.1m shoal is 1.75 miles NE of the N end of

Pulau Nuha Taa; a 4.9m shoal is 0.7 mile NNW of the same

point; and another 9.1m shoal is 1 mile NW of that point.

Pulau Tanimbar (Kai Tanimbar) (6°02'S., 132°27'E.), the

southernmost off-lying islands, is 3.25 miles long in a NE-SW

direction and has a very conspicuous tree-covered summit,

54m high. Its shores are rocky and it is surrounded by a wide
68 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

reef that partly dries at LW; the N side of the reef is 1.1 miles N

of the W extremity of the island. Warna, a small islet, is on this

reef close off the NE extremity of the island. The N side of

Pulau Kai Tanimbar is deeply indented, but the cove so formed

is filled with a coastal reef. Kampung Atnebar is on top of a

25m elevation at the head of the cove. A small drying boat

harbor formed of coral stones is in front of the village. Shoals

with a least depth of 5.9m are located 2.1 miles N of the W end

of Kai Tanimbar.

4.20 Several charted shoal spots are E, SE, and S of Pulau Tanimbar.

4.20 The island is a good radar target at a distance of 20 miles.

4.20 The various islands and groups of islands W of Pulau Kai

Kecilare separated from each other by deep channels that are

easily navigated when the reefs are visible. Strangers, however,

will have difficulty in recognizing and identifying the different

islands.

4.20 The channel between these off-lying islands and reefs and

Kepulauan Tayandu to the W is clear and is 8.5 miles wide in

its narrowest part.

4.21 South coast of Pulau Kai Kecil.—From Tanjung

Arat (5°55'S., 132°39'E.), the coast trends E and S for 4.5 miles

to Tanjung Doan (5°57'S., 132°41'E.) forming a semicircular

bight about 1.75 miles in diameter. Tanjung Arat, the SW

extremity of Pulau Kai Kecil, although not very high, is backed

by a hill which attains an elevation of 107m 1 mile NE of the

point. Tanjung Doan, slightly higher than Tanjung Arat, may

be identified by its orange colored rocks and by the 60m hill

standing 1 mile N and by Noiko Islet, 0.65 mile S of the point.

Between Tanjung Doan and Tanjung Muslenar (Moeslenar)

(5°57'S., 132°43'E.), a rocky point 1.75 miles to the E, the

coast recedes sharply forming the inlet Teluk Uf (Oef). From

Tanjung Muslenar the coast trends ENE for a distance of 3

miles to Tanjung Hoar (5°57'S., 132°46'E.), a somewhat low

but rocky point. This stretch of coast curves in slightly but is

fronted by a drying reef that is nearly 0.5 mile wide.

4.21 Mitroa Reef (6°00'S., 132°43'E.), with a least depth of

4.9m, is 3 miles S of Tanjung Muslenar; the reef discolors

slightly.

4.21 Shoal patches from 1.8 to 7.6m are between Mitroa Reef and

Tanjung Muslenar.

4.21 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken in the bight between

Tanjung Arat and Tanjung Doan opposite the village of

Kampung Ohoideer Tutut, which may be recognized by a small

church. Anchorage can also be taken in Teluk Uf.

4.21 Teluk Uf is a rectangular inlet about 3.5 miles long and 0.5 to

1 mile wide and with general depths of 1.8 to 11.9m. Vessels

entering the inlet should proceed in on a course of 000° passing

about 0.5 mile W of Tanjung Muslenar, in order to avoid three

shoals with depths of 4.1m, 4.9m, and 5.8m, respectively, NE

of Noiko. Anchorage, sheltered against both monsoons, can be

taken in the bight, in depths of 9.1 to 11.9m, sand.

4.22 East coast of Pulau Kai Kecil.—The E side of Pulau

Kai Kecil from Tanjung Hoar to Rosenberg Strait, 13 miles to

the N, is low and the inland hills afford no landmarks. Pulau

Daar and Pulau Bararan, parallel to each other close off the N

part of this coast, can scarcely be distinguished from the

mainland coast itself. N of Kampung Abean, 5.5 miles NNE of

Tanjung Hoar, the soundings inside the 200m curve are very

irregular and the water is discolored. Parallel to and 1.5 miles E

of Pulau Daar is a sandy reef. Shallow waters with depths of

1.8m and 2.7m extend up to 0.9 mile S of this reef. A reef with

a depth of 0.5m is 2.25 miles S of the sandy reef. Two miles

farther S is another reef with a least depth of 4.9m. There is a

reef and rock dangerous to navigation about 2 miles E of

Tanjung Vadsit.

4.22 There are numerous unimportant villages along this coast.

4.22 Rosenberg Strait (5°42'S., 132°45'E.), separating the SW

side of Pulau Kai Dulah from the NE side of Pulau Kai Kecil,

is a winding channel 1.5 miles wide at its E end decreasing to

about 91m at its NW end. Because of reefs extending out from

the shores, the channel is very tortuous. Branching off from

each side of the strait are several arms with irregular depths.

Because the depth at its NW end is not more than 1.8m, the

strait has no navigational importance as a channel. A wooden

bridge spans the NW end of the strait about 0.5 mile S of Tual

(Toeal).

4.23 Northeast coast of Pulau Kai Kecil.—From the NW

end of Rosenberg Strait to the northernmost point of the island,

the coast of Pulau Kai Kecil is very irregular and is fronted by

several islands including Pulau Fair, Pulau Kran, and Pulau

Ubur (Oeboer). A broad reef skirts this coast and connects

these islands with the shore.

4.23 Teluk Gelanit (5°38'S., 132°41'E.) is an inner bay separated

from Tual Roads by Pulau Fair. It consists of two basins with

depths between 9.1m and 23.8m connected by a bar with a

least depth of 1.8m. The entrance, S of Fair, has a narrow and

tortuous entrance with a depth of 5.5m and its use is limited to

small craft only. Four mooring buoys are moored close to the S

side of the entrance opposite the S extremity of Pulau Fair.

4.23 Pulau Kai Dulah (5°37'S., 132°46'E.), the second largest

island of the Kepulauan Kai Kecil group, is close off the NE

side of Pulau Kai Kecil. The S part of the island is higher than

the N. The highest hill, located on the W side of the island, is

115m high. Tanjung Vadsit, the S extremity of the island, is a

steep point, 11.9m high. Kampung Naam (5°33'S., 132°48'E.)

is on the sandy NE extremity of the island. Tanjung Serbat, the

N extremity of the island, is low and sandy. Kampung Tual and

Kampung Dulah, the most important villages, are on the W

side of the island and are mentioned below.

4.23 There are several reefs within the 200m curve along the E

coast of Pulau Kai Dulah.

4.24 Tual Roads (5°38'S., 132°44'E.) is within the limits

of a line drawn in a 225° direction from the point W of

Kampung Dumar to Pulau Fair and a line drawn in a 045°

direction from the SE extremity of Pulau Fair to the shore S of

Kampung Tual.

4.24 Vessels approaching the roads from NE may have difficulty

in making out the entrance to the channel to the roads. Among

the useful landmarks in the vicinity are Gelanit Hill, 3.5 miles

S of the N extremity of Pulau Kai Kecil; the E extremity of

Pulau Duroa; Kran Islet, close S of Pulau Ubur; and Lobi Islet

(5°35'S., 132°45'E.), close off the W side of Pulau Kai Dulah.

The W coast of Pulau Kai Dulah S of Kampung Dulau is distinguished by several fairly high hills.
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 69

Pub. 164

4.24 Winds—Weather.—In November, the Northwest Monsoon

sets in; during December, the winds blow predominantly from

the W and NW with an average velocity of 6 knots, but winds

of very considerable force are not uncommon. Calms are frequent between November and January. In April, the monsoon

changes and the direction of the prevailing winds shifts to E

and SE, with those from the SE predominating until October.

Thunderstorms are most frequent at the change of the monsoon.

4.24 There is greater precipitation among the Kepulauan Kai

group and Kepulaun Tanimbar group than on Timor to the W.

This condition is caused by SE winds that blow from the

Pacific Ocean through Torres Strait. 

4.24 Tides—Currents.—At Kampung Tual, the highest water

level occurs in March or April and the lowest occur in July,

August, and September. The maximum rise and fall that can be

expected are, respectively, about 2.5m above and 0.2m below

mean sea level.

4.24 Little is known about the currents in this group of islands,

except that in Selat Duroa an E current has been noted during

the flood and a W current during the ebb; the maximum recorded velocity was 2 knots.

4.24 Anchorage.—A safe anchorage may be obtained in Tual

Roads, in depths of 20.1 to 24m. Anchorage may also be obtained during the Southeast Monsoon off Kampung Dulah, but

heavy swells occur here during the Northwest Monsoon.

4.24 Small craft use a small shallow inlet in Kai Dulah, abreast

the village of Tual. There is a small pier in the inlet. 

4.24 Directions.—Approaching Tual Roads from N steer 180°

for Tanjung Serbat which leads about 1.25 miles W of Tegal

Reef, previously described in paragraph 4.15. When Lobi Islet,

close off Tanjung Lobi, about 4.25 miles SW of Tanjung

Serbat, bears 210°, steer for it on that bearing until abeam of

Kampung Dulah, then steer for the sandy patch on the NE

point of Pulau Ubur bearing 246°. When the beacon 0.5 mile

SE of the SE point of Ubur bears 180°; alter course to pass W

of this beacon between it and the reefs and shoals extending

from the SE shore of Ubur. The vessel can be guided by the

beacons to the roadstead, but care must be taken to avoid the

shoals in the approach to and within the roadstead.

4.24 To enter Tual Roads from NW through Selat Duroa, set

course for Tanjung Nigidiun from a position about 10 miles N

of that point. From this position Pulau Tayandu, Pulau Er, and

Tanjung Ngidiun are good landmarks. Pulau Er is easily

distinguished from the other islands because it is lower and less

overgrown. A course of 180° should be steered toward Tanjung

Ngidiun until the N end of Pulau Godon is nearly abeam. Then

steer E, keeping the NW end of Pulau Er astern and open N of

Pulau Godon. Pass between the 5.6m and 8.1m shoals lying 3

miles E of Godon. These dangers are best located by reference

to the chart. When the two beacons marking the N side of Selat

Duroa bear 094°, steer into the strait, favoring the N side of the

channel. Reference should be made to the chart as the reefs

extend about 0.6 to 1.0 mile from the S shore of Doe Rowa and

a 4.1m reef is 0.6 mile SSE of Muha Nuhu Janat (Moeha

Noehoe Janat). Local knowledge is necessary. When Muha

Nuhu Janat (5°33'S., 132°43'E.) bears 000° steer around the N

side of Pulau Ubur. Then proceed as directed for the N approach above for Tual Roads. The unmarked dangers along this

route are best shown on the chart.

4.24 Caution.—A 5.5m bank extends about 0.75 mile N and 0.5

mile W from Tanjung Serbat (5°31'S., 132°48'E.), the N extremity of Pulau Kai Dulah. There are shoal patches, with

depths of 10m, 6.9m and 7.8m, lie 1.2 miles NW, 2.0 miles W,

and 1.3 miles W of Tanjung Serbat respectively. There is a

beacon on the S end of the 6.9m shoal.

4.24 A detached reef, with a least depth of 0.9m, is about 0.5 mile

ESE of the SE extremity of Pulau Ubur and is marked by a

beacon.

4.24 A shoal, with a depth of 7m, lies in the center of the fairway,

0.4 mile E of the SE end of Pulau Ubur.

4.24 A narrow reef, about 0.5 mile long in a N-S direction and

with a depth of 0.9m, is 1 mile S of the SE extremity of Pulau

Ubur. This reef is marked by beacons, but they may be missing.

4.24 A reef projects N about 183m from the point of land W of

Kampung Tual.

4.25 Kampung Tual (5°38'S., 132°44'E.) (World Port

Index No. 52800), the principal village of the Kepulauan Kai

Kecil group, is headquarters of a governmental official.

Located in the S part of the W side of Pulau Kai Dulah, it is

partly on the beach and partly on the slopes of the hills that

back the coast. Kai Dulah Tual Light is shown on the shore

close W of the village on a white metal framework tower.

Provisions can be obtained here. There is a boat pier with a

flagstaff and a hospital. There is also a hospital in Selat

Rosenberg, 1.5 miles to the S.

4.25 It was reported that a T-head pier at the village had a length

of 35m, with depths of 5m at the outer berth and 2m at the

inner berth. A smaller T-head pier is situated directly S of

preveouly-described berth. No further details are available.

Pulau Kai Besar (Noehoe Tjoet)

4.26 Pulau Kai Besar (5°40'S., 133°00'E.), the easternmost of the Kepulauan Kai group 4 to 13 miles E of the

Kepulauan Kai Kecil group, is about 50 miles long in a NNESSW direction and a width varying from 1 to 5.25 miles except

at the S end where there is a tongue of relatively low land about

3.5 miles long and 0.5 mile wide. The mountainous aspect of

this island distinguishes it sharply from the comparatively low

islands of the Kepulauan Kai Kecil group. The entire island is

wooded but there are patches of cultivation in places along the

slopes of the hills. The coast is high and bold, but there are

occasional sandy beaches with villages. The coasts of the island are principally projecting points, offshoots of the mountains and hills.

4.26 A chain of mountains extends along the middle of the island

for almost its entire length. The mountains are well wooded

and can be sighted for a considerable distance, except when

their summits are enveloped by clouds, which is generally the

case of those mountains with elevations greater than 396m.

4.26 The principal mountains from S to N are Morbait (5°52'S.,

132°56'E.), 521m high; Wirmangle, 454m high; Nonaibal,

575m high; and Advilnas, 380m high. These four mountains

are peaks of a generally steep mountain range extending N

from the S end of the island; for a considerable distance N of

Advilnas, however, this range consists of hilly ridges with inconspicuous peaks.
70 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

4.26 Close SW of that section of the island that is narrowed by

Teluk Elat (5°38'S., 133°00'E.), is Warhuk, 554m high, which

is conspicuous because it resembles the back of an elephant

with its head facing S. Sicek (Sitjek), 455m high and 2 miles

NE of Warhuk, has the shape of a truncated cone. Fakoi, 619m

high and 2 miles NE of Sicek, rises almost vertically on the SE

side and has many light-yellow-colored stone sections.

4.27 Gunung Daab (5°35'S., 133°04'E.), the highest peak

on the island, 800m high and about 3 miles NNE of Fakoi, has

a cone shape, but it is usually enveloped in clouds. Triple Top,

590m high and about 7.5 miles NNE of Gunung Daab, has

three equally high peaks that appear as a slightly waving line

when seen from seaward. Boo, 793m high and about 3 miles N

of Triple Top, has a notched top that slopes to the S. Kaar,

742m high and about 2 miles N of Boo, has a rather pointed

top. N of Kaar, there are several peaks, the highest of which,

Wokra, is 688m high, but they stand so close together that they

are of little use as landmarks.

4.27 Winds—Weather.—The coasts of Pulau Kai Besar are subject to violent squalls which sweep down from the mountains

on to the E coast during the Northwest Monsoon and on to the

W coast during the Southeast Monsoon. These squalls are

dangerous to small craft and even call for caution on larger

vessels, especially when at anchor. On the E coast such squalls

are particularly strong in the vicinity of Fakoi, near the center

of the coast, on the W coast they are strongest at the S end of

the island, between Nerong (5°47'S., 132°56'E.) and Fer

(5°57'S., 132°51'E.). During the period of change between the

monsoons, in the months of October/November and March/

April, the winds are not especially strong and temporary

anchorage can be obtained anywhere along the E coast. Local

knowledge is necessary. The Dutch referred to such bora-like

winds as “Valwinden.”

4.28 East coast of Pulau Kai Besar.—The E coast of the

island is so steep-to that a vessel can proceed quite closely

along the shore. The most conspicuous points along this coast

are Tanjung Weduar (6°01'S., 132°50'E.), the steep S extremity of the island; Tanjung Obahan, a rocky point 11.75 miles

NNE of Tanjung Weduar; and Tanjung Wahadan, 15 miles

farther NNE. The latter point is not particularly high, but it is

rocky and the mountains immediately behind it rise steeply.

4.28 Tanjung Weduar is a good radar target at a distance of 25

miles.

4.28 Anchorage.—In as much as the E coast of the island is

steep-to and subject to winds during the monsoons, it affords

no good anchorage at these times. During the change periods

from the Northwest Monsoon to Southeast Monsoon, however,

when there are no such winds, vessel may anchor, in depths of

46 to 73m, sand and stones, close to the shore.

4.29 Weduar Roads (Wedoear Roads) (5°50'S.,

132°56'E.) is an indentation in the coast 2 miles NW of Tanjung Obahan. A conspicuous house is on the shore of the bight

close S of Kampung Weduar. The preferred anchorage during

the Northwest Monsoon is in a depth of 29 to 40m, with the

conspicuous house bearing 235°. An 8.8m shoal, not marked

by discoloration, lies about 0.3 mile SE of the village.

4.29 Kampung Ohoiwait (5°45'S., 132°57'E.), about 4.5 miles N

of Kampung Weduar is on a high, steep, conspicuous hill. In

the middle of the village is a sacred spot called “Woma,” which

is surrounded by a low brick wall.

Kampung Jamtimur (Jamtimoeri) (5°36'S., 133°06'E.), has

a small but conspicuous church. Kampung Kilwaer, 1.5 miles

NNE of Kampung Jamtimur, can easily be recognized by a

flagstaff at the village.

4.29 Small craft can find good anchorage during the Northwest

Monsoon in an indentation in the coastal reef off the village of

Kampung Hollat (5°30'S., 133°08'E.). The two churches in

the village are good landmarks. The Roman Catholic Church,

without a tower, stands close N of the highest point of the builtup area; the spire of the Protestant Reformed Church stands

0.25 mile N of it.

4.29 Vessels approaching the village should steer 276° for the

southernmost church, which leads through the opening in the

reef, then anchor, in 5.8m ,about 0.15 mile off the reef with

Tanjung Nuwahan (Noewahan), 4 miles SSW, bearing 196°.

The reefs are fairly well marked by discoloration. Copra is

exported but cargo transfer from lighters is only possible

during the Northwest Monsoon.

4.29 Kampung Bandan Eli (3°25'S., 133°09'E.), 4 miles S of

Tanjung Ngarmin, may be recognized by its conspicuous

mosque and a large number of dark red-roofed buildings. This

village is concealed from vessels coming from the S by Tanjung Kawas, a high rocky point with a small rounded summit,

about 3 miles S of the village.

Ur Roads (Oer Roads) (5°22'S., 133°10'E.) is a small inlet

5.5 miles S of the N end of the island. The Wer Ur, a small

stream emptying into the inlet, flows through the valley across

which Watnus, a sharp peak, 617m high, can be seen on a clear

day. This peak in line with the center of the valley leads to the

anchorage. In case of poor visibility, vessels can approach on a

WNW or NW course by steering for a wooden bridge that

crosses the Wer Ur just N of the village. The preferred anchorage is near the reef, in a depth of about 55m, sand, 0.25

mile offshore.

4.30 The N coast of Pulau Kai Besar is lower than the E

coast, but it is characterized by spurs of the mountains that

project out from the shore. Tanjung Borang (5°17'S.,

133°09'E.), the northernmost point of the island, is the most

important landmark on this coast. It is usually the first point of

land to be sighted by vessels approaching Kepulauan Kei from

the N. An unexploded ordnance is reported to be about 3.25

miles NE of Tanjung Borang. The mountains to the S of the

point are usually enveloped in clouds. Between Tanjung Oratu

(Oratoe), the NE extremity of the island, and Tanjung Borang

the coast is generally rocky although there are a few sandy

beaches. This area within the 10m curve, which extends out

nearly 1 mile, is decidedly foul. On the shore 0.5 mile NW of

Tanjung Oratu there is a conspicuous sandy spot.

Labuan Dabu (Laboean Daboe) (5°17'S., 133°09'E.), just

SE of Tanjung Borang, is a channel in the coastal reef. A 5.8m

shoal is in the approach at the N end of the channel. Good

anchorage is available with local knowledge, in depths of 7.3 to

14.6m.

4.30 Teluk Hoh (5°17'S., 133°09'E.), between Tanjung Borang

and Tanjung Vorwahan, is an elongated indentation of the coast
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 71

Pub. 164

that penetrates the coast for about 0.75 mile. The navigable

width of the bay is only about 137m. The bay is fronted by a

bar with a least known depth of 7m. Anchorage is available

with local knowledge, in depths of 9.1 to 11.9m, sand, int all

seasons; proceed to the anchorage by passing along the

Tanjung Borang side of the bay at a distance of about 183m

offshore. A number of houses built on piles on the W side of

the bay are seasonally occupied.

4.30 Teluk Wair (5°17'S., 133°08'E.), between Tanjung Borang

and Tanjung Patingru (Patingroe), the NW extremity of the

island and about 9.1m high, affords safe anchorage to vessels

with local knowledge during the Southeast Monsoon, in a

depth about 40m, at a moderate distance offshore. Kampung

Wair is at the head of the bay. The shore is rocky and steep,

except at the head of the bay.

4.31 The W coast of Pulau Kai Besar has a wider coastal

reef than the E coast and, therefore, affords better anchorage.

The shore is sufficiently steep-to to enable vessels to come

rather close inshore. Teluk Elat (5°38'S., 132°59'E.), about

midway along this coast is, from a navigational standpoint, the

most important place on the island.

Tanjung Patingru (Patingroe) (5°17'S., 133°07'E.) is a

rocky cape, about 9.1m high, consisting of a mountain spur.

Niv Rock, close N of the cape, is an aid in identification. From

Tanjung Patingru to the village of Kampung Hor (5°21'S.,

133°05'E.), 4.5 miles to the SSW, the coast is fairly high and

characterized by gray rock with many white dots. Woho, a

mountain 4 miles S of Tanjung Patingu rises almost vertically

to a height of 566m. S of this mountain the land slopes gradually toward the middle of the island, but the coast continues

rocky with a few conspicuous points among which are Tanjung Ohiserkum (5°23'S., 133°04'E.) and Tanjung Hebri,

about 4 miles farther S. South of the latter point the mountains

are farther from the coast.

4.31 There are more villages on the W than on the E coast of the

island. They are easily recognized; some have conspicuous

white mosques.

4.31 Anchorage may be obtained anywhere along this coast N of

Teluk Elat during the Southeast Monsoon, in a depth of 44m;

there are, however, heavy squalls during that period.

4.31 Caution.—Several detached steep-to dangers are off the

coast between Tanjung Hebri and the entrance to Teluk Elat.

The channel between these dangers and the coast is deep and

clear.

Mituwat (Mitoewat) (5°30'S., 133°01'E.), the northernmost

of the dangers, is about 1 mile long and 0.75 mile wide; it

partly dries but is completely covered 1 hour before HW.

Mitduan (Mitdoean) (5°31'S., 133°00'E.), a rocky shoal

close S of Mituwat, is about 1.75 miles long and partly uncovers.

4.31 A 2.7m shoal is 1.25 miles S of the S end of Mitduan and 2.5

miles NW of Tanjung Jarleier (5°36'S., 133°01'E.).

4.31 Mitnaloa (4°36'S., 133°01'E.), a crescent-shaped reef about

1 mile long, is abreast of Tanjung Jarleier. The S part of this

reef is awash at HW. The reef is in the approach to Teluk Elat.

An 11.9m shoal is close N, and a depth of 9.6m is 0.5 mile SW,

respectively, from Mitnaloa.

4.32 Teluk Elat (5°38'S., 132°59'E.), about midway along

the W coast of Pulau Kei Besar, is a roughly circular inlet with

a diameter of about 1.5 miles. Close to the E side of the bay are

two small islets, Nuhu Ru and Krad, connected by a reef that

projects from the shore of the bay. Farther S is the larger Sfat

Islet, which is surrounded by an extensive reef and is connected with the S shore of the bay by a shore bank. Close off

the W entrance point is the much larger Nuhu (Noehoe) Jaan

island, 20m high. A beacon stands about 0.15 mile off the NE

point of Nuhu Jaan and a 9.4m shoal lies about 1 mile NNW of

the same point; another beacon stands midway along the E side

of Nuhu Jaan. In the bay itself there are several rocky patches,

but some are marked and entrance into the bay is not difficult.

4.32 Tides—Currents.—At Teluk Elat, the highest water level

occurs in February and March, and the lowest in July, August,

and September. The maximum rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 2.5m above and 0.2m below

mean sea level.

4.32 Aspect.—The principal landmarks in the area are Warhuk

(Warhoek) and Sicek (Sitjek), mountains that have been

previously described in paragraph 4.26, and a light green hill

on Sfat Islet that can be seen for a considerable distance from

seaward. There are numerous coconut trees in the vicinity of

the bay.

4.32 It should be noted that foul ground extends about 0.15 mile

outside the beacon NE of Nuhu Jaan and a 4m patch lies about

1 mile ESE of the N end of Nuhu Jaan. This patch is marked by

a black beacon. The inner black beacon on the W edge of the

reef is about 0.15 mile from the W extremity of Sfat islet. The

topmark is reported missing on this beacon. A 5.9m shoal

extends about 0.6 mile from the S end of Nuhu Jaan and should

be noted when entering Elat Bay.

4.32 The passage between the S end of Nuhu Yaan and the main

island is only for small boats with local knowledge.

4.32 Anchorage.—Teluk Elat affords anchorage in all seasons of

the year. During the Southeast Monsoon, the best anchorage is

in a depth of about 26m, sand, W of the pier at Kampung

Banda Elat. During the Northwest Monsoon, the preferred anBeacon at Teluk Elat
72 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

chorage is in a depth of 24 to 29m, sand and coral, W of Nuhu

Jaan, with Kampung Raharin, which is close SW of Kampung

Elat, bearing about S.

4.32 Directions.—Vessels approaching Teluk Elat from the N

should sight the light green hill on Sfat Islet and steer for it

until the beacons are identified. Once the aids are identified,

there should be no difficulty in proceeding to either of the anchorages.

4.33 Kampung Banda Elat (5°39'S., 132°59'E.), on the S

shore of Teluk Elat, is the most important village of Pulau Kai

Besar and is the center for the exportation of copra. A 302m

long stone pier projects out to a depth of 4.9m close NW of the

village. A red-roofed shed is on the pier. Another small pier

with a flagpole at its root and E of the stone pier is reported to

be in disrepair. A light is shown from a structure in the village.

Good drinking water and provisions can be obtained here. The

large village of Kampung Butun (Boetoen) is close E of the

village.

4.33 Between Teluk Elat and Kampung Werka (5°42'S.,

132°57'E.), 3.75 miles to the SSW, the coast is rocky cliffs that

have a sheer rise from the sea to a height of about 21.3m.

Tanjung Laer Mayoran, 2.75 miles SW of Teluk Elat, can be

recognized by a waterfall that plunges directly into the sea. A

0.5m shoal lies 0.5 mile off the coast abreast of Kampung

Watoear. The coast from Kampung Werka to Kampung Larat,

6.5 miles SSW, is low and gently sloping. A reef which breaks,

with a 1.8m patch close N, is 3.5 miles N from Kampung Larat

and about 1.5 miles offshore. There is a 18.3m patch about 1

mile N of this reef. Abreast of Kampung Nerong, 5 miles S of

Kampung Werka, is a small inlet suitable only for small craft.

The point at Kampung Larat is easily recognized by Aran, a

rock fringed by a drying reef. There are several charted shoal

spots along this stretch of coast.

4.33 The coast between Kampung Larat and Kampung Fer trends

SSW for 9.25 miles with several indentations, the largest of

which is 5.5 miles SSW of Kampung Larat. The most prominent marks along this part of the coast are a conspicuous white

rock close to the shore 2.25 miles SW of Kampung Larat;

Kampung Hoiko, on the shore of a small inlet whose sides rise

almost vertically from the sea; Duvin (Doefin) Islet, on the

shore reef close SW of Kampung Hoiko; and rocky Rerean

Islet, on a reef 4 miles S of Duvin Islet. Very heavy squalls are

experienced along this stretch of coast during the Southeast

Monsoon.

4.34 Fer Roads (5°57'S., 132°51'E.) is an open anchorage

3.75 miles NNE of the S tip of Pulau Kai Besar. On the N side

of the anchorage is a white sandy shore bank that remains dry

at all stages of the tide. From this bank a tongue, with a least

depth of 2.1m, extends S about 0.35 mile, forming within the

shore bank a bight 0.2 mile wide, with depths of 10 to 29m.

Vessels should approach the anchorage with the mosque in

Kampung Fer bearing between E and SE and anchor in any

depth on that bearing.

4.34 Kampung Fer is built on two terraces on a slope overlooking

the roadstead. Kampung Langgear, surrounded by coconut

trees and with a conspicuous mosque, is on the beach about 0.5

mile S of Kampung Fer.

4.34 Tanjung Weduar (6°01'S., 132°50'E.), the S extremity of

Pulau Kai Besar, consists of vertical cliffs about 52m high.

4.34 Selat Nerong, the strait between the Pulau KaiKecil group

and Pulau Kai Besar, is deep and clear with no difficulties to

navigation. The least width of the strait, 4 miles, is between the

villages of Kampung Abean on Pulau Kai Kecil and Kampung

Hoiko on Pulau Kai Besar. Approaching from S or SW the

high land of Nuhu Cut will first be sighted, resembling two

coffins; a very large one being formed by mountains and hills

between the village of Fer, 4 miles NNE of Tanjung Weduar,

the S steep point of the island and the mountains 8 miles NNE.

Nothing is known of the currents in the strait, but it is presumed that they are very weak.

Kepulauan Aru

4.35 Kepulauan Aru (6°10'S., 134°30'E.), about 65 miles

E of Pulau Kai Besar and about the same distance SW of the

nearest coast of New Guinea, are generally low and very

uniformly wooded. The group consists of five large islands,

separated by very narrow and shallow channels, and numerous

smaller islands. The larger islands are Pulau Kola, Pulau

Wokum, Pulau Kobroor, Pulau Maikoor, Pulau Koba, and

Pulau Trangan. The smaller islands are grouped around these

five; most of them are connected to the principal islands by

reefs, but some are connected by navigable channels. The

highest elevations in the group, 89m and 73m, are located, respectively, near the S end of Pulau Trangan and on Pulau Karawair-Besar (Great Karawaira Island), which is E of the N end

of Pulau Kobroor.

4.35 The reefs can generally be safely approached on soundings.

Since the water in their vicinity is not clear the reefs are generally not marked by discoloration. Between the reefs there are

passages through which small craft can reach the villages and

the rivers and channels that separate the principal islands. It is

not possible to place a definite limit on the danger zone around

these islands, but is it not advisable to approach within the 20m

curve.

Mataholar—W coast of Nuhu Cut
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 73

Pub. 164

4.35 There is little uniformity in the names given by the natives to

the various islands, points, and channels of this group; some

places are known by as many as six or seven different names.

4.35 These islands are generally very sparsely settled. The population in general is on the E side of the principal islands. Although there are many different tongues and dialects on the

islands, Malayan is generally understood.

4.35 Most of the villages on the E coast are built on cliffs and can

be reached only by means of flights of steps. The principal occupations on the islands are agriculture, hunting, fishing and

pearl diving. Dobo, situated on the NW side of Pulau Wamar,

one of the smaller islands on the NE side of the group, is the

only port of any importance in the group and all trade is concentrated there.

4.35 Tides—Currents.—The tide at the village of Dobo will be

discussed later. HW occurs simultaneously on opposite sides of

this group of islands in places of the same latitude, but the time

of the HW becomes progressively later from N to S. HW at the

S end of the group is 2 hours later than at Dobo. Throughout

the group the amount of rise and fall of tide is about the same

as at Dobo.

4.35 Tidal currents are perceptible 15 to 20 miles from Kepulauan

Aru. In the open sea the flood current sets to the E and the ebb

to the W; the maximum drift is about 2 knots. The flood and

ebb currents, respectively, become established 1 to 2 hours

after the H and LW at the shore.

4.35 Along the W side of the group the flood current sets S and

the ebb N, with a maximum drift of 1.5 knots. The duration of

the ebb current is considerably longer than that of the flood. In

the mouths of the narrow channels between the islands there is

a very strong ebb current lasting practically as long as that tide,

followed by a strong incoming current during a few hours with

the rising tide. The same condition exists at Dobo Roads,

except that there is a brief period of slack water.

4.35 The flood current sets SE and E around the S end of the

group. Off Tanjung Ngaburoamlu the S extremity of the group,

this current has a maximum drift of three knots.

4.35 Along the N side of the group the flood current sets SE at a

rate of about 2.5 knots as far as Kepulauan Jedan (Djedan

Eilanden) where it turns SSE and continues in that direction

along the E side of Pulau Wokam and Pulau Kobroor to Pulau

Mariri, about midway along the E side of Pulau Kobroor. At

that position it meets the flood current that sets ENE from the S

end of the group. Turning with that current it sets back N along

the E coast. At the junction of these two currents, a rotary

movement is set up toward the shore when the tide is rising and

away from the shore on the falling tide. North of the N end of

Pulau Penambulai (6°17'S., 134°52'E.) the ebb current sets

NNE and N as far as Pulau Konan (5°34'S., 134°46'E.), a

small islet 44 miles to the N, where it turns to the NNW. North

of Kepulauan Jedan its direction is NW by N. South of the N

end of Pulau Penambulai, the ebb current follows the line of

offshore reefs to the S. Off the entrances to the channels

separating the islands the current is deflected to the SE and S.

4.35 Off the E coast, the direction of the tidal currents is considerably affected by the currents that set through the channels

separating the islands. The currents setting out of these channels exert much more influence on the coastal currents than do

those setting into the channels.

4.35 Heavy rips caused by the irregularity of the bottom and giving the impression of the existance of dangerous shoals have

been observed at the height of the tidal currents off the N and S

ends of the group, particularly SW of Kultubai Selatan

(6°52'S., 134°43'E.) and the S and W extremity of Pulau Jeudin

(Djoeedin).

4.35 Caution.—A reef of indefinite size has been reported S of

Kepulauan Aru within a 5 mile radius of position 8°33'S,

134°26'E. This reef is unexamined.

4.35 A bank, with a depth of 22m, has been reported about 36

miles SW of Tanjung Ngabordamlu, the southernmost extremity of Kepulauan Aru; a bank with depths of less than 37m

extends about 33 miles SSE and 36 miles ESE from the same

point. A depth of 31m is close to the S extremity of this bank.

Another bank with depths of less than 37m extends E from the

E side of Kepulauan Aru, but the E limit of this bank has not

been defined. A least charted depth of 20.1m is about 105

miles ENE of Tanjung Ngaboradamlu in position 6°44'S,

135°54'E. A detached bank,with a depth of 29m, is in position

7°28'S, 136°17'E, about 49 miles SSE of this last depth. An

incomplete survey showed depths between 9.1m and 20m

within a 14-mile radius of position 8°24'S, 135°45'E. Kolff

Bank (7°00'S., 136°51'E.) has a least depth of 14.6m; Le Chur

Bank (8°30'S., 136°15'E.) has a least depth of 24m.

4.35 A 6.4m shoal and a 9.1m shoal lie 34 miles WSW and 46

miles WNW, respectively, from Tanjung Ngabordamlu.

4.36 North side of Kepulauan Aru.—Pulau Warilau

(Warilaoe) (5°22'S., 134°32'E.) the largest island N of Pulau

Kola, is uniformly covered with tall trees. A small village of

the same name is on the SW side of the island. The island has

been reported to be a good radar target at a distance of 19

miles. A light is shown from the northernmost tip of the island.

Pulau Toba, a small islet with an extensive reef extending from

its N, W, and SW sides, is 1.5 miles W of Pulau Warilau and is

covered with tall trees. Ngoba is a small crescent-shaped islet

on a wide reef extending NW from Pulau Warilau, its trees are

not as high as those of Pulau Toba. A dangerous wreck, reported (1980) to lie approximately 8 miles NW of Ngoba, can

best be seen on the chart. A detached reef with a small grasscovered islet is between Pulau Toba and Ngoba. Another

detached reef with a similar grass-covered islet is 1.2 miles

NNE of Tanjung Watulaijuring (Watoeleidjoering) (5°20'S.,

134°34'E.) the N extremity of Pulau Warilau. A sand bank that

covers at HW is on the shore bank E of Pulau Warilau and NW

of Kepulauan Jedan.

Kepulauan Jedan (Djedan Eilanden) (5°23'S., 134°40'E.),

consists of a group of uninhabited islands, the larger of which

are low but well wooded. Pulau Jedan (5°23'S., 134°41'E.),

the northernmost island of the group, is the most important

landmark in this part of Kepulauan Aru. The trees on this

island are about 51m high. In daytime the island can be seen at

a distance of 13 miles. The reefs on which these islands lie are

intersected by several tortuous channels through which the

tidal currents are strong when the reefs begin to uncover. Pulau

Lutur (Loetoer), 1.25 miles SW of Pulau Jedan, has a small

summit that is slightly above the surrounding foliage. Santigi, a

group of five low mangrove-covered islets, are on the reef that

extends E from Pulau Lutur (Loetoer). Surat Islet (Soerat), a

small atoll-shaped sandbank, is on an extensive reef S of Pulau
74 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

Jedan. Pulau Belading, the largest island of this group is close

W of Pulau Lutur; a narrow channel separates the reefs on

which these last two islands lie.

4.36 A dangerous sunken rock is in position 5°17'S, 134°45'E

about 6.75 miles NE of Pulau Jedan, outside of the 20m curve,;

a reported depth of 5.5m is about 3.8 miles W of this rock.

There is a shallow spot with a least depth of 5.9m, outside the

20m curve, 4.5 miles WNW of Toba Island.

4.36 A group of eight or nine rock islets densely covered with

vegetation are SE of Pulau Warilau; the southernmost is named

Tapusur (Tapoesoer).

4.37 Watoe (5°24'S., 134°28'E.), a deep channel in which

there are no dangers, is between Pulau Warilau and the N side

of Pulau Kola, the northernmost of the principal islands of the

group. The reefs on either side are generally marked by

discoloration. The Tiga Islets are three high thickly-wooded

islets on the shore of this channel close off Pulau Kola.

Klipklip Watu is a small, unsurveyed channel that leads from N

close along the SE shore of Pulau Warilau into Sungi Kola

Watu. The E approach to Sungi Kola Watu is either N or S of

Tapusur, but the S channel is suitable only for small craft. The

N part of this channel has not been completely surveyed. In the

N channel there are general depths of 4.1 to 17.8m, but there is

a 3.9m shoal in mid-channel about 0.8 mile S of the SE end of

Pulau Belading. The edges of the reefs along this channel are

generally marked by discoloration. The channel leads NW to a

point abreast the W end of Pulau Belading and then SSW along

the E shore of Pulau Lafusa, an islet about 0.8 mile W of

Tapusur. This part of the channel, in which there is a least

midchannel depth of 6.8m, joins Sungi Kola Watu SW of Pulau

Lafusa. Local knowledge is necessary.

4.38 West side of Kepulauan Aru.—Except for the S part

of Pulau Trangan, which is hilly and has a sheer rise from the

sea, the W side of the islands of Kepulauan Aru are low and

uniformly covered with dense woods. There are no landmarks

that can be used to fix the position of a vessel along this coast.

The mouths of the various rivers and channels and the more or

less protruding section of the islands are of use to vessels

passing close along the shore. Inside the 10m curve there are

numerous reefs. The bottom along this coast is regular, except

along the S part where soundings can be used as a guide.

Vessels can anchor outside the 10m curve in sand almost anywhere along this coast.

4.38 Pulau Kola (5°28'S., 134°33'E.), the northernmost of the

main islands of Kepulauan Aru, is low and densely wooded.

Sungi Kola Watu, previously discussed in paragraph 4.37,

separates Pulau Kola from Pulau Warilau. The island is

intersected by several channels and creeks of various depths.

The two largest channels are Sungi Marjina which opens into

the E part of Sungi Kola Watu, and Sungi Marlassi, which is

entered on the E side of the island. Sungi Sisirwatu, which

limits the S side of Pulau Kola and separates it from Pulau

Wokam is said to be suitable only for small craft. Tidal currents

rush through the channel with great force. At its W end the

channel is narrow and tortuous and has formed a sort of delta

on which there are numerous islets and drying flats.

Buar Island (Boear Island) (5°26'S., 134°27'E.), separated

from the NW end of Pulau Kola by a narrow channel, is similar

to that island in that it is low and densely wooded. A drying

reef extends nearly 0.75 mile from the NW side of the island. A

3m reef about 0.5 mile in diameter is 2 miles SW of the SW

extremity of Buar Island.

4.39 Pulau Wasir (5°31'S., 134°15'E.), the northwesternmost of the Kepulauan Aru group, is about 11 miles WSW of

Pulau Buar. It is rocky and somewhat higher in the N part than

in the S part. Along the W side of the island, which can be

approached rather closely, there are four large wooded rocks.

The northernmost of these rocks can be recognized at a

considerable distance offshore. Java Reef, a 15.8m shoal, is

3.75 miles N of the N end of Pulau Wasir. Selat Wasir, the strait

separating Pulau Wasir and Pulau Ujir, has general depths of

18.3m, but near mid-channel at the NE end there are two shoals

that make navigation rather difficult. Over the E shoal, 1 mile

NW of the N end of Pulau Ujir, there is a depth of 4.9m; the

other shoal, 0.75 mile W of the E shoal, has a least depth of

5.5m. This strait is navigable by vessels drawing less than 4m.

Pulau Ujir (Pulau Oedjir) (5°36'S., 134°17'E.), just outside

a bight of Pulau Wokam and 3 miles SE of Pulau Wasir, is 7

miles long NE-SW, and 1.25 to 3 miles wide. The N part is

higher than the S. A sand bank, dry at all stages of the tide, is

on the drying shore reef SW of Tanjung Tutupano (Toetoepano), the W extremity of Pulau Ujir. Reefs extend 0.8 mile

from the SE coast and a depth of 0.9m is about 1.4 miles N of

the NE end of Udjir. the W extremity of Pulau Ujir.

4.39 The W side of Pulau Wokam, the largest island of the Kepulauan Aru group, between the entrances to the rivers Sungi

Sisir Watu and Sungi Waliramai, is bordered by a reef about

0.75 mile wide which dries in places. Sungi Waliramai is

shallow and has Lewakai Islet off its mouth. The shore in the

vicinity of Tanjung Samang, S of Pulau Ujir, is rocky in places

and is light gray in color. Between this point and Tanjung

Malakafani, the W extremity of Pulau Wokam, the coast is

fringed by a reef 0.75 mile wide. Several villages on the N part

of this stretch of coast are nearly concealed by trees. The

channel between Pulau Ujir and Pulau Wokam contains several

dangerous reefs and its use is not advised. Vessels that do use

the passage usually await low tide.

4.39 Pulau Wamar (5°48'S., 134°12'E.), close S of the westernmost projection of Pulau Wokam, is low, thickly wooded, and

fringed by a drying bank except at its NW extremity, where

there is a drying reef. The town Dobo is on the NE extremity of

the island. On the coast just S of Tanjung Ular (Oelar), the NW

extremity of the island, there are three conspicuous rocks, and

on the reef near Tanjung Batudua (Batoe Doea), the SW extremity of the island, there are two similar rocks.

4.40 Dobo Harbor (5°45'S., 134°11'E.), the limits of of

which is between the coast of Pulau Wokam and the NE side of

Pulau Waram, are lines drawn 045° from Tanjung Ular and

225° from Tanjung Merukujuring. The harbor is low and rocky.

The Pulau Wokam shore of the harbor is mostly covered with

mangroves. The width of the channel between the 10m curves

is about 0.5 mile at the W entrance and about 0.3 mile abreast

the town of Dobo. The area between these curves and the shore

is occupied principally by broad drying shore banks. The sandy

point on which Dobo stands can be approached closely. The

water in the harbor is so muddy that discoloration is no guide
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 75

Pub. 164

to dangers except those that dry at LW. Shoals, some of which

dry, are in the channel about 1.25 miles E of Dobo.

4.40 The least depth in the channel to Dobo is 9.3m and is located

N of Tanjung Ular. There are depths of 20 to 46m in the anchorage.

4.40 The most prominent feature in the vicinity of the harbor is

the light structure on Tanjung Ular, from which a light is

shown. Another light is occasionally shown on the head of the

pier at Dobo.

4.40 A submerged pile marked by a buoy is on the S side of the

fairway about 1.5 miles E of Tanjung Ular.

4.40 A beacon is on the shore bank on the S side of the fairway

about 0.6 mile WNW of the light post at Dobo. A partiallysubmerged wreck lies 0.5 mile W of the light at Dobo.

4.40 Tides—Currents.—At Dobo the highest water level occurs in

February and March, the lowest in July, August, and September.

The maximum rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 2.5m above and 0.2m below mean sea level.

4.40 Off the entrance to Dobo Harbor, the flood current sets to the

S, the ebb to the N. During the Southeast Monsoon, the flood

current is weak, but the ebb current has a velocity of 1.5 knots

and lasts longer than the flood; the ebb current is sometimes

strong at the anchorage off Dobo.

4.40 Directions.—Approaching from W, four openings in the

coast will be seen for a considerable distance; the third from

the N is the entrance to Dobo harbor. Closer in the light structure on Tanjung Ular will be seen. A vessel should enter with

the flagstaff at Dobo or, if this cannot be distinguished, the

northernmost building, a large black shed with a zinc roof, in

line with the white beacon bearing 116°. This will lead over the

S extremity of the bank extending S of Tanjung Malakafani.

The beacon is sometimes difficult to identify. When the light

structure at Tanjung Ular bears 220°, steer 101° until Tanjung

Fanadjuring (5°48'S., 134°19'E.) is seen midway between

Dobo and Tanjung Merukujuring bearing 115°. This leads to

the anchorage, in depths of 20 to 46m, near the pier. The drying

banks on each side of the channel may not be marked by discoloration.

4.41 Dobo (5°45'S., 134°13'E.), on a small sandy point on

the NE side of Pulau Wamar, is the principal port in the Kepulauan Aru group. A 33.5m long pier, with a depth of 3.5m at its

head, is used by local trading craft; it was reported in poor

condition. An oil jetty is situated 4 miles S of Dobo, on the SE

side of Wamar. 

4.41 There is a small hospital and a doctor. Some provisions are

available.

Between Tanjung Malakafani, the W extremity of Pulau

Wokam, and Tanjung Fatujuring (6°00'S., 134°08'E.), the

NW extremity of Pulau Maikoor, the irregular coast forms a

roughly rectangular unnamed bay about 17 miles long and 8 to

10 miles wide, in the NW corner of Pulau Wamar, which has

been previously described in paragraph 4.39. The entrance to

the unimportant river, Sungi Tunguwatu, is at the NE corner of

the bay and the entrances to the rivers, Sungi Manumbai and

Sungi Workai, are near the SE corner. The E shore of the bay N

of Sungi Manumbai is irregular in outline, with numerous

points and bights; between Sungi Manumbai and Sungi Workai

the coast is rocky, with several small islets close off near the

entrances to the river channels. The S part of the bay is somewhat higher and has rocky points in places. Between Tanjung

Meijuring (6°01'S., 134°13'E.), about midway along the S

shore, and Tanjung Fatujuring there is a small unimportant

unnamed bay partly closed by a reef with a depth of 1.8m.

4.41 Pulau Meirang (5°50'S., 134°17'E.) and Lomar are two

islets in the N part of the bay close off Pulau Wokam. Pulau

Babi (5°55'S., 134°09'E.), on the W side of the bay between

Pulau Wamar and Tanjung Fatujuring, is low but covered with

high trees; it is easily recognized by three rocks on the shore

reef close of the SW extremity of the island. Several dangers

with depths of less than 0.9m are within a 3.25 mile radius SW,

W, and NE of Tanjung Toardefete (5°55'S., 134°17'E.). A

rock with a least depth of 1.8m is about 2.75 miles WNW of

the same point.

4.41 There are so many dangers in the N part of the bay that local

knowledge is needed for navigation.

4.41 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be obtained, in 20m, in the

bay about 1 mile E of Tanjung Fatujuring and E of a jetty on

the W side of the bay. Enter the bay with the E end of Pulau

Babi bearing 000° astern and a rock at the head of the bay

bearing 180° ahead. When the white house on the jetty bears

258° steer for it on that bearing and anchor when Tanjung Fatujuring bears 323°. There is a reef off the W side of the bay

about 1 mile SSE of Tanjung Fatujuring which is marked by a

beacon. A 2.7m shoal is 1.5 miles NW of Tanjung Fatujuring.

A 1.8m shoal lies 1.75 miles E of Tanjung Fatujuring.

4.42 Sungi Manumbai (6°01'S., 134°17'E.) is the most

important of the channels through the Kepulauan Aru group. It

is 28 miles long and has a least depth of 5.5m. Because the E

part of the channel has not been surveyed, local knowledge is

necessary for its navigation.

4.42 The flood tidal currents set into the channel at both the E and

W ends and the ebb current sets outward. The average velocity

of the currents through the mouths is 1.5 to 2.5 knots.

4.42 In the approach to the W entrance to Sungi Manumbai there

is a bank with a least depth of 4.5m, but there is a channel N

and E with a least depth of 5.8m leading to the entrance. A

drying reef, extending from Tanjung Belingaratu, the N entrance point of Sungi Manumbai, should be given a wide berth.

The village of Kampung Manumbai, on the S side of the entrance and off which there is a rock covered with light-green

vegetation, is a good mark and can be passed close aboard. A

conspicuous white rocky patch is close E of the village. The

shore is rock bound in this vicinity. About 3 miles E of the

village there is a bight on the S side. Two islets in the bight are

thickly covered with vegetation.

4.42 Directions.—After entering Sungi Manumbai, steer a midchannel course as far as the above-mentioned bight, then the

best water, from 9.1 to 10m, is close to the N shore until past

the mouth of Sungi Marirremaar, about 4 miles E of the village

of Kampung Manumbai. Elsewhere, except at the entrance, the

depths are over 10m and the channel is free of dangers. A

waterfall is on the N shore about 3 miles farther E, past the entrance of Sungi Marirremaar. Near the entrance of Sungi Api

Api, on the S shore, about 4 miles E of Sungi Marirremaar,

there is a noticeable hillock. There is another hillock, with a

conspicuous tree and vegetation, on a point on the S shore,

close W of the position where the river trends E for a short

distance. Rocks are close to both shores in places.
76 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

4.42 About 1.5 miles W of the mouth of Sungi Dosi, in which

there are some islets and which is about 9 miles ENE of Sungi

Api Api, there is a drying rock which must be passed on the N

side. Beyond the mouth of Sungi Feraun, on the N shore about

2 miles ENE of Sungi Dosi, the N shore should be hugged, but

thereafter the S shore should be closed by crossing between

drying mud banks in a least depth of 5.5m.

4.43 Sungi Workai (6°03'S., 134°15'E.), separating Pulau

Koboor and Pulau Maikoor, can be used by vessels of moderate

draft as far as Pulau Nyamuk (Njamoek), about 4 miles above

the W entrance. The depths are about 4.9m to the E entrance,

but at this E entrance there is a least depth of 1.8m, which

limits through passage to small boats. Local knowledge is

essential.

4.43 Pulau Maikoor (6°13'S., 134°15'E.), long and narrow, is

between Sungi Workai on the NE and Sungi Maikoor on the

SW. The island is flat and thickly wooded. The W coast of the

island between Tanjung Fatujuring (6°00'S., 134°08'E.) and

the entrance to Sungi Maikoor, 8 miles to the S, is fronted by a

sandy beach. Sungi Beloide, an unimportant stream discharging into the sea 4 miles S of Tanjung Fatujuring, dries at

LW. A bank extending out from the mouth of the stream has

depths of 0.9m.

4.43 A bank, which dries in places, extends about 1.5 miles W of

the W shore of Pulau Maikoor and detached shoals with depths

of 6.9 to 9.1m are within a mile farther seaward.

4.43 Sungi Maikoor (6°09'S., 134°06'E.) has a broad, deep

entrance and can safely be navigated on soundings at least as

far as the village of Taberfane, 2.5 miles above Tanjung Ngoni

(6°10'S., 134°05'E.), the S entrance point to the channel. Vessels occasionally call at the village. A large and very steep rock

which uncovers at LW springs is in mid-channel abreast of the

village. The channel above the village appears to be deep, but

is too narrow for vessels.

4.43 Pulau Trangan is the southernmost of the large islands of the

Kepulauan Aru group. The W side of the island is low and a

relatively-wide band of soundings with irregular depths is off

it. The N part of the coast is wooded. Between Tanjung Ngoni

and the entrance to Sungi Serwatu, about 17 miles S, are the

mouths of three small rivers, Sungi Hokmar, Sungi Lutur, and

Sungi Rebi. A light is shown about 2 miles W of Sungi Rebi.

On the shore reef just N of Sungi Rebi are two small islets

which are seen clear of the land when approaching from the S,

but are hard to distinguish from the N approach. 

4.43 Batavia Reefs (6°19'S., 134°00'E.), 10.5 miles SSW of the

entrance to Sungi Maikoor and about 4.5 miles offshore, are

several shoals with depths of 4.5 to 6.7m. There are two

patches here with least depths of 5.5m and 6.8m. These shoals

cannot be distinguished by discoloration.

4.43 There are several 9.1 to 10m shoals W and SW of the

entrance to Sungi Serwatu; the outermost is 6.5 miles offshore.

Soundings give warning of approach to these shoals.

4.44 Sungi Serwatu (6°26'S., 134°06'E.), which divides

Pulau Trangan into two parts has been surveyed only as far as

the mouth of Sungi Loloor, a small tributary about 7.5 miles

above the mouth. The entrance is about 1 mile wide, but it is

fronted by a large bank with depths of 0.3 to 2.4m. A 0.2 mile

wide channel, marked by lighted buoys, having a least depth of

4.9m leads over this bank. The monsoons are reported to cause

this channel to shift. Inside the bar the channel is wider and

deeper, but entering vessels should favor the W shore to avoid a

drying reef projecting from the shore opposite Tanjung Derehi.

The shores are alternately limestone rocks and low mangrovecovered land. The river affords sheltered anchorage for small

craft.

4.44 The W coast of Pulau Trangan S of the entrance to Sungi

Serwatu as far as the village of Kampung Ngaibor, 16 miles to

the S, is low with a sandy beach about 91m wide and a wide

bank of irregular soundings off of it. The coast is backed by

gently sloping land covered with tall grass and shrubs.

4.44 Kampung Ngaibor (6°43'S., 134°04'E.), situated on a small

plateau, is the largest village on the W side of Pulau Trangan

and is a good landmark. Sungi Ngaibor, the largest freshwater

river in the Kepulauan Aru group, discharges into the sea about

0.75 mile N of the village.

4.44 The coast S of Kampung Ngaibor is low and rocky as far as

Tanjung Lelar (6°46'S., 134°02'E.), the SW point of Kepulauan Aru. From this last point to Tanjung Ngabordamlu, the S

extremity of Pulau Trangan, the coast is rocky and somewhat

higher than to the N. Because it rises steeply from the sea, the

points along it are rather easily recognized. Among the landmarks along this stretch of coast are the mouth of the river

Sungi Tafermaar and Bain Hill, which, although 89m high,

rises only slightly above the other land in the vicinity.

4.44 Tanjung Bain (6°51'S., 134°05'E.) is a good radar target at a

distance of 25 miles.

4.44 Caution.—There are numerous shoals with depths of 2.1 to

10.9m on the bank of soundings between the entrance to Sungi

Serwatu and Tanjung Ngabordamlu. Caution must be exercised

by vessels proceeding inside the 20m curve. Careful soundings

should be taken because they give a fair indication of the approach to the shoal areas. A 5.8m shoal is about 2.5 miles

WSW of Tanjung Bain, midway between that point and a large

3.6m shoal off the SE end of Blackburn Bank. This shoal is

directly in the path of vessels coming from N and proceeding

inshore of Blackburn Bank.

4.44 The strong tidal currents, especially those during the ebb,

further add to the difficulty of inshore navigation along the W

and SW coasts of Pulau Trangan because of the unpredictable

manner in which they change direction among the shoals and

reefs.

4.44 A 9.1m shoal, 183m wide, is about 38 miles W of Pulau

Trangan.

4.45 Tanjung Ngabordamlu (6°57'S., 134°11'E.) is a

relatively low rocky point at the S end of Pulau Trangan. On

the drying reef that extends SE from it is a small islet about the

same height as the point. Batu Goyang, a large bare, grayrock,

10m high, is on the shore bank 0.5 mile S of the point. Close E

of this rock is a rock awash. A 2.1m shoal is 1.1 miles SE of

Batu Goyang, and there are several other shoals around Tanjung Ngabordamlu. A 1.4m shoal is reported approximately

1.25 miles S of Tanjung Ngabordamlu. There are usually

strong currents, rips, and high seas over the irregular depths on

the bank of soundings in the vicinity of the point.

4.45 Tanjung Ngabordamlu is a good radar target at a distance of

23 miles.
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 77

Pub. 164

4.45 Blackburn Bank (6°52'S., 133°56'E.), about 8 miles off the

SW end of Pulau Trangan, consists of several detached shoals

with depths of 2.1 to 6.7m with relatively deep water in between. The shallowest part of these detached patches occasionally break. The bank extends, within the 10m curve, for

about 5 miles in a NW-SE direction. An extensive 3.6m shoal

is about 3 miles E of the SE end of Blackburn Bank. There are

other charted shoals between these last two banks and Tanjung

Ngabordamlu, and several 9.1m shoal patches are 4 to 8 miles

S of the shallowest part of Blackburn Bank.

4.45 Because the SW coast of Pulau Trangan has few landmarks

and is frequently obscured, no marks can be given for clearing

the numerous off-lying dangers. The tidal currents are very

strong in the vicinity of the bank and the shoals in the area. It is

also quite probable that the currents cause the shoals to shift

considerably. Accordingly, vessels should give the bank and

the adjacent shoal areas a wide berth.

4.46 East side of Kepulauan Aru.—Except for Pulau

Karaira-besar (Groot Karaweira Island) (5°58'S., 134°50'E.),

which can be recognized with local knowledge at a distance of

20 miles, there are no good landmarks on the E side of Kepulauan Aru. The remaining coast appears as one uniform stretch

of land, and the off-lying islands are difficult to identify from a

distance.

4.46 Caution.—Because of strong currents along this coast, it is

advisable to keep outside the 20m curve.

4.46 The E side of Pulau Kola is rocky but thickly wooded. Kampung Marlassi (5°29'S., 134°39'E.) and Kampung Masidan,

built on a rock 3 miles farther S, are on this coast; from seaward these villages appear as light red spots. A wide reef off

Pulau Kulur, as well as the islets to the S, prevents vessels

approaching closer than 6 miles unless through one of the

narrow channels that cut through the reef. On the reef in many

places there are small clumps of trees and some islets such as

Pulau Binaar, located N of the E entrance to Sungi Sisirwatu.

Two prominent trees are reported about 1.5 miles S of Tanjung

Leitin (5°31'S., 134°41'E.).

4.46 Pulau Konan (5°34'S., 134°46'E.), 5.5 miles SE of Tanjung

Leitin, is an uninhabited, sandy, heavily-wooded, and atollshaped islet, the highest point of which is a small tree on the

NW side. The islet is on the SE part of a large 4.5 mile long

reef. On the reef close off the S and N end of the islets are two

rocks. On a clear day the islet can be seen for a distance of 13

miles and appears as two small trees showing above the horizon.

4.47 Pulau Arar Kula (5°36'S., 134°46'E.), on an extensive reef 2 miles S of Pulau Konan, is a coral and mud bank

dry at all stages of the tide, although it has been reported that

the above-water part of the bank could not be seen either

visually or on radar. There are a few isolated trees on this bank.

The reef on which Pulau Arar Kula stands is separated from the

one extending S from Pulau Kola by a narrow winding channel,

and from Pulau Wokam by a rather wide channel with depths

of 5.8m. The S entrance to the latter channel is foul. The

channels N and S of Pulau Arar Kula are used by small craft

proceeding to Sungi Serwatu, which has already been previously described in paragraph 4.44.

The E coast of Pulau Wokam, like that of Pulau Kola, is

thickly wooded and rocky. Of the several villages along this

coast the most important is Moha, W of Pulau Arar Kula.

These villages are similar to the others on the coast in that they

are built on rocks and appear from seaward as red patches.

4.47 A projecting point, S of Tanjung Komfane (5°39'S.,

134°45'E.), can be seen for a considerable distance N or S; because of the gaps in the trees on the point, it appears as several

separate islands. A group of trees on the point, the tallest of

which has a conspicuous hammer-shaped top, can be seen from

E or SE for a distance of 15 miles. South of this point is a

wooded islet and two islands named Wodinhun and Wahalaulau, which are thickly wooded. Beyond these islands, the

coast turns W and S and has no recognizable points.

4.47 The remainder of the E coast of Pulau Wokam is divided by

numerous rivers into several islands, the principal being

Aranlau and Sewer. Most of this section of the coast is obscured from seaward by the off-lying islands of Kepulauan

Watuli and Kepulauan Jurisan.

4.47 Caution.—A 3m shoal is 3.75 miles E of Pulau Arar Kula

and a 4.9m shoal is 5.5 miles E of Wodinhun Island.

4.48 Kepulauan Watulai (5°49'S., 134°46'E.) is a large

number of rocky islands on a very extensive reef through

which a few narrow but more or less deep channels give access

to the islands’ villages and coastal villages. Pulau Jursian and

the islets near it may be considered belonging to Kepulauan

Watulai. Pulau Aduar, Pulau Kumul, Pulau Watulai, and Pulau

Jursian are inhabited.

4.48 Rewan (5°43'S., 134°48'E.), the northernmost of the group,

is actually three small wooded islets close together; the southwesternmost is the highest, with the others nothing more than

wooded rocks. These islets are difficult to make out until they

are open of Pulau Aduar and Manien. South of Rewan there is

another large rock.

4.48 Manien (5°43'S., 134°47'E.) is thickly wooded and may be

seen from the N for a distance of 17 miles. The W side, rocky

and higher than the rest of the islet, looks like a point when

seen from N. On the E side there is a sandy beach.

4.48 Pulau Aduar (5°45'S., 134°47'E.), the highest and largest of

the Kepulauan Watulai islands, is covered with tall trees. A

small wooded hill is on the S side of the island. A narrow 2.8m

channel leads to the villages on the island. Ilmamui Island,

close S of Pulau Aduar, is lower than that island, but is thickly

wooded. Ngoab Islet about 0.75 mile SE of Ilmamui Island, is

rocky and covered with low trees; two isolated coconut palms

are conspicuous. There is a flagstaff at the villages of Kabalasiang and Bendjoering.

4.49 Kumul Island (5°47'S., 134°46'E.), 1.5 miles S of

Pulau Aduar, is thickly wooded and slightly elevated at the

center. The SE extremity of the island is a narrow, rocky tongue

of land with a remarkable bare spot with a small clump of

coconut trees. The village of Kampung Kumul, on the SE side

of the island, is reached by a passage through the reef. A flagstaff is at the village. Mangan Island and some small islets are

close S of Kumul Island.

4.49 Watulai Island (5°49'S., 134°47'E.), about 1 mile long, has

a bare patch on its N point similar to that on Kumul Island. The

village, with a flagstaff, is on the E side of the island. A con-
78 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

spicuous clump of trees about 45m high is NW of the village

and forms a mark for navigating the channel through the reef to

the villages of Kampung Kumul and Kampung Watulai. The N

point of the island can be approached by small vessels at LW.

4.49 Pulau Tabar (5°49'S., 134°46'E.), thickly wooded and flat,

is separated from W side of Watulai Island by a narrow

channel. Elel Menalau and Mentai, on an extensive reef SE of

Watulai Island, are rocky islets covered with vegetation. A

group of coconut trees is near a village on the NE side of

Menlau. The village is hard to distinguish from seaward. The

trees on Mentai give the island the appearance of a plume.

Ramje, Waria, and other rocky and wooded islets partly close

the entrance to a bay W of Pulau Tabar. A village on the NE

point of Waria is visible from seaward and is reached by a

winding channel leading through the reefs S of Mentai.

Pulau Jursian (Djoersian) (5°54'S., 134°46'E.), several

rocky wooded islands with several small inlets, are close of the

coast of Pulau Wokam. Only the N part of Pulau Jursian can be

seen from seaward and it is recognized by Kampung Jursian,

built on a rock nearby. Other small islands are off the N part of

the island.

4.50 Channel to Kumul Island and Pulau Watulai.—

About 2.5 miles NE of Watulai Island is the entrance to a

narrow but fairly deep channel leading SW and W toward

Kampung Kumul and Kampung Watulai. The outer edge of the

reef can be approached by soundings. The best anchorage off

the mouth of the channel is in about 5.9m, with the N point of

Kumul Island in range with Ngoab, bearing about 267°, and the

W of the two small Maar Islets (5°57'S., 134°47'E.) in range

with the E extremity of Menalau, bearing 194°. Beyond the

anchorage mentioned above, local knowledge is necessary for

navigating the channel. The channel is only about 137m wide

in places and has a least depth of 4m. The ebb current runs outward with great strength at springs.

Kepulauan Karawaira (5°59'S., 134°51'E.) consists of 13

islands and may be divided into two parts, Karawaira-Watulai

and Karawaira-Mariri. To the former belong Pulau Karawairabesar (Groot Karawaira) and Sabir, lying on a drying reef. The

Karawaira-Marira group is 2 miles S. The southernmost of this

latter group is called Pulau Dorlau, but the others are unnamed.

All of these islands are uninhabited and unhealthy.

4.51 Pulau Karawaira-besar (Groot Karawaira) (5°58'S.,

134°50'E.), the highest land on the E side of the Kepulauan Aru

group, is visible for a distance of 20 miles. It is rocky, thickly

wooded and has several large rocks close to the shore. The

highest tree in the middle of the island has a top like a cross

and is very conspicuous when seen from E to NE. Sabir Islet,

near the edge of the reef 0.75 mile E of Pulau Karawaira-besar,

is small and lower than that island, and because it is nearly

divided by a depression, it appears from some directions as two

islets. Near the SE point of the islet, a rock above water has the

appearance from NE of a lion lying down. The reef on which

both islands are located, and which extends to Pulau Maar on

the W, projects 3.5 miles N from Pulau Karawaira-besar, and

has on it some sand banks that dry at half tide.

4.51 The islands of the Karawaira-Mariri group extend N and S

about 4.5 miles. Pulau Dorlau, the southernmost island, is

covered with vegetation and has two high trees on it. East of

the reef of Karawaira-Mariri, a black coral reef that dries at

LW, has its center 1.5 miles from the E edge of the reef. Some

low isolated trees are on the S part of the reef surrounding

Karawaira Mariri.

4.51 Pulau Maar (5°57'S., 134°47'E.) is actually two small rocky

islets, of which the W is the higher. The E islet when seen from

NE appears as two, but the two parts are connected by a natural

stone bridge.

4.51 East of the reef of Pulau Karawaira-besar and separated from

it by a channel with depths of 5.5 to 6.8m is a reef 8 miles long

in a N-S direction, and 2.5 miles wide at its S end abreast of

Pulau Karawaira-besar, then tapering to a point at its N end

with depths of 2.7 to 4.9m. Off the S part is a small detached

2.1m shoal. The outer edge of the reef is 4.75 miles NE and 4

miles E of Pulau Karawaira-besar and its N end is 4 miles E of

Watulai Island. It may be approached by soundings.

4.51 Batu Kapal (6°04'S., 134°50'E.), about 2.5 miles SSW of

Pulau Dorlau and 4 miles off the coast of Pulau Kobroor, is a

high, partly-wooded rock, which when open of the Pulau Kobroor coast, is a good mark. It is considered sacred by the

natives. The channel N and E of this rock is foul; a 4.5m shoal

is 0.8 mile E. A reef with a small sand bank which is dry at

HW is 3 miles ESE of Pulau Dorlau.

4.52 Channels to Sungi Monumbai.—Small local craft

bound for Sungi Monumbai usually take the channel that leads

N and W of the reef on which Pulau Karawaira-besar is

located, past Pulau Maar, then in a SW direction to the channel

entrance. Another approach leads either N or S of the drying

reef SSE of Pulau Dorlau, S of Batu Kapal, then to the channel.

There is good anchorage S of Batu Kapal. Sungi Monumbai

has been previously described in paragraph 4.42.

4.52 Kepulauan Mariri (6°11'S., 134°51'E.) consists of Pulau

Mariri, Pulau Leer, and several smaller islands, of which Lola

is the southernmost and most important. The group is about 5

miles off the coast of Pulau Kobroor along a NNE-SSW line

and are in great part overgrown with coconut trees. The area

between these islands and Pulau Kobroor is almost entirely

occupied by sand banks and reefs. There are often heavy tide

rips on the shoals between Kepulauan Karawairi and Kepulauan Mariri. On the N side of Pulau Mariri, the N island, there

are two conspicuous coconut trees that can be seen for about 15

miles. Two rocks are off the N end and two are off the W coast

of Pulau Mariri and two more are off the SE point of the island.

The village of Kampung Mariri, easily seen from seaward, is

on one of the latter rocks. A reef with two high sand banks

extends 1 mile W and NW from Pulau Mariri. On the E side of

the island, the reef is comparatively close to the shore; depths

decrease gradually from seaward. This reef is separated from

the rest of Pulau Mariri by a channel with a depth of 3.9m.

Anchorage can be taken, in 6.7m, with Kampung Mariri bearing 268°, about 0.75 mile offshore. There is a 4.6m shoal 0.75

mile SE of Kampung Mariri. Wadidjili Islet and Sedja Islet,

which is in two parts, are on the reef NE of Pulau Leer.

4.52 Pulau Leer (6°12'S., 134°51'E.), 1.5 miles S of Pulau

Mariri, is heavily wooded and may be recognized by its many

dead trees. When coming from SE, Pulau Leer and the highest

point of Pulau Mariri are sighted first. Five small, rocky islets

are on the reef off the S point of Pulau Leer. Kampung Lola is

on Lola Islet, the southernmost and largest islet; a clump of
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 79

Pub. 164

coconut trees is on a point of land just S of the village. Lola

Islet, is surrounded on the E and S by a reef with a least depth

of 4.5m. Small vessels can approach the village to within about

183m.

4.52 Epar (6°11'S., 134°49'E.), on a separate reef W of Pulau

Leer, is rocky and overgrown and is actually two islets that

appear as one from seaward.

4.53 East coast of Pulau Kobroor.—From Tanjung Balatanjuring (6°05'S., 134°45'E.), the NE point of Pulau Kobroor,

the coast trends NW forming the S bank of Sungi Manumbai.

From the same point it stretches S and SW for about 20 miles

to the SE point of the island. Laklakar Island, 1.5 miles SE of

Tanjung Balatanjuring is rocky, wooded and surrounded by

seven detached rocks covered with vegetation. About 3 miles S

of Laklaklar is the mouth of the river Sungi Warloi. Leliling

Island, with the village of Warloi on its E side, is in the river

entrance channel. North of the village is a tree with a conspicuous white bare trunk. There are several villages on the

coast of Pulau Kobroor; Kampung Kobroor is at the mouth of

the river of the same name and Kampung Pono is on the rocky

SE extremity of the island at the entrance to the river Sungi

Workai. The coast reef extends out in some places up to 2

miles, but it has not been fully examined. On this reef are

Waria Islet, Kokwana Islet, Kuling Islet, and two rocks.

4.53 Pulau Penambulai, Pulau Barakan, and Pulau Workai are

three relatively large islands lying, respectively, off the SE part

of Pulau Kobroor, the E side of Pulau Maikoor, and the NE part

of Pulau Trangan. Except for a few places where the coast is

rocky, these three islands are low but covered with high trees.

However, the NE side of Pulau Penambulai has been reported

as being radar conspicuous. Since the area W of the outer

string of islands has not yet been surveyed, little is known

about Pulau Mimien, Kool Mimien, Pulau Lelamtuti, Pulau

Wolvat, and Pulau Baun between the three off-lying islands

and the shores of the main islands mentioned above.

4.53 Among the landmarks on the E side of Pulau Penambuli are:

Tanjung Uafa Fenjuring (6°19'S., 134°53'E.), a conspicuous

point with high trees and a sandy beach, about 2.25 miles SE of

the N end of the island; a clump of trees about 49m high just N

of Kampung Rabal, about 3 miles S of the above point; and a

conspicuous tree with a bare straight trunk and a thick top on

Tanjung Ki, 5 miles SSW of Kampung Rabal.

4.53 The rocky NE point of Pulau Barakan is a good landmark

visible at a distance of 14 miles. About midway on the E side

of the island the trees are conspicuously higher than they are

elsewhere on the island.

4.53 On the extensive reef surrounding Pulau Workai there are a

number of smaller islands. One of these, Pulau Turturjuring

(Toertoer Djoering) (6°38'S., 134°45'E.), separated from the N

part of Pulau Workai by a very narrow, drying channel, is

thickly wooded and somewhat higher than the land in back of

it, and because of that looks like a small hill when seen from N.

On the reef about 3 miles S of the E extremity of Pulau Turturjuring are Kultubai Utara (Koeltoebai Noord), three low,

wooded, and atoll-shaped sandy islets, of which the easternmost is the largest. These islets are easily distinguished from

N, but from the S they merge with the higher Tanjung

Turturjuring. Between these islets and Tanjung Turturjuring,

about 0.75 mile S of the latter, is a sandbank, part of which

remains dry at all stages of the tide.

4.53 There is a convenient roadstead S of Kultuba Utura in the

inlet in the extensive reef. A beacon is on the edge of a drying

reef about 5 miles N of Kultubai Selatan (Koeltoebai Zuid), the

easternmost island of Kepulauan Jin (Djoeedin Eilanden).

Depths of about 7.3m will be found in the E part of the roadstead; bottom is sand and mud.

4.54 Northeast approach to Sungi Workai.—The SE

entrance to Sungi Workai at the S end of Pulau Kobroor is

approached by a channel from NE with very irregular depths

leading between Lola and the N end of Pulau Penambulai.

4.54 Approach this channel steering for the sandy E entrance

point of Sungi Kangurma (6°17'S., 134°51'E.), at the N end of

Pulau Penamumbai, bearing 210°, until the SW end of Pulau

Mariri is in line with Sedja Islet, the S of the two islets close off

the NE of Pulau Leer bearing about 344°. Djarang (6°12'S.,

134°46'E.), an islet about 1.5 miles off the coast of Pulau Kobroor and about 3 miles S of Leliling, will then be open SW of

Lola, bearing about 296°. The velocity of current here is sometimes 3 knots setting offshore with a falling tide and S with a

rising tide. Then steer 242° until Epar, the double islet 1.75

miles W of the N end of Pulau Leer, is open SW of Lola,

bearing about 330°; then steer 269°, which will lead to an

anchorage about 2 miles S of Kampung Lola, where there are

depths of 10 to 10.9m, sand, mud, and coral.

4.54 Sungi Workai (6°03'S., 134°15'E.) is one of the channels

connecting the E and W coasts of Kepulauan Aru. It is used,

however, only by small craft with local knowledge. The W

approach to the river has been previously discussed beginning

in paragraph 4.43. The E entrance is about 11 miles W of the

SW side of Pulau Penambulai.

4.55 Southeast side of Kepulauan Aru.—Kepulauan Jin

(Djoeedin Eilanden), on the S side of an extensive reef almost

touching the S end of Pulau Wokai, are six low sparselypopulated islands.

Kultubai Selatan (Koeltoebai Zuid) (6°52'S., 134°43'E.),

the easternmost of Kepulauan Jin, is wooded, but a gap in the

woods makes the island appear as two when seen from S. Two

conspicuous trees stand close together near the W end of the

island and are visible except between 203° and 338°. There are

shrubs on the reef N of this island.

4.55 Maardjinjin (6°52'S., 134°41'E.), close W of Kultubai Selatan and with narrow Wadidin Islet between, has a tree with a Vshaped top on its S side.

Pulau Juedin (Pulau Djoeedin) (6°52'S., 134°37'E.), the

westernmost and largest of the islands of the Kepulauan Jin

group, is tree covered with the highest on the E side of the

island. A tall tree, with a top that resembles a church with a

steeple when seen from S, is on the SE side of the island. A

reef, with a dry sandy cay near its outer edge, projects 0.75

mile S from the SW end of the island. Anchorage can be taken

during the Southeast Monsoon, in 15m, off the W end of the

island. Local knowledge is necessary. The flood tidal currents

set N at a rate of 1.75 knots and the ebb currents set S at a rate

of 2 knots in the vicinity of the anchorage.
80 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

4.55 Caution.—A 4.9m reef is located about 3.5 miles SSW of

the conspicuous tree on the S side of Maarjinjin and a 3.5m

shoal is 6.5 miles S of the W end of Kultubai Selatan and 3.75

miles NE of Pulau Karang’s N end.

4.55 A wreck has been reported in a position about 5 miles E of

the northernmost point of Pulau Jeudin or about 1.75 miles N

of Pulau Kultubai, which is located close E of Maardjinjin. 

4.56 Pulau Mar (6°54'S., 134°31'E.) and Pulau Jeh (Pulau

Djeh), about 2.75 and 5 miles, respectively, SW of the W end

of Pulau Jeudin, are low and uninhabited. The islands are

heavily wooded except for the SE part of Pulau Jeh, which has

a few isolated trees. A narrow but clear 6.7m channel separates

the islands. Tidal currents are strong in this channel. Pulau Mar

is near the SE end of a very extensive reef.

4.56 Pulau Penjuring (6°44'S., 134°29'E.), on the broad reef N

of Pulau Mar and between Pulau Workai and Pulau Trangan,

consists of several small heavily-wooded islets that appear as

one island. Between the Pulau Penjuring reef and Pulau Trangan there is a deep channel which provides access to the villages of Krei-baru (Niew Krei) and Krei-lama (Oud Krei) on

the shore of Pulau Trangan.

Pulau Enu (7°05'S., 134°29'E.), 18.5 miles ESE of Tanjung

Ngabordamlu, the S end of Pulau Trangan, is the southernmost

island of the Kepulauan Aru group. It is low, uninhabited, and

surrounded by a narrow coral reef. A 4.9m shoal is 2.5 miles

SSW of the W end of the island. The island is a good radar

target at a distance of 14 miles.

Pulau Karang (7°01'S., 134°39'E.), about 8.5 miles ENE of

Pulau Enu and the same distance SSW of the W end of

Kultubai Selatan, is a low wooded island surrounded by a coral

reef. The tidal flood currents set NE at a rate of 1.75 knots; the

ebb sets between SW and WSW at the same rate off the NW

side of the island. Vessels navigating in the vicinity of the

island must exercise care to avoid the 3m shoal 3.75 miles NE

of the N end of the island.

4.57 Southeast coast of Pulau Trangan.—The N part of

this coast is low, but the S part, consisting of low hills covered

with vegetation, is relatively steep. Northeast of Tanjung

Ngabordamlu are some low red cliffs. Between the last-named

point and a point 4 miles SW of Tanjung Goldjuring (6°49'S.,

134°22'E.) there are two large trees near the shore and vessels

can approach the shore to within a relatively short distance of

them. Anchorage can be taken during the Northwest Monsoon

off this stretch of coast. Farther NE the coast is fronted by

extensive drying banks with several reefs and small islets; two

reefs are marked by beacons. Sungi Laelaemaar, entered close

NW of Tanjung Goldjuring, is navigable only by small craft.

4.57 Caution.—A 2.7m shoal is 3 miles ESE of Tanjung Ngabordamlu. Shoals, with depths of 4.5m and 4.9m, lie 7.5 and 9

miles S, repectively, of Tanjung Goljuring. Two drying reefs

are, respectively, 1.5 miles SSE and 2.5 miles SE of Tanjung

Goldjuring. A small hut on pilings on each of these reefs are

good landmarks.

4.58 Krei-lama (Oud Krei) (6°45'S., 134°23'E.), the

principal village in the S part of the Kepulauan Aru group, is

on the Pulau Trangan shore about 4 miles N of Tanjung Goldjuring. Krei-baru (Nieuw Krei), another village, is 2.5 miles

farther N.

4.58 Two channels lead to Krei-lama. The W channel, with a least

depth of 5.5m, runs close along the shore of Pulau Trangan. It

is narrow but navigable at all stages of the tide. Vessels may

pass through this channel by eye provided soundings are constantly taken. North of Tanjung Goldjuring the W side of the

channel should be favored to avoid a small drying reef off the

village of Kampung Biltubur.

4.58 The E channel is wider than the other but it is more difficult

to navigate. It is practicable only after high tide when the reefs

are visible.

4.58 Directions.—The W side of the small islet S of Kumnaar

and 1 mile NE of Krei-lama in range with the E side of Pulau

Karwai, bearing 349° should be an excellent mark. If the firstnamed islet is not visible at a sufficient distance, the E side of

Pulau Karwai should be steered for on that same bearing. This

course is difficult to make good because of frequently strong

tidal currents in this vicinity, and, being influenced by the

openings in the extensive drying reef around Pulau Penjuring,

does not always set along the axis of the channel. Care is

necessary to avoid the 1.8m shoal extending from this reef to

Wolil Island because this shoal is steep-to on the channel side

and soundings give no warning of the approach to it. After

passing this shoal and the reef marked by a beacon standing 4

miles W of Wolil, steer between Pulau Karwai and the drying

reef SSW of it, then N toward the small islet about 0.5 mile of

Krei-lama. There are depths of 2.3 to 11.9m off the village.

Kepulauan Sermata

4.59 The Kepulauan Sermata group comprise a long chain

of islands extending from off the E extremity of Timor to

within about 55 miles of the Kepulauan Tanimbar group. The

islands of Kepulauaun Sermata are mostly of volcanic origin

and, because they rise steeply from the sea, they afford only a

few good anchorages. These islands may be considered as

belonging to two chains that diverge slightly to the E. The

principal island in the N chain is Pulau Wetar (See Pub. 163,

Sailing Directions (Enroute) Borneo, Jawa, Sulawesi, and Nusa

Tenggara). The S chain consists of Pulau Kisar, Pulau Leti,

Pulau Moa, Pulau Lakor, Pulau Sermata, and Pulau Babar.

Kepulauan Romang

4.60 The Kepulauan Romang group, about 45 miles NNE

of the E extremity of Timor, consists of several hilly islands.

The most prominent peaks are on Pulau Romang, Pulau Nyata,

Pulau Tellang, and Pulau Maopora. The channels between

Pulau Romang and the adjacent islands as well as the channel

between Pulau Kital and Pulau Maopora are deep and clear of

dangers.

4.60 Tides—Currents.—Generally the flood currents set to the

N and the ebb currents to the S. The maximum rate of current

in the narrow channels is about 2.5 knots, and in the wider

channels about 1.5 knots.

4.60 Pulau Romang (7°35'S., 127°25'E.), the principal island of

the group, is about 11.5 miles long NE-SW, 7.5 miles wide,

and is surrounded by a steep-to reef. The 20m curve passes
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 81

Pub. 164

along the edge of this reef. The only shoal spot is a detached

8.8m reef about 0.75 mile off the N side of the island.

4.60 The S and SW coasts of Pulau Romang are rocky and

closely-backed by a rather high plateau which is separated

from the higher NE part by a swampy section. Anchorage can

be taken off the S side of the island, in depths of 29 to 35m,

sand and stone, opposite a sandy beach near a deserted village

W of the S extremity of the island. The preferred anchorage

with the S extremity of the island bearing 094° and small conspicuous house on the beach, between the S and SW extremity

of the island, bearing 004°.

4.60 The W coast of Pulau Romang is rocky except in a bight

about 4 miles N of the S end of the island. The deserted village

of Hila is at the head of this bight. Anchorage can be taken

during the Southeast Monsoon, in 35m, stone, 0.13 mile off the

coastal reef abreast the N entrance point of the bight with the

outermost houses of Hila bearing 150°.

4.60 The 747m summit of the island is near the W side, about

2.75 miles S of the N extremity of the island.

4.60 The N coast of Pulau Romang consists of rocky stretches

alternating with small sandy beaches. Anchorage can be taken

in Teluk Zwaan (7°30'S., 127°24'E.) and in the coves to the E.

The anchorage in Teluk Zwaan, S of the detached reef that uncovers near the middle of the bay, has about 183m of swinging

room with good holding ground. The bay should be entered

only when the reefs are clearly showing. Local knowledge is

necessary.

4.60 The E coast of Pulau Romang is generally quite steep, except

in Teluk Rumahkuda, which has a long sandy beach. During

the Northwest Monsoon anchorage can be taken, in 65m, about

0.15 mile off the coastal reef in the S entrance to the channel

between Pulau Romang and Pulau Tellang with the two points

to the N in range and the conspicuous house on the heights of

Pulau Romang bearing 281°. Currents attain a rate of 1.5 knots.

4.61 Teluk Rumahkuda (Roemahkoeda Bai) (7°37'S.,

127°25'E.), an indentation in the SE coast 4 miles NE of the S

extremity of Pulau Romang, affords excellent anchorage 0.15

mile off the coastal reef, in 61 to 70m, with the mouth of the

small river at the head of the bay bearing 315° and the village

of Kampung Rumahkuda bearing 022°. This anchorage can

accommodate one vessel and has about 0.15 mile of swinging

room. The coastal reef is marked by discolored water.

4.61 Caution.—The coastal reef has extended further seaward

than is charted off Hoewai, El Madang, and Meti Akwalu.

4.62 Pulau Mitan (7°38'S., 127°26'E.), 2 miles SSE of

Kampung Rumakhuda, is about 93m high and covered with

gray coral lime. 

Pulau Nyata (Njata) (7°31'S., 127°18'E.), 3.5 miles W of

the NW part of Pulau Romang, is surrounded by a steep-to reef

outside of which there are no dangers. There is no anchorage in

the vicinity of the island.

4.62 Pulau Tellang (7°32'S., 127°33'E.) and Pulau Limtutu are

two small islands on the same reef 3 miles E of the NE extremity of Pulau Romang.

4.62 Pulau Laut (7°32'S., 127°33'E.), a mass of rocks 56m high,

is about 0.5 mile NE of the N end of Pulau Tellang. Pulau

Kital, a cone-shaped island 65m high, is nearly 1 mile E of the

S end of Pulau Tellang. It is separated from Pulau Tellang and

Pulau Limtutu by a deep and clear channel in which anchorage

can be taken, with local knowledge, in about 21.9m, sand and

stones. Currents set through this channel with a maximum

velocity of 2.5 knots.

4.63 Pulau Maopora (7°35'S., 127°36'E.), about 6 miles E

of Pulau Romang, is 310m high near its N end. There is a

sandy beach along the W side of the island but there is no

anchorage off of it. A 35m bank projects 2 miles from the N

end of the island. Anchorage can be taken over a 10.9m shoal

on this bank about 0.5 mile E of the N end of the island. There

are strong tide rips, however, over this bank. The N coast of the

island is rocky and steep. The E shore especially near the S end

is marsh. Pulau Juha (Djoeha), 1 mile E of the SE point of

Pulau Maopora, is a sand bank covered with vegetation, dry at

all stages of the tide. It is surrounded by a very steep-to reef.

Anchorage can be taken in the channel between Pulau Juha and

the coastal reef of Pulau Maopora. This channel has a depth of

50m and is about 183m wide. The channel is easily navigated

when the reefs are showing clearly. Two small islets, covered

with vegetation, are on the reef off the SE end of Pulau Juha.

They are easily distinguished. The maximum strength of the

tidal currents through this channel is 2 knots. 

Pulau Gunungapi (Goenoeng Api) (6°39'S., 126°40'E.), an

isolated island about 67 miles NW of Pulau Romang, is an uninhabited volcanic island, 282m high, with the shape of a truncated cone and with almost bare slopes. There is occasional

volcanic action. The W edge of the volcanic crater is considerably lower than the remaining edge. A coastal reef extends up

to 0.13 mile off the island. With light SE winds, a small vessel

with local knowledge can anchor on a bank off the N side of

the island 0.15 mile offshore.

Kepulauan Damar

4.64 The Kepulauan Damar group of islands, ranging from

75 to 100 miles NE of Pulau Romang, consists of Pulau

Damar, Pulau Teun, Pula Nila and several smaller islands.

These islands are high, and, rising from the sea, make good

landmarks. Pulau Damar, Pulau Teun, and Pulau Nila are inhabited.

4.64 Pulau Damar (7°08'S., 128°36'E.), the largest island of the

group, is roughly rectangular, about 9 miles long and 7.5 miles

wide. The island has several peaks, of which the highest named

Wuwarlali, is 868m high and is on the NE corner of the island.

There is some volcanic activity on the island, but no eruptions

have been reported. Earthquakes, accompanied by sea

disturbances are, however, frequent. The W side of the island is

low in places, but the other coasts are steep-to. The island is

very fertile and has several small streams.

4.65 Teluk Solat (7°09'S., 128°41'E.), on the E side of

Pulau Damar, is a deep bay penetrating the island for 2.5 miles;

it is surrounded by high and very steep volcanic hills that are

wooded to the water’s edge. The village of Kampung Wulur is

on the SW side of the bay; the villages of Kampung Solat and

Kampung Kehli are on the N shore opposite. A pier for small

craft projects from a peninsula near Kampung Solat. The head

of the bay is filled by a large drying reef extending as far E as
82 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

Kampung Kehli. This reef shows by discoloration between

Kampung Kehli and Kampung Solat, but does not show well

elsewhere. There are some hot springs at Kampung Kehli.

4.65 Tides—Currents.—In Teluk Solat the maximum fall of tide

that can be expected is 1.2m and this occurs in June and December. The maximum rise of 0.7m occurs at all semidiurnal

spring tides.

4.65 Anchorage.—During the Northwest Monsoon Teluk Solat

affords good anchorage, in about 50m, with a house at the

mouth of a small stream 0.4 mile NW of Kampung Wulur,

bearing 294° and the pier at Kampung Solat bearing 000°. During the Southeast Monsoon, a heavy swell sets into the bay.

4.65 Directions.—Because there are no detached dangers in

Teluk Solat it is easily entered. The reefs and both sides of the

bay are not more than 183m wide, however, because the

prevailing winds push rollers onto the N shore and the currents

set in the same direction, care should be taken to avoid

approaching the N shore too closely. In entering the bay steer

for the house, at the mouth of a small stream 0.45 mile NW of

Kampung Wulur, bearing 294°.

4.66 Teluk Wilhelmus (7°06'S., 128°39'E.), on the N

shore of Pulau Damar affords anchorage sheltered against the

Southeast Monsoon; however, the holding ground is poor and

the bottom rises rather sharply. Vessels proceeding to this anchorage enter on a southwesterly course, steering toward the

mouth of the small stream that empties into the head of the bay.

This anchorage is not safe during the Northwest Monsoon.

Local knowledge is necessary.

4.66 Anchorage can be taken off the S coast near Tanjung Paran

(7°13'S., 128°38'E.). Vessels approach with the tangent of the

SE extremity of Terbang Utara (North Terbang) astern, bearing

210°, and anchor on that line in any desired depth clear of the

coast reef.

4.67 The Terbang Islands (7°20'S., 128°33'E.), composed

of Terbang Utura (North Terbang), 142m high, and Terbang

Selatan (South Terbang), 122m high, are located, respectively,

5.5 and 9.5 miles S of Pulau Damar; both islands are uninhabited. The highest part of Terban Selatan is a plateau that is

steep on the N side and moderately sloping on the S. Temporary anchorage can be taken near the S end of Terbang Utara,

in a depth of about 73m, with the 463m elevation at the SE end

of Pulau Damar lying midway between the SE point of Pulau

Damar and Terbang Utara. Depths increase rapidly just outside

this position. There is sometimes a very strong current in the

channel between Terbang Utara and Terbang Selatan.

Nus Leur (Noes Leoer) (7°14'S., 128°23'E.) consists of two

small islands, 46m and 30m high, respectively, on an extensive

coral reef 8.5 miles SW of the W extremity of Pulau Damar.

The reef is too steep-to for anchorage here. 

Pulau Teun (Teoen) (6°58'S., 129°08'E.), 26.5 miles ENE of

Pulau Damar, consists principally of an active volcano, 655m

high, with a crater that is visible from N but not from S. Eruptions from this volcano have been known to occur.

4.67 There are several villages on the island. Vessels may obtain

anchorage with local knowledge off the village of Lajoni

(7°00'S., 129°07'E.), off the SW coast, in a depth of 13m, with

the flagstaff of the village bearing 050° and the N entrance

point of the small bay in which the village stands bearing 332°.

The bottom is very steep-to. The flagstaff is clearly visible and

there is a church which is partially obscured by a large tree.

4.68 Pulau Nila (6°44'S., 129°30'E.), 23 miles NE of

Pulau Teun, is a steep volcanic island, 781m high, with a few

scattered patches of trees and shrubs. The only eruption on

record occurred in 1932, but steam, sulphur vapor, and hot

springs are observed regularly on the E side. The N half of the

island is fringed by a steep-to coastal reef which dries. A ridge

with a depth of 3m is off the NW edge. 

4.68 Pulau Kari (Nika Islet) (6°42'S., 129°31'E.), an islet 47m

high, is on a reef that extends 1.25 miles N from the N side of

Pulau Nila. Vessels should not approach the N side of Pulau

Nila within the 200m curve unless seeking anchorage in the

channel that penetrates the reef W of Pulau Kari. There are

some coconut plantations on this side of the island.

4.68 Anchorage.—Vessels anchor 0.4 to 0.5 mile W of the N side

of Pula Kari, in depths of 29 to 40m, in a channel between the

reefs N of Pulau Nila. This channel has a navigable width of

about 183m between rocks bordering the reefs on each side,

with a least mid-channel depth of 7.6m. The summit of Pulau

Nila bearing 190° leads into the channel, but caution is

necessary because of the currents which sometimes set diagonally across the entrance. The small islet of Nusafnu, close off

the middle point of the N coast of Pulau Nila, is a useful mark

but it is difficult to make out from the entrance. About 0.5 mile

SW of the anchorage is a small drying reef. Because of the

volcanic activity in this vicinity, it is advisable to send a boat

ahead for soundings and to mark the reefs along the channel

before attempting to proceed to the anchorage. This anchorage

can also be approached from the W by keeping the S side of

Pulau Kari bearing 093°, but caution should be exercised

because this course leads only about 0.4 mile N of the detached

reef referred to above.

4.69 Wotai Road (6°45'S., 129°29'E.), on the S side of

Pula Nila, is open to the S and is exposed to wind and sea during the Southeast Monsoon. In the NW part of the road is Teluk

Solat, a narrow bay that penetrates the coast for a distance of 1

mile. In the middle part of the bay there is an average depth of

37m, but drying reefs fill the N part and cut off the entrance to

the bay. The village of Wotai, with a flagstaff, is on the N shore

of the roadstead. In the road, outside the shore reef, the depths

are irregular. To insure against uncharted risings of the bottom

as a result of volcanic activity, it is advisable to send a boat

ahead to make soundings and to mark the reefs before proceeding to the anchorage. The recommended anchorage is in

depths of 46 to 61m, with Wotai village bearing 342°.

4.69 Doesborgh Reef (6°40'S., 129°25'E.), 4.5 miles NW of

Pulau Nila, is a drying, rock, atoll-shaped formation 2.25 miles

long NE-SW and 1 mile wide.

Nil Desperandum (Griffen Reef) (6°37'S., 129°47'E.),

about 17 miles ENE of Pulau Nila, is about 0.75 miles long EW and 0.5 mile wide. It is composed of sand and coral and

dries 1.8m.

Pulau Serua (Seroea) (6°19'S., 130°01'E.), about 37 miles

NE of Pulau Nila, has a 641m truncated conical volcanic peak

near its center. On the NW side is a lesser peak 244m high. The

last eruption occurred in 1844. The coasts of the island are
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 83

Pub. 164

clear except for a few narrow coastal reefs which do not exceed

183m wide. Kekeh Besar, 193m high, is on a bank of soundings extending almost 1.5 miles W of the W end of Pulau

Serua. Kekeh Ketjil, a much smaller island, is about 183m E of

Kekeh Besar. The passage between Pulau Serua and the reef on

which these last two islands lie is deep and clear of dangers.

4.69 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 61 to 70m, in the channel between Kekeh Ketjil and Pulau Serua. There is also anchorage, in depths of 70 to 82m, off a small sandy beach on the

N side of the island. Some conspicuous boat sheds are on this

beach. Vessels approach and anchor with these sheds in range

with Lesluru (Lesloeroe) village bearing 186° and 0.18 mile N

of the drying reef. The village is in a saddle-like depression

between the two main peaks of the island.

Kepulauan Sermata—Southern Chain

4.70 The E end of Timor (See Pub. 163, Sailing Directions

(Enroute) Borneo, Jawa, Sulawesi, and Nusa Tenggara) is high

and the coast is steep-to. A range of mountains, 435 to 1,219m

high, extends in a SW direction from this point, paralleling the

coast a distance of about 2 miles.

Jaco Island (Jako) (8°26'S., 127°20'E.), off the E extremity

of Timor, is a small flat, uninhabited island, 81m high, covered

with trees. It appears as a part of Timor except when seen open

of that island. Jaco Island is fringed by a reef varying in width

from a few meters on the W side to about 0.2 mile on the N and

S sides of the island.

4.70 Selat Jaco (Jako Strait) is a deep clear channel, 0.3 mile wide

between Jaco Island and Timor. The strait can be safely navigated at mid-channel.

4.70 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set directly through

the strait at a rate up to 4 knots. The N current is of greater

duration than that setting S. Tide rips occur at each entrance.

Heavy seas prevail off the S entrance during the Southeast

Monsoon.

4.70 Pulau Kisar (8°04'S., 127°11'E.), about 18 miles NNW of

the E end of Timor, has a number of rocky hills, the highest of

which is 240m high. The coasts, rising steeply from the sea, are

gray terraced walls of bare coral lime broken in only a few

places where small streams empty into the sea. The inland

hills, seen through the breaks in the cliffs, are also gray and are

sparsely wooded.

4.71 Pantai Wonreli Road (8°05'S., 127°09'E.) is an open

roadstead on the W side of Pulau Kisar. A light is shown close

N of Pantai Wonreli Road. A narrow drying reef, with deep

water behind it, is about 91m offshore and acts as a natural

breakwater. A shallow channel, used by flat-bottomed boats at

LW and by loading proas above half-tide level gives access to

the area behind the reef. The shore of the bight is a sandy beach

with a few sheds. A conspicuous white pyramid is on the S

shore of the bight.

4.71 Anchorage is available, in 29 to 40m, coral and stones, about

137m WNW of the above-mentioned white pyramid. Farther

offshore, the bottom is so steep there is the danger of dragging

anchor. It is customary to run a hawser to the shore, but with an

offshore wind or at the change of the monsoon and during the

Southeast Monsoon, when the tidal currents set along the shore

in a NNE and SSW direction, it is very improbable that even a

very strong hawser would hold a vessel in position. During an

onshore wind, this anchorage cannot be used.

4.71 Winds—Weather.—During some months of the year

cyclonic of “Valwinden” winds make the anchorage untenable.

The Northwest Monsoon not only makes anchorage impossible

but also prevents boats from approaching the shore. During

that season contact with the island is made on the E side at

Pura Pura, which will be discussed later, where vessels heaveto and send boats ashore.

4.71 Tides—Currents.—At Pantai Wonreli Road, the maximum

rise of tide, occurring in March and September, is 0.9m above

mean sea level. The lowest LW, 0.85m below mean sea level,

occurs between January and March and between July and September at semidiurnal spring tides.

4.72 Pantai Wonreli (8°05'S., 127°09'E.), some distance

inland, is the only village any importance on Pulau Kisar. It is

the headquarters of a government official and there is a large

church in the village. Vessels call regularly at the village except

during the Northwest Monsoon, when the port of call is at Pura

Pura on the E coast.

4.72 Rain is very uncertain on Pulau Kisar. Frequently a whole

year will pass without rain. On such occasions the entire population moves temporarily to Pulau Romang.

Kepulauan Leti

4.73 Kepulauan Leti (8°11'S., 127°55'E.), a group of islands ENE of the E extremity of Timor, includes Pulau Leti,

Pulau Moa, and Pulau Lakor. Pulau Leti and Pulau Mao are

fairly hilly, but Pulau Lakor is rather low however, since the

trees on the latter island reach heights of more than 49m, the

island can be seen more than 15 miles.

4.73 Destructive cyclonic storms sometimes occur in these islands, particularly in the spring at the change of the monsoon.

4.73 Pulau Leti (8°12'S., 127°42'E.), the westernmost island of

the Leti group, is about 22 miles ENE of the E end of Timor.

Along the middle of the island is a chain of rounded hills the

highest of which is 406m high. The hills in the central part of

this chain are not wooded but are sparsely covered with tall

grass. The low hills at the E end of the chain are covered with

trees. On the low parts of the island there are many coconut

palms. At the base of the hills and extending to the shore is flat

land that forms a sort of terrace 7.6 to 18.3m high. On the S

side of the island there is a separate plain which rises steeply

from the sea, where it is undermined by the action of the

breakers. A reef skirts the E side of the island.

4.73 A light, from which a racon transmits, is shown from from a

white framework tower near Tanjung Tutpateh (8°13'S.,

127°36'E.), the W point of Leti.

4.73 The inhabitants of Pulau Leti dwell on the flat land, usually

near the shore. The villages are mostly built on coral reefs 9.1

to 12.2m high. Water Buffalo, goats, and pigs are plentiful,

however, the island is subject to drought and famine, at which

times the inhabitants migrate temporarily to Pulau Moa.

4.73 Anchorage.—During the Southeast Monsoon vessels can

anchor off the village of Kampung Serwaru lying on a bare

strip of land fronted by a sandy beach on the N side of Pulau

Leti. The coast is low for a short distance E of the village, but

beyond this it becomes steep with cliffs and trends NE for a
84 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

short distance forming a small bight protected on its W side by

short coral stone mole. Because of a detached offshore drying

reef, loading and unloading can only be carried on at HW and

even then it is difficult if there is any sea. Anchorage can be

taken in 26 to 29m, coral and stones, poor holding ground, with

the N extremity of Pulau Leti, near Tutukai village bearing

101° and Waurlawan, the highest hill on the island, bearing

180°. This anchorage is dangerous during the Northwest Monsoon.

4.73 There is anchorage, in 37 to 73m, on the S side of the island

in front of the village of Luhulele, about 2.75 miles from the E

end of the island. Vessels can anchor anywhere between the

crescent-shaped drying reef S of the E end of the village and a

sandy bank projecting 1 mile in a SW direction from the shore

1.5 miles W of the village. Swinging room is limited and there

is a least depth of 7.9m in the entrance, which is about 137m

wide. Local knowledge is recommended for both of the above

anchorages.

4.74 Selat Moa (8°10'S., 127°45'E.), a deep clear passage

between Pulau Leti and Pulau Moa, is about 2 miles wide.

Tidal currents in the strait are strong and sometimes cause a

very choppy sea when setting against the wind.

4.74 Pulau Moa (8°12'S., 128°00'E.), E of Pulau Leti, is a coral

lime plateau with two groups of hills. The W group of hills has

a maximum elevation of 289m 5.5 miles E of the W end of the

island, and the E group has a maximum elevation of 375m 2 to

4 miles E of the island’s center. A few of the hills are wooded,

but most of them are bare. The main part of the island is fertile,

but it is marshy in spots. The inhabitants live in several

villages, of which Kampung Pati (8°13'S., 127°52'E.), on the

S coast, is the most important.

4.74 Anchorage.—Because the coasts of Pulau Mao are steep-to

there are not safe anchorages except during the change of the

monsoons and at the beginning of the South Monsoon,

anchorage can be taken almost anywhere off the S coast of the

island. It is customary to anchor, in a depth of 40m, sand, about

183m from the coast reef. Currents set along this coast at a rate

as high as 2 to 3 knots.

4.74 Small vessels can anchor in deep water off Kampung Pati on

the S coast of Pulau Moa, during calm weather, but the sea is

usually too heavy.

4.74 In the absence of strong winds and currents, temporary anchorage may be taken off Kampung Klis (8°13'S., 127°57'E.)

at the bend of the S coast 5.5 miles E of Kampung Pati. The

anchorage is 0.15 mile from the drying shore reef in 62m, sand,

with the village flagstaff bearing 047° and Tanjung Tutnei

(Toet Nei) (8°15'S., 127°58'E.) bearing 151°.

4.75 Selat Lakor (8°14'S., 128°04'E.), a strait between

Pulau Moa and Pulau Lakor, has a least width of 1 mile and is

clear of dangers. Eddies and strong tide rips are frequently

encountered off Kampung Moanga, a village on the E coast of

Pulau Moa, and off the NW end of Pulau Lakor. The tidal

currents set through this strait at a rate of 4 knots or more.

4.75 Pulau Lakor (8°15'S., 128°10'E.), E of Pulau Moa, is low

and flat, but its tall trees make it a good landmark. The

generally rocky shores are broken in places by short stretches

of sandy beaches. There are several villages on the island.

Kampung Warwawang (8°13'S., 128°09'E.), on a rocky cliff

on the N side of the island, is conspicuous.

Kepulauan Babar

4.76 This group of islands consists of Meatiy Miarang,

Pulau Sermata, and Pulau Babar, together with the smaller

islands adjacent to them. Except for Meatiy Miarang, these

islands are hilly and are good landmarks; furthermore, they can

be approached closely.

Meatiy Miarang (Meatimiarang) (8°20'S., 128°30'E.), a

small, flat, and densely-wooded island, is 16 miles ESE of the

SE end of Pulau Lakor and near the E end of a drying reef 12.5

miles long NNW-SSE and about 5 miles wide. On the reef

about 0.5 mile W of Meatiy Miarang is Morau, a low wooded

islet; close off the SE end are Djagat Tutun, two small rocky

islets. On the NW end of the reef are Armortun and Meaterialam, two low wooded islets, the latter with a conspicuous tree

on its W side. The sides of the reef are so steep-to that anchorage outside is impossible. The reef encloses a lagoon which

can be reached from the E side through a channel 137m wide,

with a least depth of 5.5m in the fairway.

4.76 The entrance is marked, entering, on the starboard side by a

white conical buoy, and on the port side by a black can buoy. A

course of 222° leads into the lagoon. Inside there are numerous

reefs, some of which may be marked by beacons. There is

anchorage in the S part of the lagoon N of Meatiy Miarang, but

local knowledge is essential. Strong tidal currents can be

expected in the entrance channel. Meatiy Miarang is the only

inhabited island on the reef; a light, from which a racon transmits, is shown from its W side. The island is reported to be a

good radar target at a distance of 20 miles.

4.77 Luang Island (Loeang) (8°11'S., 128°42'E.) and

Kalapa Island, 14 and 18 miles, respectively, NE of Meatiy

Miarang, are on a drying reef about 15 miles long on which there

are several smaller islets. Luang Island, almost barren, has two

conspicuous hills the highest of which is 260m high. The island

is reported to be a good radar target at a distance of 26 miles.

Kalapa Island the easternmost and largest island on the reef, is

generally low but covered with tall trees. Metutun (Metoetoen)

Island, 1.75 miles E of the W end of the reef is covered with high

coconut palms. Small craft sometimes anchor at the W end of

the reef. Luang Island is the only inhabited place of the group.

4.77 Pulau Sermata (8°12'S., 128°55'E.), close E of Kalapa Island, is a long narrow island with a chain of small, round,

grass-covered hills running down its middle. The highest point

on the island, 392m, is covered with trees. There are a number

of villages on the island surrounded by high stone walls.

4.77 Anchorage can be taken in Lelang Bay on the S side of the

island during the change of the monsoons and during the

Northwest Monsoon, but the bottom rises steeply and during

the Northwest Monsoon the anchorage is frequently made

unsafe by sudden violent squalls. Because the bottom rises

steeply elsewhere in the vicinity of Pulau Sermata, there are no

other anchorages. Local knowledge is necessary.

4.78 Pulau Babar (7°55'S., 129°45'E.), 40 miles ENE of

Pulau Sermata, is fertile and covered with forests. There are

several hills, the highest of which is 826m high and near the
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 85

Pub. 164

center of the island, but is not particularly conspicuous. More

conspicuous from NW or SE is a group of hills in the NE part

of the island. The coasts, sloping down from the hills, are

fringed in places by a drying reef 0.1 to 0.15 mile wide. The

water from the rivers of the island, as well as from those of

Pulau Wetan, discolor the sea for a great distance.

4.78 Pulau Wetan (7°55'S., 129°32'E.) is 349m high at its S end

and 137m high at its N end with a coral lime terrace between.

4.78 Selat Wetan, a strait separating Pulau Babar and Pulau Wetan,

is deep in the fairway and about 1 mile wide in its narrowest part.

A 6.7m shoal is on the W side of the S part of the strait about 0.5

mile off the shore of Pulau Wetan, 2.5 miles NE of the S part of

that island. A 5.9m shoal is on the E side of the S part of the

strait about 1.25 miles NE of the shoal just mentioned.

4.78 Currents, which are sometimes accompanied by a heavy

swell, set N and S through the strait.

4.79 Herlei Road (7°53'S., 129°33'E.), on the E side of

Pulau Wetan, affords comparatively safe anchorage, in 50m.

Vessels bound for Tepa during the Northwest Monsoon

frequently anchor here awaiting the opportunity to work cargo

at Tepa. Swells coming in from the open Selat Wetan are

frequently troublesome in this road.

4.79 Tepa Road (7°52'S., 129°35'E.), on the W coast of Pulau

Babar, affords the best anchorage in the vicinity during the

Southeast Monsoon. With NW winds there is sometimes considerable sea and surf on the coast, but there is no danger of

dragging unless the wind blows hard. There is room for several

vessels in the road. During the Northwest Monsoon, however,

it is better to anchor in Herlei Roads.

4.79 A reef, with of depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.25 mile NW of the

flagstaff at the village of Kampung Tepa.

4.79 Tides—Currents.—At Tepa Road, the lowest water level,

occurring in July, August and September, is 0.2m below mean

sea level; the maximum rise is about 2.5m above mean sea

level.

4.79 Directions.—Vessels should approach Tepa Road anchorage

with the flagstaff at Kampung Tepa bearing 090° and anchor in

the desired depth. Allowance should be made for tidal currents

which set N and S. When nearing the roadstead the depths decrease suddenly. It is recommended to lower the anchor with

about 50m of cable out and to approach as slowly as possible.

During the Northwest Monsoon, 81m of cable should be

veered out.

4.79 Kampung Tepa (7°52'S., 129°36'E.) (World Port Index No.

52890) is at the S part of the bight abreast Tepa Road.

4.79 A blue flag at the flagstaff signifies cargo cannot be worked

at Tepa. Vessels then ordinarily proceed to Herlei Road on the

opposite side of Selat Wetan to await favorable conditions.

4.80 Southwest coast of Pulau Babar.—The SW coast of

Pulau Babar is fringed by a narrow, rocky, and steep-to reef. A

detached reef, 0.15 mile wide and with a least depth of 4.9m, is

1.5 miles offshore and 5.25 miles WNW of the S end of Pulau

Babar. This reef seldom discolors. Anchorage can be taken, in

a depth of 50m, almost anywhere along this coast. The recommended method of anchoring is to approach the coast slowly

with about 73m of chain veered out.

4.81 South and E coasts of Pulau Babar.—Several

detached reefs with depths of 4.9 to 7.6m are close off the coast

between the villages of Kampung Ahanari and Kampung

Wakpapapi, 4.75 and 6 miles, respectively, NE of the S end of

Pulau Babar. A 6.8m reef lies next to the coast 4 miles SSE of

Kampung Ahanari. These reefs do not discolor. Another reef,

1.5 miles long and 91m wide, is 0.35 mile offshore from the

village of Kampung Letwurong and has a least depth of 6.7m.

This reef discolors and the passage between it and the coast is

clear. Anchorage can be taken close to the shore anywhere

along these coasts except in the bight in the N part of the E

coast.

4.82 North coast of Pulau Babar.—With SE winds,

anchorage can be taken N of the village of Kampung Jatoke

near the N extremity of Pulau Babar. For a distance of 4 miles

W of this anchorage the coastal reef is so narrow and steep-to

that it affords no anchorage, but beyond that and as far as the

village of Kampung Manuwui, the northernmost point of the

island, anchorage can be taken almost anywhere. Vessels

should approach slowly with the anchor veered out 55m.

Off-lying Islands off Pulau Babar

4.83 Pulau Dai (7°34'S., 129°41'E.), about 12.75 miles N

of Pulau Babar, is about 4 miles long and ranges from 0.75

mile to 1.5 miles wide. It has three summits of which the

easternmost and highest is 651m high. Anchorage can be taken

in the bight on the N coast opposite the village of Kampung

Lewa. The anchorage should be approached slowly with the

anchor veered out about 70m. The coast reef, however, is narrow and vessels are exposed to dangerous squalls, particularly

during the Southeast Monsoon. Boats can land near the village

during calm weather.

4.83 Pulau Daweloor (7°46'S., 130°04'E.) and Pulau Dawera,

about 10.5 miles NE of Pulau Babar, are about 7.5 miles long

in a NW-SE direction. The maximum elevations of the two

islands are, respectively, 293m and 334m. Both islands are

inhabited. They are separated by a narrow reef-bordered strait

with a least depth of 2.7m. Three detached shoals with depths

of 2.8 to 4.9m are about 0.5 mile S of the S end of Pulau

Dawera. A coastal reef with a depth of 1.8m near its outer end

projects more than 1 mile W from the SW end of Pulau

Dawera. Coast reefs extend into the channel from the SE extremity of Pulau Dawera and Pulau Daweloor.

4.83 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 55m, during the

Southeast Monsoon in a bight on the W side of Pulau Dawera

opposite the village of Kampung Ilmarang (7°44'S.,

131°00'E.). Approach on a SE course along the shore of the

island. The reef tongue projecting out from the SW extremity

of the island can be readily made out in good visibility.

4.83 Anchorage can also be taken, in 28 to 37m, in Watuwai

Road (7°46'S., 130°02'E.) in an opening in the shore reef at the

W end of Pulau Daweloor. The tongue of the reef is marked by

discoloration.

4.84 Pulau Masela (8°09'S., 129°52'E.), 6.5 miles SE of

Pulau Babar, is 9.5 miles long and 1 to 1.75 miles wide. It has

three summits the highest of which, near the center of the
86 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

island, is 199m high. The island is surrounded by a reef which

dries in most places and extends about 1.75 miles E from the S

end of the island. A detached 12.8m shoal is 1.25 miles offshore about midway along the E side of the island. There are

several detached reefs and shoals closer inshore on both the E

and W sides of the island. The reefs on the E side, especially

those less than 9.1m, are not as well marked by discoloration as

those on the W side.

4.84 Anchorage can be taken anywhere around the island, in

depths of 55 to 70m. Vessels sometimes anchor in an opening

in the reef on the SE side off the village of Kampung Telalora

(8°12'S., 129°50'E.) when the reefs are marked by discolored

water. During the Southeast Monsoon, however, entry is not

possible because there is too much sea at the entrance to the

opening. Anchorage can also be had in Lawawang Road, on the

W side of the island, in depths of 7.6 to 10.6m, on a narrow

bank which trends parallel to the shore and about 0.5 mile

offshore. The coastal reef extends about 0.2 mile offshore, with

occasional large rocks above water. The village of Kampung

Lawawang, surrounded by a wall and standing on a hill 24m

high, was formerly reported as visible above the coconut trees

SE of the anchorage.

Kepulauan Tanimbar

4.85 This group of islands, E of Kepulauan Sermata and

SE of Kepulauan Aru, consists of Pulau Yamdena (Jamdena),

and about 66 smaller islands fringed by steep coral bluffs.

Except for Pulau Molu, Pulau Maru, Pulau Fordate, Pulau

Laibobar, and the larger islands off the W coast of Pulau

Yamdena, the islands are low and flat. The S part of Pulau

Yamdena, N and W of Teluk Saumlaki, at the SE end of the

island, is hilly, but none of these hills are conspicuous. The

points of Pulau Yamdena as well as the numerous islands

around it, however, are useful in fixing position in this area.

4.85 Because discolored patches are frequently encountered in

relatively deep water in the vicinity of the islands and because

the reefs on the W side of Pulau Yamdena and Pulau Selaru

and in Selat Egeron seldom discolor, it is imperative to keep a

constant check on position and to pass close to the islands only

when the reefs can be sighted readily. Cyclonic storms occasionally occur in these islands.

4.85 All of the larger islands are lightly inhabited, but the density

of population varies considerably and is affected by the

migrations of the inhabitants. Good pilots can be obtained in

many of the villages. There are numerous coconut plantations

and untouched oil fields are believed to be in the interior of

Pulau Yamdena.

4.85 The islands are good radar targets at a distance of 18 miles.

Pulau Yamdena

4.86 Pulau Yamdena (Jamdena) (7°30'S., 131°30'E.), the

principal island of the Kepulauan Tanimbar group, is 64 miles

long in a NNE-SSE direction and about 24 miles wide in its

middle part. It is a relatively flat island of coral formation. The

low W coast is fronted by islets and reefs. The E coast,

indented with several small bays and fringed by reefs, is

closely backed by a number of small hills, the highest of which

is 240m high and is about at the midway point of the E coast.

Islands North of Pulau Yamdena

4.87 Pulau Molu (6°45'S., 131°32'E.) and Pulau Maru, 4

miles S, are at the N end of Kepulauan Tanimbar. A hill, 274m

high, is near the NW extremity of Pulau Molu, and another

named Keljobar Wahan, 197m high, is near the SE extremity of

the island. Lubwaan, the highest point of Pulau Maru, near the

center of the island, is a conspicuous hill, 268m high. The islet,

Pulau Kalbur, 0.75 mile N of Pulau Molu is uninhabited. The

channel separating these two islands is clear of dangers, but

there is sometimes a heavy sea on it. A lighthouse, 40m in

height, has been established (2003) on Pulau Kalbur (6°39'S.,

131°35'E.). Pulau Wayangan is at the SSW end of a shore reef

that projects out 2 miles from the S end of Pulau Molu.

4.87 There are villages around Teluk Loka and the W coast of

Pulau Molu. Coconut plantations are on both Pulau Molu and

Pulau Maru. There are many fishermen on the reef that projects

W from the SW end of Pulau Maru during favorable weather.

4.87 Anchorage can be taken during the Northwest Monsoon in

Teluk Loka, a bight on the E coast of Pulau Molu. The reef that

juts out from the N entrance is well marked by discoloration

and vessels can pass it closely. Vessels can also anchor, in 40m,

0.55 mile NW of Kampung Adodo. There is good anchorage

everywhere off the E coast of Pulau Maru, in a depth of 44m,

except off the coconut plantations on the SE point of the island.

Local knowledge is necessary.

4.87 The channel between Pulau Wayagan and Pulau Maru

affords the best route for vessels coming from NW and bound

for Ritabel Bay, which is discussed in paragraph 4.89, particularly during the Southeast Monsoon. After this passage, shelter

is also afforded by Pulau Fordate and Pulau Larat. Choppy seas

are encountered frequently in this vicinity when the wind is

blowing in a direction opposite to that of the tidal currents.

4.88 Nus Lima (6°58'S., 131°35'E.) is a group of islets on

a reef 2.5 miles long and 2 miles wide, 6 miles SE of the S end

of Pulau Maru. The reef discolors well but the shoals do not.

Only Wermatan, the largest of the islets, is inhabited, and then

only occasionally by natives working the coconut plantations.

The channel between Wermatan and the small islet Pulau

Kyabrengan, about 1 mile NW of the main body of the reef, is

unusable. A 2.7m shoal is close S of Pulau Kyabrengan.

4.88 Pulau Frinun (7°03'S., 131°34'E.) and a conspicuous rock

are on a reef 1.5 miles long and 1 mile wide 3.5 miles S of

Wermatan. This island is low, very sparsely wooded, and uninhabited. The reef is well marked by discoloration. An isolated

5.8m shoal that does not discolor is 2 miles SE of the island.

4.88 Pulau Farnusan (7°05'S., 131°39'E.) is an elongated islet

surrounded by a reef which discolors 1.5 miles off the N coast

of Pulau Yamdena and 5.5 miles SE of Pulau Frinun. Temporary huts on the island are used at times by coconut plantation

workers.

4.88 Metirotton, close off the N coast of Pulau Yamdena, is a

roughly circular reef 1.5 miles in diameter, which is usually

well marked by discolored water.

4.88 Pulau Larat (7°09'S., 131°51'E.), the W end of which is

separated from Pulau Yamdena by a narrow channel which can

only be used by small boats, is low and wooded. The island is

skirted in most places by a reef. On the reef off the N side, 2.5

miles E from the W end of the island, is Vatsori (7°06.5'S.,
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 87

Pub. 164

131°45.0'E.) a rock which from the W has the appearance of a

native canoe without masts and is a good landmark. Off the

SW side of the island is Sari Karmut, a large reef. Smaller reefs

and shoals extend 1.5 miles NW and 2.5 miles W from this

reef. The channel between this detached reef and Pulau Larat is

clear and can be navigated when the reefs can be seen.

Close off the W end of Pulau Larat is low, flat Pulau Lutur,

connected to Pulau Yamdena by a 0.4 mile wide reef extending

around the W end and along the N side of the island. Watmomal (7°08.4'S., 131°42.8'E.) is a very conspicuous rock

close of the NE extremity of Pulau Lutur. 

4.89 Ritabel Bay (7°09'S., 131°43'E.), between Pulau

Lutur and Pulau Larat, is a well-sheltered rectangular area

almost 1.5 miles long and ranging from 0.27 to 0.45 mile wide.

The houses of the village of Kampung Ritabel can be seen for a

distance of 8 miles on a clear day. The village of Kampung

Watidal is on a hill on the W side of the bay 1.25 miles NE of

Kampung Ritabel and the village of Kampung Lelinglun is

opposite Kampung Ritabel on the E end of Pulau Lutur.

4.89 Beacons, one on the edge of the reef extending from the NE

end of Pulau Lutur and the other on the edge of the reef extending NW from Kampung Watidal, mark the channel leading to

Ritabel Bay. There is a 3.2m shoal 1.5 miles offshore N of

Kampung Watidal.

4.89 Tides—Currents.—At Ritabel Bay, the highest water level

occurs in February and March; the lowest occurs in July,

August, and September. The maximums that can be expected

are, respectively, 2.5m above and 0.2m below mean sea level.

4.89 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 15m, mud, in Ritabel Bay, about midway between Kampung Ritabel and the

opposite shore of Pulau Lutur. Strong N winds send a heavy

swell into this anchorage.

4.89 The S approach to Ritabel, between Larat and Yamdena, is

only navigable by small local craft. There is a least depth of

0.6m in the fairway. 

4.90 Kampung Ritabel (7°09'S., 131°43'E.) (World Port

Index No. 52860) is on the W side of Pulau Larat and on the E

side of Ritabel Bay. A pier, from which a light is shown,

projects out to the edge of the reef from the shore abreast of the

village.

4.90 Selat Orafruan (7°05'S., 131°55'E.), a strait between Pulau

Larat and Pulau Fordate, is clear of dangers; the shore reefs on

either side are well marked by discoloration.

4.90 Pulau Fordate (7°02'S., 131°58'E.) is very hilly, with

several conspicuous peaks. Villages are on the W coast and the

S side of the island. At the village of Kampung Aweer on the

W coast near the S end of the island is a small conspicuous

church. A rocky stretch is on the W coast between the villages

of Kampung Sufanin and Kampung Adodo. A lighthouse, 40m

in height, has been established (2003) on Tanjung Waarlangier (6°59'S., 132°00'E.), the NE tip of the island. Anchorage is available, in 49m, on both the E and W coasts, except off

the rocky area mentioned above. Local knowledge is necessary.

4.90 Caution.—A shoal with two 8.2m depths and with a radius

of 1.5 miles has its center about 5.75 miles E of the NE end of

Pulau Fordate.

4.90 Pulau Nukaha (7°05'S., 131°59'E.), about 2 miles SE of

Pulau Fordate, is an islet 39m high near the W end of a drying

reef 3.5 miles long E-W and 2.75 miles wide at its E end. The

reef is well marked by discoloration.

4.90 A stranded wreck is on the N side of the reef surrounding

Pulau Nukaha.

Directions for the East Coast of Pulau Yamdena

4.91 Between September and March, the period when the

Northwest Monsoon blows hardest, it is advisable for vessels

proceeding from Selat Orafruan around Pulau Larat and the S

to Selat Egeron to pass fairly close along the E coast of Pulau

Yamdena. From the S end of Pulau Larat set course to pass E of

the Sari Karmut and Sari Karmuta, the extensive reefs S of the

middle part of Pulau Larat, and then pass at least 1 mile off the

conspicuous point on which the village of Kampung Watamuri

is situated, then keep about 2 miles offshore as far as Selat

Egeron. This course leads considerably to the W of Sari Batsir,

Sari Waturi, and Sari Kilmasa, which are parts of an off-lying

chain of reefs paralleling the Pulau Yamdena coast at a distance of 6 to 7 miles. The northernmost reef is 7 miles SE of

Kampung Watmuri and the southernmost is 11.5 miles farther

SSW. In this chain there are drying reefs and reefs with depths

of 1.8 to 9.1m. The only dangers between these reefs and the

Pulau Yamdena coast are 4.9m and 3.9m shoals, respectively,

8.75 and 12.5 miles S of Kampung Watmuri; these are seldom

marked by discoloration. A depth of 10m is between these last

two shoals. A broad reef projects from the E side of Asutuban,

an island off the SE end of Pulau Yamdena and on the N side of

the E entrance to Selat Egeron.

4.91 Vessels with local knowledge can obtain anchorage off

several of the villages between the villages of Kampung Watmuri and Kampung Tumbur, 33 miles farther S.

4.91 The river Wari Tambrian (7°47'S., 131°27'E.), discharges a

stream of muddy water into an inlet about 20 miles NNE of

Asutubun Island. Much of this water flows through the channel

between Pulau Yamdena and Pulau Mes (7°50'S., 131°26'E.),

4 miles S of the river. Therefore, this channel should only be

used when the water is clear and the reefs are plainly visible.

4.91 Caution.—A deposit of iron ore which causes a local magnetic disturbance is on the E coast of Pulau Yamdena, nearly

abreast of the reef Sari Kilmasa (7°39'S., 131°44'E.).

4.91 An 11.9m shoal lies about 2.5 miles E of Kampung Alusi.

4.92 Selat Egeron, a strait separating Pulau Selaru from

Pulau Yamdena, presents no navigational difficulties. Several

islands and points of land are useful in passing through the

strait. To vessels approaching from the W the hill at the S end

of Nusa Anggarmasa, at the W end of the strait, is conspicuous.

4.92 To vessels approaching the strait from E, the low Matkus

Island, 2 miles within the E entrance, seems at first to be a part

of Pulau Yamdena. It does not appear as an island until within

5 miles of the strait. There is a coconut plantation on Matkus

Island; due to the felling of coconut palms the aspect of the island is continually changing. Vessels coming from W approach

with the N end of Nusa Anggarmas bearing 090°; when the hill

on the S end of the island is made out, steer a S course until the

hill bears 090°, then steer for it until it is about 3 miles off;

course should then be changed to pass through the middle of the channel.
88 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

4.92 Nustabun (8°02'S., 131°12'E.), a small islet 1.25 miles NW

of Matkus, is on a bank extending SSW 1.5 miles and NNE

0.25 mile. This bank is seldom marked by discolored water.

Battjawat (8°02.7'S., 131°11.1'E.) is a rock near the S end of

this bank. Vessels crossing the strait between Saumlaki Bay

and Adaut Road should take the channel between Matkus and

Battjawat.

4.92 Saumlaki Bay (7°58'S., 131°17'E.), near the E end of Selat

Egeron, is a marked indentation in the S coast of Pulau Yamdena. Saumlaki Road, on the E side of the bay, affords safe anchorage year-round.

4.92 Saumlaki Light is shown at an elevation of 9m from a white

framework tower at the pier head. 

4.93 Kampung Saumlaki (7°59'S., 131°18'E.) (World

Port Index No. 52870) is on the E side of Saumlaki Bay. A

concrete pier, with a depth of 4.9m alongside its head, projects

out from the shores of the village. Fresh water can be obtained

from a pipe at the pier head. A beacon marks the edge of the

coastal reef 0.2 mile SW of the stone pier; about 0.75 mile S of

the same pier at the oil depot, another pier projects 60m and

has a berth at its head 20m long, with a depth of 5m alongside.

The zinc roof of a church forms a good landmark.

4.93 A light shows from the SW extremity of Astubun (8°03'S.,

131°16'E.). A yellow mast lattice mast was reported about 0.5

mile N of the light. 

4.93 Adaut Road (8°08'S., 131°06'E.), on the S side of Selat

Egeron and at the N end of Pulau Selaru, affords safe anchorage year-round. The preferred anchorage is near the pier at the

village of Kampung Adaut. A shed with a galvanized iron roof

at the head of the pier is a good mark for entering and anchoring. A shoal, with a least depth of 7.9m, is in the NW approach

to the roadstead, about 1 mile SE of Nuyanat; a shoal, with a

least known depth of 8.5m, is in the middle of the entrance of

the roadstead inlet.

4.93 Kampung Adaut (8°08'S., 131°07'E.) (World Port Index

No. 52880) is on the E side of Adaut Road. A stone pier juts

out to the edge of the shore reef just N of the village.

4.94 Pulau Selaru (8°12'S., 130°58'E.), the N shore of

which forms the S shore of Selat Egeron, is generally low. Near

the S end of the island, however, there is a hilly ridge with a

maximum elevation of 72m, and on the NW coast near Tanjung Watatutu (8°08'S., 130°56'E.), there are some inconspicuous hills.

Saumlaki—Auto-Tide Station 
Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 89

Pub. 164

4.94 A light is shown on the coast about 2 miles S of the hilly

ridge.

4.94 Anchorage.—In addition to Adaut Roads, which has been

previously described in paragraph 4.93, suitable anchorage is

afforded by Labuan Lemian and Labuan Olendir, two bights on

the NW side of Pulau Selaru, respectively, 12 and 18 miles NE

of the SW extremity of the island. Local knowledge is

necessary. The anchorage in Labuan Olendir, off the village of

Kampung Namtabung and E of Tanjung Watatutu (8°08'S.,

130°56'E.) and the reef extending 1 mile N from that point, is

particularly sheltered against W and SW winds. The coast reefs

are usually well marked by discoloration.

4.94 Directions.—Vessels coming from E and bound NW along

the W side of the Kepulauan Tanimbar group may round the

SW end of Pulau Selaru at a distance of 1 mile off and then set

a course to pass close S of the S end of Pulau Riama. This

course avoids the 10m shoal 3 miles SW of the S end of Pulau

Riama. There is a 5.9m shoal 0.5 mile NE of the N end of

Pulau Riama. The channel between Pulau Riama and the reefs

close off the W side of Pulau Selaru is deep and clear of dangers.

4.94 Caution.—An 8.3m and an 8.5m shoal are in the W approach to Labuan Olendir, about 8 and 9 miles, respectively,

WNW of Tanjung Watatutu; an 8.5m shoal is 9.5 miles W of

the same point.

4.94 An 8.5m coral patch is about 8.5 miles WSW of the SW end

of Pulau Selaru.

4.94 A 10m shoal and a 9.1m shoal are 3 and 10 miles, respectively, E of the SE end of Pulau Selaru, and two 9.1m shoals are,

respectively, 13.5 and 21.5 miles ENE of the same point.

4.94 A ridge with depths of 8.5 to 15.5m extends parallel to the

SE side of Pulau Selaru between positions about 6 miles SSE

and 10 miles SSW of the NE end of Pulau Selaru.

Off-lying Islands off the West Coast of Pulau

Yamdena

4.95 Pulau Seira (7°41'S., 131°03'E.), about 21 miles N of

the NW end of Pulau Selaru, is separated from the coast of

Pulau Yamdena by a narrow, shallow channel which is used by

small native boats. A broad reef, not very well marked by

discoloration, extends S and SW about 4.5 miles from Pulau

Seira. On the W part of this reef, about 1 mile off the SW

extremity of Pulau Seira, is Pulau Ngolin, a remarkable island

with a heavily-wooded N half and a bare S half. About midway

along the NW side of Pulau Seira is the village of Kampung

Wailutu.

4.95 Bara Sadi (7°48'S., 130°48'E.), a drying reef 9 miles WSW

of the S end of Pulau Ngolin, can generally be sighted for a

considerable distance because of the surf breaking on it.

4.95 Depths of 10 to 12.8m lie from between 8.5 miles SE to 11

miles SSW from the S end of Bara Sadi. An 11.9m shoal lies

about 2 miles W of the same spot.

4.95 Selat Yamdena (7°35'S., 131°05'E.), separating the W coast

of Pulau Yamdena from its off-lying islands, is easy to navigate

because there are numerous headlands and islands on which

bearings may be taken. Because of murky water, sighting of

reefs or shoal water should not be relied upon. Even the deep

water of the strait is often discolored by mud stirred up by the

currents. On clear days with a few clouds, the murky water

often gives the illusion of discolored water because of the

shadows of the clouds.

4.96 Pulau Sukeler (7°38'S., 130°57'E.), near the middle

of the S entrance to Selat Yamenda 2.5 miles NW of the NW

end of Pulau Seira, is 42m high and is a good mark for entering

the strait. A drying reef extends about 0.75 mile WSW from

the W side of Pulau Sukelar. Lengwati Islet is near the outer

end of this reef. A 7.6m coral shoal is 3.5 miles W of Pulau

Sukeler.

4.96 Pulau Selu, 7.5 miles NW of Pulau Seira, has two conspicuous peaks in its hilly W part, Amat Dawah and Wuru Wuru,

211m and 207m high, respectively. On the reef that projects

NW 2 miles from the NW extremity of Pulau Selu are several

islets, of which Pulau Nitu, 76m high, is the largest and is a

good landmark. Off Pulau Nitu, as well as Tanjung Metanuan,

the SW extremity of Pulau Selu, there are sometimes heavy

tide rips that raise a heavy sea.

4.96 Tides—Currents.—Seaward of Pulau Selu, tidal currents

set N and S at a maximum rate of 2 knots. Observations taken

in Selat Yamdena during July and August and the first part of

September showed a maximum drift of not more than 1 knot.

Currents in the strait increase the discoloration of the water.

4.96 Pulau Wuliaru, the largest of the islands off the W side of

Pulau Yamdena, is close E of Pulau Selu. It has several hills,

the highest, 188m high, near the center of the island, but appears to be more nearly flat than Pulau Selu. The numerous

dangers, usually marked by discoloration, around Pulau Wuliaru almost precludes any possibility of landing on the island.

4.97 Pulau Keswu (Kiswui) (7°32'S., 131°09'E.), 104m

high, about midway between Pulau Wuliaru and Pulau Yamdena, is separated from Pulau Wolas, an islet E of it, by a narrow, deep channel, clear of dangers. Close E of Pulau Wolas

are several reefs, some of which dry and form sandbanks. The

passage between these reefs and the coast of Pulau Yamdena

and that between Pulau Keswu and the edge of the foul rocky

ground mentioned above, about 1.25 miles WNW of the NW

end of Pulau Keswu, are clear of dangers. The coastal reef

extending from the E side of Pulau Wuliaru is almost always

marked by discoloration.

4.97 Nus Taram (7°29.5'S., 131°14'E.) are three small islets on a

mud bank extending from the shore of Pulau Yamdena, 4.5

miles NE of Pulau Wolas.

4.97 Selat Wotap (7°23'S., 131°11'E.), separating Pulau Wuliaru

and Pulau Wotap, provides easy access to Selat Yamdena to

vessels coming from W.

4.97 Jarngur Rual and Jarnguar Raa are two well-wooded sand

banks on separate reefs in the middle of the strait and are, respectively, 1.5 miles SSW and 2 miles SE of the SW extremity

of Pulau Wotap. Passage may be made on either side of these

sand banks. On the SW side of the strait are Pulau Natrool,

72m high, and Pulau Natraal, 52m high, respectively, 0.5 mile

E and 1.5 miles ESE of the E end of Pulau Wuliaru. A 6.7m

shoal is about 0.5 mile SE of the SE end of Pulau Natraal; a

similar shoal is 0.5 mile SE of the SE end of Jarngur Raa. Foul

ground extends a short distance NE from the NE end of Jarngur

Raa. There is a 5m shoal 2 miles N of Natrool.
90 Sector 4. The Banda Sea and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

4.97 The narrow channel between Pulau Natrool and the NE side

of Pulau Wuliaru is farther restricted by the coastal bank of

Pulau Natrool, which has extended 0.13 mile.

4.97 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents set along the axis of the

channel in Selat Wotap at a maximum rate of 1 knot.

4.97 Directions.—The recommended channel through Selat

Wotap is N of Jarngur Rual and Jarngur Raa. Approaching

from W, after sighting the SW extremity of Pulau Wotap, steer

for Jarngur Raa on a course of 132°. When the remarkable

rocky point with a rock off it, 1 mile SE of the 93m hill at the

SW end of Pulau Wotap, bears 013°, change course to 102°.

Jarngur Raa will then be well open W of Pulau Natrool. When

E edge of Jarngur Raa comes in range with the highest point of

Pulau Natraal, bearing 218°, change course to 131°. The rocky

point mentioned above will then be almost dead astern. This

course leads into Selat Yamdena. Caution should be taken to

avoid the rocks, dangerous to navigation, NW of Natrool and N

of Natraal.

4.97 Vessels using the channel leading S of Jarngur Rual and

Jarngur Raa steer in with these two islands in range bearing

097° until the W side of Pulau Natrool is in range with the E

extremity of Pulau Wuliaru bearing 194°, and then change

course to 127°. Keep on that course until the W extremity of

Pulau Natraal comes in range with the E point of Pulau Wolas,

bearing 196°, and then proceed on an easterly course into Selat

Yamdena.

4.97 Either of these channels can easily be navigated by eye when

the reefs can be made out. A detached, partly drying reef, 0.25

mile SSE of the rocky point mentioned above in the directions

for the N channel, is almost always marked by discoloration.

The channel is also subject to the same misleading discoloration of the water that was mentioned in Selat Yamdena which

was discussed above.

4.98 Pulau Wotap (7°20'S., 131°15'E.), on the W side of

the N entrance to Selat Yamdena, is hilly with a maximum

elevation of 189m near its center. On the W side are two small

bays affording good anchorage.

4.98 Pulau Laibobar (7°13'S., 131°23'E.), 7.25 miles NE of

Pulau Wotap, is very thickly wooded. A hill, 156m high, is at

its N end, but the 391m elevation at the S end of the island

dominates the entire Kepulauan Tanimbar group. On a clear

day, this can be seen from vessels on the E side of Pulau Yamdena. The S side of the island is indented by a bay affording

good anchorage. The coastal reef of this bay discolors well,

therefore there is no difficulty in entering. The channel between Pulau Ungar and Pulau Laibobar has a depth of 7.6m.

4.98 Pulau Ungar and Pulau Vulmali, 0.5 miles and 2.5 miles,

resepctively, S of Pulau Laibobar, are very thickly wooded. A

reef with several drying rocks is within 1 mile ENE of the N

end of Pulau Vulmali.

4.98 Bolu Island, close to the shore of Pulau Yamdena abreast the

S end of Pulau Laibobar, is low and wooded.

4.98 Caution.—A 3m shoal is about 0.75 mile N, a 6.7m shoal is

about 1.5 miles NW, and 7.6m shoal is about 1 mile W,

respectively, from the N end of Pulau Vulmali.

4.99 Pulau Mitak (7°11'S., 131°28'E.), which has a coconut plantation, is 3.25 miles ENE of Pulau Laibobar, and is

separated from the coast of Pulau Yamdena by a narrow

channel which is made almost impassable by many reefs which

do not show up clearly because of opaque water. A small craft

pier is on the S side of the island. A 4.1m shoal which does not

discolor is 2 miles W of the SW extremity of Pulau Mitak,

between that island and the N end of Pulau Laibobar. A rock

awash, dangerous to navigation, is 1 mile NE of the N end of

Pulau Mitak.

4.99 Karata and Kabawa are high conspicuous islets, respectively,

1.75 miles N and 2.5 miles NNW of the N end of Pulau Mitak.

Pulau Namwaan (7°07'S., 131°27'E.) and Pulau Itain, 6

miles NW of the NW end of Pulau Yamdena and 4.75 and 7.5

miles, respectively, NNE of the N end of Pulau Laibobar are

being cleared for coconut plantations and are, therefore,

constantly changing in appearance. The two islands are,

respectively, 151m and 128m high. The channel between them

is clear, but it is so narrow that it should be used only when the

reefs along its shores are clearly visible. Depths of 10.9m or

less extend more than 1 mile W and SW from the S end of

Pulau Namwaan. Depths of 18.3m or less extend about 2 miles

farther SW.

4.99 Pulau Temar (7°09'S., 131°26'E.), a low and well-wooded

coral islet, is 1.25 miles S of the S end of Pulau Namwaan. Two

10m shoal spots are within 2 miles W of Pulau Temar. These

shoals as well as the reefs around Pulau Temar do not discolor

well.

4.99 Two reefs, each with a least depth of only 0.9m, are about 1

mile apart on a N-S line 2.75 miles E of Pulau Itain. These

reefs show well.

4.99 Pulau Vatvurat (7°07'S., 131°27'E.) is separated from the

NE side of Pulau Namwaan by a clear channel 0.33 mile wide.

Off the S side of Pulau Vatvurat are two rocks, above-water, the

northernmost of which bears a striking resemblance to a

Madonna and Child.

4.99 Two reefs with depths of 0.9m lie close together about 2

miles NE of Vatvurat and are well marked by discoloration. 
Pub. 164

5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands

5.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 5 — CHART INFORMATION
93

Pub. 164

SECTOR 5 

SOUTH COAST OF IRIAN JAYA AND OFF-LYING ISLANDS

5.0 Plan.—This sector begins by describing the islands to the N

and NW of Irian Jaya, including the large Pulau Waigeo and

lesser islands, and the straits between them and the mainland.

Next, beginning at Tanjung Yamursba, the northernmost point

of Irian Jaya, and then W, the NW coast of Irian Jaya is

described to its westernmost point on Salawati. Then in an E

direction, the SW coast of Irian Jaya is described to the

Bensback River, the point dividing Irian Jaya and Papua New

Guinea. This last part of the coast includes Selat Sele, Teluk

Berau, and the many bays and rivers entering the sea along this

coast.

General Remarks

5.1 Winds—Weather.—Along the S coast of Irian Jaya

,the seasonal changes in wind and weather are the same general

character as in the Afura Sea and the Banda Sea, with the East

Monsoon predominating. During the West Monsoon there is

much rain along the coast and squalls are fairly frequent. The

West Monsoon weakens in April and the East Monsoon becomes established in May, although the winds are variable in

both months. The East Monsoon blows with much constancy

from June to November, but locally is influenced by the development of land and sea breezes. The West Monsoon prevails in

December, but it is not dependable. The seasonal distribution

of rainfall depends upon the topography, but as a rule the wet

season extends from December to March and the dry season

reaches its height in August and September. 

5.1 Along the extreme S coast in the vicinity of Port Moresby

and to the E, the West Monsoon is poorly developed and predominates only in January and February. The wind begins to

turn in March and is quite variable in April and again in

December. The velocity of the wind is highest in July and

August, when it averages 14 to 15 knots in the open sea.

5.1 The seasonal distribution of rainfall on the coasts of Irian

Jaya is quite variable, and depends to a large extent upon exposure to the monsoons. The East Monsoon is, as a rule, relatively dry except where it strikes elevated regions.

5.1 On the S coast the East Monsoon is cool and generally

agreeable, but on the N coast there is little difference between

the temperatures of the two seasons.

5.1 It is much cooler in the elevated regions of Irian Jaya,

especially at night and in the early morning. On the tops of the

highest mountains, there are snow and ice at all seasons.

5.1 The Coral Sea is a place of origin for tropical cyclones, the

majority of which cross E Australia or skirt the E coast. 

5.1 Tides—Currents.—With the exception of the tidal currents,

the surface currents in the area covered by this volume move,

generally speaking, in the direction of the prevailing monsoon.

This general movement, therefore changes semi-annually. The

actual direction of the currents is greatly influenced by the geographical locations of the various islands. They are not very

strong in the more open passages and seas.

5.1 In the Afura Sea, during the entire year, the currents set in a

SW to W direction from Torres Strait to the Timor Sea and the

Banda Sea. 

5.1 Caution.—Aids to navigation in this area are reported to be

unreliable. They may be missing, unlit, or out of position.

Islands North of Irian Jaya

5.2 Kepulauan Asia (1°03'N., 131°15'E.) consists of the

islands of Fani, Igi, and Miarin, all on a narrow reef 6.5 miles,

long in a NNW-SSW direction. The islands are low, but are

covered with tall trees. The reef projects about 0.75 mile N

from the northernmost island and 0.5 mile W from the W sides

of the islands. There are no anchorages in this group. The islands are uninhabited, but are sometimes visited by the natives

from Kepulauan Ayu. A pillar is on the W side of Pulau Miarin,

the southernmost island. The channel between Kepulauan Asia

and Kepulauan Ayu is considered to be free from dangers.

5.2 Kepulauan Ayu (0°30'N., 131°07'E.), about 22 miles S of

Kepulauan Asia, consists of almost 20 islets on two extensive

reefs separated by a 1 mile-wide deep and clear channel, free

of known dangers.

5.2 Pulau Aju, the largest of the group, is near the E end of the S

and smaller reef. The island, with several villages, has a maximum elevation of 106m in its NW part. Ur Babo, two small uninhabited islets on the W part of the reef about 4 miles WNW

of Pulau Aju, are covered with coconut palms.

5.2 Mios Kuan, the southernmost islet on the large N reef, is a

sand bank covered with coconut palms. A conspicuous plumeshaped casuarina tree is at the S end of the islet and a small

shrub-covered islet is off the N end. A village is on Mios Kuan.

Mios Ros is a small round tree-covered islet on the E edge of

the reef about 1 mile E of the N end of Mios Kuan.

5.2 A lagoon in the central part of the N reef is entered through a

narrow channel that leads in from the W side of the reef. On

the N side of the entrance to this channel is a group of black

stones which cover only for a short time during exceptionally

HW. A vessel 55m long and with a draft of 3.4m has entered

the lagoon. There is a detached 1.8m reef, barely marked by

discoloration, on the S side of the entrance and a 4m patch in

the middle of the channel about 1.25 miles within the entrance.

Temporary anchorage may be taken in the entrance to the channel, but the current there is strong. A more secure anchorage

without strong currents is, in 33m, just S of the inner end of the

channel. Local knowledge is necessary. The flood current in

the entrance channel has a maximum strength of 5 knots. Slack

water is of short duration, especially during spring tides. Vessels proceed with the reef in sight, conning from aloft. Ordinarily the edges of the reefs are clearly visible, but there are several reefs and rocks along the channel; some of these dangers

do not discolor well.

5.3 Pulau Abdon (0°30'N., 131°07'E.), in the central part

of the reef on the W side of the lagoon, has a maximum ele-
94 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

vation of 90m. It has been practically stripped of trees and is

used by the natives for the cultivation of a type of beet, one of

their dietary staples. There are a few houses and coconut palms

on the S side of the island. Pulau Reni and Pulau Ruton, N of

the lagoon, about 5.5 miles NE of Pulau Abdon, are two low islands on which there are coconut plantations and several

houses. In the central part of each of these islands there is a

conspicuous square tree. Pulau Kanobe, on the NW part of the

reef N of the entrance to the lagoon, is 61m high and entirely

covered with trees and is uninhabited. Mios Mandung, 1.75

miles NNW of Pulau Kanobe, is partly sandy and partly rocky.

The sandy portion is covered with coconut palms among which

are houses.

5.3 Tides—Currents.—In the vicinity of Pulau Aju, the lowest

water that can be expected, occurring in June or July and December or January, is 1m below mean sea level; the highest

tide, occurring at all semidiurnal spring tides, is 0.7m above

mean sea level. Sometimes the prevailing meteorological conditions are such as to cause a fall of as much as 1.2m below

mean sea level.

5.3 Currents were observed to set strongly in a W direction,

especially through the channel separating the two reefs of

Kepulauan Ayu. No surf was observed on the reefs. According

to the natives, the Northwest Monsoon causes a prevailing E

current which breaks strongly on the reefs.

Budd Islet (Moff) (0°32'N., 130°44'E.), about 20 miles NW

of Pulau Aju, is low, covered with trees, and uninhabited. The

islet has been reported to be a good radar target at a distance of

16 miles.

5.3 Caution.—Caution must be exercised in approaching Budd

Islet, Kepulauan Ayu, and Kepulauan Asia. When the sun is

low and the sea calm the edges of the reefs cannot be seen. Further, the reefs rise so steeply that soundings give little warning

of approach to them. The reefs dry only at LW springs.

Islands Northwest of Irian Jaya

5.4 A chain of islands, the westernmost of which is Pulau

Sayang, described in paragraph 2.85, extends NW for 40 miles

from off the W end of Pulau Waigeo.

5.4 Pulau Wayag (0°10'N., 130°03'E.), Pulau Stephanie, Pulau

Quoy, Pulau Coquille, and Pulau Uranie, and the other islands

of this chain are rocky with an average elevation of about

198m. The islands are uninhabited except for occasional turtle

hunters. The islands are heavily infested with mosquitoes.

Many small detached rocks are around these islands. A 4.9m

shoal marked by discoloration is 1 mile S of the SW end of

Pulau Wayag, and a 7.6m shoal which does not discolor is 1

mile farther S. A 9.1m shoal which discolors well is 1.75 mile

S of Pulau Stephanie. The tidal currents in the vicinity of these

islands are strong, particularly during spring tides.

5.4 The channel between this group of islands and Pulau Kawe

is wider and easier to navigate at night than is Selat Bougainville, the passage S of Pulau Kawe. Pulau Deem, a small

wooded islet, 52m high, on the S side of the W entrance to this

channel and 1.25 miles off the NW end of Pulau Kawe, is a

good landmark. Two shoal patches, barely above water, are

0.75 mile off the N coast of Pulau Kawe, 2.25 and 3.75 miles E

of Pulau Deem; they usually break. Currents run through the

channel with considerable strength and strong tide rips are

frequently encountered W of Pulau Deem.

5.4 Directions.—Vessels approaching the passage between

Pulau Wayag and Pulau Kawe from W should steer for the SE

point of Pulau Uranie on a bearing of 081°, then, when the NE

point of Pulau Kawe bears S, alter course to E. Do not approach Pulau Kawe closer than 2.5 miles.

5.4 Pulau Kawe (0°04'S., 130°08'E.), the largest island NW of

Pulau Waigeo, has a very irregular outline. Its N part is very

heavily wooded, but the reddish-colored hilly S section is only

sparsely wooded. The highest point of the island, near the

center of its main part is 717m high. The island is reported to

be a good radar target at a distance of up to 30 miles. Two

inlets penetrate the E side of the island for a distance of about

1.75 miles. Several rocky islets are off the E side of the island.

An islet about 1.25 miles SE of the easternmost point of Pulau

Kawe extends in a SE direction in Selat Bougainville, with a

reef at its outer end. Pulau Balabalak, 1.75 miles W of Pulau

Kawe, has several low grass-covered hills. There are several

rocks between the two islands.

5.5 Selat Bougainville (0°08'S., 130°12'E.), a strait

between the NW coast of Pulau Waigeo and the island SE of

Pulau Kawe, is generally deep, but several shoal patches,

including a 9.1m shoal and a 6.7m shoal, 8 miles SW and 9

miles SSW, respectively, from the summit of Pulau Kawe, are

at the W end. Farther E, on the N side of the channel, 5 miles

NE of the 6.7m shoal and 4.5 miles S of the summit on Pulau

Kawe, are two above-water rocky patches. The tidal currents

running over the uneven depths cause strong overfalls and

eddies. In the narrower parts of the strait currents frequently

attain a rate of 3 knots.

5.5 The best route for vessels coming to the strait from S is

through the channel between the islands of Pulau Ju and Pulau

Minyafuin.

5.5 When approaching from W, after leaving the strait between

Pulau Gebe and Pulau Ju from a position about 4 miles S of

Pulau Ju, steer for the summit of Pulau Batanpele on a course

of about 104°. This will lead about 3 miles S of the 5.8m shoal

SSW of Pulau Kawe. Then alter course to 054°, steering for the

high island of Pulau Me. On this course Tanjung D’Entrecasteaux is approached to about 1 mile. When the cape is abeam,

steer 036° for the highest islet of Kepulauan Seprang. There is

a 0.5m shoal 1.25 miles N of Pulau Me. Pass S of these rocky

islets and N of the islets of Kepulauan Loh Loh.

Pulau Waigeo

5.6 Pulau Waigeo (0°10'S., 131°00'E.), lying NW of the

W end of Irian Jaya, consists almost entirely of hills and

mountains which rise steeply from the sea. The highest elevations are on the N side of the island. Buffalo Horn (0°05'S.,

130°45'E.), a 958m mountain peak about midway along the N

coast is a good landmark, as is Serodjil, 939m high and 14

miles W. Teluk Mayalibit, a bay entered on the S side of the

island, nearly divides the island in half. The island, covered

with a dense forest, has a hot and moist climate.

5.6 The only place on the island that is visited frequently by vessels is Saonek Road (0°28'S., 130°45'E.), about midway along

the S coast of the island. The only place where good water can
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 95

Pub. 164

be obtained is Teluk Fofak (0°02'S., 130°44'E.), on the N side

of the island.

Pulau Waigeo—West and Southwest Coasts

5.7 These parts of the coast are extremely irregular and

are characterized by numerous moderately high mountains

with peculiar shapes. Gunung Meja besar (Groote Tafelberg)

(0°14'S., 130°19'E.), the highest elevation in the W part of the

island, 6 miles E of Tanjung Selpele, the W extremity of Pulau

Waigeo, is 486m high. Waisilip, 310m high and 3.3 miles ESE

of Gunung Meja besar, is conspicuous when seen from SW.

Gunung Puri (Kasteelberg), 326m high and 5.5 miles E of

Waisilip, is hard to make out, but when identified is a good

mark.

5.7 Between Pulau Pef (0°26'S., 130°26'E.) and Tanjung

Manare (0°16'S., 130°19'E.), the SW coast of Pulau Waigeo

forms a large bight. Teluk Waisai is in the NE part of this bight,

and Teluk Warparim, an indentation in the N shore of Pulau

Gam, is in the SE part of the bight. Both of these bays afford

good anchorage and, except for the reefs and shoals close

along their shores, are clear of dangers. A channel close along

the shore of Pulau Waigeo E of Tanjung Manare leads to Teluk

Waisai; a channel close around the NW extremity of Pulau

Gam provides access to Teluk Warparim.

5.7 Vessels must exercise caution in navigating the abovementioned channels as well as those among the islands in the

bight. The use of the chart is essential. Good anchorage is

available off Kampung Waisai, at the head of Teluk Waisai.

Kampung Waiwoom, the only other village on the SW coast of

Pulau Waigeo, is about 4 miles SSE of Kampung Waisai.

5.7 Directions.—Approaching from Selat Bougainville, steer

120° for the peak on Pulau Biantsyi-besar. When Pulau Manare

is abeam, steer for the S point of the headland N of Pulau

Biantsyi-kecil until Pulau Biantsyi-besar peak bears 189°, then

alter course for the hilltop on Pulau Gemien bearing 102°. A

sheltered anchorage can be found N of Pulau Gemien behind

the small island lying N of that island.

5.7 Approaching Teluk Waisai from SW, steer for the NW point

of Pulau Gemien bearing 050°.

5.7 Vessels bound for Teluk Warparim can approach Pulau Pef

and Tanjung Ombrab closely. Leaving the bay and bound NW,

an inner fairway can be followed. Keep the summit of Pulau

Biantsyi-besar in range 307.5° with the middle of Pulau Peniki.

When the E point of Pulau Yeben (0°29'S., 130°21'E.) bears

220.5°, alter course to 349° for Tanjung Waisai. Approach the

latter point until Tanjung Manare bears 280° until the peak of

Pulau Biatsyi-besar is abeam, then alter course for the N point

of Pulau Ronsuar bearing 258.5°. When Pulau Manare is

passed, the archipelago can be left for Selat Bougainville without further difficulty.

Pulau Waigeo—Off-lying Islands

5.8 Between Tanjung Selepele and the large hilly island

of Pulau Gam there are many small islands and rocks. Among

the larger of these islands are Pulau Batanpele (0°18'S.,

130°13'E.) and Pulau Minyaifun, respectively, 4.5 and 7 miles

S of Tanjung Selpele. Pulau Batangpele may be identified by

its 368m summit. Pulau Ju, 1.75 miles W of Pulau Minyaifun

and separated from it by a deep channel, is low. Two shoal

patches with depths of 6.7 and 10m are, respectively, 2.5 and

1.75 miles NW of Pulau Ju. About 5.5 miles SSW of the S end

of Pulau Ju is a 9.1m shoal. SE of this last group of islands is a

group of small, low, coral islands including Pulau Yasbekar

(Fwojo) (0°24'S., 130°13'E.), Pulau Arar-besar (Mios Ararbesar), Pulau Tsiep (Pulau Jef), and the Mutus Islands. Another

group of islands is NE of the Mutus Islands; one of these,

Pulau Biantsyi-besar, has a conspicuous peak, 136m high.

5.8 The drying reef on the N side of Pulau Biantsyi-besar has been

reported to extend 0.3 mile from shore. Passage between Pulau

Biantsyi-besar and its surrounding islands should be avoided

because the area has not been fully surveyed.

5.8 Pulau Gemien (0°19'S., 130°30'E.), E of the last group and

close to the shore of Pulau Waigeo, has a number of hills with a

maximum height of 226m. These hills aid in identifying it at a

considerable distance.

5.9 Pulau Jeben (0°29'S., 130°21'E.) and Pulau Apibok

are two small rocky islets 5.5 miles WNW of the SW extremity

of Pulau Gam. A drying reef is between the two islets, and

several rocks extend out SW from the W end of Pulau Jeben. A

2.1m shoal is about 1 mile W of Pulau Jeben. A 5m shoal is

located 3 miles ESE of the E side of Pulau Jeben.

5.9 The only permanent village on the islands of this group is on

the N side of Pulau Minyaifun. Local knowledge is necessary.

There is anchorage, in 25m sand, off the village. The anchorage can be reached either from E or W by proceeding along the

shore of Pulau Minyaifun at a distance of 183m.

5.9 Tides—Currents.—The highest water level that can be expected at the Mutus Islands occurs in May or June and November or December and is 0.7m above mean sea level. The lowest

level to be expected is 0.4m below mean sea level.

5.10 Teluk Alyu (Aljoei) (0°10'S., 130°18'E.), penetrating

the W end of Pulau Waigeo for about 12 miles, is very irregular

in shape. There are three large islands and several smaller

islands in the entrance to the bay. There are two entrance

channels, one N and one S of this group of islands. Tanjung

D’Entrecasteaux is the W extremity of the small westernmost

island of the group. Tanjung Selpele, the S entrance point to

Teluk Alyu, is backed by a conspicuous 425m hill. The S

entrance, between Tanjung D’Entrecasteaux and Tanjung Selpele is narrowed to some extent by a drying reef projecting 0.6

mile NW from Tanjung Selpele and by a 3.9m shoal on the N

side, but the channel itself is clear. In the N entrance channel

are two 5.8m shoals and, farther in, a 12.8m shoal.

5.10 The inner part of the bay consists of several irregular arms

that are almost landlocked. The channel leading from the outer

bay to the inner bay is divided into two narrow passages by

along narrow island. A chain of small islets and rocks lies

about 0.5 mile off and parallel to the NW side of this island.

The N passage has a least width of about 0.2 mile and a least

mid-channel depth of 5.9m. A rocky shoal extends 0.3 mile off

the coast of Pulau Waigeo directly N of the NE point of the

narrow island. The S passage is wider at its W end and has the

same least depth, but several rocks at its E end restricts its

width. A 3.7m shoal is about 0.25 mile N of the small island in

the center of the lower inner bay. The shores of the outer bay
96 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

are steep and rocky with sandy patches in places. The chart is

the best guide in entering the outer bay. Except for the small

village of Kampung Selpele, near the point of the same name

on the S side of the entrance to the outer bay, and another village on the N entrance, there are no inhabitants in the vicinity of

the bay.

5.10 Directions.—The S entrance between Tanjung D’Entrecasteaux and Tanjung Selpele is the easier of the two. Enter the

bay on a course of 098° with the southernmost of the Alyu Islands in range with the S point of the southernmost island in

the entrance to the inner part of Teluk Alyu. This point may be

rounded closely. The Alyu Islets are the chain of small islets

close off the W part of the long unnamed island dividing the

entrance to the inner bays into two channels.

5.10 The inner bays are reached either by the passage N of the

long unnamed island or by the passage S of it. The S passage is

a long winding channel with a least mid-channel depth of

11.9m. There are no off-lying reefs. The E end is about 0.2

mile wide in the fairway.

5.10 Vessels using the N passage should steer 095° for the small

islet NE of the long unnamed island. As soon as the NE point

of the long unnamed island bears 135°, alter course hard to

starboard for that point for not more than 91m, then turn hard

to port, setting a course of approximately 104° midway between that point and the small islet mentioned above.

5.10 Vessels departing by the N passage should keep in the

middle of the passage between the NE point of the long unnamed island and the small islet NE of it on course 282°.

Straight ahead is a small hilltop on the large 248m summit at

the outer part of the bay. This hilltop is S of and somewhat

lower than the 248m summit. When the NE point of the long

unnamed island bears 135°, turn hard to starboard on a course

of 315°. Follow this course for about 91m, then turn hard to

port and proceed on a course of 275°, with the small islet that is

in the N entrance to the inner bay bearing 095° astern. The

route should have a least depth of 18.3m.

5.10 From the inner bay a deep and clear passage leads into the

spacious N bay. The middle inlet of this bay reaches to within

about 0.3 mile of the head of Teluk Saripa on the N coast of

Pulau Waigeo.

5.10 Anchorage.—The outer part of the bay affords anchorage,

in 42 to 55m. The inner part of the bay and the bay N of it

affords excellent anchorage, in 26 to 33m.

5.10 Pulau Me (0°07'S., 130°15'E.), off the NW extremity of

Pulau Waigeo 1.5 miles NW of the N entrance to Teluk Alyu,

is 233m high. Drying reefs extend off the several points of the

island. A clear passage leads between Pulau Me and Pulau

Waigeo, but there are frequently heavy tide rips in its narrowest

part. A drying rock is 0.75 mile N of Pulau Me and a depth of

about 0.45m is close N of this rock.

Pulau Waigeo—North Coast

5.11 Except for the shores of the bays this coast is very

rocky. In some places the hills rise almost vertically from the

water’s edge. Most of the inlets along the coast afford suitable

anchorage; the most sheltered is Teluk Fofak, which is

discussed in paragraph 5.12. Between Tanjung Bomasi (Hoek

Lamarche) (0°10'S., 131°18'E.), the NE extremity of the island,

and Tanjung Saobasar (0°05'S., 131°10'E.), about 10 miles

NW, there are no anchorages. This stretch of coast is low but it

is backed by rather high hills. Tanjung Bomasi is low but can

be recognized by Mount Pupri, 262m high and close S of the

point. The more conspicuous elevations along this coast were

described under the general description of Pulau Waigeo in

paragraph 5.6.

5.11 Winds—Weather.—The winds of the Southeast Monsoon

frequently blow with a force of 7 or 8 over the mountains of

this coast, withtheir full strength occurring during part of the

night and in the forenoon.

5.11 The principal inlets between the W end of the island and

Teluk Fofak are Teluk Mane Tep, Teluk Wunoh, Teluk Saripa,

and Teluk Arago. Teluk Mane Tep is an open bay E of Pulau

Me. Teluk Wunoh, separated from Teluk Mane Tepby a

steeply-rising tongue of high land, is an open inlet and is

fronted by Pulau Wunoh, 106m high, near which are several

rocks, some above water.

5.11 Teluk Saripa (0°07'S., 130°22'E.), 5.5 miles E of Pulau Me,

is a large inlet that penetrates the island for 3.5 miles, and, with

the N arm of Teluk Alyu, cuts nearly through the W part of the

island. On the N side of the entrance is Pulau Sipsipa, from

which a reef with rocks extends NW 0.75 mile. A similar reef

extends in a NW direction from the W entrance point of the

bay. Some small islets with extending reefs are near the head of

the bay.

5.11 There is a village on the W side of Teluk Saripa, about 0.5

mile S of the W entrance point, and another at the head of a

small inlet on the E side of the bay, about 1.5 miles SSE of the

E entrance point.

5.12 Teluk Arago (0°03'S., 130°33'E.), 11 miles E of

Teluk Saripa, is open to the N; in its S part there are two inlets.

An island about midway between the entrance points has a

reef, with several rocks extending about 0.3 mile to the E.

Pulau Schun is off the W entrance point to the bay.

5.12 Caution.—Kepulauan Seprang, a group of islets, the highest

and westernmost of which is 38m high, is on the W side of the

N entrance to Selat Bougainville, 5.5 miles NNE of Pulau Me.

Kepulauan Loh Loh consists of six small, rocky islets 6 miles E

of Kepulauan Seprang. Both of these island groups are good

landmarks.

5.12 Teluk Fofak (0°02'S., 130°44'E.) is entered between Tanjung Forrest and Tanjung Rotsige. About 0.25 mile NNW of

Tanjung Rotsige are some beehive-shaped rocky islets. A

14.6m shoal is in the middle of the entrance to the bay, and foul

ground, with Lelede Rocks, extends 0.35 mile from the E shore

a short distance within Tanjung Rostige. The entrance channel

has a least width of 0.3 mile and depths of 37 to 55m. A reef

with an islet projects 0.4 mile NW from a point on the S shore

of the bay facing the inner end of the entrance channel. A

waterfall is on the N shore of the bay about 1 mile E of the

inner end of the entrance channel. Good fresh water can be

taken here; about 91m of hose is needed. The shore abreast the

waterfall can be approached closely. A village with a mosque is

at the head of the bay; it is fronted by a wide mud bank.
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 97

Pub. 164

5.13 Pulau Manuran (0°02'N., 130°53'E.), 10 miles ENE

of Teluk Fofak and 1.5 miles off the coast of Pulau Waigeo, has

a flat central summit 298m high. A 4.9m reef is about 0.75

mile S of the S extremity of the island.

5.13 Pulau Lawak (0°01'S., 130°57'E.) is 3 miles SE of Pulau

Manuran. A channel, with depths of 12.8 to 16.4m, and a navigable width of 0.2 mile between the reefs on either side

separates Pulau Lawak from Pulau Waigeo. A 5m patch lies in

the middle of the channel on its NE end.

5.13 Between Lawak and Tanjung Wariai, 5.5 miles E, anchorage

may be obtained during the South Monsoon in any required

depth. 

5.13 Teluk Kabarei (0°03'S., 130°58'E.), SE of Pulau Lawak,

affords anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon. A pier,

which dries, projects from the shore abreast the village of

Kabarai on the SE side of the bay. 

5.13 Directions.—Approaching Teluk Kabarei from W, proceed

through the wide and safe passage between Pulau Waigeo and

Pulau Manuran, avoiding the 4.9m reef S of the latter. Keep to

the Pulau Waigeo shore in the narrow passage between Pulau

Lawak and Pulau Waigeo. When passed the narrow elbow of

this passage, bring the S point of Pulau Lawak astern bearing

253°. Proceed on this course, 073°, until the E point of Pulau

Lawak is abeam, then alter course to starboard for the anchorage in Teluk Kabarei. A good anchorage for small vessels is in

5.8 to 7.3m E of the three islets at the head of the bay.

5.14 Teluk Boni (0°03'S., 131°03'E.), at Tanjung Wariai,

5.75 miles E of Pulau Lawak, the coast line turns sharply S for

2.5 miles and then, forming a right angle, turns again to the E.

Fronting the bight thus formed is Teluk Boni, low, but covered

with high trees. A wide drying reef projecting E 1.25 miles and

NW 1.5 miles extends out from the E and N sides of the island.

There is a village on the NW side of the island.

5.14 Directions.—Approaching Teluk Boni from NNW, keep to

the Pulau Waigeo side of the fairway. When W of Pulau Boni

keep in mid-channel and proceed to the anchorage S of Pulau

Boni. To leave to the E bring Bombedari Islet ahead bearing

113.5°. When the E side of Pulau Boni bears 349°, turn to port

and steer midway between the large drying reefs.

5.14 Vessels approaching from E should bring the S point of

Pulau Boni ahead bearing 270°. Keep this course until the

middle of Bombedari Islet bears 205°, then follow the reverse

of the directions given above.

5.15 Bombedari Islet (0°04'S., 131°06'E.), with a drying

reef extending N for about 0.5 mile, is nearly 1.5 miles SE of

Pulau Boni. There is a wide channel on the W and S sides of

Pulau Boni, but the latter, entered from the E, between Pulau

Boni and Bombedari Islet, is the better channel. The channel

between Pulau Boni and the coast of Waigeo W, affords good

anchorage over a bottom of mud and sand. In the harbor, about

0.5 mile S of Pulau Boni, is an area with numerous reefs and

rocks. A channel separates Bombedari Islet from the shore of

Pulau Waigeo, but there are several dangerous boulders in it

and a 0.9m patch NW of Bombedari.

5.15 A 5.5m shoal is reported about three miles NNW of Tanjung

Wariai.

Pulau Waigeo—South Coast

5.16 This section of the coast between Tanjung Imbikwan (0°23'S., 131°15'E.), the SE extremity of the island and

the SW extremity of Pulau Gam, is indented by two large bays,

Teluk Mayalibit and Teluk Kabui. A chain of reefs, shoals, and

small islets paralleling the coast at an average distance of a

little over 2 miles extends from the E end of Pulau Mansuar, S

of Pulau Gam, to a position abreast of Tanjung Imbikwan and

then NE to Tanjung Momfafa, 7.75 miles NE of Tanjung

Imbikwan. Shoal patches of 5.9 to 9.1m are reported up to 7

miles E of Tanjung Momfafa, the E extremity of Pulau Waigeo.

It has been reported that depths in the vicinity of the 5.9m

shoal are less than charted. Between this chain of dangers and

the coast of Pulau Waigeo there is a deep channel which can be

used when the reefs and shoals can be easily distinguished. The

preferred course on this inside channel leads close along the

shore. Off the entrance to Teluk Mayalibit there is an opening

in the off-lying reefs. Close inside this opening is an unmarked

3.2m shoal which seldom discolors. Abreast the village of

Kampung Wakre, 5.5 miles WNW of Tanjung Imbikwan, the

off-lying dangers recede toward the shore to such an extent as

to make it absolutely necessary for vessels to be able to see the

reefs. A stone, which cannot always be seen, is 0.75 mile SW

of the village.

5.17 Memyai Islet (0°22'S., 131°11'E.), 3.5 miles W of

Tanjung Imbikwan, is a 134m wooded hill and is a good mark

for entering the inner channel through the opening WSW of

that islet. Pulau Wayam, 1 mile S of Tanjung Imbikwan, is

quite low, but is made conspicuous by its high trees and is a

good mark for vessels rounding the E side of Pulau Waigeo.

Tanjung Imbikwan, backed by a 490m elevation, is also conspicuous.

5.17 Teluk Mayalibit (0°21'S., 130°56'E.), entered from the S

coast at a position 18 miles W of Tanjung Imbikwan, extends

in a NW direction nearly across Pulau Waigeo and reaches to

within 1.75 miles of Teluk Fofak on the N coast. Tidal currents

and tide rips in the entrance are very strong and vessels over

91m long are advised not to enter. It is advisable to wait for the

turning of the tide before entering. The tide turns 3 hours

before or after HW at Saonek. The currents in the narrows

attain a maximum rate of 5 knots, and in the wider, southern

part, rates of 3 to 4 knots have been recorded. In the narrow

parts eddies are formed and along the shores there are countercurrents. Vessels are advised to anchor before entering and

then proceed after observation of the current. 

5.17 Locally it is reported to rain often in August and September

and during these months the mountains are often clouded.

5.17 Directions.—The following general directions should assist

in passage of the channel through the strait.

5.17 A mid-channel course of about 308° should be steered for

the first mile through the strait; then the point on the W side of

the channel, about 2 miles NW, should be brought into line

with the point beyond it on the opposite side of the channel

bearing 330°, and kept in line for another mile, after which the

W shore should be followed at a distance of 0.13 mile until the

point on the E shore is abeam. There is a 1.8m shoal just outside the strait entrance. A mid-channel course should then be

held to and through the narrows, which is less than 0.2 mile
98 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

wide, and where the channel turns abruptly W. Past the narrows

the channel is clear of shoals to Pulau Manil (0°18.3'S.,

130°54.0'E.), which should be passed on the N side on

entering, and on its S side when leaving the bay due to the tidal

stream disturbances in this vicinity.

The depths in the bay gradually shoal toward its head and

there are generally depths of 9.1 to 24m over most of the bay

within the entrance. The entrance itself is less than 183m wide

in the fairway in places and is quite tortuous, but depths are

10.9m or more over the recommended track. It is reported that

a vessel drawing 5.9m can proceed to nearly all parts of the

bay. The bottom is mainly soft mud. The chief off-lying dangers are a 1.8m shoal and a 6.4m shoal about 0.75 mile E and 2

miles ESE, respectively, from the W entrance point to the bay.

A reef, surrounded by shoal water, is about 2.25 miles inside

the entrance on the E side of the channel.

5.17 A moderate speed should be maintained in the vicinity of

Pulau Manil in order to overcome the effects of the current. In

entering, after passing the narrows in the vicinity of the same

islet give its NW point a wide berth when the tide is setting out.

5.17 There are small islets in the narrow channel about 1.5 and 2

miles NW of the NW extremity of Pulau Manil.

5.17 Small vessels intending to anchor in the vicinity of the

village of Pitsjor should first pass N of Pulau Manil, then turn

around that islet and pass between it and the E end of Pulau

Waiwah, then proceed to anchorage.

5.17 The narrow Mulu Bayong, separating Pulau Waiwah from

the coast SW is recommended only for shallow-draft vessels. A

river discharging into the middle of the passage frequently carries debris into the passage, causing obstructions to navigation.

5.18 Saonek Road (0°28'S., 130°45'E.) consists of Pulau

Saonek-kecil and Pulau Saonek-besar, two islets off the S coast

of Pulau Waigeo about 11.5 miles SW of the entrance to Teluk

Mayalibit. Pulau Saonek-kecil, the smaller NE islet, is wooded

and is 71m high. Pulau Saonek-besar is well-wooded and is

45m high near its SE end. A village is on its NW side. The islet

is fringed by a drying reef extending nearly 0.25 mile from its

SW side. A reef with a depth of 3m is 1.5 miles NW of Pulau

Saonek-besar. The reef and the fringing reef on the SW side are

marked by discoloration. A shoal with a least depth of 3.6m is

about 3 miles E of Pulau Saonek-besar.

5.18 Tides—Currents.—At Saonek Roads anchorage, the maximum rise and fall of tide that can be expected are, respectively,

0.6m above and 0.6m below mean sea level. Strong currents

may be encountered around the island.

5.18 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 29m, sand, NW of

Pulau Saonek-besar, on the axis of the main pier of the village.

Vessels may anchor closer to the island, but the tidal currents

are strong and it is advisable to run a line to the shore if anchoring farther in shore.

5.19 Kampung Saonek (0°28'S., 130°47'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53040), on the beach on the NW side of Pulau

Saonek-besar, is the only place of commercial significance on

Pulau Waigeo. Jungle products from this area are collected

here for export. Two small boat piers and a larger pier for sailing craft front the village.

5.19 Teluk Kabui (0°22'S., 130°38'E.) is a wide inlet in the S

coast of Pulau Waigeo NW of Saonek Road anchorage. Pulau

Gam closes off the greater part of the otherwise open section of

the inlet. East of Pulau Gam is an entrance channel 1.75 mile

wide. Pulau Ura, an island 2 miles inside the entrance, is 126m

high. The channel W of this island is safe and deep. Vessels

may encounter strong currents in the entrance channel. Anchorage can be taken anywhere in the bay. Pulau Myanef, an

islet in the NW part of the bay, fronts Teluk Sesil, a small

comparatively shallow arm of Teluk Kabui. There are several

small villages in Teluk Kabui. Among them are Kampung Ura,

on the islet of the same name; Kampung Warai, on the N side

of Pulau Myanef; and Kampung Menyaifun, on the N shore of

Teluk Kabui.

5.19 Selat Kabui (0°26'S., 130°33'E.), a strait separating Pulau

Gam and Pulau Waigeo, leads from Teluk Warparim into the

SW part of Teluk Kabui. It is a very narrow channel with a

least depth of 1.2m and can be used only by small craft with

local knowledge. The tidal stream in the strait sometimes

attains a rate of 4 knots, causing tide rips and eddies.

5.20 Pulau Gam (0°30'S., 130°35'E.) has high steep

coasts. The highest point on the island, a hill 405m high, is 3

miles W of Tanjung Jenanas, the E extremity of the island.

Another hill, 296m high with another peak on its S side, is 2.5

miles S of the highest point. These two hills are good

landmarks when seen from E and SE. The island is not very

conspicuous when seen from SW. Two inconspicuous islets,

Friwin and Friwinbonda, each 10m high, are close off the E

end of Pulau Gam. Pulau Camphuys, an islet 2 miles SE of

Friwinbonda, is 42m high, rocky, and covered with vegetation.

Pulau Kerupiar, a rock about 10m high, is close off the coast of

Pulau Gam, 2.5 miles SW of Friwinbonda. Several reefs and

shoal spots in the channel between Pulau Gam and Pulau

Mansuar do not discolor well. The currents in this channel are

strong. Only small vessels can use the small bays on the S and

W sides of Pulau Gam.

5.20 Pulau Yanggelo is an islet off the SW extremity of Pulau

Gam; a 3.2m shoal is 0.5 mile W of Tanjung Ngan, the W extremity of that islet.

Selat Dampier

5.21 Selat Dampier (0°37'S., 130°45'E.), the strait between Pulau Waigeo and Pulau Batanta, has several channels.

The main channel leads close S of Pulau Mansuar, Pulau Kri,

and Pulau Koh and N of Pulau Augusta and Pulau Duiven.

Another channel leads along the S side of the bank on which

Pulau Augusta and Pulau Duiven lie. A third channel is between the N side of Pulau Batanta and the chain of reefs and

islets to the N. A bank of soundings which vary considerably

and extending across Selat Dampier connects Pulau Batanta

and Pulau Waigeo. A chain of reefs and shoals, on which are

Pulau Augusta, Pulau Duiven, Pulau Jerief, and Kepulauan

Tapok (Mansfield Islands), and through which the two S

channels lead, extends in an ESE direction from a position

about 2 miles W of Pulau Augusta to Karang Batanta, a distance of more than 30 miles.

5.21 Tides—Currents.—The character of the tides and the rise

and fall of tide in Selat Dampier are essentially the same as at

Saonek Road, which has been discussed earlier in paragraph

5.18.
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 99

Pub. 164

5.21 Vessels off the W entrance to Selat Dampier, between Tanjung Soos (1°10'S., 129°58'E.), marked by a light with racon at

the E extremity of Pulau Kofiau, and Tanjung Mabo (0°56'S.,

130°23'E.), the SW extremity of Pulau Batanta, during the

months between September and April, will usually encounter a

S current which is considerably influenced by the direction and

force of the wind. Between May and August, the current in this

vicinity sets in a N or NW direction. During the turning periods

of the monsoons there is scarcely any current in this vicinity.

5.21 At the height of the Northwest Monsoon, in the narrow part

of the strait, between Pulau Duiuen and Pulau Jerief, the ebb

current sets ENE for 6 to 8 hours at a rate of 4 to 5 knots at

springs, and 1 to 3 knots at neaps. The flood current sets SW

for 3 or 4 hours but is weak. At the height of the Southeast

Monsoon, the flood current here sets W for 8 to 10 hours,

setting successively to the WSW, SW, and SW by S; it then

attains its greatest rate, which at springs sometimes exceeds 5

knots, and at neaps, 4 knots. The ebb at this season sets ENE or

NE, but it is neither strong nor long lasting. It has been

observed, however, to attain a rate of 4 knots for periods of 1 to

2 hours.

5.21 At the E entrance to the strait, the ebb current is generally

stronger during both monsoons. During the Northwest Monsoon, an E current sometimes runs for 2 or 3 consecutive days.

Directions.—Vessels coming from W set an E course on the

high NW point of Pulau Batanta, taking care not to approach

the southwesternmost island of the Kepulauan Fam group

within 2 miles because of the detached reef lying S of that

island. Close the NW point of Pulau Batanta to about 1.5 miles

distant, then steer 036° toward the W point of Pulau Mansuar.

When the 186m hill at the NW extremity of Pulau Batanta

bears 203° astern, alter course to 023° in order to pass W of the

9.1m shoal W of Pulau Augusta. When the E points of Pulau

Duiuen and Pulau Augusta come in range bearing 108°, change

course to 070° and pass S of Pulau Mansuar, Pulau Kri, and

Pulau Koh.

5.21 If proceeding to Saonek Roads anchorage, take care to

remain outside the line joining Pulau Koh and Pulau Sanoekbesar until the reef NE of Pulau Koh has been passed. Pulau

Saonek-besar may be passed on either side, but in rounding

that island to the W they must give a good berth to the reef

extending out from the island. The highest point of Pulau Gam

and Pulau Saonek-besar hill in range bearing 282°, leading

well S of the SW extremity of the ridge of reefs E of Pulau

Saonek-besar and is a good mark for vessels approaching

Saonek Roads anchorage from E. There is a 3.7m shoal 3 miles

E of Saonek Besar.

5.21 Vessels desiring to take the channel close along the Pulau

Waigeo shore when leaving Saonek Roads anchorage should

pass N or S of Pulau Saonek-kecil and parallel to the Pulau

Waigeo shore about 0.5 mile off until E of Teluk Mayalbit at

which point the distance offshore should be increased to 1

mile. The reefs are easily detected. Southeast of Tanjung

Babula, SW of the entrance to Teluk Mayalbit, there is an

opening in the ridge through which a vessel may pass, but there

is no clearly defined range for navigating it. A 1.8m shoal is N

of this entrance. At the E end of the ridge there is also a

passage, but here, too, there are no marks, therefore, local

knowledge is necessary. With good visibility it offers no

difficulty, but the small reef under the shore, which is passed to

the S, was barely discernible during a survey.

5.21 Vessels can pass close outside Pulau Memyai, which has

practically no coastal reef. Small craft can pass between this

islet and the shore, but this cannot be recommended because of

strong currents. Beyond Pulau Memyai there is a convenient

channel between the shore and Pulau Wayam. A mid-channel

course is recommended. Pass either E or W of Pulau Wayam

having due caution for the reef extending NE of the E end of

that islet.

5.21 Eastbound vessels using the channel that passes S of Pulau

Augusta and Pulau Duiuen should bring Pulau Camphuys to

bear 028°, midway between Pulau Kri and Pulau Koh, and

make good that course; it leads across the ridge E of Pulau

Duiuen over depths of 10.9 to 11.9m. Vessels preferring deeper

water should, when Pulau Duiuen is about on the port beam,

turn two or three points to starboard until the NW side of Pulau

Camphuys is just open of the SE side of Pulau Koh, bearing

028°; the small mountain N by W of Pulau Saonek-besar will

come into range with the NW side of Pulau Camphuys. Vessels

coming from E bring the last-named marks in range astern in

good time to keep on that range line until Pulau Augusta and

Pulau Duiuen are in range, when course may be set to pass N

of the NW points of Pulau Batanta.

5.21 The channel along the N coast of Pulau Batantais easy to

navigate. Between the NW point of Pulau Batanta to the N

point of Pulau Wruwarez (0°47'S., 130°46'E.) it is advisable

to remain N of the line that joins the N point of Pulau Dajang

(0°47'S., 130°30'E.) to the N point of Pulau Wruwarez in order

to clear the dangers lying off the coast. Subsequently the

outermost points of Pulau Batanta can be passed close-to.

There is a 4.6m shoal extending 0.8 mile off the coast from the

point 5 miles E of Pulau Wruwarez. When Tanjung Kandorwa (0°50'S., 130°54'E.) is in range with the E side of Pulau

Ayemi (0°48'S., 130°54'E.), just clear of Tanjung Evanas, the

easternmost point of Pulau Batanta, course should be changed

to bring this range astern; this course leads across the ridge W

of Karang Batanta reef. Vessels bound to the S from Tanjung

Evanas should round that point and then proceed in a S direction to the deep channel E of Teluk Sagewin.

Off-lying Islands on the North Side of Selat Dampier

5.22 The Jef Doif Islands (Yef Doif Islands) (0°46'N.,

129°47'E.) have been described in paragraph 2.88.

5.22 Kepulauan Fam (0°37'S., 130°14'E.), off the W entrance to

Selat Dampier, consists of two groups of islands separated by a

clear deep channel.

5.22 Pulau Penemu (0°35'S., 130°16'E.), the largest island of the

NW group, and Pulau Keruo, about 1 mile E, are high and

rocky. A rocky peak, 214m high, on the N end of Pulau

Penemu, helps to identify the island. Pulau Penemu is the only

island of the group that is inhabited. A bank of soundings with

a least depth of 7.8m extends WSW 8.5 miles from the W side

of Pulau Penemu. The passage N of Pulau Penemu NE to Pulau

Yeben is clear.

5.22 A 5m patch lies about 4.25 miles E of the S point of Pulau

Penemu.
100 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

5.23 Pulau Fam (0°39'S., 130°17'E.), the largest and

northeasternmost of the SE group of islands, is about 2.5 miles

S of the S end of Pulau Penemu. Near the E end of the island

are two flat hills of about equal height and a conspicuous, flattopped, 139m hill is in its W part. There is a village on the N

tip of Fambemuk, a small islet to the S. The other islands SW

of Pulau Fam are low, coral formations with high trees visible

for 16 miles.

5.23 Pulau Mingiman, 55m high, and Pulau Jar, SW of Pulau Fam

are coral islands with high trees. These islands are surrounded

by deep water but there are many shoals, most of which are

marked by discoloration around the island between these last

two and Pulau Fam. A 2.1m shoal is about 1 mile S of Pulau

Mingiman. A conspicuous tree is on a reef about 8.5 miles E of

Pulau Mingiman.

5.23 Anchorage may be obtained in a few places in this S group.

Tidal currents may attain a rate of 2 to 3 knots.

5.23 Karang Bata (Woodford Reefs) (0°42'S., 130°25'E.), about

midway between the S part of Kepulauan Fam group and Pulau

Augusta, are three rocky patches with depths of 4.9 to 5.8m.

These reefs have little discoloration.

5.24 Pulau Mansuar (0°36'S., 130°34'E.), about 3 miles S

of Pulau Gam, has three inconspicuous peaks, the highest of

which is 383m high at about the middle of the island and a

lower but more conspicuous 281m hill at its E end. Airborei

Islet is near the W end of an extensive drying reef, extending

3.5 miles NW of the W end of Pulau Mansuar. A 10.9m shoal

is 1.5 miles SW of Pulau Mansuar.

5.24 Pulau Kri (0°34'S., 130°41'E.), 215m high, is close E of

Pulau Mansuar and is connected to it by a drying reef on which

is a small islet. The village of Yanbuba lies at the W end of the

island. Pulau Koh, 41m high, is on a drying reef 0.5 mile NE of

Pulau Kri. A detached 3m shoal is 1.5 mile NE of Pulau Koh.

There is deep water SE of the islets.

5.24 Pulau Augusta and Pulau Duiven, 2.25 and 3 miles, respectively, S of the W end of Pulau Mansuar, are low and flat but are

covered with high trees visible for 16 miles. They are near the

W edge of a ridge extending across Selat Dampier. There is a

detached 9.1m shoal about 1.75 miles W of Pulau Augusta and

several 10.9m shoals in the area. Although there is deep water

in the channel separating Pulau Augusta and Pulau Duiven,

strong currents through the passage make its use inadvisable.

5.24 Pulau Jerief (0°42'S., 130°42'E.), at the SE end of an

extensive reef 7.5 miles ESE of Pulau Duiven, is similar in

appearance to Pulau Augusta and Pulau Duiven.

5.24 Kepulauan Tapok (Mansfield Islets), three in number are

small, low, and flat, lying on separate drying reefs about 4

miles E of Pulau Jerief. The southwesternmost is brush

covered, the middle islet has higher growth, and the northeasternmost has trees visible for a considerable distance.

5.24 Caution.—Avoid the area between the reefs on which Pulau

Jerief and Kepulauan Tapok lie between which there may be

unknown dangers.

Pulau Batanta

5.25 Pulau Batanta (0°51'S., 130°40'E.), on the S side of

Selat Dampier and separated from Salawati by Selat Sagewin,

is about 34 miles long E-W and 3.5 to 8 miles wide. It consists

principally of a chain of moderately-high and densely-wooded

mountains with a maximum elevation of 1,070m. It can be seen

for a distance of 30 miles.

Pualu Batanta—North Coast

5.26 The N coast, very irregular in outline, consists of projecting spurs of mountain chain, between which are several

deep bays. Several islands are along the coast. All of the bays,

except the westernmost, afford good sheltered anchorage, but

there are no good marks for entering them. There are a few

small villages on the N coast.

Pualu Batanta—West Coast

5.27 The W coast is very steep and there are no off-lying

dangers. Two bays on this coast are so deep and exposed that

they afford no anchorage. Tanjung Mabo (0°55'S., 130°23'E.),

the SW extremity of Pulau Batanta, has a 99m hill at the end of

a long low neck of land which from a distance appears as an

island. Pulau Nelajan (Vischers Island) (0°55'S., 130°22'E.),

65m high, W of Tanjung Mabo and separated from that point

by a deep and clear 1.25 mile-wide channel, is wooded and can

be approached closely from all sides. A 186m cone-shaped

elevation is on the NW extremity of Pulau Batanta and is conspicuous when seen from NE and SW; from a distance it

appears as an island.

Pualu Batanta—South Coast

5.28 The S coast of the island is very steep-to and consequently there are no good anchorages along this coast. Kampung Jodlo, the only village of any importance in this vicinity

is on this S coast near the E entrance to Selat Sagewin.

Pualu Batanta—East Coast

5.29 Teluk Marchesa (0°49'S., 130°53'E.) occupies most

of the E side of Pulau Batanta. Pulau Ayemi, 183m high, is

about midway between the 2 mile wide entrance between

Tanjung Makoi and Tanjung Kandorwa. A 0.6 mile, free of

dangers, is N of Pulau Ayemi. The narrow channel S of the

island can only be used by small craft with local knowledge

and with the reefs showing. Vessels enter the N channel on a

westerly course past the N side of Pulau Ayemi and steer for

Maribio Islet, a small islet at the head of the bay.

5.29 Safe anchorage can be taken in the N part of the bay, in 29 to

40m, mud and sand. In the S part of the bay, S of the N tangent

of Pulau Ayemi extended to Maribio Islet, and in the coves on

the N side of the bay, there are numerous reefs. Depths of 9.1m

extend 0.5 mile off the NW and W shores of Ayemi, and there

is a 9.1m shoal 0.7 mile NW of the W end. Rocks and a reef

with depths between 0.5m and 5m extend 1 mile N of the coast

into the bay NW of Tanjung Kandorwa. These reefs can be

avoided by keeping the N side of Pulau Ayemi bearing more

than 90° and Maribio Islet bearing more than 250°. A village is

on Mesawai Islet, situated in the S part of the bay.

5.30 Karang Batanta (0°47'S., 131°00'E.), the SE extremity of the ridge extending across Selat Dampier from Pulau
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 101

Pub. 164

Augusta and Pulau Duiuen, ranges 3 to 8 miles E of Tanjung

Evanas, the E extremity of Pulau Batanta. The least depth on

the reef is 3.2m. The currents around the reef are very irregular.

5.30 Vessels bound from Selat Sagewin or Teluk Marchesa desiring to cross Karang Batanta should make good a course of

030° close along the E end of Pulau Batanta. This course leads

across the reef with a least depth of 11.9m or 12.8m. Because

currents set strongly across this course at a position N of Tanjung Evanas, it is advisable to keep Tanjung Kandorwa, on the

S side of Teluk Marchesa, in range with Pulau Ayemi, just clear

of Tanjung Evanas. There is a 9.1m patch 2.5 miles NNE of

Tanjung Evanas.

5.30 Selat Sagewin (0°57'S., 130°44'E.), between Pulau Batanta

and Pulau Salawati, is about 28 miles long from the NW extremity of Pulau Salawati to the E extremity of Karang Batanta

and varies from 1.75 to 3.75 miles wide. The S shore of the

strait will be discussed under Salawati, beginning in paragraph

5.42.

5.30 Pulau Sagewin (0°57'S., 130°39'E.), Tanjung Dadi, and

Tanjung Wasaget, all on the S side of the W entrance to Selat

Sagewin, are conspicuous for a good distance and are good

landmarks for that entrance. Heavy rains often obscure the entrances to the strait and makes navigation through it difficult at

night.

5.30 A large white beacon was reported to stand on Tanjung

Wasaget, 0.75 mile S of Tanjung Dadi.

Irian Jaya—Tanjung Yamursba to Selat Sele

5.31 The NW coast of Irian Jaya from Tanjung Yamursba

(Cape of Good Hope) (0°21'S., 132°25'E.) to Tanjung Sorong

(0°49'S., 131°13'E.), the NE entrance point to Selat Sele 80

miles to the WSW, is generally high and closely backed by

high mountains but in places there are tracts of level land near

the shore. There are a number of scattered villages and several

unimportant streams empty into the sea along this stretch of

coast. Vessels coming from Selat Sagewin or Selat Sele usually

proceed rather closely along the coast and are able to take

bearings on the numerous hills between Teluk Dore Hum and

Tanjung Yamursba. The most important of these are: a hill,

435m high, W of Teluk Dore Hum; Olifant, 470m high, 4.5

miles SW of Tanjung Sawasar; a round hill, 511m high, 2.5

miles E of Tanjung Sawasar; and Tonggerap (0°39'S.,

132°03'E.), the most conspicuous peak along this coast, 8.75

miles E of Tanjung Sawasar.

5.31 The N part of this stretch of coast is backed at a distance of

10 miles to the S by the Tamrau Mountains, which are usually

masked by clouds. Among the mountains are many peaks with

elevations of 914 to 1,707m, but they are of little use for navigation.

5.32 Tanjung Yamursba (Cape of Good Hope) (0°21'S.,

132°25'E.), the N extremity of Irian Jaya, can be identified by

some yellow stripes; on nearer approach, a small lower cape

will be seen projecting from it at right angles.

5.32 From Tanjung Yamursba, the coast trends WSW for 80 miles

to Tanjung Sarong, at the N entrance to Selat Sele. Between

Tanjung Yamursba and Tanjung Opmarai, 10 miles to the

WSW, there is a wide bank of soundings on which a vessel

may anchor, in depths of 9 to 18m, during the Southeast Monsoon. This anchorage, however, is untenable during the Northwest Monsoon because of heavy swell.

5.32 Kampung Koor is a village 5 miles WSW of Tanjung

Yamursba and 0.5 mile E of the mouth of the river Sungi Koor.

This river is navigable for small boats for about 0.75 mile. A

conspicuous stone, covered with vegetation, is off the village.

As stated above, anchorage can be taken anywhere along this

coast. Small boats can land on the E bank of the river just

inside the entrance, or in the lee of some rocks close E of the

mouth of the river.

5.32 From Tanjung Opmarai (0°23'S., 132°16'E.), 5 miles W of

Kampung Koor, the coast trends SW for about 28 miles to

Tanjung Sasawar. The first part of this coast is level at places,

especially at the mouth of the river, Sungi Wewe. From a point

midway between Sungi Wewe and Tanjung Sansapor to

Tanjung Sasawar the coast, except for a patch of level land

close S of Tanjung Sansapor, where Sungi Wesan discharges, is

steep. Between Tanjung Sansapor and Tanjung Kasbi, 10 miles

to the SW, the coast recedes, forming an open bay.

5.32 A drying reef extends 0.13 mile W from the village of

Kampung Sansapor and a coral reef with a depth of 0.9m is 1

mile SW of the village. The drying coastal reef extends about

0.25 mile offshore from a point 1.25 miles NE of Tanjung

Kasbi. A group of three drying rocks is close offshore about 3

miles NW of Tanjung Kasbi and a 2.3m patch is about 2.5

miles NNW of the same point.

5.33 Mios Su (0°21'S., 132°10'E.) are two small coral

islands, Middelburg and Mios Su (Amsterdam), which are,

respectively, 2.5 and 4.5 miles offshore and 4 to 6 miles W of

Tanjung Opmarai. They are low, reef-fringed, and covered with

high trees visible for a great distance. A light is shown from the

N coast of Mios Su.

5.33 A very shallow reef about 0.5 mile wide extends 1 mile from

the NW point of Mios Su. The NE point of Middelburg is low

and a drying reef extends 0.5 mile N from that island.

5.33 The channel between Middelburg and the shore is about 2

miles wide and is navigable except for a 6.4m reef 1.5 miles E,

and a 9.1m shoal about 0.5 mile farther N. A pier is on the S

side of Middelburg. Both islands have coconut plantations.

5.33 The islands are difficult to make out at night from W unless

the vessel is fairly close inshore because of the dark coast

behind them, but they can always be seen from E because they

are then open of the coast. The channel between these islands

and the mainland can be used at night with good visibility.

5.33 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available, in 46m, good holding

ground coral and mud, S and W of Mios Su (Amsterdam Island). Anchorage is also available, in 14.6m, good holding

ground coral and sand, S of Middelburg close to the mainland

shore. In this vicinity, however, heavy swells are caused by SW

winds that usually blow during the night and in the early morning hours.

5.33 Mega Road (0°40'S., 131°51'E.) has Sungi Mega discharging into the sea S of Tanjung Sawasar. A small village is

on the S side of the mouth of this river. Three drying reefs are

within 1.5 miles WNW of the river and a conspicuous abovewater rock is about 0.25 mile outside the outermost reef. A

detached 4.5m shoal is about 1 mile NW of the rock. Vessels

can anchor, in depths of 6 to 9m, mud and sand, in the small

roadstead inside the reefs. Anchorage can also be taken outside
102 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

the road, in depths of 11 to 14m, to the NE between Mega

Road and Tanjung Sansapor.

5.33 Near Sungi Mega, the mountains are back from the coast.

For a distance to the W of the mouth of the river is a beach

interrupted only in places where a projecting cliff rises directly

from the sea. From Mega Roads the coast trends WSW to

Teluk Dore Hum with no intervening bights. A 2.3m coral reef

is about 5.5 miles W of the mouth of Sungi Mega and 1.25

miles offshore. A 6.4m shoal is 1.5 miles N of this reef.

Tanjung Asi, 12.5 miles WSW of Mega Road, can be identified

by a mountain spur 550m high, to the E.

5.34 Kampung Asbakin (0°45'S., 131°41'E.), on the

banks of the river Sungi Asbakin, about 1.25 miles W of Tanjung Asi, is on a flat beach which has steep-to rocks on both

ends. The coastal range in this vicinity is a reddish stone with a

species of cajaput tree on it. A narrow reef with a least depth of

5.8m extends about 3 miles in an ENE-WSW direction 2.5

miles NW of the village and an 11.9m shoal is about 2 miles

NW of the village. Kampung Sausut is about 5 miles W of

Kampung Asbakin on the bank of a small stream with the same

name.

5.34 Teluk Dore Hum, penetrating the coast for 2.5 miles in a W

direction, is S of Tanjung Dore (0°44'S., 131°32'E.). It affords

good anchorage, in a depth of about 28m, sheltered from N

swells. Pulau Hum, a small islet and covered with trees is off

the E entrance to the bay. A wide reef extends W and NE from

this islet and a shoal area with several drying reefs extends W

nearly 1 mile and N 1.5 miles from the islet. A detached shoal,

with a least depth of 2.3m, is about 1 mile E of Tanjung Dore.

5.34 The bay entrance channel, about midway between Tanjung

Dore and Pulau Hum, is deep and about 278m wide. Two

detached 3.9m shoals are in the middle of the bay, about 1.5

miles SW of Pulau Hum.

5.34 Kampung Makebon is at the N entrance point to the bay.

5.34 Tides—Currents.—In Teluk Dore Hum, the lowest water

that can be expected is 1m below mean sea level; the highest

HW, occurring at all semidiurnal spring tides, is about 0.6m

above mean sea level.

5.34 The coast between Tanjung Dore and Tanjung Sorong is uninhabited and has no landmarks of value to navigation. This

stretch for the most part is so steep-to that it affords no anchorage; however, vessels may anchor in fine weather, in 46m,

about 0.3 mile offshore off the mouth of Sungi Warsamson

(Samson), about 9 miles WSW of Tanjung Dore. This stream is

navigable by small boats for about 1 mile. Batu Lobang, about

2 miles NE of the mouth of Sungi Warsamson, is a rock about

24m high with an arched opening visible from close E.

Selat Sele

5.35 Selat Sele (1°10'S., 131°10'E.) separates Salawati

from Irian Jaya. The depths in the N part are irregular, but

nearly any deep-draft vessel can pass through the strait without

difficulty.

5.35 The oil facilities of Sorong, Sorong Doom, and Arar

Terminal are on the E side of the N part of the strait. Kasim and

Salawati Oil Terminals, in the narrow S part of the strait, are

approached from the N part of the strait through a swept

channel which leads from position 1°00.0'S, 131°10.8'E to the

terminals. The minimum depth in the area of the mooring system is 16m. The approach channel has a minimum depth of

15m. Ships up to 305m long with drafts not exceeding 13m can

make the passage.

5.35 The central part of Selat Sele is encumbered by many

islands, islets, shoals, and other obstructions, and the S part of

the strait becomes increasingly narrow. Passage through the

strait is via a swept, sometimes tortuous channel marked by

lighted ranges and other aids.

5.35 Winds—Weather.—During a survey of Selat Sele, S and SE

winds of variable force were experienced during July and

August. In September, October, and November the force of

wind decreased and periods of calm intervened. There were

persistent light N and NW winds during February and March.

West winds in February and March were occasionally accompanied by intermittent rain squalls, which were sometimes

quite local and usually occurred at night or in the afternoon.

The rainfall during the East Monsoon is usually very slight.

5.35 More recently it is said that winds may attain hurricane force

in local storms and vessels should carry enough ballast to

insure maneuverability in the restricted waters of the strait.

5.35 Tides—Currents.—In the wide N section of Selat Sele,

tidal currents are not perceptible. In the narrow section at the S

end of the strait, currents can attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots, but

they cause no difficulty in navigating the strait.

5.35 Pulau Unaginim (1°12'S., 131°06'E.), an islet near the

middle of the strait, the maximum rise and fall of tide that can

be expected are, respectively, 0.4 above and 0.5m below mean

sea level. At the S and N entrances to the strait HW occurs,

respectively, 3 hours earlier and 0.5 hour later than at Pulau

Unaginim.

5.35 A light is shown from a beacon on a drying reef close NW of

Unaginim. 

5.36 Tanjung Sorong (0°49'S., 131°13'E.), the NE entrance point to Selat Sele, is moderately high; reefs project

almost 0.75 mile from this point.

5.36 Pulau Ram (0°50'S., 131°13'E.), 65m high, close SW of

Tanjung Sorong, is covered with tall trees. Three islets covered

with vegetation are on the drying reef N of Pulau Ram, and

there are some low black rocks on the reef that extends almost

1.25 miles W from the island. A dangerous wreck is about 1

mile off the S coast of Pulau Ram. There is a light on Pulau

Ram; a radiobeacon and racon transmit close E of the light. A

light is also shown from the rocks W of it.

5.36 Sorong Roads is in the NE end of Selat Sele, about 4 miles S

of Tanjung Sorong.

5.36 Tanjung Noejew (Tanjung Nuyew) is about 3.5 miles S of

Tanjung Sorong. Close E of the point are piers and offices and

many shore structures. A light is shown from Dopior Islet

(0°53'S., 131°14'E.), close off the point and another light is

shown from the root of the oil pier at Sorong.

5.36 The passage between Tanjung Noejew and Dopior Islet is

obstructed and should not be used.

5.36 Sorong (0°53'S., 131°14'E.) is built on the shore E of Tanjung Noejew (Tanjung Nuyew). Sorong Doom is a native village on Pulau Doom, an island to the S. The water tanks and oil

tanks at Sorong are good landmarks visible in daylight for a

considerable distance seaward.
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 103

Pub. 164

5.37 Pulau Tsiof (0°53'S., 131°12'E.), 53m high and

marked on its SW point by a light, is the westernmost of the

islands of Tanjung Noejew and is about 2.5 miles SSW of

Pulau Ram. It is wooded and has some gardens on it. Some

above-water rocks are off the SW side and shore reefs extend

0.25 mile offshore on the N side. Three detached reefs with

depths of 0.9 to 3.3m and marked by discolored water are 0.5

to 0.3 mile off the N shore. The northernmost of these reefs is

marked by a lighted buoy.

5.37 A small isolated 1.5m reef is 0.5 mile ENE of the NE end of

Pulau Tsiof.

5.37 A stranded wreck with a beacon marks a reef with a least

depth of 1.8m, 0.3 mile S of the SE end of Pulau Tsiof. A

shoal, with a depth of 0.9m is S of the 1.8m reef.

5.37 A coral reef, about 91m in diameter and with a least depth of

3.9m, is 0.5 mile ESE of the SE point of Pulau Tsiof.

5.38 Pulau Doom (0°53'S., 131°14'E.), 38m high, is about

0.5 mile SW of Tanjung Noejew. A lighted beacon (starboard

hand) stands on the summit of Doom, and a light (starboard

hand) stands on the foreshore on the N side of the island. The

passage between Pulau Doom and the mainland was wiredragged to a depth of 14m, however, a 6.1m shoal is 0.2 mile E

of the NE extremity of Pulau Doom and a 5.5m is 0.25 mile N

by W of the W extremity of the island. There is a sunken

wreck, dangerous to surface navigation, along the coast close S

of Tanjung Noejew.

5.38 The channels between Tsiof and Nanah, an island about 1.5

miles SE, and that between Nanah and Doom, are encumbered

with scattered dangers and neither should be attempted without

local knowledge.

5.38 Caution.—A beacon marks a drying reef 0.7 mile SSE of

Pulau Nanah. A stranded wreck is on the SW side of the reef

about 0.5 mile S of the beacon. Beacons standing 0.3 mile SW

of the S end of Pulau Nanah mark a reef extending in that

direction. Another beacon is about 463m WNW of the S end of

Pulau Nanah.

5.38 A 1.4m shoal and a shoal swept to 7.6m are 0.2 mile SE and

about 0.3 mile SSE, respectively, from the S end of Pulau

Nanah, close W of the W edge of the swept channel. Foul

ground extends from these dangers to Pulau Nanah.

5.38 A detached reef, 278m off the S end of Pulau Doom, is

marked by a beacon. Two seaplane mooring buoys are NE of

this reef, near the piers at Sorong Doom.

5.38 A drying reef, on which is a stranded wreck, about 0.5 mile S

of the front range light structure at Sorong is marked by a

beacon. A 3m shoal is about 0.4 mile W of the same structure.

A wreck with a swept depth of 11.3m is about 0.7 mile WNW

of the structure and off an oil pier at Sorong.

5.38 Several shoals and drying reefs are between Pulau Doom and

Pulau Nanah, and between Pulau Nanah and Pulau Tsiof.

5.38 A large part of Sorong Roads off the shoals and dangers has

been wire dragged to a depth of 14m. An area SE of Pulau Nanah

in the center of the swept channel and on the range line of the S

approach to Sorong inner roads has been swept to a depth of 6.5m

over two shoal patches with depths of 6.5m and 10m, respectively,

close SW of the range line. The NE side of the swept channel

adjacent to this area has been swept to a depth of 12m.

5.38 Dangers not previously described and within the swept area

of Sorong inner roads are a shoal with a swept depth of 6.5m

about 1.25 miles SSW of the front range light structure; a shoal

with a swept depth of 5.6m about 1.5 miles S by W of the

structure; and two patches, one with a swept depth of 9.7m and

the other with a swept depth of 4.2m, about 0.5 mile and 0.75

mile, respectively, ENE of the NE end of Pulau Nanah.

5.38 The channels into Sorong inner roads, one from the W and

the other from the SSW, are marked by range lights.

Sorong (0°53'S., 131°14'E.)

World Port Index No. 53020

5.39 Sorong is situated E of Tanjung Noejew (Nuyew); oil

company facilities are situated here. Sorong Doom is at about

0.5 mile S of Tanjung Noejew and situated on the E side of

Pulau Doom. The town of Sorong is built on the N of Tanjung

Noejew with a harbor on the S shores to facilitate shipping.

The port imports foodstuffs, consumer goods, and oil field

machinery; exports include crude oil, plywood, nickel ore,

frozen shrimp and tuna fish.

5.39 Winds—Weather.—At Sorong during the West Monsoon

(December to March), the wind has insufficient force to cause

difficulty. A slight ocean swell reaches as far as the roads.

There is heavy rainfall although it is less than during the East

Monsoon. During the East Monsoon (May to October), the SE

winds blow with a strength of 3 to 6 knots and care is necessary

when docking or undocking a vessel.

5.39 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents near Tanjung Noejew

are strong.

5.39 At Tanjung Sorong, the maximum rise and fall of the tide

that can be expected is, respectively, 1.5m above and 0.9m

below mean sea level.

5.39 Depths—Limitations.—Sorong is approached from Selat

Sele and entered from either W or S on range lights via two

navigable channels. The W approach has a least depth of 19m

and the S approach has a least depth of 16m. 

5.39 Aspect.—Five large oil tanks are situated on the hillside

above the harbor. 

5.39 Many piers, wharves, and quays are situated SE of Tanjung

Noejew. A ferry quay stands close E of the point. 

5.39 There are two commercial wharves at Sorong. These berths

handle general cargo, bulk cargo, and passenger vessels.; both

are of concrete construction, totaling 280m in length, and have

11m alongside. Vessels up to 165m in length can be accommodated.

5.39 The oil pier, Pertamina Quay, is a dolphin berth and extends

200m S from the shore. This berth can accommodate vessels

up tp 21,000 dwt, 175m in length, and 10m draft.

5.39 A jetty for coastal vessels, Usha Mina Quay, is situated close

E of the oil pier, is about 40m long, with a depth of 7.6m

alongside. 

5.39 Farther E are two fishing quays, Alfa Kumia Quay and

Karimun Solo Quay.

5.39 The harbormaster’s office is situated at the root of the oil

pier. A modern hospital is situated close N of the port area.

Port of Sorong

http://www.portina4.go.id/sorong.htm
104 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

5.39 At Sorong Doom, there is a government official headquarters,

hospital, and a government landing stage with a depth of 3.9m

alongside, suitable only for small craft. There are seaplane moorings areas situated close N and S of Doom. Another seaplane

mooring area is at about 0.5 mile SE of the oil pier.

5.39 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours.

The pilot boards in the anchorage area 1.4 miles NW of Tsiof

Island Light.

5.39 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 20 to 31m, mud

and clay, good holding ground, in the swept area S of a line

between the NE corner of Pulau Doom and the beacon marking

the stranded wreck about 0.5 mile S of the front range light

structure. This anchorage is open to the S and SE.

5.39 Temporary anchorage to await the pilot is NW of Pulau

Doom between the outer lighted buoy and Dopior Islet.

5.39 Anchorage can also be taken, in 12m, hard bottom, 0.75 mile

E of Bam Islet, with Katapatjan Rock (0°56'S., 131°06'E.) in

range with the S point of Efman. There is always a NE swell in

this anchorage causing vessels to roll heavily. Cargo can only

be worked during HW.

5.39 Directions.—To approach anchorage from N, steer a course

of 180° for Pulau Matan (0°58'S., 131°09'E.) until Tanjung

Sorong bears 090°, then steer for Yef Doif, bearing about 241°.

When Bam Islet bears 170°, steer for it on that course until

Katapatjan Rock is in range with the N point of Pulau

Rombombo (0°57'S., 131°06'E.), bearing 097°; then steer

around gradually to the eastward to bring Katapatjan Rock in

range with the S point of Efman bearing 086° and anchor on

this range line.

5.39 Vessels bound for Sorong from N should pass W of the low

black rocks W of Pulau Ram. The light structure of the W extremity of Pulau Tsiof bearing less than 178° clears these rocks.

Then steer to pass N of the lighted buoy marking the 3.3m shoal

about 0.75 mile NW of the N end of Pulau Tsiof, then remain N

of the 102.5° range line until E of the 3.3m shoal. A course of

108° with Dopior Islet Light ahead leads in the middle of the

swept channel until E of the 3.3m shoal.

5.39 When E of the 3.3m shoal alter course S to bring the 102.5°

range into line which leads between Dopior Islet and Pulau

Doom toward the Oil Pier. If bound for anchorage, alter to a

southerly course when the E extremity of Pulau Doom bears

187°, passing E of the 6.1m shoal 0.2 mile off the NE side of

Pulau Doom.

5.39 Approaching Sorong inner roads from S steer for the 003.5°

range which leads close NW of the previously-mentioned 6.5m

shoal, about 0.5 mile E by S of the S end of Pulau Nanah.

5.39 Arar Terminal (1°02'S., 131°14'E.), situated about 10 miles

S of Sorong, consists of an offshore loading platform and

mooring buoys. There is a depth of 11m alongside. The terminal is a LPG and refined light oil-loading port.

Kasim Oil Terminal (1°18'S., 131°02'E.)

World Port Index No. 53045

5.40 Kasim Oil Terminal is situated on the mainland of

Irian Jaya, abreast the E side of Pulau Kasim, from which it is

separated by a 0.25 mile wide channel.

5.40 Winds—Weather.—See paragraph 5.35.

5.40 Tides—Currents.—See paragraph 5.35. Currents of up to 7

knots have been reported.

5.40 Depths—Limitations.—The tanker berth at the terminal has

four breasting and four mooring dolphins, with a loading

platform setback at the mid point. The mooring dolphins are

spread along the length of the berth, near the shore, fitted with

quick-release hooks and electric winches to handle light messenger lines.

5.40 Vessels up to 130,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 280m

and a maximum draft of 15m, can be accommodated. The

depth alongside the terminal is 15m at LW; the mean tidal

range is 1.5m. The controlling depth at the entrances are

15.5m; the depth at the anchorage is 36.5m.

5.40 A general cargo berth is situated close N of the oil berth. It is

113m long with an alongside depth of 6.1m and is fronted by a

vertical steel face and rubber fenders. The Marine Office is

situated close N of this berth, on the S side of a stream. A

detached reef lies S of the oil terminal.

5.40 Vessels usually dock during daylight hours; casting off the

dock with a strong stern current is not unusual.

5.40 The terminal is approached from either NW or SW, depending on the direction of the tide.

5.40 Repairs can be undertaken at Sorong but not at Kasim

Terminal. 

5.40 Aspect.—Pulau Kasim is an islet about 8.5 miles NNE of

Tanjung Sale, the S entrance to the strait. The islet is about 1.5

miles long in a N to S direction, and is about 0.75 mile wide. A

light is shown from a village on the W side of the strait, about

0.75 mile NW of Pulau Kasim.

5.40 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and should be requested

from Sorong 6 hours prior to arrival.

5.40 Vessels awaiting a pilot can anchor about 1.25 miles NW of

the SW end of Pulau Tsiof, over a bottom of mud and coral.

Vessels arriving after 1600 will wait at anchor until daylight to

make the transit to the terminal.

5.40 Regulations.—Except for local fishing craft, the port limits

area is a restricted area. Any vessel authorized to use the port

must have a mooring master on board.

5.40 The vessel’s ETA must be sent 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24

hours prior to arrival.

Salawati Oil Terminal (1°21'S., 130°59'E.)

World Port Index No. 52695

5.41 Salawati Oil Terminal is an offshore tanker mooring

system positioned on the W side of Selat Sele about 3.75 miles

SSW of Kasim Oil Terminal.

5.41 Winds—Weather.—See paragraph 5.35.

5.41 Tides—Currents.—At the berth, currents may attain a rate

of 4.5 knots; engines should be ready on standby. See paragraph 5.35 for further information.

5.41 Aspect.—The terminal is situated in an area where the

minimum depth is 15.5m. The terminal, NE-SW oriented, has

two mooring dolphins 0.2 mile apart and two breasting structures. The storage barge Wampum is permanently moored on

the W side, with a pipeline extending NNE to the shore. A

tanker may berth starboard or port side-to, on the SE side of the

dolphins, depending on the stage of tide. Two tugs and moor-
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 105

Pub. 164

ing boats assist in berthing operations, directed by a mooring

master who boards at the pilot station.

5.41 Tankers, with a maximum length of 275m and up to 100,000

dwt have berthed at Salawati Oil Terminal; however, the

maximum draft permissible to load is 13m. The least depth on

the passage through the strait is 15m.

5.41 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. See paragraph 5.40,

Kasim Oil Terminal, for details.

5.41 Directions.—After passing between Efman (0°55'S.,

131°07'E.) and Pulau Tsiof, bring range lights on Balbili

(1°06'S., 131°11'E.) and Wolo Genan, 3 miles S, in line bearing

180°. The course leads E of dangers extending 2 miles NE of

Kasiem (1°00'S., 131°09'E.).

5.41 When the SE point (1°04.7'S., 131°10.3'E.) of Kabra Bemuk

bears 297°, alter the course SW to 237°. This leads close N of a

4m shoal which extends a short distance N from the reef

fringing the islet off the NW end of Balbili, however, vessels

exceeding a draft of 4m must pass S of Balbili.

5.41 When Mehil (1°07'S., 131°10'E.) bears 100°, alter course

SSW to bring the range lights on Segarau (1°10.5'S.,

131°06.6'E.) and Kamoomjel, which lies 3.5 miles farther

SSW, in line on a bearing of 196°; this course should lead W of

the buoy moored 0.5 mile ENE of the light column on Segarau.

Avoid the 5.5m patch lying 0.25 mile W of the same buoy then

pass E of the light column.

5.41 Maintain a heading of 196°. At about 1 mile off Kamoomjel

Light alter course SW to pass SE of Jef Nanas (1°13'S.,

131°05'E.), avoiding a depth of 8m 0.25 mile SE of this islet.

Then pass N of Tanjung Wafkalette (1°15'S., 131°03'E.) and

into the narrows at the S end of Selat Sele, keeping in midchannel through the narrows.

5.41 It was reported that the following route appears to provide

the deepest passage through the N part of Selat Sele to be taken

by large tankers. From a position about 0.8 mile W of Pulau

Tsiof, steer a SSE course until in a position where Kasiem

bears 237° at a distance of 2.75 miles. Then alter course to

SSW to pass through a position 2 miles E of Kasiem. Then

follow the buoyed channel (black can buoys on the W and red

on the E side of the channel) through Sangolin Mon; which

leads to about 0.5 mile E of Orama Tje, and Kafanji. After

continuing on the above course to about 0.3 mile SSE of Ome

Toejef (1°10'S., 131°04'E.), steer S to pass midway between

Yef Mo (1°13'S., 131°13'E.) and the shoal extending W and

SW from Yef Nanas.

5.41 A least depth of 14.9m was located about 0.4 mile E of

Orama Tje. Another depth of 11.3m lies about 0.6 mile NNE of

Yef Mo.

5.41 From S, the S entrance lies between Tanjung Menonket

(1°21'S., 130°51'E.) and Tanjung Sele, 7 miles SE. The S

approach can be made by keeping the W end of Membok and

Pele in line on bearing about 011° until the S side of Tanjung

Sele bears 090°. Then steer through the narrows by keeping in

mid-channel.

5.41 Caution.—Partially-afloat heavy logs are normally seen

drifting anywhere in the strait and a good lookout should be

kept to avoid closing and fouling the propeller.

Salawati

5.42 Salawati (1°06'S., 130°52'E.) is separated from the W

end of Irian Jaya by Selat Sele. Its coasts are regular without

any deep indentations. The greater part of the island is very low

with impenetrable jungles; however, the NW part of the island

is mountainous with several high peaks. The N coast is limestone hills about 396m high, rising to 610m in the W part, but it

is considerably lower than Pulau Batanta, the island to the N.

The W coast, except for the N portion, is low and marshy. The

E coast, near Kampung Samate (0°58'S., 131°04'E.), is low

and swampy, with extensive forests of sago palms. There are

numerous coconut palms on the beach. There are some creeks,

but no rivers. The only village of any importance on the island

is Kampung Sailolof, on the SW coast of the island.

Salawati—North Coast

5.43 The N coast of Salawati between Pulau Sagawin on

the W and Yef Doif on the E can be approached very closely.

Pulau Sagewin, at the W entrance to Selat Sagewin and close

NW of Tanjung Dadi, the fairly high NW extremity of Salawat,

is hilly but not very high. On the NW end of Pulau Sagewin is a

small village, conspicuous because of the coconut palms that

surround it. Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of 46m, about

183m off the SE extremity of the island, but there is frequently

a current of 3 to 4 knots here.

5.43 Tipin Road (0°56'S., 130°45'E.) is on the N coast of Salawati about 7 miles E of Pulau Sagewin. There is anchorage in

about 46m, sand, 0.15 mile from the shore and to the W of the

mouth of a stream. Less depths can be found closer inshore.

Lelaa Islet is close inshore on the coastal reef about 8.5 miles E

of Pulau Sagewin.

5.43 Yef Doif (0°53'S., 131°02'E.), an islet 169m high and 1 mile

off the NW extremity of Salawati, has a round hill on its N side

and is low and flat in its S part. The islet is joined to the

Salawati coast by a shallow ridge.

5.43 Tides—Currents.—Near Yef Doif, the highest and lowest

water levels that can be expected are, respectively, 0.6m above

and 0.75m below mean sea level.

5.43 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage during the Southeast

Monsoon in the SW corner of Teluk Waiyaar (Wajaar Bay), a

bay 6.5 miles WSW of Yef Doif. The anchorage is in 48m,

with Pulau Ayemi, at the E end of Pulau Batanta, in range with

Tanjung Yupleket (Ajmoeri), and the drying rocks on the reef

about 1.75 miles W of the S end of Yef Doif clear to the N of

that island.

Kampung Samate—Off-lying Islands and Dangers

5.44 Extensive banks and reefs, partly dry at LW, extend

offshore.

5.44 Bam Islet (0°56'S., 131°04'E.), moderately high and

wooded, is near the edge of a drying reef 1.75 miles N of the

village. There are several bare rocks near the islet.
106 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

5.44 Kepulauan Rombombo (0°56'S., 131°06'E.), NE of Kampung Samate, are a group of islands surrounded by a drying

reef. Pulau Man (Pulau Efman) is low with a beach and some

houses on the E side. This beach can be approached closely by

boats. There are coconut plantations on the island and a T-head

pier with depths of 2.1 to 3.6m alongside is on the SE side.

There is also an airfield on the island.

5.44 Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 11.9m, hard

bottom, about 0.7 mile E of Bam. 

5.44 Katapatjan Rock (0°56'S., 131°06'E.), on the W edge of the

drying reef surrounding Kepulauan Rombombo and S by W of

the S end of Pulau Man, is a jagged mass of stone whitened

with bird droppings; it somewhat appears as a crouching lion.

A 4.5m detached reef which can be recognized by discoloration and slight breakers is about 0.7 mile WNW of the rock. A

line of detached reefs extends across the approach to the roadstead NW of Katapatjan Rock.

5.44 Kampung Samate (0°58'S., 131°04'E.) lies 4.5 miles SE of

Tanjung Mayasalava with the deserted village of Samatew, its

houses built on piles, close W. 

West Coast of Salawati—Off-lying Islands

5.45 The islands W of Salawati are low and thickly overgrown; they are on long narrow ridges running parallel to the

coast. Kepulauan Kabu and Pulau Loslos are on the outer ridge

with depths of 8.2 to 9.1m between them and 12.8 to 16.4m on

either side of the ridge. A 1.8m shoal is about 0.25 mile S of

Pulau Ifmun the westernmost island of the group. A 4.9m shoal

is nearly 6 miles SSE of Pulau Loslos and 5 miles W of Pulau

Denie. Reefs in this area are usually not marked by discoloration.

Kepulauan Menon (Gebroken Islands) (1°20'S., 130°42'E.),

Pulau Danya (Jef Danja), and the Mokon Islands are on the

next ridge to the E; the N part of this ridge is separated from

Kepulauan Kabu by a channel with depths of more than 46m.

Farther inshore there are several other ridges with islets on

them; the chart is the best guide.

5.45 Strong tidal currents and muddy water N of Kampung Sailolof between the Salawati shore and the Loslos and Kepulauan

Kabu ridge make it unnavigable.

5.46 Sailolof Anchorage (1°15'S., 130°46'E.) is off

Kampung Sailolof, about 13.5 miles NW of Tanjung Kamjolo,

the SE extremity of Salawati. The recommended anchorage is

in 5.8 to 7.3m, with the mosque at Kampung Sailolof bearing

054° and Pulau Bodo in range with the S side of Pulau Tun

bearing about 292°.

5.46 Approaching Sailolof Anchorage bring Pulau Loslos astern

on a W bearing, then steer for Pulau Umien giving the latter a

wide berth and proceed to the roadstead on a course of 054° on

the mosque at Kampung Sailolof. Another route is to pass

close S of Pulau Denie and Pulau Umat and then steer for

Pulau Tun until the mosque bears 054°.

5.46 At Sailolof Anchorage, the maximum rise and fall of tide

that can be expected are, respectively, about 0.45m above and

below mean sea level.

5.46 Kampung Sailolof (1°15'S., 130°45'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53050), a fairly large village on the SW coast of Salawati,

consists of a double row of houses built on piles on the beach.

There are many coconut palms around the village; coconut oil

is the chief export. Drinking water can be obtained from concrete wells.

Selat Sele—South Approach

5.47 Tanjung Sele (1°26'S., 130°56'E.), at the S entrance

point to Selat Sele, is a 10m high, rocky headland covered with

high trees; it affords a good mark for vessels approaching from

S. Pulau Umpe, about 4.5 miles ESE of Tanjung Sele, as well

as two low islands, Pulau Membok and Pulau Gelo, S of

Salawati and W of the S entrance to Selat Sele, are seen shortly

thereafter. These uninhabited islands are sand, mud, and coral

and are covered with high trees. Pulau Umpe and Pulau Membok are each marked by a light.

5.47 Numerous shoals with depths of 0.9 to 9.1m are W, SW, and

SE of Pulau Umpe; the chart is the best guide. Depths of 5.8 to

19.2m, also charted, are between 13.3 and 21 miles S of Pulau

Umpe Light. Some of the depths are swept.

5.47 A deep channel gives access to the narrow S part of the strait

which is clear and deep and which ends near Tanjung Kanelmelmak, about 9 miles NNE of the SE end of Salawati. From

that point the strait widens but is strewn with islets, particularly

in its S part.

5.47 The W side of the S approach is bounded by a bank extending from Salawati and on which are Pulau Gelo, Pulau Membok, Pulau Kalilip, Pulau Omaki, Pulau Peli, Pulau Sabba, and

Pulau Pan and other islets closer inshore near Kampung

Saileen. The S coast of Salawati between Tanjung Menonket

and Tanjung Kamjolo is low and covered with mangrove. Near

Tanjung Kamjolo it rises a little and a red patch is seen, then

farther N it is again low and covered with high trees.

5.47 During the West Monsoon, there is good anchorage E of

Pulau Peli, in 11 to 16m, hard bottom. In the East Monsoon,

there is good anchorage E of Pulau Lugo near the Irian Jaya

shore, in 26m, sand and mud.

5.47 The coast of Irian Jaya making up the E side of the strait

resembles the coast of Salawati. Kampung Seget (1°24'S.,

130°58'E.), E of Pulau Lugo, is inhabited by fishermen and is

the headquarters of a government official. There is a small-boat

pier with a depth of 1.5m at its head.

Pulau Kasim (Pulau Jef) (1°18'S., 131°01'E.), in the W part

of Selat Sele 6.25 miles above Pulau Lugo, should be passed

on its W side. A restricted area is between the SE side of Pulau

Kasim and the Irian Jaya shore. Vessels are not permitted to

enter this area without a mooring master from the Kasim Oil

Terminal aboard.

Irian Jaya—Tanjung Sele to Teluk Berau

5.48 From Tanjung Sele, the coast trends SE to Tanjung

Sabra (2°17'S., 132°18'E.) and Teluk Berau (McCluer Gulf).

There are few conspicuous points along this densely timbered

and uniformly low coast. Tanjung Yamtup, 31 miles E of

Tanjung Sele is clearly visible as far as Pulau Yus (Jef Joes), a

strip of coral sand 15 miles offshore. Other prominent marks

are Tanjung Wamonket, about 17 miles E of Tanjung Sele, and

Pulau Kobalin, an islet just E of Tanjung Wamonket. A beacon

is about 2 miles SE of the islet. The entrance points of the river
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 107

Pub. 164

Sungai Karabra (1°33'S., 131°41'E.) are excellent landmarks.

Along the N part of this coast a low chain of hills are visible far

inland, with higher mountains rising behind these hills. In the

far distance the high peaks of the Tamrau Mountains, near the

N coast of Irian Jaya, can be seen on a clear day, especially in

the vicinity of Sungai Seremuk (1°36'S., 131°45'E.).

5.48 Several rivers enter the sea in this portion of the coast. A bar is

across the mouths of most of these and the channels leading to

them are constantly changing. The charts cannot be relied on.

5.48 In the N portion of this coast, where the shore recedes near

the mouth of the rivers, the 10m curve extends about 10 miles

from the shore and patches with as little as 2.1m on them are

found outside the 20m curve.

5.48 From Tanjung Sele, the coast trends E for nearly 18 miles to

Tanjung Wamonket (1°32'S., 131°12'E.). This part of the

coast is low, but at the latter point it rises and is somewhat

higher for a considerable distance E. Pulau Umpe, marked on

its NW end by a light, is about 1 mile off Tanjung Kaledoko.

Yus (Joes) Genan islet, about 2 miles WNW of Tanjung

Wamonket, is separated from the coast by depths of 2.1m. A

rock that dries and several shoal patches with depths of 0.9 to

1.8m are inside the 10m curve between these islets.

5.48 Tides—Currents.—Off the mouths of the rivers along this

stretch of coast the maximum fall of tide that can be expected

is 1.3m below mean sea level, occurring in May or June and

November or December. The maximum rise that can be expected is 0.8m above mean sea level.

5.48 The offshore currents are a variable combination of tidal currents and monsoon drift, but closer along the coast the tidal

currents predominate. They frequently are very strong in the

rivers.

5.48 The islands between the coast of Irian Jaya and Batanme

(Misool) have been previously described in connection with

the latter island in paragraph 2.92.

5.49 Pulau Yus (Jef Joes) (1°45'S., 131°08'E.), 16 miles S

of Tanjung Wamonket, is a strip of coral sand about 0.2 by 0.1

mile, covered with high trees and surrounded by a reef that

does not discolor. The islet is visible for 12 miles. A light is

shown from the NE point of the islet from a white metal tower.

It is obscured by the high trees between bearings of 018° and

060°. A stranded wreck is on the edge of a shoal about 0.3 mile

SW of the light.

5.49 A 6.7m shoal is about 7.5 miles WSW of Pulau Yus; several

shoal patches 2.7 to 10.9m are within the 20m curve WNW and

NNW of the islet at distances of 4.75 to 14 miles.

5.49 A swept depth of 2.1m coral, and a 7.3m shoal patch are

10.75 and 6.5 miles, respectively WSW of Pulau Yus. A buoy

marks the N side of the 2.1m shoal. A dangerous wreck lies 5

miles ESE of Pulau Yus.

5.49 Teluk Segun (1°27'S., 131°20'E.), E of Tanjung Wamonket,

is entered over a 1.8m bar. A beacon marks the entrance.

5.49 Tanjung Yamtup (1°31'S., 131°26'E.) is conspicuous. Pulau

Matel is a small islet on a drying bank 1.75 miles SE of the

point.

Pulau Yal (Jef Jal) (1°40'S., 131°26'E.), about 9 miles S of

Tanjung Yamtup, is covered with tall trees and is surrounded

by a reef. Anchorage can be taken, in 9.1m, S of the islet, but

caution is necessary because the turbid water prevents the reef

from being seen.

5.49 Shoals are 3 and 2 miles NW and SW, respectively, from

Pulau Ya; a rock, with a depth less than 0.9m, lies 4.75 miles

SSW of the islet.

5.49 Caution.—Shoals with depths of as little as 1.8m are 14 to

27 miles S of Pulau Yal and between these patches are

detached shoals of 1.8 to 5.8m. The channels between Tanjung

Sele and Tanjung Sabra are constantly changing and the charts

cannot be relied on.

5.49 Sungai Beraur, Sungai Karabara, Sungai Seremuk, and

Sungai Kaibus are rivers navigable by small craft only with

local knowledge. The channel into Sungai Kaibus is marked by

buoys in Teluk Kaibus.

5.50 Off-lying banks off the mouths of Sungai Waronge,

Sungai Suaboor, Sungai Kamamunu, limit their use to small

craft only.

5.50 Sungai Kais, Sungai Davur, and Sungai Metamani flow into

Teluk Metamani and have formed a delta at the mouth of that

bay. These rivers are all limited to small craft. 

5.50 A light is shown on the coast about 10 miles S of the entrance to Sungai Kais near Tanjung Mesjateririvaim.

Sungai Sigaroi (Bira) (2°10'S., 132°10'E.) has a buoy at its

entrance, but depths over the bar are limited to about 1.8m.

There are several villages along the tributaries.

5.50 A light is shown from Tanjung Sabra (2°17'S., 132°18'E.)

at the N entrance point to Teluk Berau (McCluer Gulf).

Teluk Berau (McCluer Gulf)

5.51 Teluk Berau (2°30'S., 132°20'E.), an extensive body

of water reaching to within about 16 miles of Teluk Sarera,

thus almost isolating the NW part of Irian Jaya.

5.51 The gulf is about 23 miles wide between Tanjung Sabra and

Tanjung Salakiti (2°40'S., 132°07'E.), narrowing to 12 miles

wide at the entrance to Teluk Bintuni. The S shore is high and

bold for 35 miles E of Tanjung Salakiti, but the rest of its

shores are low and overgrown with mangroves. The region

around the gulf is sparsely populated. Kampung Kokas

(2°42'S., 132°26'E.), on the S shore of Teluk Sekar, is the principal trading center. A light is shown from a lattice tower 0.35

mile NNW of Kokas village.

5.51 Several rivers, the entrance of which are blocked by mangrove-covered islands, empty into the gulf. The mountains on

both sides of the gulf are so far inland that they are of no importance to navigation.

5.51 Close to the S side of the entrance to Teluk Bintuni soundings range from 18.3 to 92m, but farther N they vary between

18.3m and 46m. Care should be exercised in approaching the

shoal part of Teluk Berau because mud banks, with depths of

3.6 to 5.5m, extend from the shore in many places.

5.51 Winds—Weather.—The climate in the vicinity of Teluk

Berau is very agreeable with moderate rainfall and temperature. The nights are cool and the sea is always calm, except for

a few days during the West Monsoon. Rain falls during the

entire year, but the heaviest fall occurs in the change periods,

April to May, and October to November.

5.51 During the East Monsoon, the land winds are somewhat

stronger, with a haze, sometimes a heavy fog, hanging over the

low coasts. The West Monsoon is felt more, although it blows

with only a moderate force, because it may be accompanied by
108 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

heavy squalls and gales. These storms, together with the strong

current, may be inconvenient for boats and small craft.

5.51 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents set into the gulf until the

time of HW and set out of the gulf until the time of LW. The

maximum observed velocity of these currents, 2.5 knots, was

in the deep channels between the banks along the S coast and

in the vicinity of Pulau Ogar and Pulau Arguni. On the N side

of the gulf, particularly at LW, the discharge from the rivers set

up variable currents. This river water has a brownish-yellow

color and, especially during the rainy season, can be seen for a

great distance from the shore.

5.52 The N shore of Teluk Berau consists mainly of low,

marshy land, interrupted in places by patches of sand which

have clusters of trees. There area few conspicuous features.

The headlands at the river mouths are low, but they project well

and are useful marks for vessels coming from E or W.

5.52 There is a conspicuous wood near Kampung Tarof, about 8

miles NE of Tanjung Sabra. There is also a group of trees in the

bight between this village and Sungi Kemudan, 14 miles ESE.

There is constant traffic by native canoes with the S coast.

5.52 On the N coast there are several creeks and streams, including Sungi Kemudan and Sungi Sebyar, the navigation of

which is limited to small craft because of bars across their

mouths.

5.52 A wide mud bank, outside of which the depths increase regularly, projects out all along this coast. Farther out the depths are

quite variable, probably because of channels scoured out by

tidal currents.

5.52 Close E of Tanjung Sabra, about 2 miles offshore, is a narrow drying bank steep-to on its seaward side. A sunken rock is

about 0.75 mile off the W end of this bank.

5.52 Tanjung Fatagar (2°46'S., 131°56'E.), the S entrance point

to Teluk Berau, is the extremity of a thickly-wooded peninsula

of irregular outline gradually rising to mountainous land with

no conspicuous peaks.

5.52 A 3.9m reef is 1 mile W of Tanjung Fatagar. Strong rips set

over the reef and for a considerable distance W.

5.52 The coast between Tanjung Fatagar and Teluk Tawar, 7 miles

E, is rocky and broken. Was Island, close to the shore 3 miles

NE of Tanjung Fatagar is an inhabited island, 88m high. A

drying rock is just inside the line joining Tanjung Fatagar and

Teluk Tawar. A rock, awash, is 0.5 mile offshore 1.5 miles NE

of Tanjung Fatagar.

5.52 A mosque is at Kampung Rumbati, close W of Teluk Tawar.

Vessels coming from the W do not sight the village until past it.

5.52 Teluk Tawar, entered 7 miles E of Tanjung Fatagar, affords

anchorage to small vessels during the Southeast Monsoon but

is not safe during the Northwest Monsoon. 

5.53 Teluk Salakiti (2°44'S., 132°05'E.) affords safe anchorage for large vessels at all times. Some small rocks and

islets on the N side of the entrance form a natural breakwater.

Depths in the entrance and inside the bay range from 11.9 to

14.6m. In the S part of the bay some small islets are on a dry

coast reef and behind them is a shallow basin surrounded by

mangroves which also front the main shore. A few huts are on

a rising hilly land forming the greater part of the shores of the

bay.

5.53 Patipi (2°43'S., 132°04'E.) (World Port Index No. 53090) is

in a basin which nearly dries at LW and is sheltered from wind

and sea by the high rocky islands on the N side of Teluk Salakiti.

5.53 Teluk Patipi (2°42'S., 132°07'E.), penetrating the coast in an E

direction for about 5 miles, has a maximum width of 2 miles and

gradually narrows toward its head. It is easily recognized from

seaward by the straight direction of its shores and by a round

127m hill on Tanjung Kramram, the S entrance point, which

shows up dark against the land behind. Tanjung Osir, the N

entrance point, is low and rocky. Off the entrance there are

frequently strong tidal currents with swirls caused by the meeting

of currents along the coast with those setting out of the bay.

5.53 The N shore of the bay is steep-to and can be approached

closely. The S shore is irregular and is covered with mangroves

behind which the land rises steeply. The inlets on this shore

have broad coastal reefs on which there are some islets and

rocks.

5.53 The bay is quite clear except for the shore reef and a single

detached drying rock close to the S coast about 0.3 mile NE of

Perwa Islet, 3.5 miles E of Tanjung Kramram. The depths at

the entrance and within the bay range from 10.9 to 18.3m,

decreasing gradually toward the head. The bay affords anchorage protected from all winds. Groups of farmers houses are

along the shores of the bay.

From Tanjung Wetin (2°42'S., 132°05'E.), at the N end of

Teluk Patipi, the coast trends NE 2.5 miles to Tanjung Salakiti

and then turns to the E for 18.5 miles to Tanjung Sekar. The

land rises gradually from the spit that forms the N side of Teluk

Patipi to heights of more than 610m. The coast is rocky with a

few shallow inlets obstructed by reefs.

5.54 Teluk Sekar (2°42'S., 132°27'E.) is afforded good

protection from wind and sea by the islands off its entrance.

Mud brought down by the Sungi Kaiunni has shoaled the entire

bay to a degree, but this shoal area ends abruptly at the entrance. The depths outside the entrance increase rapidly from

5.5 to 7.3m to 55m. A large sandbank, with depths of less than

3.6m and subject to change when Sungi Kaiunni is in flood, is

near the W side of the entrance. West of this bank there is a

deep channel leading along Tanjung Sekar to Kampung Kokas,

the W entrance point.The E part of the bay is so shallow that it

is of no importance to navigation.

5.54 Kokas Road (2°42'S., 132°25'E.), comprising the greater

part of the W arm of Teluk Sekar, is bounded by a line drawn in

a 090° direction from the point of the spit E of Kampung

Kokas and by the arc of a circle, with a radius of 0.65 mile,

centered on the head of a pier that projects out from the shore

abreast of the village. A seaplane mooring buoy is 0.3 mile

NW of the pier head. Vessels can anchor, in 4.9m, 0.1 mile N

of the pier. When making this anchorage, a course of 182° on

the jetty, or 185° on the charted flagstaff, will lead through the

channel between Tanjung Sekar; the 3.6m sand bank off

Tanjung Sekar can be passed close-to.

5.54 Tides—Currents.—At Kampung Kokas, the maximum rise

and fall of tide that can be expected are, respectively, 0.8m

above and 1.7m below mean sea level. Tidal currents, particularly in the inner part of the bay, are weak.
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 109

Pub. 164

5.54 Kampung Kokus (2°42'S., 132°25'E.) is the headquarters of

a government official whose residence is marked by a flagstaff.

Provisions are scarce. 

Teluk Sekar—Off-lying Islands

5.55 Pulau Ogar (2°39'S., 132°28'E.), 227m high, is the

largest of high, steep, and densely-wooded islands extending

nearly 11 miles E from Pulau Barat (West Island), the westernmost of the group along the coast of Teluk Sekar. A village

on the S coast of Pulau Arguni is marked by a mosque.

5.55 South of Pulau Ogar and Pulau Arguni is a channel leading

to Teluk Sekar. On the S side of this channel abreast Pulau

Ogar are several high islets which greatly obstruct the channel,

leaving only narrow passages. The widest of these passages,

running along the steep shore of Pulau Ogar, has strong

currents and overfalls.

5.55 Two reefs, one with a depth of 0.9m and another with a depth

of 4.9m, are, respectively, 2.75 miles and 1 mile WNW of

Pulau Barat. Neither of the reefs is marked by discoloration.

5.55 Tides—Currents.—In the channels and along the above

islands the tidal currents are similar to the general currents in

Teluk Berau. In the narrower parts of these channels currents

sometimes attain a rate of 3 knots. The flood current moving

up the gulf divides at Pulau Barat, causing heavy tide rips in

that vicinity. One part of the current sets through the channel

along the S side of Pulau Ogar and Pulau Arguni, the other part

sets E along the N sides of these islands.

5.55 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to Kokas from E can easily

recognize Pulau Arguni. Its E hill is very conspicuous, with a

sugarloaf summit which stands up darkly against the surrounding land. Care should be taken to avoid the shoal extending 1

mile ESE from the E coast of Arguni. When the conspicuous

summit of Pulau Ogar bears 280°, steer for it on that course.

Hold this course until 2.5 miles distant, then steer for the N

islet of the group between Pulau Ogar and the mainland, keeping close to the Pulau Ogar side of the channel. Krok, a rock

covered with vegetation, lies about 450m SW of the S point of

Ogar. Then pass close E of Tanjung Sekar. Then follow

directions given above to Kokas Road.

Irian Jaya—Teluk Sekar to Tanjung Tanah Merah

5.56 East of Teluk Sekar, the densely-wooded coasts consist of steep limestone cliffs that rise sheer from the sea. Several sugarloaf summits, many burned over, leaving only

charred trees, give the land a unique appearance.There are

white cliffs in places with numerous caves used by the local inhabitants as burial places.

5.56 The mountainous land runs parallel to the coast, the highest

point rising to an inconspicuous 467m summit. At the back of

the coastal range there is a wide valley and beyond that is a

central ridge rising to 1,450m, again an inconspicuous summit.

5.56 Rocky wooded islets are scattered along the coast, concealing small settlements behind them. Kampung Goras (2°47'S.,

132°41'E.), 14 miles SE of Tanjung Taramnusa, is the principal

village.

5.56 Batu Layar (2°44'S., 132°38'E.), a rock about 0.5 mile from

the shore near Kampung Darembang, is very conspicuous from

NW. Rising from the sea like an obelisk it resembles a native

canoe under sail.

5.56 The depths gradually decrease to the E. Between Tanjung

Goras and Tanjung Tanah Merah, 33 miles to the NE, access to

the coast is limited by a wide mudbank. Outside of this bank

there are many shoals ranging from 1.8 to 9.1m extending as

much as 9 miles from shore. The chart is the best guide.

5.56 North of Tanjung Goras the mountainous aspect of the coast

ceases abruptly. The mountains recede far inland and the intervening land consists of mangrove-covered marshes intersected

by creeks and streams. The more important of these streams

are Sungi Bedidi and Sungi Bomberai which discharge in the S

part of a large bight between Teluk Sekar and Tanjung Tanah

Merah. A bar restricts the use of these last-named streams to

small craft. There are a few small villages along the coast between Tanjung Goras and Tanjung Tanah Merah.

5.56 A light is shown from Tanjung Tanah Merah (2°26'S.,

133°07'E.).

Teluk Bintuni

5.57 Teluk Bintuni (2°20'S., 133°25'E.), the E extension

of Teluk Berau, is 12 miles wide at its entrance and fringed on

both sides by low marshy land, above which a group of hills,

79m high, rises on the S side of Tanjung Tanah Merah. These

hills, of reddish loam and bare on their seaward sides are a

mark for vessels approaching from the W. Mountains are visible to the N and E.

5.57 Many small rivers flow into the N side of Teluk Bintuni. This

part of the coast is fronted by a steep mud bank about 2 miles

wide through which some of the rivers have cut moderately

deep channels.

5.57 Inside the entrance the character of the S coast changes. The

low marshy land continues, but it is intersected by wide salt

water creeks and scarcely any land is visible. Fronting the S

shore are the mangrove-covered islands, including Pulau Asap

(2°28'S., 133°19'E.), Pulau Amutu Besar, and Pulau Amutu

Kecil, all separated from the mainland by navigable channels.

5.57 The head of the gulf is hilly and fronted by a strip of mangroves.

5.57 There are no dangers in Teluk Bintuni and vessels can steer

by bearings on the headlands and the Gunung Steenkoolberg

hills at the head of the gulf. Gunung Steenkool (Steenkoolberg) (2°04'S., 133°32'E.) and Gunung Sigemerai, on the N

side of the gulf, are conspicuous. The latter has slightly

rounded summits, 537m and 522m high. At the head of the

gulf, the Suwuri Range, 693m high, and Top Modan, 283m

high, are conspicuous. Tawerei, with a round summit, 657m

high; Tantiri, with two sharp peaks, 634m high; and Maniai,

183m high, are also good marks. The more distant mountains

are seldom visible.

5.57 Winds—Weather.—The weather is nearly always fine in

Teluk Bintuni. Persistent rain does not occur in either monsoon. During an early survey, the rainfall was heaviest at the

beginning of the East Monsoon, then diminished steadily. The

West Monsoon sets in suddenly at the beginning of November.

The East Monsoon brings clouds and rain squalls off the land

and much lower temperatures. During the East Monsoon, the

direction of the wind is between SE and SW; during the West

Monsoon, it is between SW and NW.
110 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

5.57 Tides—Currents.—At the entrance to Teluk Bintuni, the

tide has a range of about 2.4m; at the head of the gulf, the tide

range is about 6.7m. This great difference in range causes

strong tidal currents that follow the direction of the coast. The

maximum rate is about 3 knots. The direction of current

changes at about the time of high and LW.

5.57 Close inside the mouth of Sungi Muturi (2°15'S.,

133°38'E.), the incoming and outgoing tidal currents set in

070° and 250° directions, respectively. The currents are equally

strong, attaining a maximum rate of 1.75 knots at springs.

Teluk Bintuni—North Shore

5.58 Many rivers empty into the N side of the gulf. The

most important of these are Sungi Kamarin, Sungi Rittowe,

and Sungi Wasian. Since there are no landmarks at the mouths

of these rivers, entry must depend on bearings taken on the

very conspicuous Gunung Sigemerai (2°02'S., 133°37'E.), the

two-pointed summit of which is visible throughout the gulf.

5.58 Sungi Wasian (2°13'S., 133°33'E.), marked at its mouth by a

lighted buoy, has a straight channel which has a depth of 3.6m

over the bar. To enter the river a course of 020° should be set

on the center of the mouth, passing the buoy on its W side.

Depths increase rapidly within the mouth of the river which

becomes tortuous about 3.5 miles within the entrance.

Navigation of this area should not be attempted without local

knowledge.

5.58 About 4.5 miles above the bar the river divides into N and E

branches. About 8 miles above the N branch is Steenkool.

5.58 Steenkool (2°07'S., 133°33'E.), a small petroleum port. is

approached by passing W of the aircraft buoys and N of the

main jetty to avoid some wrecks. 

5.58 Sungi Muturi (2°15'S., 133°37'E.), about 5.5 miles E of

Sungi Waisan, is marked by buoys at its mouth and for a short

distance above the mouth. 

5.58 Pilotage.—Pilotage for the Muturi Oil Terminal is compulsory for vessels over 50 tons. ETA at the outer buoy should be

given at least 24 hours in advance. Pilotage at night is only by

special arrangement. 

5.58 Vessels awaiting a pilot should anchor W of the outer buoy,

in a depth of 14.9m, hard mud. The harbormaster at Steenkool

is the official pilot. 

5.58 Kampung Muturi (2°11'S., 133°41'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53052) is a deep-water oil terminal about 3 miles above the

entrance to Sungi Muturi. The terminal consists of a T-headed

pier 18.3m long, with a depth of 13.7m alongside; it can accommodate vessels of up to 30,000 tons, with a maximum

length of 200m and a maximum draft of 10.6m. Mooring

launches and a small tug are available. All mooring ropes

should be of manila; steel hawsers are not permitted. The current always sets on to the jetty; the maximum observed rate is

4.5 knots.

Teluk Bintuni—South Shore

5.59 The main rivers along this coast from W to E are

Sungi Kasuri, Sungi Kasira, and Sungi Kaitero. The headlands

of these rivers are low and, because of the great range of tide,

appear quite different at high and LW. The muddy points are, in

some cases, covered with low mangrove and are difficult to

identify.

5.59 After rounding Pulau Asap, vessels bound for Sungi Kasira

(2°30'S., 133°26'E.), the next inlet E of Sungi Kasuri, steer a

course of 118° on the SW point of Pulau Amutu Besar and,

when the W extremity of Sianiri Kecil is abeam to starboard,

alter course gradually to S to bring the second point on the E

bank of Sungi Kasira to bear 175°. Steer toward the point on

this bearing until the channel between Sianiri Kecil and Sianiri

Besar bears 270°, after which Sungi Kasiri may be entered on a

S course. Leaving the river favor the E shore.

5.59 Caution.—A dangerous wreck, marked by a beacon, is near

the E entrance point to Sungi Kasiri.

5.60 Kampung Babo (2°33'S., 133°26'E.) is on the W side

of Sungi Kasir, about 3 miles above the mouth. This large

village has two piers only suitable for boats. 

5.60 Sungi Kaitero, E of Amutu Besar, is well populated in its

upper reaches.

5.60 A wide bank extends across the head of the gulf between

Pulau Amutu Kecil to abreast of the mouth of Sungi Bakor

(2°17'S., 133°45'E.). 

5.60 Selat Modan is entered over a bar with a least depth of 4.1m

on a course of 095°. Anchorage can be taken, in 20m, in the

strait abreast of Kampung Modan.

5.60 Kampung Modan (2°23'S., 133°55'E.) is on the N shore of

Selat Modan. 

5.60 Tides—Currents.—At Kampung Modan, the highest water

level occurs in February and March, the lowest water level in

July, August and September. The maximum rise and fall of tide

that can be expected are, respectively, 2.9m above and 3.9m

below mean sea level.

Kepulauan Pisang

5.61 Kepulauan Pisang (2°38'S., 131°35'E.) are a group

of islands about 20 miles NW of Tanjung Fatagar. The group

consists of the long, narrow Pulau Sabuda and two massive

rocks, Pulau Tartaruga and Pulau Senchan (Sentjan), NW of

Pulau Sabuda. The islands of the group, rising steeply from

depths of 73 to 110m, are hilly, heavily wooded, and uninhabited. The maximum elevation, in the middle of Pulau

Sabuda, is 164m. A narrow reef extending off this island

widens to 183m off the SW point. Pulau Senchan, the outermost of the rocks NW of Pulau Sabuda, is 47m high and Pulau

Tataruga is 60m high. Both are surrounded by coastal reefs. On

the NW side of Pulau Tataruga there is an entrance in the reef

through which vessels may proceed to the reef in depths of

12.8m. Several reefs are around these islets and caution is

necessary when passing between Pulau Sabuda and Pulau

Tataruga. The channel between Pulau Sabuda and the islets to

the S is quite clear as is the area between Kepulauan Pisang

and the 3.6m reef off Tanjung Fatagar. A small 4.9m shoal is

2.75 miles NW of Pulau Sechan. A 5.5m shoal is 0.5 mile N of

Pulau Tartaruga, a 7m shoal is 1 mile NW, and a 5.9m shoal is

1.2 miles E of this same island.

5.61 A light is shown from a metal framework tower at the NE

end of Pulau Sabuda.

5.61 During the Southeast Monsoon, the best anchorage in this

group is on the N side of Pulau Sabuda. During the Northwest
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 111

Pub. 164

Monsoon the most sheltered anchorage is close to the S shore

of that island. Vessels will also be fairly well protected in this

latter anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon.

Irian Jaya—Tanjung Fatagar to Tanjung Nassaulang

5.62 From Tanjung Fatagar (2°46'S., 131°56'E.) to Tanjung Nassaulang (Cape van den Bosch) (4°05'S., 132°54'E.),

the coast is high, densely-wooded, mountainous land normally

terminating in steep, rocky cliffs. The E coast of Teluk Sebakor

is, however, considerably lower with an upward gradient, dipping at intervals, and forming a division between the mountainous Kumawa territory and that lying N of Teluk Sebakor.

5.62 There are few landmarks on this coast. Gunung Baik,

1,052m high, close S of Teluk Sebakor, is a good mark, and the

rather sharply-pointed peak, 1,006m high and 4 miles N of

Tanjung Nassaulang, is also conspicuous. Almost all of the few

streams along this coast dry at LW and are navigable only by

small native craft. Near Kampung Fafak there is a fair amount

of trade in forest products, but in the S portion between

Tanjung Tongerai and Tanjung Nassaulang, there are no signs

of habitation.

5.62 Because the Southeast Monsoon blows mainly in the direction of the coast, there is little protection from the swell except

inside deep bays or behind projecting headlands. In Teluk

Sebakor, probably because of the influence of the lower land,

the East Monsoon is felt mainly in a direction N of E.

5.62 Tides—Currents.—The flood currents along this coast set

to the N and the ebb to the S. Both are weak.

5.62 The coast between Tanjung Fatagar and Tanjung Kokraaf,

about 9.5 miles to the S, is very irregular and forms two bays

separated from each other by the very conspicuous Tanjung

Tegin.

5.62 The N bay is Teluk Wirtopin and the S bay is Teluk Suweri.

Both are of little importance.

5.62 Pulau Batu Putih (2°57'S., 131°58'E.), close S of Tanjung

Kokraaf, is a rocky wooded islet about 2 miles long in an E-W

direction and 155m high. It is a limestone formation with

conspicuous white patches. The W point in particular, is a

striking headland with steep white cliffs. A 4.9m coral shoal is

N of the island and an 11.9m shoal is about 0.5 mile farther W.

The least depth in the passage between Pulau Batu Pitih and

Tanjung Kokraaf is 11.9m.

5.63 Teluk Togarwatan (2°55'S., 131°59'E.) and Teluk

Sipatnanam, immediately E of Tanjung Kokraaf, are separated

by Tanjung Gangrurimur, which has a cascade of fresh water

on its E side. They afford safe anchorage during the West Monsoon but are of no importance otherwise.

5.63 During the East Monsoon, there is safe anchorage N of Pulau

Batu Pitih.

5.63 A wide coral bank covered with fine sand extends out from

the coast between Tanjung Ributtutin and Kampung Fakfak.

Pulau Ega (Eka) (2°59'S., 132°07'E.), SE of Tanjung

Ributtutin, is a narrow, rocky, wooded island with a white

beach and several remarkable white patches. A reef extends out

about 0.5 mile from the island.

5.63 The Tipporra Islets are on an extensive reef between Pulau

Ega and the mainland. The area is not navigable.

5.63 Pulau Panjang (2°59'S., 131°14'E.), about 1.5 miles E of

Pulau Eka and separated from it by a deep channel, is narrow

and 9.5 miles long in an E-W direction. A narrow ridge of hills

whose slopes are under cultivation run along its entire length.

A lighted buoy (port hand) marks the extremity of a spit

extending SE from Pulau Eka at the channel entrance. Reefs

extend 287m from the W end and 463m from the E end of the

island. A light is shown from Tanjung Wamarusa, the E end of

Pulau Panjang.

5.63 Caution.—Several charted reefs are S of the E part of Pulau

Panjang. Egeron Reef (3°05'S., 132°18'E.) has a least depth of

1.2m and other reefs 2.1 to 6.7m are W of it. Between Pulau

Panjang and Pulau Semai, about 10 miles farther SE there are

two reefs, 1.8m and 2.7m deep which discolor well in a favorable light.

5.64 Fakfak Road (2°57'S., 132°17'E.), between Meti

Meti Reef and Tubi Serang Islet, is sheltered by Pulau Panjang,

but a heavy swell sets into it during the Southeast Monsoon.

5.64 Tubi Serang Islet is on the E side of Fakfak Road near the SE

end of a 0.8 mile projection of the coast reef. It is wooded,

partly with nutmeg trees. It has been reported that the coastal

reef in the vicinity of the islet is extending SW and W.

5.64 Meti Meti Reef, on the W side of Fakfak Road, partly

uncovers at LW. A lighted buoy marks the SE side of the reef.

A beacon marks a similar but smaller reef 1.75 miles WNW of

Metimeti. There is a deep passage between the reef and the

coastal reef. A drying reef is 1.5 miles W of Meti Meti Reef.

5.65 Kampung Fakfak (2°56'S., 132°17'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53100) is on the top of a hill, 100m high. The town

is the administrative and trading center of the region. A pier,

which projects from the shore S of the town, can be used by

vessels up to 600 tons with a draft not exceeding 3m, although

the pier has been reported to be in a bad state of repair.

5.65 A buoy is moored at 0.2 mile SSW of the pier. A lighted

buoy lies about 0.3 mile S of the inlet.

5.65 Tides—Currents.—At Fakfak Roads, the highest water

level occurs between February and April; the lowest water

level occurs in July, August, and September. The maximum

rise and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 0.75m

above and 0.9m below mean sea level.

5.65 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 44m, off the coast

reef. Vessels approaching the anchoage steer a N course toward

the pier at Kampung Fakfak and anchor when the channel

between Pulau Ega and Pulau Panjang becomes open, or when

a steep point of land to the E is seen midway between the N

point of Tubi Serang Islet and the S point of Keke Islet.

5.65 Directions.—The channel E of Pulau Panjang is clear of

dangers, but two reefs, with depths of 1.8 to 2.7m, respectively,

6.5 and 3.75miles ESE of Tanjung Wamarusa must be avoided.

These reefs show up by discoloration with good light. Vessels

approaching from W can pass to within 0.5 mile of Tanjung

Wamarusa on an easterly course. Vessels approaching from the

S should steer for the lighthouse on a course between 320° and

Port of Fakfak

http://www.portina4.go.id/fak2.htm
112 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

347°. The lighthouse point can be rounded at a distance of 0.5

mile. A good range is with the S point of Tubi Serang Islet in a

line 327.5° with the flagstaff at Kampung Fakfak.

5.65 There are several villages on the coast SE of Fakfak Roads

including Kampung Wambar, 13 miles to the SE.

5.65 Pulau Urat, a small islet is separated from the mainland by a

very narrow unnavigable channel.

5.65 Pulau Semai, 482m high and close W of Pulau Urat, is separated from that island by Pinto Besar, a narrow channel limited

to small craft only. Two villages, one of which is Kampung

Krabutwiendi, are on the W part of the N coast of Pulau Semai

near Tanjung Tubokmatan.

5.65 Caution.—Caution should be exercised because the coastal

reef close SW of the pier is reported extending S.

5.66 Tanjung Kirana (3°14'S., 132°35'E.), 24.5 miles SE

of Fakfak Roads, is high. There are several reefs with depths of

3.6 to 5.8m within a 3.5 mile radius of the point; a drying reef

is 6 miles W of the point. The reefs are generally well marked

by discoloration. It affords good anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon, in a depth of about 45m. 

5.66 Kawar Nuwa, an isolated high and very conspicuous islet, is

4 miles W of NW of Tanjung Kirana.

Teluk Weri (3°12'S., 132°35'E.) is a large bight on the N

side of Tanjung Kirana formed by the coast bendingto the E.

This bay affords good anchorage, in 40 to 50m, during the

Southeast Monsoon, but during the Northwest Monsoon anchorage is untenable. There are several settlements on the

shores of the bay. Except for the dangerous charted reefs at the

head of the bay the remainder is free from dangers.

5.66 Teluk Sebakor (3°26'S., 132°45'E.), between Tanjung Turkanggur, 5.5 miles SE of Tanjung Kirana, and Tanjung Tongerai, is divided into two parts by the islands, Pulau Karas,

Pulau Faur, and Pulau Tuburuasa. The W part of the bay is

clear except for a few reefs near the coast, but the E part is

strewn with dangerous reefs, some of which may not be shown

on the charts. With good visibility, all of the reefs are marked

by discoloration. The part of the bay near the islands is safe

and good anchorage can be found almost anywhere. There are

few inhabitants except on the islands.

5.66 Pulau Karas (3°28'S., 132°40'E.), has two fairly-high portions connected by a low narrow strip of land; from a distance

it appears as two hills. Kampung Mas and Kampung Tamisa

are the two principal villages on the island. There is anchorage

off Kampung Mas, in 55 to 73m; closer inshore there is danger

of fouling the anchor in coral.

5.66 Pulau Faur is almost entirely level, except for a 329m summit in its S part.

5.66 Pulau Tuburuasa is about the same height as the N part of

Pulau Faur.

5.66 A 5.8m reef is 4 miles WNW of the NW point of Pulau

Karas; an 18.3m bank (position approximate) was reported,

about 4 miles WSW of the same point.

5.66 A drying reef is close off the NW and NE coast of Pulau

Tuburuasa.

5.66 Between Tanjung Tongerai (3°38'S., 132°43'E.) and Teluk

Sanggala, about 17 miles to the S, the coast is high, steep, and

rocky with deep water close-to. There is limited anchorage

during the East Monsoon in the small inlet N of Tanjung

Tongerai.

5.66 Gunung Baik, near the last-named point, rises gradually

from the coast to a height of 1,052m.

5.66 There is safe anchorage, in about 50m, N or S, according to

the monsoon, of the unnamed islet on the coastal reef about 12

miles S of Tanjung Tongerai. A 6.7m reef was reported, about

5 miles SW of the islet.

5.67 Teluk Sanggala (3°55'S., 132°49'E.) is formed by the

Mommon Peninsula projecting in a NW direction from the

coast 21 miles SSE of Tanjung Tongerai. This bay is easily

recognized from a considerable distance seaward by a waterfall, close N of the entrance to the bay and which appears as a

clear white patch. A detached 7.6m shoal is about 0.6 mile W

of the waterfall. During the Southeast Monsoon, there is good

anchorage, in depths of 29 to 40m, close N of the waterfall.

The greater part of the shores of the bay are steep and high with

occasional patches of sand between the rocks.

5.67 Two islets are on a reef close N of the waterfall. Other islets

and reefs are off the N point of the Mommon Peninsula. Three

detached reefs are inside the bay.

5.67 Anchorage can be taken inside the bay, either N or S of the E

of the two drying patches on the E side of Mommon. S of this

reef a vessel can anchor, in 33m. A reef with a depth less than

5m extends 0.5 mile from the NW point of the Mommon

Peninsula.

5.67 Teluk Wap (3°58'S., 132°49'E.) is partly obstructed by three

islands on a large connecting reef across the entrance; there is

room in the bay for only one vessel. A 1.8m shoal about 0.25

mile N of the NW island obstructs that entrance to the bay.

Anchorage can be taken, in 51m, in the bay, but during the

Southeast Monsoon even the inner part of the bay is subject to

swells. There are several islets near the head of the bay.

Tanjung Nassaulang (Cape van den Bosch) (Tanjung

Katumin) (4°05'S., 132°54'E.) is steep and high and has been

reported to be a good radar target at a distance of 30 miles.

About 1 mile N of the cape is a low stretch of coast behind

which the land rises steeply. Between this low land and Teluk

Wap there is deep water right up to the shore. About 2 miles N

of the cape, where the coast is less steep and is fronted by a

drying reef, there is fairly good anchorage sheltered against the

Southeast Monsoon. A prominent rock, covered with vegetation, lies near the N end of this break.

Irian Jaya—Tanjung Nassaulang to Tanjung

Bohia

5.68 Between Tanjung Nassaulang (Cape Van Den Bosch)

and Tanjung Bohia (4°07'S., 134°37'E.), about 100 miles to

the E, the coast forms a large bay the NW shore of which is

low, flat, marshy and bordered by shoals; the NE shore,

however, is high and steep with considerable depths offshore.

5.68 Between Tanjung Nassaulang and Tanjung Usau, about 21

miles to the E, the coast consists of high densely-wooded land

terminating in cliffs which descent sheer into the sea. East of

Tanjung Usau the coast is low as far as Tanjung Simora, after

which it again becomes high and rocky with densely-wooded

mountains in the interior. The principal islands off the coast between Tanjung Nassaulang and Tanjung Bohia are Pulau Adi,

Pulau Namatote, Pulau Aiduma (Alduna), and Pulau Kajumera

(Kajoe Merah).
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 113

Pub. 164

5.68 Because the highland in the interior has no conspicuous

points, the principal landmarks along this coast are the headlands and the islands. Other conspicuous landmarks are the flat

247m hill on the S end of Pulau Namotote, the Lamansiere

Mountain Range, the two pointed summits on Pulau Kajumerah, and Bohia Hill.

5.68 Winds—Weather.—Dense clouds and light winds from all

quarters accompanied the change period at the beginning of

April followed by sharp W squalls. East winds gradually

prevailed and, at the end of April, the Southeast Monsoon was

established, with generally ESE winds varied by W, SW, and S

gales. In the middle of July, the wind increased in force and

veered more to the S. During September the Southeast

Monsoon gradually reached its strength and, at the end of that

month very fine weather sets in with the change.

5.68 The West Monsoon began at the end of November with

much less force than the East Monsoon; land and sea breezes

succeeded each other regularly. The general direction of the

wind was WNW, although considerably influenced by the

contour of the land. The change set in about the middle of February with calms and fair weather.

5.68 The East Monsoon brought cool weather and considerable

rainfall. The West Monsoon was warmer and drier.

5.68 Tides—Currents.—The flood current sets to the E between

Cape Nassaulang and Tanjung Usau and to the WNW along the

N and S sides of Pulau Adi. The direction of the ebb current is

opposite to that of the flood. These currents, meeting in Selat

Adi (Nautilus), set up strong confused currents with swirls and

make the greater part of the strait appear to be filled with

breakers.

5.68 There are no tidal currents of any importance elsewhere

except in the N part of Teluk Kamrau and in the narrow entrance to Teluk Arguni (3°27'S., 133°36'E.), where a strong

ebb current causes heavy tide rips.

5.68 Anchorage.—During the West Monsoon, there is good anchorage anywhere between Tanjung Nassaulang and Tanjung

Simora (3°40'S., 133°41'E.). During the East Monsoon the

only safe anchorage is off the W coast of Pulau Adi or on the

ridge connecting Nusa Wulan to the mainland. East of Teluk

Bitsyara (Bitsaru) the only anchorage is close under the coast,

but even there the depths are usually great.

5.69 Nusa Wulan (4°07'S., 132°57'E.) is a small inhabited

island close to the shore between Cape Nassaulang and

Tanjung Papisoi. It is connected to the coast by a ridge with

depths of less than 18.3m. During the East Monsoon, there is

safe anchorage, in 13.7m, between Nusa Wulan and the mainland. During the West Monsoo, anchorage can be taken close

under the E shore of Tanjung Papiosi, W of the Derdi Reefs.

5.69 The small Derdi Islets are on a drying reef immediately E of

Tanjung Papisoi; there are two more unnamed islets NW of

them.

5.69 Pulau Adi is a low island 23 miles long in a NW-SE direction. There are some hills in the W part of the island but they

have no conspicuous summits. A light is shown from a white

structure on the E tip of Adi. The island is only occasionally

inhabited. In the East Monsoon there is good anchorage off the

W coast. The SW end of the island should be given a wide

berth.

5.69 Caution.—Four dangerous reefs are N of Pulau Adi.

Between the westernmost, which dries 1.5m, and Tanjung Lumatta there is a narrow passage which is obstructed by a 2.7m

shoal. The other three reefs, the easternmost of which is 5.75

miles N of Tanjung Watukebo, have depths of 11.9 to 14.9m. A

10.5m depth is 12 miles NNW of Tanjung Watukebo.

5.69 Pulau Tumbu Tumbu, encircled by an extensive drying reef,

is about 5 miles S of Pulau Adi. There are several charted reefs

between this islet and Pulau Adi with depths of more than

5.5m.

5.70 Selat Adi (Selat Nautilus) (4°06'S., 133°16'E.), separating Pulau Adi from the mainland coast, is 4 miles wide

between Tanjung Kainara and Tanjung Usau and has depths of

12.8 to 50m. Pulau Urobi, a small rocky islet E of Tanjung

Usau, Pulau Unoga, and Nustiga, N of this islet; are in the NE

part of Selat Adi. Simla Reef is NW of Pulau Unoga. Farther E

are Pulau Karawatu and Pulau Keliwala, uninhabited low islands surrounded by a fairly wide coral reef with depths of 0.9

to 6.4m between the islands. There are several shoals between

the two islands and the mainland. A light is shown from the E

extremity of Pulau Keliwala.

5.70 Tides—Currents.—Within Selat Adi and S of Pulau Adi

the flood current sets E and the ebb WNW at a rate of up to 1.5

knots. At times the sea breaks over the entire length of the strait

because of the confluence of three currents from different

directions.

5.70 Anchorage.—During the Northwest Monsoon, there is good

anchorage everywhere. During the East Monsoon, there is no

safe anchorage until the direction of the wind shifts more to the

S, then there is good anchorage close under the N coast of

Pulau Karawatu or Pulau Keliwala.

5.70 Directions.—A vessel approaching Selat Adi from W

should keep the SE point of Pulau Urobi in line with the NW

point of Pulau Karawatu, bearing 067°, until Tanjung Usau is

abaft the beam bearing 271°. Then bring this point astern on

this bearing and pass between Pulau Urobi and the dangers N

of Pulau Adi. Care should be taken not to deviate from this line

because the current sets across the channel in the vicinity.

5.70 Caution.—After passing N through Selat Adi, there are

numerous shoals to the W of Pulau Urobi, Pulau Karawata, and

Pulau Keliwala and also to the NW of Pulau Keliwala; the

chart is the best guide.

Sungi Karufa (Karup) (3°53'S., 133°23'E.) is entered over a

bar which limits its use to small craft.

5.70 Anchorage can be taken, in 6.7 to 7.9m, anywhere on the

mud flat extending over 5 miles offshore between the entrance

to Sungi Karufa and Teluk Kamrau during the Northwest Monsoon.

5.70 Teluk Kamrau is entered between Tanjung Taronmeta

(3°34'S., 133°34'E.), a low point, and Tanjung Simora (Smora),

9 miles to the SE, also a low point.

5.70 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, for danger areas in

the vicinity of Tanjung Smora (Tanjung Simora) and Telak

Kamrau.

5.71 Pulau Serotte (3°34'S., 133°38'E.), a low islet covered with high trees is at the N end of a shoal ridge which di-
114 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

vides the entrance to Teluk Kamrau into two channels. The W

channel should not be used because it is encumbered with reefs

and shoals. The E channel has fewer shoal spots; the chart is

the best guide. A light is shown at the N end of Pulau Serotte. 

5.71 It was reported that the depths of about 0.5 mile WNW of

Pulau Serotte were considerably less than charted.

5.71 Sungi Umbwallar (Kumbwaller) and Sungi Irimawa, flowing

into the NW part of Teluk Kamrau, are more in the nature of

arms of the sea and drain the marshy land. Sungi Umbwallar,

as far as it has been surveyed, can be navigated, but Sungi

Irimawa is difficult because the edges of the banks on either

side are steep-to and the waters are muddy and sunken dangers

cannot be seen.

5.71 Pulau Syirnusa is an island about 4 miles N of the joint

entrance to the above rivers.

5.71 Teluk Arguni (3°23'S., 133°39'E.) is entered at the head of

Teluk Kamrau close S of Pulau Syirnusa. The bay is difficult to

navigate, particularly in its S portion, unless it has been previously buoyed. It should not be entered on a full tide; the best

time is about 1 hour after LW when the three westernmost reefs

are still visible and the ebb current is weak.

5.71 Teluk Kaimana (3°40'S., 133°44'E.) is a wide bight

between Tanjung Simora and the high tongue of land that

terminates in Tanjung Bitsyaru. Kampung Simora, on the W

shore, is fronted by a reef and also extends offshore S of

Kampung Kaimana on the E side of the bay.

5.71 Safe anchorage, in about 9.1m, is about 1 mile W of the pier

head at Kampung Kaimana.

5.71 Several charted shoal spots with depths of as little as 0.9m

are in the bay.

5.71 Tides—Currents.—In the bay the maximum rise and fall of

tide that can be expected are, respectively, 0.75m above and

1.4m below mean sea level.

5.71 Kampung Kaimana (3°40'S., 133°44'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53110) has a prominent mosque, flagstaff, and customhouse with a corrugated roof. A drying reef extends 0.5 mile

offshore from Tanjung Poweri, which lies close S of the

village.

5.71 It was reported the pier at the village was in bad state of

repair. A light is shown near the pier.

5.71 Teluk Bitsyaru, immediately E of Teluk Kaimana, extends

10 miles to the N. Its shores consist of high rocky walls, but

there is some low land in the NW part of the bay near the

mouth of Sungi Sisiandang. Farther inland there is a cleft

running in the direction of Kaimana, between Mount Lowai,

757m high, and the mountains E of Teluk Kaimana.

5.71 There are three reefs in the middle of the bay, with depths of

1.2 to 5.5m, and several dangerous reefs in the SE part of the

bay near the N entrance to Selat Namatote.

5.72 Pulau Namatote (3°47'S., 133°52'E.), paralleling the

coast S of Teluk Bitsyara for about 10 miles in a NNW-SSE

direction, is formed by a narrow mountain range which

descends precipitously into the sea except near its N end,

which terminates in a drying reef extending 0.15 mile farther N

and E than charted. A small 247m hill in the S part of the island

is a conspicuous landmark. The highest point of the island,

447m high, is about 2.25 miles N of this hill. Good anchorage

may be obtained during the Southeast Monsoon off Kampung

Namatote, on a low part of the island to the S of the flat hill

mentioned above. The island terminates in a single mountain to

the S of the village. Pulau Sagin is off the S point of Pulau

Namotote and the channel between the two has several islets

and should not be used.

5.72 Java Bay, on the E side of Pulau Namatote, has a shoal at its

head. There is anchorage in the bay, in 18.3m, for one vessel,

but the anchorage is exposed to the tidal currents. Local

knowledge is necessary. The small bay on the W side of the

island opposite Java Bay is closed by a reef.

5.72 Selat Namatote, separating Pulau Namatote from the mainland, connects Teluk Bitsyaru to the N with Teluk Triton to the

S. The coast on both sides is high and rocky and in many places

rises almost perpendicularly from the sea. The N part of the

strait is obstructed by reefs and should not be used. The drying

coastal reef off the N end of Pulau Namatote is marked by

discoloration and it has been reported that it extends about 0.2

mile farther N and E than charted.

5.72 South of Teluk Gagak (Raaf Bay) the strait is clear. Good

holding ground can be found anywhere in the strait. The current sets it the direction of the strait, but numerous rocks in the

N part cause swirls.

5.73 Teluk Gagak (Raaf Bay) (3°45'S., 133°54'E.), on the

E side of Selat Namatote, penetrates a considerable distance

inland in a SE direction and affords safe anchorage with local

knowledge under all conditions. The entrance is narrow, but,

with due caution for the reef on the N side, it is not difficult to

enter. This reef dries 0.9m and is well marked by discoloration.

About halfway across the bay the holding ground is good but in

the inner part there are several reefs.

Teluk Triton, E of the S end of Selat Namatote, is 6.5 miles

wide at its entrance between Tanjung Aiwa and the NW end of

Pulau Aiduma, and is 11 miles long NE-SW. It is completely

surrounded by high rocky shores except in the N corner where

the river, Sungi Tombona flows out through a cleft. Mauwara

Island and Semisarom Island are in the NW part of the bay.

The channel between these islands and the area between

Mauwara Island and the mainland are not navigable by large

vessels nor is the small bay NE of Tanjung Aiwa.

5.73 Many islets and rocks are inside of and off the entrance to

Teluk Triton. Nusurumi Islet, the largest of these and in the

middle of the bay, has a reef extending from its E side and a

detached 1.8m reef about 0.75 mile W of its N end. The other

islets can be approached closely. Nusurumi Islet is marked by a

light. Ambasinsi Islet, on the S shore has a village on its SE

side and is the only inhabited islet in the bay.

5.73 A 5.5m reef is 0.5 mile S of Pulau Lauzaro and 6.7m reef is

about 1.75 miles NE of the NW corner of Pulau Aiduma.

5.73 The navigation of Teluk Triton presents no difficulties.

Because the SW edge of the drying reef off the mouth of Sungi

Tombona is very steep and the water muddy, vessels proceeding to anchor off Kampung Lobo should steer close in to

the W shore after rounding Tanjung Kumura.

Pulau Aiduma (Pulau Alduna) (3°58'S., 134°06'E.), on the

E side of the entrance to Teluk Triton, is high and steep-to,

especially on its SW side. There are two mountain peaks on the

island, the highest of which is 494m, but they are not easily

recognized. Kampung Aiduma is on the NW end of the island.

A dangerous 2.7m reef is close off the NW coast of the island.
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 115

Pub. 164

5.73 Anchorage can be taken within the inlet about 3.75 miles E

of Sarue Nus by vessels with local knowledge. Small vessels

can anchor in the inlet about 4.5 miles SSE of the latter place.

A 3m reef extending some distance offshore restricts the

swinging room.

5.74 Pulau Dramai (4°01'S., 134°14'E.), off the SE end of

Pulau Alduma and in the S entrance to Selat Iris, is hilly and

partly cultivated. There is fairly good anchorage, in a depth of

24m, about 0.8 mile E of the NW point of the island, which is

much lower than the other parts of the island.

5.74 Selat Iris (3°58'S., 134°09'E.), separating Pulau Dramai

from the mainland, has a general width of 2 miles except at the

N entrance where the navigable channel is reduced to 0.5 mile,

and in the S part where it is split in two by Pulau Dramai. The

strait is deep and clear and offers no difficulty except for a

strong current, especially in the N part near Sarue Nus, where

whirlpools may be encountered.

5.74 The E shore, like the W, is steep-to. The inlet N of Pulau

Dramai affords good anchorage.

5.74 Across the entrance to Teluk Kajumerah is Pulau Kajumerah (4°01'S., 132°23'E.), roughly triangular shaped and

attaining a height of 555m on its S side. Another 381m summit

is a little farther W. The S and W sides of the island are steep

and rocky, but elsewhere the land slopes up gradually. Pulau

Salakula is off the W end of Pulau Kajumerah leaving a

channel about 0.3 mile wide, deep and clear, between it and

Tanjung Wandala on the mainland. The passage between Pulau

Salakula and Pulau Kajumerah is not navigable. Three small

islets are off the E end of Pulau Kajumerah; the channel on

either side of the islets is clear. Several small islets are off the

N part of Pulau Kajumerah, the largest of which are Nasir,

Marewa, and Mondan. The passage between these islets and

Pulau Kajumera are suitable only for small boats.

5.74 The inlet on the W side of the bay between Tanjung Wandala

and Tanjung Sawara Selai (Tanjung Soaka Sekai) is clear of

dangers. The small bay S of Tanjung Wikrombus is almost

closed by a 0.9m reef extending about 0.5 mile SSE and by a

1.4m reef fronting its entrance. The small cove at the head of

Teluk Kajumerah is navigable at LW when the reefs can be

seen.

5.75 The E shore of Teluk Kajumerah between Sungi

Airawoi and Tanjong Ferai (3°58'S., 134°26'E.) is for the

most part low, mangrove-covered, and backed by steeply-rising

mountains. An inlet is N of Tanjung Ferai; its SE part has

several shoals that dry at LW. Between Tanjung Ferai and

Tanjung Awura the coast is steep and rocky.

5.75 Two rocks with depths of 8.5m and 2.1m are about 2 and

2.75 miles, respectively, NW of Tanjung Ferai. The W extremity of the islet NW of Tanjung Awura in range with the E side

of the northernmost of the islets farther to the NW leads W of

these dangers.

5.75 Teluk Lakahia is 8.5 miles wide at its entrance between

Tanjung Awura (4°02'S., 134°29'E.) and Tanjung Bohia and

penetrates the land in a funnel shape for 11 miles to the NE,

after which it turns around to the E and continues several miles

inland. This latter portion, known as Teluk Etna, is only about

0.75 mile wide. A drying bank extends W from Tanjung Bohia

and merges into a reef with depths of less than 5.5m extending

about 2.5 miles SW. Shoal patches with depths of 4 to 5m are

about 2.5 miles SW, and a reef awash is about 2.25 miles S,

respectively, of Tanjung Bohia. A group of coral shoals with

depths of 1 to 2.2m are about 1.25 miles W of the same point.

Two small islets about 2.2m high are near the end of a drying

bank extending W from Tanjung Bohia, and a reef which dries

0.9m is about 0.75 mile N of the point.

5.76 Pulau Lakahia (4°04'S., 134°36'E.), a low and

wooded island surrounded by a reef, is in the entrance to Teluk

Lakahia. The reef extends for 1 mile from the SW extremity of

the island. The channel between Pulau Lakahia and Tanjung

Bohia is very narrow at the N end and should not be used

without local knowledge. The preferred entrance between

Pulau Lakahia and Tanjung Awura is wide and deep and has an

area that has been swept to 11.9m.

The NW shore of Teluk Lakahia is steep and mostly high and

rocky, except for an occasional sandy beach behind which the

land rises. The E side is tree-covered and low except near

Tanjung Bohia which has a hill of the same name, 110m high.

Tanjung Tarella, 8.5 miles N of Tanjung Bohia, is a low, sandy,

tree-covered point. A long, narrow, drying bank is 0.75 mile W

of this latter point. The E side of Teluk Lakahia is mostly

occupied by an extensive bank with depths of less than 5.5m.

Teluk Terara is a shoal and unimportant.

5.76 Between the drying bank and the W shore there is an

irregularly-shaped area swept to 4.5m.

5.76 There are two passages to Teluk Etna; each is narrow and

hazardous. The W passage, close along the W shore, passes

between a 0.6m rock off Tanjung Etaburi and Karang Japbari, a

reef with a least depth of 1.8m. The E passage is between the

drying bank W of Tanjung Tarella and Karang Japbari. The

approach to the passages has been swept to 4.5m and leads on

either side of a 1.9m bank. Local knowledge and alert piloting

are essential for safe transit through this area. Numerous unmarked dangers within the area are shown on the chart.

5.76 Tides—Currents.—At Pulau Lakahia the highest water

occurs in May and November. The maximum rise and fall of

tide that can be expected are, respectively, about 1.1m above

and 1.1m below mean sea level.

5.76 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage anywhere in Teluk

Lakahia. During the East Monsoon, because a heavy swell then

runs to the NNW of Pulau Lakahia, the best anchorage is off

the mouth of the small Sungi Kambelangen, W of Tanjung Etaburi. During the West Monsoon there is anchorage off the NW

side of the bay, E of Tanjung Amanmawa.

5.77 Teluk Etna (3°55'S., 134°45'E.), narrow and landlocked, is entered between Tanjung Itewi and Tanjung Bawia,

two steep projections of the coast. Tanjung Itewi, is steep-to

but on its E side a row of drying rocks extends nearly 183m

from the shore between Tanjung Ulupala and Tanjung Bawai.

Immediately outside the outer rock the depth is 7.3m. A drying

sand bank is off Tanjung Ulupala. The N side of the bay is

mountainous; the highest point, Pegunungan Bamana, about 3

miles NE of the entrance, is 1,371m high. The shore is not

steep-to everywhere, but is broken by stretches of low mangrove-covered land. The S side is similar to the N except that

the mountains are in detached groups. This more open coast

has a perceptible effect on local weather conditions. A water-
116 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

fall, with a graduated drop of about 198m, is in the W part of

the bay N of the W entrance point.

Depths in the bay vary considerably, with the narrowest parts

being the deepest. The E part of the bay is shoal, but a channel

with more than 9.1m extends to within 5.5 miles of the head,

and depths of 5.5m extend still farther.

5.77 A settlement is on the N shore about 1 mile NNW of Tanjung

Itewi and an oil storage farm is on the N shore abreast Tanjung

Bawai. A pier at the latter has a depth of 3.9m at its head.

5.77 Tides—Currents.—In Teluk Etna, the highest HW level

occurs in April and May and October or November; the lowest

water level occurs in May and November. The maximum rise

and fall that can be expected are, respectively, about 1.3m

above and 1.3m below mean sea level.

5.77 The tidal currents in Teluk Etna turn four times daily. The

strength depends on the range, the phase of the tide, and the

breadth and depths of the part of the bay. Generally the current

at springs has a rate of 3 to 4 knots in the narrow parts of the

bay. The currents follow the direction of the channel. Whirlpools, necessitating careful steering, are formed at the drying

reef in the middle of the bay and at various places where the

turns are sharp. In the bight N of Tanjung Itewi in particular,

the water has a continuous turning motion.

5.77 Anchorage.—There is anchorage throughout the length of

the bay in moderate depths. Current eddies and poor holding

ground make anchorage inadvisable in the narrow parts of the

bay or in the bight N of Tanjung Itewi.

5.77 Directions.—Approaching Teluk Lakahia from S, the

mountain Bukit Buru (4°13'S., 134°56'E.) to the E is a good

mark because it stands quite apart and close to the coast.

Closer, Bohia Hill and Pulau Lakahia serve to point out the

entrance to the bay. The S portion of the bay presents no

difficulties. From W, the 487m mountain on Tanjung Awura is

a good mark. Vessels approaching from E should give Tanjung

Bohia and Pulau Lakahia a wide berth.

5.77 After passing between Tanjung Amanamawa and Pulau

Lakahia bring Tanjung Tarella, which is conspicuous because

of its trees, to bear 068° and cross the bank abreast Tanjung

Etaburi on that course over a least depth of 5.9m. When in

depths of 10.9m, alter course to 040° until Tanjung Wariwi

bears 285°, after which steer straight for the center of the

entrance to Teluk Etna. On the E side of the navigable channel

near Tanjung Tarella there are two drying reefs which at LW,

assist in giving the direction of the channel.

In the entrance to Teluk Etna, a drying sand bank and shoal

water between Tanjung Ulupala and Tanjung Bawia (3°56'S.,

134°40'E.) considerably reduce the width of the navigable

channel. The deep W side near Tanjung Itewi (3°56'S.,

134°39'E.) should be held and the bay gradually steered into as

Tanjung Saimba, the point on the N shore about 3.5 miles E of

Tanjung Bawia, opens clear on Tanjung Bawia. Care should be

taken to avoid the 7.3m patch NE of Tanjung Itewi. When

about 2 miles E of Tanjung Bawia keep on the S side of the

channel to avoid the bank to the W of Tanjung Saimba.

5.77 If the current is strong, give this point a good berth to avoid

the eddies, and keep along its E side until the part of the bay E

of Tanjung Yaramabonga comes open, then cross over and

keep along the N side of that point and on the S side of the

channel until the partly drying reef in the narrowest part of the

channel abreast the Seriwi Mountains has been passed. The

channel N of this reef is also clear. After passing the reef,

gradually steer over to the N shore until abreast of the steep

headland 2.5 miles E of the reef, when a course of 116° on a

conspicuous mountain spur on the S shore leads farther into the

bay. The channel here narrows considerably and is steepest on

the N side. The best plan is to keep on soundings on the S side

of the channel and act accordingly.

Irian Jaya—Tanjung Bohia to Tanjung Kool

5.78 From Tanjung Bohia, the coast trends ESE for about

13 miles to Tanjung Narika (4°15'S., 134°49'E.), a spur of

Bukit Buru, which can be recognized by several large yellow

patches against the rocks. Several streams discharge into the

sea along this stretch of coast.

5.78 East of Tanjung Nariki, the land rises for about 7.5 miles to

Bukit Buru (4°13'S., 134°56'E.), a ridge 14 miles long which

slopes steeply on the E side. Between it and the Pegunungan

Tiyo range to the E there is a valley with hilly ground.

5.78 Between Tanjung Nariki and Tanjung Namaripi (4°28'S.,

135°13'E.), about 29 miles ESE, several rivers discharge into

the sea. Between Tanjung Nariki and the mouth of Sungi Buru,

9 miles SE, the coast is high and rocky but beyond that it is

lower and closely backed by hills. Breakers have been reported

at a position 1.5 miles WSW of the river.

5.78 Sungi Katera (4°22'S., 135°03'E.), about 12 miles W of

Tanjung Namaripi, has a large village on the E side of its entrance.

5.78 Tanjung Namaripi (4°28'S., 135°13'E.) is a steep foreland

which appears as an island when seen from E and is visible for

30 miles. A stranded wreck is about 2 miles E of the point.

5.78 From a few miles E of Bukit Buru the Pengunungan Tiyo

range of mountains extend in an E direction and join the

Pengunungan Sudirman range. The highest summits are snowcovered and visible from S at a distance of 75 miles in clear

weather, but are generally enveloped in clouds except in the

early morning or at sunset. In general they appear to be gently

undulating. Puncak Jaya (4°06'S., 136°50'E.) is a prominent

landmark.

5.78 Between Tanjung Namaripi and Pulau Naurio (4°56'S.,

136°48'E.), about 100 miles to the ESE, the coast is low and

densely wooded, presenting a monotonously uniform appearance relieved only occasionally by the gaps at the mouths of

the rivers. There are no known off-lying dangers along this

coast except near Pulau Naurio.

5.78 A wooded point, conspicuous from E and W, is 30 miles E of

Tanjung Namaripi. A remarkable flat summit is about 9 miles

NW of the wooded point and 5 miles from the coast; it is a

good mark when bearing between 045° and 315°.

5.79 Sungi Uta (4°35'S., 136°02'E.), discharging 45 miles

E of Tanjung Namaripi, can be navigated by small craft for

several miles above the mouth.

5.79 The entrance to Sungi Makemaw, about 8 miles E of Sungi

Uta, is distinctive. The W entrance point projects sharply and

the E point appears as two islets. From the latter point, a drying

bank extends 2 miles SW and breakers have been seen 2.5

miles from shore. The river is not navigable.

5.79 Anchorage.—There is anchorage anywhere, in 11 to 14m,

between Sungi Uta and Sungi Makemaw.
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 117

Pub. 164

Sungi Mimika (4°41'S., 136°28'E.), 22 miles E of Sungi

Makemaw is easily recognized by an isolated group of trees

near Kampung Kokonao, just W of the mouth of the river. The

river is navigable by small craft. The coast here is low and

covered with mangrove. The banks at the river entrance are

bordered by a strip of sand partly covered by trees, among

which are some dwellings. There is good anchorage, in 20m,

with the W entrance point of the river bearing 014°. Local

knowledge is necessary. The river is only suitable for small

craft at HW.

5.79 There are numerous rivers between Sungi Mimika and Pulau

Naurio, none of which are of navigational importance. A large

white beacon board is at the W entrance point to Sungi

Keakwa, 5 miles SE of Sungi Mimika. A light is shown from

the entrance to Sungi Keakwa. 

5.79 Tanjung Steenboom (4°56'S., 136°50'E.) is at the E extremity of two islands, now joined together, Pulau Apiripi and

Pulau Amewtiri, on the E side of the entrance to Sungi Tipuka.

Another small island, Pulau Naurio, is about 1 mile NE of the

point. All three islands have sandy beaches and are covered by

high trees. A light is shown from Tanjung Aika at an elevation

of 31m in the approaches to Amamapare. 

5.79 The E mouth of Sungi Tipuka, known as Sungi Aika, is 4

miles WNW of Tanjung Steenboom. Kampung Apiripi is near

its E entrance point and Port Amamapare is 6 miles upstream.

There is a depth of 5.2m over the bar, but in any wind or swell

heavy breakers occur across the entrance.

5.79 Caution.—A dangerous wreck is reported about 25 miles

SW of Tanjung Steenboom. 

5.80 Amamapare (4°49'S., 136°58'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53115) serves the copper mines at Erstberg in the Pegunungan Sudirman mountain range, about 80 miles up Sungi

Tipuka.

The port is approached by a well-marked channel about 12

miles long. The channel is 278m wide and its limits are marked

by a range light and numerous lighted buoys and lighted

beacons.

5.80 Vessels up to 20,000 dwt can be accommodated at the ore

loading jetty. Vessels are loaded to a maximum draft of 6.7m at

the jetty and then fully loaded at the outer anchorage.

5.80 A small hospital and a doctor are at the port, and an airfield

is about 28 miles N.

5.80 Pilotage is not available, but local tug and barge masters are

available as guides; they board vessels about 0.5 mile NW of

the fairway lighted buoy. Vessels should make contact via telex

with their agent. Contact the port on VHF channel 16 for

anchoring and pilotage information on approaching Lighted

Buoy A.

5.80 Good anchorage can be obtained in the river at Amamapare,

in depths of 24 to 30m. 

5.80 Bright working lights are shown from copper mines about 53

miles NNE of Tanjung Steenboom and are visible for about 90

miles SW in clear weather.

5.80 A 10.3m shoal about 8 miles WSW of Tanjung Steenboom is

marked by a buoy about 2.5 miles to its N.

5.80 The depths off this part of the coast decrease gradually from

55m at 10 miles off to 9.1m at about 1.5 miles offshore. About

5 miles S of the entrance to Sungi Aika there is a 6.7m reef.

There is a 10.5m patch 8 miles SW of Tanjung Steenboom.

Vessels should not anchor in less than 12.8m or 14.6m if there

is any sea or swell.

5.80 The flood current sets ESE and the ebb WNW along the

coast, but the currents are irregular and are influenced by the

river discharges.

5.81 Pulau Naurio (4°56'S., 136°50'E.) and Pulau

Wajeteri are connected to the shore by banks and are

conspicuous by their high trees.

5.81 Shoal water extends SW and S from Pulau Wajeteri and

Pulau Naurio. Five miles SW of these islets there is a depth of

7.3m. Breakers have been seen about 1.25 miles N of this

depth. The edge of the bank passes 4 miles S of the islets and

trends in a SE direction 5 to 12 miles offshore. The edge of the

bank off the islets is steep-to. Sungi Kupera Pukwa (Sungi

Mayiweta) discharges about 10 miles E of Pulau Naurio.

Anchorage can be taken 8 miles SW of the E entrance point of

the river. Heavy breakers are frequent along the coast between

this river and Sungi Newerip.

5.81 Numerous rivers of little or no navigational importance

discharge between Sungi Kupera Pukwa and DeJongs Banks.

5.81 DeJongs Bank (5°18'S., 137°21'E.), consists of two shoals

of hard sand, 4 miles apart with depths of 2m or less over them.

Sounding give no warning of approach to these banks. In bad

weather they are marked by heavy breakers.

5.81 Pulau Kasteel (5°15'S., 137°39'E.) is near the shore abreast

of Sungi Kasteel. The island is lower in the center than at the

ends and appears as a castle with battlements.

5.81 Sungi Kasteel and Sungi Blumen are navigable by small

vessels.

5.82 Pulau Laag (Low Islands) (5°23'S., 137°43'E.), about

5 miles SSW of the entrance to Sungi Blumen, is about 1,000m

long N-S and 463m wide; it is low and covered with vegetation. A depth of 10.9m is 7 miles WSW of the island with

lesser depths between that depth and the island. Small Island is

about 4 miles E of Pulau Laag and about 1 mile offshore.

Sungi Hellwig (Sungi Barat) (5°23'S., 137°52'E.) is reached

by a 4.9m channel and is navigable by small vessels. The area

is well populated.

5.82 Providential Bank (5°40'S., 137°50'E.), with a least depth

of 4m over it near its W side, extends about 13 miles W from

the SE entrance point of Teluk Flamingo. A lighted buoy is

moored about 183m N of the 4m depth. A detached 4.9m shoal

is about 7 miles S of the bank.

5.82 Teluk Flamingo (5°31'S., 138°02'E.) receives the waters of

Sungi Northwest, Sungi Lorentz, and Sungi Utumbuwe. The

outer entrances to these rivers are marked by lights. Vessels

should keep in the channel marked by buoys and beacons.

5.82 It was reported (1992) that all the channel buoys and beacons

were missing and depths do not agree with the charted depths. 

Sungi Northwest (Sungi Barat Laut) (5°27'S., 138°01'E.) is

navigable with local knowledge by vessels with a draft of 3.4m

and about 50m long for about 50 miles and farther by small

craft.

Sungi Lorentz (Sungi Dumes) (5°25'S., 138°05'E.) can be

navigated with local knowledge by vessels up to 50m long and

3.4m draft to about latitude 5°00'S.
118 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

5.82 Sungi Utumbuwe is navigable with local knowledge for

about 50 miles by craft the same size as those that can navigate

the above two rivers.

5.83 Sungi Pulau (Sungai Jugu) (5°35'S., 138°10'E.) has

two mouths about 8 miles apart. The N entrance, about 12

miles S of Sungi Utumbuwe, has a least depth of 1.5m, hence

the S arm is generally used. The S arm has been navigated on a

favorable tide by vessels with a 3.6m draft as far as position

5°21'S, 139°20'E. Smaller vessels have navigated further up

river and into some of its tributaries.

5.83 Directions.—To enter the S entrance of Sungi Pulau, steer

093° on the S entrance point, where a group of trees rise above

other timber. This course leads just N of a sand bank that dries

at LW and extends to Triton Bank. The group of trees shows up

fairly well when the approaching vessel gets into soundings of

4.9m. Before this mark comes into sight, however, the

conspicuous and steep S entrance point of the N river mouth

serves as a good mark. There is a least depth of 4.5m, soft mud,

in the navigable channel to the mouth. The left bank should be

favored, even at the bends, up to the junction with the second

branch, Sungi Kampung.

5.83 Near the mouth of the river, the flood current sets to the N

and the ebb to the S.

5.83 Triton Bank (5°58'S., 138°04'E.), which dries, is about 10

miles SW of the S entrance point of the S mouth of Sungi

Pulau. The edge of this bank extends 2 miles farther seaward.

5.83 From Sungi Pulau the coast, low, wooded, and swampy,

trends SSE for about 30 miles then SE. Sungi Kronkel and

Sungi Cook are shallow unimportant rivers along this coast.

5.83 The Odammun River, about 60 miles S of Sungi Pulau, has

three mouths, from N to S, Mabur, Mayu, and Jar (Viarre). The

river is navigable with local knowledge to Sungi Digul. There

is very little current in the river.

5.83 Caution.—A wreck is 43 miles NW of Tanjung DeJongs in

position 6°37'S, 137°53'E. A light is shown at Tanjung Dejongs. 

5.83 A shoal with a least depth of 2.4m is off the mouth of Jar, 8

miles NNW of Tanjung DeJongs.

5.84 Sungi Digul (7°10'S., 138°42'E.), a river of some importance, is about 6 miles wide at its entrance abreast Tanjung

Modder (Ujung Lumpur), but gradually narrows. Several

charted banks and dangers that dry at LW are on the N side of

the channel. Drying shoals extend about 5 miles W of Tanjung

Modder. A lighted buoy is 11 miles WNW of Tanjung Modder.

The channel is along Tanjung Modder, where the bank is not

joined to the S shore. Over the bar, WNW of Tanjung Modder,

there is a depth of only 1.8m, but the rise of tide is great

enough to make the channel navigable.

5.84 Caution.—Mariners are warned that depths in the approach

to Sungi Digul are reported to be extensively different from

those shown on the chart. A 0.4m shoal is about 9 miles SW of

Tanjung Modder. The land on either side of the lower Sungi

Digul is low and swampy, but farther up the river it gradually

becomes slightly hilly with elevations of 9.1 to 10.6m. Sungi

Digul is navigable by vessels up to 50m long and 3.6m draft,

and lesser depths can be carried farther into its tributaries.

5.85 Tanah Merah (6°05'S., 140°20'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53120), on Sungi Uwamba about 50 miles above its junction with Sungi Digul, can be reached with local knowledge by

small vessels up to 25m long with a draft of 1.9m.

5.85 Tides—Currents.—At the mouth of Sungi Digul, the lowest

water occurs in July and November. The highest rise and lowest fall of tide that can be expected are, respectively, 2.1m

above and 4m below mean sea level.

5.85 Directions.—Approaching from NW, be careful not to mistake one of the mouths of Sungi Odammun for Sungi Digul and

steer for a position with Tanjung Dejongs bearing 011°, distant

8 miles, where there is a depth of 8.2m, then steer 125° to a

position about 1.5 miles N of Tanjung Modder until Tanjung

Gemeene (Gemeenehoek), on the N bank of the river about

10.5 miles ENE of Tanjung Modder, bears 084.5°, then steer

for Tanjung Zondags (Zandagshoek), bearing 096°, taking care

to avoid the 2.1m shoal ENE of Tanjung Modder, until Tanjung

Gemeene bears 040°, then follow the channel passing N of the

islet Amman Sileam, S of Habee Sillam, and W of Ora Sillam,

17, 28, and 34 miles, respectively, above Tanjung Modder.

5.85 Caution.—A tidal wave or bore, known locally as Kapala

Arus, is experienced in Sungi Odammun and Sungi Digul. It

occurs from 2 days before to 2 days after full or new moon. It

is in the form of a wave about 1.8 to 4m high which moves up

the river at a great speed. It is reported that several waves in

succession can be experienced in Sungi Digul. Small vessels in

the river when the bore is expected anchor in a branch of the

river until the waves have passed. Larger vessels anchor with

both anchors and steam ahead while the waves are passing.

5.86 Gosong Kolepon (Kolff Bank) (7°00'S., 136°50'E.),

about 95 miles NNW of Tanjung Vals, the W extremity of

Pulau Dolak, is a relatively small sandbank with a least depth

of 14m. A 20.1m bank was reported 60 miles WNW of Gosong

Kolepon.

La Cher Bank (La Chur Bank) (8°29'S., 136°15'E.), with

depths of 24 to 26m, is steep-to, 6 miles long WSW-ESE, and

surrounded by depths of 66m.

5.86 A shoal area enclosed by a danger line on the chart is W of

La Cher Bank. Several 9.1 to 18.3m shoals are within 7 miles

of the danger line enclosing this area. The area has not been

completely surveyed.

5.86 A charted reef area reported 110 miles W of La Cher Bank

has not been examined.

5.86 Pulak Dolak (7°50'S., 138°30'E.), the southwesternmost

point of Irian Jaya, is separated from the mainland by Selat

Muli. The island is about 100 miles long NE-SW and 50 miles

wide at its E part, then tapers to a narrow point at Tanjung Vals,

its SW extremity. The land is low, covered with dense forest

and so marshy as to be almost unaccessible. The NW coast is

fronted by a mud bank extending out 7 to 12 miles with 5.5m at

its outer edge, increasing very gradually to seaward. About 50

miles NE of Tanjung Vals the bank decreases in width. The

seaward edge of the shore bank is much steeper there than on

the NW side of the island. The island is fairly heavily populated.
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 119

Pub. 164

5.87 Tanjung Vals (8°21'S., 137°35'E.), the SW extremity

of Pulau Dolak, is dangerous to approach from W because a

bank with depths of less than 18.3m extends about 65 miles

offshore and it is possible to run aground before sighting land.

Isolated 12.8 to 18.3m shoals are 40 to 57 miles W of the cape.

S of the cape depths decrease rapidly from 18.3 to 9.1m. There

is generally a heavy sea off it during the East Monsoon and

occasionally during the West Monsoon.

5.87 The flood current has been observed to set toward Tanjung

Vals at a rate of 1.5 knots and then divides and continues NE

along the NW coast and Ealong the S coast of the island. The

ebb current sets in the opposite direction at a maximum rate of

1 knot.

The N entrance to Selat Muli (Marianne Strait) (8°00'S.,

138°53'E.) is 10 miles wide with depths of 10.9 to 18.3m, but

the width and depth gradually decrease to the S. The S part of

the strait is narrow and very shallow and subject to constant

change; it should be attempted only with rising water. While

the strait affords passage for large sailing proas, enabling them

to avoid the heavy swell of Tanjung Vals, it is seldom used by

larger vessels. The bottom varies between sand mud and clay.

The banks generally are just above HW level and the land is

flat, wooded, and swampy. The depths in the S entrance,

between Tanjung Kool (8°23'S., 138°56'E.) and Tanjung

Kombies, are not more than 1.8m, soft mud, but when the

drying bank extending from the W side of Pulau Bumbel is

covered, just inside the S end of the strait, there is a depth of

3.6m over the bar.

5.87 Detached 1.8m and 0.6m shoals are 6 miles SSW and 9

miles SW, respectively, of Tanjung Modder.

5.87 Caution.—Both the N and S entrances to Selat Muli are

subject to change and the charts cannot be depended upon.

Irian Jaya—Tanjung Kool to the Bensback River

5.88 This section of the coast trends E for about 65 miles,

then SE, forming a wide open bight. The shores of this bight

are fronted by a wide mudbank. Between Tanjung Kool and

Tanjung Kayakaya the coast is low and covered by mangroves;

then between Tanjung Kayakaya and the mouth of Sungi

Merauke a ridge of low sand dunes with abundant coconut

palms rises behind a broad beach. Back of the ridge are low

fertile valleys which are submerged during the rainy season

and separated from each other by low sandy ridges. There are

numerous villages along this coast. The Bulaka River, the Bian

River, the Kumbe River, and the Merauke River discharge into

the sea along this part of the coast. The few landmarks along

the coast are useful only for inshore navigation.

5.88 The Bulaka River (8°08'S., 139°14'E.) discharges into the

sea about 22 miles NE of the S entrance to Selat Muli. Either

side of its entrances are fronted by mud flats extending out 0.25

mile. Although there are depths of 7.3 to 10.9m in the river

mouth and 5.5 to 7.3m, 8 miles upriver, the approach is over

shallow flats 1.8 to 3.6m extending about 6 miles offshore. The

river has been navigated by a 49m long vessel with a 3.3m draft

as far as Kampung Apong, a village about 20 miles above the

mouth. The least depth in the approach to the entrance was

1.8m with 1.3m over the bar, and 10.9m in the river.

5.88 A drying bank is 2 miles SW of the entrance and a small

0.6m coral reef with 3.6m around it is about 3.5 miles S of the

E entrance point. Drying rocks lie 4.5 miles SSW and S of the

W entrance point of the Bulaka River.

5.88 Tanjung Kayakaya, about 25 miles E of the S entrance to

Selat Muli, is at the W end of a more densely-wooded shore.

From E it appears as a sharply defined point. About 1.5 miles

W of the point is a small detached wood with low brush wood

on either side of it. The coastal bank, extending 1.5 to 5 miles

offshore, dries in some places for a distance of 1.5 miles

offshore.

5.89 Pulau Habeeke (8°15'S., 139°28'E.), about 6 miles

SE of Tanjung Kayakaya, is about 3m high and about 463m

wide. It is covered with high trees visible for about 15 miles. A

ledge of sand and stones with depths of 1.4 to 4.5m extends

2.25 miles S from the island. Karang Sametinke, a drying reef

is 1 mile within the S edge of this bank. A light, from which a

racon transmits, is shown from Pulau Habeeke. An 8.2m shoal

and an 7.8m shoal are about 25.5 miles, 164° and 142°,

respectively, from the islet. There is a 7.3m shoal 16 miles,

bearing 241° from Pulau Habeeke also.

5.89 There are many boulders on the detached shallow flat

extending far seaward from the E side of Pulau Habeeke.

Along the N side of the island is a blind channel with a depth

of 4.9 to 6.1m. It is approached from the W over a 5.5m bar.

This channel provides the only access to the island and the

water is almost always smooth; however, this channel should

be marked before its use. On the N side of the channel the reef

rises steeply and is more or less dry to the mainland. Dangers

other than those charted may exist in the area of the island.

There is a light on a white metal framework shown from Pulau

Habeeke.

5.89 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in about 6m, mud,

about 2 miles WSW of Pulau Habeeke. To reach the anchorage

the island should be steered for, bearing 055° until Tanjung

Kayakaya bears 315°, then steer NNE and anchor N and

anchor with Pulau Habeeke bearing 079°.

5.89 The section of the coast bewteen Tanjung Kayakaya and the

Bian River is low, sandy, and thickly overgrown with tall trees.

The only perceptible break is at the mouth of the Bian River.

Many coconut palms grow near the villages. Small woods and

clumps of tall trees are along this stretch and some can be seen

for a distance of 13 miles.

5.90 The Bian River (8°08'S., 139°57'E.) is about 1 mile

wide at its mouth. A light is shown at the E entrance. It has

been ascended by a vessel 50m long with a draft of 3.1m as far

as Kampung Kabtel, a village about 30 miles above the mouth.

Above this point it narrows. The depths in the entrance vary

from 1.8 to 2.4m. A large volume of muddy water brought

down by the stream is noticeable as far as 10 miles offshore.

Shoals, 5.8 to 9.1m, are outside the 10m curve. At high tide the

mangrove-covered banks of the river are flooded for a considerable distance.

5.90 In the SW approach to the Bian River two shallow spits extend SW from the coastal bank and two detached drying banks

are about 4 miles SW of Tanjung Mawal, the E entrance point

to the river.

5.90 Tides—Currents.—There is practically no period of slack

water in the river; in fact, while the ebb current is still running

in the outer bend the flood current may be flowing at a con-
120 Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 

Pub. 164

siderable rate into the inner bend. There may be a bore here because the water has been observed to rise 2.4m in 10 minutes,

rushing in with a hissing sound. Caution should be exercised

because of drifting timber in the tidal currents.

5.90 Directions.—Entering the river bring the E entrance point to

bear 054° and steer in on that course.

5.91 The stretch of coast between the Bian River and the

Kumbe River is fronted by a coastal bank with depths of less

than 5.5m extending about 15 miles offshore. SW of the

entrance to the Kumbe River, the coastal bank with less than

18.3m extends about 50 miles offshore. There are several

detached shoals with depths of 9 to 11m on this bank. A 4.5m

shoal is about 14.5 miles SW of the S entrance point to the

Kumbe River and a wreck, in a depth of 0.9m, is 10 miles SSW

of the entrance.

5.91 The Kumbe River (8°22'S., 140°15'E.) is accessible only to

small craft with local knowledge because of the shallow coastal

bank. The entrance is marked by beacons. Several charted

dangers are in the approach. The entrance points have broad

sand beaches with coconut palms behind them. A village is on

the N entrance point and a red-roofed house serves as a good

landmark.

5.91 Tides—Currents.—During November and December, the

tidal currents were observed to set in the direction of the coast,

averaging about 7 hours to the NW and 5 hours to the SE.

During the Southeast Monsoon, the incoming tidal current at

the river mouth has a rate of about 1.5 knots and the outgoing

tidal current has rates of from 2 to 3 knots; during the Northwest Monsoon the rates are greater.

5.92 The Merauke River (Maro River) (8°29'S.,

140°21'E.), about 10 miles SE of the Kumbe River, is deep and

tortuous, but has been ascended for a distance of 60 miles by a

vessel about 61m long with a 3.1m draft and 90 miles farther

by boat.

5.92 A wide drying bank extends out from the coast on either side

of the entrance. Breakers have been reported about 8 miles SW

of Tanjung Haram, the SE entrance point of the river. Depths of

3 to 4.5m are charted in this vicinity. A marked channel with a

least depth of 0.9m across the bar leads NE through the above

drying bank.

5.92 It was reported that the sand bank of Tanjung Haram had

extended into the channel and it was necessary to keep to the

W of the leading line when passing the point. The wreck of a

large fishing vessel was observed on the river bank 0.75 mile E

of a ruined jetty close SE of the front range light.

5.92 It was further reported that the entrance to the river was

difficult to distinguish against the uniform jungle background

and that it was advisable to rely on celestial navigation fixing

until the inner buoy and range lights were identified. These

leading marks, although difficult to distinguish against the dark

background, and the aero radiobeacon tower 1.25 miles ESE of

Tanjung Haram, were the only good fixing marks. Care was

necessary, however, to avoid confusing this tower with others

standing near them.

5.92 Numerous charted dangers are in the approach to the Merauke River and, because the position of shoals may vary, care

should be taken to adhere closely to the marked channel.

5.92 Aspect.—Aids are lighted only on request and even then are

sometimes difficult to identify. Tanjung Mimiabe, on the S side

of the entrance to the Merauke River, is marked by a light;

because the structure is difficult to see, a flag is sometimes

flown from it to assist in identification. A radio mast, 52m high

with red and white horizontal bands, is about 0.3 mile SE of the

light.

5.93 Merauke (8°29'S., 140°23'E.) (World Port Index No.

53130), the principal town in the S part of Irian Jaya, is on a

plain in the midst of the jungle on the S bank near the mouth of

the Merauke River. The low land on which the town stands is

protected by dikes. From a distance the town, covering a considerable area, looks like a mass of galvanized roofs. Copra

and crocodile hides are the principal export. There is a hospital

at the town.

5.93 Tides—Currents.—At Merauke, MHWS rise 5m while

MHWN rise almost 3.8m; the mean sea level is 3m.

5.93 At the mouth of the river during March and April, the ebb

current reaches a rate of 2 knots and lasts about 7 hours, the

flood current runs for about 5 hours at a rate of about 1 knot. It

is reported that the flood tide comes in three bores, which

makes pilotage extremely difficult. Abreast the town, the

current has attained a rate of 5 knots.

5.93 Semidiurnal tidal currents are felt along the coast, even by

vessels out of sight of the land. A strong current runs up and

down the coast following the tides; the flood setts SE and the

ebb sets NW. The ebb current is stronger and of longer duration. The rate of current is about 2 knots.

5.93 Depths—Limitations.—There is a depth of 1.5m over the

inner bar at low water. Most vessels enter the port just before

HW.

5.93 There is an T-shaped concrete jetty at the town. A berth at its

head is 74m long, with a depth of 4m alongside. Large ferries

use this berth, in addition to other types of vessels up to 100m

in length..

5.93 An oil terminal jetty is situated just N of the commercial

pier. This pier, a T-headed jetty with dolphins, has a depth of

6m alongside. Tankers up to 90m long and up to 3,500 dwt

have berthed at this dock. 

5.93 Pilotage.—The harbormaster is the pilot at Merauke and

pilotage is compulsory for large vessels. Requests for pilotage

should be made in advance by radio. Vessels without local

knowledge are strongly advised to take a pilot because of the

constantly changing positions and the lack of prominent features. Berthing and unberthing is restricted to daylight hours

only.

5.93 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 7m, in the middle

of the river abreast of the town.

5.93 Directions.—It is not uncommon for vessels to ground on

the bar approaching Merauke. Frequent fixes and constant

soundings should be taken. In no case should the approximate

10m curve be crossed until the ship’s position is definitely

ascertained. Steer N until Tanjung Miambe Light bears 066°,

then alter course to this bearing and steer in toward the light

Port of Merauke

http://www.portina4.go.id/merauke.htm
Sector 5. South Coast of Irian Jaya and Off-lying Islands 121

Pub. 164

structure. The bar is subject to change and the buoys are relocated accordingly.

5.93 Between the Merauke River and a rounded point 19 miles to

the SSE, the slightly receding coast is fringed by a sandy beach

which dries in places to near 2 miles offshore. There are

several small villages with coconut palms around them near the

shore along this coast. The Bensback River, at the boundary of

Irian Jaya and Papua New Guinea, is 55 miles SE of the

Merauke River. The sandy beach continues along this part of

the coast and is backed by cultivated low land.

5.93 A shallow bank extends 4.5 to 8.5 miles offshore along the

coast between the Merauke River and the Bensbach River. A

rock with a depth of less than 1.8m and a sandbank that dries

0.9m are about 8 miles SW and 6 miles SSW, respectively,

from the rounded point in position 8°39'S., 140°33'E. A sunken

rock is NW of the same point and 1.5 miles offshore. Outside

of the bank there are depths of more than 5.5m. Because the

coast is low and shoal depths extend so far offshore, it is difficult to get close enough inshore to make out the coast or the

mouths of the rivers along it.
Pub. 164

6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape

6.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 6 — CHART INFORMATION
125

Pub. 164

SECTOR 6 

SOUTH COAST OF PAPUA NEW GUINEA—THE BENSBACH RIVER TO SOUTH CAPE

6.0 Plan.—This sector describes the S coast of Papua New

Guinea from its W limit, the Bensbach River (9°07'S.,

141°02'E.), which is the boundary between Irian Jaya and

Papua New Guinea, E to South Cape (10°43'S., 150°14'E.). 

General Remarks

6.1 The coast from the Bensbach River to about 145°30'E,

a distance of about 300 miles, is low, composed mainly of

mangrove swamps, and fronted by shoals and reefs extending

about 30 miles seaward. Navigable channels probably exist

within this area, but until it is surveyed it should be avoided by

strangers. The chart is the best guide to off-lying dangers.

6.1 Many little-known rivers, forming an immense delta with

many creeks and mouths, are across the great plain along this

stretch of coast. No entrance except for light-draft vessels has

yet been found to any of these rivers, although the Fly River

and the Aird River, the principal rivers, have deep and navigable channels inside the bars, and there may be a good entrance

to the Fly River.

6.1 East of 145°30'E, the coast becomes gradually higher, and

the water is, for the most part, clear of dangers as far as the

vicinity of Cape Suckling, a distance of 90 miles, where the

reefs begin. From this point to the E extremity of the Louisiade

Archipelago, the coast is fringed with reefs forming barriers,

within which there may be good anchorages, but because they

have not been properly surveyed, they are mainly an impediment to navigation.

The Bensbach River to the Gulf of Papua

6.2 The Bensbach River (9°07'S., 141°02'E.) is

navigable only by small craft. An extensive spit with depths of

less than 5.5m extends S and SSW for about 25 miles from the

river mouth. On this spit is a drying reef and several sand banks

which dry up to about 1.2m.

6.2 The mouth of the Bensbach River is at the boundary between

Irian Jaya and Papua New Guinea.

6.2 Shoalwater Point (9°14'S., 141°08'E.) lies midway between

the entrance to the Morehead River and the Bensbach River.

From Shoalwater Point a sand bank, which dries 1.8m on its

outer end, extends 8 miles SE and 7 miles SSE.

6.2 Between the Bensbach River and Shoalwater Point, a sand

bank which dries 0.9m, extends up to 5 miles offshore. Depths

of less than 1.8m, with several drying sand banks, extend 18

miles SSW from the 0.9m drying bank. Tidal currents set

WNW and ESE across the flat extending from this coast.

6.2 Caution.—A dangerous submerged wreck lies in an

approximate position about 32 miles SW of Shoalwater Point.

6.3 From the Bensbach River, the coast trends E for about

15 miles to a low point marked by a clump of coconut palms

then trends ESE for another 15 miles to Parliament Point,

marked by a grove of tall mangrove trees. The open bight thus

formed is Heath Bay. The water appears to be shallow for 5

miles or more offshore.

6.3 The Morehead River, navigable only by small craft, discharges at the head of Heath Bay. Anchorage can be obtained,

in 7m, 8.5 miles SSE of the entrance to the river.

6.3 The coast between Heath Bay (9°10'S., 141°24'E.) E to the

Talbot Group of islands is shoal up to 4 miles offshore. Beyond

the shoal area are numerous reefs which extend up to 26 miles

S of the shoreline between the Bensbach River and the Wassi

Kussa River.

6.4 Thompson Bay (9°12'S., 141°46'E.), about 25 miles

E of the Morehead River and between Walarter Point and

Naguara Point, is fringed by a sandy beach on which are coconut palms and behind which is dense forest. The coast to the E

is lined with mangrove. Walarter Point is easily distinguished

by its red banks and coconut palms. This point can only be

approached by small craft and boats can be landed here.

6.4 Deliverance Island (9°31'S., 141°35'E.), about 19 miles S of

Walarter Point is about 0.3 to 0.9m high and covered with

trees, the tallest of which are about 31m high. The island is

surrounded with extensive reefs. There is anchorage S of the

reefs about 4 miles E of the island. Another anchorage is 2

miles S of the island. The island abounds with turtles.

6.4 Kerr Islet, a sand bank on a reef 3.5 miles S of Deliverance

Island, is covered with vegetation and has a conspicuous tree.

A 3.6m shoal is about 3 miles ESE of the islet. A spit with a

depth of less than 1.8m extends 2 miles N, a submerged rock is

3 miles WNW, and a 5.2m shoal is 3 miles SW, respectively,

from the islet.

6.4 Shoals extend in an almost unbroken line from a position 5

miles NW of Deliverance Island to the W end of Boigu Island,

but there appears to be a channel between these shoals and the

shoal water fringing the shore of New Guinea.

6.4 The Talbot Islands (9°14'S., 142°10'E.) consist of one large

island and six smaller ones. Boigu Island, the largest of the

group, together with two small islands off its N side, are about

5 miles S of the entrance to the Maikussa River. The Kawai

Islands, constituting the rest of the island group, are close off

the entrance to the Wassi Kussa River.

6.5 Boigu Island (9°16'S., 142°14'E.) is 9.25 miles E-W

and has a greatest width of 5 miles. The island, low and

swampy, has a large cultivated patch near a village on its N side

and two fishing stations are on the S side of the island. A bank

of mud and rock that dries extensively and which has not been

examined extends 5 miles offshore from the SW end of the

island and 2 miles offshore elsewhere. West of the island there

is foul ground up to 3 miles offshore from the mainland. A

conspicuous tree is on the W side of the island.

6.5 A rock, witha depth of less than 1.8m, was reported about 3

miles ENE of the Boigu Island.

6.5 The channel between the Talbot Group and the shore should

only be used with local knowledge. A drying reef 3 miles NW
126 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

of the N point of Boigu Island is marked by a beacon. A reef

that dries is 4 miles W and another 5 miles WSW of the W end

of the island. Red Sands, which dry at 2.7m and are subject to

change, lie on the outer end of the unexamined bank which

extends 5 miles WSW from Boigu Island.

The Wassi Kussa River and the Mai Kussa River are two

arms of the sea surrounding Strachan Island (9°05'S.,

142°08'E.). They unite 20 and 25 miles above their mouths; to

that point they have depths of 9.1 to 18.3m. The approaches to

the rivers have not been surveyed. The shores are generally

mangrove swamps. Strachan Island is low, wet, and covered

with mangrove and eucalyptus trees.

6.5 The coast from the entrance to the Mai Kussa River trends

ESE for 24 miles to a point abreast the W end of Saibai Island;

it is a low mangrove shore with low wooded country behind it.

For the greater part this coast is fronted by a bank which dries

for a distance of 0.25 to 1.5 miles offshore.

6.5 Bugi Village is on the mainland abreast Boigu Island and

about 1.5 miles E of the entrance tot he Mai Kussa River.

6.5 Kussa Island is close offshore about 4 miles SE of the entrance to the Mai Kussa River.

6.5 A reef, awash, and a submerged reef are about 16 miles ESE

of the entrance to the Mai Kussa River and about 2.25 miles

offshore.

6.5 Dauan Island (9°25'S., 142°32'E.), about 16 miles SE of

Boigu Island, is roughly triangular in shape; each side is about

1.5 miles long. The island rises to Mount Cornwallis, 259m

high, near its center. A village is on the NE side of the island.

Spring tides rise about 3.7m at Dauan Island.

6.5 A 2.7m depth is about 3 miles NE and a 4.5m depth is about

2.5 miles ESE, respectively, from Mount Cornwallis.

6.5 Phipi Reef (9°33'S., 142°36'E.) is awash, with Adrian Reef,

which dries, 1.25 miles NW of it. Another drying reef lies 1.5

miles E of Adrian Reef.

6.6 Saibai Island (9°24'S., 142°42'E.), the W extremity

of which is 2.5 miles E of Dauan Island, is 12 miles long E-W

and has a maximum width of 3.75 miles. The island is mostly

low and swampy, but a large portion of the NW side is under

cultivation. The bank of mud, coral, and stones encircling the

island dries up to 1 mile off at the W end and up to 3 miles at

the E end of the island.

6.6 Saibai Village is on the NW side of the island and Churum

Village is on the SW side. In the village of Saibai, there is a

church and a mission. A radio tower is situated on the W side

and a conspicuous tree stand 1.25 miles ENE of Saibai village.

6.6 Kauamag Island, close off the N shore of Saibai Island, is

little more than a mangrove swamp. The channel between it

and Saibai Island is nearly blocked at its E end.

6.6 Anchorage may be obtained for small vessels with local

knowledge between the small island W of Kauamag Island in

the middle of the W entrance to the channel separating the

islands.

There is a channel 2 to 4 miles wide between Saibai Island

and the mainland that can be used by vessels with up to a 3.6m

draft with local knowledge. Some of the reefs in the channel

are marked. The water is much discolored. North Reef, which

lies 3.75 miles WNW of Saibai Village, dries and has foul

ground extending 0.75 mile on the W and S sides. South Bank

is located 1.5 miles WNW of Saibai Village and is marked by a

beacon. There are two other drying reefs 1 mile NNE of the

South Bank. The area 1 mile E of South Bank, about 0.75 mile

N of Saibai village extending E to the N coast of Saibai Island

was reported dry.

6.6 The area between Saibai Island and Warrior Reefs and for 20

miles S is unexamined.

6.6 Discolored water was reported to lie in position 9°28.2'S,

142°54.0'E. There is a 3m shoal 3.5 miles NW of this discolored spot.

6.6 The Pahoturi River (9°17'S., 142°45'E.) is entered about 6

miles NNW of the E end of Saibai Island. The approach to the

river is obstructed by reefs and shoals but there is deep water in

the river for many miles above the mouth.

6.6 Several islands at the mouth of the river include Paho, Marakara, and Sogeri. Foul ground with many rocks extend S of

Marakara and a rock awash is about 2.5 miles ESE of that

island. There is another rock, awash, 3.5 miles SSW of Marakara; a submerged rock, dangerous to navigation, lies 3 miles

SSE of the same island.

6.6 Mabudauan Hill (9°16'S., 142°43'E.), on the W side of the

entrance to the Pahoturi River, is high and covered with grass.

It is the only elevation on the coast between the Fly River and

the Bensbach River. A white concrete church on the S side of

the hill is clearly visible when approaching from SE.

6.6 The Binaturi River is merely a creek that can only be used by

boats. Villages are at the mouth of the river. Spring tides at the

mouth of the river rise 3.6m.

6.7 The Oriomo River (9°03'S., 143°10'E.) is navigable

for vessels of 3.0 to 3.6m draft for about 40 miles and it is

approached from Daru Roads only. There is apparently no

passage W of or between Bristow Island and Daru Island

except for boats. A dangerous wreck which dries 1.2m is on a

bank with depths of less than 1.8m, 0.75 mile S of the entrance

to the river. There is another wreck, dangerous to navigation,

SE of the above mentioned wreck, 0.5 mile N of Daru Island. A

submarine pipeline crosses from the coastline to Daru Island

0.75 mile W of the Oriomo River entrance.

6.7 Bristow Island (9°08'S., 143°14'E.) is low, uninhabited, and

covered with mangroves. It is about 15 miles E of the Binaturi

River, 5 miles offshore, and connected by a shallow bank with

Daru Island, which is between it and the mouth of the Oriomo

River. Coral ledges front the E and S sides of the island. The

island is marked by a light close E of the NE extremity of the

island.

6.7 Daru Island (9°06'S., 143°12'E.), close NW of Bristow

Island, is about 3 miles long on its N side and about 27m high.

An aeronautical radiobeacon is situated on the N side of Daru

Island, and there is an airstrip here. Daru Island is the administrative center for the W part of Papua New Guinea and has a

population of approximately 8,000 people.

6.7 Daru Roads (9°15'S., 143°16'E.), with depths of 1.2 to

6.7m, is NE of Bristow Island and Daru Island. The approach is

from the SE where there are irregular depths of 3.9 to 37m.

Depths of 3 to 5.5m are between 2 miles E and 7 miles ESE of

the NE extremity of Bristow Island.

6.7 Shoals with depths of 3.3m, 4.9m, and 3.9m are, respectively, 2, 5.25, and 6.75 miles SE of the light on Bristow

Island and close SW of the recommended track through the

road. On the NE side of the channel is the shallow flat lying
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 127

Pub. 164

SW of Bampton Point, the S extremity of Parama Island. A

narrow channel with a least depth of 3m in the fairway leads

through Daru Roads to the entrance to the Oriomo River.

6.7 The channel is partly marked by beacons.

6.7 Directions.—A recommended track leads from a position

9.75 miles ESE of Bristow Island Light through Daru Roads on

a course of 304.5° to a position 1.75 miles ENE of the head of

the pier on Daru Island. The least known depth on this track is

5.5m. The 30m long pier has a depth of 3m alongside.

6.7 Narrow channels lead from the inner end of this track to the

pier and to the entrance of the Oriomo River. There are depths

of 1.8 to 5.5m in the former and a least depth of 3m in the

latter.

6.7 The recommended track through Daru Roads should be approached on a course of 267° from a position 3.75 miles S of

Bramble Cay (9°09'S., 143°53'E.) to the outer end of the inner

track.

6.8 Daru (9°04'S., 143°12'E.) (World Port Index No.

53150) is on an elevation on the N side of Daru Island. It is the

headquarters of a government official and there is a hospital.

The tidal range spring is 2.5m. Tidal currents are reported to

run at up to 3 knots.

6.8 Missionary Passage, between Bristow Island and Warrior

Reefs, has a least charted depth of 8.2m in the fairway. The N

side of the passage is formed by the coral reefs extending about

13 miles SW from Bristow Island and terminates at Gimini

Reef. Heavy rollers setting in during most of the year make

approach to the passage dangerous. There are strong tidal

currents in the passage which attain a rate of 5 knots at springs.

6.8 A wharf connected to the shore by a bridge and causeway

totalling 340m in length is situated on the N side of Daru

Island. At the head of the wharf is a berth 30m in length with a

depth of 2.4m alongside. Smaller vessels berth on the W side

of this area. A barge ramp is situated part way down the E side

of the wharf. 

6.8 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory. Pilots come from

Port Moresby with at least 48 hours notice. The pilot boards

about 2.75 miles ESE of the light on the E side of Bristow Island.

6.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained in Daru Roads.

Anchorage is also available N of the Government Station Jetty,

mud of silt bottom. Small vessels can find anchorage W of the

jetty.

6.8 A submerged rock, less than 1.8m, is about 11 miles WSW

of Bristow Island.

6.9 Parama Island (9°00'S., 143°23'E.) is about 10 miles

NE of Bristow Island. The passage between Parama Island and

the mainland is about 0.25 mile wide and 1.8 to 5.5m deep.

This island, on the S side of the S entrance to theFly River, is

low and thickly wooded with trees as high as 61m.

6.9 A reef, with a probable depth of less than 1.8m, is about 7.5

miles S of Bampton Point, the SE point of Parama Island; submerged rocks are 5.25 miles SE and 7.25 miles SSE of the

same point.

6.9 There is a mission station at Tetebe, on the E coast of Parama

Island near the N end, and another at Gasiri, on the S side of

the island.

6.9 Ellengowan Rock (9°00'S., 143°31'E.), with a depth of

1.1m, is 7 miles ENE of Bampton Point, the S extremity of

Parama Island.

6.9 A drying reef of rocks and sand, over which the sea breaks

heavily during the Southeast Trade Winds, extends 5 miles

SSE from Bampton Point; the same reef extends farther SSE to

Merrie England Shoals, with depths of less than 2m, 7.5 miles

SSE of Bampton Point.

6.9 Bramble Cay (9°09'S., 143°53'E.), locally known as Massaramcoer, is a small islet 28.5 miles ESE of Bampton Point; it is

about 3m high and surrounded by a drying reef, close around

which are depths of 4.5 to 8.2m. The cay is marked by a light,

with a racon, on a reef 0.25 mile to the NNW. Due to the

proximity of the Fly River, strong and irregular currents may

be experienced in the vicinity of Bramble Cay.

6.9 Black Rocks, the highest of which uncovers 1.2m at HW, is

on a reef 3 miles SW of Bramble Cay. The passage between

these rocks and the cay is clear.

The Gulf of Papua

6.10 The Gulf of Papua is between the entrance to the Fly

River and Cape Suckling, 190 miles E. The N and W shores of

the gulf are low except for Aird Hill, about 108 miles NNE of

Parama Island, and the Saw Mountains, about 80 miles E of

Aird At the Hill. There are no objects on the W or N sides of

the gulf sufficiently conspicuous to serve as landmarks when

approaching from S, therefore soundings are the best means of

approach, especially for the W shore, where sand and mud flats

extend a considerable distance offshore. The bars are composed of soft sand and the bottom outside of sand. Anchorage

off the bars in SE weather is not good and there are always rollers in shallow water. Good anchorage can be obtained during

the Northwest Monsoon when a vessel can feel its way on

soundings. There is a lot of floating timber and logs are often

encountered between Bramble Cay and the mouth of the Fly

River and E across the gulf. Discolored water extends about 30

miles offshore.

6.10 For the most part, the coast is slightly higher than the land

behind it, which is low and swampy for a distance of 10 to 20

miles or more inland, not rising above sea level. This swampy

country, covered with mangrove, nipa palm, and sago, is being

gradually raised by the combined action of crabs who build

hollow towers. These foundations are filling in with silt deposit

from the rivers.

6.10 From Parama Island to the Aird River entrance, 95 miles NE,

the monotonous shoreline has no landmarks. It is wooded to

the water’s edge, with trees 30 to 46m high. In this area, the Fly

River Delta deposit forms a continuous series of mudflats and

banks of hard, fine sand with outer edges having depths of less

than 5.5m extending 3 to 20 miles offshore. These mud flats

extend farthest from the shore about midway between Parama

Island and Cape Blackwood, 96 miles NE.

6.10 On the E side of the gulf, the land rises to lofty mountains,

contrasting strikingly with the low level country to the W. Of

the mountains, the Owen Stanley Range, which can be termed

the backbone of the SE part of New Guinea, is an almost continuous chain extending from position 7°55'S, 146°25'E for

about 300 miles in an ESE direction, terminating near East

Cape, the E extremity of Papua New Guinea, culminating at
128 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

Mount Victoria, 4,036m high, about 57 miles E of Cape

Suckling.

6.10 There are mission stations at Geav and Sui, on the coast

about 2 and 6 miles, respectively, N of the N point of Parama

Island.

In clear weather when within 25 or 30 miles of land, the interior mountains, about 1,829m high, with three peaks on the

W part, will be seen. The two E peaks, about 35 miles NE of

Aird Hill, are very rugged. Nearing the land it is easy to know

if the vessel is E or W of Maclatchie Point because, to the W of

Flat-Top Hill and Woody Hill NNW of the point, there is no

high land, and the land near the coast is low and flat. Toward

the head of the gulf, off the Fly River and the Aird River, the

land is so low it cannot be seen 6 or 7 miles offshore. Discolored water and mud bottom may be considered a certain indication of the approach to shallow water.

6.10 Tides—Currents.—Spring tides rise 4.2m and neap tides

rise 3.1m on the flats fronting the W shore of the Gulf of

Papua.

6.10 Near the head of the gulf, the flood sets NW toward the

rivers at a rate of 2 knots at springs, and at the ebb in the

opposite direction at the rate of 3 knots.

6.10 Directions.—In approaching the head of the Gulf of Papua

from S it is advisable to approach the area of Maclatchie Point

(7°57'S., 145°25'E.) on the E side.

6.10 Caution.—Charts in the Gulf of Papua is not based on adequate surveys and uncharted dangers may exist. Tidal bores

may occur on the main rivers at spring tides.

6.10 Throughout the bay, there are unsurveyed areas, of which no

hydrographic survey has been conducted and accordingly, mariners attempting to enter this area should proceed with extreme

caution as unidentified shoals, reefs, and other navigational

hazards may exist.

6.10 In the various inadequately-surveyed areas, mariners are

warned to exercise care within the areas indicated. These areas

are not based on adequate hydrographic surveys and uncharted

dangers may exist. 

6.10 During the height of the Southeast Monsoon, there is a dangerous lee shore, with heavy surf breaking on it. The sea breaks

in depths of 7.3m.

The Fly River Delta to the Aird River Delta

6.11 The estuary of the Fly River is approximately 50

miles wide at its entrance, between Korimoro Point (8°13'S.,

143°43'E.) on the E end of Dibiri Island to the N and Parama

Island (9°00'S., 143°25'E.) to the S, but only 7 miles wide

abreast Kiwai Island (8°37'S., 143°29'E.), which may be

considered as being the river mouth. Above this island the river

gradually contracts to a width of 1 mile or less.

6.11 The estuary is studded with low and swampy islands covered

with mangrove and nipa palm. There are villages and cultivated areas on these islands. The land on both sides of the

estuary is of the same character.

6.11 The Fly River, perhaps the largest river in New Guinea, is of

great importance as a means of reaching the interior. From the

bar S of Dibiri Island, the river is navigable in depths generally

greater than 4m (1981) for at least 458 miles to the mining

town of Kiunga. For approximately 90 miles the Fly River

forms the boarder between Papua New Guinea and Irian Jaya.

6.11 Winds—Weather.—The climate in the vicinity of the Fly

River is good. There are considerable thunderstorms. Daytime

temperatures have been reported to be 24° to 32°C; night temperatures have been reported to be 22° to 24°C.

6.11 The islands in the estuary are flat and are covered with a

thick, fertile alluvial soil. The largest islands are Kiwai, Mibu,

Purutu, Aibinio, and Wabuda.

6.11 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents in the approach to the

river are very strong and irregular, especially during the Northwest Monsoon and at the change of seasons.

6.11 Springs rise 3.7m close seaward of South Entrance.

6.11 Aspect.—There are depths of 7.3 to 9.1m in the mouth of the

river, but extensive flats in the approach to the estuary limit the

draft of vessels until more extensive surveys are made and a

proper channel found. Charted positions of shallow places are

doubtful and should not be relied on.

6.11 It has been said that vessels with a draft of not more than

4.2m could enter the river by sending a boat ahead to make

soundings.

6.11 Historically, a steamer with a draft of 1.8m has ascended the

river for a distance of 150 miles,; a launch with a draft of 1.1m

has ascended about 500 miles upriver, where rapids prevented

further progress.

6.11 Returning to the entrance, the channels on either side of the

Kiwai Islands are known as North Entrance and South Entrance, and the pass close along the W shore is known as Neva

The Fly River
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 129

Pub. 164

Pass. The approach N of Wabuda Island although wide is

marked by heavy rollers apparently indicating shallow depths.

6.12 Umuda Floating Terminal (8°40'S., 141°01'E.) is

situated 17 miles SE of Umuda Island, in the outer part off the

Fly River delta. The terminal consists of a 45,000 grt storage

vessel secured to an SPM. Copper ore concentrate is shipped

down the Fly River via barges and is stored in bulk onboard the

floating terminal for transhipment.

6.12 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory; there is no pilot

boarding area in the immediate vicinity of the terminal. Pilots

may be provided by arrangement with Queensland Coast or

Torres Strait Pilot Associations.

6.13 Kiwai Island (8°37'S., 143°29'E.), the largest island,

separates the North Entrance and the South Entrance of the Fly

River. The island is about 30 miles long and averages 2.5 miles

wide. The island is well wooded and only a few meters above

water. The chief village, Iasa, has a mission station and is on

the S side of the island. Sumai village is on the same side of the

island and 15 miles farther NW. Doropo village is about

midway along the N side of the island. At the E end of the

island are other small villages.

6.13 Wabuda Island, on the N side of the estuary, and Domori Island, on the mouth of the river above Kiwai, are apparently the

only other inhabited islands.

6.13 The inhabitants of the Fly River delta engage in agriculture

and hunting. Coconut palm, breadfruit, plantain, sago palm,

and sugar cane are grown.

6.14 The Bamu River (8°09'S., 143°42'E.) is separated

from the N mouth of the Fly River by a long, low peninsula

whose shores are covered with mangrove and nipa palms

backed by dense forests with occasional cultivated places.

6.14 The estuary of the river, about 8 miles wide, is encumbered

with large, low, swamp islands covered with mangrove and

nipa palms. These islands divide the estuary into three channels, with charted depths of 1.7 to 6.2m, but the approach to all

of these channels is over a shallow flat extending 20 miles to

seaward which is reported to break in places; consequently,

until the river is surveyed, it can be entered only by small craft

with local knowledge. Vessels able to cross the bar apparently

can ascend the river for many miles.

6.14 Naviu Island and Aramia Island are the two largest islands in

the estuary. There are some villages on the various islands and

on the river banks.

6.14 The current in the river is said to have a maximum rate of 6

to 8 knots when the river is in flood. Spring tides rise 4.2m;

neap tides rise 3.1m. The river is subject to bores.

6.14 The Gama River (8°01'S., 143°54'E.) empties into the sea

about 10 miles E of the northernmost mouth of the Bamu

River. The submerged and uninhabitable coast between the

mouths of the river are covered with mangroves. The river is

nearly 1 mile wide at its entrance and is fronted for a distance

of 2.5 miles by extensive sand and mud flats with depths of 0.9

to 1.8m with 1.5m over the bar, which limits its use.

6.14 Bell Point (7°58'S., 143°55'E.) is E of the mouth of the

Gama River. The coast here, covered with sago and coconut

palms and along which there are several villages, turns sharply

to the N, forming the estuary to Turama River.

6.14 The estuary of the Turama River is about 20 miles wide.

Morigio Island and Neabo Island, which are large thicklywooded islands, divide the estuary into three channels. All of

these channels are probably fronted by shallow water and

therefore, until properly surveyed, should only be used with

local knowledge.

6.14 Historically, the river has been ascended, probably by small

craft, for a distance of 80 miles. Numerous villages are on the

banks of the river. The river has strong tidal currents and is

subject to bores dangerous to small boats.

6.14 Goaribari Island (7°47'S., 144°14'E.), about 5 miles in diameter, is in the approach to the Omati River. The island is

covered with tall mangrove and is barely above HW. There are

several villages on the island.

6.14 South of Risk Point, the E extremity of the island, is a sand

bank which nearly dries at LW and extends nearly 3 miles off

the SE side of the island and about 1 mile NE from Risk Point.

6.14 A bank with a least depth of 4.5m is 13 miles S of Goaribari

Island.

6.14 The Omati River, emptying into the sea N of Goaribari

Island, is about 1.5 miles wide at its entrance. The river has

depths of 0.9 to 3.6m, but much less in its approach. Several

villages are on the river banks; some are on land barely above

HW and are built on piles.

The Aird River Delta

6.15 The several mouths of the Aird River are on either

side of Ibibubari Island.

6.15 Cape Blackwood (7°46'S., 144°30'E.), the SE extremity of

the island, is about 12.5 miles E of the E extremity of Goaribari

Island. The island, about 12 miles long and 2 to 3 miles wide,

is barely a few feet above water and is covered with tall mangrove and trees. Cape Blackwood was reported to lie 1.9 miles

further SE than charted. There is only one small village on the

W side.

6.15 Between Goaribari Island and Ibibubari Island are the Newberry River, the Aird River, and the Nakari River mouths, while

to the E are the wider mouths of Bevan Sound and Paia Inlet.

There appear to be average depths of about 3.6m, with shoals

in places in all these rivers, which are simply water channels

through mangroves with only very little dry land anywhere.

The depths apparently shoal gradually from S toward Cape

Blackwood, but shoals with depths of less than 5.5m extend SE

from the cape for 10 miles.

6.15 The three rivers mentioned above are joined about 30 miles

above the mouth, at which junction the river is known as the

Kikori River.

6.15 Historically, a steamer of unknown but probably shallow

draft entered the Aird River by the Nakari Mouth and found the

tidal effect ceased at a small village above Aird Hill. The

steamer ascended the river about 25 miles and was stopped by

a series of rocky bars. A boat ascended farther upriver to a

point about 87 miles above Cape Blackwood. The upper waters

were found to be obstructed by rapids. The steamer returned

via Bevan Sound finding good depths as far as Deception Bay.

The exploration took place in March, with generally fair

weather during the day but only a few dry nights. The winds

were W and N; the temperatures during the day ranged from

28° to 29°C.
130 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

6.15 Kumul Marine Terminal (8°00'S., 144°06'E.), a production

platform with an SBM buoy situated about 2 miles further S, is

enclosed by a cautionary area. A pipeline connected to the

shore leads NW from the platform. A light, with a racon, is

shown from the terminal.

6.15 Depths—Limitations.—The tanker terminal has been designed for use by tankers from 60,000 to 150,000 dwt and for

partially-loaded ULCCs up to 300,000 dwt. Draft is restricted

to 17.1m.

6.15 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The vessel’s ETA should

be sent 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours in advance. The pilot

boards in the anchorage area 1.5 miles S of the SPM.

6.15 Anchorage.—Anchorage for tankers is situated 2 miles S of

the SBM buoy and a cautionary area, radius 5 miles, centered

on the production platform, within which vessels should avoid

navigating, anchoring, or fishing, has been established as

shown on the chart.

6.15 Caution.—Mariners risk prosecution if they anchor or trawl

within 10 miles of a pipeline and so damage it. Gas from a

damaged pipeline could cause a fire or loss of a vessel’s buoyancy.

6.15 Depths have been reported to be less than charted in various

areas of the bay. 

6.16 Aird Hill (7°27'S., 144°21'E.), about 23.5 miles

above Cape Blackwood, is a steep limestone hill about 331m

high.

6.16 Bevan Sound (7°45'S., 144°30'E.), the most direct route for

Aird Hill, is practicable for a vessel with 4.5m draft; however,

there are numerous sand banks in the sound.

6.16 Deception Bay, between Bald Head on the E and Ibibubari

Island on the W, is about 15 miles wide and fronted by flats

with depths of less than 5.5m for a distance of 10 miles. Little

is known about the W side of the bay, which derived its name

from its deceptive appearance as a deep entrance to a safe

navigable river, which it is not. Numerous streams discharge

into the bay, the more important of which are Paia Inlet, Era

Bay, and Port Romilly. The islands separating these bodies of

water are all low, swampy, and covered with mangrove and

nipa palms.

6.16 The point on the E side of Paia Inlet has coconut trees and a

sandy beach. A vessel passing through the inlet for a distance

of 5 miles found a least depth of 9.1m; a vessel with a draft of

1.8m ascended to the junction with the Aird River at the foot of

Aird Hill. At 20 miles up it was 91m wide and had a tidal rise

of about 2.4m.

6.16 During the Southeast Monsoon, anchorage can be taken near

the entrance to Paia Inlet.

6.16 The channel into Era Bay leads E of Gully Bank (7°47'S.,

144°44'E.), a drying sandbank, 7.5 miles W of Bald Head and

in mid-channel. The sand bank can be passed on either side. A

depth of 5.5m can be carried through the channel. There is

deep water and ample room within Era Bay. There are indications of a channel leading into Iviri Inlet, W of Bapai Point,

about 7 miles NNW of Bald Head.

6.17 Port Romilly (7°42'S., 144°48'E.), on the E side of

Deception Bay, is entered between Bapai Point and Mira Point,

about 5.5 miles SE. A spit, with depths of less than 5m and

with a shoal on the outer end of which the sea breaks, extends

about 7 miles S of Bald Head. The main approach channel is W

of this spit. Steer about 000° with Bapai Point ahead, then,

shortly before Bald Point is abeam, alter course to 025°; this

leads across a flat with depths of about 4m into Port Romilly.

Inside the entrance the depths are greater, the channel narrowing between the sand banks on either side; then it extends N

and becomes wider and provides ample anchorage space for

any vessels able to enter the port.

6.17 Another channel, with a depth of about 2.7m skirts the coast

between Bald Head and Mira Point. It was said that this

channel was shoaling and changing.

6.17 Port Romilly connects with the Wame River; historically, a

vessel with a draft of 2.7m ascended the river for a distance of

about 20 miles above Bald Head.

6.17 Anchorage can be taken in Port Romilly between Plum

Point (7°40'S., 144°49'E.), on the W side of the entrance 3

miles N of Miri Point, and Wami Point, 5 miles farther N. During the Southeast Monsoon, during which there is considerable

swell, vessels should use the N part of the anchorage, but during the Northwest Monsoon it is not necessary to go so far up.

The holding ground is good. Tidal currents in the anchorage

attain a rate of 3 to 4 knots.

6.17 The Baroi River (Varoi River) (7°48'S., 144°58'E.) is

entered 5 miles E of Bald Head. Historically the river has been

explored by a vessel drawing 1.8m for a distance of 80 miles

above the mouth.

6.17 Directions.—In approaching Deception Bay or any portion

of the coast between it and Parama Island, to the W of the Fly

River, soundings are the only safe guide because the water

almost always shoals gradually toward the banks fronting the

coast.

6.18 The delta of the Purari River (Purari Delta) is made up

of all the streams emptying into the sea between Bald Head and

the Alele Passage mouth of the Purari River, a distance of

about 23 miles to the ESE. The Purari River proper is the easternmost and main mouth. Its estuary, about 3 miles long, is

divided by an island into two mouths, Alele Passage and Aivei

Passage, which connect 4 miles above their mouths. The points

on both sides of the entrances to these passages are fronted by

shoals to a distance 1 mile or more. During the Southeast Monsoon the sea probably breaks across the mouth of each passage.

The passages can be used only by small boats and then with

local knowledge.

6.18 Anchorage may be taken in Alele Passage, in a depth of

about 7.3m.

A mission station is on Urika Island (7°48'S., 145°01'E.), in

the mouth of the Urika River, about 12 miles W of Alele Passage.

6.18 Orokolo Bay (7°53'S., 145°18'E.) lies between the mouth of

the Purari River and Maclatchie Point. The bay is about 12

miles across and has several villages on its shores. It has moderate depths and is clear of dangers. The highest land around

the bay is near the easternmost village. About 1.5 miles N of

the village there is a flat hill, 61m high. There is a missionary

station at Orokolo village.

6.18 The Vailala River (7°57'S., 145°24'E.) entrance, just W of

Maclatchie Point, has about 1.8m over its bar; a bank extends

about 1 mile off its E point. Local knowledge is necessary to

cross the bar; at times it is dangerous even for boats. There are
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 131

Pub. 164

villages on each entrance point and coconut groves near the

mouth of the river. The river has been explored by small craft

to 100 miles above the mouth.

Maclatchie Point to Port Moresby

6.19 Maclatchie Point (7°57'S., 145°24'E.), the SE continuation of the E entrance point to the Vailala River, is low but

is the most prominent point in the vicinity. Vessels coming

from SW will see the flat and wooded hills over this point. The

hills are remarkable because they are the westernmost limit of

the highland in this vicinity; between them and Orokolo Bay

the land is marshy and only a few feet above HW.

6.19 A shoal which sometimes breaks is 4 miles SSE of Maclatchie Point, and shoals extend 1 mile WNW from this shoal;

otherwise the surrounding depths are more than 8.2m.

6.19 A 1.5m shoal, is 4 miles W, and another shoal 3.6m 13 miles

SW of Maclatchie Point.

6.19 Other shoals are 10.3m 10 miles ESE, and 15.7m 12 miles S,

respectively, from Maclatchie Point.

6.19 The coast between Maclatchie Point trends E for about 19

miles to Kerema Bay, into which the Matupe River discharges.

The Kea River, a small river, empties into the sea about

midway along this stretch of coast, and a bold bluff with a

ledge of rocks extending nearly 1 mile S from it, is about 7

miles E of the mouth of the Keuru. A dangerous breaking shoal

is reported about 2.25 miles SW of the entrance to the river.

There are some isolated hills 3 to 14 miles N of the bold bluff.

6.19 Kerema Bay (7°58'S., 145°45'E.), the estuary of the Matupe

River, is large but almost blocked by sand banks. There is a

small boat passage along the W shore and a narrow channel

between the banks. Rollers are prevalent with onshore winds.

The bar is bad and shifting. There is a wreck, dangerous to navigation, just offshore of the village of Kerema. An aeronautical

radiobeacon is S of the village. A depth of 14.8m lies about 10

miles SW of the radiobeacon. 

6.19 Keauna Hills (8°00'S., 145°48'E.), 254m high, about 3 miles

E of Ipisi Point and N of Cape Cupola, are prominent. The

Nabo Range, about 1,219m high, is 12 miles N of these hills.

The Albert Mountains, about 2,134m high, are E of the Nabo

Range.

6.20 Cape Cupola (8°02'S., 145°50'E.), the S extremity of

the Keauna Hills, is a bold headland; E of the cape there are

coastal hills ranging from 61 to 91m high and extending nearly

to Karova Creek, 8.5 miles to the E. On the E side of the creek

is Karama mission station.

6.20 A radio tower is reported to stand on the coast about 1 mile

NW of the Cape Cupola.

6.20 From Karova Creek the coast trends 10 miles to the SE to

Mopu Inlet. Port Chalmers (8°08'S., 146°06'E.) is about 1.75

miles SE of the Mopu Inlet. This coast is lower and more

heavily wooded than that to the W and is backed for a few

miles by a range of moderately high hills.

6.20 Freshwater Bay is a bight off Mopu Inlet. Vessels have anchored 1 mile outside the bar.

6.20 Alice Mead Lagoon (8°08'S., 146°05'E.), N of Port

Chalmers, has a good anchorage for small vessels, in a depth of

3.6m, but there are no marks and local knowledge is necessary

despite easy entry. Port Chalmers is a small inlet with a depth

of 2.7m.

Several villages and coconut groves are seen along this

stretch of coast. The country N of Freshwater Bay is very hilly;

the Saw Mountains, 771m high, are 17 miles N of Port Chalmers.

6.20 The delta of the Tauri River and the Lakekamu River, about 4

miles long, is made up chiefly of mangrove swamps. The

mouths of the rivers are apparently barred at times during

strong winds but are available for small boats other times.

6.20 The Narutu River, 4.5 miles SE of the Lakekumu River, is

apparently barred at some times like the other rivers along this

coast. Some low hills back the coast for the next 10 miles SE.

6.20 The Biaru River can be ascended only by boats and has been

explored for 25 miles above the mouth.

6.20 Iokea is a mission station on the coast about 3 miles S of the

mouth of the Biaru River and Oiapu village is 7 miles farther

SE.

6.20 Between Iokea and Cape Possession, the coast, trending SSE

for 12.5 miles, is bolder and is backed by a ridge of rather high

hills that rise abruptly from the shore. The coast near the cape

consists of cliffs and valleys. One Tree Hill and Northwest Hill

are NE and SE, respectively, from Iokea and Wedge Hill is E of

Oiapu. Between Wedge Hill and Cape Possession is peaked

and well-defined Clump Hill. The S portion of the coast is

fronted by a reef extending offshore for about 1 mile. This reef

breaks at LW.

6.21 Cape Possession (8°35'S., 146°23'E.) is a bold point

forming the S end of the coastal range mentioned above. The

water is deep off Cape Possession, but closer in no soundings

have been taken. There is heavy surf at times, as there is along

the entire coast between this cape and Parama Island.

6.21 Tides—Currents.—For a distance of 10 to 20 miles offshore between Cape Blackwell and Cape Possession the flood

and ebb current were found to set nearly W and E, respectively,

following the general direction of the coast at a rate of 2 to 3

knots.

6.21 The SE portion of Papua New Guinea E of the Gulf of Papua

rises to lofty mountains, contrasting very strikingly with the

low level country to the W. Of these mountains the Owen

Stanley Range, which may be termed the "backbone" of this

part of Papua New Guinea, extends as an almost continuous

chain from Mount Victoria to the head of Milne Bay.

6.22 Mount Victoria (8°55'S., 147°33'E.), 4,036m high

and the summit of the Owen Stanley Range, about 72 miles

ESE of Cape Possession, is remarkable for its square top and

unmistakable height; a sharp ridge descends from it SW

towards the sea.

6.22 Ten miles NW of Mount Victoria there is a sharp slope from

this lofty mountain chain where there is a joining of two ranges

of less height; one of these extends SW for about 25 miles to

Redscar Bay and the other trends NW for about the same

distance at a much greater elevation. Mount Cameron, the

highest point in the latter range, is 2,216m high at its SE end.

6.22 Mount Yule (8°12'S., 146°47'E.), 33 miles NE of Cape

Possession, is a remarkable table-topped mountain, 3,275m

high, the crowning summit of a detached portion of the Owen

Stanley Range; the dividing gap in the range is a deep valley
132 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

about 20 miles S of Mount Yule. This mountain has been seen

at a distance of 117 miles. The country between this mountain

is hilly but apparently fertile.

6.22 The coast for the first 9 miles SE of Cape Possession is a

sandy beach backed by wooded hills. Between these hills and

the shore is a strip of level land with several villages backed by

a continuous forest of coconut palms extending to the base of

the hills.

6.22 From the end of the beach to Au Point, 4 miles farther E, the

land is very low and covered with dense jungle. Very few

soundings have been taken off this part of the coast.

6.22 South of Cape Possession to Au Point, for about 13 miles,

the coast is thickly populated. The principal villages are Kevori

Poe and Maiua, which are mission stations.

6.22 Au Point (8°46'S., 146°31'E.), the NW end of Hall Sound, is

low and sandy; the ground is swampy and covered with mangrove trees. Pinupaka Village, a mission station is 0.5 mile N of

the point. A depth of 16.5m is reported to lie about 11 miles W

of the point. About 3.5 miles NW of the 16.5m depth, a depth

of 10m has been reported (1993). 

6.23 Yule Island (8°50'S., 146°32'E.), the N end of which

is about 1 mile off Au Point, fronts Hall Sound. The island is

4.5 miles long NW-SE and 0.5 to 1.75 miles wide. It has many

peaks the highest of which is 1.75 miles from the S end of the

island and is 160m high. The hills slope gently to the sea. The

N end of the island is wooded, but there are many clearings

with clusters of huts at the S end. There are several caves along

the coasts of the island.

6.23 The seaward side of Yule Island is fronted by a moderately

steep-to reef varying from 0.2 mile to 1 mile off. The inner side

of the island, within the entrance to Hall Sound, is clear of

reefs, with the depths shoaling gradually toward the shore of

the island.

6.23 Anchorage.—Good temporary anchorage may be taken

about 1 mile W of the N end of Yule Island, in a depth of

18.3m, mud.

6.23 A conspicuous white house stands close N of Maura Point.

6.23 Caution.—Depths of 14.6m and 7.4m lie about 11.5 and

4.75 miles W, respectively, of Maura Point.

6.24 Chiaria (Tsiria) (8°49'S., 146°31'E.), a village, is on

the W side of Yule Island and a mission station is between the

village and Maura Point. The climate on the island is considered to be less healthful than that on the mainland.

6.24 Hall Sound (8°50'S., 146°34'E.), E of Yule Island, affords

sheltered anchorage, in 7.3 to 21.9m, mud, good holding

ground, and is available to all types of vessels. The S entrance,

S of Yule Island, is 1.5 miles wide but is reduced by reefs on

both sides to 0.75 mile, with depths of 22 to 44m in mid-channel. The water in the channel is frequently so turbid that the

reefs cannot be seen.

6.24 The N channel is 0.5 mile wide between the mud flat of Au

Point and the reef extending N from the N end of Yule Island.

There is a least depth of 2.7m in the fairway of this channel.

6.24 Musgrave Reef (8°53'S., 146°31'E.), 0.5 mile long, has a

least depth of 4.9m near its S end, 2.5 miles SSW of Mauru

Point. The reef is directly in the approach to the S entrance to

Hall Sound.

6.24 Reefs extend 0.8 mile into the S entrance from Kapripata

Point, a grove-covered point on the mainland S of Yule Island.

Reefs also extend into the passage from the hilly point N of

Delena Village, which is nearly 2miles NE of Kapripata Point.

An 11m shoal lies about 6.25 miles W of Kapripata Point.

6.24 Mauru Mauru Reef (8°51'S., 146°33'E.), on the N side of

the S passage into Hall Sound, is the S part of an extensive reef

projecting out from the W coast of Yule Island.

6.24 The E shore of Hall Sound is a mangrove swamp into which

the Bioto River and the St. Joseph River discharge; it is fronted

by an extensive drying mudflat that makes the rivers accessible

to boats and then only at half-flood to half-ebb. The depths

shoals gradually toward this flat.

6.24 A cable area is abreast the S entrance to Hall Bay. Anchorage is prohibited in the area.

6.25 The St. Joseph River (8°48'S., 146°34'E.), emptying

into Hall Bay, has depths of only 1.5 to 1.8m at HW. The Bioto

River, also emptying into the sound has a depth of 2.7m and is

narrow.

6.25 Tides—Currents.—In Hall Sound, springs rise 1.5 to 2.1m

and neaps 0.6 to 0.9m. In the S entrance to the sound the flood

runs NE at a rate of 1 knot and the ebb at a rate of 1 to 2 knots.

6.25 Directions.—To avoid Musgrave Reef when approaching

Hall Sound from the N ,steer for Naruru Hill, 219m high and

the N high peak of the range on the S side of the S entrance,

bearing 106°; then, when the E extremity of Yule Island bears

025°, change course to 039° and continue on that course

through the fairway into the sound.

6.25 Vessels coming from the S should steer for the W extremity

of Yule Island bearing 350°, passing between Musgrove Reef

and the shore reef that extends out abreast Kapripata Point.

When the SE extremity of Yule Island bears 025°, steer for it

until Naruru Hill bears 106°, then steer 039° up the fairway

into the sound.

6.25 The reefs make night entry into the sound dangerous.

6.25 There are several villages in the Hall Sound area including

the mission station Delena Village, on the S side of the S entrance to the sound.

6.26 Cape Suckling (9°02'S., 146°38'E.) lies about 12

miles SSE of Hall Sound; the intervening coast is backed by a

range of hills 152 to 213m high. Mount Ripachina, 229m high,

is the highest peak in the N portion and Mount Boria, 223m

high and 2.5 miles NE of Cape Suckling, is the highest peak in

the S portion. The latter part of the range consists of sand hills

covered with scrub. The cape is low, gradually rising to Mount

Boria, which, with Mount Kupata, at the termination of the

range, serves to identify the cape. Mount Lolopata, 261m high

and 8 miles NNE of Cape Suckling, is also a prominent landmark.

6.26 When the rivers are in flood, there are often large quantities

of driftwood in the open sea off this coast and the sea has a

muddy discolored appearance.

6.26 A 9.1m coral shoal is about 5.5 miles W of Gubbins Point

(8°57'S., 146°34'E.); two shoals of 4.5m and 4.9m, respectively, are within 0.6 mile W of the same point. An 8.2m shoal

is about 1.5 miles offshore, 2.5 miles S of Gubbins Point. A

shoal with a least depth of 6.4m is about 1.5 miles WSW of

Cape Suckling.
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 133

Pub. 164

6.26 Pike Shoal, with a depth of 8.5m, coral, is 2.5 miles S of

Cape Suckling. Two shoals, with depths of 7.3m and 9.1m are

3.75 and 4.5 miles, respectively, SE of Cape Suckling and

about 2 miles offshore.

6.26 From Cape Suckling,the coast trends ESE for about 16 miles

to Redscar Bay; the first 8 miles of this coast is fronted by a

coral reef extending 0.5 to 1 mile offshore.

6.27 The Aroa River (9°04'S., 146°48'E.) discharges about

11 miles from the cape; its mouth is apparently dry at LW.

6.27 Kekeni Rocks, three in number and the highest of which is

21m high, are 1.75 miles S of the entrance to the Aroa River on

the W part of a drying reef and are nearly connected with the

shore flat. These rocks, showing against the low mangrove

swamp at their back, are conspicuous from seaward.

6.27 Redscar Bay (9°09'S., 146°50'E.) is between Kekeni Rocks

and Lagava Island, 11.5 miles to the SE. The shores of the bay

are low, swampy, and thickly wooded. A light is shown from

Redscar Head.

6.27 A 9.1m shoal has been reported 4.7 miles 312° from Varivari

Island; the position of this shoal is doubtful. An 11m shoal is

located about 9 miles WSW of Kekeni Rocks; a 9m shoal is

located 12 miles SW of Kekeni Rocks. An 7.4m shoal is

located about 14 miles W of Varivari Island and another shoal

is reported about 16 miles WNW of the same island.

6.28 Galley Reach (9°07'S., 146°35'E.), which goes

through the bar across the estuary into which the Vanapa River

and other rivers discharge, is at times dangerous to boats and,

being formed by the deposit brought down by the rivers, is

liable to shifting. A depth of 1.8m may be found in the channel

over the bar at LW. Abreast of Manumanu there are general

depths of 6.1m and possibly more in Galley Reach, which is

bordered by mangrove swamps.

6.28 Anchorage.—A submarine cable extends from Manumanu

to the opposite shore. Anchoring or fishing is prohibited within

0.25 mile of the cable.

6.28 Directions.—Renge beacons are at Manumanu Village, and

in line bearing 048°, lead across the inner end of the bar. There

is a conspicuous tree on the coast about 1.5 miles W of the

beacons. Vessels with local knowledge can cross the bar with

the conspicuous tree bearing 359° until the beacons are in line;

then they should be kept in line for about 1.25 miles. The track

over the outer part of the bar leads between two reefs, about 0.3

mile apart, upon which the sea almost always breaks.

6.29 The Vanapa River drains a large part of the Owen

Stanley Range and discharges into the sea through Galley

Reach. The river junction with the reach is hidden by mangrove. The river has been ascended by boat for about 40 miles

and found to be a rapid stream with numerous snags and

boulders. Thr Laloki River also enters Galley Reach from the

SE.

6.29 There is a mission station and a sawmill at Manumanu

village on the S side of the entrance to the Vanapa River. There

are also several villages in the clearings hidden from the river

and are several rubber plantations at the head of Galley Reach.

6.29 The coast between Galley Reach and Lagava Island, 9 miles

to the S, is low and swampy.

6.29 Lagava Island (9°17'S., 146°55'E.), at the SE extremity of

Redscar Bay, is about 2 miles long and 0.5 mile wide; it attains

a height of 110m near its center and is very conspicuous. The

W extremity is a bold point rising to a hill with cliffy patches

on its S side. The island is on a coral reef extending 0.3 mile

from its W and SW sides; it is connected to the shore by a

mangrove swamp.

6.30 Varivari Island (9°15'S., 146°53'E.), about 2 miles

NW of Lagava Island, is about 0.5 mile long in an E-W direction and has at its S and W extremities two peaks, respectively,

35 and 43m high. These peaks, connected by a strip of low

land, appear as two islets from a distance. The island is on a

reef extending 0.3 mile NW and SE from it and to a lesser distance elsewhere. Two rocks, one of which is 28m high, are on

the S part of the reef.

6.30 Several small unimportant rivers discharge through the mangrove swamps into the bight E of Varivari Island.

6.30 Anchorage.—Redscar Bay is an exposed anchorage during

the Southeast Trade Winds. Vessels should not anchor in less

than 18.3m and Kekeni Rocks should not bear less than 329° if

in the N part of the bay. Better anchorage may be obtained, in

about 10m, mud and sand, with the 77m hill on Lagava Island

bearing 151°, distant 0.85 mile, with shelter during the SE

trades; smaller craft may anchor closer inshore. There is

considerable swell here in the Northwest Monsoon but by

anchoring in the lee of Varivari Reef, fair shelter might be

obtained, in a depth of about 21.9m, from 0.2 to 0.3 mile from

the reef.

6.30 Caution.—Approaching Varivari anchorage or Caution Bay,

to the S, a good lookout should be kept aloft when nearing the

edge of the barrier reef because soundings taken in the area are

very scattered. This caution applies equally to other parts of the

reef.

6.31 Darebo Hill (9°16'S., 146°57'E.), 2.5 miles E of the

summit of Lagava Island, is isolated and rises abruptly from

the low land to a height of 160m; from the S it appears wedgeshaped, but from the N and W it has a rounded appearance.

6.31 From Lagava Island, the coast trends E to the Lealea River

and then S to Boera Head, forming Caution Bay, which has not

been completely surveyed. The bay is about 8 miles wide and

encumbered with numerous shoals including Pullen Shoals, in

its central part and on which there are depths of 1.4 to 9.8m.

Reefs and foul ground are in the S and SW approach to the bay

and extend from Idihi Island, marked by a light, to within 1

mile of Boera Head. Strong tide rips have been encountered

about 3 miles N of the island.

6.31 Piri Patch, with a depth of 3m, is close off the edge of a shore

reef N of Boera Head. A 4.5m shoal is 9.5 miles NW of Idihi

Island with shallow water in places between. The shoal may be

considered the beginning of a barrier reef. A 10m shoal depth

and an unsurveyed shoal area are between 5.5 to 6.75 miles

NNW of Idiha Island at the entrance to Caution Bay. Bavo

Island, with some tall trees on it, is on a reef 3 miles E of Idiha

Island. The Lealea River empties into the head of Caution Bay.

6.31 Boera Head (9°23'S., 147°01'E.), marked by a light, is a

conspicuous red cliff, 50m high, at the S end of a short range of

coastal hills. Because it is separated by a plain from the Pyram-
134 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

dal Hill Range, which rises to a height of 305m to the NE, this

point is conspicuous from S.

6.31 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, in 26m, about 1

mile NE of Idihi Island with shelter against the Southeast

Monsoon. In approaching this anchorage a good lookout aloft

is necessary to avoid the reef extending nearly 1 mile N from

the island and a shoal spit N of the island.

6.31 A submarine cable crosses Caution Bay in a NW direction

from Boera Head to a point 1 mile SW of Lagava Island. Anchorage is prohibited within 0.75 mile on either side of the

cable.

6.31 Boera Village, a mission station, is just E of Boera Head,

Buropada village is 2.5 miles farther SE.

6.31 A barrier reef, which begins abreast Caution Bay and

extends to the E of the Louisiade Archipelago, is a remarkable

line of barrier reefs about 450 miles long and composed of

living coral. In many places it does not reach to the surface of

the sea and in such places is known as the "sunken barrier".

From 1 to 10 miles offshore, it has many breaks and passages,

but still may be considered as a unit. A remarkable feature of

the reef is that where it is submerged depths up to 9.1m are not

uncommon. The outer edge of this barrier reef, in those places

it has been surveyed, has been found to be very steep, 183m

being found close to the reef.

6.31 There is passage inside the barrier reef mentioned above

from Redscar Bay to San Roque Passage, about 200 miles to

the ESE, but it is suitable only for small vessels with local

knowledge.

6.32 From Boera Head (9°23'S., 147°01'E.) the coast,

fringed by a coastal reef and backed by hills ranging from 122

to 183m high and which are mostly wooded, has a generally

SE direction for 7.5 miles to Palli Palli Point,where it turns to

the N, forming the W side of Port Moresby. 

6.32 Haidana Island (9°27'S., 147°02'E.), 7.9m high and consisting of a coral plateau covered with sand and grass, is on the

coral reef which fronts the coast to a distance of 2 miles. The

island is about 2.75 miles S of Boera Head.

6.32 There is protected anchorage W of Haidana Island, in 14.6 to

16.4m, sand and mud, with the N extremity of the island bearing 079° and the SW extremity bearing 137°. Small craft with

local knowledge can find sheltered anchorage E of the island,

the only approach being from S through a break in the reef between the island and the mainland. A light is shown from the

reef fronting the SW side of Haidana Island.

6.32 Clarke Patches, in the fairway SE of Liljeblad Passage and S

of Haidana Island, are scattered shoals with depths of 3.6 to

5.5m.

6.33 Idlers Bay (9°28'S., 147°05'E.), the entrance of

which is about 3 miles SE of the S end of Haidana Island is

almost choked by reefs with anchorage only for coasters in the

E corner. The shores of the bay are fringed with mangroves.

Roku Village is at the head of the bay.

6.33 There is a channel inside the barrier reef passing from Caution Bay close along Boera Head and Haidana Island which

leads to Port Moresby, but it is limited to small coastal craft

with local knowledge.

6.33 A wide valley that trends NW behind the coastal hills

extends from the head of Bootless Inlet to Redscar Bay and the

mouth of the Lakloi River.

6.33 The coast line from Boera Head to Tupusulei Haed, about 20

miles long, has been surveyed. It has an off-lying barrier reef

and includes Port Moresby and Bootless Inlet. There are

several islands and islets in the area, those on the fringing coast

reef are low, sandy, and rocky, with a few trees and scrub,

while those which are detached are higher.

6.33 The area consists of hills, some wooded and others with

patches of cultivation. They rise from the shore to heights of

almost 274m on the E side of the port to 387m NW of the port.

6.33 Caution.—Dangerous mine areas laid during World War II

still exist in the approaches to ports. See Pub. 120, Sailing

Directions (Planning Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia

for details.

Port Moresby (9°28'S., 147°08'E.)

World Port Index No. 53160

6.34 Port Moresby Harbor is about 4.5 miles long and 1 to

2 miles wide with general depths of 12.8 to 21.9m. Strong SE

winds drive a heavy sea into the port, but there is sheltered

anchorage, in 10.9 to 14.6m, in the E part of the bay; in the

bays in the N part of the harbor, the principal being Fairfax

Harbor; there is secure anchorage at all times for vessels of

moderate draft.

6.34 Winds—Weather.—The town of Port Moresby, the seat of

government of Papua New Guinea, is on the E side of Port

Moresby Harbor between Paga Hill and Tuaguba Hill. This

vicinity is considered more healthful than the neighborhood of

the villages to the N.

6.34 The principal exports are rubber, copra, cocoa beans, and

shell. The principal imports are machinery, agricultural products, and textiles.

6.34 The dry Southeast Trade Winds, from April to November,

often blow strongly and raise a short sea in the harbor, which

makes boatwork uncomfortable.

6.34 During the wet Northwest Monsoon, from October to March,

strong gusty winds, known locally as "gubas," sometimes blow,

generally at night.

Port Moresby Container Terminal
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 135

Pub. 164

6.34 Tides—Currents.—In August, springs rise about 2.7m;

neaps rise about 1.8m. The tidal range is said to be the greatest

in July and least in January. During January and February the

rise is reported to be imperceptible.

6.34 The tidal currents generally are regular and vary in direction

according to the positions of the openings of the barrier reef

and the strength of the prevailing winds. Small tide rips may be

experienced S of the Lolorua Islands, off Pyramid Point, and in

the three entrance channels leading to the port.

6.34 Depths—Limitations.—The port can accommodate vessels

up to 62,000 dwt, with a maximum length of 236m and a maximum draft of 10.5m.

6.34 Vessels are berthed port side-to and are normally taken to

berths during daylight. The Government Wharf (Main Wharf),

or Old Port, extends offshore and is T-shaped. The wharf has

four designated berths. Berths 1 and Berths 2 are used by large

vessels and have a combined frontage of 213m, with a depth of

7.6m alongside. Its inner or S side wharfage is used by coastal

and smaller craft. Berth 3A, the W inner face, is 67m lon, with

a depth of 3.8m alongside. Berth 3B, the E inner face, is 113m

long, with a depth of 4.5m alongside.

6.34 Close NE of the Main Wharf, the Container Terminal or the

New Port, is built on reclaimed area. It has a frontage 125m

long, with a depth of 10.6m alongside. The S end of the container wharf is subject to silting.

6.34 Lancron Wharf, about 0.5 mile NE from the Old Port, has a

least depth of 4m along its N side.

6.34 Two mooring berths for tankers lie 1.25 and 1.75 miles NNW,

respectively, of Old Port. A submarine oil pipeline extends NE to

shore from each mooring area. Tankers, with a maximum draft of

13m, can be accommodated; vessels are moored on a SE heading.

6.34 An LPG berth, consisting of a steel framework manifold

platform in a depth of 15m, lies about 2 miles NNW of Old

Port and can accommodate a vessel up to 107m in length.

6.34 A reclaimed area behind the main wharf is to be provided

and an additional berth will be constructed, giving berths 4 and

5 a total length of 390m. 

6.34 Three passages, Liljeblad Passage, Basilisk Passage, and

Padana Nahua Passage, lead through the barrier reef to Port

Moresby.

6.34 Liljeblad Passage is between foul ground S of Caution Bay

and Sinaui Reef, 8 miles W of the port and involves a circuitous route through an area encumbered with reefs, and, because of a shoal patch in the fairway, the shoals between it and

the entrance to the port, the lack of any definite marks, and

Port Moresby—Main Wharf facing SE
136 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

strong tidal currents it should be used only by shallow-draft

vessels with local knowledge.

6.34 Basilisk Passage (9°32'S., 147°08'E.), abreast the port beween Sinavi Reef and Nateara Reef, is deep and clear and is

the recommended channel into the port. The passage is marked

by a light, from which a racon transmits, and a lighted range. A

depth of 10.5m was reported, near the range of the fairway in

this channel. A N set of 1.5 knots was reported on flood tide.

6.34 Padana Nahua Passage, at the E end of Nateara Reef, is about

0.5 mile wide and very deep; but, because of its inferiority to

Basilisk Passage, its use is recommended only by vessels with

local knowledge. The passage is partially marked by beacons.

6.34 Sinavi Reef is part of the barrier reef fronting the shore and

shore reefs at an average distance of 1.5 miles between

Liljeblad Passage and Basilisk Passage. Beginning about 1

mile S of the foul ground S of Caution Bay, this reef extends

9.5 miles to the SE. The seaward edge of the reef is well defined and plainly visible in clear weather. The reef dries in

places.

6.34 Daugo Island, near the middle of Sinavi Reef, is 2.5 miles

long, about 0.5 mile wide and 6.1m high. This island and the

smaller islands close E of it are low, flat, sandy, and covered

with trees; the easternmost of the small islands is 6.1m high. 

Lark Patch (9°31'S., 147°08'E.), with a least depth of 3.6m,

is 0.5 mile NE of the NE end of Sinavi Reef on the W side of

Basilisk Passage. Depths of less than 10.9m extend SE and E

from the above 3.6m shoal within a position close NW of the

entrance range.

6.34 Two small pinnacles were reported to lie 1 mile NE of Lark

Patch Light, with a least depth of 16.5m.

6.34 Nateara Reef, E of Sinavi Reef and separated from that reef

by Basilisk Passage, is a main part of the barrier reef fronting

Port Moresby. The seaward edge of the reef is well defined

except toward the SE submerged section. The reef dries in

places. The NW point of the reef is marked by a light, from

which a racon transmits.

6.34 A stranded wreck was reported (1993) in position 9°34'S,

147°10'E about 3 miles ESE of the light. The wreck is breaking

up; large sections of the wreck are covered at HW. 

6.34 A sunken rock is 0.2 mile N of the N end of the reef which

forms the E side of Padana Nahua Passage.

6.34 The W side of Padana Nahua Passage is formed by the E end

of the sunken barrier reef extending about 3.5 miles ESE from

the drying section of Nateara Reef. Shoal depths fringe the E

and NE part of the sunken reef and vessels rounding this area

should exercise caution.

6.34 South Patch (9°34'S., 147°19'E.), with a depth of 2.4m and

marked by a beacon, is SW of Tupusulei Head and close N of

the turning point after entering Padana Nahua Passage.

6.34 North Patch (9°34'S., 147°17'E.), with a depth of 2.7m, is

about 0.75 mile NNE of the beacon on South Patch.

6.34 A 9.4m shoal is about 0.6 mile SE of the beacon on South

Patch. There are two 12.8m patches 0.25 mile and 0.75 mile,

bearing 039° and 130° respectively, from the beacon on South

Patch. Middle Patch a 6.9m shoal is 0.6 mile N of South Patch.

6.34 The S end of Hanudamava Island, on the W side of the

entrance to Port Moresby, in range with the S extremity of

Manubada Island bearing 297° leads close SW of South Patch.

Aspect.—From seaward Taurama Hill (9°32'S., 147°14'E.),

above Pyramid Point, the W point of Bootless Inlet, is a pyramid-shaped hill, 183m high. Tupusulei Head (9°34'S.,

147°18'E.), the E entrance point of the inlet is 51m high. The E

side of the inlet is composed of valleys and small hills that rise

gradually from the coast to the Astrolobe Range, which attains

heights of 610 to 1,219m. Mount Lawes (9°20'S., 147°14'E.),

in a plain about 9 miles N of the head of Bootless Inlet, is a

conspicuous hill, 488m high.

6.34 From seaward, the coast in the vicinity of Port Moresby is

not distinctive due to the mass of the Owen Stanley Range and

Port Moresby—Main Wharf as seen from the Container Terminal, with Gemo Island in the background
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 137

Pub. 164

the Astrolobe Range in the background. On the W side of the

entrance to Port Moresby is Mavarololo, a conspicuous 195m

high hill with a clear summit. Huhunamo, 387m high, and Lovobada, 378m high, are two conspicuous tree-covered mountains close N of the head of the bay. On the E side of the port is

Mount Pullen (9°27'S., 147°09'E.), 254m high and nearly 2.5

miles NNE of Bogirohodobi Point. An obstruction light is

shown from the summit of a hill 252m high, about 0.5 mile

SSE of Mount Pullen. The white houses between Paga Hill and

Tuaguba Hill are easily distinguished in clear weather approaching Basilisk Passage. 

6.34 The port area gives a good radar return from a distance of 20

miles.

6.34 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory. The pilot boarding area,

shown on the chart, is about 1 mile SW of the entrance to

Basilisk Passage. Pilots are available at all times. In bad

weather pilot boards inside the passage at about 0.5 mile NW

from the entrance; or with prior permission, a vessel may

proceed directly to the anchorage 0.75 mile W of Manubada

Island and await pilot boarding. Ship are not berthed during

hours of darkness. An ETA message should be sent 24 hours

and 12 hours prior to arrival and should be confirmed or

amended not more than 5 hours or less than 4 hours prior to

arrival. Radio frequencies used are VHF channels 6, 12, and

16. 

6.34 Water, fuel oil, and some provisions are available. There is a

hospital and an airport is nearby.

6.34 Port Moresby maintains a port radio station.

6.34 Anchorage.—Port Moresby is commodious and sheltered,

with good holding ground of mud, and affords anchorage for

classes of vessels at all seasons. Anchorage areas W, NNW,

and SSW of the town of Port Moresby are shown on the chart.

There is also an area marked unsafe for anchoring on the W

side of Port Moresby extending S to Sinavi Reef and W to

Daugo Island. Vessels navigating this area should also refer to

the chart for location of a spoil area between Vahunabada Reef

and Napa Napa.

6.34 A good anchorage is in the outer harbor, centered in a

position with the N point of Manubada Island bearing 090°,

1,275m distant, in a depth of 27m. 

6.34 The Southeast Monsoon often blows strongly and raises a

short sea in the harbor making boat work uncomfortable. At

this season vessels are advised to anchor as close inshore as

possible under the lee of the town peninsula.

6.34 During the Northwest Monsoon season, strong gusty winds,

locally known as Gubas, sometimes blow, generally at night.

At this season vessels should anchor more toward the W shore,

off the shipyard at Napa Napa (9°28'S., 147°06'E.).

6.34 Anchoring is prohibited in an area SSW from Paga Point,

where an outfall extends about 1.75 miles offshore.

6.34 Directions.—Liljeblad Passage should be used only by

small shallow-draft vessels with local knowledge.

6.34 Basilisk Passage is used almost exclusively and is the recommended entrance. From seaward, steer a course of 017° for the

white houses at Port Moresby as soon as they are identified

until the lighted beacon on Nateara Reef is made out. The

range lights at Vabukori Point in line bearing 054° lead through

the passage and should be followed until clear of Lark Patch.

There is a dangerous wreck 0.3 mile S of Paga Point whose position is approximate. Steer into port on that range line, passing

Logulu Motu Motu 0.2 mile off. When past the reef alter

course for the desired anchorage.

6.34 If visibility is low when making for Basilisk Passage, the

stranded wreck on Nateara Reef may be identified before getting into dangerous proximity to the reef.

Padana Nahua Channel can be used when approaching from

E, but is less preferred than Basilisk Passage. Steer in with

Mount Sadowa, 394m high, in range with the N extremity of

Loloata Island, bearing 010°, then, when the barrier reef on the

E side of the entrance is abeam, change course slightly to the E

in order to bring Mount Sadowa into range with the S end of

Loloata Island, bearing 006°; this course will give safe berth to

the shoal fringing the E extremity of Nateara Reef. When

abreast the end of that reef change course in sufficient time to

bring the S end of Gemo (Hanudamava) Island in range with

the S end of Manubada Island bearing 297°; this leads S of

South Patch. Then pass S of Manubada Island. Proceed as

directed for Basilisk Passage. Care should be taken to avoid the

previously-mentioned wreck S of Bogirohodobi Point. During

the Southeast Monsoon season, Mount Sadowa is often obscured by haze and vessels should proceed with caution. As

noted on the chart, this area is considered unsafe for anchoring.

6.34 Caution.—See Pub. 120, Sailing Directions (Planning

Guide) Pacific Ocean and Southeast Asia, for danger area in

the vicinity of Port Moresby and approaches.

Port Moresby—Inside the Barrier Reef

6.35 Manubada Island (9°31'S., 147°10'E.), about 3 miles

SE of the town of Port Moresby is 65m high, and is surrounded

by a reef. A narrow channel with depths of 18.3 to 26m is beween the island and the mainland.

6.35 Good anchorage can be obtained during the Southeast Monsoon, in 18.3m, mud, off the NW side of Manubada Island.

6.35 A shore reef, extends from about 0.1 to 1 mile offshore

between Vabukori Point, close NNE of Manubada Island and

Pyramid Point, about 4 miles to the SE.

6.35 Some houses in the valley NE of Kila Kila, a prominent

157m hill N of Point Vabukori, are visible from SE when

approaching Port Moresby.

6.35 Walter Bay (9°29'S., 147°09'E.) is a semicircular recession

in the coast between Vabukori Point and Bogirohodobi Point,

2.5 miles NW. A reef extends out 0.15 mile from the shores of

the bay. Gabatu Motu Motu Islet, 13.7m high, is on this reef

near the head of the bay. Danuagua Islet is in the E part of the

bay, close off the shore reef. A rocky islet, 6.7m high, is about

0.5 mile NW of this last islet.

6.35 Arakuti Reef, in the W part of Walter Bay close S of Bogirohodobi Point, is separated from the mainland reef by a narrow

channel with a depth of about 7.3m.

6.35 Local craft obtain good anchorage in NW weather between

Arakuti Reef and the mainland reef to the N.

Gemo Island (Hanudamava Island) (9°29'S., 147°06'E.), at

the W entrance point to Port Moresby, is 87m high and covered

with grass and brushwood on its W side; it is connected to the

mainand by a reef which also extends E from the island.

6.35 Lolorua Island, actually two small islands joined at LW, are

S of Gemo Island and the S most island is 29m high. A

channel, 0.13 mile wide between the island and Gemo Island,

has mid-channel depths of 1.8 to 7.3m.
138 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

6.36 Bogirohodobi Point (9°29'S., 147°08'E.), 1.5 miles E

of Loloru Island, is the E entrance point to Port Moresby. The

point is dominated by Paga Hill, 110m high, on which there is

a signal station with a flagstaff. A conspicuous building is

about 0.3 mile ENE and an aeronautical radiobeacon is 2.5

miles ENE, respectively, from Paga Hill.

6.36 The entrance to Port Moresby, slightly more than 1 mile

wide between Bogirohodobi Point on the E and Lolorua Island

on the W, has depths of 14.6 to 26m.

6.36 North of Gemo Island, isolated reefs extend out to 0.15 mile

offshore; the largest of these is Esade Motu Motu.

6.36 The W side of Port Moresby Harbor is clear of dangers at a

distance of 0.6 mile offshore. Most of the E side of the port is

fronted by a solid reef extending more than 0.5 mile off. Tatana

Island, 126m high, is on the extension of the shore reef in the N

part of the harbor and is connected to the mainland by a causeway.

6.36 Coglan Head (9°25'S., 147°07'E.) about 0.6 mile N of

Tatana Island and at the head of Port Moresby Harbor, is 78m

high and fringed with mangroves. Reefs extend as much as

0.55 mile off the head and from the shore to the E; between this

reef and Tatana Island there is sheltered anchorage for small

vessels in all weather.

6.37 Logolu Motu Motu (9°29'S., 147°08'E.), a drying

reef 0.15 mile long, is 0.15 mile off Elakurukuru, the N

extremity of the E entrance point to Port Moresby harbor. The

reef is marked by a light at each end. A 10m shoal is about

180m E of the S end of the reef.

6.37 Liberty Patch (9°28'S., 147°08'E.), about 0.5 mile NE of

Logolu Motu Motu is marked by a light and is surrounded by

several charted dangers.

6.37 Vahunabada Reef, a drying reef about 0.75 mile N of Logulu

Motu Motu, is marked by lights and other aids. The Elevala

Peninsula (9°28'S., 147°08'E.), a small rocky peninsula,

20.4m high projecting from the shore, is about 0.75 mile E of

Vahundabada Reef. A jetty, in ruins, extends 0.25 mile SE from

the peninsula; foul ground extends 0.45 mile from the peninsula.

6.37 An offshore pipeline berth equipped with mooring buoys is

N of Vahunabada Reef; its use is not recommended during the

Southeast Monsoon.

6.37 Fairfax Harbor (9°26'S., 147°06'E.), the NW part of Port

Moresby harbor, is a landlocked basin with a 0.25-mile wide

entrance between Idumava Point and Raven Rock. Depths of 6

to 10.5m are in the harbor, which is a safe anchorage in all

weather; its use is not recommended, however, because of the

unhealthy locality. There are several reefs in the harbor and

mud banks, extending a considerable distance from the shore

restricted the anchorage area. Motukea, a small islet, 54m high

and covered with scrub, is in the N part of Fairfax Harbor.

6.37 The landing place and alignment of a submerged pipeline

laid across the entrance to Port Moresby harbor is marked by

tripod beacons about 0.3 mile N of Bogirohodobi Point.

6.37 Bootless Inlet (9°31'S., 147°16'E.) is about 4 miles wide

between Pyramid Point and Tupuseleia Head. Both sides of the

inlet are encumbered by reefs, but a narrow deep water channel

leads to the head of the inlet between Manunouha Island, 23m

high, and Loloata Islet and Motupore Islet, 41 and 61m high,

respectively. Manunouha Island is locally known as Lion Island because of its resemblance to a crouching lion. Reefs lying S and W of Manunouha Island are marked by beacons.

There are depths of 37m in the entrance to Bootless Inlet decreasing to 18.6m at the entrance to Bogoro Inlet, on the E side

of the inlet about 0.5 mile N of Motupore Islet. The shores of

Bootless Inlet are fringed with mangrove and backed by hills,

except at the head, which is low-lying and foul.

6.38 Tupuseleia Head (9°34'S., 147°18'E.) is a long point

surrounded by a reef. Tupuseleia Village is about 0.5 mile N of

the head.

6.38 Bogoro Inlet, about 0.25 mile wide between the reefs on

either side of the entrance has depths of about 9.1 to 18.3m in

its central part. The reef on its W entrance point is marked by a

beacon. The ruins of a jetty and an abandoned copper mine are

on the E side of the inlet.

6.38 Directions.—A vessel with local knowledge can approach

Bootless Inlet through Padana Nahua Passage which has been

described above in paragraph 6.37. When abeam of Nateara

Reef, steer NNW to bring Manunouha Islet in range about 355°

with Idumava Hill, the 113m summit on the W side of Bogoro

Inlet. Maintain this range until North Patch is abeam, then steer

NE to the entrance of the inlet. Anchorage is available, in 21.9

to 26m, mud, in mid-channel abreast Motupore Islet.

6.38 The Astrolabe Range has a remarkable square flat-topped

mountain about 7 miles ENE of Tupuseleia Head. This flat top

extends about 15 miles in a NW-SE direction and terminates

abruptly at each end, but from the SE shoulder a sharp ridge of

barren looking hills with scrub and some trees gradually

descends to Round Hill.

6.38 Near the edge of the mountain are precipitous cliffs, but on

the SW side below these cliffs it slopes gently toward the sea

with numerous valleys with rich vegetation. There are many

villages with patches of cultivation high on this side of the

mountain.

Tupuseleia Head to Hood Point

6.39 From Tupuseleia Head, a low coast with hilly points

and several off-lying rocky islets, the coast trends SE 9 miles to

the village and mission station of Gaile (9°40'S., 147°24'E.),

on a sloping point of the mainland. From here the shore

assumes a bolder and more regular aspect extending another 14

miles farther to Round Point. From Gaile village to Round

Point extends a low coastal range, the SE and greater portion of

which consists of sterile-looking sandy hills covered with

shrub and stunted bushes.

6.39 Round Point (9°52'S., 147°30'E.) a flat heavily-wooded

point, is not distinguishable from a position outside the reef

when seen against the high dark background. Round Hill,

202m high, 2.75 miles ESE of the point, is very conspicuous

from NW and looks like an island when seen from the vicinity

of Port Moresby. Because of incomplete surveys in the area,

vessels should proceed with caution while navigating in the

area of Round Point. Round Hill is reported to give a good

radar return at a distance of 23 miles.

6.39 The edge of a reef SW of Round Hill is marked by a beacon.

6.39 South of Padana Nahua Passage, the barrier reef follows the

general trend of the coast at an average distance of 2.5 miles
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 139

Pub. 164

offshore to Round Point; S of Round Point the distance increases to nearly 7 miles offshore.

6.39 Immediately S of Padana Nahua Passage, there are several

openings in the reef that should not be entered without local

knowledge. In the vicinity of Round Hill there are two

openings, the S of which is named Round Hill Entrance.

6.39 The main part of the reef up to a few miles of Round Point is

awash and plainly marked by breakers. To the S the continuation of the reef is submerged but is easily discernible by the

pale green color of the water over it.

6.39 Inshore channel.—The channel between the barrier reef

and the mainland between Port Moresby has been found to be

clear of dangers, except for a few coral shoals which are easily

seen. In the vicinity of Round Point reefs are more numerous.

This channel is considered navigable only by small light-draft

vessels. It is stated that after passing S of South Patch the

course inside the reef is 141°, with the SW side of the summit

of a peak in range with Manunouha Islet bearing 321° as a

stern mark.

6.40 Round Hill Entrance (9°59'S., 147°29'E.) is nearly 1

mile wide and is entered on a course of about 028°, steering on

Round Hill. Because the barrier reef that forms the NW side of

the entrance is always covered, the sea does not break on it in

fine weather, but the reef on the SE side of the entrance is

nearly awash and breakers on it distinctly point out the

channel.

6.40 Anchorage.—There is good anchorage, sheltered against all

winds, in 28m, 0.5 mile inside the reef on the SW side of

Round Hill Entrance.

6.40 Directions.—A summit about 6 miles E by S of Round Point

bearing 046° leads in through Round Hill Entrance, in a least

depth of 11.6m.

6.40 A 4.9m shoal is about 0.5 mile W of the above 046° track,

about 2.5 miles inside the entrance.

6.41 Beagle Entrance (10°02'S., 147°35'E.), 6.5 miles SE

of Round Hill Entrance, leads to Beagle Bay. There is enough

depth over the reefs for a draft of 5.8m.

6.41 Beagle Bay, close E of Beagle Entrance, affords fine anchorage. There is a village on the E shore of the bay.

6.41 Wolverine Entrance (10°05'S., 147°40'E.) is close W of

Hood Point. The N side of the entrance is marked by a beacon

with a radar reflector; a small detached reef lying near the S

side of the entrance is also a marked beacon. A stranded wreck

lies on the S edge of a drying reef located on the W side of

Wolverine Entrance.

6.41 Paira Point (10°00'S., 147°38'E.), a red cliff 8.5 miles NNW

of Hood Point, juts out and has a bay on either side of it. A

range of barren hills extends SE from Round Head. Between

these hills and the coast the land is low and wooded.

6.41 Hood Point (10°07'S., 147°43'E.), marked by a light, is a

tongue of low wooded land 5 miles long. The mission station

village of Hula is near its extremity. There are extensive groves

of coconut palms in the area of the point. The point is encircled

by a reef extending about 1.5 miles seaward, but there is a boat

passage, marked by beacons, leading from Wolverine Entrance

to an anchorage off Hula; this passage should only be used by

shallow-draft vessels with local knowledge. The anchorage off

Hula should not be used if there is any possibility of bad

weather, particularly after dark.

6.41 Hood Point is reported to be a good radar target at a distance

of 25 miles.

6.41 Currents have been noted setting SSE at a rate of 20 miles a

day in the vicinity of Hood Point.

Hood Point to Cape Rodney

6.42 Hood Bay (10°04'S., 147°48'E.), immediately E of

Hood Point, has low wooded shores. The Kemp Welch River

discharges into the bay. Kalo Village stands at the head of the

bay.

6.42 Hood Lagoon (10°05'S., 147°53'E.), E of Hood Bay, is almost closed by the broad point of a reef extending from its E

point. Only vessels with local knowledge should attempt the

narrow channel into the lagoon. Discolored water from the

lagoon makes it difficult to identify the reef even from aloft.

6.42 The Macgillivray Range extends for a distance of 18 miles

back of the hills behind Paira Point. The range is moderately

high, scantily-wooded, and sandy at the W end. The land between it and the shore is flat and thickly wooded.

6.42 From the entrance to Hood Lagoon the flat wooded coast

trends E and SE for about 9 miles to Parama Point (10°10'S.,

148°00'E.). Mangrove swamps, extending several miles inland,

begin about 3 miles E of Hood Lagoon and continue to Keppel

Point (10°10'S., 147°58'E.).

6.42 The barrier reef in this vicinity is broken and touches the

coast in many places.

6.42 Aroma Passage, an opening for small craft only is marked by

beacons. It was reported the reefs in the area of the passage

were incorrectly charted.

6.42 Keakoro Bay is E of Keppel Point. Reefs extend S and SE of

the point.

6.43 Cape Rodney (10°12'S., 148°24'E.), a low wooded

point, is not easily recognized. It lies about 25.5 miles E of

Keppel Point; the intervening coast is low and slightly

indented. Eaula Village, with a coconut plantation, is on the

coast about 3 miles NW of the cape. 

6.43 A shoal extends nearly 0.75 mile off Cape Rodney, and

detached coral patches are between it and the barrier reef. A

barrier reef between Keppel Point and Cape Rodney has

several openings through which vessels may enter the inner

waters with local knowledge. The reef fronts the coast to a

distance of 9.5 miles. The waters within the barrier reef are

foul and uncharted dangers may exist. The outer edge of the

barrier reef is steep-to and easily seen, but the shoal ground to

the N is visible only in conditions of good light. McFarlane

Harbor and Cheshunt Bay indent the shores of the bay.

6.43 Anchorage.—Ships with local knowledge can find anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon by entering Toveli Entrance, W of Coutance Islet, with 78m high Toveli Hill bearing

010° and anchoring on that bearing about 1.5 miles offshore, in

depths of 14.6 to 28m. Better protection will be found, in 26m,

about 2.5 miles E by S of the above anchorage. Small craft can

proceed to McFarlane Harbor from these anchorages with local

knowledge. Caution should be taken to avoid the shoals, with

least depths of 2.4m, N and NW of Coutance Islet.
140 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

6.43 A long spit extends from the W side of the entrance to

McFarlane Harbor, with several shoal patches encumbering the

entrance. The channel at the entrance is reported to be about

137m wide, marked by beacons on both sides, with depths

between of 5.5 to 9.1m.

6.44 From McFarlane Harbor, there is a passage leading to

Marshall Lagoon (10°03'S., 148°12'E.) marked by two sets of

range beacons as far up to N of Kupiano (10°04.5'S.,

148°10.5'E.). The passage leads between a large sandbank and

some mud flats, with a least depth of 3.4m in the fairway.

Marshall Lagoon is about 1.5 miles wide and shallow in the

middle, narrows towards its head, where the Imila River discharges.

6.44 At Kupiano, there are two wharfs. South Wharf (Government Wharf) is for small craft only.

6.44 North Wharf (Timber Wharf) is also for small craft only. It is

31.4m long, with a depth of 4.9m alongside, with a metal face

with no fenders; it was reported to be in poor condition. Vessels up to 1,000 tons are known to have entered the harbor.

6.44 The coast for the first 7 miles E of McFarlane Harbor is high

and steep, but from there to Point Rodney, about 7 miles farther

E, the coast is low and wooded.

6.44 Cheshunt Bay (10°10'S., 148°18'E.) is about 8 miles ESE of

McFarlane Harbor. A bank which uncovers at HW extends

some distance from the shore at the head of the bay. Some

channels to the bay have been surveyed, marked with beacons,

and swept to a depth of 10.6m. The maximum recommended

draft, with local knowledge, however, is 9.1m. Anchorages

have been swept to 8.8m.

6.44 Some moderately-high wooded hills at the head of Cheshunt

Bay 5 to 8 miles NW of Cape Rodney are visible for a distance

of 25 miles off.

6.44 Caution.—It was reported that the reefs in Cheshunt Bay are

incorrectly charted and that entrance into the bay should not be

attempted without local knowledge.

6.45 Sunday Entrance (10°15'S., 148°09'E.) has a navigable channel about 0.4 mile with a least depth of 14.6m.

There are several reefs within the entrance.

6.45 Anchorage.—Anchorage is available inside Sunday Entrance, in 28m, about 3.5 miles N of Coutance Islet with local

knowledge; it affords reasonable shelter during the Southeast

Monsoon.

6.45 Paluma Entrance (10°17'S., 148°14'E.), about 6 miles ESE

of Sunday Entrance, is about 0.75 mile wide. The entrance

channel is deep, and an 11m swept channel, for use with local

knowledge, leads to anchorage in Cheshunt Bay. The E side of

the entrance is marked by a beacon with a radar reflector. The

entrance and the swept lane leading NNE to the vicinity of

Whitish Reef are not recommended for ships drawing over 9m.

6.45 Rodney Entrance (10°16'S., 148°26'E.), about 5 miles SSE

of Cape Rodney and marked on its E side by a beacon, is about

1 mile wide, with a least depth of 18.3m. A swept channel, for

use with local knowledge, leads about 2 miles NNE and then

about 3.75 miles WNW to a well-sheltered anchorage, in

20.1m, about 1 mile SW of Cape Rodney.

6.45 It is said that the breakers on the reef are a sufficient guide

for vessels entering and the only precaution in picking a berth

is to anchor clear of the numerous coral patches inside.

Cape Rodney to Baxter Bay

6.46 Sandbank Bay (10°11'S., 148°33'E.) is about 10

miles E of Cape Rodney. The E side of the bay is low and

formed of sand banks extending from a mangrove swamp.

Depths of 6.4 to 9.1m are in the approaches to the bay.

6.46 Caution.—The bay has not been closely examined.

6.47 A forest of large trees lines the shore around the head

of the bay. The Domara River empties into the W side of the

bay. Domara Village is on the W side of the river entrance.

6.47 Anchorage can be taken, in 6.4m, in the approaches to Sandbank Bay by small vessels with local knowledge, but a sharp

lookout must be kept for uncharted shoals.

6.47 From Cape Rodney, the low wooded coast continues E to

Mariamata Point, where it then curves in a NE and then a SE

direction to Dedele Point, forming Cloudy Bay. Low hills are

in back of this stretch of coast and the water off it is apparently

shallow.

6.47 Dedele Point (10°14'S., 148°44'E.), a low narrow sandy

point of land fringed with coconut palms, is on the E side of

Cloudy Bay. The point is difficult to distinguish, but Table Top

Hill (10°14'S., 148°54'E.), a flat-topped elevation 9 miles E, is

a good landmark for the locality.

6.47 Cloudy Bay (10°12'S., 148°41'E.), between Mariamata

Point and Dedele Point, is apparently quite shallow and is

being silted up by the several rivers that empty into it,

including the Robinson River. The coast around the bay is low

and fringed by mangroves, but near Dedele Point it is

somewhat higher and has a sandy beach. Abavi Island, a low

swampy island, with 60m Orchard Inlet at its E end, is close SE

of the entrance to Orchard Inlet. Abau Island, close W of Abavi

Island, is covered with coconut palms; a jetty with 3.0m

alongside is on the E side of the island. During the Southeast

Monsoon, clouds hang low over Cloudy Bay and envelop the

surrounding mountains and foothills.

6.48 Rothery Passage (10°21'S., 148°41'E.), leading

through the barrier reef between East Reef and West Reef, is

about 0.5 mile wide and has depths of 28 to 92m. For a distance of 3 miles N of the passage, the channel leading to

Dedele Anchorage appears to be clear, but uncharted dangers

may exist. Above that point the area is encumbered by reefs

and shoals. Rothery Passage is marked at its W end by a light

on the E end of West Reef. The channel to the anchorage is

partially marked by beacons.

6.48 Anchorage.—Dedele Anchorage is available for ships with

local knowledge that are less than 122m long, with a maximum

draft of 6.1m. There is anchorage on either side of Dedele

Point. Anchorage can be taken, in 10.9m, W of Dedele Point,

with Burumai Point, about 3 miles E, bearing 104°, and Fan

Reef Beacon (10°14.7'S., 148°44.0'E.) bearing 208°.

6.48 Anchorage may be obtained on the E side of Dedele Point in

Henderson Bay, in a depth of about 9.1m, with Clay Reef Beacon (10°14'S., 148°44'E.) bearing 269° about 0.85 mile distant.

This anchorage is recommended during the Northwest Monsoon and it will accommodate larger vessels than the W

anchorage.

6.48 Directions.—Approach Rothery Passage on a course of

068°; when West Reef Beacon bears 000°, steer about 042°
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 141

Pub. 164

through the middle of the passage, taking caution to avoid the

sunken reefs extending SW from East Reef. When clear of

these dangers, steer 000° to pass 0.15 mile W of Chapman

Reefs Beacon (10°18'S., 148°42'E.), then steer 004°, until

abeam of Rot Reef Beacon (10°16'S., 148°42'E.), then alter

course to 035° to pass about 183m NW of Nell Rock (10°14'S.,

148°43'E.), then steer 079° to pass 137m N of Clay Reef

Beacon (10°14'S., 148°44'E,.) and follow this course until

Burumai Point bears 104°, then steer on that bearing to the

anchorage.

6.48 Vessels bound for the E anchorage follow the above directions until N of Nell Rock, when they steer to pass 183m S of

Fan Reef SW Beacon (10°15'S., 148°44'E.), then steer 106°

until about 0.25 mile from Varoe Reef Beacon (10°15'S.,

148°45'E.) bearing 078°, then steer 045° to pass about 0.25

mile around Kerwin Reef (10°14'S., 148°45'E.) until Fan Reef

SW Beacon bears 250°, then change course to anchorage.

6.48 Caution.—Entrance through Rothery Passage and the area

inside the reef should not be attempted without local knowledge. Passage is advised only during daylight hours.

Baxter Bay to South Cape

6.49 Between Dedele Point and Batumata Point, about

13.5 miles ESE, the low, wooded shore forms two indentations,

the eastern and larger of which is Baxter Bay (10°16'S.,

148°51'E.); the western, Henderson Bay, has a sandy beach

lined with coconut trees. Off Burumai Point, which separates

the bays, are several shoals. A passage has been reported

around the point through the shoals. It is only 137m wide, but

is deep. A beacon stands 0.8 mile W of Burumai Point and a

second beacon stands 0.2 mile S of the point.

Batumata Point (Table Point) (10°17'S., 148°58'E.) is low

but well defined. About 2 miles NNW of the point stands

Magaubo village, at the mouth of the Bedile River.. Anchorage

may be taken off the village. It has been reported there is good

shelter during the Southeast Monsoon.

6.49 The barrier reef from Rodney Entrance trends E for 12 miles

to Grange Islet, with three openings between. Rothery Passage,

the westernmost, is marked by a light on its W side. Mindora

Passage, between East Reef and Grange Islet, has not been

examined; it is marked by heavy tide rips. The E opening,

between Grange Reef and Grange Islet, is fou, with a reported

2.8m depth. There is another passage E of Grange Islet which

appears to be the best approach to anchorage in Baxter Bay.

6.49 Grange Islet (10°19'S., 148°53'E.), is low and wooded. It

lies on an isolated part of the barrier reef 5 miles SW of

Batumata Point. A reef extends E and SE about 1.75 miles

from the islet.

The Owen Stanley Range trends SE from Mount Victoria for

a distance of 95 miles and then turns abruptly to the NE for

about 20 miles to Mount Suckling. The nearest approach of the

range to the S coast is about 7 miles N of Cloudy Bay.

6.49 There is great uniformity in the profile of this mountain

range between Mount Victoria and the elbow N of Cloudy Bay.

6.49 Mount Clarence (9°53'S., 148°37'E.), about 20 miles NE of

Cape Rodney, rises to a height of 1,930m. Its top is perfectly

flat on its W side and is the nearest high mountain to the coast.

6.50 From its nearest approach to the sea N of Cloudy Bay,

the Owen Stanley Range takes a sudden turn NE for 20 miles

to Mount Suckling, the summit of which is 3,422m high and

flat topped on its E side. It is the second highest peak in the

range.

6.50 From Mount Suckling, the range trends ESE for about 60

miles to Mount Thompson, which is 1,797m high and lies

about 20 miles N of Bona Bona Island (10°30'S., 149°50'E.).

6.50 The only intermediate summits worthy of notice are Mount

Dayman, 2,987m high, and Mount Simpson, 2,882m high. The

top of Mount Simpson is round at each end, with a peak in the

center.

6.50 Most of the peaks are visible up to 90 miles in clear weather,

but within 20 or 30 miles of the coast their shape becomes

difficult to distinguish. They are visible for the longest periods

during the Northwest Monsoon; during the Southeast Monsoon, they are generally capped with clouds. No timber exists

within 305m of the summit of the range.

6.50 Table Bay (10°17'S., 149°05'E.) lies between Batumata

Point and the mouth of the Bailebu River. The shores of the bay

are backed by the Table Top and Inskip ranges, from 2 to 3

miles inland, the space between being a tract of thick wooded

level land.

6.50 From the opening about 2 miles E of Grange Islet, the barrier

reef extends E across the breadth of Table Bay, with patches N

and S of it. One of these, Kidd Reef, almost bare, lies about 2

miles SE of Batumata Point. Onibu Point lies about 12.5 miles

E of Batumata point.

6.50 Caution.—A wreck is situated about 6.5 miles S of Onibu

Point in position 10°22.4'S, 149°10.7'E. There may be other

dangers in addition to those charted.

6.50 The depths in the entrance E of Grange Islet are not known,

but are probably deep; the channel E of the barrier reef fronting

Table Bay has a depth of 12.8m in the fairway. Caution should

be taken in this area as it has only been scantily surveyed.

There is shelter under the E side of the barrier reef. The village

of Daroa lies at the head of Table Bay.

6.51 Kwaipomata Point (10°19'S., 149°19'E.) lies 3 miles

E of the mouth of the Bailebu River. The point is bold and

forms the W extremity of Selae Doudou Bay (Amazon Bay),

which is shoal and fringed with reefs.

Lannokea Doudou (Mayri Bay) (10°20'S., 149°26'E.),

about 1.5 wide at its entrance, affords sheltered anchorage

during SE winds, in depths of 11 to 18.3m, mud. A spit extends

0.5 mile off the S entrance and the shores are fringed with coral

reefs. The head of the bay is shoal and the shore is sandy.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

6.52 Lopom Island (10°20'S., 149°19'E.), lying about 0.75

mile S of Kwaipomata Point, is low, wooded, and surrounded

by a coral reef. Laluoro Island, lying 1.5 miles SE of Lopom

Island, is small, low, and encircled by a reef. Sheltered anchorage will be found during SE winds NW of Laluoro Island.

6.52 Mailu Island (10°24'S., 149°21'E.) is nearly 3 miles in

circumference and almost completely encircled by a reef. This

island has been reported to lie 0.5 mile NNW of its charted

position. The island is low but rises to a height of 123m at its

center. It is covered with grass and coconut trees. A village is
142 Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 

Pub. 164

situated on the N side of the island. The small island of

Bonarua lies 1 mile S of Mailu Island. Anchorage can be taken

in a bight in the reef off the N side of Mailu Island, but is

considered poor. A reef which breaks heavily lies 4 miles SW

of Mailu Island. There are apparently some shoals between this

reef and the island. These shoals necessitate the use of caution

when approaching Mailu Island.

6.52 Eunora Islet (10°25'S., 149°28'E.) lies 5.5 miles E of Mailu

Island, is small and rocky with few trees. Two high rocks lie

near the islet, one close to its S side and the other, 0.75 mile to

the W. The reef on which the islet stands extends 2 miles to the

E, with numerous shoal water patches farther E. There are

several shoals midway between Eunora Islet and Mailu Island.

6.52 Imuta Islet (10°24'S., 149°35'E.), low and wooded, is

located 3 miles SE of Port Glasgow; it sits on the NW end of a

2 mile reef. A 5.6m patch lies 3 miles SW of the islet. A rock

lies 2 miles ENE of Imuta Islet.

6.53 Sabiribo Doudou (Millport Harbor) (10°21'S.,

149°28'E.), an excellent harbor, lies 3 miles SE of Mayri Bay,

and is oval in shape. The diameter of the harbor runs E and W

for a distance of 2 miles. Clumps of coconut trees and

mangrove, with white sandy beaches between, surround the

shores of the harbor. A coral reef fringes its shores.

6.53 Off the E entrance point are two wooded islets and a rock;

near the W entrance is an islet. In the E part of the harbor a

rocky patch extends about 0.2 mile from the shore.

6.53 The entrance is about 0.5 mile wide and has a depth of

16.6m, gradually shoaling to 7.4m, the general depth over the

harbor in mud. Good anchorage is obtainable in the harbor

with help of local knowledge. Several small villages are situated on the shore around the harbor.

Geagea Doudou (Port Glasgow) (10°22'S., 149°31'E.), a

landlocked inlet with high land all around, is 2 miles long in an

E and W direction and 0.75 mile wide, it has a depth of 7.4 to

12.8m. The entrance is opened to the SE and has a depth of

14.6m.

6.53 It is the best small harbor on the coast, and is reported to be a

good anchorage at all times. There is room for up to four large

vessels in 14.6m of water. Two small villages are situated on

the shore of the bay.

6.54 Orangerie Bay (10°22'S., 149°44'E.), between Port

Glasgow and Debana Point, is about 22 miles in length and is

encumbered with an extensive reef with probably some

offshore dangers. The low, wooded shore forms a continuous

curve from one end of the bay to the other. For the first 6 miles

E of Port Glasgow the steep coast range rises from the shore,

but E of these hills, a flat and wooded country extends a considerable distance inland. The greater part of this bay has not

been examined.

6.54 Baibara Island (10°22'S., 149°36'E.) lies in the W end of

Orangerie Bay, 5 miles E of Port Glasgow. There is a channel

for small craft between the island and the mainland. The island

is uninhabited, but there are small villages abreast of it on the

mainland. The island is surrounded by a reef, the NE end of

which is marked by a beacon.

6.54 Gadaisu Village (10°22'S., 149°47'E.) lies about 11 miles E

of Baibara Island. A reef extends 1 mile S from the shore of the

village and is marked by a beacon on its SW side.

Debana Point (10°30'S., 149°55'E.) is 11 miles SE of

Gadaisu village. The point marks the W entrance to Mullins

Harbor.

6.54 Mullins Harbor (10°29'S., 149°59'E.), located just E of

Debana Point, is 10 miles long and about 5 miles wide. There

are depths of 3.7 to 12.9m in the entrance and 3.7 to 5.6m

within the harbor. A charted mud bank lies in the middle of the

harbor. Vessels with local knowledge can anchor in the harbor.

6.55 Bona Bona Island (10°30'S., 149°51'E.), lying about

4 miles W of the entrance to Mullins Harbor, is hilly and nearly

3 miles in length and width. The island is thickly wooded, and

in most parts rises abruptly from the sea to its summit, which is

402m high. A number of villages are situated about the island.

6.55 There are several detached rocks near the NW side of the

island. The largest is 49m high and lies 0.75 mile W of the

islands NW point. A rock, with less than 1.8m of water, lies 1

mile E of the NE extremity of Bona Bona Island.

6.55 The SW part of the island is connected with Delami Island,

which is 126m high. The islands are connected by a reef which

dries nearly its whole extent.

6.55 There are a number of shoals off the W and NW coast of

Bona Bona Island. It has been reported that the sea breaks

heavily over these shoals.

6.55 Anchorage.—A readily accessible anchorage, sheltered

against the Southeast Monsoon, will be found W of the reef

connecting Bona Bona Island and Delami Island, in a depth of

21.9m, mud. This anchorage is somewhat restricted by the

fringing reef that extends 0.5 mile from Bona Bona Island.

6.55 The best anchorage is 0.5 mile NE of the high rock off the

NW point of Bona Bona Island. It can be easily reached by

passing close along the N side of that rock.

6.56 San Roque Passage (10°31'S., 149°50'E.) is located

between the SE coast of Bona Bona Island and the mainland. It

is part of the entrance into Mullins Harbor. The passage is 0.75

mile wide and has depths of 12.8 to 18.3m. Toua Island lies on

the S side of the passage fairway, about 1 mile N of Eagle

Point. There is anchorage in San Roque Passage, in depths of

14.6 to 18.3m.

6.56 Hazard Rock (10°29.7'S., 149°52.5'E.), 0.5m high, lies in

the middle of San Roque Passage.

6.56 Eagle Point (10°33'S., 149°51'E.) is the W extremity of the

promontory of the mainland S of Debana Point. Eagle Point is

easy to pick up as a target. About 0.5 mile W of the point is

Eagle Rock, which from seaward has the appearance of a

vessel under sail. Just N of the point is Argyle Bay.

6.56 Argyle Bay (10°32'S., 149°52'E.) affords good anchorage

with a muddy bottom, sheltered against the Southwest Monsoon. Because of the rocks NE of Toua Island, vessels approacing the anchorage in the bay should pass S of the island.

6.56 A vessel of 1,100 grt reported anchoring, in a depth of

12.8m, with Eagle Point bearing 237° and the N entrance point

bearing 303°.

6.56 The barrier reef from SW of Eagle Point to S of South Cape,

a distance of about 25 miles, has depths of 7.4 to 11m. Caution

is necessary when approaching the barrier reef because of

irregular depths. The area between the reef and the shore has

been sketchily surveyed and breakers have been reported at

times.
Sector 6. South Coast of Papua New Guinea—The Bensbach River to South Cape 143

Pub. 164

6.56 The coast line in this same vicinity is irregular and broken by

lengthy bays and inlets. The country consists of wooded

valleys and hills. A steep, lofty coast range trends E to Mount

Gugusari, 1,351m high, 10 miles N of South Cape. When seen

from the S the mount has a well-rounded peak, but is not remarkable in shape from other directions.

6.56 Tides—Current.—During the Northwest Monsoon, a SE

current sets up along the SE side of this part of Papau New

Guinea; during the Southeast Monsoon, there are NW currents

at a rate of 0.25 to 1.5 knots, varying with the strength and

duration of the wind.

6.57 Ava Point (10°34'S., 149°53'E.) is 2 miles SE of

Eagle Point. A light is shown from a white concrete tower

situated on the summit of a 183m hill above Ava Point.

6.57 Kau Kau Bay (10°33'S., 149°55'E.) lies about 2 miles E of

Ava Point and has good anchorage, in 18.3m, mud.

6.57 Gabusuaiaru Bay (10°35'S., 149°56'E.) lies E of Ekutoro

Point about 2.75 miles E of Ava Point. Paupauri Island lies on

the W side of the entrance to the bay. A village stands at the

head of the bay.

6.57 Gabusunarea Bay (10°35'S., 149°57'E.), the next inlet to

the E, is 3 miles in length and has depths of 7.4 to 18.3m. A

sunken reef lies in the fairway of the entrance to the bay. A

bank, in a depth of 3.6m, lies in the S approach to the bay,

about 1.5 miles SSW of its W entrance point. Several small

villages lie on the shores of the bay.

6.57 Gabugoghi Bay (10°36'S., 149°58'E.), the next bay to the E,

is small but contains good anchorage, with shelter from all

winds. A prominent rock lies E of the entrance, it is a good

guide for entering the bay. There are a few small villages about

the shores of the bay.

6.58 Fife Bay (10°38'S., 150°00'E.), located E of Gabugoghi

Bay, is about 2.5 miles in length and 1.25 miles in width. It is

divided into two passages, the E about 0.2 mile wide and the W

about 0.25 mile wide, by Opea Islet and Seuseu Islet, which are

joined by a reef. Several other islets lie off the SE side of the

entrance. Geduna Islet stands on a reef at the head of the bay. A

reef lies on the E shore of the bay. A number of reefs and shoals lie

in the bay and can best be seen on the chart of the bay.

6.58 About a dozen or so villages are situated on the shores of the

bay. A number of buildings and a flagstaff are situated on the E

side of the bay. Two small jetties extend from the S side of

Isuleilei Point.

6.58 Anchorage in Fife Bay is considered poor. There is always a

swell during both monsoons and SW winds raise a sea in the

bay. Vessels can find good anchorage off Geduna Islet. There is

a depth of 16.5m, mud, about 0.5 mile off the NW point of

Geduna Islet, bearing 336°.

6.58 Lawes Bay (10°38'S., 150°03'E.) lies between Loua Point

and Bouta Point. The bay has numerous reefs and shoals best

seen on the chart.

6.59 Baxter Harbor (10°40'S., 150°09'E.) is a deep inlet 4

miles wide at its entrance between Tree Point and Guna Isu,

which is a bold, steep headland that rises to 536m high and is

conspicuous when seen from the W. The N shore of the bay is

low and wooded, rising to a small coast range of cultivated

nature. A shoal spit projects nearly 1 mile offshore about 2.75

miles NE of Tree Point.

6.59 Anchorage has been taken, in 31m, mud, just inside the entrance. This anchorage maintains calm water during the Southeast Monsoon.

6.59 South Cape (10°44'S., 150°14'E.) lies about 2.75 miles ESE

of Guna Isu. The point is the S extremity of Suau Island, which

is described in paragraph 7.2.
145

Pub. 164

7. 

Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape

7.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 7 — CHART INFORMATION
147

Pub. 164

SECTOR 7 

EASTERN PAPUA NEW GUINEA—SOUTH CAPE TO EAST CAPE

7.0 Plan.—This sector describes the SE extremity of Papua New

Guinea from South Cape SE to Deirina Islet then NE through

West Channel and China Strait to Isulailai Point. Milne Bay

lies N and NW of Isulailai Point and is discussed in order, then

the coast trends NE to East Cape.

7.0 The islands and channels that are adjacent to the coast are

described in order of occurrence in the W to E direction.

Guna Isu to Isulailai Point

7.1 The coast trends in a general ENE direction from

Guna Isu for a distance of about 31 miles to Isulailai Point. It

preserves the same broken character as the land to the W, but

the mountain range E of the cape, closely following the bends

of the coast, rises to heights of from 305 to 610m and slopes

steeply toward the sea.

7.1 Caution.—The reef passes South Cape at a distance of 4

miles. The reef with a least depth in this area of 9.7m, SSE of

South Cape extends in a ESE direction toward the Louisiade

Archipelago. Thea description of the Louisiade Archipelago

begins in paragraph 8.1.

7.1 Breakers have been observed about 5 miles SSW of South

Cape in the vicinity of the Barrier Reef.

7.1 The Sunken Barrier Reef has not been surveyed up to date

and in some sections uncharted dangers may exist.

7.2 Suau Island (10°43'S., 150°15'E.) rises to a height of

239m, about 2.75 miles E of Guna Isu. The island is fronted by

a reef which extends up to 183m in places on its N side. A bay

lies NE of South Cape, the S extremity of the island, that has

isolated patches of 1.8 to 5.5m. The island is separated from

the mainland by a channel 0.13 mile wide at its narrowest part,

with a least depth of 9.1m in the fairway. Vessels should not

use the pass without local knowledge.

7.2 Vehi, a small islet 42m high, lies close SSW of South Cape

and Baibesiga, 182m high, lies 2.5 miles E of the same point.

The SE side of Baibesiga is steep-to, but a shoal extends 0.2

mile from the SW extremity of the island and breaks with any

swell. Baibesiga is remarkable for having a rounded peak at

either end.

7.2 Modewa Bay (10°41'S., 150°20'E.) is entered 3 miles ENE

of Suau Island. The depth in the entrance of the bay is 20.1m,

but then the depth gradually decreases toward the head of the

bay. Coral reefs, which partly dry, extend from each entrance

point of the bay and narrow the entrance to about 1 mile. These

reefs are steep-to on the seaward sides with off-lying patches in

places.

7.2 There are several small villages on the E shore of the bay;

behind the villages the land rises steeply to several peaks, with

the highest one having a height of 442m.

7.2 The Gara River discharges into the NW side of the bay and is

joined a few meters above its mouth by the Modewa River. The

delta of the river is cleared and several villages are situated in

the locality.

7.2 The reef which extends 1.5 miles SE from the W entrance

point of Modewa Bay dries 0.3m. There is an extensive reef off

the E entrance point of the bay which also dries 0.3m; a sand

cay 3m high stands on the N side of this reef.

7.2 There is sheltered anchorage in Modewa Bay with the sand

cay, mentioned above, in range with the summit of Badilabedda-bedda-bonarua bearing 155°, in a depth of 14.6m, mud.

7.3 Off-lying islands and dangers.—The Brumer Islands are a group of five small basaltic islands lying about 7.5

miles E of South Cape and about 4 miles offshore. Between the

reefs off the mainland and the islands, there is a channel 2

miles wide that has depths of from 26 to 48m. The shoals and

reefs on the N side of the channel should be approached with

caution, as they do not always break.

7.3 Badila-bedda-bedda-bonarua (10°46'S., 150°23'E.), the

farthest W of the island group, has a remarkable castellated

peak, 120m high, in its W extremity. A light, shown from a

concrete tower 7m high, stands on the highest point of the island.

7.3 Harikoia, the second largest island in the group, lies 0.75

mile ESE of Badila-bedda-bedda-bonarua; this island is 165m

high. The other islets of this group lies close SE of Harikoia.

7.3 Rae Patches are coral reefs that lie off the S side of the

Brumer Islands group; there are charted depths of 7.3m over

the reefs.

7.3 Brooke Banks (10°46'S., 150°31'E.), coral, with depths of

from 9.1 to 16.4m, lie from 5 to 10 miles E of Harikoia, and are

apparently steep-to.

7.3 There is a deep passage through the barrier reef SW of the

Brumer Islands. The summit of Baibesiga bearing 350° leads

through the channel; at night, the light on the summit of

Badila-bedda-bedda-bonarua bearing 047.5° also leads through

the channel.

7.4 The coast E of Modewa Bay is fronted by reefs to a

peninsula 4.5 miles distant. There are three grassy conical hills

on the peninsula; the highest one rises to 105m. Northeast of

the peninsula are Bira Bira Bay and Guaugurina Bay.

7.4 Mount Brainble, with a double peak 396m high, is located

5.5 miles NNE of the peninsula. The land between these points

falls sufficiently to permit a view of the country behind.

Mount Bossim (10°37'S., 150°33'E.), also on the coastal

range, is a conspicuous peak, 425m high, on the N side of the

approach to China Strait.

7.4 Deirina Island, 85m high, lies on the coastal bank close S of

the above-described peninsula. A smaller island lies on the reef

close S of Deirina. The bright green color of Deirina, in contrast with the dark green of the wooded hills on the mainland,

helps identify the island.

7.4 Bira Bira Bay (10°41'S., 150°26'E.), open E, is entered between Deirina Island and a point 2.75 miles NE. Its shores are

fringed by coral reef to a distance of 0.5 mile. There are several
148 Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 

Pub. 164

small openings in the reef that lead to the mangrove-covered

coast.

7.4 Good anchorage, in a depth of 16.4m, over mud, will be

found in the S part of Bira Bira Bay, N of Deirina Island,

between the island reef and the shore reef.

7.4 To enter Bira Bira Bay, steer for the N summit on the peninsula NW of Deirina Island on a course of 279°. This course

will lead S of a 7.3m shoal 1.5 miles SSE of the bay’s NE

entrance; then bring the SE point of the peninsula in range with

Brumer Islands Light, bearing 215°. Anchor when the N and E

extremities of Deirina Island are in range 136°.

7.4 Tides—Currents.—In Bira Bira Bay, spring tides rise 1.7m

and neaps rise 1.1m. Guaugurina Bay, the bay NE of Bira Bira

Bay, is 5 miles wide, with depths of 22 to 24m near its center.

The shores of the bay are fringed with coral in places.

7.4 A rock, 9.1m hig,h lies 1.25 miles E of the S entrance of the

bay and a similar rock 6.1m high, lies 1.75 miles W of its N

entrance. The depths extending 0.5 mile offshore of the 9.1m

high rock are between 5.5m and 7.3m. Jones Patch, with a least

depth of 5.2m, lies 1.5 miles S of the 6.1m high rock.. The approach to the bay lies between the S entrance point and Jones

Patch.

7.5 Quilty Patch (10°41'S., 150°33'E.), with a least depth

of 4.3m, lies 2.25 miles SE of Jones Patch. A 5.2m patch lies

midway between Jones Patch and the N entrance to Guaugurina Bay; a shoal with a least depth of 7.9m lies 1.75 miles

ESE of the N entrance point.

7.5 The land inside the coast from Guaugurina Bay to Isulailai

Point, 10 miles NE, rises steeply to a considerable elevation

with deep ravines. Both the summits and the sides of these

mountains are covered with thick forests.

7.5 This coast forms the N shore of West Channel and China

Strait.

Islands and Reefs Southeast of China Strait

7.6 The sunken barrier reef S of the islands off the SE end

of Papua New Guinea, continues in an ESE direction beyond

the Stuers Islands and are discussed beginning in paragraph

8.2. The shallowest parts are on a narrow ridge, broken in

places by channels.

7.6 Tides—Currents.—On the submerged barrier reef, the tidal

currents run at a rate of from 1 to 2 knots; their general direction is NE and SW, but at neap tides they are liable to be considerably modified by the wind. In the neighborhood of Wari

Island their direction inclines more to the N and S; over Siriki

Shoals they run strongly causing heavy tide rips.

7.6 The Stuers Islands (11°06'S., 151°08'E.) lie 46 miles SE of

the Brumer Islands on the sunken barrier reef; there are two

islets in the group. Marai is 20m high and Tauwewai, 1 mile

NE, is 12.2m high. A reef, which dries 0.3m, lies 0.5 mile W of

Marai. A large reef, which dries in places, lies 0.5 mile SE of

Marai Island.

7.6 Uluma Reef (11°06'S., 150°59'E.), about 8 miles W of the

Stuers Islands, dries 0.3m. The reef lies about 3 miles seaward

of the barrier. During a month-long survey surf broke continuously on the reef, but it has been reported that in calm weather

the reef is not indicated by surf.

7.6 The stranded wreck situated on the SW side of Uluma Reef

is a good radar target from a distance of 12 miles.

7.6 An unexamined 14.6m shoal is reported to lie about 4 miles

SW of the stranded wreck.

7.6 Blight Patch, of coral, in 11m of water, lies on the barrier

reef 5 miles NW of the Stuers Islands. Heavy swells are

reported on the patch and in the vicinity of a 4.5m shoal close

N. The tidal currents in this area reach rates of 2 and 3 knots.

7.7 Wari Island (10°58'S., 151°04'E.), lying about 10

miles NW of the Stuers Islands, has a narrow range of hills

traversing its entire length that terminates in a well defined

peak at each extremity; the W peak is 117m high. In the center

the hills dip considerably. A large reef lies parallel to the S

coast of the island; the sea always breaks on this island. An

islet lies on the E end of this reef and similarly an islet 15.2m

lies off the NW extremity of the reef. These two islets have

grass-covered summits.

7.7 Ikaikakeino Islet, 81m high, lies 0.75 mile NW of the W extremity of Wari Island; Mamaramamaweino Rock, 133m high,

lies 1.5 miles farther NW. This is a steep mass of grey rock that

is steep-to on all sides, and the summit and NW side have a

scattered growth of trees. A bank with a depth of 16.5m extends for 0.6 mile off the rock’s SW side.

7.7 This gray rock affords an excellent mark from all directions;

its shape and isolated position make it appear larger and loftier

than it actually is and from the dark color of its foliage it

frequently shows when Wari Island can not be distinguished.

7.7 A small steep-to rock, 9.1m high, lies 0.5 mile N of the W

extremity of Wari Island. There is convenient anchorage on a

ridge of sand and coral, in a depth of 14.6m, between this rock

and Wari Island, with the rock bearing 333° and the rock W of

the island bearing 237°, but during N winds it is exposed and

unsafe.

7.7 The tidal current runs with great strength between Ikaikakeino Islet and Wari Island.

7.7 Siga Islet (10°51'S., 151°08'E.), lying 7.25 miles NNE from

the E extremity of Wari Island, is 29m high; it is an excellent

landmark and is easily identified by its shape. A bank, with

depths of from 7.3 to 14.6m, extends 2.5 miles in a NW direction and is generally marked by tide rips. Temporary anchorage

may be obtained on the bank extending 2 miles NW from Siga

Islet. 

7.7 Close NE of Siga Islet, the current sets NNW up to 2 knots.

7.7 The Lebrun Islets, consisting of Rika-rika, 109m high, and

Dogigi, lie 6.5 miles NW of Wari Island.

7.7 Siriki Shoals, occupying the greater portion of the area between Wari Island, the Lebrun Islets, and the Dumoulin Islets,

are composed of narrow ridges of bright colored sand. There

are patches with a least depth of 5.5m on the shoals. Shellard

Ridge, the SE extremity of the shoal, lies 3 miles W of Wari

Island, and has depths of 12.8 to 18.3m. Mariners are advised

to not cross this shoal as other shoal patches may exist.

7.7 Caution.—Over Siriki Shoals, tidal currents run strongly,

causing heavy tide rips.

7.8 The Dumoulin Islets (10°55'S., 150°46'E.) are comprised of a group of four islets and two rocks located 16 miles

WNW of Wari Island. From S, the islets white cliffs show at
Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 149

Pub. 164

times, great distinctness, forming a good landmark for vessels

approaching China Strait from the S.

7.8 Baiiri Islet, 112m high, the largest and westernmost of the

group, is bold except on its NW side. The islets highest point is

a conical peak.

7.8 Ana Karu Karua, the farthest E, lies 3 miles ESE of Baiiri. It

is covered with grass and has a flat top 69m high.

7.8 Caution.—The depths off the S sides of these islets are

irregular and vessels should not pass between them. 

7.9 The Castori Islets is comprised of three islets. Ilei

Islet (10°46'S., 150°41'E.), the southernmost and largest of the

islets, rises to a height of 82m; the islet is fairly steep-to and is

covered with scrub. The farthest N of this group, is a domeshaped islet 47m high, that lies 2 miles N of Ilei Islet. The

other islets and rocks of this group, lie about mid-way between

the two larger islets. A bank, with a depth of 9.1m, extends 1

mile E from this middle group.

7.9 The Arch Islets are two small islets that lie 3 miles NW of

the center of the Castori Islets. The largest of these two islets

rises to a height of 105m. The islets, which lie close together,

are wooded and are surrounded by a reef, which extends to a

distance of 183m.

7.9 A shoal, with a depth of 11m, is charted 1.5 miles SSW of

the Arch Islets.

7.9 Sapikunuri (10°42'S., 150°36'E.) is a rocky islet 7.6m high

lying on the SE side of West Channel, about 2 miles NW of the

Arch Islets. Shallow water extends all around the islet and a

9.1m patch lies about 1 mile NE of it.

7.9 Nasariri (10°44'S., 150°45'E.), on the S side of East Channel, is a rocky, wooded, beehive-shaped islet 70m high. Nasariri lies on a shoal, with a depth of 11m near its SW extremity,

about 9.5 miles ESE of Sapikunuri.

7.10 Doini Island (10°42'S., 150°43'E.) lies about 2 miles

NW of Nasariri Islet; it is about 2 miles in length and about 1

mile in breadth. The island rises to a height of 155m in its NE

part. Except on the SW side, the island is fringed with a reef.

A ridge with shallow water extends 0.5 mile off the S

extremity of the island. A rocky islet, with a few trees on it, is

located near the outer end of this ridge. Tuyam, a grassy islet

49m high, lies on the outer extremity of a reef, 0.55 mile E of

the eastern point of Doini.

7.10 Sheltered anchorage may be obtained off the village of

Baibai (10°41.3'S., 150°42.9'E.), near the N extremity of Doini

Island, where there is a break in the reef, in a depth of 22m,

about 0.3 mile offshore. 

7.10 An islet, 75m high, lies 1.25 miles NW of the W extremity of

Doini. A rock lies about mid-way between these two islands.A

shoal, consisting of two 5.5m patches, lies about 1.25 miles W

of the 75m high islet; a reef, with a rock 3m high on it, is

located 1 mile NNE of the same islet. There is a 11m shoal

1.25 miles S of Tuyam Island.

7.11 Rogeia Island (10°38'S., 150°39'E.), located on the

SE side of West Channel, is about 4 miles long in a NW and SE

direction and about 1.25 miles wide. There are two peaks in the

NW part of the island that appear saddle-shaped when viewed

from the E or W. The SE peak is the highest and rises to a

height of 370m.

7.11 The SW side of the island is clear of off-lying dangers but on

the NE side there are several.

7.11 A reef extends 0.33 mile SE from the S extremity of the

island; there are three prominent rocks on this reef.

7.11 A reef, which dries 1.2m, lies 0.85 mile NE of the S extremity of the island and a wooded islet is located 0.65 mile NW of

the drying reef, with foul ground between them.

7.11 Anchorage may be obtained in the bay on the E side of

Rogeia Island, in depths of from 18.3 to 22m, sheltered from

the SE winds.

7.11 A crescent-shaped island, 0.75 mile in length, lies N of

Rogeia Island and is separated from it by a channel, 183m

wide. The NW point of this island is a steep, wooded, knoll

with a red cliff, facing West Channel.

7.11 A narrow rocky bank with depths of 3.7 to 7.3m extends 0.5

mile NW from the red cliff. There are current swirls and eddies

over this bank and when the wind is in a contrary direction

there are heavy overfalls.

7.11 A rock, in a depth of 1.8m, lies about 1 mile E of the red

cliff. It has depths of from 9.1 to 11m N and S of it but there is

less water off the NW end. The rock is easily seen from aloft

and occasionally breaks.

7.11 Mount Bossim, on the mainland open N of the red cliff,

bearing about 268°, leads N of the rock.

7.12 West Channel (10°40'S., 150°35'E.), the SW approach to China Strait, lies between the mainland and Rogeia

Island, which lies 1.75 miles offshore. It is free from dangers

except for the 7.9m shoal that lies 2.25 miles SW from the W

extremity of Rogeia Island, and Weku una (Wekuuna), a rock,

fairly steep-to, which dries 0.6m. Weku una lies on the W side

of the fairway, 1.25 miles NW of Rogeia Island.

7.12 A light is shown ,at an elevation of 7m, from a white column

on a concrete base on Weku una.

East Channel (10°39'S., 150°43'E.), the SE approach to

China Strait, lies between Rogeia Island and Sariba Island, 2

miles NE. Samarai Island and a smaller island lie in the middle

of the channel at its NW end. Vessels crossing the barrier reef

E of Uluma Reef might find it advantageous to use this channel.

7.12 Samarai Island (10°37'S., 150°40'E.) lies about 1 mile NE

of Rogeia Island. The island rises to a height of 47m in its SE

part. There is a deep channel on either side of the island, and it

is fringed by a reef except on its NW side where there is a

wharf. The reef dries about 137m off the NE side and about 0.1

mile off its SW side. A circular shoal, with a least depth of

3.9m, lies about 137m N of the main wharf. A light is shown

from a steel pile structure, 6m high, situated approximately in

the center of this shoal. A 5.5m patch is located about 36m SW

of the light structure.

7.12 A thickly-wooded islet lies about 0.5 mile NW of Samarai

Island; it is fringed by a reef extending about 91m from its W

side.

7.13 Samarai (10°37'S., 150°40'E.) (World Port Index No.

53170) is the settlement on the NW side of Samarai Island. The

Main Wharf (No. 1) is 93m long and 13m wide, with a depth of

7.8m alongside. Vessels are advised to berth port or starboard

side-to by port officials. Ship’s equipment is used for cargo

work. Tankers also berth at this wharf.
150 Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 

Pub. 164

7.13 A private coastal wharf operates W of the main wharf. 

7.13 Tidal currents between Samarai and the islet 0.55 mile NW,

are reported to be irregular and often attain a velocity of 6

knots; there is hardly any slack water, but the full strength of

the current only lasts about 1 hour. A strong tide rip extends

about 0.2 mile from the N end of Samarai.

7.13 The spring tides rise 1.8m and the neaps rise about 1.1m.

7.13 Pilotage is not available. VHF channels 6, 8, 12, and16 are

available. Limited water, marine diesel fuel, and some provisions are available. Bunkering is supplied by pipeline. Air

service is at nearby Gurney.

7.13 The International flag "N" is placed on the end of the wharf

from which the tidal currents flow. Slack water is indicated by

placing the flag at the center of the wharf.

7.13 Anchorage may be taken about 0.3 mile W of Samarai Light,

in a depth of about 33m, or 0.8 mile SW of the light, in a depth

of about 29m, coral and sand.

7.13 Caution.—Care is needed while berthing as patches, with a

depth of 6.7m over them, lie 91m NNW of the N end of the

main wharf. 

7.14 Sariba Island (10°36'S., 150°42'E.) lies on the N side

of East Channel and is separated from Papua New Guinea by

China Strait. The island is irregular in shape, about 5 miles in

length in a NW and SE direction, and 2.5 miles wide at its

widest part. The island rises to a height of 296m in its W part.

7.14 Anchorage may be taken in the bay S of the 296m height, in

a depth of 22m, mud, with the W entrance point of the bay in

range 281° with the N extremity of Samarai Island.

7.14 A thickly-wooded islet connected to Sariba Island by a reef

lies close N of the W extremity of the island. A 4.5m shoal,

steep-to, is located 0.4 mile NNE of the islet.

7.14 Anchorage may be taken E of above-described shoal, in a

depth of 13 to 16.4m, mud, with the light on the N extremity of

Sariba Island bearing 030°, 0.8 mile distant. A shoal, with a

least depth of 7.6m, lies close N of the anchorage.

7.14 A reef-fringed islet lies on the E side of China Strait, 1 mile

NNE of the N extremity of Sariba Island. A smaller mangrove

islet stands on the S side of the reef. The W side of the fringing

reef has been reported to be extending farther W.

7.14 Igwali Island, larger than the islet described above, 1 mile

NE of the N extremity of Sariba, is thickly wooded and rises to

a height of 122m. 

7.15 Ito Island (10°34'S., 150°46'E.), about 1.5 miles in

length, lies 1.5 miles E of Igwali Island. It is indented on its

NW and S sides, and rises to a rounded peak 152m high. Its

shores are, for the most part, composed of mangroves, and the

underbrush is so thick as to be almost impenetrable. A belt of

coral fringes the island.

7.15 A shoal with a least depth of 7.3m lies 0.4 mile E of Igwali

Island and a 3m spot lies about 0.2 mile NW of the N extremity

of Ito Island.

7.15 An islet, fringed by reef, lies about 0.75 mile E of the light

on the N extremity of Sariba Island. There is a bay between

this islet and the light but it is not advisable to anchor here,

owing to the strong tidal stream eddying around the islet. There

is a rock with a depth of 0.3m in the mouth of the bay.

7.15 An island 108m high, with a rounded summit, lies 1 mile

SSE of Igwali Island, 0.15 mile off the NE side of Sariba Island. Between these two islands are several shoals with depths

of from 3 to 7.6m.

7.15 A prominent double-topped hill, 192m high, lies near the NE

end of a peninsula, 0.8 mile SE of the above island. A shoal

with a least depth of 1.2m, lies 1.5 miles ENE of the doubletopped peak. A rock 12.2m high, lies about 1.5 miles SE of the

same peak. A reef extends 0.15 mile N of the rock.

7.15 A channel 91m wide, with a depth of 9.1m in the fairway,

separates the SE end of Sariba Island from the W extremity of

Sideia Island. The tidal currents in the channel attain a rate of 7

knots, with dangerous overfalls and eddies, rendering navigation hazardous except at SW.

7.16 Sideia Island (10°36'S., 150°50'E.), lying E of Ito Island, and Sariba Island, is about 8 miles long in an E and W

direction and is about 7.5 miles in breadth in a N and S direction. Jenkins Bay indents the W side of the island to a distance

of about 6.75 miles.

7.16 The land rises to narrow thickly-wooded hills. Mount Kopaki, 393m high is the highest point in the island.

7.16 Jenkins Bay opens toward China Strait. The area NE and E

of Sariba Island in the vicinity of Jenkins Bay has not been surveyed.

7.16 The S side of Sideia Island is fronted by East Channel; it is

steep-to and indented by several bays. Bagamoti Islet, covered

with scrub, is located 3 miles SE of the W extremity of the island.

Margaret Island (Populai Island) (10°40'S., 150°53'E.),

located 0.5 mile off the SE point of Sideia Island, has a fairly

level thickly-wooded summit, 152m high.

7.16 The channel between these two islands has depths from 12.8

to 37m. At spring tides the current runs strongly through this

channel; it is advisable to close Margaret Island shore in passing through.

7.16 The SE extremity of Sideia Island is fringed by a coral reef

extending 183m offshore. The E coast of the island extends N

from the SE extremity and is indented by two bays near the N

end of this stretch, which are dangerous to enter; these two

bays are fronted by an islet. Negro Head is located about 3.5

miles NW of the islet. A reef extends 4 miles E of Negro Head;

breakers are distinctly seen on this reef.

7.17 Challis Head (10°32'S., 150°48'E.), the NW extremity of the island, lies 3.25 miles W of Negro Head and, like the

former, has a coral reef which extends 0.25 mile from it in an E

direction. The bay which lies between these points is fouled

with coral reefs.

7.17 Caution.—The N side of Sideia Island has not been closely

surveyed, and due caution must be used when navigating here.

7.17 A chain of rocks and shoal water extends 4 miles WNW of

Challis Head to the E side of China Strait. At the outer end of

this chain there are three patches with depths of 1.2m or less.

These patches show distinctly, but rarely break. About 0.75

mile SE of these patches there is a triangular reef which dries.

Within 0.5 mile radius N to E of the NE point of the triangular

reef, there are five drying reefs. A depth of 4.6m lies 1 mile E

of the triangular reef.

7.17 These dangers may all be seen on the chart.
Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 151

Pub. 164

7.18 Basilaki Island (10°38'S., 151°00'E.) is separated

from the SE side of Sideia Island by Fortescue Strait. The strait

is about 0.2 mile wide at its S end, opening to a width of 1.5

miles at the N end.

7.18 Basilaki Island is 10 miles in length in an E and W direction

and has an average width of 3.5 miles. The higher grounds are

covered with a thick forest of tropical trees. Mount Fairfax, one

of three peaks on the ridge that forms the backbone of the

island, has a knob shaped summit, 503m high, that is conspicuous from all directions.

7.18 A small conical islet lies close off the SW extremity of

Basilaki Island; it is connected to the mainland by a sunken

reef.

7.18 Weitoa Island (10°40'S., 150°56'E.) is separated from the

SW peninsula of Basilaki Island by a channel 0.2 mile wide.

An unexamined shoal with a depth of 11m, coral and sand, lies

about 2.5 miles SW of Weitoa Island.

7.18 Hoop Iron Bay lies on the SW side of Basilaki Island, N of

Weitoa Island. Good anchorage, protected from winds except

those from the E and SE, may be found, in a depth of 24m, stiff

mud, in the small bay on the NE side of Weitoa Island, with the

N entrance point of the bay bearing 313°; it is out of the

influence of the tidal current.

7.18 There is also anchorage in the same depth in the NW part of

Hoop Iron Bay.

7.18 In the channel between Weitoa Island and Basilaki Island,

the flood current sets to the W and the ebb current sets to the E.

Many tide rips and eddies occur in this vicinity at springs when

the tidal current attains a velocity of more than 4 knots.

7.18 The coast between the E entrance point to Hoop Iron Bay

and a point lying 4 miles ESE is indented by five sandy coves,

separated by rocky points. A rock, which generally breaks, lies

0.5 mile off the coast, 1.5 miles SE of the E entrance of Hoop

Iron Bay.

7.18 Rocky Islet, 24m high, is a dark-colored rock with a thin

covering of grass on its summit, that lies 2 miles W of South

Point. The islet appears to be steep-to on all sides.

7.19 South Point (10°41'S., 151°02'E.), in the S extremity

of Basilaki Island, is a well-defined bluff. The rocky and steep

coast trends NE 1 mile from South Point to the S point of a bay.

A coral reef extends 0.15 mile from the N shore of this bay and

a reef, which dries, runs parallel to the N shore and around the

NE entrance point of the bay for a distance of 1.5 miles. Foul

ground continues to within 1 mile of the S entrance point of

Pitt Bay.

Haines Island (10°41'S., 151°04'E.) lies close off the SE

extremity of Basilaki Island. The island has a saddle-shaped

summit, which rises to a height of about 76m. These two peaks

are steep and covered with trees on the W side, but show a

grassy slope to the E.

7.19 Kaiti Island (Connor Island), located about 1 mile NE of

Haines Island, rises to a height of 172m near its center. The

NW side of the island is steep-to and the SE side of the island

terminates in a small pyramid-shaped rock, almost detached.

7.19 The channel between Kaiti Island and Haines Island is about

1 mile wide and has depths of more than 37m. A black rock,

about 1m high, is located near the NW end of the channel and

vessels making for Pitt Bay should pass E of this rock. The

current in the channel has been estimated at 3.5 knots at spring

tides.

7.19 An islet 101m high, lies about 0.5 mile E of Kaiti Island and

Baba-garai Island, 24m high, lies on the same reef about 0.5

mile farther E.

7.19 Kita-bona-bona Island, about 1 mile NE of Kaiti Island, is

thickly wooded and about 27m high; it is surrounded by a strip

of sandy beach. The channel between these two islands is

fouled by a steep-to sunken coral patch, in 3.7m; its use is not

recommended.

7.20 Pitt Bay (10°38'S., 151°04'E.), the largest bay on the

E coast of Basilaki Island, has depths that vary from 26 to 33m,

sand and coral, but detached shoal areas with depths of 0.3 to

9.1m lie within 0.75 mile of the NW side and head of the bay.

7.20 The N entrance point to Pitt Bay is well-marked by a conical

brown rock 7.6m high that resembles a can buoy. There are

rocks, dangerous to navigation extending 0.75 mile offshore

within the bay about 1 mile SW of the brown rock.

7.20 Pitt Bay affords good anchorage except during strong NE to

E winds, in 22m, coral and sand, with the conical brown rock,

bearing 040°. Vessels approaching the bay from the NE should

take care to avoid the 5.5m shoal lying about 1.25 miles 110°

from the conical brown rock.

7.20 The coast of Basilaki Island trends N from the N entrance

point of Pitt Bay, about 1.75 miles to Cape Lookout, the NE

extremity of the island. Mount Fairfax has a succession of

regular, conical peaks, gradually decreasing in height as they

approach Cape Lookout. These peaks are remarkable in appearance when viewed from the NW of SE.

7.21 North Point (10°35'S., 151°02'E.), 2.5 miles WNW

of Cape Lookout, is the W entrance point of a bay that is

divided in two arms by a tongue of land. An islet, encircled by

a coral reef, lies close N of this tongue of land. A patch with a

least depth of 6.4m lies 0.75 mile ENE of the islet.

7.21 Vessels may obtain anchorage in the E arm of the bay, in a

depth of 29m, mud. Good anchorage may also be obtained SW

of the islet, in depths of 26 to 29m, mud, but local knowledge is

required.

7.21 Hewoli Point lies 2 miles WSW of North Point and White

Point lies 5 miles farther W. Steep-to coral patches with depths

of from 3.7m to 5.5m lie from 0.5 to 1.25 miles off the N coast

of Basilaki Island between Hewoli Point and White Point.

7.21 Grant Islet (10°33'S., 151°02'E.), located about 1.75 miles

NNE of North Point, is composed of coral. The islet is surrounded by reefs extending 0.25 mile offshore.

7.21 West of Grant Islet, discolored water, in which depths of 7.3

and 9.1m were obtained, extends toward North Point and

Sideia Island.

7.21 Caution.—The N coast of Basilaki Island is not closely

surveyed and caution must be used in navigating this area.

China Strait—Northwest Side

7.22 Gesila Island (10°35'S., 150°38'E.), lying about 2.5

miles NE of Weku una and 1.75 miles NW of Samarai, is

located 0.4 mile offshore and nearly parallel with the coast NE

of it. The island, thickly wooded at its NW end, is 67m high
152 Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 

Pub. 164

and steep-to on its S side. The 11m line lies about 0.2 mile off

its SE extremity. The island is used as a quarantine station.

7.22 A shallow bay lies 1 mile N of Weku una, and a bay, with

soft mud at its entrance, lies NE of Gesila Island.

7.22 A steep-to point is located on the mainland about 2 miles NE

of the E extremity of Gesila Island. A depth of 10.3m lies about

160m SE of this point. A rock, with a depth of 0.9m, lies 0.5

mile NE of this point and about 0.2 mile offshore. There are

depths of 16.4 to 18.3m off the S side of this rock and 11 to

14.6m between the rock and the shore. This danger lies in the

way of a vessel passing along the shore to avoid the tidal

currents and only shows well under favorable conditions. The

water is discolored by a stream which discharges 0.4 mile W.

7.23 Isulailai Point (10°34'S., 150°42'E.), a low point, is

the SE extremity of Papua New Guinea. The land 0.5 mile W

of the point rises to a hill 146m high. A reef extends about

183m SE of the Point.

7.23 A light is shown from a white column on a concrete base,

3.7m high, on the point. A conspicuous yellow windsock 0.4

mile SW of Isulailai Point is a useful landmark. 

7.23 A coral patch, with a depth of 7m, lies about 0.25 mile offshore, 0.45 mile N of Isulailai Point. A 7.3m patch lies 0.13

mile farther N. These two patches are not generally visible

from aloft.

7.23 An island, 18.3m to the top of the trees, lies close offshore,

5.25 miles NNW of Isulailai Point. The island is fringed by a

reef to a short distance only, with deep water beyond.

7.23 A shoal, with a least depth of 2.4m, lies 0.3 mile E of the S

end of the island.

7.23 Caution.—Dorasi Shoal (10°31'S., 150°42'E.) is a narrow

ridge of sand about 1.5 miles in length in a NW to SE direction, with a least depth of 3.6m near its center, which lies 3

miles N of Isulailai Point Light. The shoal is steep-to on its N

and S sides, but it only shows when the light is favorable.

China Strait

7.24 China Strait is the narrow deep-water channel between the SE extremity of Papua New Guinea and Sariba

Island. It is about 4 miles in length in a NE and SW direction,

and about 0.75 mile in width at its narrowest part, which is at

its N entrance. Depths in the fairway exceed 26m, except for

the previously-described dangers.

7.24 During the Southeast Monsoon season, the positions of the

higher mountains, which on a clear day would be visible, are

indicated by a thick cloud hanging over the land. In these conditions, while yet outside the barrier reef, the Brumer Islands

show clearly. The most conspicuous peak on the Brumer Islands is the castellated summit on the W island; farther N the

bright green hills of Deirina Island are visible against the

darker coastal hills.

7.24 When a vessel is near the fairway over the sunken barrier

reef, Rogeia Island is visible against the coastal mountains of

the mainland. Sariba Island is visible over the SE part of

Rogeia Island. The double-topped island of Doini and the

peaks of Basilaki are also visible from the fairway.

7.24 Tides—Currents.—In the narrow part of China Strait, the

currents run from 3 to 6 knots, decreasing to 2 or 3 knots in the

wider parts and approaches. The NE current commences about

3 hours before HW by the shore and runs until about 3 hours

after; the SW current runs for the remainder of the 12 hours.

The currents, however, vary 1 hour or more on either side of

the times given. Strong E winds retard the NE current considerably.

7.24 In West Channel, the currents follow, approximately, the

trend of the coast. At quarter flood at Samarai Island the SW

current is slackening; shortly afterwards the NE current begins

to make itself felt outside West Channel and, meeting the

opposite current, causes tide rips in the vicinity of Weku una.

There is comparatively little current in the bight N of Weku

una.

7.24 In East Channel, the tidal currents set strongly through the

passes between Rogeia Island and Doini Island, but they are

not nearly as strong as those in West Channel. The SW current

through China Strait, impinging on Rogeia Island, runs partly

through West Channel and partly through East Channel along

the island’s shore, while close along the S shore of Sariba

Island there is no current.

7.24 The NE current impinging on Sariba Island is partly deflected to the NW and, uniting with the NE current from West

Channel at springs, causes heavy tide rips and overfalls at the

N entrance of China Strait.

7.24 A strong eddy will be found on each side of China Strait, and

near the shore NW of Isulailai Point. It should be remembered

that the ebb current sets obliquely on this point.

7.24 On the sunken barrier reef to the S of China Strait the tidal

currents run with a force of from 1 to 2 knots and in a general

direction of NE and SW, but at neap tides they may be considerably modified by the wind. In the neighborhood of Wari

Island their direction inclines more to the N and S. Over Siriki

Shoals the tidal currents run strongly, causing heavy tide rips.

7.24 In the vicinity of the Brumer Islands, the currents are less

strongly felt; during the Southeast Monsoon season an almost

constant current appears to set toward the W, although it is

distinctly affected by the ebb and flood currents.

7.24 Directions.—China Strait may be entered from the S by

passing either through West Channel or East Channel. In approaching the strait from the southward it is recommended to

make the Dumoulin Islets, about 20 miles SE of Papua New

Guinea, which frequently show clearly when the other islands

can not be seen. There are several good approaches through the

barrier reefs W of these islets, then to West Channel.

Vessels with a draft not exceeding 7.6m may approach from

the W, with the summit or the light on Badila-bedda-beddabonaru bearing 093°. This course will lead across the barrier

reef and leads close S of a 9.8m patch and N of a 10.1m patch.

When in a position about 2.5 miles from the light a vessel

should steer 071° to pass 0.75 mile N of the island then steer on

Sapikunuri until the light astern bears 245°, then steer a course

of 065° to West Channel. The 065° course leads over a 11.9m

patch and close N of a 11.6m patch.

7.24 The track from SW leads, in deep water, through the barrier

reef in a position about 5 miles from Badila-bedda-beddabonarua, with the light bearing 047°30'; when about 3.5 miles

from the light, steer 000° to join the track from the W. This

same break in the reef may be crossed with the summit of Baibesiga Island in range 350°.

7.24 A good approach that can also be used crosses the barrier

reef with the Arch Islets bearing between 033° and 001°.
Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 153

Pub. 164

7.24 Approach West Channel on the 065° course until the light on

Weku una bears 019° when that course should be steered. This

course will pass E of a depth of 7.9m. Once past this depth

mid-channel courses may be steered through China Strait,

taking care to avoid the previously-described shoals and steer

to pass E of Dorasi Shoal, at the N entrance.

7.24 In entering China Strait from the N these directions must be

reversed.

7.24 East Channel, which leads N of Doini Island, is free of dangers, except for the reef off the E extremity of Rogeia Island.

7.24 A vessel, having cleared the Lebrun Islets, may steer to pass

midway between Samarai Island and Sariba Island to China

Strait, then as directed above under West Channel.

7.24 Caution.—The land in the vicinity of China Strait is frequently obscured by rain.

Milne Bay

7.25 Milne Bay is about 7.5 miles wide between Saraoni

Island, the S entrance point, and Killerton Point, the N entrance, and extends W about 20 miles to its head. To the W of

Saraoni Island, the S shore of the bay continues bold and steep

and is slightly indented by a succession of bights.

7.25 At the head of the bay a thickly-populated plain extends 4 or

5 miles inland to a low mountain range, and then to the W the

Owen Stanley Range rises. Running parallel to the latter range

and separated by extensive valleys is the Stirling Range,

extending along the N coast of the island.

7.25 The N shore of Milne Bay is also mountainous, rising to

heights of over 914m. The coast is indented by a series of

bights and the E entrance is fronted by the Killerton Islands.

The bay has charted depths over 549m. 

Milne Bay—South Side

7.26 The bold shore line rises quickly to a height of 305m,

at distances from 0.75 mile to 2 miles inland, however, W of

Discovery Bay it is over 2.5 miles inland and N of this height

the land is relatively low and flat to the coast. Mount Allemata,

678m high, is located about 2 miles inland, 18 miles WNW of

Saraoni Island.

7.26 The coastal water along the S coast of Milne Bay is free of

charted dangers as far W as Discovery Bay, except for a dangerous rock charted at the mouth of the Dawa Dawa River,

about 10 miles WNW of Saraoni Island.

7.26 Saraoni Harbor (Kana Kopi Bay) (10°29'S., 150°39'E.) is

entered between the W edge of Saraoni Island and a point

about 0.2 mile W. The bay has general depths of 18.3 to 27m to

within 183m of its head, and extends for about 0.4 mile in a

southerly direction. At the head of the bay there is a dock and a

pier.

7.26 Discovery Bay (10°25'S., 150°24'E.) (World Port Index No.

53195) from seaward appears low and wooded; it may be

identified by the bright green trees in the background. The W

part of the bay is distinctly marked by a reef, which is partly

awash.

7.26 An L-shaped wharf is situated at the E entrance point of the

bay. There is a depth of 5.2m along its NW face and a depth of

11.3m alongside its SW face.

7.26 The village of Waga Waga is situated at the head of the bay.

Several ruined wharves lie on the E shore and at the head of the

bay. 

7.26 Anchorage may be taken in the middle of Discovery Bay, in

depths of 22 to 26m, sand and mud. The E shore should be

favored by entering vessels, since it is steep-to. The reef on the

W side should be avoided, as its inner portion is not always

discernible.

7.26 Between Discovery Bay and the SW extremity of Milne Bay,

the shore is fronted by reefs and shoals extending as far as 0.3

mile offshore in places.

7.26 From Saraoni Harbor, the coast trends in a WNW direction

about 15 miles to the E entrance of Discovery Bay.

Milne Bay—North Side

7.27 From Killerton Point (10°21'S., 150°38'E.), close W

of the Killerton Islands, for about 13 miles W to Stringer Bay,

the N shore of Milne Bay is steep-to and indented by a series of

small bays along the foot of the Stirling Range.

7.27 Lihitabu Point lies 2.5 miles W of Killerton Point. There are

several small inlets between these two points that are fronted

by shoal water. A 9.1m depth lies about 0.2 mile S of Lihitabu

Point.

7.27 Alotoa (Sanderson Bay) (Alotau) (10°19'S., 150°27'E.)

(World Port Index No. 53165) is situated on the N shore of

Milne Bay 8.5 miles WNW of Lihitabu Point. The district administrative headquarters is situated here. The port is marked

by a light. The tidal range is approximately 1.1m. The largest

vessel to visit this port had a length of 205m and draft of 8.0m.

7.27 On the W entrance point of the bay there is an L-shaped

wharf with a head 36m long, having a depth of 6.7m alongside.

7.27 Off Kopi Point lies Berth No. 1 (Overseas), a wharf for

ocean-going vessels, is the southernmost wharf in the harbor.

The wharf has a length of 93m and a depth of 8.4m alongside,

and can handle containers, general, and bulk cargo. A berthing

dolphin is to be added. Berth No. 2 (Coastal), just N of the

Berth No. 1, can handle tank vessels. The wharf has a length of

56m and a depth of 4.9m alongside. A barge ramp is situated

just N of the Berth No. 2 and has a width of 8m.

7.27 Approximately 120 vessels visit the port annually. There is a

bunkering facility and water is seasonally available. 

7.27 Pilotage is not compulsory for Alotoa, however, if pilotage is

required, a request via Port Moresby radio (P2M) should be

made, giving 48 hours notice of ETA. The vessel’s arrival

should be sent not less than 12 hours via Port Moresby radio

and is to be confirmed not more than 5 hours or less than 4

hours prior to arrival, again via Port Moresby radio. The pilot

boards about 0.6 mile SSW of the light.

Milne Bay—Head

7.28 The head of the bay extends in a general N and S

direction and is about 5 miles in length. The N shore of the

head of the bay is low and featureless, with dense groves of

coconut palms backed about 2 miles inland by heavy jungle.

7.28 The head of the bay is fronted by numerous mud banks

which extend up to 0.45 mile offshore. There are several rivers

which discharge into the bay in this area and after rain, torrents
154 Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 

Pub. 164

of water flow into the bay and discolor the water for some

distance from shore, producing the appearance of shoal water.

Stringer Bay (10°18'S., 150°24'E.), on the N side of the bay,

2.5 miles W of Alotoa, affords anchorage, in depths of 11 to

36m.

7.28 The Aleford Islets, a group of four small islets, lie from 1 to

2 miles offshore at the head of the bay. They are surrounded by

reefs, but the depths E of them increase from 18.3m at 0.5 mile

off to 37m and 55m from 1.5 to 2.5 miles off.

7.28 A rock, with a least depth of 3m, lies 1.75 miles SSE of the

easternmost islet of the Aleford Islets; a shoal patch with a

depth of 2.1m lies about 0.9 mile NW of this rock. Shoal

patches, with a least depth of 2.1m, lie 0.5 mile to 1 mile S of

this rock.

Giligili Anchorage (Gili Gili Anchorage) (10°25'S.,

150°22'E.) lies in the NW part of Milne Bay, close W of a

small islet that lies about 0.15 mile offshore SW of Stringer

Bay. The anchorage provides good holding ground, in 9.1 to

37m, gray mud. Should protection from SE winds, which blow

strongly at times, be desired, anchorage can be taken W of the

NW islet of the Aleford Iselts.

7.28 A shoal of coral formation, with a depth of 14.6m, lies about

0.8 mile NNE of the NE islet of the Aleford Islets.

7.28 Waga Anchorage is situated in the SW part of Milne Bay and

affords anchorage for several vessels.

Killerton Point to East Cape

7.29 From Killerton Point, the coast trends in an ENE direction about 16 miles distant to East Cape (10°14'S.,

150°52'E.). Mount Geragera, 506m high, rises 3.75 miles NE

of Killerton Point; Mount Killerton, 491m high, rises 1.5 miles

farther ENE. From the SE and NW, the summit of Mount

Killerton shows as three round knobs; the middle one is highest. Towards East Cape, the E extremity of Papua New Guinea,

the valleys between the hills become deeper, giving the point,

the appearance of islands, when seen from a distance.

Alotoa 
Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 155

Pub. 164

7.29 Killerton Bay (10°21'S., 150°40'E.) is entered between Killerton Point and a point nearly 4 miles NE. The shores of the

bay are low, wooded, and partly cultivated.

7.29 The Killerton Islands, located in the SW part of the bay, consist of three principal islands and four smaller islets. They are

wooded and lie in a general E and W direction. The islands of

this group are surrounded by reefs and shoal water. There are

deep water passages between the larger islands of the group,

but local knowledge is required to transit them.

7.29 Waga Tu Maiawa Island, the westernmost of the group is

fringed by a reef and is separated by Mahabarina Island (0.5

mile NE), the northernmost, by a deep channel 0.2 mile wide in

the middle of which lies Messum Rock. A shoal in a depth of

3.8m lies about 0.4 mile WSW of the SW point of Waga Tu

Maiawa Island. 

The coast between Killerton Bay and Nuamuri Point, 4.5

miles ENE, forms several sandy bays, with foul ground extending up to 0.5 mile off them.

7.29 Kubui Point (10°15'S., 150°50'E.), bold and steep, and

backed by a hill with a double summit 123m high, is located 5

miles NE of Nuamuri Point. From Kubui Point the coast trends

NE for 3 miles to East Cape.

7.29 Caution.—Sullivan Patches (10°22'S., 150°45'E.), with a

least charted depth of 5.5m, lie 3.5 miles S of Nuamuri Point.

Yunnan Shoal, with a charted depth of 2.7m lies, 1.25 miles S

of the same point. A 9.1m shoal lies about 0.8 mile NNE of

Yunnan Shoal.

7.29 A depth of 7.3m has been reported to lie 1 mile SW of Kubui

Point.

7.29 As the waters in this area have not been completely examined, on no account should vessels pass N of Sullivan Patches.

East Cape

7.30 East Cape (10°14'S., 150°52'E.) is the E extremity of

the peninsula forming the N side of Milne Bay. About 0.3 mile

SW of East Cape there is a double peak, 128m high, that is the

termination of the range along this peninsula. This peak is

wooded on the NW and S sides but is cultivated on the NE

side.

7.30 Discolored water was reported to exist about 1.5 miles SW

of East Cape.

There are several islands and dangers lying in the approach

to Goschen Strait when coming from the S or E. The main

channels have sufficient water, but are not marked by buoys.

Most of the channels may only be navigated with the sun in a

favorable position.

Meimeiara Island (Mei-Mei-ara Island) (10°13'S.,

150°53'E.) is thickly wooded and lies on the shelf that extends

ENE of East Cape. Near the middle of the island a grassy

mound rises to a level with the top of the trees.

Alotoa
156 Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 

Pub. 164

7.30 A fringing reef extends 0.25 mile from the N side of the island and 183m from its W side. Foul ground and numerous

shoals exist within a radius of 1 mile S through NE of the island. There is a light on the S coast of Meimeiara island.

7.30 Caution.—The light is obscured ENE of Boia-boia-waga

Island.

7.31 Meimeiara Island is separated from East Cape by

Hornbill Channel, which will accommodate vessels of 3.7m

draft. There is a considerable tidal current through the channel

and with a SE wind a breaking sea extends across the passage.

The passage may be made keeping close to the reef on the E

side of the channel. Local knowledge is essential to make this

passage.

7.31 Jackdaw Channel is about 0.2 mile between the 5.5m lines

on either side, with a least depth of 6.1m in the fairway. This

channel passes between Meimeiara Island on the SW and Boiaboia-Waga Island on the NE. Mount Fairfax, on Basilaki Island

in range 165° with the W tangent on an islet in the Obstruction

Islands leads through Jackdaw Channel clear of the dangers.

7.31 Boia-boia-Waga Island (10°13'S., 150°54'E.), 1.25 miles

NE of Meimeiara Island, is wooded and surrounded by a

fringing reef. A sand bank, awash at HW, lies 0.5 mile W of the

island. There is a depth of 4.6m charted about 0.3 mile S of the

sandbank and a depth of 5.2m about 0.4 mile SSW of the same

bank. These depths lie on the E and W sides, respectively, of

Jackdaw Channel.

7.31 Taodovu Reef, about 1.5 miles long in a N to S direction, lies

2 miles E of Boia-boia-waga Island. There are depths from 1.8

to 3.7m over the reef. A steep-to patch with a depth of 2.5m

lies about 0.5 mile NW of the N end Taodovu Reef.

7.31 Messum Channel is about 0.2 mile wide and lies between

two reefs. The W reef lies with its center bearing 100°, 2 miles

distant, from the light on Meimeiara Island. A shoa,l with a

least depth of 1.2m, lies 0.25 mile S of this reef and is a hazard

in the approach to Messum Channel.

7.31 Messum Channel lies at right angles to the direction of

Raven Channel and is a valuable alternative route to Goschen

Strait from the S. The least known depth in Messum Channel is

8.5m. The channel should be used only with local knowledge.

7.31 There are three islets that are important for the transit of

Messum Channel; two of them are in the Obstruction Islands.

Lelei-Gana Islet lies 5.5 miles distant bearing 156° from the

light on Meimeiara Islet. Togisi Islet, the smaller of these two,

lies about 0.3 mile N of Lelei Gana Islet. Hibwa Islet, the third

of these three islets, lies on a reef E of Raven Channel, 6.5

miles distant, bearing 098° from Meimeiara Islet Light.

7.31 Directions for Messum Channel.—Approach Raven

Channel from the SW; when Togisi Islet and the E tangent of

Lelei-Gana Islet come in range 175°, bring this mark astern to

the S entrance of Messum Channel. There are no marks for the

channel. When between the two reefs on the E and W side of

the channel steer as required to clear the dangers. When clear

N of the reefs alter course to 006°. When Hibwa Islet bears

119°, make good a course of 299°, which leads midway

between the reef extending NE of Boia-boia-waga, and the

patch off the N extremity of Taodovu Reef, then into Goschen

Strait.

7.31 In Messum Channel, the tidal currents set NE and SW.

7.31 Dana-gedu is an extensive reef about 4.75 miles in extent

that lies in a general NE and SW direction that is parallel to,

and lies about 3 miles off the E peninsula of Papua New

Guinea. Raven Channel is approached W of this reef.

7.32 Iabama Islet (10°17'S., 150°56'E.), 69m high, is the

N islet of the Obstruction Islands and lies 1.75 miles E of

Dana-gedu.

7.32 Raven Channel, the best passage through the reefs N of the

Obstruction Islands, lies on a general E and W axis. The

channel lies about 4 miles ESE of East Cape and is difficult to

navigate; great caution is necessary. The reefs on either side are

steep-to and have shallow depths of only a few feet over them,

but their edges show distinctly from aloft when the sun is

favorably located. The channel between the reefs is about 0.2

mile wide at its narrowest part.

7.32 A shoal, with a least depth of 4.9m, lies 2 miles bearing 009°

from the summit of Iabama Islet; a 9.1m patch lies 2 miles N of

the same summit.

7.32 Directions for Raven Channel.—Vessels approaching the

channel from the SW steer for East Cape bearing 023°, giving

the SW extremity of Dana-gedu a berth of about 1 mile. When

the S extremity of Lelei-Gana Islet bears 093°, change course

to 046° and make this course good for a distance of about 4

miles, until Hibwa Islet bears 083.5°. Alter course to 083.5°

with Hibwa Islet ahead to pass through the center of Raven

Channel. There is a light on the reefs on each side of the

channel and a light on Hibwa Islet. This course passes through

the 9.1m patch and close to the N edge of the 4.9m shoal patch.

When Lelei-Gana Islet bears 213°, course should be altered to

033° with that islet astern. This course will lead into Goschen

Strait clear of all dangers.

7.32 It has been reported that the current in the W approach has a

northward flow as strong as 5 knots at times. An E current from

1.5 to 3 knots was reported in the channel.

7.32 The best time to navigate Raven Channel is in the early daylight hours.

7.33 The Obstruction Islands (10°19'S., 150°57'E.) take

their name from the position they occupy SE of East Cape. In

addition to the islets in the group that were described with

Messum Channel (paragraph 7.31) and Raven Channel (paragraph 7.32), there are several other islets and reefs in this

group.

7.33 Walters Reef (10°21'S., 151°00'E.), a patch of sunken rocks,

is the E extent of this group of dangers. About 1.25 miles SSW

of Walters Reef there is a patch of sunken rocks with two 5.5m

coral heads close NE of it.

7.33 About 1.75 miles SW of Walters Reef, there is a reef that is

the southernmost of the dangers lying in the immediate vicinity

of the Obstruction Islands. There are two sand banks on this

reef which dry 0.9m; they are nearly always marked by

breakers. A thickly-wooded islet, with a conical summit 49m

high, is located 2.25 miles NNW of this reef.

7.33 Caution.—This area has not been adequately surveyed and

less water may exist than charted.

7.34 Nuakata Island (10°17'S., 151°01'E.) rises to a

wooded conical height of 327m. This is the principal island in

the vicinity of East Cape and lies about 8 miles SE of it. This
Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 157

Pub. 164

island is a conspicuous mark for vessels navigating in the

locality.

7.34 There are three anchorages in the various bays on the N and

W sides of the island. Anchorage may be taken in the bay on

the N side of the island, in a depth of 35m sand, with the W

entrance point of the bay in range with East Cape bearing 288°

and the E entrance point bearing 049°. This position is exposed

to NE squalls which are sometimes experienced. A reef

extends 1 mile N of the NW extremity and a rock awash is NW

of the E entrance to the bight on the N side of this island.

7.34 A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, extends 0.5 mile WSW of the

W extremity of the island. Anchorage may be taken 0.4 mile N

of the W extremity in 31m sand. This anchorage is protected

from all winds E of S. The bay on the SE side of the W extremity affords anchorage, in 33m, sand, during the Northeast Monsoon, with the W extremity bearing 293° and the SE entrance

point bearing 170°.

7.34 The S extremity of Nuakata Island terminates in a wooded

bluff, 46m high, W of a depth of 4m, 0.4 mile S. A sunken

coral reef extends 0.4 mile SW of the point and 0.75 mile SE of

the point is another reef, awash, with a rock which dries 0.9m.

A sunken rock, or shoal, lies about 1.25 miles NNE of the

point.

7.35 Fallows Reef (10°14'S., 151°00'E.), with a depth of

1.8m, lies 1.75 miles N of the NW extremity of Nuakata Island.

Hibwa Islet, 0.9m high and sandy, lies 0.75 mile SW of

Fallows Reef. A 1.5m patch lies close E of the S extremity of

the reef.

7.35 A reef, with a least depth of 0.3m, is charted 1 mile ENE of

the N extremity of Nuakata Island. 

7.35 Boirama Island is separated from the E part of Nuakata

Island by a narrow channel; its summit is about 157m high; the

vivid green grass covering the summit is conspicuous when

approaching from the S.

7.35 Diawari Island, located about 0.5 mile S of Boirama Island,

is conical shaped and rises to a height of 149m; the peak is

covered with thick grass. The island is fringed by a reef which

extends 0.75 mile S and 0.4 mile to the E and N. The bright

green summit of the island makes an excellent landmark when

approached from the S.

7.35 Mid Sand Bank (10°24'S., 151°03'E.), located about 5.5

miles S of Nuakata Island, dries 1.2m. A reef, with a depth of

2.1m, lies about 1.5 miles W of the bank; the reef sometimes

breaks.

7.35 There are four detached reefs, with depths from 2.1 to 5.8m,

that lie on a line 1.75 miles NNE to 0.75 mile SE of Mid Sand

Bank.

7.35 A line of reefs and shoal water with several small islets

located on them, extend in a SE direction about 15 miles from

Diawari Island. The depths on the reefs vary from 2.4 to 6.1m.

7.35 Grace Islet (10°21'S., 151°07'E.), 27m high to the top of the

trees, lies 5 miles SE of Daiwari Island. The islet is composed

of coral and is thickly wooded. A shoal, which dries 0.9m, and

a small islet, 12.2m high, lie, respectively, 3 miles WNW and

1.75 miles W of Grace Islet. A shoal 11.5m is reported to lie

about 3 miles SW of Grace Islet. 

7.35 Hull Islet, 31m high to the top of the trees, lies 4.5 miles SE

of Grace Islet.

7.35 Blakeney Islet (10°26'S., 151°13'E.), a low thickly-wooded

islet, 38m high to the tops of the trees, lies 3 miles SE of Hull

Islet. This islet occupies a central position in the main approach route to Goschen Strait from the S. The previouslydescribed reef extending SE of Diawari Island terminates in a

6.1m patch, 2.75 miles S of Blakeney Islet.

7.35 Mesley Patches, with depths of 3.7 to 8.2m, lie 3.5 to 5 miles

W of Blakeney Islet.

7.36 Gallows Reef (10°17'S., 151°09'E.) is located in the

fairway at the E end of Goschen Strait and leaves a navigable

channel about 1.75 miles wide on either side of it. The reef is

an extensive horseshoe-shaped ridge of coral, open W; the

greater part of it is awash. A few spots at the E end of the reef

dry. The reef is marked by a lighted beacon. 

7.36 The sea breaks heavily on the SE side of the reef, which is

steep-to; no bottom was found at 219m. The entire reef is

steep-to and a reef at the N extremity dries 0.6m.

7.36 Tidal currents in the channel N of Gallows Reef are E and W

and attain a rate of about 2 knots although influenced by the

prevailing wind. The current is usually N in the area of Gallows Reef. 

7.36 Shortland Islet (10°32'S., 151°05'E.) is an oval-shaped islet,

about 35m high to the top of the trees, located 10 miles SW of

Blakeney Islet. Encircling the islet are Shortland Reefs,

extending 0.5 mile from the W side of the islet and 3.5 miles E.

There are occasional sand cays on the reefs, with bushes on

them. There is a light on the NE side of these reefs.

7.36 Between Shortland Islet and Grant Islet, 3 miles WSW, there

is a channel about 1.25 miles wide between the reefs. The

middle of the passage was reported to have a depth of 22m.

7.36 A heavy tidal race is almost always found in this passage.

7.36 Byron Islet, low and covered with trees, lies 2.25 miles SE of

Shortland Islet. This islet is nearly joined to S extremity of

Shortland Reefs and is a good mark for that danger.

7.37 Slade Island (10°35'S., 151°12'E.), the farthest W of

the Engineer Group, lies 4.5 miles SE of Byron Islet. The other

islands in the group extend ESE about 4 miles. Slade Island

rises to a height of 197m near its center. A well-defined green

bluff marks the W point of the island. Butchart Islet, 46m high,

lies off the N extremity of the island, and a rock 6.1m high lies

close off its SE extremity.

7.37 Skelton Island, located close SE of Slade Island, is 174m

high.

7.37 Watts Island, the SE island of the Engineer Group, is 130m

high near its W end. Toward the center the island dips considerably and near the E end rises to a tableland about 107m

high, which terminates in steep cliffs on the S side.

7.37 The channel between Watts Island and Skelton Island is

about 0.5 mile wide and, not having been thoroughly examined, it should be avoided.

7.38 Bright Islet (10°32'S., 151°12'E.) is located 3 miles

NNE of Slade Island. This is the farthest W of a group of six

small islets that lie N of, and parallel to, the islands of the

Engineer Group. Several coral patches lie between Bright Islet

and Shortland Reefs, 4 miles W; their position may be seen on

the chart. There is a light on Bright Island.
158 Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 

Pub. 164

7.38 Ridge Shoal, with a depth of 11m, lies 2.25 miles N of

Bright Islet.

7.38 Good Islet and Deeds Islet lie, respectively, 2 and 3.5 miles E

of Bright Islet. These low wooded islets are located in a reef

encumbered area.

7.38 Haszard Island (10°35'S., 151°22'E.), about 18.3m high,

lies 6.75 miles SE of Deeds Islet.

7.38 Caution.—A dangerous area extends from a position about

1.5 miles E of Deeds Islet SE to Haszard Island. These waters

have not been thoroughly examined. Discolored water was

reported about 4.5 miles E of Deeds Islet.

7.39 Hummock Island, 1 mile S of Haszard Island, is almost connected to it by a coral reef. Hummock Island has a low

hill at its N end, is low in the center, and then rises to a remarkable hill, 59m high, at its S extremity.

7.39 There is shoal area and several small islets that lie N of the

Engineer Group and S of Good Islet and Deeds Islet, whose

position may best be seen on the chart. No vessel should

attempt to pass through this area except in fine weather and

with a good lookout aloft.

7.39 Night Bank (10°34'S., 151°23'E.), with a least depth of

5.5m, is located 1.25 miles NE of Haszard Island. A tide rip

generally marks its position.

7.39 The tidal currents charted E of Night Bank run at the rate of

2.5 knots at springs; the flood sets N and the ebb S.

7.40 Bentley Island (10°43'S., 151°15'E.), 5 miles S of

Skelton Island, is fringed by a reef which extends 0.75 mile

from its SW side. The hill on the island is divided in two parts,

each part being about 107m high.

7.40 Mudge Island is located about 3.5 miles ESE of Bentley

Island. This low thickly-wooded coral island is surrounded by

a reef.

7.40 The Hardman Islets (10°26'S., 151°19'E.) are two low

islets, 38m high to the top of the trees, which lie 5.5 miles E of

Blakeney Islet. An extensive coral reef surrounds the islets.

7.40 There are several patches of discolored water, and a patch of

11.6m depth between the Hardman Islets and Haszard Island;

this area as well as that E of the Hardman Islets NE to the

Laseinie Islands have not been completely surveyed.

7.40 The Laseinie Islands (10°24'S., 151°25'E.), located about 7

miles ENE of the Hardman Islets, consists of six islands and

islets lying on a reef. Dawson Island, the largest of this group,

rises to a height of 137m. When the summit of this wooded

island is seen from the E or W it appears flattened, but if seen

from the N or S it appears conical.

7.40 Two islets lie within 1.5 miles SE of Dawson Island; NW of

the island, about 2.5 miles distant, are three islets in the

Kegawam Islands, which are part of the Laseinie Islands. There

is a light, obscured by trees in certain directions, on the NW

side of the reef connecting the Kegawam Islands.

7.40 A coral reef appears to connect the whole group; there are a

few sand cays on this reef.

7.40 The sea W of Dawson Island has been seen to break.

7.40 Caution.—A dangerous rock lies 7 miles SSE of the southernmost islet of the group. This area has not been completely

surveyed.

Normanby Island—South Coast

7.41 The N side of Goschen Strait is fronted by the S coast

of Normanby Island, from Cape Ventenat at the E entrance to

Cape Prevost 16.5 miles WNW at the W entrance.

7.41 Cape Ventenat (10°12'S., 151°13'E.), the SE extremity of

Normanby Island, is wedge shaped and well defined when seen

from E or W. The cape gradually rises to a height of 1,097m, 6

miles NNW. A strip of sandy beach borders the cape, and a

coral ledge extends about 0.2 mile S of it.

7.41 Grind Reef skirts part of the coast from a position 3 miles

SW of Cape Ventenat, in a NNE direction for about 9 miles

distant. There is a sand bank on the reef, which dries 0.9m;

there are depths over the reef of 0.6 to 4.3m.

7.41 The Ventenat Islets are two wooded islets with well-defined

summits which lie inside the barrier, 1 mile SW of Cape Ventenat.

The SE islet is 77m high and the NW islet is 47m high.

7.41 Centipede Bay lies 3 miles NW of Cape Ventenat and is

open S. The head of the bay is 0.5 mile wide and has a sandy

beach fronting a lagoon.

7.41 Make-ia Point, 1.75 miles W of Centipede Bay, is fringed by

a coral ledge. The coast W of this point continues steep and

without any marked features for a distance of 2.75 miles to

Makumaku Point, which is also fringed by a coral ledge.

7.41 The coast continues in a W direction from Makumaku Point

for about 9 miles to Cape Prevost. This coast is steep-to. A

depth of 20.1m is charted 2.75 miles WNW Makumaku Point.

7.41 Cape Prevost (10°06'S., 150°57'E.) is steep and well defined. The mountain range rises steeply within the cape and a

height of 1,067m is charted 3.25 miles ENE of the cape.

Goschen Strait

7.42 Goschen Strait (10°10'S., 151°00'E.) lies between

East Cape, the NE extremity of Papua New Guinea, and the

island and dangers SE of this cape; the N side of the strait is

formed by the S shore of Normanby Island. The strait is about

16 miles in length in an E and W direction and 6.75 miles wide

between Cape Prevost and Boia-boia-waga Island.

7.42 The mountains on the N side of the strait are covered with dense

tropical forest and descend in steep slopes to the waters edge.

7.42 Tidal currents between Grind Reef and Gallows Reef set E

and W at a rate of about 2 knots; between the islands to the W

it is no doubt stronger and is probably much influenced by the

prevailing wind. It has been reported that the tidal currents in

the vicinity of Gallows Reef are strong and that the current

usually sets N in this area.

7.42 Directions for vessels approaching Goschen Strait are variable and vessels may select the approach which is most

appropriate.

7.42 A vessel can cross the sunken barrier reef NE of Uluma Reef

and pass between that reef and the Stuers Islands in depths of

10.1 to 16.5m with Mamaramaweino Rock, 2.25 miles NW of

the W end of Wari Island, bearing 344°. When nearing the

rock, course should be altered to pass 1 mile W of it, and when

abeam of it steer to make good a course of 029° so as to pass 1

mile E of Baba-garai Island. When abeam Baba-garai alter

course to pass 1.5 miles W of Slade Island, and when the W

extremity of Slade Island is in range with the W extremity of
Sector 7. Eastern Papua New Guinea—South Cape to East Cape 159

Pub. 164

Bentley Island bearing 161°, astern, this course leads between

Bright Islet and Shortland Reefs. When Shortland Reefs Light

bears 249° astern and the S point of Dawson Island bears 069°,

steer that course, but note that it leads over a depth of 6.1m,

2.75 miles S of Blakeney Islet. When Blakeney Islet bears

310°, alter course to 356° and make that course good, which

lead up to about 2 miles E of Gallows Reef. Keep a good check

on the vessel’s position, as the tidal currents sets at the rate of

about 2 knots to the E or W in the approach to Goschen Strait.

When the N extremity of Nuakata Island bears 268°, then

shape a mid-channel course through Goschen Strait.

7.42 An alternate route may be followed from Baba-garai Island, by

shaping a course to pass in mid-channel between Grant Islet. and

Shortland Islet. It should be borne in mind that the tidal currents in

the passage between Grant Islet and Shortland Islet are very strong

and a vessel should be conned from aloft. When clear of the islets,

steer for Nuamuri Point, 8 miles SW of East Cape, then through

Raven Channel or Messum Channel, as previously directed in

paragraph 7.32 and paragraph 7.31, respectively.

7.42 Vessels may also pass between the Lebrun Islands and Siga

Islet, then WNW to East Channel and follow previously-described routes to Goschen Strait.

7.42 Vessels are recommended to make the NE passage in the

afternoon and the SW passage before noon, so the sun will be

in its most favorable position for seeing the reefs.

7.42 Vessels proceeding NE, after clearing China Strait, may steer

to pass through the passage S of Blakeney Islet on a course of

087°. When Bright Islet comes in range with the W end of

Slade Island, a course of 029° leads clear N. When fixing position from China Strait E, bearings of the land to S have been

satisfactory. Due to the tidal currents, frequent fixes are advised.

7.42 Caution.—No exhaustive survey of Goschen Strait has been

made and the passage should only be made in favorable light

conditions and with a lookout aloft.
Pub. 164

8. The Louisiade Archipelago

8.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 8 — CHART INFORMATION
163

Pub. 164

SECTOR 8 

THE LOUISIADE ARCHIPELAGO

8.0 Plan—This sector describes the ten volcanic islands and

numerous coral reefs lying within the parallels of 10°10'S and

11°45'S, and the meridians of 150°55'E and 154°25'E, with the

exception of Basilaki and several small islands lying close E of

it. The arrangement is from W to E. 

General Remarks

8.1 The Louisiade Archipelago is part of Papua New

Guinea. The islands of Tagula (10°30'S., 153°30'E.), Pana

Tinani, Rossel, and Misima are high and mountainous. The remaining islands in the archipelago are small. The main portion

of the group is encircled by a barrier reef, through which there

are numerous passages. Rossel Island is surrounded by a separate reef of considerable extent. A large portion of the archipelago has been surveyed. Little is yet known in the area at the

W end of the archipelago, and between that archipelago and

Woodlark Island (9°00'S., 152°50'E.) with its adjacent islands, and the D’Entrecasteaux Islands (9°00'S., 151°00'E.).

Vessels must exercise caution while navigating in this area.

8.1 These islands possess considerable natural wealth. Alluvial

and reef gold have been found, and for many years gold mining

yielded the largest returns. Production has now dwindled due

to the exhaustion of the alluvial deposits. Numerous beds of

pearl shell exist, but the great depth in which they are found

prevents the fishery being extensively prosecuted.

Barrier Reef—East of the Stuers Islands

8.2 The barrier reef extends in an E direction for nearly

60 miles between the Stuers Islands (11°06'S., 151°08'E.) and

Jomard Entrance. The reef is awash and steep-to on the seaward side with openings in places. The waters to the N of this

part of the reef have not been sufficiently explored to render

them safe for navigation.

Quessant Island (Tariwerwi Island) (11°09'S., 151°15'E.), a

low wooded island, lies on the NE end of a reef forming a

portion of the barrier reef, in a position about 7.5 miles ESE of

Stuers Islands. Three reefs occupy nearly the whole space between the Stuers Islands and the Quessant Islets. A large reef

lies close SE of the island and a patch of discolored water lies

0.75 mile further SE.

8.2 Vessels can take anchorage, sheltered from SE winds, under

the lee of the reefs lying between Quessant Island and the

Stuers Islands. The anchorage is not good. The bottom consists

of coral, with irregular depths of from 11 to 40m. There are

depths of from 12.8 to 16.5m N of Quessant Island, but there is

no shelter, as the swell sets through the openings between the

reefs on either side.

8.2 Imbert Islet, located about 8.5 miles N of Quessant Island, is

low and wooded with a reef extending about 0.5 mile S of it.

Two reefs, awash, lie, respectively, about 1.5 miles S and 2

miles SW of the islet. There is a reef awash 1.25 miles S of

Imbert Islet and a crescent shaped reef 2.5 miles SW of this

islet.

8.2 Rapid Patches are two shoals, with depths of 10.9m and

7.3m, lying, respectively, about 5.5 and 8 miles E of the Imbert

Islets.

8.3 The Sable Islands (11°11'S., 151°21'E.) are three

sand cays on the NW edge of a reef lying about 5.5 miles ESE

of Quessant Island. The SW cay has a few trees on it. The sand

cay at the NE end of the reef was covered with vegetation, the

middle one being bare, but possibly is now overgrown like the

others. There is an opening about 3.5 miles wide between the

Sable Islets’ reef and the reef lying close SE of Quessant

Island. Discolored water and heavy rollers, appearing like a

shoal, were observed in this opening.

8.3 Vessels can take anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon in

a position about 0.5 mile NW of the NE Sable Islet.

8.3 Anchorage Reefs (11°11'S., 151°27'E.) are two reefs extending about 7.5 miles E of the northeasternmost Sable Islet.

The W reef is separated from Sable Islet reef by a channel,

about 1 mile wide, with a least depth of 12.8m.

Kosmann Island (Maragili Island) (11°04'S., 151°32'E.),

low and wooded, lies about 11 miles NE of the northeasternmost Sable Islet. The island is surrounded by a number of

small reefs.

8.3 Several dangerous shoals lie SW of Kosmann Island.

8.3 The best anchorage off Kosmann Island lies about 1 mile

NW of the island, in a depth of 10.9m, coral.

8.4 Long Reef (11°10'S., 151°39'E.), an extensive atoll,

lies with its SW end close E of Anchorage Reef. The lagoon,

which appears navigable, but has not been surveyed, is enclosed on its N and S sides, and at its E end, by an almost continuous barrier reef. On the N side the reef is always above

water and has several sand cays and much driftwood on it.

Several cays with mangrove bushes lie near the W extremity of

the reef about 3 to 4 miles SE of Kosmann Island. There are

some rocks above water near the center of the reef on the S

side. No openings could be found into the lagoon from the S or

E, but it is probable there are passages between the patches

which stretch across its W end.

8.4 There is a narrow opening between the SW extremity of

Long Reef and Anchorage Reefs, but it has not been surveyed.

8.4 There is an opening in the barrier reef from 2 to 3 miles wide

between the E end of Long Reef and the atoll forming Bramble

Haven. Tidal currents run at a considerable rate through this

passage. No bottom could be found with a 183m sounding in

the passage or in the waters S of Bramble Haven. This opening

is reported to be a good passage. Vessels must exercise caution

because the reefs are difficult to see and there are no islets in

the S entrance.

8.4 Lejeune Island (11°10'S., 151°49'E.), low and wooded, lies

on the N side of Long Reef, about 3 miles W of its E extremity.
164 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

8.4 Vessels can take anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon in

the bay formed between the patches which lie at the W end of

Long Reef, Anchorage Reef, and Kosmann Islet, the water

being smooth and depths regular.

8.5 Bramble Haven (11°14'S., 152°00'E.) is the lagoon

of an atoll, which is about 10 miles in length in an E-W

direction and 6 miles in breadth. The depth in Bramble Haven,

as far as it was sounded, were found to be from 10.9 to 37m,

sand and coral. The water was smooth and sheltered from

every direction by the surrounding reefs awash.

8.5 Bramble Haven has four entrances, but the only safe one is at

the SW corner, which is 0.75 mile wide, with depths of from

10.9 to 18.3m.

8.5 The Duperre Islets, consisting of five low wooded uninhabited islets and a sand cay, lie on the N side of Bramble

Haven. The middle islet is located about 11 miles E of Lejeune

Islet. Punawan, the E islet, is about 30m high to the tops of the

trees.

8.5 Vessels can take good anchorage about 0.25 mile NE of the

middle of Duperre Islet, in depths of from 12.8 to 18.3m.

8.5 The E part of Bramble Haven reef was reported to lie 0.3

mile E of the charted position. 

8.5 The Jomard Islands (11°15'S., 152°08'E.), consisting of

two wooded and uninhabited islands, lie at the S end of Jomard

Entrance.

8.5 Pana Waipona, 26m high, is the largest and westernmost of

the islands. A steep-to reef, with two partially submerged

wrecks on it, extends about 1 mile S of the island. The fringing

reef extends about 91m from the W side of the island.

8.5 A light stands on the W extremity of Pana Waipona Island.

8.5 A bank, with a depth of 37m, was reported to lie about 2.75

miles WNW of the light structure.

8.5 Pana Rai Rai, the E island, lies 2 miles ENE of Pana Waipona Island. The island lies on the NW end of Uruba Reef. A

shallow spit, with submerged rocks off the end, extends about

0.7 mile NNW from the island.

8.6 Jomard Entrance (11°15'S., 152°07'E.) is deep clear

channel between the E part of the barrier reef surrounding

Bramble Haven and the W side of Uruba Reef. It is used by

vessels trading between Australia, China, and Japan.

8.6 The passage is about 5 miles wide, with depths of over

183m. Pana Waipona Island lies toward the E side of midchannel, with depths of less than 274m between it and Uruba

Reef.

8.6 The tidal currents run through Jomard Entrance at the rate of

3 to 4 knots; the flood sets S by E, the ebb N by W. The

currents cannot be allowed for with absolute certainty. In the

NW part of the entrance are tide rips.

8.6 Discolored water was reported about 60 miles S of Jomard

Entrance.

8.6 Directions.—Deep-draft vessels heading N through Jomard

Entrance may pass on either side of Pana Waipona Island and

should then steer to pass between Lunn Island and Pana niu

(10°49'S., 152°11'E.), the westernmost islet of the Torlesse

Group. Vessels should then pass E of Bunora Island, and W of

Hastings Island, then to Bougainville or Goschen Straits. The

courses and distances along this track can best be seen on the

chart.

Barrier Reef—East of Jomard Entrance

8.7 East of Jomard Entrance, the barrier reef encircles

many of the islands of the Louisiade Archipelago. One part of

the barrier reef extends in an E direction for about 30 miles as a

much broken and partly submerged obstacle. There are some

islands and reefs near Jomard Entrance. The Sunken Barrier, is

a reef lying E of these islands with considerable depths in

places. The character of the reef changes completely E of this

submerged portion, and for over 80 miles runs in an ESE

direction, maintaining a solid and almost unbroken front, to a

point 12 miles E of Tagula Island.

8.7 The other part of the barrier reef runs in a NE direction for

about 36 miles from Jomard Entrance. Then it runs in a SE

direction and eventually connects with the first branch E of

Tagula Island.

8.7 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents run with considerable

force through the passages in the reefs and generally set

straight through. West of Jomard Entrance the South Subtropical Current generally sets W. However, the currents in this

area are variable with rates up to 2 knots and the direction may

be influenced by the Northwest Monsoon.

8.7 On the Sunken Barrier, E of the Duchateau Islands

(11°17'S., 152°22'E.), the currents were observed to run as

much as 4.5 knots, the strength of the flood setting SSW and

the ebb NNE. This velocity was only apparent during strong

SE winds. The rate, at other times, is about 2 knots.

8.7 On the Sunken Barrier, the first portion of the flood sets

about SW, gradually changing its direction to the S, the last

quarter running to the SE; then, with only a short period of

slack water, the first of the ebb makes to the NE, gradually

changing to N and NW. The change of current coincides very

nearly, with the times of HW and LW, but in the passages the

currents may continue to run for perhaps 1 hour longer. It was

reported, that under certain conditions of wind, the currents in

the passages may overrun HW or LW at the shore by as much

as 3 hours. The currents cannot be allowed for with absolute

certainty.

8.7 In the E part of the Louisiade Archipelago, the flood current

runs SW and the ebb in a contrary direction, but these are

modified by the reefs and the trends of the coast. The current

turns, approximately, at HW and LW by the shore.

8.7 Through the narrow openings the tidal currents run from 3 to

5 knots; this is more especially the case in the passages through

the outer barrier reefs, where they cause overfalls and tide rips.

From three days before to three days after full and new moon

there is not much change in the strength of these currents.

During this period they have their maximum strength and there

is little or no interval of SW. In the intervening period their rate

diminishes considerably and suddenly.

8.8 The Montemont Islets (11°18'S., 152°18'E.) are two

small bush-covered islets lying on the barrier reef in a position

about 7 miles SE of Pana rai rai.

8.8 Iataui, the W islet, 12.2m high, lies on the N edge of a small

coral reef. A smaller reef lies 1.5 miles W of Iataui Islet. It is

surrounded by foul ground except on its S side. The passage

between these two reefs, which are steep-to on their S sides,

should not be attempted as the bottom is uneven, with heavy

overfalls and tide rips.
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 165

Pub. 164

8.8 A reef, with a least depth of 7.3m, lies about 1.5 miles N of

Iataui Islet.

8.8 Pana Boba, the E and larger islet, is 15.2m high and lies in

the center of a larger crescent-shaped reef. Rocks and foul

ground extend about 1 mile from the N and NW sides of Pana

Boba Islet. The E edge of the crescent-shaped reef, on which

the sea breaks heavily, is 1 mile from the islet; foul ground

extends 0.25 mile farther E.

8.8 There is a channel across the barrier reef between the SE end

of Uruba Reef (11°16'S., 152°12'E.) and the small reef about 3

miles SE of it, with depths from 10.9 to 14.6m. The channel is

narrowed to a width of 1.5 miles by a spit with depths of 7.3m

or less, extending E from Uruba Reef. A reef, with a depth of

9.1m lies in the SE part of the channel.

8.8 Vessels can take fair anchorage off the N side of the

Montemont Islands, outside the limits of the rocks and foul

ground, in depths of from 22 to 28m, sand and mud.

8.9 The Duchateau Islands (11°17'S., 152°22'E.), lying

NE of the Montemont Islands, consist of three low wooded

islets, which are inhabited.

8.9 Panabobaiana, the westernmost and largest islet, is 23m high

and fringed by a sunken reef. This reef extends about 0.25 mile

from the SE side of the islet and 183m from the N side. The

NW side of the reef is broken, affording landing on the sandy

beach.

8.9 Hacker Patch and Ellery Patch, two reefs with depths of

7.3m, lie, respectively, about 1.25 and 0.75 mile N of the N

extremity of Panabobaiana.

8.9 Panarurawara and Kukuluba, the two E islets, lie on the N

and NW edges of a reef, which dries, located about 0.5 mile E

of Pana bobai ana. Foul ground lies off the N and NW sides of

this reef.

8.9 A narrow channel lies between the reefs surrounding Panabobaiana Islet and Panarurawara Islet, with depths of from 7.3

to 10.9m. The channel is poor, because of the heavy swell and

overfalls caused by the strong tidal currents. A reef, with a

depth of 3m, lies in the N entrance.

8.9 There is a channel about 1.75 miles wide between the edges

of the reefs surrounding Panabobaiana Islet and the E Montemont Islet. It is clear of dangers, the charted depths are

between 10.9m and 20m. Tide rips occur at the S end of this

channel.

8.9 Vessels can take anchorage, sheltered from the Southeast

Monsoon, about 0.5 mile N of Panarurawara Islet, in depths of

from 31 to 35m, sand and shells.

8.9 The change of the tidal currents coincides very nearly with H

and LW, but in the channels the currents may continue to run

for perhaps 1 hour after H and LW by the shore.

8.9 The flood current sets to the S ; the ebb current sets to the N.

8.9 Anchor Patches (11°20'S., 152°34'E.), consisting of three

patches with a least depth of 7.3m over them, lie about 11

miles ESE of the Duchateau Islands. Shoals, with depths of

from 3.7 to 9.1m, lie between Anchor Patches and the reef,

awash, at the SE end of Sunken Barrier, about 5.5 miles SE.

8.9 It is not advisable to cross the barrier reef E of Anchor

Patches unless quite certain of the vessels position.

8.9 Duchateau Entrance (11°18'S., 152°28'E.) is the best approach from the S and W to the inner waters N of the barrier

reef is over the Sunken Barrier between the Duchateau Islands

and Anchor Patches. The edge of the reef surrounding the easternmost Duchateau Island may be clearly seen, and immediately E of this reef the barrier may be crossed in depths of

from 12.8 to 29m. Duchateau Entrance, with a least depth of

14.6m at its S end, lies about 5.5 miles E of the Duchateau Islands. Another passage, with depths of more than 18.3m, lies

about 2 miles farther E. The depths over other parts of the

Sunken Barrier are from 7.3 to 18.3m.

The Calvados Chain

8.10 The Calvados Chain (11°10'S., 152°45'E.) is a long

succession of mountainous islands extending in a general ESE

direction from Panasia Island (11°08'S., 152°20'E.) and terminating with Hemenahei Island, about 43 miles E of Panasia.

8.10 The larger islands are densely wooded, especially on their S

sides. They are sparsely populated with most of the villages

situated on the N sides of the islands.

8.10 Vessels must exercise caution when navigating among these

islands, as the reefs are all difficult to see except in very good

light conditions.

8.10 There is a passage, with depths of over 9.1m, leading into

the inner waters of Louisiade Archipelago. It is about 3 miles

wide and lies between the reef extending N from Pana Rai Rai,

the E of the Jomard Islands, and the reef extending 9 miles SW

from Panasia Island, about 11 miles NE.

8.10 Mabb Patch, with a depth of 5.5m, lies in the middle of the

above navigable channel in a position about 2.5 miles N of

Pana Rai Rai Island.

8.10 Kei Keia Reef, 3.5 miles in length and 2 miles in breadth at

its SW end, lies in a NE and SW direction. The NW side of the

reef is steep-to, but foul ground extends about 2.5 miles from

its S and SE side. The area should be avoided.

8.10 Kei Keia Reef is separated from Panavaravara Islet Reef,

located E of it, by Howai Tinua Passage, which is heavily

encumbered with shoals and useless as a channel.

8.10 Panavaravara Islet (11°08'S., 152°18'E.), lying 10 miles

NE of Pana Rai Rai, is rocky and wooded, with a sharp summit

105m high. A sand spit extends from the N end, on the E side

of which there is a village and a good landing place. The islet

stands on the SE end of a reef. A channel about 0.5 mile wide

lies between Panavaravara Islet and Horrara Gowan Reef. This

channel is clear of dangers, though somewhat tortuous, with

depths of from 12.8 to 33m. The channel is not recommended

for general use, because the S approaches are encumbered with

reefs extending 2 miles SE of Panavaravara.

8.10 Vessels passing through the channel should keep to the SW

edge of the fringing reef off Panasia Island in order to avoid the

foul ground farther to the SW. There are shoals with least

depths of 1.8m in this area.

8.10 The tidal current sets through this channel with great

strength, forming strong eddies.

8.11 Panasia Island (11°08'S., 152°20'E.) is rugged and

composed of cliffs, nearly perpendicular, with ravines between

them. The summit, 161m high, is near the center of the island.

The island is 2 miles in length and 0.5 mile in width at its E

end. The other portion of the island is narrow, terminating in a

rocky point at the W end.
166 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

8.11 Horrara Gowan Reef (11°06'S., 152°18'E.) extends about 4

miles NW of Panasia Island and is 1.5 miles in width. The drying outer edges enclose a lagoon in which there are numerous

shoals. The E side of Horrara Gowan Reef is broken and not

safe to approach when transiting Cormorant Channel.

8.11 Ehiki Islet, 15.2m high and wooded, lies near the N end of

this lagoon. Nasakoli Islet lies on the W side, about 1 mile N of

the W extremity of Panasia Island.

8.11 Tawal Reef (11°04'S., 152°21'E.), an extensive horseshoeshaped reef, lies separated from Horrara gowan Reef by Cormorant Channel. The enclosed lagoon is open to the S, but the

entrance is encumbered by several reefs. One of the Sloss Islets

lies on its NE edge.

8.11 No ina Islet (11°05'S., 152°21'E.), small and wooded, lies

on the NE side of Cormorant Channel and 3.25 miles N of the

E end of Panasia Island. It is located on the W end of a small

reef separated from Tawal Reef by a channel 0.4 mile in width.

8.11 A reef, with a least depth of 7.3m, lies about 1 mile SSE of

No ina Islet. During flood current there are heavy overfalls

over this reef.

8.11 Cormorant Channel (11°05'S., 152°20'E.), about 1.5 miles

wide, lies between Tawal Reef and Horrara Gowan Reef. The

least depth is about 28m. A reef, with a depth of 9.1m, lies

nearly in mid-channel, about 2 miles NNE of the E side of

Panasia Island.

8.11 The tidal currents run through Cormorant Channel with considerable force, with the flood setting SE and the ebb setting

NW.

8.11 The Sloss Islets (11°03'S., 152°23'E.) are two wooded coral

islets lying about 1 mile apart in an E and W direction. Rara,

the W islet, 35m high, lies on the NE edge of Tawal Reef.

Panaroba the other islet, 33m high, lies on the NW edge of the

reef lying between Tawal Reef and Utian Island Reef.

8.12 West Brooker Passage (11°03'S., 152°24'E.), separating the two reefs on which the Sloss Islets stand, has a width

of about 0.3 mile in the middle, but widens from 0.7 to 0.8 mile

at each end. The reefs on either side of this channel are steepto, except W of Panaroba Islet, where shoal water extends a

short distance into the passage.

8.12 In the S half, on the W side of the channel, a narrow ridge

with depths of 7.3m or less extends about 0.75 mile SSE of the

SE extremity of Tawai Reef. Foul ground extends about 0.5

mile S from the S end of the reef forming the E side of the

channel. These spits are usually marked by overfalls and tide

rips.

Utian Island (Brooker Island) (11°03'S., 152°27'E.), 140m

high at its S end, conical and wooded, lies about 4.75 miles

ENE of No ina Islet. The island is located in the middle of a

lagoon enclosed by a coral reef, the edges of which, generally,

dry. There are two bays on the N side of the island. A ridge

traverses the island throughout its length, rising to a height of

106m at the W end. There is a boat channel into the lagoon SW

of the W extremity of the island. This channel, though encumbered with reefs, has depths of from 12.8 to 18.3m.

8.12 East Brooker Passage (11°03'S., 152°26'E.) lies between

the reef surrounding Utian Island and the reef on which Panaroba stands. The S half of this channel is divided by a pearshaped reef, which may be passed on either side. Shoal water

extends 0.33 mile S and SE of the reef. The preferred passage

lies to the W of this reef, with depths of from 51 to 59m.

8.12 The tidal current runs through East Brooker Passage at the

rate of from 5 to 6 knots at springs, the flood setting SSE and

ebb in the opposite direction.

8.12 Caution.—Approaching from S, it is not desirable to take

either of the Brooker Passages on the ebb, as the vessel is likely

to become uncontrollable. The shoal water off the S edges of

the reef render caution necessary, as they cannot always be

seen. The W passage is the better of the two, being wider and,

therefore, having less strength of current.

8.12 Anchorage is not available in the vicinity of the islands and

reefs described above. The N, or lee sides are too steep and the

S sides too exposed to wind and sea during the Southeast Trade

Winds. In the channels, these disadvantages are aggravated by

the strength of the tidal currents.

8.13 Panarora Island (11°07'S., 152°30'E.), about 4 miles

SE of Utian Island, is rocky with a 164m peak near its E end.

The island is conspicuous from E, appearing as a lofty conical

tower. The island is fringed by a reef extending farthest

offshore on the NW side, where there is a village.

8.13 Haikuiri Shoal, with a depth of less than 1.8m, coral, lies

about 1 mile NW of the NW end of Panarora Island. It breaks

heavily with any swell. The shoal is steep-to on its SE side,

with a deep channel between it and the reef surrounding Panarora Island. Shoals, with depths of 9.1m and 2.7m lie, respectively, about 0.5 mile N and 0.75 mile NNE of Haikuiri Shoal.

8.13 A shoal, was reported to lie about 1 mile S of the E extremity

of Panarora Island.

Panauduudi Island (11°03'S., 152°29'E.), 119m high, lies

about 1.25 miles E of Utian Island. Toloi awa Islet, 73m high,

lies close off the SE end of the island.

8.13 Two reefs, separated by a deep channel, extend about 2 miles

S from Panauduudi Island.

8.13 The Spire Islets (11°05'S., 152°29'E.) are two small coral

islets, standing on a small reef close off the SE corner of the

reef surrounding Utian Island. The islets are 0.25 mile apart

and covered with bushes from 6.1 to 9.1m in height.

8.13 A deep channel, which is from 0.3 to 0.5 mile in width and 3

miles in length, lies in a NNW and SSE direction between the

reefs encircling Utian Island and Panauduudi Island.

8.13 The best entrance to this channel from the S is close E of the

Spire Islets, avoiding Haikuiri Shoal and the shoals N and NNE

of it. The tidal currents in the channel run very strong, the flood

setting to the S and the ebb to the N.

8.14 Gulewa Island (11°03'S., 152°31'E.), lying about 1

mile E of Panauduudi Island, has a peak near each end. The S

peak, 96m high, is covered with trees. The N peak is low and

bare. The island is cultivated and has a village in the cove on

the SE side.

8.14 Tobaiam Islet, 44m high, lies close off the S extremity of

Gulewa Island. Sibumbum Islet, 23m high, lies about 0.75 mile

NE of the N extremity of the same island.

8.14 Aiwa Buna Reef (11°02'S., 152°31'E.) forms the N side of

the lagoon in which lie Panauduudi Island and Gulewa Island.

It is 4 miles in length and steep-to on its N side. In the lagoon,

which has not been closely examined, there are depths of from

18.3 to 26m and numerous reefs throughout. Two passages
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 167

Pub. 164

lead into the lagoon, one with a depth of 7.3m to the N of

Panauduudi Island and the other to the W of Tobaiam Islet, but

neither of them can be recommended for a vessel.

8.14 Hana Hawawan Reef consists of series of reefs extending

about 2.25 miles in a NNE direction from Tobaiam Islet,

leaving a narrow passage between its N end and the E end of

Aiwa Buna Reef.

8.15 Saru nom nom Islet (11°02'S., 152°33'E.), 15.2m

high and wooded, is located on the N end of a reef which lies E

of Gulewa Island.

8.15 Pana Tatoni Islet (11°03'S., 152°34'E.), 26m high, is

located about 0.8 mile SE of Saru nom nom and on the W edge

of a reef about 0.6 mile in length.

8.15 Horakiraki Passage (11°01'S., 152°33'E.), an opening in

the barrier reef about 0.5 mile in width, lies close E of Aiwa

Buna Reef. The E part of the passage is encumbered with reefs,

but there is a fairway on the W side which may be used with

safety by small vessels with local knowledge. The only danger

is a reef, with a depth of 3.6m, lying 183m N of Hana

Hawawan Reef.

8.15 Directions.—The central and highest tree on Pana Tatoni

Islet, in range with the summit of Panua Keikeisa Islet

(11°06'S., 152°36'E.), bearing 141°, leads directly through the

channel. The E extremity of Pana Tatoni Islet in range with the

S extremity of Ninan Islet (11°04'S., 152°35'E.), bearing 138°,

leads close SW of the coral heads on the NE side of the

passage, but rather close to the NE corner of Aiwa Buna Reef.

This reef is steep-to, distinctly visible, and can be rounded by

eye. This latter range is probably preferable, as the summit of

Panua Keikeisa is not easy to see over Pana Tatoni.

8.15 Caution.—The narrowest part of the channel is between this

reef and a coral head, with a depth of 5.5m, lying 0.15 mile to

the E. Here the tidal current runs with considerable strength in

a somewhat oblique direction, necessitating strict attention to

the range marks, and a careful lookout for the patches, which

will usually be visible.

8.16 Howaho aimo Passage (11°03'S., 152°32'E.) leads

into Horaki raki Passage, between the SE side of Hana

Hawawan Reef and the W side of the reef on which Saru nom

nom Islet stands. There is a small reef, which nearly dries, in

the middle of the channel, about 0.75 mile SW of the S

extremity of Saru nom nom Islet, which narrows the channel to

0.2 mile. The edge of the reef on the E side is fairly steep, and

on this side is the best passage. A tongue of shoal water

extends 0.15 mile in a NW direction from the N end of Saru

nom nom Islet Reef.

8.16 The E extremity of Pana Rora Island, in range with the W

extremity of Venariwa Island (11°04'S., 152°32'E.), bearing

203°, leads through the channel between the reef and the edge

of the reef on the E side.

Moturina Island (Motorina Island) (11°05'S., 152°34'E.)

rises to a pyramidal hill, 301m high, at its W end. It is densely

wooded, and of irregular shape. The hill is most conspicuous

when viewed from the SE. It appears flat-topped from the SW.

8.16 The SE side of the island forms a bay, fringed by a reef, on

which the sea breaks heavily. A reef, lies about 0.5 mile off the

middle of this side of the island. Several villages are situated

on the shores of the bay. The E side, which is fringed by a reef,

but without any off-lying dangers, is exposed to the prevailing

wind. There are depths of 3.6m and 7.3m extending 1 mile

offshore in the middle of the N coast. On the SW side, about

0.5 mile NW of the S extremity, there are submerged rocks,

some of which break, with other shoal depths, about 0.2 mile

NW of it. There is an anchorage in this area, in 7.3m.

8.16 Vessels can take sheltered anchorage in Riman Bay, on the

NW side of Moturina Island, in a depth of 18.3m, sand. Vessels

should bring Moturina Peak in range with a rocky point about

midway between the entrance points, bearing 159°, and the

NW point of Moturina Island in range with the W summit of

Ululina Island, bearing 241°. This anchorage is the best in this

part of the Calvados Chain, and is out of the influence of the

tidal currents.

8.16 Anchorage is also available on the SW side of Moturina

Island between the reef fringing shore and off-lying shoals, in

depths from 11 to 18m.

8.16 Ninan Islet (11°04'S., 152°35'E.) lies about 0.5 mile N of

the NE point of Moturina Island. The islet has a peak at each

end; the N and higher, is wooded with an elevation of 53m.

Shoals, with a depth of 5.5m, lie between Ninan Islet and

Moturina Island.

8.16 Ululina Island (11°05'S., 152°32'E.) lies W of Moturina Island, from which it is separated by Ara gum gum Passage,

which is about 0.25 mile in width. The wooded summit, 99m

high, stands on the E end of the island. On the W end of the

island, where a village is situated, there is a grassy peak, 51m

high.

8.16 A reef extends about 0.7 mile W from the W end of the island. A shoal, with depths of from 5.5 to 7.3m extends 0.2 mile

from the NE side of the island. Foul ground, which does not

break in calm weather, extends 0.4 mile S from the SE side of

the island. A dangerous rock lies between the W end of Ululina

Island and the S side of Venariwa.

8.17 Ara gum gum Passage (11°05'S., 152°33'E.) is 0.2

mile wide at the S end between the foul ground extending S

from Ululina Island and the reefs lying off the SW side of

Moturina Island. The passage is 0.15 mile wide between the

islands, with depths of from 12.8 to 16.5m.

8.17 The tidal currents set strongly through Ara gum gum Passage; the ebb sets to the N and the flood sets to the S. The range

marks are good, and the channel presents no great difficulty.

8.17 Directions.—Vessels approaching Ara gum gum Passage

from the S should keep the E extremity of Ululina Island in

range with the SW end of Saru Nomnom Islet, bearing 002°.

This range leads 183m E of the foul ground lying S of Ululina

Island, and between it and the shoals to the SE, crossing the

connecting barrier in a depth of 12.8m. When the SW extremity of Ululina Island is in range with the NE point of Utian

Island, bearing about 298°, steer 015°. When the SW point of

Moturina Island bears 167°, bring this point astern on this

bearing, which leads midway between the fringing reef on the

Moturina side and the shoal extending from the NE side of

Ululina Island, in depths of 5.5 to 7.3m.

8.18 Venariwa Island (11°04'S., 152°32'E.), lying NW of

Moturina Island and close N of Ululina Island, is covered with

grass and 152m high. The island presents a sharp peak when
168 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

seen from the NW or SE, but from other directions it appears

more or less flat-topped.

8.18 The S and W sides of the island are fringed by a reef. A rock,

which dries 1.5m, lies about 91m S of the S extremity of the

island. There are rocky patches lying awash 0.2 mile SW of

this drying rock.

8.18 Gowan Passage between Venariwa Island and Ululina Island

is only 91m wide between the rocks, awash, off the SW end of

Venariwa Island and the edge of the shoal, with depths of 3.6 to

5.5m, extending N and W from Ululina Island. The passage is

not recommended.

8.18 Gua awana Passage (11°04'S., 152°32'E.), lying between

Tobaiam Islet and Venariwa Island, about 0.85 mile SE, is deep

in the fairway.

8.18 The tidal currents run with considerable strength through

Gua awana Passage. The flood setting S and the ebb to the N.

These general directions are modified by the trend of the reefs.

8.18 Emerald Shoal (11°08'S., 152°33'E.), with a least depth of

4.5m, lies about 1.5 miles S of the S extremity of Moturina

Island. It lies in the fairway of vessels making for Boi U Passage from the W, and must be approached with care, as there is

no good clearing mark for it.

8.18 Two shoals, with depths of 10.9m, lie 0.25 mile apart, about

3.25 miles SE of Emerald Shoal, in the SW approach to Migemma Gemma Passage.

8.18 Bramble Patch (11°10'S., 152°30'E.), with a least depth of

4.9m, lies about 5 miles SW of the S extremity of Moturina

Island. A shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, lies about 2.5 miles SE

of Bramble Patch. A bank, with a least depth of 16.5m, lies

about 5 miles WSW of Bramble Patch.

8.18 The S peak of Gulenwa Island (11°03'S., 152°31'E.), open

E of Pana rora Island, bearing 000°, leads E of Bramble Patch,

and W of the 7.3m shoal.

8.19 Panua Keikeisa Islet (11°06'S., 152°36'E.), wooded

and 40m high at its N end, lies about 0.75 mile ESE of the SE

point of Moturina Island. The islet is surrounded by a reef

extending 0.5 mile E from its NE extremity, with a rock, 15.2m

high, on its outer edge. Shoal water extends about 0.5 mile S

from the islet. In the middle of the passage between Panua

Keikeisa Islet and Moturina Island there is rock, 0.9m high,

lying on the N end of a bank about 1.25 miles long, with a least

depth of 7.3m.

8.19 Laiwan Islet (11°07'S., 152°38'E.), lying about 1.75 miles E

of Panua Keikeisa Islet, is flat-topped and wooded, and 30m

high to the tops of the trees. A bank, with a depth of 5.5m, on

the outer edge of which there is a rock 18.3m high, extends

about 0.5 mile SW from the SW end of the islet. A bank, with

depths of 3.6 to 5.5m, extends 0.4 mile NNE from the NE end.

8.19 Boi U Passage (11°07'S., 152°37'E.), between Panua Keikeisa Islet and Laiwan Islet, is about 1.25 miles wide between

the reefs on either side. A shoal, with a depth of 20m, lies near

the middle of the S end of the passage. A shoal, with a depth of

12.8m, lies about 1.5 miles NE of the NE extremity of Laiwan

Islet.

8.19 The tidal currents set strongly through this passage, causing

heavy overfalls and tide rips, frequently dangerous to boats.

8.19 Bonna wan Island (11°08'S., 152°39'E.), 102m high, and

covered with grass, lies on the N end of a reef, lying about 1.75

miles SE of Laiwan Islet. A reef extends 0.5 mile W from the

SW point of the island and the same distance S from the S

extremity. Shoal water, with depths under 5.5m, extends 0.5

mile SE from the extremity of the latter reef. A detached islet,

9.1m high, lies on the reef off the SW point of the island.

8.19 Migemma Gemma Passage (11°08'S., 152°39'E.), between

Laiwan Islet and Bonna wan Island, is about 1.25 miles wide,

deep and clear of dangers. Tidal currents set strongly through

this passage, causing heavy overfalls and tide rips, frequently

dangerous to boats.

8.20 Bagaman Island (11°08'S., 152°41'E.), the E part of

which is named Paba baga, lies close E of Bonna wan Island. It

is thickly wooded, except on some of the N slopes, and there is

a village on its W side. The W part of the island rises to an

elevation of 219m, the E part to 149m.

8.20 Aurobu Islet, 45m high, rocky and wooded, lies about 0.4

mile S of the E entrance point of the bay on the S side of the

island. A rock, 8.2m high, lies 183m S of the W entrance point

of the same bay.

8.20 Pana mun Passage (11°08'S., 152°40'E.), between Bonna

wann Island and Bagaman Island, is about 0.3 mile wide

between the fringing bank on either side. Depths of 7.3 to 9.1m

are found in the narrow channel. The tidal currents set strongly

through this passage.

8.20 Vessels can take anchorage in the NE part of Pana mun

Passage, off a village on the W side of Bagaman Island, in a

depth of 20m, sand. Vessels should anchor with the two points

on the SW side of the island in range, bearing 198°, and the N

point of Bonna wan Island in range with Laiwan Island, bearing 302°. This anchorage is not affected by the tidal currents,

but frequently heavy squalls come off the land.

8.20 Vessels can also obtain anchorage in the middle of the E part

of the bay on the N side of Bagaman Island, in depths of from

26 to 29m, sand and coral. Vessels should anchor with the NE

entrance point of the bay in range with the N point of Bobo

eina Island, bearing about 065°. The bay on the S side of the

island is too exposed for safe anchorage, and the approach to it

is partially obstructed by a sunken reef extending E from

Bonna wan Island. This reef extends 2.25 miles SE of Bonna

wan Island and includes a depth of 4m and a rock, awash.

8.20 Gedge Shoals (11°12'S., 152°41'E.), divided into two parts

by a deep channel, lies about 2.5 miles S of Bagaman Island.

On the SE side there is a least depth of 5.5m, and on the NW

part, 6.4m.

8.20 Webb Patch (11°13'S., 152°39'E.), with a depth of 6.4m,

lies about 4.5 miles SSW of the S extremity of Bagaman

Island.

8.20 Yule Patches (11°15'S., 152°42'E.) consist of three coral

reefs, the easternmost of which has a least depth of 3.6m and

lies about 5.75 miles S of the E entrance point of the bay on the

S side of Bagaman Island. The W and middle reefs, with

depths of 7.3m, lie about 2 miles SW and 3.75 miles WSW of

the 3.6m shoal mentioned above.

8.21 Bobo Eina Island (11°08'S., 152°44'E.), thickly

wooded and 243m high, lies 1 mile E of Bagaman Island.

8.21 Gilia Islet, 79m high, and covered with grass, is connected

by a reef with the W side of Bobo Eina Island. A clear passage

about 0.2 mile wide lies between Gilia and Bagaman Island. A

rock, which breaks, lies about 183m SW of Gila.
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 169

Pub. 164

8.21 Wori wori Patches (11°06'S., 152°44'E.), with depths of

5.5m and 7.3m, sand and coral, lie within 0.75 mile NNW of

Hana Manawi Point, the N extremity of Bobo Eina Island.

Depths of 24 to 28m, between the point, which is steep-to, and

the two patches. These patches always show well.

8.21 Stanton Patch (11°05'S., 152°43'E.), with a depth of 5.5m,

lies about 1.75 miles NNW of Hana Manawi Point.

8.21 Two reefs, with depths of 7.3m and 6.4m, lie, respectively,

about 1.25 miles S and 1.5 miles SW of Bobo Eina Island.

8.21 Vessels can take anchorage on the W side of Bobo Eina

Island, in a depth of 26m, sand and coral. Vessels may anchor,

with the E extremity of Gilia Islet bearing 187° and the N

extremity of Bagaman Island in range with the summit of

Moturina Island (11°05'S., 152°34'E.) bearing 285°. This anchorage is affected by the tidal currents, as they set strongly

through the passage and over the reef on either side of Gilia

Islet.

8.21 Mabneian Islet (11°08'S., 152°46'E.), wooded and 73m

high, lies on the N end of a reef, about 1 mile E of Bobo Eina

Island. Pana Kuba and Leiga are two wooded islets, 64m and

47m high, respectively, and 0.15 mile apart, lying on the S end

of the same reef. Shoal water extends about 0.3 mile SW from

Leiga Islet.

8.22 Kivi Kivi Passage (11°08'S., 152°45'E.), lying

between Bobo Eina Island and Mabneian Islet, is a safe

channel, about 1 mile wide. The tidal currents set strongly N

and S through the passage. These tidal currents sweep round

Mabneian Islet, causing a breaking sea in the passage.

8.22 Pana Numara Island (11°10'S., 152°47'E.), 131m high, lies

0.5 mile SE of Leiga Islet. The shores of the island are

generally steep-to, except at the W end, from which shoal

water extends 183m. A small village stands on the NE side of

the island. Kurupan Islet, 45m high, lies close off the NE extremity of Pana Numara Island.

8.22 Bahil Passage, between Leiga Islet and Pana Numara Island,

is over 0.5 mile wide, and clear of dangers.

8.22 Vessels can take good anchorage in Hoba Bay, on the N side

of Pana Numara Island, in a depth of 27m, sand. This anchorage is sheltered from the prevailing wind and not affected by

the tidal currents.

8.23 Yaruman Island (11°09'S., 152°48'E.), 87m high,

and densely wooded, lies about 0.6 mile NE of the NE point of

Pana numara Island.

8.23 Panangaribu Island (11°08'S., 152°49'E.) 90m high, and

densely wooded, lies about 0.2 mile E of Yaruman Island. The

channel between these islands is clear of dangers in midchannel. The tidal currents run through this channel with considerable force, causing a heavy breaking sea.

8.23 Nunuan Islet, 61m high, and wooded, lies about 183m S of

Panangaribu Island.

8.23 Panantanian Island (11°09'S., 152°50'E.), 125m high and

densely wooded, lies about 1 mile SE of Panangaribu Island.

Shoal water extends about 0.3 mile N from the N end of the island. There is a village on the NW side, but landing is difficult,

except at HW, when the reef is covered.

8.23 Pornani Passage (11°09'S., 152°49'E.), lying between

Nunuan Islet and Panantanian Island, is about 0.75 mile wide,

with depths of from 22 to 29m. The shores of the passage are

steep-to, but when the tidal current is against the wind there is

a heavy breaking sea.

8.23 Pana Krusima Island (11°10'S., 152°52'E.), wooded and

109m high near its S end, lies about 1.75 miles E of Panantanian Island. The S part is fringed by a reef, which on the E

side, is steep-to, and extends about 0.35 mile offshore. There

are some islets on the reef, one which is 4.5m high, lying about

0.4 mile S of Su waian Point, the N extremity of the island. A

reef, with depths of from 3.6 to 7.3m, extends 1 mile S from

the island. The summit of Bagaman Island in range with the S

extremity of Pana numara Island, bearing about 287°, leads

SW of this reef.

8.23 Pori Passage (11°09'S., 152°51'E.) lies between Pana Krusima Island and Panantanian Island, about 1.75 miles W. A

shoal, with a least depth of 9.1m, lies near the middle of the S

entrance of Pori Passage, about 0.6 mile SE of the SE extremity of Panantanian Island. Another shoal, with a depth of 11m,

lies 0.5 mile SSE of this 9.1m depth. The N approach is encumbered by Reiga Shoals.

8.24 Reiga Shoals (11°08'S., 152°51'E.) lie on a crescentshaped bank, which connects the N point of Panantanian Island

with the N point of Pana Krusima Island. The shallowest part,

with a depth of 7.3m, lies about 1.5 miles N of Panantanian

Island. A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies about 1 mile NW of

the N point of Pana Krusima Island.

8.24 The bank, which has general depths of from 12.8 to 18.3m,

is marked by heavy tide rips. The shoal spots should be

avoided, as the depths may be less than charted.

8.24 Tauara Shoal (11°07'S., 152°54'E.), with a least depth of

2.7m, coral, lies about 1.75 miles NE of the N extremity of

Pana Krusima Island. This shoal shows clearly in a good light.

8.24 Dawson Banks (11°12'S., 152°48'E.), consisting of three

banks extending for a distance of 5 miles in a WNW and ESE

direction. A shoal, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies about 3

miles SSW of Panantanian Island. Shoals, with depths of 7.3m

and 5.5m lie, respectively, near the NW and SE ends of the

bank.

8.24 Dayman Banks (11°15'S., 152°49'E.), consisting of three

shallow banks, lie S of and parallel to Dawson Banks. The

central and largest bank, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies about

5.25 miles S of Panantanian Island. The other two banks, with

depths of 5.5m and 7.3m lie, respectively, about 4.5 miles SSW

and 6.5 miles SSE of Panantanian Island.

8.25 Sullivan Patch (11°16'S., 152°47'E.), with a least

depth of 4.5m, lies about 6 miles S of Pana numara Island. A

shoal, with a least depth of 5.5m, lies about 2.25 miles SE of

Sullivan Patch.

Kuanak Island (Abaga gaheia Island) (11°10'S., 152°55'E.),

181m high near its S end, lies about 1.75 miles E of Pana Krusima Island. A ridge extends N from the summit terminating in

a sharp, wooded hill, about 167m high. The S shores of the

island are bold and cliffy.

8.25 Gigila Island (11°10'S., 152°57'E.), 128m high and wooded,

with some grassy slopes on the N side, is connected to the SE

part of Abaga gaheia by a reef. The two islands form a bay on

the N side, but is not a good anchorage.

8.25 Waia Islet, 50m high, lies close S of the E extremity of

Gigila Island.
170 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

8.25 A reef, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.75 mile S of Waia

Islet.

8.25 Uli Bonna Bonna Passage (11°10'S., 152°58'E.), between

Gigila Island and Yakimoan Island, located about 0.75 mile E

of it, is clear of dangers, except for a reef which extends about

0.15 mile from the SE side of Gigila Island. It is reported to be

a good passage.

8.25 Taifaur Islet (11°09'S., 152°54'E.), 82m high and covered

with grass, lies 0.15 mile NW of the NW extremity of Abaga

gaheia Island, and is connected to it by a reef.

8.25 Einamu Islet, 42m high, and wedge-shaped, lies about 0.5

mile W of the S extremity of Taifaur Islet. Shoal water extends

about 183m N and E from the islet, but the channel on either

side is clear of dangers.

8.25 Vessels can take anchorage in the outer portion of the W bay

on the N side of Abaga gaheia Island, known as Robinson

Anchorage (11°09'S., 152°55'E.), in depths of from 24 to 29m,

sand and coral. Vessels anchor with the two N points of the

island in range, bearing 097°, and the W hill 99m high, bearing

221°. The shores of the bay are fringed by a reef. A rock, with

a depth of 1.8m, lies about 183m off the point on the SW side

of the anchorage.

8.25 Ward Rock (11°07'S., 152°56'E.), with a depth of 2.7m, lies

2 miles NE of the N extremity of Taifaur Islet.

8.25 Power Patch, a coral head with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 3

miles NNE of Taifaur Islet.

8.25 Musters Patches (11°15'S., 152°53'E.), consisting of three

shoals, with depths of from 6.4 to 9.1m, lie about 4.75 miles

SSW of the S extremity of Abaga gaheia Island.

8.26 Conflict Patches (11°14'S., 152°55'E.), with depths

of 3.6 to 4.5m, lie about midway between Musters Patches and

Abaga gaheia Island. They extend in a WNW and ESE

direction for a distance of 3.5 miles. The NW patch lies about

1.75 miles S of the S extremity of Abaga gaheia Island.

8.26 Pana Wina Island (11°10'S., 153°01'E.), the largest island

of the Calvados Chain, is about 1.25 miles E of Gigila Island.

Two ridges of hills, one on either side of the island, run N and

S, the highest part being near the S end, where the W ridge

rises to an elevation of 288m, and the E to 243m.

8.26 A bay, with depths of from 22 to 31m, lies on the S side of

the island. It appears that the creek at the head of this bay runs

to the N and connects with the bay on the N side, thus dividing

the island.

8.26 A reef extends about 183m from Boiama Point, the E entrance point of the bay and S extremity of Pana Wina Island. A

spit, with a depth of 3.7m, extends about 183m beyond the

reef. Koia kun, a conspicuous hill, 243m high, lies about 0.5

mile N of the point.

8.26 Pipidai Point, the SE extremity of Pana Wina Island, is low,

bold, and covered with grass. Foul ground extends about 0.5

mile NE and 0.25 mile SE from the point.

8.26 The N coast, which is generally lined with mangroves and

fringed by a reef about 0.3 mile wide, is indented by a shallow

bay.

8.26 On the NW side of the island is another bay, with depths of

from 12.8 to 22m. The bay is sheltered from the SE winds. The

tidal currents run with considerable force in the area, the flood

setting to the SW and the ebb in the opposite direction. The

island is inhabited.

8.26 Yakimoan Island, 91m high, is separated from the W extremity of Pana Wina Island by Ui gari Passage. A fairly steepto reef, with Taval Rock on its outer extremity, extends about

0.4 mile NE from Yakimoan Island.

8.26 Ui gari Passage, about 0.25 mile wide, is narrow, with a

steep-to reef extending from both sides. The tidal currents run

with considerable strength through this passage.

8.26 Vessels can take anchorage about 0.35 mile N of Yakimoan

Island, with the N extremity of Gigila Island bearing 263°, in a

depth of 14.6m, sand. Though protected from the wind and sea,

this anchorage is, to some extent, exposed to the strength of the

tidal currents.

8.27 Beagle Rock (11°13'S., 153°00'E.), with a depth of

1.8m, lies about 1.5 miles WSW of Boiama Point, the S extremity of Pana Wina Island. The S peak of Pana Krusima Island, bearing 291°, just open S of Abagagaheia Island, leads N

of this danger.

8.27 Hemenahei Island (11°10'S., 153°04'E.), the easternmost of

the Calvados Chain, lies 0.3 mile E of the NE point of Pana

Wina Island. The island is surrounded by mangrove swamps,

the only convenient landing place being on the NE side.

8.27 A ridge of grassy hills, from 61 to 73m high, traverses the

island. The island is considered unhealthy.

8.27 A shoal, with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.5 mile ENE of the

E extremity of the island.

Barrier Reef—North of the Calvados Chain

8.28 The barrier reef extends from Horaki raki Passage in a

NE direction for about 10 miles, where it reaches its northernmost point; thence it extends in an ESE direction to Sabari

Island, a distance of about 26 miles.

8.28 Pana sagu sagu Islet (10°58'S., 152°37'E.), low, wooded,

and 36m high to the tops of the trees, lies on the barrier reef,

about 6 miles NE of Horaki raki Passage.

8.28 A clear passage, about 0.35 mile wide, lies immediately N of

the reef on which Pana sagu sagu Islet stands.

8.28 Shoals, with depths of 5.5m and 9.1m lie, respectively, about

0.5 mile E and 1.25 miles ESE of Pana sagu sagu Islet. Vessels

using this passage should pass N of these two shoals, as the

depths are more regular on that side, and the edge of the barrier

is steep-to.

8.28 The tidal currents run with considerable strength through this

passage, the flood current setting toward the reef on which

Pana sagu sagu Islet stands.

8.28 The Bushy Islets (10°56'S., 152°39'E.), a group of wooded

islets, from 13.7 to 20m high, lie on the outer edge of the N

extremity of the barrier reef, which is steep-to on its NW and

W sides. The NE islet lies about 4 miles NE of Pana sagu sagu

Islet, and on the NW side of Debagarai Passage.

8.29 The Basses Islands (10°57'S., 152°43'E.) are a group

of low coral islets, with trees from 18.3 to 30m high, lying on

the E side of Debagarai Passage. Gumaian, the easternmost and

largest island, lies 7 miles E of Pana sagu sagu Islet, and forms

the NW side of Wuri wuri Passage. Aba evara, the W islet of

the group, is located about 2.25 miles W of Gumaian. A small

reef, with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.5 mile SW of Isu raua

raua, the S islet, located about 0.5 mile S of Aba evara.
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 171

Pub. 164

8.29 Debagarai Passage (10°56'S., 152°42'E.), the opening in the

barrier NW of the Basses Islands, is 1 mile wide between the

reefs on either side. The passage is obstructed in the middle by

a large shoal, with depths from 7.3 to 11m, and possibly less.

There is a deep but narrow passage between this shoal and the

edge of the reef on the NW side of the channel. The tidal

current swirling over the point of the reef makes it difficult to

distinguish the edge of the shallow water.

8.29 In the channel SE of the shoal there are two patches, with

depths of 5.5m and 9.1m, located, respectively, about 0.2 mile

N and 0.5 mile NW of Aba evara Islet. There may be less water

on these shoals, and as the tidal currents are strong, with heavy

overfalls, the channel should only be used under very favorable

conditions.

8.30 Tawa tawa mal Reef (11°04'S., 153°00'E.), the NE

portion of the barrier reef, extends from the Basses Islands in a

ESE direction for 39 miles to Hudumu Iwa Passage. The reef

dries in patches and has numerous boulders on its outer edge,

some of which are from 0.9 to 4.5m high. The N side of the

reef is steep-to, but the S or inner side has, in many places,

shoals extending for some distance.

8.30 There are three ship channels through Tawa tawa mal Reef

between the Basses Islands and the NW extremity of Sabari

Island, namely, Wuri wuri Passage, Duna labwa Passage, and

Chubudi Passage. The reef SE of Sabari Island is impenetrable

to ships of any size until Hudumu iwa Passage is reached.

8.30 Wuri wuri Passage (10°58'S., 152°46'E.), between

Gumaian Island, 27m high, and Leiga Islet, 3 miles ESE, is the

safest and easiest opening to enter in this part of the barrier

reef. A shoal, with a least depth of 3.6m, lies near the middle of

the passage, dividing it into two parts. In the channel NW of

this shoal the depths are irregular and the tidal currents are

strong. A detached reef lies SW of, and parallel with, the reef

on which Leiga Islet lies, and a bank, with depths of 9.1 to

10.9m, lies within 0.6 mile W of the NW end of the detached

reef. There is a deep channel, about 1 mile wide, between this

bank and the shoal near the middle of the passage.

8.30 Pearce Patch, with a depth of 5.5m, lies in the S fairway of

Wuri wuri Passage, about 2.5 miles SW of Leiga Islet.

8.31 Siwai wa Island (11°03'S., 152°57'E.), 12.2m high

with some bushes, lies on the NW extremity of a reef, about 2

miles W of Duna labwa Passage. Shoals, with depths of from

4.5 to 5.5m lie, about 1.75 miles S of Siwai wa Island. A shoal

1.8m deep lies 1 mile SW of this island.

8.31 Duna labwa Passage (11°04'S., 152°59'E.), about 0.3 mile,

with a depth of 10.9m in the fairway, lies about 2 miles E of

Siwai wa Island. It may be recognized by a sand cay with some

bushes on it, 3m high, located on the reef which forms the E

side of the passage. The reef on the W side of the passage is

steep-to.

8.31 The tidal currents set directly through the channel, forming

heavy tide rips and overfalls on the bar.

8.31 Myriad Shoals (11°06'S., 152°59'E.), a group of coral

heads, with depths of 2.1 to 9m, lie from 1 to 2.75 miles S of

the reef on the E side of Duna labwa Passage.

8.31 Sabari Island (11°07'S., 153°06'E.), the NW end of which

lies 8 miles ESE of Siwai wa Island, is 4 miles in length by 0.5

mile in breadth. The island is low and densely wooded, the tops

of the trees having an elevation of about 55m. There is a village

near the SE end of the island.

8.31 The coast line of the island is low and cliffy, with an occasional small sandy beach. Near the middle of the island, on the

S side, there is a shallow basin, with a reef extending across its

entrance. Northwest of this opening a chain of islets fronts the

coast.

8.31 Mabu Islet and Pana kuba Islet, 30m high, lie at the outer end

of a chain of islets and rocks extending 0.4 mile NW from the

NW extremity of Sabari Island. The Rara haiwa Islets are two

islets, located close off the SE end of Sabari Island.

8.32 Chubudi Passage (11°06'S., 153°02'E.), about 2

miles NW of the NW extremity of Sabari Island, is about 0.2

mile wide. A reef, with a least depth of 2.7m, lies in the SE part

of the passage. The fairway, which is deep, lies W of this reef.

8.32 The tidal currents set directly through the passage and cause

tide rips and overfalls.

8.32 Hiscock Reef (11°07'S., 153°01'E.), which nearly dries, lies

about 1 mile SW of the S extremity of the reef located on the E

side of Chubudi Passage, and in the fairway of the S approach

to the passage. Reefs, with depths of 3.6m, lie, respectively,

about 1 mile N and 0.25 mile E of Hiscock Reef. A reef, with a

depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.25 mile S of Hiscock Reef, with

foul ground between.

8.32 Hanover Rock (11°08'S., 153°00'E.), with a depth of 1.8m,

lies about 1.25 miles NNW of the N point of Pana Wina Island.

8.32 Blind Rock (11°08'S., 153°01'E.), with a depth of 2.7m, lies

0.8 mile NNE of the N point of Pana Wina Island. A rock, with

a depth of 1.8m, lies between Blind Rock and the fringing reef

of Pana Wina Island. The depths between Hanover Rock and

Blind Rock are about 7.3m as charted.

8.32 Galley Rock (11°08'S., 153°02'E.), with a depth of 2.7m,

lies about 1.75 miles NNE of the N point of Pana Wina Island.

8.32 Tides—Currents.—West of Pana Wina Island, the flood

current sets SW, with a velocity of 1 knot; the ebb sets NE,

with a velocity of 0.75 knot. North of the island, the flood

current sets SE, with a velocity of 1 knot; the ebb sets WNW,

with a velocity of 0.5 knot.

8.32 Directions.—The dangers described above render navigation S and E of Chubudi Passage somewhat intricate. The best

track for vessels bound E of Chubudi Passage, is N of Hiscock

Reef. Vessels from the SW, and proceeding E should use the

passage between Hanover Rock and Hiscock Reef. A vessel

using this passage should steer for the N extremity of Hemenahei Island, bearing 105°, which leads between Blind Rock

and Galley Rock. When the SW end of Hemenahei Island

bears 153° and is open clear of Pei-i Point, the NE extremity of

Pana Wina Island, a vessel should steer for the SE extremity of

Sabari Island, bearing 094°, which leads 0.5 mile N of the N

extremity of Hemenahei Island. These directions should be

used with the greatest caution because of the limited survey

and numerous uncharted dangers.

8.32 Caution.—Vessels using these passages through the barrier

reef must exercise caution, because of the limited surveys, and

strong tidal currents and rips passing through them.
172 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

Pana Tinani Island

8.33 Pana Tinani Island (11°14'S., 153°10'E.), the W end

of which lies 3 miles E of Pana Wina Island, is 10.5 miles in

length by 2 to 3 miles in breadth. A ridge of hills extends the

whole length of the island, with the exception of about 2 miles

of low wooded land near its NW end. These hills rise abruptly

from the S coast and slope down gradually to the N and NE.

The island is well wooded, with numerous groves of coconut

palms near the sea. The island is inhabited.

8.33 Mount Guyuba, 338m high, lies about 4 miles W of the E

extremity of the island.

8.33 The NE coast is mostly flat, with the exception of four slight

indentations, behind each of which the land is flat and swampy

toward the foot of the hills. This coast is difficult to approach,

owing to the fringing reef and the numerous patches along its

whole length.

8.33 The SE coast of Pana Tinani Island is comparatively bold

and backed by a steep range of hills.

8.33 Pana muti Point, the E extremity of the island, is covered

with mangroves and has a ridge sloping down to it. A reef

extends about 0.65 mile E from the point and foul ground

about 183m beyond.

8.33 Heihuti Bay, located on the SE side of the island, is fringed

by a narrow reef, which, toward the head, extends about 0.25

mile offshore.

8.33 Vessels can take anchorage during the Northwest Monsoon

in Heihuti Bay, in depths of from 22 to 24m, sand and clay.

8.33 The SW coast of the island is irregular, consisting of four

projecting hilly points with several bays between them. Vessels

can take anchorage in these bays. The coast is fringed by reefs

and there are some off-lying islets and dangers.

8.33 The Gudau Peninsula, the S extremity of the island, is 83m

high. Hatilawi Harbor lies close W of the peninsula.

8.33 Vessels can take anchorage during the Southeast Monsoon in

Hatilawi Harbor, about 0.35 mile N of its S entrance point, in

depths of 16.5 to 18.3m, mud.

8.33 Ni Eivi Reef (11°18'S., 153°10'E.) lies S of the Gudau

Peninsula and is separated from it by Doga Siu Siu Passage. A

sand bank, which dries, is located on the SE end of the reef.

8.33 Doga Siu Siu Passage, which is clear of dangers, has a least

depth of 20m, and is 0.75 mile in width.

8.33 The tidal currents run through this passage at a velocity of 2 to 3

knots, with the flood setting to the WNW and the ebb setting to the

ESE.

8.33 Directions.—The S extremity of Osasai Islet (11°21'S.,

153°20'E.) in range with the S extremity of Hei wok Islet

(11°19'S., 153°14'E.), bearing 112°, leads through Doga Siu

Siu Passage, in a depth of 14.6m. This range leads rather close

to Ni Eivi Reef; a vessel will be more in the fairway by bringing the S extremity of Osasai over Hei wok and keeping in a

depth of 20m.

8.34 Bounce Point (11°14'S., 153°06'E.), the W extremity

of an islet, 134m high, located 5 miles NW of Hatilawi Harbor,

is a reddish-colored cliff 21.3m high. A cut channel lies between the above islet and the mainland, to which it was

attached by a low neck of land.

8.34 A grass-covered islet, 44m high, and a grassy peaked islet,

61m high, lie, respectively, off the E and S side of the above

islet.

8.34 Imadi Bay, 3.5 miles NW of Hatilawi Harbor, provides anchorage in the SE part of the bay about 0.25 mile, 339° from

the E entrance point, in depths of from 16.5 to 18.3m, mud.

8.34 A reef which dries, lies 1 mile WSW of the E entrance point

of Imadi Bay. There are depths of 2.7m just N of this reef.

Pana Tinani Island—Southwest Coast

8.35 From Bounce Point, on the islet close offshore, the

coast trends in a NW direction 2.25 miles to Haugili Point

(11°12'S., 153°05'E.), the W extremity of Pana Tinani Island.

Haugili Point is bold and descends abruptly from a flat-topped

grassy hill 85m high.

8.35 The coast between these two points recedes 1 mile and forms

a bay which is divided into two parts by a grass-covered islet

84m high. The islet is connected with the mainland by a reef;

the bay N of the islet is encumbered by foul ground extending

0.9 mile S from Haugili Point.

8.35 That part of the bay SE of the islet is called Buvara Bay; it is

fringed by a reef which extends from a few meters to 0.15 mile

from the shore, skirting the shore 0.25 mile N of Bounce Point.

8.35 During the Southeast Monsoon vessels may obtain anchorage in the S portion of Buvara Bay, in depths from 18.3 to 22m,

sand and clay. The best berth, out of the tidal influence, is with

Bounce Point bearing 165°, distant 0.35 mile.

8.35 Bridge Shoals (11°13'S., 153°04'E.) is comprised of a series

of coral patches with depths of from 2.7 to 5.5m, lying from 1

to 1.5 miles SE, S, and SW of Haugili Point. They impede the

approach to Buvara Bay when coming from the N or W.

8.35 About 0.75 mile NW of Bridge Shoals are two rocky patches

with depths of 3.7m; 0.5 mile farther NE is the extremity of

shallow water extending from Pana Tinani Island.

8.35 Sibumbum Islet, bearing 143°, leads 0.5 mile SW of Bridge

Shoals.

8.35 A narrow wooded islet, 30m high, is located on the fringing

reef off the NW point of Pana Tinani Island, about 1.25 miles

NNE of Haugili Point. A reef, awash at LW, lies 0.6 mile W of

the islet. A tongue of shoal water, with depths of from 7.3 to

9.1m, extends 0.3 mile SW from the reef.

8.36 Maga Maga Passage (11°11'S., 153°04'E.) leads between Hemenahei Island and Pana Tinani Island. There are

depths of 11 to 18.3m in the fairway over a width of 183m,

between the edge of a bank, with patches awash, lying 0.5 mile

N of the N extremity of Pana Tinani Island and a bank with

depths of 3.7 to 5.5m, located on the N side of the fairway about

0.2 mile farther N.

8.36 This passage should only be used by vessels having local

knowledge. Vessels from S should bring themselves to a position midway between Bridge Shoals and the point about 2

miles WNW; steer 024° until within 0.2 mile of the edge of the

fringing reef S of Hemenahei Island, then alter course to the

NE keeping at a distance of 183m off this reef which is always

plainly visible. As soon as the N point of Pana Tinani Island

opens N of the islet lying W of it, bearing about 097°, the

course may be altered to 075° until the E extremity of Heme-
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 173

Pub. 164

nahei bears 007°, when a 052° course will lead out through the

N entrance.

8.36 Vessels coming from the NW are cautioned to give a berth to

the depth of 1.8m located 063° 1 mile distant from the E extremity of Hemenahei Island.

8.36 Note that the tidal currents run through this passage with a

velocity of 2 to 4 knots and have very short periods of slack

water; the flood current sets SW and the ebb current sets NE.

The passage should not be attempted during the first 3 hours of

either flood or ebb.

Islands and Dangers Southwest of Pana Tinani

Island

8.37 Wanim Island (11°16'S., 153°06'E.) rises to a height

of 119m at its N end. This island, which is encircled by reefs,

lies 4.75 miles W of Hatilawi Harbor.

8.37 A bay is formed on the W side of the island where anchorage

may be taken, in a depth of 29m, coral and sand, with the SW

extremity of the island bearing 187°, distant 0.35 mile. This anchorage is out of the tidal influence, and during the Southeast

Monsoon the water is smooth, though strong gusts of wind

come down over the land.

8.37 Sibumbum Islet, lying 0.5 mile S of Wanim Island, is located

in the center of a reef, 0.3 mile in diameter. The islet has an elevation of 29m; there are a few trees on it. In the channel between the surrounding reef and the reef extending S from

Wanim Island there is a 9.1m patch; the depth is probably less

than that charted.

8.37 An islet, 116m high and wooded, lies at the S end of Pakabuk Reef, 2.75 miles S of Sibumbum Islet. Except off the NW

end of Pakabuk Reef where a spit extends for 0.2 mile, the reef

is steep-to; there is a sand cay near the middle.

8.37 Popomweni Passage, between Sibumbum Islet and the N extremity of Pakabuk Reef, is 1.5 miles in width. It is encumbered with Green Patch, with a least depth of 4m, on the N side

of the fairway, about 0.6 mile S of Sibumbum Islet and by a

3.7m patch 1.5 miles SSE of the islet.

8.37 Sei Hauho Reef lies 1.5 miles W of Pakabuk Reef and is

separated from it by a deep channel. Sei Hauho Reef, dries in

patches at LW and is steep-to on its E side. Shoal patches, with

a patch, awash, extend 1 mile S and foul ground extends 1.5

miles W of the reef.

Brierly Reefs (11°18'S., 153°00'E.) lie W of Sei Hauho Reef

and extend in an E and W direction about 5 miles. The general

depth over the reefs are from 2.7 to 9.1m, and some spots dry at

LW. These reefs form the E part of the N extremity, of a large

area that has not been examined. There is a 3.7m shoal between

Sei Hauho Reef and Brierly Reefs.

8.37 Owen Stanley Bank, located W of Wanim Island, lies 2.25

miles N of Sei Hauho Reef and Brierly Reefs and is parallel to

these reefs. A reef lying at the E end of the bank dries at LW,

and Sandfly Rock, 4 miles W, at the W end of the bank, has a

depth of 1.8m. Other dangers than those charted may exist,

therefore mariners are cautioned not to cross the bank.

8.37 The N extremity of Wanim Island in range with the 338m

high peak on Pana Tinani Island, bearing 093° leads close N of

the bank; Sibumbum Islet, in range with the southernmost peak

on Pana Timani Island, bearing 096°, leads S of the bank.

There are two rocks, dangerous to navigation, on the N side of

the Owen Stanley Bank, just S of the above mentioned bearing.

Tagula Island

8.38 Tagula Island (11°30'S., 153°26'E.), the NW end of

which lies 1.75 miles S of Pana Tinani, is the largest of the

Louisiade Archipelago, being 39 miles long and 8 miles wide.

A wooded mountain range extends the length of the island,

with the summit near the center.

8.38 Mount Madau (11°22'S., 153°12'E.) is the most conspicuous landmark on the NW end of the island. It is thickly

wooded and rises to a height of 296m high. Ridges extend N

and W from it, and beyond these ridges, the land is flat,

wooded country intersected by numerous streams. To the E the

main ridge extends as the backbone of the island. There are

deep valleys where streams flow through rocky gorges and

discharge into Coral Haven, some of these being navigable by

small boats for a distance up to 1 mile.

8.38 Mount Gangulua (11°25'S., 153°16'E.), lies 5 miles SE of

Mount Madau. It is 439m high and thickly wooded.

8.38 Mount Riu (11°31'S., 153°26'E.) is the summit of the island

and rises to a height of 806m high. It is the largest mountain in

the range.

8.38 Mount Arumbi (11°34'S., 153°41'E.), the southeasternmost

mountain of the range, is doubled topped, 350m high, and

slopes gradually down to Cape Siri, the SE extremity of the

island. Southwest of the mountain, the hills slope gradually to

the sea, with drainage into the Iyuba River, a stream which discharges into Dumage Bay.

8.39 Coral Haven (11°19'S., 153°19'E.) is an extensive

harbor bounded to the N and E by Tawi Reef and Rawa Reef

and to the S and W by Tagula Island and Pana Tinani Island.

The haven offers good shelter and affords a good anchorage,

but it is encumbered with islands and reefs, making navigation

somewhat intricate.

8.39 The haven is accessible from the N by Hudumu Iwa Pass,

from the NW by the lagoon channel N of Pana Tinani, from the

W by the channel between that island and Tagula Island., and

from the E by Yuma Passage, which leads into Gold Rush

Channel.

8.39 Nimoa Island (11°19'S., 153°15'E.), the largest island in

Coral Haven, lies about 1.5 miles SE of Pana Tinani. This well

wooded and fertile island attains an elevation of 139m and has

a few villages on its shores. There is a 3.7m patch 1.25 miles E

of the S point of Nimoa Island. A rock, 0.9m high, lies 0.5 mile

further W.

8.39 Pana Hoba Islet, 14.7m high and rocky, is located on the

middle of a reef which extends 1.5 miles E from the NE

extremity of Nimoa Island. There are a few trees on its summit.

About 0.5 mile N of the islet is a coral patch, awash; another

3.7m patch lies 0.5 mile NE of it.

8.40 Middle Reef (11°17'S., 153°17'E.) is about 1 mile

long and 0.25 mile wide. It lies in the NW part of Coral Haven.

Except at the W end, the edges are foul and shoal water extends 0.8 mile S from the reef toward Pana Hoba Islet, leaving

between them a navigable channel 0.4 mile wide. A coral

patch, awash, lies in the center of this channel.
174 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

8.40 Anchorage may be taken off the W side of Nimoa Island.

The bay should not be entered farther S than to have Sibumbum Islet in range with the S point of the Gudau Peninsula,

bearing 281°, or farther E than to have the E extremity of Pana

Tinani in range with the N point of the bay, bearing about 002°.

In this position there is a depth of 20.2m, sand and clay, with

good shelter from SW winds.

8.40 Caution.—Vessels should not get E or S, respectively, of

these alignments as the shores of the bay are much encumbered

with reefs and coral patches. 

8.41 Bulami Passage (11°19'S., 153°11'E.), the W entrance to Coral Haven, is divided into passages by Ni Eivi

Reef. Doga Siu Siu Passage, the N passage, was previously

described in paragraph 8.33. Bulami, the S passage, is 0.5 mile

wide between the S side of Ni Eivi Reef and the reef extending

1 mile W from Bobo-hai Point, the NW extremity of Tagula

Island. It is deep and clear of dangers. The tidal currents set at

the rate of 2 to 3 knots.

8.41 The coast from Bobo-hai Point (11°20'S., 153°12'E.) to

Nepenthes Point is bordered by mangroves and a narrow

fringing reef. There is a small wharf on the N coast of Tagula

Island, with a least depth of 4.6m alongside, about 1 mile ESE

of Bobo-hai Point. A ridge of low bare hills, the outer peak and

lower slopes of which are wooded, terminates at Nepenthes

Point. West of the point is a bay having depths of from 12.9 to

22m close up to the fringing reef, but its N part is obstructed by

reefs. A small reef lies close N of Nepenthes Point, and a

patch, awash, lies about 0.7 mile, bearing 300° from the same

point.

8.41 Muhua Bay (11°22'S., 153°18'E.) lies close E of Nepenthes

Point. In the E part of the bay, the shore reef projects 0.4 mile

N from the mangroves and is broken up into patches. The Sahai

River flows into the bay. Anchorage may be obtained in the

bay, in a depth of 22m, mud.

8.41 McGregor Reefs (11°21'S., 153°16'E.), lying about halfway

between Nepenthes Point and about 1 mile off the coast of

Tagula Island, comprise a cluster of coral patches which is

partly dry and extend 0.75 mile in an E and W direction. A

bank, with depths of 14.7 to 16.6m, extends 0.75 mile E of

these reefs; between them and the coast is a ridge having

depths of 11.1 to 16.6m.

8.42 Minister Patch (11°20'S., 153°16'E.), with a depth of

6.4m, lies 0.4 mile N of the E end of McGregor Reef. A bank

with a depth of 17.4m extends 0.75 mile E from the patch.

8.42 Hely Bank (11°21'S., 153°20'E.), on which there are two

coral heads with depths of 2.7 to 4.6m, has general depths of

up to 18.4m and lies 1.5 miles NNE of Nepenthes Point.

8.42 Escape Rock (11°21'S., 153°20'E.), a coral head with a

depth of 2.2m, is located 2 miles NE of Nepenthes Point and at

the W extremity of a line of patches extending 1.5 miles W of

Rawa Reef. There is a 5.5m shoal 1.5 miles, bearing 030°, off

Nepenthes Point.

8.42 Rawa Reef (11°20'S., 153°24'E.), which is about 4.5 miles

in length, forms the SE side of Coral Haven. Foul ground extends 0.5 mile from the inner edge of the reef. The reef curves

E at its N end and fringes the S side of Yeina Island.

8.42 Osasai Islet (11°21'S., 153°20'E.) is 69m high and located

on the SW end of Rawa Reef.

8.42 Yeina Island (11°20'S., 153°27'E.) is 5 miles long and 1.5

miles wide; it lies between Rawa Reef and Tawi Reef. A grassy

ridge extends along the length of the island and attains a height

of from 37 to 79m. The island is fringed with mangroves, but

the E end is rocky with sandy beaches. There is a village on the

NE coast.

8.42 Meiwa Islet, 24m high, lies 0.35 mile off the E extremity of

Yeina Island. There are two rocks, 3.1m high, the same distance E of the islet.

8.42 Tawi Reef, the W part of this reef ,forms the NE limits of

Coral Haven. It is a continuation of Tawa Tawa Mal Reef, from

which it is separated by Hudumu Iwa Passage. The inner edge

almost connects with Rawa Reef; several patches extend 1 mile

W from the channel which separates them. The N edge of the

reef is broken and irregular and has narrow passages through

which boats may pass.

8.42 Romilly Bank, lies immediately within Hudumu Iwa Passage. The bank, a narrow ledge of coral, extends 1.25 miles in

an E and W direction and has depths of 2.8 to 4.6m.

8.43 Hudumu Iwa Passage (11°15'S., 153°19'E.), the N

entrance to Coral Haven, is divided into two channels by a

detached reef with foul ground extending S from it. The W

channel, the better of the two, is about 183m in width and

carries depths of 14.7m, but the reefs on either side are

shelving. From the inner edges of these reefs, shoals extend

0.35 mile SW. Within the W horn of the detached reef there is a

rock, just awash at HW.

8.43 The E channel, which lies 0.5 mile from the other, has a

depth of 11.1m, but the E part of Romilly Bank, which has not

yet been closely examined, stretches partly across its S end.

The tidal currents in the channels run at the rate of 3 to 5 knots.

8.43 Directions.—Bring the S extremity of Pana Tinani Island in

range with the N extremity of Dadda hai Islet, bearing 252°,

which leads to the entrance of the W channel of the passage.

Having approached the entrance, bring the S extremity of

Nimoa Island,the point of which will appear low and indistinct,

just open NW of Pana Hoba Islet, bearing 229°; this will be in

range with the center of the passage and exactly underneath a

gap between two nipples in the skyline of the hills on Tagula

Island.

8.43 Having entered Coral Haven and proceeding W, the best

route is N of Middle Reef, thence out by Doga Siu Siu Passage

S of Pana Tinani Island.

8.44 Yuma Passage (11°21'S., 153°23'E.), the E entrance

lying 2.5 miles S of the W end of Yeina Island, is a narrow,

deep, and intricate channel, winding for 4.5 miles between

Rawa Reef and the reef E of it. It connects with Gold Rush

Channel about 1.25 miles S of Osasai Islet. The reefs on either

side are steep-to, with three sharp turns in the passage. The

channel has depths of from 38 to 56m, but at the S end there is

a charted depth of 7.4m. This passage is dangerous for vessels

of any size to attempt, due to the strength of the tidal currents,

which run at a rate of 3 to 5 knots. It is reported to be a good

passage for vessels up to 300 grt.

8.44 Marx Reef (11°24'S., 153°27'E.) is a detached reef, steep-to

on all sides, lying in the bight of the reef between Yeina Island

and the N side of Tagula Island.
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 175

Pub. 164

8.44 Tides—Currents.—In Coral Haven, the first quarter of the

flood sets SW, gradually changing its direction to the S, and

during the last quarter to the SE. The first quarter of the ebb

sets NE, changing at the last quarter to NW. These changes are

most marked during spring tides and are similar to those

observed in the W part of the archipelago near the sunken

barrier.

8.44 Gold Rush Channel (11°23'S., 153°20'E.) is the S entrance

to Coral Haven; though deep, it is very intricate and suitable

only for small boats. The channel is 8 miles in length and lies

between the fringing reef of Tagula Island and the S side of

Rawa Reef. Because of strong tidal currents and the many

shoals, the channel is not recommended. It is only suitable for

small craft. 

Tagula Island—North Coast

8.45 The N coast from Muhua Bay trends ESE for 10 miles

to a point below Mount Ima and forms the S side of Gold Rush

Channel. The coast in this area is mostly wooded with a range

of low hills, and the fringing reef closely follows the shore line.

8.45 The Feiori River is the largest on this coast and flows in the

sea about 4.5 miles E of Nepenthes Point. The river can be

used by small boats for nearly 1.5 miles from the entrance;

many small villages are found in this area.

8.45 The channel across the bar, at the mouth of the river, is to the

E of the mangrove islet, the outer edge of the bar is steep-to.

There are a number of locks and reefs off the entrance to the

river, which can best be seen on the chart.

8.45 Immediately E of the Feiori River, the coastal channel opens

out to a basin, 2 miles in diameter, in which there are numerous

patches awash. There is anchorage, 0.3 mile N of the entrance

to the Feiori River, in a depth of 29.3m, mud.

8.45 Rabuso Creek (11°29'S., 153°33'E.) is an inlet located 7

miles E of the eastern entrance to Gold Rush Channel. It is

entered through an opening about 64m wide in the fringing reef

and extends in a S direction for about 0.7 mile.

8.45 Boboa Islet (11°29'S., 153°35'E.), a mangrove islet on the

barrier reef, lies 1.5 miles E of the entrance to Rabuso Creek. A

rock is located 73m within the edge of the reef and nearly

covered at HW, lies on the E side and serves to indicate the

approach to the inlet.

8.45 There is anchorage between the two entrance points of the

inlet, in a depth of 20.2m, mud, with swinging room of 137m.

The inner part of the inlet has depths of 14.7 to 18.4m. Small

craft can anchor, in 16.5m, near the head of the creek, 0.15

mile E of the village, lying on the W side. There is a small

wharf at the SW head of the creek, and another abreast of the

village, both with depths of about 2.5m alongside.

8.45 The coast E of Rabuso Creek trends E for 8.5 miles and then

in a SE direction for 7 miles to Cape Siri, presenting no remarkable features and being mostly low and lined with mangroves.

8.45 East of Rabuso Creek, the fringing reef assumes the character of a barrier, gradually widening its distance from the land

and sweeping with a uniform curve around Cape Siriat a

distance of from 8 to 12 miles. It encloses an extensive lagoon,

the N and E portions of which have not been examined. At 10

miles bearing 052° from Cape Siri, there is a passage, about

0.15 mile wide and open on a 204° bearing, that leads into the

lagoon, but it has not been examined or navigated. A reef is

reported just inside the opening of this passage. There is an

opening for small craft about 4 miles E of Rabuso Creek. There

is anchorage inside for vessels up to 100 grt. The lagoon within

the barrier reef is reported to be navigable by vessels up to 100

grt.

Tagula Island—South Coast

8.46 Cape Siri (11°37'S., 153°47'E.), the SE extremity of

Tagula Island, is low, wooded, and rises towards the NW. A

village is situated on the point. Between Cape Siri and Cape

Baganowa, about 13 miles W, the coast is fringed by a reef

which extends up to 1.5 miles offshore. The lagoon inside the

barrier reef has only been partially examined, but appears fairly

clear of dangers. There are some coral patches lying about 2

miles off the fringing reef between Cape Siri and Point Lamada, located 6 miles W.

8.46 Lawik Reef is the name given to the S part of the barrier reef.

This reef sweeps around Cape Siri trends W and passes S of

Cape Baganowa at a distance of about 3 miles.

8.46 Cape Baganowa (11°39'S., 153°33'E.) is the southernmost

point of Tagula Island. The cape, which forms the heel of a

peninsula of the same name, is dominated by a conical hill

149m high. There is a large village on the SW side of the

peninsula. A sunken rock lies 3 miles ESE of Cape Baganowa.

8.46 There are two openings in the barrier reef S of Tagula Island,

namely, Deijei Radi Pass and Smiths Pass.

Deijei Radi Pass (Johnston Pass) (11°41'S., 153°31'E.) is

about 0.75 mile wide and deep. The summit of Mount Imau

bearing 025°, just open NW of the W extremity of the

Baganowa Peninsula, leads through the pass.

8.46 The tidal currents set through Deijei radi Pass with a velocity

up to 3 knots. The flood current sets to the SW, the ebb to the

NE, and both somewhat diagonally across the channel.

8.46 Dumaga Bay (11°37'S., 153°33'E.) is formed between the

W part of the Baganowa Peninsula and the mainland.

Anchorage may be taken in Dumaga Bay, in a depth of 25.6m,

mud, about 0.5 mile offshore, with the 149m conical hill on the

Baganowa Peninsula bearing 131° and the W extremity of the

peninsula 221°.

8.46 Directions.—Dumaga Bay is somewhat difficult of access

and the approaches have not been thoroughly sounded. Due to

the strong tidal currents and the irregular bottom the passage

between the peninsula and the Fairfax Reefs is only practicable

during SW and with the reefs clearly visible.

8.46 The clearest approach appears to be from W, skirting the

fringing reef at a distance of 0.2 to 0.3 mile and anchoring as

directed above.

8.47 Fairfax Reefs (11°38'S., 153°31'E.) are a group of

sunken rocks which lie from 1 to 2 miles W of the S entrance

point of Dumaga Bay. There is a deep channel 0.4 mile wide

between them and the reef fringing the peninsula.

8.47 Venama Islet lies close offshore on the fringing reef on the N

side of the W entrance to Dumaga Bay.

8.47 A detached reef, awash, with a channel 0.3 mile wide between it and the coastal reef, lies 0.5 mile NE of Fairfax Reefs

and 0.6 mile W of the peninsula. A 2.7m shoal lies about 0.2

mile NW of the detached reef and is connected to it by a ridge
176 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

of shallow water. Another shoal, with a depth of 5.5m lies 0.4

mile NNE of the detached reef.

Liji liji Bay (11°35'S., 153°26'E.) lies 6 miles WNW of

Dumaga Bay and provides anchorage, in 25.5m, sand, with

Juru Point, the S entrance point, bearing 176°, distant 0.8 mile.

A reef, the edge of which is steep-to, extends 0.5 mile W of

Juru Point.

8.47 Baumum Bay, located close W of Liji liji Bay, does not appear to afford any anchorage. A reef and foul ground extend

about 1 mile SSW and S from the E entrance point of the bay

to a position about 1 mile SE of Heibura Point, the W entrance

point.

8.47 Pantawi Point (11°33'S., 153°21'E.), a low point, is located

about 4.5 miles W of Bauman Bay, behind which there is a

series of rocky peaks on the ridge sloping down from Mount

Riu, the summit of Tagula Island. The coastal reef extends 1.75

miles offshore from a position 1 mile E of the point. Also 0.5

mile SE of the S extremity of the reef is a coral reef, awash.

8.47 Bada bada Bay, a deep bight in the coastal reef lies close W

of Pantawi Point. The bay affords anchorage in the middle part,

in depths from 14.6 to 18.3m, sand. This anchorage is protected from SE by the reef extending SW from Pantawi Point.

8.47 Maduwa Point (11°30'S., 153°16'E.) is the SW tip of a

narrow peninsula which has two peaks 0.75 mile apart. The

SW of the peaks is 184m high; the NE peak, named Mount

Bousquet, is 235m high.

8.47 Hinai Bay is entered between Maduwa Point and a point

about 5 miles SE. The bay appears to afford anchorage clear of

a rocky patch in the middle; the inner part of the bay has not

been closely examined. Both sides of the bay are fringed by

reefs which extend in long tongues. The Hula River discharges

into the head of the bay.

8.47 Caution.—Hinai Bay must be approached with caution as a

long line of patches extends 1.5 miles SE from the S extremity

of the reef extending from Maduwa Point. From this point

there is a gap 0.75 mile wide; the reef continues for 1 mile

further SE. The gap probably provides the best entrance into

the bay as the shoals may be seen on either side. Also passage

E of the patches appeared clear, but it has not been examined.

Rocky patches located within the bay are 2.75 and 3.75 miles E

of Maduwa Point.

8.48 The channel used for navigation between Maduwa

Point and Cape Baganowa is narrowest S of Pantawi Point. At

this position, a series of yellow patches near the inner edge of

the barrier reef begins. The northernmost of these lies about 3

miles S of Pantawi Point. However, there are quite a few of

these patches between the above and the barrier reef, and these

may best be seen on the chart. The inner edge of the barrier

reef between Smiths Pass and Deijei Pass has been traced 3

miles W.

8.48 Tidal currents between this part of the barrier reef and Tagula

Island set to the SW on the flood and to the NNW on the ebb.

8.48 Smiths Pass (11°40'S., 153°14'E.), which is the second

opening in the barrier reef S of Tagula Island, is located about

10 miles S of Maduwa Point. The pass is 0.75 mile wide, with

a least depth of 9.1m, and is clear of dangers. Three coral

patches lie within the pass on the W side. Close outside the

barrier reef, about 3.5 miles W of the pass, is an extensive reef.

8.48 Bousquet Bay (11°29'S., 153°16'E.) is entered between

Point Maduwa on the E and the mainland to the W. Both the

bay and its approach are encumbered with reefs which are best

shown on the chart.

8.48 Hui-Waditimo Islet, a mass of dead coral, lies in an

approximate position 7 miles WSW of Maduwa Point. This

islet covered with a few bushes lies on the E end of a reef

which has not been examined.

8.48 Samumu Reefs (11°30'S., 153°09'E.) are located 4.5 miles

W of Maduwa Point and is about 6 miles in width.

8.48 Shallow Bank (11°30'S., 153°14'E.) is a coral patch with

several rocky heads, with depths less than 1.8m. This bank,

which lies about 2 miles W of Maduwa Point, is 0.3 mile in

length. About midway between the bank and the point is a reef

which dries on its E side. West of Shallow Bank and between it

and Samumu Reefs is a reef which always shows. The channel

between Shallow Bank and the reef W of it is 0.75 mile wide.

The W extremity of Iyin Islet bearing 004°, leads through this

channel.

8.49 Iyin Islet (11°27'S., 153°14'E.), lying 3.75 miles NW

of Maduwa Point, is about 0.5 mile offshore. The islet consists

of a grassy ridge of hills, 52m high, surmounted by a clump of

trees on its SW end.

8.49 There is a good, but confined anchorage, in 12.8m, sand and

mud, off the W side of Iyin Islet, with the NW entrance point

of the bay N of Iyin Islet bearing 049°. This anchorage is in

smooth water and out of the influence of tidal currents.

8.49 Onagom Reef, which is steep-to, lies almost midway

between Panaman Islet and Iyin Islet.

8.49 Panaman Islet, located 3.5 miles W of Iyin Islet, is 61m high,

thickly wooded, and uninhabited. The islet lies on the S edge of

a reef, under the name Bagana, which extends in patches for 2

miles, NW and over 1 mile N and NNE from the islet.

8.49 Bilobei Reef, fairly steep-to and located 1.5 miles N of

Panaman Islet, is horseshoe shaped with an opening to the NW.

8.49 There is a clear channel, with a depth of 22m in mid-channel, between Bilobei Reef and the shore reef of Tagula Island.

8.49 Inskip Reefs, a series of reefs, awash, lie 2.75 to 5.5 miles

NW of Panaman Islet.

8.49 Caution.—The area between Inskip and Samumu Reefs on

the N and the barrier reef on the S is cluttered with many reefs

and shoals.

8.50 A mangrove-covered coast trends NW 5.5 miles from

the W entrance point of the bay N of Iyin Islet to Panawadai

Point. The broad coastal reef fringes the coast, extending off it

in places for a distance of up to 1 mile.

8.50 Hosiai Point (11°24'S., 153°11'E.) divides the two small

bights that are located between Iyin Island and Panawadai

Point. The two bights are encumbered with detached reefs and

dangerous patches. The coastal reef extends only a short

distance off the heads of these bights on either side of Hosiai

Point, while extending about 1 mile off Hosiai Point.

8.50 Guide Reef (11°22'S., 153°09'E.), a rocky patch which

usually shows well, has depths from 1.8 to 3.7m and lies about

2 miles W of Hosiai Point. A sunken rock lies about 0.75 mile

SW of the reef.

8.50 Shark Reef (11°24'S., 153°08'E.), a coral patch which dries,

is located 3.5 miles W of Hosiai Point. Two shoals, with depths
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 177

Pub. 164

from 2.7 to 9.1m and 3.7 to 4.6m, lie respectively, 1.5 miles

SW and 0.5 mile W of Shark Reef. A shoal with a depth of 4m,

and a shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, lie about 2.75 miles W and

2.5 miles WNW, respectively of Shark Reef.

8.50 An anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge is

situated in the S part of the bight, on the NW side of Hosiai

Point, sand and mud, in depths from 11 to 12.8m. This

anchorage is sheltered from SE winds and tidal currents.

8.50 The above anchorage is approached with Mount Madau

(11°22'S., 153°12'E.) bearing 055°, and leads between patches

of reefs. When the SW hill over Maduwa Point comes in range

with the summit of Iyin Islet bearing 139°, vessels may drop

the anchor, in 11m. Also, small vessels with local knowledge

may anchor in the bight on the SE side of Hosiai Point, in a

depth of 14.6m. Vessels should keep Maduwa Point bearing

about 142°, taking care not to shut out the point behind Iyin

Island.

8.50 Directions.—Vessels proceeding along this coast may pass

NE of Bilobei Reef and SW of Guide Reef. The N shoulder of

the 235m hill on Maduwa Point open SW of Ilyin Islet bearing

astern about 127° leads NE of Bilobei Reef and SW of Guide

Reef.

8.50 The coast of Taluga Island N from Panawadai Point for 1.25

miles to Hohunawei Point and then NE for 1.5 miles to Bobohai Point, is fringed by a reef nearly 1 mile wide.

8.51 Bobo-hai Point (11°20'S., 153°12'E.) is the NW extremity of Taluga Island. There are a few villages at this end of

the island, but the inhabitants appear not to be numerous.

8.51 Vehi Reef (11°21'S., 153°09'E.), which dries, lies about 3

miles SW of Bobo-hai Point.

8.51 Reef Two is located about 6.5 miles WSW of Bobo-hai

Point. The reef is steep-to and has a drying sand bank on its

end.

8.51 Remora Reef, whose position is approximate, lies about 9

miles WSW of Bobo-hai Point.

Rossel Island

8.52 Rossel Island (Yela Island) (11°22'S., 154°10'E.) is

the easternmost island of the Louisiade Archipelago. Rossel

Island, which is known to the Tagula islanders as Rua, lies

nearly 19 miles NE of Tagula Island.

8.52 Mount Rossel (11°21'S., 154°14'E.) lies near the E end of

the island and is 838m high. This precipitous peak has steep

ridges extending to the N and W, but descends in more gentle

slopes SE to Cape Deliverance, the E extremity of the island.

The SW ridge has two conspicuous peaks each 549m high. The

E peak, Mount Mo, is flat-topped; the W peak is conical. At the

W extremity of the island is a conspicuous conical peak 347m

high.

8.52 Rossel Island is thickly wooded; nearly the whole S coast is

a dense forest. The higher parts of the island are almost constantly cloud-capped during the Southeast Monsoon. Rossel

Island was reported to give a good radar return from a distance

of 28 miles.

8.52 Rossel Lagoon (11°18'S., 153°48'E.) is over 25 miles in

length from the NW point of Rossel Island to Rossel Passage at

the W end. The barrier reef encircling this lagoon is narrow and

has four passages through it W of the island. The barrier reef

on the S side of the island is unbroken E of Rossel Passage.

General depths in the lagoon range from 37 to 64m, but

numerous scattered shoals lie in it. Few of these shoals dry and

the larger ones are usually awash. Since the water is so clear

the shoals can usually be distinguished in good light.

8.52 Rossel Passage (11°21'S., 153°39'E.), at the W end of

Rossel Lagoon, is the only safe passage for a vessel of any size.

This passage is about 0.9 mile wide between the point of the

barrier reef on the NW side, and the edge of a coral reef awash

on the SE side. Between this coral reef and the W end of the S

barrier there is another coral reef, awash, leaving a clear

passage of about 0.2 mile on either side of it. The channels are

clearly visible and the reefs are steep-to. The sea breaks

heavily on both of these reefs and also on the barrier reef.

8.52 Tidal currents within Rossel Passage are fairly strong and set

straight through; the flood sets to the SW while the ebb sets to

the NE.

8.52 Just within Rossel Passage, anchorage has been taken in the

lagoon, with the boulder on the N barrier reef bearing 303°,

distant 2 miles.

8.52 Caution.—Vessels entering Rossel Lagoon must exercise

caution because the area has not been adequately surveyed.

8.53 In the barrier on the N side of the Lagoon there are

three passages or openings; Swinger Opening is the larger

passage; the two smaller passages are called Boat Channel and

Narrow Passage. Narrow Passage, which is the E of the two

smaller passages, is narrow but apparently clear. However

since neither of the two smaller passages have been examined,

they are not recommended for use.

8.53 Swinger Opening (11°16'S., 153°58'E.), whose entrance

lies about 6 miles W of the NW point of Rossel Island, is about

0.25 mile wide, and deep. West Point, in range 171° with Ngea

Islet (Tree Islet), leads to the entrance of Swinger Opening. A

narrow horn of reef on each side of the opening extends for

more than 1 mile SSW.

8.53 Directions.—Vessels approach the W entrance to Rossel

Passage steering 052° and pass the extremity of the reef on the

W side of the channel at a distance of about 0.4 mile. A course

of 063° should then be steered to pass between two coral reefs,

about 0.65 mile apart and distinctly visible, about 4 miles NE

of the entrance. When about 0.5 mile beyond the southernmost

coral reef, alter course to 091° and pass about 0.3 mile S of a

small reef lying about 4 miles from the last turning point and

0.2 mile S of a reef lying 3 miles further. When 1 mile beyond

this reef, alter course to 098°, passing N of a reef with two

sunken rocks near it and S of two reefs, nearly awash, with a

submerged rock close S of the reef. This course passes 0.25

mile N of a reef lying 5.25 miles WNW of West Point. When

abeam of this reef, alter course to 113° for the anchorage in

Tryon Bay. This heading passes between Pawsey Reefs and a

small reef lying 1.25 miles NNW.

8.53 Caution.—Navigation within Swinger Opening is intricate,

and with a tidal current of 2 to 4 knots it cannot be taken

without considerable risk. In addition, Swinger Opening has

not been completely surveyed.
178 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

Rossel Island—West Coast

8.54 The W side of the island is deeply indented between

Gwainyu Point and West Point. Mbeawe Bay, entered between

Gwainyu Point and Mbeawe Point, about 1.5 miles S, is

apparently deep.

Wola Island (High Island) (11°18'S., 154°02'E.), 91m high,

is located 1.5 miles W of Gwainyu Point and is grass-covered,

flat-topped, and steep-to.

8.54 Yonga Bay (11°20'S., 154°05'E.) is entered between

Mbeawe Point and Mboibi Point, 3.5 miles WSW. The S shore,

which is rocky, consists of alternate bays and coves, none of

which affords a desirable anchorage, the water being deep,

with a rocky and uneven bottom. The largest and westernmost

of these coves is Dixon Bay (Kwaya Bay).

8.54 About 2 miles from the head of Yongga Bay and within the

middle is a 5.5m patch with some rocky and foul ground about

0.5 mile SE of it. These dangers make access to the inner part

of the bay somewhat difficult.

Tyron Bay (Chambine Bay) (11°21'S., 154°01'E.), which

lies W of Dixon Bay, is entered between Mboibi Point and

West Point. Tyron Bay is protected from all winds, except

those between N and W. A reef, which nearly dries and may be

difficult to see, lies 0.5 mile SW of the N entrance of the bay,

with which it is connected by foul ground. Rocks with depths

less than 1.8m extend 0.2 mile W of the reef. The S part of the

bay is clear of dangers.

8.54 Pawsey Reefs, which nearly dry, lie about 1.5 miles NW of

West Point. In the middle of these reefs is a rock a few feet

high.

8.54 Anchorage.—Anchorage, in a depth of 22m, sand, can be

taken 0.25 mile N of Wola Island. Anchorage may also be

taken in Tyron Bay, in a depth of 25.6m, sand and mud, with

the N entrance point bearing 348° and the S entrance point

bearing 261°. This part of the bay is clear of dangers. 

Rossel Island—South Coast

8.55 The S coast is rocky, steep and rugged between West

Point and Southwest Point (Vamba Point), 4 miles SE.

Ngea Islet (Tree Islet) (11°24'S., 153°59'E.), which is 12.2m

high, lies 1.25 miles S of West Point and on the barrier reef.

8.55 The reef E of Ngea Islet assumes a fringing character,

extending from 0.5 to 1 mile offshore as far as Govia Bay.

Govia Bay, which lies 5 miles E of Southwest Point, is filled

with reefs, except in its outer part where there may be a boat

entrance. Between this bay and the SE end of the island is

Nyebe Bay and off the SE end the coastal reef extends nearly 2

miles offshore. The sea breaks heavily on the reef during the

Southeast Monsoon.

8.55 Several unexamined passages, from 183m to 0.4 mile wide,

indent the reef off the S side of Rossel Island. The principal

passages, which are reported suitable for small vessels only,

are called Ye Passage, Dowa Passage, and Gware Passage.

8.55 Gwe Passage (11°25'S., 154°01'E.) is 2 miles ESE of Ngea.

The W side of the passage is marked by a beacon. The passage,

91 to 137m wide, is marked by stakes and leads N for about

0.45 mile and then opens into a lagoon extending WNW for 1

mile to a boat channel connecting to Rossel Lagoon. The

village of Pambwa is on the E shore of the lagoon. It was

reported that a 500 grt vessel entered Gwe Passage on a course

of 135° with the District Officer’s house ahead; this is a prominent building with a corrugated iron roof about 0.15 mile NW

of a windsock at an airstrip. At about 0.15 mile beyond the entrance beacon course was altered to 000° and anchorage was

obtained at the E end of the lagoon off the village, in 12 to

18m. Landing can be made at the NW end of the airstrip.

8.55 Gware Passage (11°25'S., 154°12'E.) is about 0.15 mile

wide with reefs on both sides, which normally break heavily.

Two reefs lie about 0.3 mile within the entrance, but passage

between the reefs is clear. The W reef was marked by a beacon.

8.55 Gware Passage leads to an anchorage off Abeleti (Iwole), a

plantation and trading post, situated 2 miles E of Nyebe Bay.

There are two prominent white houses on a hill at Abeleti, but

the W house was reported obscured by foliage. This anchorage

was made with the W reef beacon in line with the E white

house, bearing 010°; anchorage, in a depth of 15.2m, was taken

183m S of the beacon. Anchorage has also been taken, in a

depth of 9.1m, about 183m NE of the beacon.

8.55 Rossel Spit (11°27'S., 154°23'E.), a triangular barrier reef

which fronts the coast and contains many reefs, lies between

the SE point of Rossel Island and Cape Deliverance, 3 miles

NNE.

8.55 Cape Deliverance (11°23'S., 154°13'E.), a low rocky point,

is dominated by a hill 244m high, which slopes gradually to the

coast. Diama Islet lies on the coastal reef close E of the Cape.

Adele Islet (Loa Boloba) (11°27'S., 154°24'E.), 40m high,

lies 8 miles ESE of the Cape and marks the E extremity of the

spit. A light, from which a racon transmits, marks the islet.

8.55 The outer edges of Rossel Spit are apparently steep-to,

although a bank with a depth of 100m was reported to lie about

0.8 mile E of Adele Islet. There is a light on this islet. A

stranded wreck lies on the edge of the reef 2.75 miles WSW of

Adele Islet.

8.55 A very strong WNW current has been experienced when

rounding Adele Islet from N. There are eddies in these waters

extending 3.5 miles E of Adele Islet. From Cape Deliverance E

there is an opening into the N side of the reef 2 miles wide,

which leads into the lagoon. However, this opening has not

been surveyed and is reported to be encumbered with shoals.

Two partially-submerged wrecks lie on the reef 2.75 miles E

and 3.5 miles ESE of Cape Deliverance.

Rossel Island—Northeast Coast

8.56 The coast NW of Cape Deliverance, composed mostly

of mangroves, is fronted by a coastal reef to a distance of about

1 mile.

8.56 Pwennegwa Harbor (11°22'S., 154°17'E.), the only

opening in the fringing reef on the E coast which has been

examined, is entered 1.5 miles N of Cape Deliverance. The

opening is about 0.75 mile long and 0.13 mile in width at the

entrance. Coral flats on either side dry at LW. A boulder,

probably always uncovered, lies about 183m S of the S entrance point of the reef.

8.56 Anchorage may be taken, in depths from 16.5 to 18.3m,

mud, near the head of the harbor, about 0.2 mile offshore.

8.56 Observation Rock, 3m high, lies 2 miles NNW of the entrance to Pwennegwa Harbor and 0.5 mile offshore. Close SE

of the rock is an opening in the reef which widens toward its
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 179

Pub. 164

head, where anchorage might be taken by small vessels with

local knowledge.

8.56 Warunga Passage is an opening in the coastal reef 1.5 miles

NW of Observation Rock.

8.56 Heron Opening whose entrance lies about 3 miles NW of

Observation Rock, is a lagoon-like opening in the reef. This

reef encumbered opening provides anchorage for Jinya (Ginyo)

mission station, the largest settlement on Rossel Island Heron

Islet, 9.1m high, lies on the NW entrance point of the opening.

A boulder lies on the SE entrance point. Foul ground exists 0.4

mile ENE of Heron Islet. It was reported that navigation

through Heron opening was possible for small craft proceeding

in favorable light conditions.

Rossel Island—North Coast

8.57 From Te Point (Ie Point) (11°18'S., 154°13'E.), the

low N part of the island, the coast trends 9 miles W to

Gwainyu Point (11°18'S., 154°04'E.), the NW extremity of

the island. Wu Bay is located 5 miles E of Gwainyu Point. This

stretch of coast is fronted by a reef. Between the coast and the

reef there is foul ground, which is very dangerous.

8.57 Relief Opening (11°17'S., 154°10'E.), about 0.2 mile wide,

is the only opening in this reef and lies about 3.5 miles WNW

of Te Point.

8.57 Pocklington Reef (10°48'S., 155°44'E.) lies about 83 miles

ENE of Cape Deliverance. Several rocks with heights between

0.9 and 3m lie along its length. The wreck on the NE end of the

reef provided a good radar response. There is no anchorage in

the vicinity of the reef.

Manuga Reefs (Protectorate Reefs) (11°00'S., 153°21'E.)

consist of two separate reefs awash at LW. The reefs are

separated by a shallow passage about 0.5 mile wide.

8.57 The SE reef, which is apparently steep-to, has on its outer

edges a few black boulders which dry about 1.5m.

8.57 On the NE edge of the NW reef is a sandy islet with some

bushes on it, about 6.1m high. A cay, 0.6m high, with grass on

it, lies 0.5 mile SE of the above islet.

8.58 The Renard Islands (10°52'S., 153°04'E.) are a

group lying on separate reefs, the easternmost of which lies 11

miles NW of Manuga Reefs. On the N side, shallow water

extends for a distance of 2 to 3 miles and the S side of the chain

is steep-to. The islands are inhabited.

8.58 Kimuta Island (10°51'S., 152°59'E.), which is 84m high, is the

largest and westernmost of the group. The coast is generally rocky

with occasional sandy beaches. Ridges of hills extend through the

island, grassy at the W end and wooded at the E end.

8.58 Bagaium Islet, 9.1m high, lies close S of the W end of the

island and on the reef which fringes the island.

8.58 Niva Beno Islet, 26m high and wooded, lies 1.25 miles E of

and on the same reef as Kimuta Island. There is a village at the

W end of the islet. Several rocks and islets lie on the reef E of

the islet. Topuna, an islet 20m high, being at the E extremity of

the reef.

8.58 Baiw Isleta, Panawadai Islet, and Pana Roran Islet make up a

small group of low bushy rocks and islets on a separate reef

about 1.5 miles N of Kimata Island. The area from the N edge

of the reef surrounding these islets curving around toward the

E extremity of the reef surrounding Kimuta and Niva Beno

Islet has not been examined.

8.58 Oreia Islet, 27m high and wooded, lies about 3.5 miles SE of

Niva Beno islet. Oreia Islet is located near the W end of a reef

on which is Nirut Islet. Between Oreia Islet and Topuna Islet,

there is a passage about 2.25 miles wide with depths from 4.9

to 5.5m. However shoal patches and strong tide rips are found

across this passage.

8.58 The easternmost islet of the Renard Group is Epoko Islet.

This islet, which is about 6m high and covered with bushes,

lies 3.75 miles E of Oreia Islet. Epoko Islet lies on the N edge

of a reef whose SE side is steep-to, but shoal water projects 4

miles WNW from it.

8.58 Anchorage, in a depth of 7.3m, may be taken by small craft

during the Southeast Monsoon at the head of a bight formed by

the horn of a reef extending 0.6 mile offshore, on the N side of

Kimuta Island, the largest of the Renard Islands.

Misima Island

8.59 Misima Island (Misimai Island) (St. Aigan Island)

(10°41'S., 152°44'E.) is a mountainous and densely-wooded

island located 10.5 miles NNW of Kimuta Island.

8.59 Mount Koia Tau, a rounded peak 1,036m high, is located 7

miles E of the W extremity of Misima and is the summit of the

island. The higher peaks of this ridge are frequently cloudcapped during the Southeast Monsoon. A series of conspicuous

hills from 305 to 437m high are located on the S part of the N

extremity of the island. There are several villages, most of

which are on the N side of the island.

Misima Island—South Coast

8.60 Cape Ebora (Cape Ebola) (10°38'S., 152°31'E.), the

W extremity of the island, is a sharp rocky point. A rock lies

awash close off the point, but otherwise it is steep-to. The land

rises rapidly to an elevation of 762m E of the Cape.

8.60 From Cape Ebora, the rocky coast trends ESE for 7 miles to

Bagga Bagga, a steep cliffy point. Close E of Bagga Bagga Point a

bay indents the coast to a distance of about 0.25 mile. A cove and

a large village lie 2.75 miles E of the same point. A promontory,

which forms the S extremity of the island, lies 5.5 miles E of the

cove. About 6 miles ENE of this promontory is the low cliffy point

forming the W entrance point of Bwagadia Harbor.

8.60 It has been reported small craft may take anchorage in a bay

about 1 mile ESE of Cape Ebora. Also there are several coves

on either side of Bagga Bagga Point which might provide

shelter to small craft.

8.60 Maika Harbor (10°42'S., 152°48'E.) is formed by a small

inlet. The entrance, about 91m wide, is well defined and

marked by lighted beacons.

8.60 The harbor is dredged to 8.5m and is suitable for vessels up

to 90m in length and 6m in draft. Winds of 15 to 20 knots and

waves of 1.5 to 2m occur throughout the year. The Southeast

Trade Wind curls around the island and tends to blow from SW

into the harbor.

8.60 Pilotage is not available. The port radio station operates on

VHF channel 16 from 0600 to 1600. 
180 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

8.60 Lighted range beacons, in line 336°, lead into the harbor. A

dangerous rock lies about 50m SE of the lighted beacon W of

the entrance.

8.60 No anchorage is available within 30 miles of the harbor.

Depths up to 300m exist immediately outside the harbor. Anchoring is prohibited E of the E light at the harbor entrance as a

pipe extends 0.15 mile to seaward.

8.60 There is one berth, 60m long, available. The axis of the

wharf is 155°/335°. Vessels berth either port or starboard sideto, but the former is not recommended for vessels over 60m

long due to difficulty of turning in the harbor.

8.60 If an anchor is required for berthing it is recommended that,

during the approach, it be walked back until one shackle is on

deck and when it touches the bottom it is paid out as required. 

8.61 Bwagaoia Harbor (10°41'S., 152°51'E.) is well-defined and marked by a light on its W entrance point. The harbor

is a narrow inlet formed between the coast, which is bordered

by mangroves N of a cliffy point and by the W side of a reef

extending about 1 mile S from the head of the inlet. Although

the entrance is less than 91m wide, it and the harbor are clear

of dangers. The wharf has an alongside depth of 3.7m. Bwagaoia is the Sub-district headquarters for the Louisiades and

has communication by air with Port Moresby. 

8.61 It was reported that small craft with local knowledge anchor

in the harbor with the stern made fast to the trees on the W side

of the harbor, heading S. Swinging room is restricted.

8.61 A red cyclone mooring buoy is moored in the harbor; a white

marker buoy indicates the position of the mooring buoy anchor. 

8.61 Managun Islet (Managon Islet), 27m high and tree covered,

lies on the SE extremity of the fringing reef forming the E side

of the above inlet. Gigira Islet, 18.3m high, lies 0.5 mile W of

Managun Islet and on the S edge of the same reef.

Misima Island—North Coast

8.62 Cape Henry (10°40'S., 152°53'E.) is the E extremity

of the island. From the cape a line of cliffs, 30.5 to 61m high,

trends 6.5 miles NW to Rokia Point.

8.62 Rokia Point (10°37'S., 152°47'E.), the N extremity of the

island, is a low point. Between Rokia Point and Cape Ebora,

about 16 miles W, the coast is rocky in places with stretches of

sandy beaches.

8.62 The N coast has not been surveyed, but due to the great

depths within 1 mile offshore, it is improbable that there is any

anchorage, except in Rijak Bay (Treachery Bay), 1.25 miles

SW of Rokia Point. This anchorage, off Sagara, is reportedly

used by small vessels during the Southeast Monsoon. Anchorage may be had off Liag (Liak) village, in 14.6 to 18.3m, just

W of a reef which extends about 0.15 mile offshore.

The Deboyne Islands

8.63 The Deboyne Islands (10°44'S., 152°22'E.), lying

SW of Misima Island, are a group of islands and barrier reefs

enclosing lagoons.

Panaete Island (Panniet Island) (10°41'S., 152°21'E.),

located about 8.5 miles WSW of Misima Island, is the largest

and northernmost of the group. The island, which is thickly

wooded, is crescent shaped and has a single conical peak,

221m high, near its W side.

8.63 The N coast of the island is bold, steep-to, and about 30.5m

high, gradually diminishing to about 6.1m high at the S

extremities. The principal villages are on the S coast, which is

shoal to approach and dries in sand flats for some distance

offshore. Panaete Island has the largest population in the

Louisiade Archipelago.

8.63 Small vessels can take anchorage off the E coast of Panaete

Island 0.75 mile N of Pana-uya-wana Islet, in 33m, sand and

coral. This anchorage, situated about 183m offshore, is suitable

only when the wind is from NW to SW.

8.63 A thin ridge of coral reef extends SW for 6 miles from the

SW extremity of Panaete Island to the N side of W passage.

This ridge forms the NW barrier of Deboyne Lagoon.

8.63 From the SE extremity of Panaete Island, a reef, through

which there are four openings, extends 9.5 miles SE to the N

part of S passage. On this reef are some wooded islets and sand

cays. Of the four openings in the reef, the two N openings are

not navigable as they open into shallow water and foul ground.

8.63 From the W passage, the barrier reef projects about 12 miles

E. At this point it is separated by S passage from the above reef

extending SE from Panaete Island. There are three openings in

this 12 mile section.

8.63 The three above sections of the barrier reef enclose Deboyne

Lagoon.

8.63 Pana-uya wana Island (10°44'S., 152°25'E.) lies on a reef

which extends SE from the SE extremity of Panaete Island.

8.63 Passage Islet, 12m high, lies about 6 miles SE of Pana-uya

wana and on the N edge of a reef. There is a passage N of

Passage Islet which is 0.2 mile wide with depths up to 10m.

However, a 5.5m patch lies in mid-channel and tidal currents

from 3 to 4 knots set through the passage.

8.63 Rara Island, 26m high and wooded, is located upon a reef 1.5

miles S of Passage Islet.

8.63 White beacons stand about 2.25 miles SE of Pana-uya wana

Island near Losai Island; on the N extremity of Passage Island,

and on the NW extremity of Rara Island.

8.64 Redlick Passage (10°48'S., 152°30'E.), about 0.7

mile wide, lies between the NW tip of Rara Islet and the S end

of Passage Islet reef. A rock with a depth less than 1.8m and a

patch with a depth of 4.6m, lie within 0.4 mile NNW of the

NW tip of Rara Island. In the N part of the channel there are

depths of about 5.5m. The reef on the N side of the passage is

plainly visible.

8.64 The tidal currents in the passage set through at a considerable rate, but the channel is easily navigated.

8.64 South Passage (10°51'S., 152°31'E.) lies between the E end

of the reef forming the S side of Deboyne Lagoon and the NW

side of the atoll where the Redlick Islands lie. The passage is

wide and deep, except for an 11m patch which lies in the

middle. A white beacon marks the W side of South Passage; a

red beacon stands on the reef 1.25 miles farther WSW.

8.64 Tidal currents were observed moving at 4 knots setting along

the axis of the channels of the passage.

8.64 Nibub Islet (10°51'S., 152°26'E.), 9.1m high and marked by

a beacon, lies 3.5 miles SW of Rara Islet, on part of the S

barrier reef.
Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 181

Pub. 164

8.64 There are three navigable channels through the S part of the

barrier reef. Nibub Passage, which is the easternmost of the

three, lies close W of Nibub Islet and is marked by a beacon.

This channel is 0.2 mile wide with a least depth of 6.4m. The

easternmost of the remaining two passages is 0.45 mile wide,

but a spit, with a least depth of 2.7m, extends to the middle of

the passage from the reef on the W side. Sunken rocks lie about

0.25 mile N of this spit. There is a red beacon on the W side of

the reef extending 2.25 miles W from Nibub Passage.

8.65 Nivani Passage (10°49'S., 152°52'E.), which is the

third channel, is also the westernmost of the three. This

passage is about 0.4 mile wide and deep in the middle. Shoals

and foul ground project 1.5 miles NW from the reef on the E

side of the passage.

8.65 West Passage (10°48'S., 152°17'E.), about 9 miles W of

Nibub Islet, is 1.25 miles wide and unobstructed with deep

water close up to the reefs. A least depth of 16.5m has been

reported in the passage.

8.65 Tides—Currents.—A strong tidal rip occasionally sets

across West Passage at the seaward limits of the reef. These

rips are easily seen and do not present a hazard due to the width

of the entrance. The rip was observed to set to the S during the

ebb and to the N on the flood current.

8.66 Deboyne Lagoon (10°48'S., 152°24'E.), roughly triangular in shape, has a number of shoals in the N part, which

are best shown on the chart.

8.66 Panapompom Island, 157m high and wooded, lies nearly in

the middle of the lagoon, about 2 miles S of Panaete Island.

There is a village on the NE side of the island. Panapompom

Island, joined to Panaete Island by foul ground, is completely

surrounded by reefs and shoals which are best seen on the

chart.

8.66 Nivani Island, 95m high, small, grassy, and partly wooded, is

located about 0.5 mile S of Panapompom Island and marked by

beacons. The channel between the islands is shallow. Reefs and

foul ground project off the S and W sides of the island. A depth

of 8.2m lies about 0.5 mile S of the E extremity of the island. A

depth of 2.7m marked by a beacon lies about 2 miles SE of

Panapompom Island. A depth of 3.7m lies 0.5 mile N of this

beacon.

8.66 Anchorage may be taken during the Southeast Monsoon off

the W side of Nivani Island, in a depth of 5.5m.

8.66 Tidal currents in the vicinity of Panapompom Island and Nivani

Island are negligible, but gradually increase to the E and to the W.

8.66 The Redlick Islands (10°50'S., 152°33'E.) comprise a chain

of low bushy islets lying on the N edge of a reef located SE of

Deboyne Lagoon and separated from it by South Passage,

previously described in paragraph 8.64. This large reef, the

edges of which are steep-to, has a deep lagoon within with no

entrance. Upon the E edge of the same reef, and 3.5 miles SE

of the Redlick Islets, is an islet 12m high.

8.66 Mabui Islet, 27m high to the tops of the trees, stands on the

NE side of a reef, between the SE side of the atoll on which the

Redlick Islets lie and the NW side of the barrier reef N of the

Calvados Chain. There is a deep channel on either side of the

reef.

8.67 The Torlesse Islands (10°49'S., 152°13'E.) are a

group of low, wooded, inhabited islets which lie on a reef about

4 miles W of the Deboyne Lagoon. The three main islets of the

group are Pana-niu, about 30.5m high; Bonna-bonna-wan; and

Tinolan. There are several rocks on the E and SE sides of the

reef. The center of a bank, with a least known depth of 101m,

lies about 3.5 miles W of Pana-niu.

8.67 Tidal currents with a N set of 4 knots have been reported in

the N approach between the Torlesse Islands and Deboyne

Lagoon.

8.67 Directions.—Vessels may enter Deboyne Lagoon from the E

or the W. Passage into the entrance, and then the lagoon,

through either Redlick Passage or West Passage, presents no

difficulties, subject to the usual precautions. Both of these

passages are well defined, and Redlick Passage, though narrow,

may be taken with care.

8.67 Caution.—An area about 70 miles in length and width

within the W part of the Louisiade Archipelago has not been

surveyed. Vessels regularly navigate this area on certain well

known tracks, and the following islands and dangers are known

to exist.

Islands and Dangers at the West End of the

Louisiade Archipelago

8.68 The Conflict Group (10°46'S., 151°48'E.), located

about 13.5 miles W of the Torlesse Islets, is an extensive atoll.

8.68 Nearly all of the islands are located on the N side of the atoll,

there being but three on the S side. The largest islands are

apparently at the extremities,with Irai (Ilai) and Panasesabeing

at the W end and Aurioa (Aroroa) and Muniara at the E end.

Panarakiim (Panarakuum), Ginara, Panaboal (Panibari), and

Tabulagoal (Tubinagurm) are the largest on the N side.

Itarmarina and Quesal (Kisa) are the two islands within the

lagoon.

8.68 There are many passages, some of them deep, leading between the islands forming the atoll into the lagoon. This lagoon

provides a possible anchorage, in depths of about 27.4m or

less.

8.68 Emerald Reef (10°38'S., 151°34'E.) lies NW of the W end

of the Conflict Group. A depth of 12.8m was obtained 6.75

miles NW of Panasesa Island, in what appeared to be the bight

of a reef. From this position, a portion of the reef was found to

extend 4 miles NW, and the other SE for probably a greater

distance. Many tide rips prevented the limits of the reef from

being clearly ascertained. However, W of the 12.8m patch, the

reef appeared to be nearly awash.

8.68 Reefs extend NW from the W end of the Conflict Group

apparently connecting with Emerald Reef. Two shoals, with

depths of 13.1 and 8.2m, were reported to lie about 8 miles

WNW of the W extremity of Irai Island.

8.68 A ridge with shallow water, extends 2 miles W from the NW

tip of Emerald Reef and is probably part of the same reef. A

coral patch with a depth of 12.8m, lies 9 miles N of the above

NW tip. A group of three reefs and shoal waters are located

about 4 miles NW of the NW tip of Emerald Reef.

8.69 Lunn Island (10°47'S., 152°00'E.) lies about 5 miles

E of the Conflict Group. The island is 24m high and fringed by

a reef. A light is shown from the E end of the island.
182 Sector 8. The Louisiade Archipelago 

Pub. 164

8.69 Bunora Islet is located about 15 miles NNW of Lunn Island.

Sarupai Islet lies about 4.5 miles WNW of Bunora Islet.

8.69 A coral shoal, whose position is approximate, is charted 10

miles WNW of Sarupai Islet.

8.69 Directions.—Vessels usually enter the lagoon via Ship Pass,

SE of Irai Island. Vessels steer 046° for Itamarina Island. Once

inside the lagoon a course of 088° with Lunn Island ahead,

takes a vessel through the lagoon to pass out by the passage

just N of Muniara Island. A depth of 7.3m was reported on the

Muniara Island side of this passage.

8.69 Another passage from W, reportedly used by a small vessel,

is to enter between Panasesa Island and Gabuga butau Island.

A depth of 5.5m was reported between these islands. Vessels

then pass close to the fringing reef on the N side of Itamarina

Island. Course should then be shaped to pass S of Quesal

Island to the passage just N of Muniara Island.

8.69 There is deep clear water on the seaward side close up to the

reef forming the S side of the lagoon. Also, deep clear water

exists between the E end of the Conflict Group and Lunn Island.

8.69 Vessels should exercise caution when navigating within the

lagoon due to the incomplete nature of the survey information.

In the passage between Bunora Islet and Sarupai Islet, the

bottom suddenly shoals off to 60.4m, indicating the possible

existence of undetected dangers in this vicinity.

8.69 Anchorage can be taken off the E side of Panasesa Island by

small vessels, in 9.1m. Vessels have approached this anchorage

through the passage between Panasesa Island and Gabugabutau

Island.

8.70 The Bonvouloir Islands (10°23'S., 151°57'E.) and

reefs extend in a curve about 20 miles in a NW and SE direction. These islands are inhabited.

8.70 East Island (10°24'S., 152°06'E.), 198m high and densely

wooded, is the easternmost of the group. This island lies about

26 miles NE of the Conflict Group. There are great depths off

the N side of the island at a distance of from 0.5 to 0.75 mile. It

was reported that East Island lay 0.5 mile N of its charted

position.

8.70 Discolored water, with probable depths of from 32.9 to

36.6m, extends off the E end of East Island.

8.70 A shoal, with a depth of 6.7m, lies about 1.75 miles W of

East Island. A reef, on which the sea breaks, lies about 5 miles

W of the island. A shoal, with a depth of 11m, lies 0.6 mile N

of the reef. A 9.1m patch lies 6 miles W of the island.

8.70 Anchorage may be obtained, in a depth of 31m, broken coral

and sand, about 0.3 mile from the NW side of East Island.

8.70 Hastings Island (10°20'S., 151°52'E.), 222m high, is bold

and densely wooded. A bank, 0.75 mile in length, lies off its

NW point; discolored water has been observed off its E end. A

light marks the SW extremity of the island.

8.70 The Strathord Islands (10°15'S., 151°52'E.) are a group of

low wooded islands connected by a reef. These islands are

located about 4 miles N of Hastings Island. A light is shown

from the N extremity of the Strathord Islands. The passage between the Hastings Island and the Strathord Islands appears to

be clear of danger.
Pub. 164

9. Islands North and Northeast of East Cape—North Coast of Papua New 

Guinea—East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya

9.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 9 — CHART INFORMATION
185

Pub. 164

SECTOR 9 

ISLANDS NORTH AND NORTHEAST OF EAST CAPE—NORTH COAST OF PAPUA NEW 

GUINEA —EAST CAPE TO EAST BOUNDARY OF IRIAN JAYA

9.0 Plan.—This sector first describes the islands N of the

Louisiade Archipelago, and N and NE of East Cape, the E

extremity of Papua New Guinea. The islands, described from E

to W, are the Laughlan Islands, Woodlark Island, the Trobriand

Islands, the Lusancay Islands and Reefs, and the D’Entrecasteaux Islands. The N coast of Papua New Guinea, from East

Cape to the E boundary of Irian Jaya, at the 141st meridian, is

then described. The arrangement of the latter part is from E to

W.

General Remarks

9.1 Tides—Currents.—A W current with a velocity of 2

knots has been observed between Rossel Island and the Laughlan Islands, and thence a NNW current with a velocity of 1.25

knots to a position about 170 miles NNW of the Laughlan Islands, decreasing in velocity to 0.25 knot, but setting in the

same direction, thence W towards Finsch Harbor. 

9.1 The current between Kiriwina Island and Kitava Island sets

NNW with a maximum velocity of 2 knots during the Southeast Trade Winds.

9.1 In Huon Gulf, a strong current setting SE towards Burnung

Point is apparently caused by the discharge of the Markham

River.

9.1 From Vitiaz Strait to Isumrud Strait, the currents are variable. From May to September, W sets of the South Equatorial

Current predominate, with rates up to about 2 knots in the open

ocean, and up to 3 knots through Isumrud Strait. From November to February, the Northwest Monsoon reverses the trend.

9.1 From about March to November, the predominant direction

of the current is WNW near the coast of Papua New Guinea,

but is W farther seaward; average velocities vary from 1 knot to

1.75 knots. In the Northwest Monsoon, the flow near the coast

is reversed and sets SE. 

The Laughlan Islands

9.2 The Laughlan Islands (Nada Islands) (9°17'S.,

153°40'E.) consist of eight low islets, lying on a horseshoeshaped reef, open W. The greatest diameter of the lagoon is

about 3 miles. The islets, none of which are more than 2.7m

high, with coconut palms about 24m high, are composed of

sand and coral. There are several villages, some of the inhabitants of which speak a little English and are very friendly.

9.2 The Laughlan Islands were reported to give a good radar

return from a distance of 16 miles.

9.2 The best entrance is N of a small sand bank with some

bushes on it. The water in the lagoon is clear, rendering the

numerous coral patches easy to distinguish.

9.2 Anchorage.—Good anchorage has been taken by a 1,400

ton vessel, in 18.3 to 22m, in the S part of Wabomat Lagoon.

Local knowledge is required. Small vessels can anchor, in

9.1m, about 0.2 mile off the village on Budelun Island.

9.2 Caution.—The Laughlan Islands should be given a wide

berth at night due to the currents in their vicinity. 

9.3 Cannac Islet (9°17'S., 153°28'E.), a bare rock, 35m

high, lies about 9 miles W of the N islet of the Laughlan Islands. Foul ground extends about 4 miles S of Cannac Islet; a

depth of 7.3m was reported about 4 miles ENE of the islet.

9.3 Cannac Islet was reported to give good radar returns from

distances up to 25 miles.

9.3 An extensive coral bank, with depths of 18.3 to 37m, and a

width of about 10 miles, extends about 15 miles W of Cannac

Islet. There is a 11m shoal 18.5 miles W of Cannac Islet.

9.3 Anchorage may be obtained outside the lagoon, in a depth of

about 7m, about 0.2 mile W of Cannac Islet.

Woodlark Island

9.4 Woodlark Island (Muyuwa Island) (9°07'S.,

152°50'E.), about 29 miles W of Cannac Islet, is high in its W

half, and low in its E half. The island is about 33 miles in

length in an E-W direction, and about 16 miles in breadth.

Suloga Point is the SW point of the island and the SW entrance

point of Suloga Harbor. Suloga Peak, 410m high, lies about 1.5

miles N of Suloga Point, and is prominent from S. Mount

Kabati (9°04'S., 152°49'E.) lies near the middle of the N side

of the island.

9.4 The coast of the island is generally high and densely wooded

to the water’s edge, in some parts consisting of vertical limestone cliffs. The NE side of the island is relatively steep-to,

while the S and SW sides are encumbered with islets and detached reefs to a distance of 17 miles.

9.4 Woodlark Island has been reported to be a good radar target

at a distance of 23 miles.

9.4 Caution.—The N side of the island is unsurveyed and

should not be approached within 2 miles. It has also been reported that the NE part of the island lies 2 miles SW of its

charted position.

Woodlark Island—Islands and Dangers

9.5 Ginetu Island (9°27'S., 152°38'E.), about 16 miles

SSW of Suloga Point, is wooded, about 18.3m high to the tops

of the trees, and bordered by extensive reefs. An islet, 13.7m

high to the tops of the trees, lies near the extremity of a reef

extending about 1 mile E of Ginetu Island. Detached reefs and

shoal patches lie about 2 miles W and 6.5 miles NW of Ginetu

Island.

9.5 From a position about 8 miles NW of Ginetu Island, a

broken barrier reef, on which there are several islands, extends

about 8 miles NW, then about 15 miles N to the S extremity of

Madau Island. 

9.5 Madau Island (9°00'S., 152°28'E.), with a width not exceeding 1.5 miles, extends about 7 miles N, then 3 miles NE,
186 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

then 5 miles ESE, and is almost connected at its SE end to the

NW corner of Woodlark Island. A very shallow lagoon, full of

reefs and shoals, occupies the NW part of this area bordered by

the barrier reef, Madau Island, and the W end of Woodlark

Island. Farther SE, many reefs and coral heads lie in an

unsurveyed area W of a line between Ginetu Island and Suloga

Point; there is an entrance through the barrier reef in the latter

part, but it is only accessible to vessels with local knowledge.

9.5 Madau Island was reported to lie 2 miles W of its charted

position.

Kwaiapon Bay (Kwarapan Bay) (9°05'S., 152°43'E.), with

its entrance about 9 miles NW of Suloga Point, should not be

approached by vessels with a draft of more than 3.7m; local

knowledge is necessary. Kalumadau, the only settlement on

Woodlark Island, lies about 2 miles inland from the head of

Kwaiapon Bay, and is unhealthy.

9.5 Beacons, with radar conspicuous metal framework towers

surmounted by conical topmarks, are situated on the SW side,

17.5 miles W and 9.25 miles NW of Suloga Point.

9.6 The Alcester Islands (9°28'S., 152°28'E.), about 12

miles WSW of Ginetu Island, consist of a flat-topped denselywooded island, 55m high, to the tops of the trees, at its E end;

an islet of the same character, 30.5m high, lies close E. The island is steep-to on its NW side, where the cliffs rise perpendicularly from the water. A cove and a village lie on the N side

of the island.

9.6 The island has no fringing reef on its S side, and is generally

steep-to, but a reef fringes its N side in places, and there is reef

extending 0.35 mile SW from the W end of the island. The

Alcester Island were reported to lie approximately 4 miles E of

their charted position.

9.6 Anchorage may be taken off the village in a cove on the N

side of the island near the middle during the Southeast Trade

Wind.

Suloga Harbor (9°13'S., 152°46'E.)

World Port Index No. 53190

9.7 Suloga Harbor, at the entrance of a spacious inlet, is

entered between Suloga Point, the SW point of Woodlark

Island, and Whasela Point, about 2.25 miles NE. Mapas Island,

close NE of Suloga Point, to which it is connected by coral

reef, shelters the harbor. There are general depths of 12.8 to

20m in the harbor.

9.7 A depth of 11m lies about 7 miles SE of Suloga Point, in the

approach to the harbor.

9.7 The approach to the harbor lies between Mapas Island and

the reef fringing Woodlark Island, which is partly awash, 0.8

mile E; the channel is 0.65 mile wide, with fairway depths of

24m. The passage into the harbor lies between Whasela Point

and a detached reef which extends 0.5 mile E of Oquana Point,

the N extremity of Mapas Island; this passage is 0.25 mile

wide.

9.7 Mapas Island (9°12'S., 152°48'E.), about 61m high, has

most of its shores fringed with mangroves, and a salt water

lagoon extends nearly its whole length. There is a village on

the sandy beach on the SW side of the island. Reefs extend

0.25 mile N of Picnic Point, the NW end of the island; there are

two detached patches between the extremity of the reefs and

Oquana Point.

9.7 Whasela Point is formed by two wooded islets with foul

ground between them and the coast. Steep Point, close W, has

some huts on it. Shoute Point, about 1.25 miles WNW of

Whasela Point, is the E entrance point of the N part of the inlet.

9.7 A detached reef lies in the center of Suloga Harbor, about 0.5

mile N of Picnic Point.

9.7 An area of discolored water, presumably shallow, was reported to lie 0.35 mile S of Mapas Island.

9.7 Directions.—From S, Suloga Peak is conspicuous, and on

approaching the harbor, Mapas Island can be made out. Vessels

approaching Suloga Harbor should steer a course of 021°

through the middle of the channel between the reefs extending

from the E side of Mapas Island and the reef E. The edges of

the reefs are clearly defined, but the detached reef E of Oquana

Point is not easily made out.

9.7 When Oquana Point, the N point of Mapas Island, bears

280°, alter course gradually W and anchor, in about 20m, when

Shoute Point bears 333°, distant about 0.5 mile. The anchorage

lies about 0.2 mile E of the detached reef in the center of the

harbor. Small vessels may obtain anchorage SE of the reef,

with Oquana Point bearing 100°, distant 0.3 mile.

9.8 Guasopa Harbor (9°14'S., 152°56'E.) lies in a bight

between Main Point, the SE extremity of Woodlark Island, and

a point on the coast about 4 miles W. A barrier reef, extending

about 9 miles WSW from Main Point, protects the harbor. Reu,

Vaviai, and Aiun, 39.6m, 36.6m, and 37m high, respectively, to

the tops of the trees, are thickly wooded islets, which lie on the

barrier reef, about 1.25 and 3.5 miles W, and 8 miles WSW,

respectively, of Main Point.

9.8 A 7.3m unexamined patch (9°19'S., 152°57'E.) lies about 4.5

miles SSW of Main Point.

9.8 The main entrance to the harbor rounds the W extremity of

Vaviai Reef, between the reef extending about 0.5 mile SW of

Vaviai and an unexamined depth of 5.5m, about 1 mile SSW of

Vaviai, on which the sea breaks. This patch is the E of a series

of patches on the barrier reef to the W. There are depths of 20

to 26m in the passage, and from 14.6 to 22m in the fairway

inside, with not less than 9.1m nearly to Guasopa, a village

about 3.5 miles NE of Vaviai. A 3m shoal lies in the fairway

about 1 mile NE of Vaviai, and an 8.5m patch lies about 0.5

mile farther NE. Iris Patch, in a depth of 4.6m, lies on the W

side of the fairway of Guasopa Harbor, 0.85 mile WNW of the

W end of Vaviai. There are depths of 3m extending 0.5 mile off

the N coast of Vaviai.

9.8 The E entrance lies E of the reef between Vaviai and Reu

islets, and is reported to be intricate and patchy.

9.8 There is a landing stage, available for small craft, in the NE

part of the harbor.

9.8 There are some reefs off Aiun and E of it. A vessel steering a

course of 098° from abreast Aiun to Nubara, an islet about 17

miles ENE, crossed some sunken patches of reef, over one of

which there was a depth of 6.4m, about 3 miles off the coastal

reef.

9.8 Anchorage.—Anchorage has been taken, in 16.5 to 18.3m,

in Guasopa Harbor, with the E extremity of Vaviai bearing

189°, distant about 0.4 mile.
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 187

Pub. 164

9.8 Directions.—The E peak of the continuous high land of

Woodlark Island, bearing 314°, is reported to lead up to the W

entrance. When the W entrance has been identified, a vessel

should steer to pass between the spit extending from the SW

end of the reef on which Vaviai lies, and an unexamined shoal,

in a depth 5.5m, about 0.6 mile SSW of it, passing about 0.1

mile from the reef and rounding the NW angle at the same

distance, avoiding Iris Patch.

9.8 Caution is necessary in entering the harbor, and only vessels

with local knowledge should attempt it.

9.9 Kamarau Bay (9°10'S., 152°58'E.) is entered between a rounded point about 1.25 miles NNE of Main Point

and a point about 2.5 miles farther NNE. The bay extends

about 3.5 miles NW and rivers discharge into the bay at its

head. The bay has not been surveyed, but appears to be shoal

for a considerable distance from its head.

9.9 It is reported that small craft can anchor near the S shore of

the bay but it is open to swell in strong SE winds. 

9.9 Direction Point (9°09'S., 153°03'E.), the E extremity of

Woodlark Island, lies about 3.75 miles NE of the N entrance

point of Kumarau Bay. The unsurveyed coast between is

fronted by a reef which appears to extend more than a mile

offshore.

9.9 Nubara Islet (9°13'S., 153°07'E.) lies about 1 mile W of the

end of a reef extending about 7 miles ESE of Direction Point.

The islet was reported to be about 30.5m high to the tops of the

trees and to give a good radar echo at 23 miles. Two small

islets lie on the reef, about 2.5 miles S of Direction Point. A

reef extends about 3 miles SW of Nubara Islet; the area about 5

miles farther SW is unsurveyed.

9.9 An above-water reef lies about 5 miles NE of Nubara Islet; a

reef extends about 3 miles S of the above-water reef, and the

area in the vicinity is unsurveyed.

9.9 An 11m shoal lies about 6 miles ESE of Nubara Islet.

Buyuasi Bay (Richards Bay) (9°06'S., 152°58'E.) lies on the

NE side of Woodlark Island, about 4.5 miles NW of Direction

Point; a village lies in the W corner of the bay. The bay affords

anchorage for small vessels with local knowledge, in 18.3m,

coral, about 55m offshore, but it is exposed and unsafe in the

Northwest Monsoon. Perpendicular cliffs, about 18m high,

border the bay and there is no landing place. 

9.9 At the N extremity of Woodlark Island a shoal, in a depth of

1.8m, extends from 0.75 mile to 1.25 miles offshore; the sea

seldom breaks on it, but it is usually marked by heavy tide rips.

Egum Atoll

9.10 Egum Atoll (9°25'S., 151°57'E.), nearly circular and

about 16 miles in diameter, lies about 22 miles WNW of the

Alcester Islands. A large part of the reef is in depths of 7.3 to

13m, but it rises about a meter above-water on the N side,

where some 14 islands and islets are located.

9.10 Yanaba Island, the largest of the islands and islets, lies at the

NW end of the reef. It is 65m high, to the tops of the trees, in

its N part, and 47m high at its E end. There are some villages in

a sandy bay on the S side of Yanaba Island. Tabunagora Island,

22m high, to the tops of the trees, lies about 6 miles SE of

Yanaba Island.

9.10 Yanaba Island is reported to be a good radar target at a

distance of 15 miles.

9.10 A small islet, 31m high to the tops of the trees, lies about 4

miles N of Yanaba Island.

9.10 Egum Islet and Nasakori Islet, about 3 miles SE, lie in the

middle of the lagoon. There are many isolated reefs and coral

heads in the atoll.

9.10 The NW and NE entrances into the lagoon appear to be the

best. The NW entrance, SW of Yanaba Island, has a depth of

approximately 5.5m. The NE entrance is about 0.4 mile wide,

but appears shoal, and its use is not recommended.

9.10 Anchorage.—There is reported to be anchorage, exposed to

SE winds, in 11m, off the villages on the S side of Yanaba Island. There is reported to be sheltered anchorage in the vicinity

of Egum Islet.

9.10 Caution.—A dangerous submerged rock has been reported

(1993) to lie in position 9°26.6'S, 151°50.3'E about 6 miles SW

of Egum Islet.

The Marshall Bennett Islands

9.11 Gawa Island (8°58'S., 151°59'E.), the E island of the

Marshall Bennett Islands, is a former atoll elevated above the

sea. The coral wall rises to an elevation of 173m to the tops of

the trees. The plateau is 30.5m below the circumferential rim.

Coconut palms mark each village. Gawa Island was reported to

lie at least 2 miles E of its charted position.

9.11 Anchorage can be obtained practically anywhere about 0.1

mile or so offshore around Gawa Island. The water is clear and

any uncharted dangers should be seen. Anchorage has been

taken, in 57m, with the N extremity of the island bearing 093°

and the NW extremity bearing 204°.

9.11 Kwaiawata Island (8°55'S., 151°55'E.), about 3 miles NW

of Gawa Island, is an elevated atoll 181m high to the tops of

the trees. A reef extends from the SE and NW sides of the

island, but in other places it is steep-to. The cliffs at the E and

W extremities of the island are perpendicular, with numerous

caves all along these parts of the coast.

9.11 The center of the raised lagoon lies at an altitude of 99m;

villages and extensive gardens border the lagoon.

9.11 Anchorage.—A belt of anchoring ground, sand, gradually

shoals toward the fringing reef.

9.12 Dugumenu Island, about 6 miles N of Kwaiawata

Island, is 59m high to the tops of the trees. It is composed of

coral, and is covered with coconut palms. Anchorage by large

vessels can be obtained outside the coastal reef of the island.

Iwa Island (8°42'S., 151°41'E.), about 18 miles NW of

Kwaiawata Island, is the NW of the Marshall Bennett Islands.

It is 142m high, thickly wooded, and consists of a series of

irregular coral terraces and precipices. The coast is bordered by

steep cliffs. There is a village at the W point of a small sandy

beach, but no anchorage.

9.12 Iwa Island has been reported to be a good radar target at a

distance of 24 miles. Iwa Island was reported to lie 2 miles

WNW of its charted position.
188 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

The Trobriand Islands

9.13 Kiriwina Island (8°35'S., 151°08'E.), the largest

island of the Trobriand Islands, is densely wooded, and of

almost uniform height, with an elevation of 46m to the tops of

the trees. The other islands of the group are of a similar

character. Bomatu Point (8°24'S., 151°07'E.), the NE extremity of Kiriwina Island, is marked by a light.

9.13 The N and E sides of the island are fringed by a reef, which

extends from 0.1 to 0.3 mile offshore, in places, and there is

practically no anchorage off these two sides. An extensive bay,

on the W side of the island, is entered between Boli Point,

about 2 miles SE of Kadalawa Point (8°32'S., 150°59'E.), the

W extremity of the island, and Kabanikau Point, about 11

miles S. This bay is encumbered by a reef and coral heads

which extend nearly to the line joining the entrance points.

9.13 Omarakana, a village in which there is a church, lies about 4

miles S of Bomatu Point, and 1.5 miles inland.

9.13 Muiau Bay, on the E side of the island, is fringed by a nearby

drying reef extending about 73m offshore at its N end.

9.13 Vakuta Island (8°51'S., 151°11'E.) is separated from the S

extremity of Kiriwina Island by a pass that is available only for

boats. Vakuta Island has been reported to give a good radar

return at a distance of 14 miles.

9.13 Kitava Island (8°37'S., 151°20'E.), about 10 miles E of

Kiriwina Island, is 142m high, and appears to be an elevated

knoll. From E, it appears as a densely-wooded ridge, slightly

lower at each end, falling steeply into the sea. The central

plateau of the island is surrounded by a wooded coral wall, the

top of which is from 15.2 to 30.5m above the level of the

plateau; several villages are in the depressed plateau. The E

coast of the island is steep-to, and fringed by sand. Uratu Islet

lies on a reef fringing the W side of the island and extending

about 0.5 mile offshore.

9.13 A rock, over which the depth is unknown, has been reported

to lie about 1.25 miles SW of Uratu Islet.

9.13 A light is shown from the SE side of Kitava Island.

9.13 Kaileuna Island (8°31'S., 150°57'E.), 46m high to the tops

of the trees, lies about 1.25 miles W of the W extremity of

Kiriwina Island.

9.13 Anchorage.—Good, sheltered anchorage can be obtained

off the W side of Kiriwina Island, in about 9.1 to 13m, about 1

mile SW of Boli Point, avoiding the detached coral patches

which are reported to exist there. Anchorage can also be taken

in the lee of Mu-ua Island, about 10 miles farther S, when SE

weather renders the anchorage off Boli Point untenable. There

is a green beacon over depths of 3.7m about 1.25 miles W of

Mu-ua Island.

9.13 A boat channel, marked by poles and beacons, leads from the

anchorage of Boli Point to a jetty at Losuia, about 3 miles E of

Boli Point; a least depth of 0.9m was reported over the bar S of

Boli Point.

9.13 Sheltered anchorage, in SE weather, can be obtained, in 39 to

55m, SW of Sia Islet, 9.1m high, close off the NW side of

Kiriwina Island, about 2.5 miles W of Bomatu Point.

9.13 Anchorage can be obtained anywhere off Kitava Island. The

berth during the Southeast Trade Wind is in a depth of 18.3m,

0.15 mile N of Uratu Islet.

9.14 Dangers S of the Trobriand Islands.—The area

between the S end of Kiriwina Island, and Fergusson Island

and Goodenough Island, located about 42 miles SSW and 55

miles WSW, respectively, is studded with reefs. The eye is the

only guide for navigation among the reefs, but the water is so

clear that there is no difficulty in seeing them from aloft. The

reefs are not steep-to as is usual off the coast of Papua New

Guinea and anchorage can be obtained anywhere in their

vicinity. It should be noted, as stated on the charts, shallower

water than charted may exist in these areas due to incomplete

information.

9.14 Recommended tracks.—A channel leads from a position 2

miles NNE of MacGee Patch (9°10'S., 150°50'E.), then

separates about 6.5 miles NNE into two channels passing about

1.5 and 6 miles E, respectively, of Wadana Islet (8°56'S.,

150°50'E.), then unites again nearly 2 miles S of Iaga Islet

(8°44'S., 150°58'E.). The channel then extends NNE, then N

through the deep channel W of Kiriwina Island.

9.14 The W channel is the recommended channel as the buoys

which previously marked the channels have been removed. The

channels are very narrow in places, and should only be used

with local knowledge, using local charts.

The Lusancay Islands and Reefs

9.15 Thr Lusancay Islands and Reefs extend from about 12

to 60 miles W of the N end of Kiriwina Island; between them

and Cape Ward Hunt, about 115 miles W, many reefs are

charted. This area should be avoided. The tops of the trees on

the islands attain an elevation of 30.5 to 61m.

9.15 Nauria Island (8°34'S., 150°17'E.), 61m high and bare, is

the S island of the group. Rothwell Bank, a sand bank with low

trees on it, lies about 20 miles SW of Nauria Island.

9.15 It was reported that radar echoes were obtained of the

Lusancay Islands at a distance of 21 miles.

9.15 Passages in the vicinity should not be attempted except in the

finest weather and with the sun in a favorable position. Many

of the reefs are very long and narrow, running in a NW-SE

direction, and it is difficult to find a passage through them.

9.15 Deep water exists on the N side of the Lusancay Islands,

close N of the fringing reefs, which afford protection for small

craft during the SE season.

The D’Entrecasteaux Islands

9.16 The D’Entrecasteaux Islands, S of the Lusancay Islands and Reefs and the Trobriand Islands, lie in close proximity to the E end of Papua New Guinea. It consists of Normanby Island, Fergusson Island, Goodenough Island, and

numerous other islets.

9.16 Normanby Island (10°00'S., 151°00'E.), the SE island of

the group, is wooded, except for a mountain near the middle

which is bare, high, and rocky. The island has a narrow

mountain range, attaining an altitude of 1,027m at the NW end

of the island, with deeply-furrowed sides and wide valleys. The

island has very little fringing reef.

9.16 The S coast of Normanby Island, which forms the N side of

Goschen Strait, has been described in paragraph 7.41.
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 189

Pub. 164

Normanby Island—Southwest Coast

9.17 Lebudowa Bay is entered about 3 miles N of Cape

Prevost (10°06'S., 150°57'E.), the SW extremity of Normanby

Island. This bay has not been fully examined,and is much encumbered by coral patches. The coastal range of hills dips

considerably near the center of the bay, rising again towards

Double Peak, 823m high, about 12 miles N. Bwaeiona Point

(10°02'S., 150°57'E.), the N entrance point of the bay, lies

about 4.5 miles N of Cape Prevost; a shoal, with a least depth

of 2.7m, lies about 0.3 mile S of the point.

9.17 Outer Rocks, about 1 mile WSW of Bwaeiona Point, consists of two rocks, 1.2 and 0.6m high, lying on a reef of submerged rocks. The reef extends about 180m NW and 135m SE

of the highest rock, and is steep-to. A 2.1m shoal, with a 9.7m

patch close SW, lies about 0.75 mile WNW of Outer Rocks.

9.17 Cape Chesterfield (10°00'S., 150°54'E.) lies about 7 miles

NNW of Cape Prevost. Two tree-covered islets lie on a drying

reef about 0.75 mile S of the cape and reefs, terminating in a

3.7m shoal, extend about 2.5 miles S of the cape.

9.17 Entrance Islet, 26m high, lies in the approach to Sewa Bay,

nearly 0.5 mile N of Bwaeiona Point, on a submerged reef extending about 92m N and SSW of it.

Sewa Bay

9.18 The entrance to Sewa Bay, about 5 miles N of Cape

Prevost, is almost closed by Pwasiai Island (10°01'S.,

150°57'E.). The island is 96m high, and fringed on its S and E

sides by foul ground extending up to 92m offshore. The passage N of Pwasiai Island is a boat entrance over a reef of sunken

rocks. The S passage, about 90m wide, with depths of 50m in

the fairway, lies between the W point of Pwasiai Island and the

peninsula E, which terminates NW in Buiueta Point (10°01'S.,

150°57'E.).

9.18 The bay is a landlocked harbor, backed, except at its NW

end, by densely-wooded hills. Adelaide Peak (9°59'S.,

150°57'E.) attains an elevation of 271m about 1.25 miles N of

Buiueta Point. The bay has three arms; the entrance opens into

the short W arm. Bwaguda Bay occupies the S arm while the N

and largest arm terminates in Martin Treacy Harbor.

9.18 A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extends about 135m

N of Buiueta Point; West Islet, 11.6m high, lies on this bank. A

reef extends about 0.3 mile S from the N shore of the W arm. A

deep channel, 0.15 mile wide, leads into the bay, between the

above bank and reef.

9.18 On the S side of the W arm, Ellen Isle lies 0.35 mile E of

Buiueta Point. Una Rock, which dries 1.2m, and Henby Shoal,

with depths of less than 5.5m, extend about 0.2 mile offshore,

nearly 0.75 mile and 1 mile respectively, ENE of the same

point.

9.19 Geboia Point (10°01'S., 150°59'E.), about 1.25 miles

E of Buiueta Point, is the NE extremity of a hilly peninsula

which separates W arm from Bwaguda Bay. Galogalo Islet,

10.4m high, lies near the outer end of a reef of sunken rocks

extending about 0.2 mile NE of Geboia Point.

9.19 Whittle Reefs lies with its SE end about 0.4 mile N of Galogalo Islet; foul ground, with drying patches, extend about 0.35

mile WNW of its SE end.

9.19 There are general depths of 37 to 50m in the central part of

Sewa Bay, W of Whittle Reefs.

9.19 Bwaguda Bay, entered between Galogalo Islet and the shore

E, has general depths of 33m in the entrance, shoaling gradually to 20m near its head, with comparatively steep-to shores.

Powles Rock, in a depth of 3.7m, lies in the entrance to the bay,

0.13 mile E of Galogalo Islet; Nusa Rock, in a depth of 3.7m,

and sunken rocks on its NW side, lies 0.25 mile ESE of the

same islet. Patrick Patch, in a depth of 9.1m, and a 5.5m patch

lie 0.35 mile and 0.5 mile, respectively, SSE of Galogalo Islet;

the latter patch lies about 135m offshore.

9.19 The N arm has no known dangers more than 0.2 mile offshore W of the meridian of Whipple Reefs. It shoals gradually

to about 9.1m 0.25 mile from the head of Martin Treacy Harbor. About 0.3 mile E of Powles Rock, near the N entrance to

Bwaguda Bay, there is a small wharf with a depth of 5.5m

alongside. It was reported to be in a poor state of repair.

9.19 Anchorage can be taken in Sewa Bay as convenient, in

depths of 11 to 47.5m, mostly mud.

9.19 The coast between Cape Chesterfield and the entrance to

Maiobari Bay, about 4 miles NNW, is indented by several

small coves, and the coastal range is densely wooded.

9.19 Maiobari Bay (9°56'S., 150°53'E.) affords anchorage for

small vessels with local knowledge, in 40m, mud; the anchorage is restricted by shoals extending from its shores. The

shores of the bay are densely wooded and bordered by mangroves. It is advisable to anchor farther out during the strong

NW winds.

9.20 Duchess Islet (9°57'S., 150°51'E.), about 2 miles W

of the S entrance point of Maiobari Bay, is about 61m high,

with a saddle-shaped summit, and thickly wooded. Julian

Reefs, on the S of which the sea breaks, extend about 2.5 miles

SSW and 4 miles S of the islet. A rock, awash and dangerous to

navigation, is located 3.5 miles S of Duchess Island.

9.20 Perry Bay lies between the N entrance point of Maiobari Bay

and Perry Islet (9°49'S., 150°49'E.), about 8.5 miles NNW;

the latter is a low flat islet lying on a reef extending about 1

mile WSW from the coast.

9.20 The main ridge of Normanby Island, after dipping considerably and becoming somewhat level in Lebudowa Bay, rises

again abreast the middle of Perry Bay to conspicuous Double

Peak (9°51'S., 150°53'E.), 823m high.

9.20 Sunken coral patches extend from 2 to 5 miles offshore between Duchess Islet and Cape Deedes (9°48'S., 150°45'E.), a

dark densely-wooded point, about 10.5 miles NNW. The

charted positions of these patches must be considered as approximate only, and it is probable that other dangers are farther W.

9.20 Caution.—It is therefore recommended not to approach the

SW coast of Normanby Island within 8 miles.

9.21 Between Cape Deedes and Paipainina Point

(9°43'S., 150°44'E.), about 4.5 miles N, densely-wooded hills

descend steeply to the sea. Observation Islet, close NW of

Paipainina Point, is 30.5m high, steep, rocky and densely

wooded. Foul ground extends about 0.5 mile S of the islet. A

reef, which breaks in a moderate sea at LW, position approximate, lies about 1.5 miles SW of the islet, with another reef

midway between. Another reef was reported to lie 3 miles SW

of Observation Island.
190 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

9.21 Cape Dawson (9°42'S., 150°45'E.), the NW extremity of

Normanby Island, is a well-marked bluff with considerable

depths within 1 mile of the shore. It is also the S entrance point

of Dawson Strait, which separates Normanby Island from

Fergusson Island. Two reefs lie 0.75 and 1.25 miles WSW of

Cape Dawson. A shoal patch is charted about 2.75 miles WNW

of Cape Dawson.

9.21 Solomania (9°45'S., 150°48'E.), the N mountain of Normanby Island, lies about 3.5 miles SSE of Cape Dawson, rising as a

blunt cone, with a small double-notched summit, 1,027m high;

it is similar to Double Peak, about 8 miles SE, both rising from

the main ridge of the island, with a considerable dip between

them.

Fergusson Island

9.22 Fergusson Island (9°30'S., 150°40'E.), the largest of

the D’Entrecasteaux Islands, has three great mountain masses

rising from it. Mount Kilkerran is a sharp cone, 2,072m high,

on the NE side of the island. Mount Maybole, 1,272m high,

and the Kubioia Range, from 914 to 1219m high, about 5.5

miles farther S, are on the W side of the island. The Edagwaba

Range, 1,219 to 1,821m high, on the S side, extends E from

Cape Mourilyan, the SW extremity of the island. The SE part

of the island is of irregular outline, with several low hills and

deep bays.

9.22 Seymour Bay, on the W coast, has saline lakes and several

small hills emitting sulphur fumes at its head; there are also

several boiling springs.

9.22 The island is well populated. The lower slopes of the hills

are cultivated, while the upper parts are thickly wooded.

9.22 Cape Mourilyan (9°38'S., 150°26'E.), the SW extremity of

Fergusson Island, is bold, well defined, and fringed by a narrow strip of coral; a village lies on its S side. The coast between Cape Mourilyan and Amplett Point (9°39'S.,

150°37'E.), about 11 miles E, forms a bight, thickly wooded,

with a sandy beach and villages in places.

Dawson Strait

9.23 Dawson Strait (9°41'S., 150°48'E.) has not been

closely examined; it was reported that navigation through the

strait would be dangerous and intricate from the appearance of

the reefs seen off Dobu and other islets near its SE end.

9.23 Saramo Point (9°40'S., 150°47'E.), steep and rocky, about

10 miles E of Amplett Point, is the SE termination of the slopes

of the Edagwaba Range; there are many villages between the

points.

9.23 Ebeoa Point (9°43'S., 150°50'E.), about 4.5 miles SE of

Saramo Point, is reef-fringed and the S extremity of a peninsula. A double-topped hill, about 366m high, lies about 5.5

miles NNE of Ebeoa Point, and rises to a height of 539m, about

2 miles farther N, on the edge of a crater.

9.23 Dobu Island (9°45'S., 150°52'E.), on which there are some

boiling springs, is of volcanic origin and lies in the E entrance

of Dawson Strait; an extinct crater, at an elevation of 274m, lies

in the center of the island. The flat land and low hills on the S

side of the island are densely populated and covered with

coconut palms.

9.23 Nekumara Island and Kwaiope Island lie on the same reef

within 2.5 miles NE of Dobu Island; the former islet is thickly

populated.

9.24 Kawai Point (9°41'S., 150°54'E.) lies about 1.5 miles

N of Kwaiope Islet, on the SE end of Fergusson Island. A

drying reef and a 5.5m spit extend about 0.75 mile S of the

point. There is a 7.3m patch 1 mile S of Kawai Point.

9.24 Sanaroa Island (Welle Island) (9°36'S., 151°00'E.) lies

about 3 miles NE of Cape Kwaia (Cape Doubtful), the E extremity of Fergusson Island; the channel between them is about

155m wide, with a least depth of 22m, and is marked by a red

buoy on either side. In the absence of the buoys, a vessel

should steer with Mebuli-buli Point ahead, bearing 335°, which

leads through, but very close to the reefs.

9.24 Sanaroa Island is 212m high and probably of volcanic origin.

Extensive reefs lie SE of the island. A shoal, on which the sea

breaks, lies about 2.25 miles SW of the S extremity of the

island and a 5.5m patch was reported to lie 3.75 miles WSW of

this point on the island.

9.24 Directions.—Vessels entering Dawson Strait from W should

approach with Saramo Point, in range 062°, with the S edge of

the double-topped hill about 6 miles ENE, until the summit of

Dobu Island bears 117° and vessels should steer for it on that

bearing. When the N extremity of Kwaiope Islet bears 070°, it

should be steered for on that bearing. On approaching Nekumara Islet alter course slightly N until the S extremity of Sanaroa Island bears 070°, when it should be steered for on that

bearing, passing between a 7.3m patch and the reef fringing the

N side of Kwaiope Island.

9.24 A good passage into Dawson Strait lies between Dobu Island

and Nekumara Island. The passage may be approached from E

with the S point of Dobu Island bearing 270°. A vessel should

keep to the Nekumara Island side, steering with the S base of

the mountain, about 2 miles N of Ebeoa Point, bearing 322°

ahead. See the Amphlett Group in paragraph 9.26 for a continuation of the directions N.

Normanby Island—Northeast and East Coasts

9.25 Little is known about the NE and E coasts of Normanby Island.

9.25 There is a government station at Esa-ala, about 4 miles SE of

Cape Dawson. There is a small wharf, with a depth of 2.7m

alongside. Anchorage can be taken by coastal vessels, in 33m,

0.15 mile NE of the wharf. There is considerable volcanic

activity in the area; a seismological station is situated on a hill

about 1 mile W of the wharf.

9.25 Awaiara Bay, entered between Granawe Point (9°57'S.,

151°04'E.) and Bwaruada Point, about 8 miles E, provides

shelter for small vessels about 183m offshore. Local knowledge is required.

9.25 The E coast of Normanby Island, between Cape Pierson and

Cape Ventenat, about 17 miles S, is indented by a number of

small bays, and backed by a range of mountains.
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 191

Pub. 164

The Amphlett Group

9.26 The Amphlett Group (9°15'S., 150°50'E.) consists of

many islands and islets, lying N of Cape Vinall (9°24'S.,

150°46'E.), the NE extremity of Fergusson Island.

9.26 Wamea Island (9°14'S., 150°54'E.), 415m high, lies about

11 miles NE of the cape, and is the E of the group. Pigeon

Rock, 48m high, lies about 0.75 mile W of the W side of the

island; two shoal patches lie between the rock and the island.

The village of Dromo Dromo stands on a narrow rocky saddle

on Wamea Island, at an elevation of 152 to 183m. Urasi Island,

311m high, lies about 1.5 miles NW of Wamea Island.

9.26 Wamea Island was reported to be a good radar target at a

distance of 29 miles.

9.26 Wright Patch (9°11'S., 150°54'E.) and Crook Patch

(9°07'S., 150°54'E.), each with a depth of less than 1.8m, lie

about 2.25 and 6.5 miles, respectively N of the N extremity of

Wamea Island. A patch, which breaks, and MacGee Patch

(9°10'S., 150°50'E.), with less than 1.8m, lie about 3 miles NE,

and 4.25 miles NW, respectively of the same extremity. A shoal

of about 5.5m was reported to lie 3.5 miles S from the E tip of

Yabwaia Island; the same shoal extends to about 1 mile NNE

from the NW tip of Urasi island.

9.26 Watota Island (9°18'S., 150°42'E.), 184m high, lies about

10 miles WSW of Urasi Island. A shoal, with a depth of 1.8m,

was reported about 3.25 miles NNW of Watota Island.

9.26 It was reported that small craft can anchor, in a depth of

7.6m, sand and coral, between Yabwaia Island and Wawiwa

Island. Although sheltered from SE seas, it is frequented by

gusts of wind from the surrounding high land.

9.26 Directions—After passing through Dawson Strait, a vessel

should steer for Sanaroa Hill, the summit of Sanaroa Island,

bearing 023°. When Scrub Islet, the SW of a group off the SW

extremity of Sanaroa Island, bears 131°, and the leading marks

on Benalla Point (9°35'S., 150°53'E.) are in range bearing

311°, alter course left, keeping the leading marks in range

ahead, passing through a narrow channel through the scattered

reefs extending from Fergusson Island to Sanaroa Island. An

alternative range is with Mebuli-buli Point, bearing 335°, in

line with the W hummock of Yabwaia Island, passing very

close to the reefs. When the NW end of Sanaroa Island bears

035°, alter course to 353°, and pass about 0.4 mile W of the

reef, which is easily distinguished, extending NW of Urewala

Island, which is located about 8.5 miles N of the NW end of

Sanaroa Island. Then steer for the E extremity of Urasi Island,

bearing 353°, just open E of Pigeon Rock, which leads E of the

reef extending E from Wata Island, located about 8.5 miles

NNW of Urewala Island. On nearing Pigeon Rock, alter course

to pass W of it, and then steer to pass between Urasi Island and

Wamea Island. When the E extremity of Wamea Island bears

145°, alter course left, keeping it on that bearing astern,

passing SW of Wright Patch and NE of MacGee Patch.

9.26 See paragraph 9.14 for recommended tracks N of MacGee

Patch.

Fergussan Island—West and North Coasts

9.27 Seymour Bay (9°32'S., 150°29'E.), N of Cape Mourilyan, is encumbered with coral patches. Tumagabuna Islet lies

close S of the N entrance point.

9.27 Waluwea Point (9°25'S., 150°26'E.) lies about 4.5 miles

NNW of the N entrance point of Seymour Bay. Cape Labilardiere (9°20'S., 150°29'E.), the N extremity of Fergusson Island

lies about 6 miles farther NE.

9.27 The N coast between Cape Labilardiere and the entrance to

Hughes Bay, about 10 miles ESE, appears steep, bold, bare,

and without anchorages.

9.27 Sunday Islet (9°16'S., 150°30'E.) lies about 3.5 miles NNE

of Cape Labilardiere; a sand cay, about 1 mile E, lies on a reef

with sunken rocks.

9.27 A 2.7m patch lies about 2 miles ENE of Cape Labilardiere,

with a 3.7m patch and some reefs close W of it. A chain of

shoals extends N of these patches and N of Sunday Islet. Little

is known of the area.

9.27 Sunday Islet was reported to be a good radar target at a

distance of 25 miles.

9.27 Tides—Currents.—A strong NW current has been experienced along the N coast of Fergusson Island during the month

of November.

9.27 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage for small vessels can be

obtained at the head of Seymour Bay. There are numerous

coral patches in the approach, especially from S; the best

approach is along the N shore.

9.27 Good anchorage may be obtained by vessels up to 45m in

length, sheltered during the SE weather, in a small bay on the E

side of Waluwea Point. The bay is reported to be free of

dangers, with general depths of 37m in the anchorage. There is

a small jetty at the head of the bay, with a village and plantation nearby.

Goodenough Island

9.28 Goodenough Island (9°20'S., 150°15'E.), the NW of

the D’Entrecasteaux Islands, has a mountain range traversing

its whole length. Vineuo, 2,545m high, the W of three peaks, is

located towards the N edge of the range.

9.28 A cultivated plain, with a maximum width of about 3 miles,

lies between the mountain range and the NE coast. The slopes

and contiguous plains are cultivated in flats and terraces; some

of the projecting points are purely volcanic. There is a small

crater, probably not long extinct, on Cape Watts, the SE extremity of the island. The island is well populated.

9.28 Two wharves are situated about 1 mile NW of Watutu Point

(9°23'S., 150°23'E.), the E extremity of Goodenough Island;

the SE wharf is 91m long, with a depth of 9.1m alongside,

while the NW wharf is 85m long, with a depth of 8.8m alongside. White buoys are moored NW and SE of the wharves. Vessels berthing at the SE wharf should approach on a course of

240° and berth port side-to, taking care to avoid coral patches

lying SSE of the head of this wharf. Talafatama Jetty, suitable

only for boats, is situated about 0.6 mile NW of the NW wharf.

9.28 Malauna Bay (9°14'S., 150°18'E.), entered between Malauna Point, about 10 miles NNW of Watutu Point, and Knight

Point, about 2 miles farther NW, is encumbered with reefs, but

affords good anchorage to vessels with local knowledge, in

depths of 12.8 to 20m, mud. It is sheltered from SE winds; the

off-lying reefs afford some protection from N and NW winds.

The shores of the bay are low and fringed with reefs and mud

flats. Sheltered anchorage can be taken, in 18.3m, mud, with

Malauna Point bearing 096°, distant about 0.25 mile. Anchor-
192 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

age may also be obtained, in a depth of 16m, with Malauna

Point bearing 100° and Knight Point bearing 315°.

9.28 Cape Lahaye (9°11'S., 150°12'E.), the N extremity of the island, is low and wooded; a low coastal ridge and off-lying reefs

lie between it and Watutu Point. Between Cape Lahaye and

Cape Rawlinson, the W extremity of the island, the spurs from

the main ridge approach the coast which has a bold aspect, and

is generally rocky and cliffy.

9.28 Nuama Islet, covered with grass and scrub, with a double

summit, 61m high, and Siata Islet, wooded and 24.4m high, lie

about 1 mile and 3 miles, respectively, NW of Cape Layahe.

9.28 An extensive and intricate mass of reefs fronts the NW coast

of Goodenough Island.

9.28 The SW coast of Goodenough Island is described with Ward

Hunt Strait in paragraph 9.35.

Moresby Strait

9.29 Moresby Strait (9°30'S., 150°25'E.), separating Fergusson Island and Goodenough Island, has not been thoroughly examined. There are considerable depths in the strait, but

there are several steep-to coral patches.

9.29 The S entrance, between Cape Mourilyan and Cape Watts, is

about 8.5 miles wide, but is reduced in width considerably by

the reefs extending N of Cape Mourilyan. Waqipa Island, with

its SW extremity about 1.5 miles NE of Cape Watts, is an

extinct volcano, 165m high and grass covered; small detached

reefs lie about 0.5 mile SE of its SE end. The island is inhabited; its NW side is connected with Goodenough Island by

a reef with some islets on it.

9.29 An unexamined patch, with a depth of 12.8m, was reported

to lie about 1.25 miles NE of Waqipa Island.

9.29 The N entrance, about 2.5 miles wide, is obstructed by the

Barrier Islands, with a narrow channel on either side of them.

The E channel is dangerous, but Warrego Passage, the W

channel, has been swept and is believed clear of dangers.

9.29 Anchorage.—Mud Bay, entered between Coconut Point

(9°28'S., 150°22'E.) and the coast 1.5 miles NW, provides

sheltered anchorage in the bights on either side of Wailagi

Point, in the S side of the bay. Large vessels find the most

suitable anchorage, in 46m, at the head of the bay, about 0.4

mile, 322° from Wailagi Point and about 0.25 mile offshore.

9.29 Anchorage for deep draft vessels can be obtained, in about

51m, about 2 miles NW of Watutu Point; small vessels can

anchor in less depth closer inshore.

9.29 Directions.—Vessels proceeding to the anchorage in Mud

Bay from S should round Cape Mourilyan at a distance of

about 0.75 mile, and then steer for the E extremity of Ilamu

Island, the W of the Barrier Islands, bearing 354°. When

Tumagabuna Islet (9°29'S., 150°28'E.) bears 113°, in range

with Bray Hill, about 1 mile inland, alter course left keeping

the islet astern on that bearing. When the summit of Waqipa

Island bears 176°, alter course to 245° and steer this course

until the E extremity of Coconut Point bears 130°, when course

can be steered for the anchorage.

9.29 Vessels proceeding through Moresby Strait to the anchorage

NW of Watutu Point after rounding Cape Mourilyan should

steer for the E extremity of Ilamu Island, bearing 354°, until

the center of Warrego Passage bears 307°, when a mid-channel

course should be steered through the passage. The passage is

about 0.2 mile wide, and was reported to have a depth of 51m.

9.29 Vessels proceeding from Moresby Strait to the Amphlett

Group require local knowledge and should use the swept channel which passes NW of the group. After passing through Warrego Passage bring Talafamata Jetty bearing 242° astern, and

keep it on that bearing until Cape Labilardiere bears 180°,

distant about 1.25 miles, when a course of 100° should be

steered, passing S of the 3.7m and 2.7m patches N of the cape.

A distinctive green patch, about 2 miles E of Cape Labilardiere, is located on the lower slope of the hill behind the cape.

When this green patch bears 244.5° alter course to keep it

astern on that bearing. When Tuboa Island (9°12'S.,

150°49'E.) bears 209° course should be altered to keep it in line

with the E end of Wawiwa Island astern on that bearing, and

Gumatabu Islet ahead, bearing 029°; this course leads close W

of McGee Patch.

9.29 See paragraph 9.14 for recommended tracks N of McGee

Patch.

North Coast of Papua New Guinea—East Cape

to Germania Hook

9.30 This part of the sector describes the N coast of Papua

New Guinea, from East Cape to Germania Hook. East Cape

(10°13'S., 150°53'E.) was previously described in paragraph

7.30.

9.30 The N coast of the peninsula which forms the extreme E end

of Papua New Guinea, from East Cape to Basilisk Point, about

10.5 miles W, is rocky and steep; it comprises several small

bays, which are deep, but afford no anchorage. Mount Killerton rises to 491m about 1.25 miles S of Basilisk Point.

9.30 Bentley Bay, entered between Basilisk Point, and Cape

Ducie, about 6.5 miles WNW, affords indifferent anchorage.

The land rises steeply in a series of densely-wooded hills,

separated from each other by deep gorges and narrow valleys,

opening out into small plains here and there as they approach

the coast.

9.30 Cape Ducie, low, rocky, and thickly wooded, has the appearance of an island from E. It is steep-to on its N side, but a

sunken reef extends nearly 1 mile E, with a small cay, which

dries 1.2m, on it. The reef also extends S, joining Catherine Island to the cape. The latter island is low, covered with mangroves, and appears bordered with mangrove swamps. Annie

Inlet, entered close S of Catherine Island, was not examined,

but numerous reefs and discolored water were observed; it is

only suitable for boats.

9.30 Anchorage.—The shores of Bentley Bay are steep-to, but

anchorage can be taken, in 28m, sand, about 1 mile offshore,

near the coral reef fronting the W shore; this anchorage is insecure with N winds.

9.31 Excellent Point (10°13'S., 150°33'E.) lies about 3

miles W of Cape Ducie, which it resembles. The bay between

the points has shores lined with mangroves.

9.31 Awaiama Bay is entered between Excellent Point and Puni

Puni Point, a prominent cliff, about 5 miles W. Two finger

peaks of the Stirling Range, 741m high, about 2 miles S of

Puni Puni Point, are conspicuous from E. There are several

villages on the shore of the bay; the E shore is fringed by a reef
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 193

Pub. 164

in places. There is good anchorage at the head of the bay

during the Southeast Trade Wind.

9.31 The coast between Excellent Point and Cape Frere, about 23

miles WNW, appears to be free of dangers. The aspect changes

W of Excellent Point; the slopes facing the sea are covered

with grass, the summits are thickly wooded, and at the base a

broad belt of cultivated land extends to the coast. The Stirling

Range, backing the coast, continues to increase in altitude W,

and attains an altitude of 1,149m in a round summit, about 2.75

miles inland at Cape Frere.

9.32 Cape Frere (10°05'S., 150°11'E.) is a bold, steep

bluff, which is steep-to, with no fringing coral reef. The sides

of the headland are covered with grass, and intersected with

numerous ravines running nearly parallel with each other. As

the cape is approached, numerous cascades and watercourses

may be seen on the mountain sides.

9.32 Goodenough Bay entered between Cape Frere and Sibiribiri

Point (9°43'S., 150°03'E.), about 22 miles NNW, is generally

deep and affords no anchorage except in Rawdon Bay and

Menapi Bay. The SW shore of the bay, and most of the N shore

are steep-to. The water at the head of the bay is discolored.

9.32 Five peculiar pinnacle peaks, about 26 miles WNW of Cape

Frere, lie grouped together, near the coast, and are prominent

from E. At the head of the bay the lofty grass land ceases and

the ridge of high mountains continues NW. The coastal range

on the N side of the bay consists of densely wooded hills, 91.4

to 122m high.

9.32 Many small villages are scattered on the shores of the bay,

on the belt of alluvial land which extends along the foot of the

mountains.

9.32 Bartle Bay (10°06'S., 150°08'E.), entered between Cape

Frere and Daru Point, about 5 miles W, is backed by a

succession of table lands, from 61 to 457m high, rising in

terraces, covered with long rich grass. There is no anchorage in

the bay except for small craft very close inshore. Dogura, a

large settlement, about 5 miles W of Cape Frere, is prominent

from seaward. A jetty, which can accommodate vessels up to

37m in length and 3.4m draft, is situated at the village of

Wedau, close W of Daru Point.

9.33 Rawdon Bay (9°46'S., 149°53'E.) lies about 10 miles

WSW of Sibiribiri Point. The Mosquito Islands, two low, flat,

and wooded islands of coral formation, lie in the entrance of

the bay. The village of Abuara stands on the shore of the bay. 

9.33 On Baniara Island, the NW and larger island, there is a

government station and jetty; vessels up to 100 tons and 3.7m

draft can berth alongside the jetty.

9.33 A wide passage on the W side of Baniara Island lies between

the reefs extending from the mainland abreast the island, and

those extending from the W end of the island. Entrance can be

made E of Baniara Island, but it is less direct.

9.33 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be taken, in 29m, stiff

mud, about 0.5 mile S of Baniara Island. Sheltered anchorage

can be obtained, in 22m, between the NW side of Baniara Island and the mainland.

9.33 A small shoal was reported to lie about 0.5 mile offshore,

about 5 miles W of Baniara Island.

9.34 Menapi Bay (9°46'S., 149°56'E.), about 3 miles E of

Baniara Island, and where there is a mission station, affords anchorage for one vessel of up to 300 tons, in 9.1m. A detached

reef, in a depth of 1.8m, lies in the middle of the entrance to the

bay, but there is a passage on either side of it; the E passage is

recommended. The anchorage is sheltered from NW, and

moderately sheltered from SE weather; there is a beach at the

head of the bay.

9.34 Glen Islet (9°44'S., 150°03'E.), 10.7m high, with a few trees,

lies on the S end of a coral reef fringing Sibiribiri Point, the SE

extremity of the Cape Vogel Peninsula, to a distance of about

0.4 mile. A drying sand bank lies on the outer edge of the

fringing reef, and a detached patch lies about 0.5 mile S of the

islet.

Ward Hunt Strait

9.35 Ward Hunt Strait is about 16 miles wide between

Cape Vogel (9°41'S., 150°03'E.) and Goodenough Island to the

NE.

9.35 Dart Reefs (9°34'S., 150°13'E.), detached patches, with a

depth of 1.8m, extend about 14 miles WSW from the SE

extremity of Goodenough Island. A clear and deep channel, 1.5

miles wide, lies between the NE patch and Goodenough Island.

9.35 Keast Reef, about 4.5 miles NE of Kibirisi Point (9°38'S.,

150°01'E.), in a depth of 1.8m, and breaks in a moderate swell.

A clear and deep channel, about 3.5 miles wide lies between

the reef and Ipoteto Islet.

9.35 Aspect.—The shores of the strait present a great contrast.

Goodenough Island, on the N side, rises to an elevation of

2,545m; its thickly-wooded mountainsides are visible at a great

distance, although the summit is usually covered with clouds.

The coast on the S side is grassy and undulating, and of greater

variety. The hills do not exceed 183 or 213m in height; the

coast is generally low, indented, and fronted by small sand

islets fringed by coral.

9.35 Approaching the strait from SE, a conical hill N of the Mosquito Islands is first seen appearing as an island; not until a

vessel is within a distance of about 18 miles does the land on

the S side of the strait appear to be continuous.

9.35 Caution.—Vessels proceeding through Ward Hunt Strait and

across the entrance to Collingwood Bay should follow the

track indicated on the chart, passing about 1 mile NE of Ipoteto

Islet. The area away from the track should be used with extreme caution due to the incomplete nature of the information

in the area. It was reported that vessels are always set N when

passing through the strait.

9.36 Sibiribiri Islet (9°41'S., 150°03'E.), 12.2m high and

covered with mangrove, lies on the coastal reef, about 3 miles

N of Glen Islet, and about 0.1 mile offshore. A shoal patch lies

about 1 mile NW of the islet, 0.35 mile offshore. There is a

conspicuous wreck on the reef off of Cape Vogel, about 2.25

miles N of Glen Islet.

9.36 Anchorage.—A bay lies between Sibiribiri Islet and Kibirisi Point, about 3.5 miles NW; Tara Kwaruru, a salt water

creek, lies at the head of the bay, at the W end of the anchorage. The anchorage is sheltered from the prevailing SE winds

by Karaiga Islet and the reef on which it stands. The latter islet,

about 4.7m high, with bushes on it, usually shows distinctly
194 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

from E. The village of Irowowono lies on the mainland S of

Karaiga Islet. The village of Inageta lies about 0.4 mile farther

W; a creek, fringed by mangroves, lies close W of the latter

village.

9.36 Target Patch, coral, in a depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.6 mile

WNW of Karaiga Islet, with a passage, about 0.4 mile wide

and clear of dangers, between them.

9.36 Anchorage may be obtained, in 33m, mud, with the N extremity of Karaiga Islet bearing 085°, and the village of Inageta

bearing 209°, open SE of the mangrove promontory NE of it.

This position gives less than 0.1 mile swinging room, but the

SE wind being steady, a vessel would seldom swing towards

either reef. A vessel approaching from E, after rounding the N

end of Karaiga Islet reef, may steer for the anchorage.

9.36 Kibirisi Point (9°38'S., 150°01'E.) is a black rocky point,

6.1m high. Ipoteto Islet, close E of the point, is 18.3m to the

tops of the trees. The islet is fringed by a narrow ridge, and

connected to the point by a shallow ridge. A light is shown

from the islet.

9.36 Dog’s Hill, 67m high, lies about 1.5 miles W of Kibirisi

Point. The coast from Dog’s Hill for about 3.5 miles WSW,

consists of cliffs about 30.5m high. Then a coastal range of

hills extends to Dark Hill 107m high, close S of Dark Hill

Point (9°36'S., 149°39'E.), about 20 miles W of Dog’s Hill.

Saddle Hill, 334m high, and Cone Peak, 337m high, lie on the

coastal range, about 8 miles WSW and 12 miles W, respectively, of Dog’s Hill.

9.36 The coastal range near Dark Hill gives place to a thicklywooded plain, extending 4 to 10 miles inland, with here and

there a small dark hill rising from the surrounding level.

9.36 The coast is fringed with mangrove and fronted by reefs in

places; in many of the mangrove bights are coral islets that

cannot be distinguished at a distance of 2 or 3 miles.

9.37 Cape Watts (9°31'S., 150°21'E.), the SE extremity of

Goodenough Island, is rocky and fringed with coral reef. The

wooded land rises to an elevation of 674m about 2 miles N of

the cape. A somewhat remarkable square-topped summit,

555m high, lies about 1.5 miles WNW of the cape.

9.37 There are numerous uncharted shoals between Cape Watts

and Taleba Bay (9°28'S., 150°14'E.), about 7 miles WNW.

This area should only be navigated in favorable light and with a

good masthead lookout.

9.37 Cape Varieta (9°24'S., 150°08'E.), 14 miles NW of Cape

Watts, is a cliff, 49m high, rising about 1.25 miles N to a peak,

536m high. Anchorage can be taken, in 47m, sand and coral, 0.35

mile SSE of Cape Varieta and about 0.25 mile offshore.

9.37 Cape Womobu (9°22'S., 150°06'E.), about 2.75 miles NW

of Cape Varieta, is a 46m high promontory; foul ground

extends 1 mile W and SW of it. A shoal lies 2.25 miles NNW

of the cape and about 1.25 miles offshore. There are possibly

other off-lying patches, as the vicinity has not been closely

examined.

Collingwood Bay

9.38 Collingwood Bay (9°25'S., 149°30'E.) is entered

between the N side of Cape Vogel and Hardy Point (9°09'S.,

149°19'E.), about 50 miles NW. The bay is encumbered with

many shoal patches, the positions of which are approximate,

and consequently little reliance can be placed on the chart.

9.38 Caution.—The bay should be navigated only in the most

favorable weather, with a lookout aloft.

9.38 The S shore of the bay W of Dark Hill and the S part of the

W shore are low and flat, but the N part of the W shore is bold,

rocky, and steep. Mount Trafalgar (9°10'S., 152°46'E.),

1,725m high, and Mount Victory (9°12'S., 149°04'E.), an active volcano, 1,884m high, located about 11 miles SSW and 16

miles SW, respectively, of Cape Nelson (9°00'S., 149°15'E.),

each have the appearance of a large island from a distance.

9.38 The Jabbering Islands (9°37'S., 149°54'E.), about 6 miles

W of Kibirisi Point, consisted of islets over 9.1m high and

covered with bush. They were reported to be washed away,

leaving only reefs, some of which dry at LW, in the area.

Caution should be exercised in approaching the area as the surrounding reefs are very steep-to.

9.38 The Sidney Islets (9°35'S., 149°49'E.), about 5.5 miles

WNW of the Jabbering Islands, have been reduced to sand and

coral reefs, awash or below water. An area of shoal water lies

between 0.75 mile NE and 0.5 mile N of the Sidney Islets.

9.38 Black Rocks (9°35'S., 149°34'E.), which dry 0.6m and can

usually be identified, lie about 5 miles W of Dark Hill Point,

and extend to about 1.5 miles offshore. Button Island stands on

a drying reef, about 1.5 miles WSW of the outer end of Black

Rocks.

9.39 Jarrad Island (9°35'S., 149°29'E.) lies about 5 miles

W of Black Rocks. The village of Baiawa, about 2 miles S of

the island, is backed by a dark hill, with a flat summit, 76.2m

high.

9.39 Fir Tree Point (9°33'S., 149°24'E.) is a low and sandy point,

with the Rakua River discharging close SE; a spit, in a depth of

3m, extends 0.35 mile NE of the point. Anchorage can be

obtained, in 18.3m, mud, about 0.5 mile SE of Fir Tree Point,

and also in a least depth of 9.1m, N of the point. Local knowledge is required for both these anchorages. 

9.39 Foul ground extends up to 1 mile offshore NW of Fir Tree

Point, between 0.5 mile and 2.5 miles westward of the point.

Virau, a reef, lies about 0.25 offshore, about 3 miles NW of the

point.

9.39 A point, about 4 miles WNW of Fir Tree Point, forms the S

entrance point of the bight forming the head of Collingwood

Bay. The inner part of the bight is relatively free from dangers

to within 3.5 miles of Keppel Point, about 15 miles farther NW.

However, isolated drying reefs lie about 4.75 and 7 miles

WNW of the S entrance point, and two 1.5m patches lie 4

miles WNW and 7 miles NW of the same point.

9.39 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in about 18.3m,

about 0.5 mile NW of the S entrance point of the above-mentioned bight.

9.39 Vessels up to 2,000 tons can anchor 0.5 mile off the black

sandy beach at Wanigela (9°21'S., 149°10'E.). The anchorage

is sheltered from NW, but small vessels would find it exposed

in SE weather. A good all-weather anchorage is reported inside

the large offshore reef NE of Wanigela. A channel through the

reefs from Hardy Point (9°09'S., 149°19'E.) to Wanigela is

marked by beacons. The general direction of the buoyage is

from NE to SW, with even numbers on the SE and odd num-
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 195

Pub. 164

bers on the NW side of the channel. This channel is reported to

be very tortuous.

9.39 Directions.—The following recommended route for the

passage from Ipoteto Island to Wanigela involves navigation

through poorly charted waters which contain many shoals.

Some of the reefs close to the recommended track may be

marked by beacons or drum buoys, but these are unreliable,

and not to be relied upon, and the directions should be adhered

to closely.

9.39 From a position about 0.5 mile N of Ipoteto Island, steer a

course of 279°, which leads 0.5 mile N of the N reef of the

Jabbering Islands. This reef dries at LW and is usually easy to

distinguish. Alter course to 290° about 0.75 mile past the latter

reef to pass about 0.5 mile N of the reef in the Sidney Islets,

which lies about 2 miles ENE of Posa Posa Harbor entrance

(9°36'S., 149°47'E.); this reef also dries at LW and can be

distinguished. In the vicinity of the Sidney Islets the vessel

passes between dangerous reefs, distant from 0.25 to 0.5 mile

on either side. When the latter reef is abeam alter course to

270° and steer that course until Dark Hill Point bears 244°,

when it should be steered for on that bearing for about 1 mile.

When the point at the entrance to Posa Posa Harbor bears 101°,

alter course to 281° to keep the point astern on that bearing.

The latter course leads 0.5 mile N of Virau, and 0.45 mile off

the nearest point of land, the S entrance point of the bight at the

head of Collingwood Bay. When 2.5 miles past Virau, alter

course to 319°, which leads to Wanigela Reef, a fairly large

breaking reef, which can be passed on either side to an

anchorage off the beach fronting Wanigela; that part of the

track,W of Black Rocks has a least depth of 20.1m.

9.40 Keppel Point (9°19'S., 149°13'E.), a low point, has

foul ground extending 4 miles E from it to join the numerous

reefs and shoals, many of which are unexamined, which

occupy the central part of the bay between Black Headed

Rocks and Veale Reef (9°12'S., 149°28'E.).

9.40 The coast between Keppel Point and Hardy Point, about 12

miles N, is fronted by numerous detached dangers.

9.40 Sinipara, an islet which dries 0.9m, lies about 1 mile S of

Hardy Point.

Tufi Harbor and Approaches

9.41 Tufi Harbor (9°05'S., 149°18'E.), entered about 3.5

miles N of Hardy Point, is a government station, with a resident magistrates house and other buildings, situated on the N

side of the harbor. A wharf with a depth of about 2.7m alongside is situated on the N side of the harbor in the village of

Tufi. There are depths of over 55m in the harbor.

9.41 Lights, in range 308.5°, lead through the dangers in the SE

approach to the harbor; the front range light is shown from the

S entrance point of the harbor.

9.41 Veale Reef (9°12'S., 149°28'E.), marked by a light, lies on

the NE side of the range line, about 9.75 miles ESE of Hardy

Point. Greaves Reef, marked by a light, lies about 2 miles

farther NW.

9.41 Black Headed Rocks (9°14'S., 149°25'E.), which dry 0.9m,

lie on the SW side of the range line, about 8 miles SE of Hardy

Point.

9.41 Ham Reef (9°12'S., 149°26'E.), marked by a light and with a

sunken rock about 1 mile SW of it, lies on the SW side of the

range line, about 1.75 mile W of Veale Reef. Sunken rocks lie

about 2 and 3 miles, respectively, WNW of Ham Reef.

9.41 Stewart Reefs (9°08'S., 149°23'E.), marked by a light, lie on

the NE side of the range line, about 4.25 miles ENE of Hardy

Point.

9.41 A shoal, in a depth of 3.4m, lies about 1 mile ESE of the S

entrance point of Tufi Harbor. A rock, 2.7m high, lies on the

reef extending about 0.45 mile from the N entrance point.

9.41 Directions.—Approaching from SE, a vessel should bring

the approach range in line, bearing 308.5°, from a position

about 4 miles SE of Veale Reefs, and keep on this range until

past Stewart Reefs when the recommended track indicated on

the chart should be followed. If proceeding to Tufi Harbor,

continue on the 308.5° range line until the 2.7m high rock

bears 325°. Then steer for it on that bearing until two small

range marks, with triangular topmarks, situated fairly high up

on a steep, grassy bluff at the W end of the harbor, are in range,

bearing 270°, which leads through the harbor entrance. The

marks are small and may be difficult to identify in the afternoon light.

Collingwood Bay to Cape Nelson

9.42 Drying reefs extend up to 0.6 mile off Hardy Point

and Cape Nelson, about 10 miles NNW, and from most of the

points between.

9.42 Maclaren Harbor (9°04'S., 149°18'E.), entered about 2

miles N of Tufi Harbor, has depth of about 64m throughout,

except for the narrow W arm at its head.

9.42 Cape Nelson (9°00'S., 149°15'E.) is the N extremity of a

peninsula topped by Mount Victory. The land within the cape

consists of grassy slopes rising to the spurs of the mountains

from 122 to 152m high. The coast in the vicinity of the cape is

broken by narrow inlets resembling fjords. Cape Nelson is

steep-to outside the narrow fringing reef, but there are numerous off-lying reefs.

9.42 A light is shown from Hall Point (9°03'S., 149°18'E.), about

4.5 miles SE of Cape Nelson.

9.42 Caution.—Navigation off the coast of Papua New Guinea

between Cape Nelson and Cape Ward Hunt, about 87 miles

NW, appears to be of the most dangerous character, due to the

unsurveyed areas and the numerous coral patches and shoals.

The coral patches are steep-to and the sea seldom breaks on

them. The weather is often thick with passing squalls of rain,

and anchorages are rare close to land. Between coral patches

only a few miles apart, a sounding of several hundred meters

may be obtained.

9.42 Vessels should proceed with utmost caution and follow the

recommended track indicated on the chart. Vessels should be

careful not to get E or N of the line indicated on the chart off

Cape Nelson.

Dyke Acland Bay

9.43 Dyke Acland Bay is entered between Cape Nelson

and Cape Endaiadere (8°41'S., 148°26'E.), about 52 miles

WNW. The low thickly-wooded shores of the bay are backed

by a plain extending many miles inland. The whole coast has
196 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

no marked features, and the trees with which the plain is

covered appear in the distance to be of the same height and

color.

9.43 The foothills of the Hydrographer’s Range back the head of

Ketakerua Bay (9°05'S., 148°37'E.), which lies about 38

miles W of Cape Nelson. The range rises to an elevation of

1,646m about 17 miles WNW of the head of Ketakerua Bay.

9.43 There are several deep inlets between Cape Nelson and the

W entrance point of Anasari Harbor, about 6.5 miles W. The

spurs of Mount Trafalgar to this part of the coast have a gradual

slope, and are covered with grass and scattered trees. A reef

fringes the coast and extends up to 0.5 mile offshore.

9.43 A shoal, with a depth of 7.6m, lies about 4.5 miles NE of

Cape Nelson.

9.43 Anasari Harbor (9°01'S., 149°09'E.) provides anchorage, in

about 29m, about 0.6 mile from its head.

9.43 Port Hennessy, close E of Anasari Harbor, is reported to

afford good anchorage.

9.43 Spear Island (8°59'S., 149°08'E.) lies about 0.2 mile N of

the NW entrance point of Anasari Harbor. Spear Island Light is

shown from the NW entrance point of the harbor.

9.43 Kanimeno Point (9°01'S., 149°06'E.), about 2.25 miles

WSW of Spear Island, has a drying reef extending about 0.5

mile offshore; a rock, with 1.8m, lies about 1 mile NNW of the

point. A shoal with 12.8m, lies about 1.5 N of Kanimeno Point.

9.43 An unexamined shoal, in a depth of 12.8m, lies about 5.5

miles NW of Spear Island. Tancred Reef, in a depth less than

1.8m, lies about 10.5 miles WNW of the same island.

9.44 Porlock Bay (9°02'S., 149°00'E.) is entered between

Kanimeno Point and Musa Point, about 12 miles WSW. The

greater part of the shore is a network of lagoons, and the head of

the bay is fringed by reef extending more than 0.5 mile offshore.

9.44 Curtis Reef (9°02'S., 149°01'E.), awash at LW, lies about 5

miles WSW of Kanimeno Point, and about 1.75 miles offshore.

9.44 Porlock Harbor (9°03'S., 149°04'E.) is entered between

Okeia Point, about 2 miles SE of Kanimeno Point, and Tamina

Point, about 1.5 miles farther SE. The shores of the harbor are

fringed with mangroves backed by hills, which rise to 229m on

the E side and 204m on the W side. Drying coral reefs extend a

short distance off the E shore and up to 135m off the W shore.

9.44 Jones Reef, which dries, lies in the fairway of the entrance,

nearly 1 mile N of Tamina Point; foul ground extends about

90m N of the reef.

9.44 Stella Islet, about 1 mile S of Okeia Point, lies on a coral

reef, 0.15 mile offshore.

9.44 The inner harbor is entered between Stella Islet and Polaris

Point, about 0.6 mile SW. Its E side is steep-to until about 92m

offshore, and the W side to about 135m offshore. A 2.7m shoal

lies off the W shore, about 0.2 mile SE of Polaris Point. Shoal

water extends about 0.4 mile from the head of the inner harbor

where a small river discharges. There is a jetty on the E side

nearly 1 mile SE of Polaris Point.

9.44 A cove, between Tamina Point and Polaris Point, 0.67 mile

ESE, has steep-to shores up to the edge of the fringing coral

reef. Foul ground extends about 0.1 mile N of Polaris Point,

and depths of 5.5m or less, extend up to 0.1 mile offshore for a

distance of about 0.5 mile SE of the point.

9.44 Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 16 to 22m, in Porlock

Harbor.

9.44 The Musa River (9°05'S., 148°54'E.) flows out by two

mouths at Musa Point. The delta is low swampy land, as is also

the coast for some distance E. The E mouth is less than 95m

wide, with a depth of 4.3m, and the W mouth is 0.15 mile

wide, with a depth of 0.9m on the bar; both of these depths are

possibly subject to change during freshets. At times the water

is discolored for some distance off the mouths. The river has

been ascended many miles by boat. Anchorage can be taken, in

depths of 12.8 to 18.3m, off the mouths of the Musa River.

9.44 Port Harvey (8°54'S., 148°31'E.) (World Port Index No.

53203), on the W side of Dyke Acland Bay, affords anchorage, in 18.3m, in the middle of the port. Rocky Point, at

the head of the port, extends NE, forming a creek on either side

of it; the point is fringed by a reef extending about 135m NE of

it, with a 1.5m shoal close outside of it.

9.44 A drying reef extends 0.17 mile NE of the SE entrance point

of the port. Two reefs which dry, on the N of which there are

two mangrove islets, extend about 0.3 mile and 0.2 mile offshore, respectively, about 0.5 and 0.8 mile N of Rocky Point.

9.44 A shoal lies about 0.5 mile E of Cape Sinclair, close N of

Port Harvey.

9.45 Oro Bay (8°53'S., 148°29'E.) (World Port Index No.

53206) is entered between Cape Sinclair and a point about 1.25

miles NW; the village of Beamu stands at its head. Drying

reefs extend about 90m from the shore of the bay, except at its

head which is sandy.

9.45 Aspect.—On the S side of the bay there is an T-headed pier;

the head is 60m long, width 12.1m, with a depth of 11.4m

alongside. The pier is steel and concrete structure, in good

condition, and fendered adequately. The inner side of the Thead has depths of 10.5m is are used by coastal vessels. A

ramp projecting from the shore W of the pier is used by barges.

Three mooring dolphins are situated in the vicinity of the main

wharf. Containers can be handled at the main wharf; ro-ro

vessels are frequent callers at the port. 

9.45 Berthing may be delayed from December to March during

NW winds. Berthing is best carried out in the early morning

when there is usually no wind.

9.45 A new dolphin and extended mooring and a new extension

berth in the E end is now underway. The overall length of the

berth will then be 95m. 

9.45 A directional light leads into the bay.

9.45 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory. Pilots are available

from Port Moresby with 48 hours notice. The pilot boards 1

mile NE of the pier. Vessels contact "Oro Bay Port Control" on

VHF channels 16, 12, and 6. 

9.45 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 12.8 to 16.5m, in

the middle of the bay, but is restricted in the approaches to the

pier and in the turning basin.

9.46 A shoal, with a depth of less than 1.8m, lies nearly 3

miles N of Cape Sinclair. Between this shoal and Cape Sudest

(8°44'S., 148°28'E.), several shoals, with depths of 2.1 to 5.5m,

lie within 4.5 miles of the coast. A rock, with a depth of less

than 1.8m, lies 7.5 miles SE of Cape Sudest. Rocks, with

depths of less than 1.8m over them, extend up to 3 miles E of

Cape Sudest.

9.46 Between Cape Sudest and Cape Endaiadere (8°41'S.,

148°26'E.), on which there is a coconut plantation, several
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 197

Pub. 164

detached shoals, with depths of 3 to 12m, lie within 4.5 miles

of the coast.

Dyke Acland Bay to Cape Ward Hunt

9.47 Buna (8°40'S., 148°24'E.) (World Port Index No.

53208) lies about 2.5 miles WNW of Cape Endaiadere. Buna

Roads, NE of Buna, is encumbered with shoals. There is a

government station at Buna, with two disused wharves close W

of it.

9.47 There are numerous dangers in the approach to Buna. The

outermost danger is a shoal, with a depth of 2.1m, about 3

miles NNE of Cape Endaiadere, with a 10m shoal about 0.5

mile farther NNW. Shoals, with depths of 4 to 4.6m extend

about 2 miles S and SW of the 2.1m shoal. Shoals extend about

2 miles NE of Cape Endaiadere.

9.47 Holnicote Bay is entered between Cape Killerton (8°37'S.,

148°20'E.), about 6.5 miles NW of Cape Endaiadere, and

Kumusi Point (8°28'S., 148°12'E.), about 11.5 miles farther

NW. Cape Killerton is low, wooded, and fringed by a reef.

Kumusi Point has large casuarinas growing on it. The Mangrove Islands, three in number, lie about 1 mile WNW of Cape

Killerton.

9.47 A 5.2m patch, a 1.8m patch, and a 7.6m patch, lie about 3.5

miles N, 3.25 miles NNE, and 4 miles NE, respectively, of

Cape Killerton, at the seaward limit of an area fouled by reefs

and rocks. At the W end of the area, a shoal, in a depth of 0.6m,

lies about 2.25 miles NW of Cape Killerton. A dangerous

wreck lies close SW of the above shoal.

9.47 Range beacons, in range 168.5°, and consisting of tubular

metal tripods surmounted by white triangular daymarks, stand

on Cape Killerton.

9.47 A beacon stands on the fringing reef, about 0.1 mile E of the

cape; another beacon stands on a reef about 0.15 mile farther E.

9.47 Cape Killerton may be closed, clear of dangers, to a distance

of 1.5 miles, but caution is necessary. Shoal water is difficult to

see in the area.

9.47 Anchorage.—Vessels may anchor as convenient off Cape

Killerton or, in about 16.5m, about 2 miles NNW of the cape.

9.47 Vessels may also go alongside a wharf, about 0.25 mile SSE

of the cape, with 4.6m alongside. To reach the wharf, round the

cape at a distance of about 0.25 mile, then pass between the

two beacons E of the cape before shaping course for the wharf.

The swell can make the alongside berth uncomfortable. The

wharf was reported to be in ruins.

9.47 Cape Killerton is the closest anchorage to Popondetta, about

11 miles inland.

9.47 A 2.4m patch lies about 4.25 miles NW of Cape Killerton,

and nearly 2.5 miles offshore.

9.47 The Kumusi River, discharging at the NW entrance point of

Holnicote Bay, has an islet in its mouth. The approach to the

river is unsurveyed and the water is discolored. An unexamined

shoal lies about 4.5 miles ESE of Kumusi Point.

9.48 Gumboro Hill (8°19'S., 148°11'E.), 207m high, is

conspicuous nearly 9 miles NNW of the Kumusi River.

9.48 The Opi River, with its entrance about 1 mile ENE of Gumboro Hill, is sluggish, about 47m wide, with a depth of 3.7m.

9.48 Caution Point (8°16'S., 148°12'E.), about 3 miles N of

Gumboro Hill, is bold, with some coconut palms on it, and

terminates in a bluff on its S side. Anchorage may be obtained,

in 27m, sand, 0.75 mile SE of Caution Point.

9.48 The coast between Caution Point and Black Rocky Point

(Black Rock Point), about 6 miles NNW, is foul. Black Rocks

extend about 0.5 mile NNE of Black Rocky Point.

9.48 Robinson Bay (8°09'S., 148°08'E.), entered about 2 miles

NNW of Black Rocky Point, has depths of 18.3 to 24m, mud.

Foul ground extends from the S entrance point of the bay. The

coast in this vicinity is backed by a range of hills, 396m high.

9.48 Douglas Harbor (8°05'S., 148°08'E.), entered about 4 miles

N of Robinson Bay, is about 0.35 mile wide at its entrance,

where there is a depth of 24m , shoaling to 5.5m at its head.

The harbor provides good shelter in all weathers, but is not

recommended in the SE season.

9.49 Cape Ward Hunt (8°03'S., 148°08'E.), about 0.75

mile NNE of Douglas Harbor, is a well-wooded, bold, and

prominent point, about 46m high, rising to an elevation of

180m inland. A disued metal framework lighttower, 62m in

elevation, stands on the point. Craigs Pillar is a conspicuous

rock at the E extremity of the cape. 

9.49 Mitre Rock, 12.2m high, which lies about 0.67 mile N of Cape

Ward Hunt, appears composed of gray stone, and is probably

steep-to; it was reported difficult to identify from a distance.

Caution.—There are numerous shoals off-lying the coast

between Cape Endaiadere and Cape Ward Hunt; only those in

the vicinity of the recommended track are described.

9.49 Eve Shoal (8°31'S., 148°25'E.), in a depth of 6.4m, lies on

the SW side of the track, nearly 8 miles NE of Cape Killerton.

Margaret Shoal, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about 0.75 mile S of

Eve Shoal. An unexamined shoal, with a depth of 12m, lies

about 1 mile farther S. A lighted beacon is situated about 1

mile NE of Eve Shoal. This light is sectored.

9.49 Claire Shoal (8°26'S., 148°23'E.), with a depth of 6.4m, lies

on the E side of the track, about 11.75 miles NNE of Cape

Killerton. Shoals, and many rocks, with depths of less than

1.8m, lie between 1.25 and 4 miles E of Claire Shoal.

9.49 A shoal, with a least depth of 11m, lies on the W side of the

track, about 5 miles W of Claire Shoal. A shoal, with a depth of

5.5m, lies about 1.25 miles farther NNW, and Eleanor Shoal,

with a least depth of 4.9m, lies about 1.5 miles N of the latter

shoal. A 7.6m shoal patch lies about 5.5 miles NNE of Eleanor

Shoal.

9.49 Raymonde Shoal (8°14'S., 148°16'E.), with a depth of

8.2m, lies on the E side of the track, about 5 miles ENE of

Caution Point. Raymonde Shoal is marked by a lighted buoy; a

lighted beacon marks a shoal lying 1.5 miles NE. Raymonde

Shoal and the lighted beacon were reported to lie 0.6 mile E of

their charted position.

9.49 A shoal, in a depth of 3.7m, was reported about 7.75 miles

ESE of Cape Ward Hunt.

Cape Ward Hunt to Huon Gulf

9.50 Ambush Point (8°03'S., 148°03'E.), at the E branch

of the Mambare River, lies about 5 miles W of Cape Ward

Hunt. A spit, with a depth of 4m over its outer end, extends

about 1 mile N of the point. The water is discolored in the

vicinity.
198 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

9.50 Mambare Bay (8°02'S., 148°00'E.) is entered between Ambush Point and Warsong Point, about 6 miles NW. The delta of

the Mambare River forms the E side of the bay, which is low

and flat. A shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, lies 1 mile W of Dead

Mangrove Point, located 2 miles W of Ambush Point. Between

this shoal and the coast S, there are several patches, with

depths of 2.4 to 3.7m. Farther NW, a bank, with depths of 3 to

8.8m, extends nearly 1 mile from the W shore of the bay.

Anchorage may be taken, in 9.1m, about 1 mile SW of Dead

Mangrove Point clear of the shoals lying in the SW part of the

bay. 

9.50 The Gira River (8°00'S., 147°57'E.) discharges close to

Warsong Point, where it is nearly 73m wide. The bar fronting

the river can only be crossed during a SE wind by shallow draft

vessels.

9.50 The coast between Warsong Point and Alligator Point

(7°56'S., 147°51'E.), about 7 miles WNW, is low and wooded.

9.50 Caution.—Lila Rose Shoal (7°58'S., 148°09'E.), with a

depth of 7.3m, lies about 4.75 miles NNE of Mitre Rock.

9.51 Mambare Patches (7°56'S., 148°03'E.), with depths

of 4 to 7m, extend about 4 miles in a NW-SE direction, and are

centered about 6.75 miles NE of Warsong Point.

9.51 An obstruction was reported about 5 miles NNE of Warsong

Point.

9.51 A depth of 6.4m lies about 3.25 miles NNE of Warsong

Point, at the outer end of Song Shoals.

9.51 Starkey Patches (7°56'S., 147°56'E.), with a least depth of

4.9m, lie about 4.5 miles ENE of Alligator Point. A shoal, with

a depth of 7.3m, lies nearly 1 mile W of the NW extremity of

Starkey Patches.

9.51 Hercules Bay is entered between Alligator Point (7°56'S.,

147°51'E.) and Cape Waria, about 14 miles NW.

9.51 A shoal, with a least depth of 5.8m, lies about 6.75 miles

NNW of Alligator Point. A 7.6m shoal lies about 2 miles farther NW.

9.51 Waria Patches (7°44'S., 147°48'E.), with a least depth of

4m at their N end, lie about 8.5 miles ENE of Cape Waria. A

depth of 10.6m lies about 10 miles E of the cape.

9.51 Bau Islet (7°53'S., 147°43'E.), 22m high, and Tauwara Islet,

12.2m high, both wooded, lie about 6 and 9 miles, respectively,

SSE of Cape Waria.

9.51 A shoal, with a depth of 11m, lies about 3.5 miles E of Bau

Islet. A depth of 3m, and a reef which dries 1.8m, lie about 1.5

miles ENE and 1 mile SE, respectively, of Tauwara Islet.

9.52 The Waria River (7°50'S., 147°41'E.), discharging

about 2 miles SSE of Cape Waria, has depths of 4.6m and

10.6m, about 0.5 mile and 1.5 miles, respectively, E of its

mouth.

9.52 Anchorage can be taken, in 31 to 37m, mud, nearly 2 miles E

of Tauwara Islet. Anchorage may also be obtained, in 11 to

14.6m, about 2.75 miles N of Bau Islet, 1.25 miles offshore.

9.52 Morobe Harbor is entered between Stations Point (7°45'S.,

147°36'E.), about 4.5 miles WNW of Cape Waria and Moa

Point, about 0.75 mile SW. Stations Point is the N extremity of

the peninsula forming the E side of the harbor, which is

sheltered from all except N winds. Morobe Point lies about

0.75 mile NW of Stations Point, N of the harbor entrance. The

harbor has general depths of 20 to 26m. The settlement of

Morobe lies on the E side of the harbor, close S of Stations

Point; a small timber wharf, at the settlement, has a depth of

4.6m alongside, providing good shelter at all times. 

9.52 The Luard Islands, in the NE approach to Morobe Harbor,

are a group of reef-fringed wooded islands about 30 to 76m

high. Mindrugutu Island is the NE island of the group. Una

Reef, with a least depth of 3m, lies with its outer edge about

0.75 mile SE of the E end of Mindrugutu Island; a patch, in a

depth of 10m, lies about 0.2 mile farther S.

9.53 Matebinagutu Islet (7°44'S., 147°38'E.) 34m high

and surrounded by a reef to a distance of about 0.15 mile, lies

about 2 miles ENE of Stations Point. A shoal with a least depth

of 5.8m, lies 0.5 mile SE. Manila Reef, with a least depth of

2.4m, lies about 1.25 miles ESE of Stations Point.

9.53 The principal landmarks in the approach to Morobe Harbor

are Mount Adolf, 344m high and cone-shaped, about 2.5 miles

W of Stations Point, and Grasberg, 145m high, with two white

houses on its summit, about 0.65 mile S of Stations Point.

9.53 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 27.4m, with Stations Point bearing 109°, and Morobe Point bearing 010°. Anchorage can also be taken, in 22m, in Morobe Harbor, in midchannel, on a line joining Grasberg and Moa Point, or farther S.

9.53 Directions.—Vessels approaching Morobe Harbor from SE

should steer for Stations Point, bearing 274°, which leads

about 0.3 mile S of a 5.8m shoal SE of Matebinagutu Island.

When the E extremities of Matebinagutu Islet and Mindrugutu

Island are in range, bearing 023°, steer for the S extremity of

Morobe Point, bearing 286°, which leads 0.35 mile N of

Manila Reef. When Mount Adolph bears 260°, steer for it on

that bearing until Morobe Harbor opens, when course may be

steered for the anchorage.

9.53 Approaching from N the only conspicuous mark near the

coast is Jabill Hill, described in paragraph 9.55, about 12 miles

NW. The Hosken Islands are also useful. Vessels from N, after

passing NE of Mindrugutu and the reefs extending E and SE of

it, should steer for Cormorant Point (7°47'S., 147°38'E.),

about 2 miles WNW of Cape Waria, bearing about 210° until

Stations Point bears 274°, when the directions given above

should be followed.

9.53 Caution.—A shoal extends about 0.2 mile offshore close S

of the settlement of Morobe.

9.54 Royle Channel is the inside route from Morobe to

Burnung Point, about 54 miles NW, and lies between the

Straggling Islands, the Fly Islands, and the Longuerue Islands,

and the mainland.

9.54 The Hosken Islands (7°38'S., 147°32'E.), about 7 miles NW

of Mindrugutu Island, consists of four islands connected by a

reef. Kayamagudu, the largest is 91m high and wooded; foul

ground and a shoal, with a depth of 4.6m, extends about 0.5

mile N of the island. A submerged rock, position approximate,

lies about 1.5 miles SSE of Kayamagudu Island.

9.54 The Jusabegud Islets, about 3 miles NW of Kayamagudu

Island, consist of two low islets on the same reef. A drying reef

extends to about 0.3 mile W of the W and larger islet. A patch,

in a depth of 5.2m, lies about 0.15 mile ESE of the smaller

islet.

9.54 Mageri Point (7°36'S., 147°28'E.) is the S entrance point of

a bay W of the Jusabegud Islets. Jabi Hill, 323m high, about
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 199

Pub. 164

1.25 miles NNW of Mageri Point, lies close within the N

entrance point; from E and NE, it appears as an isolated peak,

rising steeply from the sea. A shoal, with a depth of 7.3m, lies

about 0.65 mile N of Mageri Point. The bay has general depths

of 36 to 64m.

9.54 At the SW end of the bay, a channel, about 0.1 mile wide, leads

into Mort Harbor. The harbor, backed by steep, wooded hills, is

sheltered from all winds; it has general depths of 26 to 40m and is

clear of dangers, except for a narrow fringing reef in places. A

narrow inlet extends about 1.25 miles N from its W end. 

9.54 The N entrance point of Mort Harbor is steep-to and easily

distinguished from seaward; a reef, on which the sea breaks,

lies about 0.15 mile N of the N entrance point, and extends

about 0.15 mile E, with a depth of 5.5m at its outer end. The S

entrance point of the harbor is a wooded sandspit.

9.54 The N entrance point of Mort Harbor, bearing 256°, leads

into the bay, between the reef W of the Jusabegud Islets and the

7.3m shoal N of Mageri Point.

9.54 Anchorage can be taken anywhere in Mort Harbor. The best

berth is in 40m, mud, about 0.2 mile SSW of the S entrance

point. Small vessels may obtain good anchorage, in 11 to

16.5m, S of the sand spit.

9.55 The Bienen Islets (7°34'S., 147°26'E.) about 52m and

55m high, lie about 2.25 miles NW of Jabi Hill, on a reef close

offshore. A shoal, with less than 1.8m, lies about 1.25 miles

NE of the N islet.

9.55 Weibu Islet (7°33'S., 147°24'E.), 76m high, lies close offshore, about 2 miles NW of the Bienen Islets. Shoal water

extends nearly 0.5 mile NW of the islet.

9.55 Natter Bay (7°31'S., 147°22'E.) is entered between a point

about 2.5 miles NW of Weibu Island and Cape Kubumi, about

1 mile farther NW. The bay is clear of dangers and has depths

of 22 to 88m.

9.55 The S entrance of the bay is low, sandy, and wooded; the S

shore of the bay is flat and wooded, except for a hill, 104m

high, close S of which is a lagoon. The lagoon discharges into

the bay and causes the water to be discolored during the rainy

season. The W shore is low and swampy, and the N shore is

bordered by several cliffs, 15.2 to 18.3m high. A reef extends

about 0.12 mile E of Cape Kubumi.

9.55 Anchorage can be obtained, in 45m, about 0.2 mile offshore,

in the SW part of the bay.

9.55 The Straggling Islands (7°31'S., 147°24'E.) are a group of

rocky and wooded islands, with Kakare Island, 88m high, the

highest and largest, lying about 2.5 miles E of Cape Kubumi.

Utbe Island, 76m high, and Abaru Island, 58m high, lie about

1.5 miles E and 1 mile N, respectively, of Kakare Island. Foul

ground and depths of less than 5.5m extend nearly 1 mile N of

Aburu Island.

Huon Gulf

9.56 Huon Gulf is entered between Cape Kubumi

(7°30'S., 147°22'E.) and Cape Cretin, about 58 miles NW. The

SW side of the bay has several bays and sheltered harbors, and

is backed by the Kuper Range and the Herzog Mountains,

separated from each other by the valley of the Francisco River.

On the N side of the bay is the S part of the Rawlinson Range,

890 to 1,707m high.

9.56 The land at the head of the gulf, and for nearly 2 miles inland, is low, and near Burnung Point, about 35 miles NW of

Cape Kubumi, the coastal range is broken by a deep valley.

South of the valley, bold, stony and wooded ranges border the

coast, descending steeply to the water’s edge.

9.56 The depths near the shores of the bay are great, and the gulf

in general appears to be clear of dangers, but there are a number of shoals in the vicinity of the islands off the SW side of the

gulf. Between Cape Kubumi and Cape Dinga, about 18 miles

NW, regular depths of about 110m, ooze, have been obtained at

a distance of about 1 mile offshore, and somewhat nearer to the

projecting points.

9.56 The rivers at the head of the gulf are shallow, with a rapid

current, and only navigable by boats.

9.56 The rise and fall of the tide has been reported to be small.

Huon Gulf—Southwest Shore

9.57 The Fly Islands consist of three islands, fringed by

extensive reefs; the SE island (7°28'S., 147°22'E.), 115m high,

and the W island, 58m high, lie about 2 miles N, and 4.5 miles

NNW, respectively, of Cape Kubumi. Several shoals, with

depths of 3.7 to 10m, lie within 3 miles NNW of the N and

largest of the Fly Islands. A patch, in a depth of 5.5m, lies

nearly 1 mile S of the same island. Depths of 2.7m extend 1

mile SE of the largest of the Fly Islands.

9.57 Gorue Islet (7°31'S., 147°20'E.) lies close offshore, about

1.25 miles W of Cape Kubumi; an islet, 127m high, lies about

1 mile farther WNW.

9.57 A sand cay, 0.6m high, lies on the N end of a shoal, about

2.25 miles NNW of the 127m islet; foul ground and a shoal,

with less than 1.8m, extends about 1 mile S of the sand cay. A

reef, which dries 0.3m, lies about 1.5 miles WNW of the sand

cay.

9.57 Brunswick Harbor (7°29'S., 147°16'E.), entered about 4.5

miles WNW of Cape Kubumi, is sheltered by hills and has

depths of 24 to 42m, mud. Reefs extend N from both entrance

points. Anchorage can be taken by vessels with local knowledge, in about 36m, mud, off the village of Seiama at the SW

end of the harbor.

9.57 Small craft can anchor close to the shore, in depths of from

11 to 13m. 

9.57 Bnoto Point, about 2 miles NW of the N entrance point of

Brunswick Harbor, is steep backed by a hill, 232m high, and

fringed by a reef.

9.57 Lasanga Island (7°25'S., 147°15'E.), the largest island of the

Longuerue Islands, lies about 7.5 miles NW of Cape Kubumi. It

has a saddle-shaped summit, with the peaks in an E-W direction,

and attaining an elevation of 488m in the W part. A bay, on the S

side of the island, provides sheltered anchorage to vessels with

local knowledge. An islet, with a reef about 0.15 mile S of it, lies

on the E side of the entrance to the bay.

9.57 The remaining islands of the group are small, high, wooded

and rocky, and similar in appearance. Surgurd Islet lies about

1.75 miles ESE of the SE end of Lasanga Island; a shoal with

3.7m, lies about 0.67 mile NW of the islet.

9.57 Batteru Islet, 166m high, and Jawani Islet, 143m high, both

densely wooded, lie at the NW end of the Longuerue Islands;

the latter islet lies about 3.75 miles NNW of Lasanga Island.

Shoals, with depths of 5.5m, lie within 1.25 miles N of Jawani
200 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

Islet. An 8.2m shoal lies about 1 mile E of Batteru Islet, and a

2.4m depth lies about 1.25 miles SW of the same islet.

Wurttemberg Bay is entered between Cape Goeben

(7°28'S., 147°13'E.) and Bnoto Point, about 2.5 miles E. Boyen

Islet lies about 0.5 mile E of Cape Goeben, with a reef

between. A reef, in a depth of 2.1m, lies about 0.5 mile NE of

the islet. A depth of 48m was obtained about 90m from the

head of the bay.

9.58 Baden Bay (7°28'S., 147°11'E.), entered about 1.5

miles W of Cape Goeben, is sheltered by Lasanga Island. A

reef extends about 1 mile NNE of Sumboa Point, the NW

entrance point. The village of Kia lies at the head of the bay.

Good anchorage can be taken in Baden Bay, in 27m, by vessels

with local knowledge.

9.58 Hessen Bay (7°23'S., 147°09'E.) is entered between Bamaba

Point, about 2.75 miles NW of Sumboa Point, and Cape Room

(7°21'S., 147°09'E.), about 2.75 miles farther NNW. The bay is

divided into two parts by a flat point, near which the Sela River

discharges. A reef, with a 3.7m depth near its outer end,

extends about 0.5 mile E of Bamaba Point. Cape Room is

fringed by a reef extending about 0.2 mile off its SE side; a

3.7m patch lies about 0.5 mile ESE of the cape, and a 4.9m

patch lies about 0.2 mile farther ESE.

9.58 Anchorage has been taken, in a depth of 31m, about 0.1 mile

offshore, on the S side of the mouth of the Sela River, with

Bamaba Point bearing 129° and Cape Room bearing 016°.

9.58 Sachsen Bay (7°20'S., 147°08'E.) is entered between Cape

Room and Cape Dinga, about 2 miles N. There is a sandy

beach in the N part of the bay, and trees grow close to the

water’s edge in the S part of the bay. A 5.5m shoal and a 6.7m

shoal lie nearly 1 mile ENE and about 0.75 mile ESE, respectively, of Cape Dinga. In the S part of the bay, no bottom was

obtained at a depth of 20m. Anchorage can be obtained in the

N part of the bay, about 0.15 mile from the head by vessels

with local knowledge.

9.58 Nassau Bay (7°18'S., 147°08'E.) is entered between Cape

Dinga and Gossler Point, about 3.5 miles N. It was reported

that anchorage can be obtained, in 7.3m, about 0.4 mile off the

N shore of the bay, but it is exposed; an alternative for small

craft is in 13 to 18m, in the SW corner of the bay.

9.58 Simolala Islet (7°15'S., 147°09'E.), 88m high, is conical and

wooded; it lies 1 mile E of Gossler Point. The islet is apparently connected to the point by a submerged reef, on which is a

rock which almost dries.

9.58 A bank, with depths of 4.6 to 18.3m, extends about 3 miles N

of Simolala Islet, and up to 1.5 miles from the coast. A rock,

with a depth of 0.3m, lies on the bank, about 0.5 mile N of the

islet.

9.58 A scar on the coast is conspicuous about 4.5 miles NNW of

Gossler Point.

9.59 Dot Islet (7°07'S., 147°05'E.), 31m high and wooded,

lies about 4 miles farther NNW and is connected to Tusin

Point, about 0.5 mile NNW, by a reef. Two bare rocks lie close

off the SW end of the islet. A 4.6m shoal lies about 1.5 miles E

of Dot Islet, and a reef, in a depth of 3.7m, was reported about

2 miles SE of the islet.

9.59 Dot Inlet, entered W of Dot Islet, provides sheltered anchorage for small vessels, in 46m, about 91m offshore. The shore

reef varies in width from 10 to 360m, being widest off the village of Kelkel, in the SW corner of the bay.

9.59 Laupui Point (7°05'S., 147°04'E.), about 2.5 miles N of Dot

Islet, is the N spur of the Kuper Range. The Francisco River

discharges into the SE side of Bayern Bay, about 1.5 miles

WSW of the point, through a picturesque valley. The mountain

ranges in this district S of Laupui Point have a different character to those tothe N; S they consist of short ridges running

nearly parallel to the coast, while N the spurs are directed

towards the coast.

9.59 Shepparton Shoal (7°05'S., 147°07'E.), with a depth of

4.6m, lies about 2.5 miles E of Laupui Point.

9.59 The Salamaua Peninsula, with Burnung Point (7°01'S.,

147°04'E.) at its NW extremity, rises to an elevation of 249m

and is joined to the mainland at its SW end by a low isthmus.

Reefs extend about 0.2 mile N and NW of the N end of the

peninsula. A rock, in a depth of 1.5m, and a shoal, with a depth

of 6.4m, lie about 0.5 mile NE and 0.75 mile ESE, respectively,

of Burnung Point.

9.59 Benalla Banks (9°35'S., 150°53'E.) lies with its least depth

of 16.5m about 4.5 miles NE of Burnung Point.

9.59 Rotherys Reef (6°58'S., 147°00'E.), with a least depth of

1.5m, lies about 4.5 miles NW of Burnung Point. O’Deas Reef,

with a depth of 4.3m, lies about 0.5 mile farther S.

9.60 Salamaua Harbor (7°02'S., 147°03'E.), on the W

side of the Salamaua Peninsula, offers good and sheltered anchorage in any depth required. Centre Reef, marked at its outer

end by a beacon, extends about 0.2 mile offshore from the W

side of the peninsula, about 1.75 miles SW of Burnung Point.

Kela Point, about 1 mile farther SW, has a reef extending about

0.2 mile NE of it.

9.60 A shoal, with a depth of 1.5m, lies about 3.5 miles W of

Burnung Point. A reef, with less than 1.8m, and which breaks

at LW, lies between the shoal and the coast SW. There is a

wreck, dangerous to navigation, 0.5 mile N of Kela Point.

9.60 The S part of Salamaua Harbor is shoal, with depths of less

than 5.5m, and large vessels should not proceed SW of a line

extending ESE of Kela Point to the peninsula. North of the

shoal area, the depths deepen rapidly to 37m, increasing to

depths of about 92m W of Centre Reef.

9.61 Sugarloaf (6°51'S., 146°56'E.), a hill, 387m high, and

0.5 mile inland, is conspicuous about 13 miles NW of Burnung

Point; it is the N spur of the Herzog Mountains to approach the

coast. Between Sugarloaf and the entrance to the Markham

River, nearly 7 miles N, the country between the foothills and

the coast is low and swampy. Herzog Lakes form an extensive

shallow lagoon S of the entrance to the Markham River. Mount

Herzog, 1,880m high, is located about 10 miles SW of the entrance to the Markham River.

9.61 The coast for about 8 miles S of Sugarloaf is fronted by a

shore bank, with depths of less than 5.5m, extending up to 0.5

mile offshore in places.

9.61 An extensive mud bank, centered about 3 miles NNE of

Sugarloaf, provides anchorage for vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 16.5 to 37m, exposed to winds from E to
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 201

Pub. 164

SE, but the holding ground is good. This is also the quarantine

anchorage for the port of Lae.

9.61 Labu Point (6°45'S., 146°58'E.) lies about 0.5 mile SW of

the S entrance point of the Markham River. Shoal water, with

depths of less than 5.5m extends about 0.4 mile E of Labu

Point, then for about 1 mile farther SE. A pinnacle, with a

depth of 9.8m, lies about 2 miles SSE of Labu Point.

9.61 Labu Bay, close N of Labu Point, affords anchorage, in 24 to

37m, for small vessels with local knowledge.

Huon Gulf—North Shore

9.62 The Markham River (6°45'S., 146°58'E.) is closed at

times by a bar; there are considerable depths outside its entrance, but inside, the river is shallow and the depths are continually changing. Numerous island and shoals, constantly

changing in shape, size and position, render navigation impracticable; a rapid current adds to the difficulties. The water is

discolored for several miles seaward, when the river is in flood.

Lae (6°44'S., 147°00'E.)

World Port Index No. 53230

9.63 The settlement of Lae lies about 2 miles E of the

mouth of the Markham River. It is a first point of entry for

foreign vessels. An airfied lies close W of the settlement, and

Voco Point lies about 1.65 miles E of the settlement.

9.63 Winds—Weather.—There is a swell in strong SE winds.

The SE breeze usually comes up in the afternoon and dies

away in the evening. Rain showers are frequent, usually during

night and early morning.

9.63 Depths—Limitations.—The main wharf (Overseas), which

consists of three berths, lies about 1.5 miles W of Voco Point.

Berth 1 and Berth 2, on the W side of the wharf, are each 123m

long, with an alongside depth of 11m. Berth 3, on the E end of

the wharf, is the tanker berth; it is 184m long, with an

alongside depth of 13.2m, although it has been reported (1994)

that a depth of only 11m alongside was available.

Lae—Main Wharf
202 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

9.63 To the E of Berth 3 is a T-headed tanker jetty; the head of the

jetty is 580m long, with a depth alongside of 14.2m. Further E

is another T-headed jetty; the head of the jetty is 400m long

and serves the cement works and storage silos.

9.63 Close W of the main wharf are two coastal wharves. Berth 4

is 54m long, with a width of 14m and an alongside depth of

4.9m. Berth 5 is 35m long, with an alongside depth of 2.7m.

9.63 Coastal vessels up to 40m long, with a draft of 3m, can also

berth at one of two privately-owned wharves close N of Voco

Point.

9.63 Aspect.—Mount Lunamen, 96m high, with a radio tower,

marked by red fixed obstruction lights, on its summit, is very

prominent 0.35 mile N of Voco Point.

9.63 In 1990, 349 vessels, with a total of 3.9 million dwt, used the

port. 

9.63 Proposals have been put forth to create a new oil berth, with

a dolphin-type mooring arrangement, off Berth 3. A container

terminal will add to the redevelopment of the old section of the

main wharf. 

9.63 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and is available 24 hours.

Vessels contact "Lae Port Control" on VHF channels 16, 12, 8,

and 6. The pilot boards about 1 mile SW of Voco Point.

9.63 The vessel’s ETA should be sent 12 hours in advance, with

confirmation not more than 5 hours and not less than 4 hours

before arrival.

9.63 Anchorage.—The anchorage off Lae is an open roadstead.

A quarantine anchorage lies about 4.5 miles SW of Lae has. In

good weather, in the season of SE winds, anchorage with

limited swinging room can be obtained in Milford Haven,

about 0.2 mile W of the W end of the main wharf, in 61m, silt.

9.63 Large vessels may obtain anchorage, in 82m, with Mount

Lunaman bearing 018°, and the first and second points E of

Voco Point in range. Vessels should not anchor outside this

position as many anchors have been lost here.

9.63 Small vessels may obtain anchorage, in 16.5 to 28m, W of

the wrecks which are marked by a green can buoy about 0.5

mile WSW of Voco Point. There is limited swinging room in

this anchorage.

9.63 Frequent squalls rise from seaward and the holding ground is

bad. These anchorages are not recommended.

9.63 Caution.—Vessels with a masthead height exceeding 18.3m

are prohibited from entering an area about 0.1 mile wide, extending about 0.5 mile SE from the seaward end of the airfield.

9.64 The coast between Lae and Cape Arkona, about 22

miles E, consists of a densely populated plain, several miles

wide, with lagoons, lying below spurs of the Rawlinson Range.

The vegetation, with the exception of a few stretches, consists

of mangroves, and many of the water courses in the plain have

the appearance of small creeks.

Lae—Tanker Berth
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 203

Pub. 164

9.64 Along this coast, about 0.5 mile W of the entrance to the

Busu River, a shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, extends over 0.5

mile offshore.

9.64 Cape Arkona (6°44'S., 147°22'E.) is a conspicuous bluff,;

within the cape are the houses of Hopoi Mission Station,

standing on a conspicuous hill, the first hill on the coast E of

Lae. A conspicuous hill, 282m high, lies near the coast about 8

miles E of Cape Arkona. Eastward of the cape, the spurs of the

mountains approach close to the coast.

9.64 A shoal bank extends about 0.5 mile offshore for a distance

of about 2.25 miles W of Cape Arkona; a shoal, in a depth of

4.9m, lies about 0.75 mile S of the cape.

9.64 Anchorage can be taken on this shoal, in 5.5m, about 0.3

mile offshore, 0.5 mile W of Cape Arkona.

9.64 A rock, position doubtful, and which almost dries, lies about

5 miles ESE of Cape Arkona, and about 1.5 miles offshore.

9.65 Cape Gerhards (6°45'S., 147°34'E.), marked by a

light, lies about 12 miles E of Cape Arkona; the cape is fringed

by reef extending 0.15 mile seaward.

9.65 Hanisch Harbor (6°44'S., 147°36'E.), entered between

Cape Gerhards and Tigedu Point, about 4.5 miles ENE, is

apparently free from dangers. The shores of the harbor are

thickly populated; a river and several rivulets discharge into the

harbor. A mission station lies 1.25 miles NW of Cape Gerhards. Anchorage can be taken, in 44m, in the NE part of the

harbor by vessels with local knowledge. A better anchorage for

small vessels is in 4m, in the SW part of the harbor, about 1

mile NNW of Cape Gerhards.

9.65 Schollenbruch Point (6°43'S., 147°45'E.) lies about 6 miles

E of Tigedu Point. Kaingana Islet (6°43'S., 147°47'E.), low

and wooded, lies on a reef close offshore, about 3 miles farther

E. A point, about 1 mile ENE of the islet, is distinctive from W

due to the crested appearance of the trees on it.

9.65 The coast between Schollenbruch Point and Cape Cretin,

about 7.5 miles ENE, should be approached with caution as

unknown reefs may exist and there is usually a heavy sea. An

extensive bank extends from 0.5 mile to 1.5 miles offshore

between the points. Between Cape Cretin and Megim Islet,

9.1m high, about 1.25 miles SW, there is a group of coral reefs

in which there are narrow boat passages.

9.65 Cape Cretin (6°40'S., 147°51'E.) is a bold headland; Mount

Lugaueng (6°37'S., 147°50'E.), a flat wooded ridge from 350

to 396m high, with grassy slopes on its S side, lies about 3.5

miles NNW of the cape.

9.65 Nussing Islet, 21m high and marked on its E side by a light,

lies about 0.75 mile E of Cape Cretin.

9.65 The Tami Islands (6°45'S., 147°54'E.), about 6.5 miles SSE

of Cape Cretin, are a group of four wooded islets, 37m high,

and two rocks, surrounded by extensive reefs. A shoal, nearly

awash, lies in a NE-SW direction, with its S end about 1.5

miles N of Kalal Islet, the NW and largest of the Tami Islands.

There are rocks, dangerous to navigation, 1 mile N and 1.75

miles NNW of Kalal Islet. A reef, with a depth of 3.7m, not

easily discerned except in a good light, was reported to lie

about 1.75 miles SE of Wonam Islet, the SE islet of the group.

9.65 It was reported that the Tami Islands make a good radar

target at 19 miles.

Dreger Harbor and Schneider Harbor

9.66 The Gingala Islands (6°39'S., 147°52'E.), low and

wooded, front the coast N of Cape Cretin for a distance of

about 2.25 miles. Reefs and foul ground extend between them

and join the N island to the mainland. Nababangdu Point, about

1.5 miles NNE of Cape Cretin, divides the area between the

mainland and the islands into two harbors.

9.66 Dreger Harbor (6°38'S., 147°52'E.), the S harbor, lies inshore of Matura Island. It is entered between the promontory,

about 0.5 mile NE of Cape Cretin, and Nussing Island, about

0.3 mile SSE. There is a light on Nussing Island. A 3m coral

patch lies about 135m W of the SW end of Nussing Island; a

4.6m patch lies about 92m SE of the W entrance point. A deep

channel leads NNE through two passages, each about 0.1 mile

wide; one leads between Kumbam Island, 0.35 mile NNE of

Nussing Island, and Simboa Island, 0.15 mile W, while the

other leads between the S end of Matura Island and a drying

reef, about 0.1 mile W, which extends about 0.1 mile from the

mainland. The NE end of the reef is normally marked by a beacon. 

9.66 The land near the harbor is low, of coral formation, and rises

gradually to the Lugaueng Plateau. Wharves in ruins lie on the

W side of the harbor. There is a 4.6m patch about 0.2 mile

SSW of Nababangdu Point; a shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies

0.15 mile farther S, near the middle of the harbor.

9.66 Anchorage.—Dreger Harbor is sheltered and affords good

anchorage, in depths of 24 to 40m. The usual anchorage is in

the middle of the harbor.

9.67 Schneider Harbor (6°38'S., 147°52'E.), the N

harbor, sheltered E by the Sagiang Islands (Sagiang Saun and

Sagiang Kapuing), is well protected and secure, with depths of

12.8 to 20.1m, but as the entrance is narrow, it is only available

for small craft. The entrance, which joins the harbor to Dreger

Harbor, is bordered E by reefs, which break heavily in strong

SE weather, making entry difficult even for small craft.

9.67 Langemak Bay (6°35'S., 147°51'E.), entered between

Gagidu Point, about 4 miles N of Cape Cretin, and a point

about 1 mile N, is open E and deep throughout. The bay is not

easily identified due to the uniformly wooded appearance of its

coasts, and the absence of any break in the mountains. The

Mape River flows into the head of the bay, and after heavy rain

discolors the water for several miles seaward. Wharves and

jetties, all in ruins, lie on both sides of Langemak Bay.

9.67 Anchorage may be obtained, in 46 to 64m, in the SW corner

of the bay, S of the mouth of the Mape River, and about 0.2

mile offshore. The anchorage is sheltered from all winds except those between E and NE. An anchorage suitable for vessels up to 30m long is available, in depths from 11 to 16.5m,

off the S shore, SW of Kalinguang Point, 1 mile W of Gadigu

Point.

9.68 Finsch Harbor (6°33'S., 147°51'E.) is formed by thr

Nugidu Peninsula, which extends about 1.75 miles N of the N

entrance point of Langemak Bay. The harbor is entered W of

Cape Bredow (Cape Bredbow) (6°33'S., 147°51'E.), the N extremity of the peninsula. The harbor is divided into three basins

separated by narrow shallow channels. The roadstead inside

the entrance is suitable for only one large vessel. The Bumi
204 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

River discharges on the W side of the entrance to the harbor.

Wharves stand on either side of the channel, about 0.5 mile

SSW of Cape Bredow; those on the E side are in ruins. The

shores of the harbor are densely wooded. 

9.68 The Nugidu Peninsula, which is low, merges into the

mainland when seen from seaward, making the harbor difficult

to identify from more than 4 miles offshore. Sattleberg, 975m

high, lies about 6.5 miles NW of Cape Bredow; another landmark is afforded by a saddled-shaped indentation in the mountain range on the NE side of Sattleberg extending to the coast.

9.68 Madan Islet (6°34'S., 147°51'E.), 0.35 mile SSW of Cape

Bredow, forms the E side of the N basin, which is suitable only

for small vessels. A reef, in a depth of 1.8m, lies about 0.1 mile

E of the N end of Madan Islet; it can be passed on either side in

a least depth of 10m on its E side, and 16.5m on the W side. It

should be passed on the E side; the bank extending from the W

side of the Nugidu Peninsula abreast the reef is steep-to.

9.68 The Flaggen Peninsula (6°34'S., 147°51'E.) is a projection

of land on the E side of the harbor, with its N end about 0.1

mile SSE of Madan Islet. The middle basin has depths of 3 to

6.7m, with a depth of 4.6m in the channel leading to it. The S

basin is only suitable for boats.

9.68 Anchorage may be obtained, in 29 to 40m, sand and mud,

with Cape Bredow bearing 051°, distant about 0.2 mile, and

with the N extremity of the Flaggen Peninsula bearing 186°. A

vessel in the roadstead, where a swell is felt, is exposed to

winds from NNW, through N, to ENE, but they do not blow

with sufficient strength to endanger a vessel with good ground

tackle. The holding ground is bad.

9.68 Approaching Finsch Harbor from N the coast may be

followed at a distance of 2.5 miles until the entrance to the

harbor has been identified. Local knowledge is necessary to

enter the basins.

Finsch Harbor to Vitiaz Strait

9.69 The coast from Finsch Harbor to Cape King William,

about 33 miles NW, is backed by mountain ranges, which

gradually become higher as Kitimula Point, about 13 miles N

of Cape Bredow, is reached, and then become steeper, and

attain their greatest elevation at Cape King William. As far as

Kitimula Point, the coast and mountain ranges are wooded, but

the hills in the foreground and others in the vicinity are covered

with grass, and vessels coming from E can discern these grassy

slopes from a considerable distance. A terrace formation is also

a peculiar feature of this stretch of coast. There are a number of

villages along the coast and many more in the hills.

9.69 Arndt Point (6°30'S., 147°51'E.) lies about 3.5 miles N of

Cape Bredow. The Song River, closed by a bar, discharges N of

the point, at the N end of Scarlet Beach, a small bay. Anchorage, sheltered from SE, can be taken by small vessels at the S

end of Scarlet Beach.

9.69 Station Point (6°26'S., 147°51'E.), a round, coral, chalk

cape, and Kamlagidu Point, 7.6m high and wooded, lie about

3.5 and 5 miles, respectively, N of Arndt Point. A coastal

lagoon, with an entrance for small boats, lies close S of Kamlagidu Point.

9.70 Kitimula Point (6°20'S., 147°49'E.) rises steeply

from the sea, and is dominated by a hill with terraces appearing

like fortifications. It should not be mistaken for a similar projection some miles farther NW. The white patches on the S

slopes of the hills at Kitimula Point are distinctive, and it may

also be distinguished by wide grassy flats with some trees,

while the cape NW is of brown color. A light is shown from

Kitimula Point.

9.70 No bottom at a depth of 110m could be obtained 3 miles SE

of Kitimula Point, and the coast appeared to be steep-to. The

coast between Kitimula Point and Cape King William appears

bold.

9.70 Between Kitimula Point and Blucher Point (6°14'S.,

147°42'E.), about 10 miles NW, steep, rugged and bare spurs

descend from the mountains, but at Blucher Point the land is

partly wooded and partly covered with grass. A drying reef

extends about 0.5 mile E of a point located about 2.5 miles SSE

of Blucher Point; there is a detached reef about 0.5 mile SE of

it.

9.70 Hardenburg Point (6°07'S., 147°37'E.) lies about 7 miles

NW of Blucher Point. Kesseroa Lagoon, between Hardenburg

Point and Cape King William, is formed by the fringing reef

and numerous islets and rocks lying offshore. There is an

entrance to it, with a depth of 4.9m, SE of Sialum Island, the

large island at the N end. Two of the larger islands are inhabited. The lagoon has not been surveyed, but there is

sheltered anchorage for small craft of up to 60 tons between

Sialum Island and the mainland.

9.70 Cape King William (6°04'S., 147°35'E.) is not a welldefined headland, the coast rounding and preserving its steepness. A village lies close NW of the cape. At the E end of the

Cromwell Mountains, and about 16.5 miles SW of Cape King

William, stands the highest summit, about 2,935m high.

Vitiaz Strait

9.71 Vitiaz Strait (5°50'S., 146°45'E.) is the fairway off

the coast between Cape King William and Cape Tiwalib, the S

entrance point of Astrolabe Bay, about 100 miles WNW.

Umboi Island (5°40'S., 147°57'E.) and the other islands NW

form the N side of the strait, which is, in effect, more or less

open sea. The least width of the strait is about 20 miles between Cape King William and the islands and reef S of Umboi

Island.

9.71 Winds—Weather.—During the period from July to September, the Southeast Trade Winds sometimes blow with a

force from 6 to 7, raising a short choppy sea between Papua

New Guinea and Umboi Island. As the Papua New Guinea

coast is approached, the squalls increase in violence.

9.71 Abnormal atmospheric conditions, rain, and poor visibility

are likely in all seasons in Vitiaz Strait, E of Teliata Point

(5°56'S., 147°20'E.).

9.71 Some shelter can be obtained off the W coast of Umboi Island. A few miles from Cape King, the NW point of the island,

it may be blowing hard and raising a choppy sea, but as the

island is approached the wind will be less violent.

9.71 Tides—Currents.—The currents in Vitiaz Strait are variable and greatly influenced by the wind. From May to September, the W set of the South Equatorial Current predominates,

with velocities up to 1.5 knots through the strait. However,

from November through February, the Northwest Monsoon
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 205

Pub. 164

reverses these trends and creates a SE set of up to 2 knots. The

tidal currents are weak in April and May.

9.71 It was reported that a vessel in transit through the strait

experienced a NW set of 1.5 knots. The normal direction of the

current during January is SE at 2 knots.

9.71 Caution.—During abnormally strong SE conditions, currents between Umboi Island and Cape King William may run

at about 6 knots. During the Northwest Monsoon, there is a SE

set of up to 4 knots.

9.71 Vitiaz Strait can be unpleasant for small vessels during the

SE season, and it is inadvisable to plan on ever making a good

speed if proceeding S through this strait in the months from

March to November. If proceeding from Manus S during these

months, small vessels are recommended to proceed S from

Tolokiwa Island (5°19'S., 147°37'E.) to the Papua New

Guinea coast, and then follow the coast at a distance of about

0.5 mile, or less if prudent, off the coastal reefs. Following the

coastline into bays can be advantageous if the NW set is strong.

South of Kitimula Point both the sea and set generally abate.

Vitiaz Strait—South Side

9.72 The Finisterre Range, S of the coastal hills, extends

nearly parallel to the coast, on the S side of Vitiaz Strait. The

peaks of the range are usually obscured by clouds, but in the

early morning, before sunrise, they are sometimes visible.

Toward the W end of the strait, Mount Disraeli, a sharp cone,

3,719m high, and Mount Gladstone, 4,115m high, also conical

but not as pointed, lie about 20 miles SSE and 23 miles SSW,

respectively, of Helmholtz Point (5°36'S., 146°27'E.).

9.72 Kelanoa Harbor (6°02'S., 147°31'E.) is protected from E

and N by a coral reef, with Chissi Islet, 1.5m high, at its N end.

The entrance, between the islet and the coast W, is about 47m

wide, with depths of 6.4 to 7.6m. A river discharges at the entrance.

9.72 Anchorage can be obtained by vessels with local knowledge,

in 8.5 to 10m, S of Chissi Islet. The harbor is narrowed here by

a reef extending about 0.1 mile offshore, and a vessel should

secure a hawser to one of the trees to prevent it from swinging.

9.72 Scharnhorst Point (5°58'S., 147°27'E.), about 4.5 miles

NW of Chissi Islet, is 73m high. A narrow strip covered with

bushes borders the steep coast.

9.72 Teliata Point (5°56'S., 147°20'E.), about 7 miles WNW of

Scharnhorst Point, is bordered by a fringing reef extending

0.75 mile seaward. Sio Island lies on the fringing reef. There is

a Lutheran mission station and a grove of coconut palms at the

village of Sio on the mainland. Anchorage can be taken, in

35m, sheltered from S and E winds, N of the small bay close W

of Teliata Point.

9.72 Vincke Point (5°55'S., 147°16'E.), about 4.5 miles W of Teliata Point, is low and covered with grass. A large river enters

the sea close E of the point, and the yellow water from the river

flows E, leading to the supposition that an E counter current is

in the vicinity.

9.72 The coast extending about 3.5 miles SW of Vincke Point has

depths of 14.6 to 20.1m about 0.25 mile offshore. Several rivulets enter the sea here; a high waterfall is visible in the range

behind.

9.72 Wasu Anchorage (5°58'S., 147°13'E.) and its adjacent

village lie about 4 miles SW of Vincke Point. Beacons, in

range 222° lead to the SE side of wharf, with 3m alongside and

a length of 60m. Small vessels can anchor on the range line, in

18.3m, about 0.1 mile from the shore reefs; the reefs are not

steep-to and caution should be exercised in the ap-proach.

9.72 The wharf is exposed to winds from WNW to ENE, through

N, and should not be used during the Northwest Monsoon. 

9.73 Schlangen Harbor (5°58'S., 147°10'E.), formed between a reef and the coast, is entered about 7.5 miles WSW of

Vincke Point. The entrance, between a small bush-covered islet

and Peschel Point (5°57'S., 147°09'E.), about 8 miles WSW of

Vincke Point, is very narrow, deep, and not easily recognized;

the course for entering is close to the reef, on which the sea

breaks, and the islet on the E side must not be approached too

closely due to a projecting reef.

9.73 There are other openings with depths of 4.9 to 5.8m. There

are other islets, covered with bush, on the E and W extremities

of the reef. Abreast the E islet, there is a village on the coast,

and between them an entrance suitable for small vessels

appears to lead into Schlangen Harbor.

9.73 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 29 to 39m, just inside the entrance to

Schlangen Harbor, with Peschel Point bearing 278°, distant

from 0.25 to 0.5 mile.

9.73 Reiss Point (5°55'S., 147°03'E.), about 6 miles WNW of

Peschel Point, is fringed by a reef extending about 0.1 mile

offshore; on each side of the point is a village. A massive

grassy hill, 400m high, descends steeply to the sea about 5

miles W of Reiss Point. Off the coast between the point and the

hill, no bottom was obtained at a depth of 50m at a distance of

0.1 mile from the breakers.

9.73 Lepsius Point (5°51'S., 146°52'E.), about 12 miles WNW of

Reiss Point, is the N extremity of an alluvial plain, covered

with trees and grass, and is higher than other points in the

vicinity.

9.73 An unexamined shoal, with a depth of 12.8m, over which

there is discolored water, lies about 1.25 miles NW of Lepsius

Point.

9.73 Sareuak Bay (5°51'S., 146°45'E.), a wide bight fringed with

coral, lies with its head about 4 miles WSW of Lepsius Point.

9.74 Weber Point (5°46'S., 146°42'E.), about 10.5 miles

WNW of Lepsius Point, has reefs in its vicinity extending

about 0.5 mile offshore. Gauss Point lies about 1.5 miles farther WNW.

9.74 Bunsen Point (5°41'S., 146°35'E.) lies about 7.5 miles NW

of Gauss Point; midway between the points is a river with a

double mouth, one of which is filled with sand and gravel. A

partly-drying reef extends about 1 mile offshore W of the

point. Anchorage can be taken, in depths of 20 to 29m, by vessels with local knowledge, off the W edge of this reef.

9.74 Hemholtz Point (5°36'S., 147°27'E.) lies about 10 miles

NW of Bunsen Point, and a large rive36r, with deep water off

its mouth, flows out close to the point. A village lies on either

side of the point; they become more numerous farther W.

Dekays Bay is SE of Suri Point, which is about 2 miles ESE of

Helmholtz Point. A reef extends from the latter point to nearly

the E end of the bay. There is a signal station at the head of the

bay, about 2 miles SSE of Suri Point.
206 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

9.74 Anchorage.—Dekays Bay provides anchorage, sheltered

from all winds except those between N and E, to vessels with

local knowledge. Sheltered anchorage may be obtained off the

village on the W side of Helmholtz Point, in 20 to 26m, about

135m offshore, to vessels with local knowledge.

9.75 Cape Iris (5°34'S., 146°21'E.), about 7 miles W of

Helmholtz Point, is wooded and fringed by a reef, which dries

in places, and extends about 1 mile offshore. The large village

of Massai and two small rivers, which form small lagoons at

the mouth, lie at the inner end of the bay SW of Cape Iris.

Anchorage for vessels with local knowledge can be obtained

off the small rivers, in 35m, about 0.2 mile offshore, well protected from the Southeast Trade Wind. West of this anchorage

is a reef, on the other side of which anchorage, in 40m, may be

obtained near a small rivulet.

9.75 Kepler Point (5°34'S., 146°16'E.) lies about 4.5 miles W of

Cape Iris; a river discharges at the point, and discolors the sea

for a considerable distance offshore. Anchorage, in 44 to 81m,

may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge, near Kepler

Point, off a large village, from 0.1 to 0.2 mile offshore, between the reefs extending from the coast.

Herwarth Point (Hewarth Point)(5°32'S., 146°10'E.) lies

about 7 miles WNW of Kepler Point. In the W part of the bay

formed between them is a grassy hill, 100m high and thickly

wooded, located close to the coast.

9.75 Pommern Bay (5°32'S., 146°09'E.), with wooded shores,

lies about 1 mile SW of Herwarth Point. A wooded spur from

the mountains, which are about 1,524m high, approaches close

to the head of the bay, and near it is a wooded point extending

E, with a rivulet at the point discoloring the sea for several

miles offshore. Another spur from the mountains descends in

the direction of Cape Tiwalib, about 12 miles WNW of Herwarth Point; on the ridge is Mount Sirui, 710m high, conical

and conspicuous, and a wedge-shaped ridge, both of which are

partially wooded.

Vitiaz Strait—North Side

9.76 Umboi Island (5°38'S., 147°55'E.) lies on the N side

of Vitiaz Strait, with its S extremity about 29 miles NE of Cape

King William. The Siassi Islands form an extensive archipelago of low wooded islets S of Umboi Island.

9.76 Malai Island (5°53'S., 147°56'E.), 46m high, lies about 6

miles SW of the S end of Umboi Island, and Tuam Island, 61m

high, the largest of the group, lies about 6 miles SE of Malai

Islet.

9.76 Anchorage was reported available, in a depth of 9m, off a

village on the NW side of Malai Island. The anchorage is approached from the W through a winding unmarked channel between the reefs.

9.76 See Pub. 126, Sailing Directions (Enroute) Pacific Islands,

for the description of Umboi Island, the Siasi Islands, and

Dampier Strait.

9.76 Long Island (5°20'S., 147°06'E.), about 34 miles W of Umboi Island, is of volcanic origin. Lake Wisdom, a large lake almost entirely surrounded by steep slopes, 305m high, occupies

the center of the island; an active volcano is in the lake. Cerisy

Peak, 1,136m high, lies near the S end of the island, and

Reaumer, 1,304m high, lies near the N end of the island. Kiau

Point, the N point of the island, is marked by a light and has a

fringing reef for 2 miles on either side. The W and S coasts of

the island are steep-to, except for a reef extending 2 miles

offshore, about 7 miles WSW of Kiau Point, and a shoal, with

a depth of 3.7m, reported about 1.5 miles offshore, about 9

miles WSW of the same point. A small reef extends about 0.5

mile from Cape Reaumur, the NE extremity of the island, and

along the E coast of the island for a distance of about 6 miles, a

reef extends 1 mile offshore. An islet, about 15.2m high, lies

about 0.5 mile E of the SE end of the island.

9.76 There are rocks, dangerous to navigation, off the NW and W

coasts of this island. These rocks are located 3.25, 4.5, 6.25

miles WSW, and 8 miles SW of Kiau Point. There is a shoal,

about 0.75 mile long, 5.5 miles WSW of Kiau Point.

9.76 Long Island is reported to be a good radar target at a distance

of 22 miles.

9.76 Crown Island (5°06'S., 146°57'E.), about 9 miles WNW of

Kiau Point, has a fairly level summit, 566m high, and is fringed

by a reef, which extends from 0.5 to 1 mile offshore, and

through which there are numerous channels. Breakers have

been reported off its NE side; several rocks, which break in a

heavy sea, extend 1 mile offshore from the SW, S and SE

coasts of the island.

9.76 An ATLAS (Autonomous Temperature Line Aquisition

System) buoy is moored 6.5 miles NNE of Crown Island. 

9.76 Hankow Reef (4°54'S., 146°45'E.), about 17 miles NW of

Crown Island, has a least depth of 2.7m, and consists of four

patches, extending in a NW-SE direction for a distance of 2

miles; the sea breaks heavily on the reef. A drying rock lies

about 3 miles WSW of Hankow Reef.

9.76 Caution.—It was reported that Long Island and Crown

Island lie 1.5 to 2.5 miles W of their charted positions.

9.76 ATLAS buoys are in the process of being laid down by the

U.S. National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration extending along the equatorial latitudes from the Galapagos Islands to Papua New Guinea (1992).

9.76 The buoys are toroidal with orange and white bands. Mariners are advised to keep 5 miles clear of these buoys. 

Astrolabe Bay

9.77 Astrolabe Bay, entered between Cape Tiwalib and

Cape Kusserow, about 18 miles NW, has considerable depths.

The S shore of the bay is mountainous. Mount Nasen (5°30'S.,

145°37'E.), 1,252m high, of the Ortzen Range, rises about 22

miles W of Cape Tiwalib. A vast plain, through which the

Gogol River flows, backs the W shore. The water is deep close

to the shore in most parts of the bay.

Astrolabe Bay—South Shore

9.78 Cape Tiwalib (5°28'S., 145°59'E.) is wooded and

higher than the points of land E of it. A mission station stands

on the cape, and a small bay lies E of it.

9.78 The Kabenau River (5°28'S., 145°55'E.), the mouth of

which is closed at times, discharges into the bay about 7.75

miles W of Cape Tiwalib.

9.78 Konstantin Harbor (5°29'S., 145°50'E.) is entered between

Garagassi Point, about 1.75 miles W of the mouth of the

Kabenau River, and a point about 0.3 mile SSW. A factory
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 207

Pub. 164

chimney lies about 0.32 mile ESE of Garagassi Point; a

flagstaff lies close E of the S entrance point of the harbor.

There are general depths of 12.8 to 73m in the harbor. Good

anchorage, sheltered from the prevailing winds, can be taken,

in about 40m, with the factory chimney bearing about 071°,

distant about 0.25 mile. Small vessels can anchor, in less than

37m, nearer to the shallows fringing the head of the harbor.

Astrolabe Bay—West Shore

9.79 The village of Bogadyim (5°27'S., 145°45'E.) lies

about 5 miles WSW of Garagassi Point. Landing can usually

be made at the jetty and also at the N end of the town in fine

weather, but the breakers are sometimes so heavy that landing

is impossible. Two yellow beacons, surmounted by triangular

topmarks, in range, indicate the approach to the anchorage;

they are difficult to distinguish.

9.79 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in 20m,

with the beacons in range bearing 241° and the boat shed bearing 286°.

9.79 The Gogol River (5°19'S., 145°45'E.) discharges about 7.5

miles N of Bogadyim. A bank, with depths of less than 5.5m,

extends from 0.3 to 0.5 mile offshore between the mouth of the

river and Maraga Hook, nearly 3 miles S; there are several

patches, with depths of 6.7m and 8.5m, which are steep-to on

their seaward side, close outside the bank.

9.79 Bili Bili (5°18'S., 145°47'E.), an islet, 37m high, and steepto, lies about 2 miles NE of the mouth of the Gogol River. A

reef, with a depth of about 1.2m, lies about 0.6 mile WNW of

the N end of the Bili Bili. Anchorage, in depths of 35 to 40m,

may be obtained off the NW side of the islet.

9.79 Urembo, Jabob, and Jomba are wooded coral islets lying 2,

2.5 and 3 miles, respectively, N of Bili Bili, and from 0.6 to

0.15 mile offshore. The coastal bank extends to the two S

islets. A radio tower is conspicuous, close inland, about 0.6

mile W of Jabob.

9.79 Submarine cables run ESE and SE from the shore W of

Jabob.

9.79 Planet Rock, in a depth of 1.8m, lies nearly 2 miles E of

Jabob and is difficult to distinguish.

9.79 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage for small craft may be

obtained, in 14.6 to 16.5m, between Jomba and the mainland.

The coast here is sandy beach with palm trees.

Madang Harbor (5°13'S., 145°49'E.)

World Port Index No. 53250

9.80 The harbor and city of Madang lie on the NW side of

the Schering Peninsula, in the S part of a lagoon extending

about 9 miles along the Papua New Guinea coast. It is a

sheltered anchorage and port for large vessels. Beliau Island

lies on the N side of the harbor. Binnen Harbor, W of Madang,

extends about 0.7 mile S of Bode Point, the NW extremity of

the Schering Peninsula.

9.80 Dallman Passage, the entrance to the harbor, lies between the

NE side of the Schering Peninsula and the S end of Kranket

Island, close NE. It is the S of several passages in the barrier

reef which extends N and parallel with the coast for about 8.5

miles to abreast Cape Barschtsch (5°04'S., 145°49'E.). It is

recommended for vessels approaching Madang from S.

9.80 The principal islands on the barrier reef N of Kranket Island,

from S to N, are Paeowai Island, Tab Island, and Sek Island;

the islands are densely wooded on their seaward side, but are

cultivated on their inner side. There are several other islands

and many shoal patches within the barrier reef.

9.80 Winds—Weather.—There is little wind in the port; during

the rainy season the nearby marshes make the atmosphere

unhealthy. Ships intending to remain for any period of time are

advised to anchor between Kranket Island and Beliau Island.

9.80 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Madang is 1.2m at

mean higher HW. The tidal currents are scarcely perceptible.

The flood sets SW and the ebb sets NE, but they are much

affected by the prevailing winds; the maximum velocity is

about 0.75 knot.

9.80 The current usually sets N along the coast and is reported to

set continuously out of Dallman Pass; however, it was reported

that the current was setting mainly into Dallman Pass.

9.80 Aspect.—Dallman Pass, about 0.2 mile wide, has depths 29

to 50m in the fairway; a 7.6m patch lies on the N side of the

pass nearly 90m off the S end of Kranket Island.

9.80 Berth No. 1 (West Wharf) is on the N side of Bode Point; it

is 137m long and 12.8m wide, with a depth of 10.1m alongside. Berth No. 2, used by coastal vessels, lies about 135m S of

Berth No. 1; it is 52m long and 20m wide, with a depth of 5m

alongside, although it has been reported (1994) to have a depth

of only 2.3m alongside. Berth No. 3, for small craft, lies about

125m ESE of Berth No. 1; it is 30m long and 4.5m wide, with a

1.6m depth alongside. 

9.80 There are no tugs or lighters available.

9.80 Dallman Pass has been reported difficult to identify until

within a distance of from 3 to 4 miles, and the light structure on

Kalibobo Point was reported visible about the same distance.

9.80 Mount Hansemann (5°10'S., 145°45'E.), 431m high, about

5 miles WNW of the entrance to Dallman Pass, is a good landmark.

9.80 Coast Watchers Light is shown from a steel framework tower

on Kalibobo Point (5°12'S., 145°50'E.), the NE extremity of

the Schering Peninsula.

9.80 An aviation light is shown about 1.67 miles W of Kalibobo

Point.

9.80 Lights, in range bearing 300°, on the SE side of Beliau Island, lead through Dallman Pass.

9.80 Six beacons, each consisting of a white board, are situated

on the S side of Kranket Island. Similar beacons are situated

about 0.1 mile SW of the above-mentioned front range light

and on the E side of Nui Island, located 0.25 mile N of Bodie

Point.

9.80 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory for anchoring, berthing,

and unberthing. The pilot boards on the 300° range line about

1.5 miles from the entrance to Dallman Pass. Radio communication is possible with Madang Port Control on VHF channels

16, 12, 8, and 6.

9.80 The ETA at the pilot station should be sent not less than 12

hours before arrival via Port Madang, Port Moresby Radio or

Rabaul Radio, and should be confirmed not more than 5 hours

and not less than 4 hours prior to arrival.
208 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

9.80 Anchorage.—The best anchorage is in the quarantine anchorage, in a depth of about 44m, soft mud, good holding

ground, between between Beliau Island and Kranket Island,

with Babob Malon, a rock located 0.15 mile N of the N end of

Beliau Island, bearing 321°, and the front structure of the 300°

range on the SE side of Beliau Island, bearing 252°.

9.80 Vessels up to 91m in length can also anchor in Binnen Harbor, in depths of 12.8 to 16.5m.

9.80 An abandoned submarine cable crosses Madang Harbor

between Bode Point and the S side of Beliau Island. Another

submarine cable runs from Bode Point SW across the entrance

to Binnen Harbor.

9.80 Anchoring is prohibited in an area extending across Madang

Harbor, from the SE side of Beliau Island to the shore SSE.

9.80 Directions.—As Dallman Pass and Coast Watchers Light

are difficult to distinguish, Mount Hansemann can be steered

for bearing 302°, which leads to the harbor entrance. Then a

vessel should steer a mid-channel course to the harbor. The

pass and fairway boundaries are marked on the chart.

Madang
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 209

Pub. 164

9.80 Kranket Island and Tab Island are more easily identified than

Dallman Pass and the light structure. Bili Bili, about 5.5 miles

SSW of the harbor entrance, forms a good landmark, being distinguishable at a distance of 10 miles.

9.80 Approaching from N, the houses of the settlement become

visible soon after passing Sek Island.

9.80 Caution.—Many local fishing vessels may be encountered

at night, from December to April, off the entrance to Dallman

Pass.

Islands and Passes North of Madang

9.81 Tab Anchorage (5°10'S., 145°50'E.) provides anchorage in general depths of 20 to 40m. It extends from Panab

Island, about 1.5 miles N of Beliau Island, to Tab Island, nearly

2 miles E, and from the NW end of Kranket Island to Rasch

Pass (5°09'S., 145°51'E.). It is bordered E by the barrier reef,

Tab Island, Massas Island, and Paeowai Island and the reefs

joining them; on its SW side by the rocks and reefs lying

between Kranket Island and Panab Island; and on its NW side

by the shoals and rocks extending from Panab Island to within

0.5 mile of the barrier reef close N of Rasch Pass.

9.81 Rasch Pass (5°09'S., 145°51'E.) is deep and steep-to. A

white square beacon stands on Panab Island, and a 3.4m shoal,

about 1 mile NE of the island, is marked on its SW side by a

white triangular beacon with a red border. These beacons, in

range 229.5°, lead through Rasch Pass.

9.81 A 4.6m shoal lies about 0.5 mile NE of Panab Island.

9.81 A reef, with rocks which break, lie about 0.5 mile NNW of

the N end of Kranket Island.

9.81 A spit, with a least depth of 7.3m, extends about 0.17 mile

SSW from the S side of Rasch Pass. A spit, with a least depth

of 5.8m, extends 0.15 mile SW of the N side of the pass.

9.81 A channel leads from the S end of Tab Anchorage, passing E

of Pana Tibun Islet and Beliau Island, to Madang Harbor, over

patches with a least depth of 7.3m.

9.81 A deep channel leads NE of the 4.6m patch about 0.5 mile

NE of Panab Island to Nagada Harbor (Friedrich Karl Harbor)

(5°10'S., 145°48'E.). The latter harbor, close NW of Tab Anchorage, is a very narrow inlet, with depths of 14.6 to 28m.

9.82 Malamal Anchorage (5°07'S., 145°50'E.) provides

anchorage in depths of 12.8 to 31m. The anchorage extends

from Wongat Island (5°08'S., 145°51'E.) to the S end of Sek

Island, about 1.75 miles N, and from the barrier reef to the entrance to Mililat Harbor. Islands and shoals separate Malamal

Anchorage from Tab Anchorage. Wongat Island, about 1.25

miles NNW of Rasch Pass, is separated by a narrow channel

from the barrier reef. A shoal, with a least depth of 4m, lies

about 0.3 mile N of the N end of Wongat Island.

9.82 Tausch Island (5°06'S., 145°48'E.) lies on the N side of the

entrance to Mililat Harbor, about 1.5 miles NW of Wongat Island. Patches, with a least depth of 2.7m extend about 0.4 mile

E of Tausch Island. The area between Tausch Island, the S side

of Sek Harbor, and Sek Island is encumbered with shoals;

narrow and unmarked channels lead through the reefs E and

NE of Tausch Island.

9.82 A narrow and deep break lies in the barrier reef, about 2

miles N of Rasch Pass.

9.83 Sek Harbor (5°05'S., 145°50'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53260), with its main entrance, Ottilien Pass, about 8 miles

N of Madang, affords excellent anchorage in all weather, being

well protected by Sek Island and Admosin Island, situated

about 0.75 mile W of the N end of Sek Island.

9.83 St. Michael’s, the headquarters for the Roman Catholic

mission, stands on the point about 0.5 mile SE of Admosin Island.

9.83 A jetty at Alexishafen, close SW of the mission, has a berthing face of 31.7m and mooring bollards on shore NE and SW

of the jetty ends; there is a depth of 9.1m alongside and vessels

of up to 12,000 tons have berthed at the jetty.

9.83 Ottilien Pass (5°05'S., 145°49'E.), between the N end of Sek

Island and the mainland NW, is deep and clear of dangers in

the fairway, but a reef extends about 0.1 mile off the mainland.

9.83 Anchorage, in depths of 22 to 29m, mud, may be obtained in

the outer part of Sek Harbor, about 0.1 mile W of Sek Island.

9.83 Anchorage may also be obtained, in 26m, in the cove SE of

Admosin Island.

9.83 Bostrem Bay (5°05'S., 145°47'E.), the continuation of the

harbor W, affords good anchorage, but the approach is too tortuous for large vessels to make use of it.

Sek Harbor to Isumrud Strait

9.84 The coast N of Sek Harbor consists of flat land, with

mountain ranges 6 to 8 miles inland. A reef, on which there are

several islets, fronts the coast from Cape Maylum, about 2.75

miles N of Cape Barschtsch (5°04'S., 145°49'E.), nearly to

Cape Juno, about 3 miles farther N. The Matuka River (Ama

River) discharges about 4 miles N of Cape Juno, and is

accessible only by boats when not obstructed by a bar.

9.84 Cape Croisilles (4°51'S., 145°48'E.), about 4 miles farther

NNE, is prominent as the coast here changes to a NW direction. A light is shown from a steel tower, 15m high, with a

white hut at its foot, on Cape Croisilles.

Off-lying Islands and Banks

9.85 Bagabag Island (4°48'S., 146°14'E.), 600m high,

wooded, and volcanic, lies about 23 miles E of Cape Croisilles.

The island, fringed with reefs, is also fringed by reefs lying

from 1 mile to 1.75 miles offshore, with, apparently large gaps

between them except on the N and NE sides. Bagabag Island

was reported to lie 2 miles E or ENE of its charted position.

9.85 New Year Bay, on the SE side of the island, is about 0.75

mile wide, and extends in a NW direction. The bay has depths

of 77m in the entrance and a shelving sandy beach at its head.

9.85 The drying reef, shown on some charts, about 2 miles SE of

the bay entrance, is reported not to exist, but there is a patch,

with a depth of 9.1m, about 1 mile SSE of the entrance. A reef,

on which the sea breaks, lies about 2 miles ENE of the entrance; a reef extends 0.15 mile from the S entrance point.

9.85 Anchorage.—Good anchorage, in 28m, mud and sand, may

be obtained near the head of New Year Bay, by vessels with

local knowledge, sheltered from all winds except those between SE and E, near the head of the bay where there is a

shelving sandy beach with offshore reefs. 
210 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

9.86 Karkar Island (4°39'S., 145°58'E.) lies about 8 miles

NE of Cape Croisilles, and about 10 miles NW of Bagabag

Island. It is densely wooded, conical in shape, and volcanic.

The peak, which is named Mount Uluman, is about 1,280m

high and still active.

9.86 The W side of the island is fringed by a reef; another reef

extends about 4 miles NE from the NE side of the island. Tuale

Islet, about 1.5 miles E of the N extremity of Karkar Island,

and Mangamarike Rock, about 5m high, about 1.75 miles farther ESE, lie on the latter reef. An islet, 18.3m high, lies about

2 miles SE of Mangamarike Rock.

9.86 Anchorage.—On the N side of Tuale Islet there is an opening in the reef through which vessels with local knowledge

may enter and obtain anchorage, in about 35m, about 0.5 mile

SE of the islet.

9.86 Kulili Harbor is entered on the opening in the reef W of

Tuale Islet. Vessels with local knowledge can anchor, in a

depth of about 35m, about 0.5 mile SE of the islet. From the

anchorage a channel, marked by port and starboard beacons,

leads to a jetty suitable for vessels drawing less than 3m, there

is also a small boat jetty.

9.86 A shoal, position approximate, is charted 5 miles E of the S

extremity of Karkar Island, and about 2 miles offshore.

9.86 Karkar Island is reported to be a good radar target at a distance of 19 miles.

9.86 Greig Bank (4°32'S., 146°14'E.), with a depth of 55m, lies

about 12 miles E of Tuale Islet.

Isumrud Strait

9.87 Isumrud Strait (4°47'S., 145°51'E.), separating Bagabag Island and Karkar Island from the mainland, is free from

dangers. Many floating logs and large trees were reported in

the strait.

9.87 Tides—Currents.—A tidal current of about 2 knots in a

NW direction to about 2 knots in a SE direction was reported in

Isumrud Strait.

9.87 It was reported that a 1.5 knot current setting W was encountered between Bagabag Island and Manam Island

(4°06'S., 145°03'E.) and that a 2.5 knot current setting NW was

very apparent between Bagabag Island and Sek Harbor.

Isumrud Strait to Hatzfeldt Harbor

9.88 Mugil Harbor (4°50'S., 145°47'E.), about 2.5 miles

NW of Cape Croisilles, is fronted by Vidari Islet, which is

almost joined to the NW entrance point by a reef.

9.88 Anchorage.—The best shelter during the Northwest Monsoon is close E of the islet, in 24m. During the Southeast Monsoon, the SE corner of the bay is only suitable for small craft

with local knowledge due to the very narrow channel leading to

it.

9.88 Megiar Harbor, narrow and lying parallel to the coast, lies

about 1.5 miles farther NW, and is available to small vessels

with local knowledge. It is protected at its E end by a peninsula

and its reef, and at its W end by an island and its reef.

9.88 Sarang Harbor (4°46'S., 145°42'E.), entered about 8 miles

NW of Cape Croisilles, is formed between the mainland and a

chain of islets and reefs extending for about 2 miles parallel to

the coast; the W islet is connected by a reef to the NW entrance

point of the harbor. Anchorage, in depths of 16.5 to 18.3m, can

be obtained in the harbor by small vessels with local knowledge. There is a berth with more swinging room, sheltered

during the Northwest Monsoon, off a plantation at the SE end

of the chain of islets and reefs.

9.88 A bay, formed between the NW entrance point of Sarang

Harbor and Pallas Point (4°44'S., 145°40'E.), about 2.5 miles

NW, has a grassy plain, covered with trees, on its S side. Two

rivers discharge into the bay; the N river discolors the sea for a

considerable distance seaward. The coast NW of Pallas Point is

mostly wooded and hilly. Anchorage may be obtained in fine

weather close offshore.

9.88 A reef, on which the sea breaks heavily at times, lies about

1.5 miles N of Pallas Point, and 1 mile offshore; it is reported

to have a depth of 1.2m, and is difficult to distinguish due to

the discolored water.

9.88 A shoal, with a depth of 8.2m, lies about 2.5 miles NNW of

Pallas Point. Another shoal, on which there are two rocks, lies

about 4 miles NNW of Pallas Point and 1.5 miles offshore.

9.88 Dove Point (4°35'S., 145°33'E.), about 10 miles NW of

Pallas Point, is flat and wooded, with a grassy hill close within.

Bunabun Harbor, close W of the point, provides reasonably

sheltered anchorage in SW weather for vessels up to 700 tons.

9.88 Neptune Point (4°30'S., 145°27'E.) lies about 7.5 miles NW

of Dove Point. Ulingen Harbor, entered about 2 miles W of

Neptune Point, is a narrow inlet, indenting the coast for about

0.5 mile; it is enclosed by wooded hills on the S and E sides,

and partly on the W. A reef extends about 0.2 mile from the E

entrance point of the harbor. Anchorage may be obtained, in 29

to 37m, N of the above reef, by vessels up to 1,000 tons, with

local knowledge.

9.88 Ulingen Harbor was reported to give a good radar return at a

distance of 10 miles.

9.88 Magnus Point (4°28'S., 145°24'E.), covered with pine trees,

lies about 4 miles NW of Neptune Point.

9.89 Kronprinz Harbor (4°27'S., 145°22'E.), entered

about 2 miles WNW of Magnus Point, has a coral reef extending from the N side of its entrance; inside the entrance there is

a sandy beach with palm trees and several villages on both

sides. Mount Prince Oscar, 1,250m high, about 10 miles W of

Magnus Point, can be seen over the trees on the inner part of

the harbor. A saddle-shaped mountain, half covered with trees,

lies W of the harbor. Anchorage may be obtained by vessels

with local knowledge, with the W entrance bearing 356° and

the E entrance 106°. The depths decrease gradually from 35m

towards the head of the harbor.

9.89 Cape Gourdon (4°23'S., 145°19'E.), about 9 miles NW of

Magnus Point, is a gradually rising grassy hill; then to the

entrance of Hatzfeldt Harbor, about 7 miles W, the coast is

generally flat and bordered by a forest. A light is shown on

Cape Gourdan.

9.89 Samoa Point (4°23'S., 145°16'E.) lies about 3 miles W of

Cape Gourdon; a plain, through which two rivulets discharge,

lies E of the point.

9.89 Caution.—Between Asuramba, about 1.5 miles SSE of Cape

Gourdon, and Dalua Bay (4°21'S., 145°09'E.), 12 miles W, there

are many shoals lying 2 to 3 miles offshore; vessels are cautioned

to keep a good lookout when navigating in these waters.
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 211

Pub. 164

Hatzfeldt Harbor

9.90 Hatzfeldt Harbor (4°23'S., 145°14'E.) lies W of

Pataki Island, which lies about 5 miles W of Samoa Point. The

inner part of the harbor lies between East Point and West Point,

located about 1 mile SW and 1.67 miles WSW of Pataki Island.

Both points are fringed by reef, with the reef off West Point

extending 0.1 mile N.

9.90 Pataki Island (4°22'S., 145°15'E.), wooded and reeffringed, lies about 0.25 mile N of Tombennam Point; the island

was connected to the point by a sandy spit, 213m wide, covered

with coconut trees and scrub. A bank, with depths of 3.7 to

5.5m, extends about 0.75 mile W of Pataki Island. A patch,

with a depth of 6.7m, lies about 0.75 mile W of the same

island; it was reported to lie farther S.

9.90 Schimo Reef, with a least depth of 2.1m, lies about 0.75 mile

N of West Point.

9.90 These reefs are reported to be easily distinguished.

9.90 Chirimosh Island, midway between East Point and West

Point, is fringed N by Hedwigs Reef, extending about 0.2 mile

N. Harbour Reef, which dries, lies 0.12 mile SSE of the S end

of Chirimosh Island. The reef may be passed on either side, but

the channels are narrow, with depths of 5.8 to 8.5m.

9.90 The settlement lies on the E side of the harbor S of East

Point.

9.90 Anchorage.—With NW winds the anchorage E of Chirimosh Island is recommended, but at other times the W part of

the harbor is preferable. The anchorages are reported to be subject to the swell.

9.90 Anchorage can be taken, in a depth of about 20m, E and W

of Chirimosh Island.

9.90 A German naval vessel obtained anchorage with Chirimosh

Island bearing 192° and East Point bearing 147°.

9.90 Directions.—The approach E of Chirimosh Island is reported to be the best. A vessel approached the harbor with

Chirimosh Island bearing 179° until the Nend of Pataki Island

bore 089°, when a course of 230° was steered, passing between

Schimo Reef and the N end of Hedwigs Reef. Then a course of

162° was steered, keeping in mid-channel between West Point

and Chirimosh Island.

Hatzfeldt Harbor to Cape Girgir

9.91 Dugumur Bay (Dogumur Bay) (4°23'S., 145°13'E.),

on the W side of West Point, had depths of about 33m in the

entrance. The E shore is comparatively steep-to, and depths of

less than 11m extend about 0.25 mile off the SW shore.

9.91 West of Hatzfeldt Harbor, the coastal mountains become

lower, forming a continuous chain of grassy hills; near the

coast are numerous palm trees. Farther W, these hills fall to

gently undulating land, after which they rise again, becoming

steeper and more wooded. The coast forms several bays, the

headlands of which are fronted by reefs.

9.91 Vessels are recommended not to approach this coast within 6

miles.

9.91 The Legoarant Islands (4°19'S., 145°01'E.), about 12 miles

NW of Pataki Island, and about 2 miles offshore, are two reeffringed islands, 0.5 mile apart in a NW-SE direction; there is

apparently a clear passage between them. A reef extends 2

miles NW of the group, and there are several reefs in the bight

SE of the islands, but they are generally visible from aloft.

9.91 Bogia Harbor (4°17'S., 144°59'E.), with its entrance about

1.25 miles W of the Legoarant Islands, is fronted by the Neilsen Islets, consisting of two coral islets, Kolakola and Reamuna. The channel leading into the harbor lies between the

islets and the W shore, passing close W of a sunken reef lying

W of Reamuna.

9.91 The S part of the bay consists of two bights, separated by a

tongue of land, from which a reef extends. The settlement is

situated on the W side of the W bight. A coral reef extends

about 0.1 mile E from abreast the settlement, and a small jetty

lies close S of the reef.

9.91 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge, in 46m, in the channel between the islets and the W

shore or, in 14.6 to 18.3m, about 0.1 mile E of the jetty.

9.91 Podbielsky Point (4°15'S., 144°58'E.) lies about 1.5 miles N

of Kolakola Islet. A coral reef, in a depth of 4.9m, lies about

1.5 miles NNW of the point, and 0.35 mile offshore, with a

deep passage between it and the mainland.

9.91 Monumbo Harbor (4°14'S., 144°57'E.), entered about 2.5

miles NW of Podbielsky Point, is exposed to the swell and not

a good anchorage. Malangin Islet lies in the middle of the

harbor, 0.12 mile offshore; a reef extends about 0.1 mile N and

0.1 mile E of the islet.

9.92 Hansa Bay (4°10'S., 144°52'E.) lies between Hansa

Point, about 5.5 miles NW of Podbielsky Point, and Condor

Point (4°09'S., 144°52'E.), about 4.75 miles farther NW. A

light is shown from Condor Point. Laing Islet, flat and densely

wooded, lies 3 miles WNW of Hansa Point, and a spit extends

from its S end to the shore.

9.92 A rock, with a depth of about 0.9m, lies about 0.6 mile NNE

of Laing Islet. A patch, with a depth of 4.6m, lies 1 mile E of

Condor Point.

9.92 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in about

18.3m, with Laing Islet bearing 089°, sheltered from nearly all

winds, by vessels with local knowledge or, in 19.2m, mud, with

Condor Point bearing 061° and the SW end of Laing Islet

bearing 137°.

9.92 Manam Island (4°06'S., 145°03'E.), 1,300m high, lies with

its SW extremity about 6.5 miles NE of Hansa Point, with

Stephan Strait between. The island is conical, volcanic, and

covered with vegetation, being wooded to an elevation of about

762m. In 1936, the volcano was in violent eruption. Several

reports indicate that the island lies between 1.5 and 3 miles N

to NE of its charted position. The island recently was reported

to lie 2.2 miles E of its charted position.

9.92 Aris Island (3°59'S., 144°59'E.), about 3.5 miles N of the

NW extremity of Manam Island, is 215m high, with a flat

summit. The island has been reported to lie about 2 miles S and

1.5 miles SW, of its charted position.

9.92 A local magnetic anomaly has been reported E of Manam

Island.

9.92 Venus Point (4°01'S., 144°41'E.), about 13 miles NW of

Condor Point, has a clump of high casuarina trees on it. Anchorage has been taken, in 10m, 3 miles E of the point and 2

miles offshore.

9.92 The Ramu River, discharging W of Venus Point, has an entrance about 0.2 mile wide, and is not easily identified. It is
212 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

fronted by a bar, with reported depths of 2.4m; inside the

depths increase to 14.6 to 16.5m. Small vessels have ascended

17 miles, but there is a second bar, with a depth of 2.4m, about

6 miles within the entrance.

9.92 Broken Water Bay (3°57'S., 144°37'E.), entered between

Venus Point and Cape Wabusi, about 10 miles NW, has

irregular depths.

9.92 Cape Girgir (3°49'S., 144°34'E.) lies about 4 miles NNW of

Cape Wabusi, and is marked by a light.

The Sepik River

9.93 The Sepik River discharges between Cape Girgir and

Cape Franseski (3°51'S., 144°34'E.), about 1.5 miles SSE; it

is the largest and most important river on the N coast of Papua

New Guinea. The river is navigable 60 miles by large vessels

and 300 miles for vessels drawing 4m; the channel, which has a

width of from 0.15 mile to 1 mile, is subject to continual

change. For a distance of 40 miles up river from the entrance,

there are general depths of 12 to 20m and no sand banks; beyond this there are places with depths of from 4 to 5.5m, and at

300 miles the river expands like a large lake, with depths of

about 2.7m. The maximum variation of the water level is 6.1m.

9.93 The flood season is in April; the low season is in September.

At Ambunti, 235 miles from the mouth, there is a difference of

about 7.6m between flood level and low level.

9.93 The current runs at the rate of from 2.5 to 3 knots and causes

the water to be discolored as far seaward as Kadovar Island and

Bam Island, about 12 to 20 miles offshore.

9.93 Depths—Limitations.—The entrance to the river has sand

banks on either side. The river is best approached by deep draft

vessels with the point on the S bank, about 0.75 mile SW of

Cape Franseski, bearing 215° ahead. Then alter course to 224°

when Cape Franseski is distant 0.35 mile and in range 152°

with Cape Wabusi, about 2 miles SSE.

9.93 The bar will be crossed in depths of about 7.9m with the

point on the SE bank abeam distant 0.15 mile.

9.93 Floating islands of grass, on which small trees grow, constitute a danger in the river; these islands, which reach 0.5 acre

in size, may float down on a ship at anchor, causing it to drag,

in which case they must be cut right through to clear the ship.

9.93 Two naval vessels, with a draft of 2.4m and a length of

32.5m, ascended the Sepik River as far as Ambunti, about 320

miles upstream.

9.93 It was found that the channel generally followed the outside

of the bends, that high wooded banks were an indication of

deeper water, and low grassy bends indicated shallows;

whirlpools and eddies always indicated very deep water. At all

narrow bends, the water is deep at the outside of the bend, even

if mud banks show plainly on the inside. The major danger in

navigating the river is from floating debris and embedded tree

trunks.

9.93 The banks in the lower reaches are dense sago swamps,

sometimes fronted by beds of reeds, but higher up, breadfruit

trees and sago palms abound. Crocodiles, herons, and pigeons

are met with and fish are plentiful, especially eels.

9.93 Mosquitoes, which are encountered in large numbers, and

are at their worst in April, are exceptionally troublesome. The

type of malaria experienced on the river is malignant.

9.93 There are villages, with connecting tracks, near the river

banks. About 35 miles up, the banks become a little higher, and

the ground less swampy, being replaced by stout timber. About

40 miles up is Marienberg mission station, situated on a small

hill. The inhabitants in this vicinity do not live near the river,

but there are villages a few miles back. Angoram, 60 miles up,

situated on a hill, is a government station. The country between

Angoram and Malu is generally swampy and impassable. At

Malu, the first high land begins.

9.93 The inhabitants are becoming more civilized, as nearly all

the region adjacent to the river for a distance of over 300 miles

from its mouth has been brought under government control;

they are generally friendly and eager to trade.

The Schouten Islands

9.94 The Schouten Islands, lying from 13 to 28 miles off

the Papua New Guinea coast, extend from Bam Island, at the E

end, to Vokeo Island, at the W end. The relative position of the

islands is reported to be approximate. Several reports, confirming previous reports, indicate that Kadovar Island lies between

1 and 2 miles SE of its charted position and the other islands lie

between 1 and 2 miles SW of their charted positions.

9.94 Bam Island (3°35'S., 144°50'E.), about 21 miles NE of Cape

Girgir, is an active volcano, 684m high. At the foot of the cone,

the island is covered with trees, which, on the N side, reach

almost to the summit. On the N side, there is cultivation on the

lower slopes, with many coconut groves and a large village,

while the S side is burnt and reddish in color. The island is

steep-to and there is no anchorage.

9.94 A bank, with a depth of 46m, lies 41 miles NE of Bam Island.

9.94 Kadovar Island (3°35'S., 144°36'E.), 364m high, lies 14

miles W of Bam Island. It has a steep wooded crater and is remarkable for several villages on its edge and many large coconut plantations. The island affords no anchorage, and a reef, on

which the sea breaks with any swell, extends 1.5 miles W from

the island.

9.94 Blupblup Island (3°33'S., 144°37'E.), about 14 miles WNW

of Bam Island, is a steep cone, about 401m high, but not as

sharp as Bam Island. The W side of the island is fringed by

reef. Motmot Islet, showing as two hummocks, about 61m

high, and covered with brushwood and coconut palms, lies

about 0.5 mile W of the island; it lies on a reef extending about

1 mile W of the SW end of Blupblup Island. Boluga Islet,

about 0.5 mile N of Motmot Islet, lies on a reef extending

nearly 1 mile SSW from the NW end of Blupblup Island.

9.94 Anchorage.—Small vessels can find exposed anchorage, in

5 to 8m, about 0.5 mile NW of Motmot Islet and 0.35 mile W

of Boluga Islet.

9.94 Small craft up to 30 tons can enter a boat passage close N of

Motmot Islet and find sheltered anchorage inside the reef, in a

depth of 4m. Local knowledge is required as the boat passage

is tortuous. 

 Commercial Imagery—Bam Island, Kadovar 

Island, and Blupblup Island 

http://www.redtailcanyon.com/items/13794.aspx
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 213

Pub. 164

9.94 Viai Island (Wei) (3°23'S., 144°26'E.), about 12 miles NW

of Blupblup Island, is about 218m high, conical, wooded, and

uninhabited. A depth of 149m is reported to lie about 4 miles

W of the island.

9.94 Koil Island (3°20'S., 144°14'E.) lies about 12 miles W of

Viai Island. A reef extends about 0.2 mile S from the SE end of

the island; a detached reef extends 0.25 mile W from the

extremity of this reef. Anchorage for small vessels may be obtained, in 13 to 27m, between the detached reef and the shore.

9.94 Vokeo Island (3°27'S., 144°07'E.), about 7.5 miles NW of

Koil Island, is about 610m high, densely wooded, steep, and

cliffy. The island presents a saddle-shaped appearance from

NW, having two peaks with a slight depression between them.

There are several villages on the island.

9.94 Vokeo Island was reported to be a good radar target at a

distance of 24 miles.

9.94 Anchorage.—Anchorage can usually be obtained by small

craft up to 60 tons in the bights of the reef, off the several

villages around the island, according to the prevailing wind. 

9.94 Caution.—An extensive reef lies SW of a line joining Koil

Island and Vokeo Island.

Cape Girgir to Cape Pus

9.95 The coast from Cape Girgir (3°49'S., 144°34'E.) to

Cape Terebu, about 44 miles WNW, is flat, rising inland to a

chain of hills, 427 to 549m high, about 35 miles W of Cape

Girgir.

9.95 Cape Terebu (3°37'S., 143°51'E.) is a steep, thickly-wooded

hill, about 140m high, which, from a distance, appears as an

island. West of the cape, the coast is hilly as far as Humbolt

Bay, a distance of about 190 miles.

9.95 The shore for about 5 miles E of Cape Terebu is dark sandy

beach. Krauel Bay is entered about 10 miles E of the cape.

9.95 Cape Moem (3°33'S., 143°42'E.), about 9 miles WNW of

Cape Terebu, is the extremity of a narrow peninsula projecting

2 miles N from the coast. A light is shown from the N end of

Cape Moem. Depths of less than 5.5m extend about 0.2 mile N

of the cape.

9.95 The stretch of coast between Cape Moem and Cape Girgir is

named the Hansemann Coast. This coast was reported to lie

about 2 miles S of its charted position.

9.95 Boram Bay, with general depths of 7.3 to 16.5m, is entered

between Cape Moem and Cape Boram, about 2.5 miles WSW.

9.95 Sixdiv Shoal, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about 2 miles NNW

of Cape Moem. Byrne Shoal, with a depth of 4m, lies about 1

mile NNE of Cape Boram.

Wewak Harbor (3°34'S., 143°38'E.)

World Port Index No. 56738

9.96 Wewak Harbor is entered between Cape Boram and

Wewak Point, the E extremity of the Wewak Peninsula, nearly

2 miles WNW. A reef, marked at its seaward end by a lighted

beacon, extends 0.55 mile NNE of Mission Point, located

Courtesy of Mr. Jack Lockwood, U.S. Geological Survey

Bam Island
214 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

nearly 1 mile WSW of Cape Boram. A drying reef extends

about 0.25 mile W of Cape Boram. A wreck, in a depth of

6.4m, lies about 0.5 mile NW of Cape Boram. There are

general depths of 7.3 to 16.5m in Wewak Harbor, on either side

of the reef extending NNE of Mission Point.

9.96 Aspect.—A wharf lies at the end of a pier extending about

0.3 mile NE from Mission Point. The wharf is 73m long on its

E side, with a depth of 6.7m alongside (1993), and can accommodate vessels up to 5,000 grt. The wharf is expected to be

extended (2004) by 50 to 100m to support large tuna vessels.

There is a mooring buoy off the SE corner of this pier and there

is a dolphin off the NE end. Berthing may become hazardous

during the monsoon season. 

9.96 A conspicuos building stands on the shore 1 mile W of Cape

Boram. A radio mast stands at the base of the Wewak Peninsula 0.5 mile SW of Wewak Point. 

9.96 Pilotage.—Pilotage is not compulsory but a pilot is available

from Madang with 48 hours notice. Pilots board about 2 miles

NE of Wewak Point.

9.96 The vessel’s ETA should be sent not less than 12 hours

before arrival via Port Moresby Radio or Rabaul Radio and

confirmed not more than 5 hours and not less than 4 hours prior

to arrival.

9.96 Anchorage.—Large vessels normally anchor, in 14.6 to

16.5m, about 1.25 miles WNW of Cape Boram. Smaller vessels can anchor closer to the Wewak Peninsula. Care must be

taken to avoid two foul areas situated 0.5 mile SSW and 0.7

mile S of Wewak point. In bad SE weather, these anchorages

can become exposed and uncomfortable; better anchorage can

be found 0.5 mile SW of Cape Boram.

9.96 Directions.—Approaching from E, steer for the highest tree

on Raboin Islet, bearing 282°, until Cape Moem bears 207°.

Then steer for the S shoulder of the cliff on the S side of

Wewak Point, bearing 254°, which will lead about 0.6 mile N

of Byrne Shoal. 

9.97 West Harbor (3°33'S., 143°37'E.) is entered between

the NW point of the Wewak Peninsula and Cape Wom

(3°31'S., 143°36'E.), about 2.25 miles NW. A drying reef extends about 0.2 mile off the W side of the Wewak Peninsula. A

shoal, with a depth of 7m, lies 0.65 mile WNW of the NW

point of the Wewak Peninsula; an unexamined patch, with a

depth of 6.1m, lies about 0.75 mile farther WNW. A 5.5m

patch lies 0.35 mile E of Cape Wom.

9.97 Raboin Islet (3°30'S., 143°36'E.) lies nearly 0.75 mile NE of

the Wom Peninsula; there are depths of 15.8 to 20m in the

passage between the islet and the peninsula. The islet is fringed

by reef extending about 0.2 mile from its N and NE sides.

9.97 Dallman Harbor (3°30'S., 143°34'E.), entered between the

NW side of Cape Wom and Cape Pus, about 3.25 miles NW, is

sheltered SE by the Wom Peninsula, E by Raboin Islet, and N

by Muschu Island. The harbor has comparatively steep-to

shores, with general depths of 11 to 26m; depths of less than

9.1m extend nearly 0.5 mile NNW of the SE entrance point of

the bay. Sheltered anchorage may be obtained by vessels with

local knowledge in Dallman Harbor, except during NW winds.

9.97 Cape Pus resembles Cape Girgir, being flat and wooded with

casuarina; the cape is backed by a lagoon.

Off-lying Islands and Dangers

9.98 Muschu Island (3°25'S., 143°35'E.) is separated from

the mainland NW of Cape Pus by Muschu Strait, which is deep

and nearly 1.5 miles wide. The island is over 61m high, fertile,

and well populated.

9.98 Cape Samein (3°26'S., 143°33'E.), the SW extremity of the

island, is marked by a light; a shoal, with a depth of 4.5m at its

outer end, extends about 0.25 mile W of the cape. Cape Barabar, the E extremity of the island, lies 5.5 miles ENE of Cape

Samein. A shoal, with a least depth of 5.2m, lies between 0.7

mile and 1.25 miles ESE of Cape Barabar. A 4.6m patch lies

near the 200m curve, about 3.25 miles ESE of the same cape.

9.98 Kairiru Island, close N of Muschu Island, is conical shaped

and wooded; from N, it appears to rise gradually to flat-topped

summit, 760m high, near its center. Kairiru Island was reported

to give a good radar return from a distance of 25 miles.

9.98 A prominent rock , 9.1m high, lies about 0.2 mile from the E

extremity of the island; it resembles a boat under sail.

9.98 Kairiru Strait, separating Muschu Island and Kairiru Island,

is deep in the fairway, and reefs fringe its shores. A rocky bank,

with a depth of 7.9m at its outer end, extends about 0.25 mile S

from the S end of Kairiru Island, reducing the passage to a

width of about 0.1 mile. Patches, with depths of 9.7m and

7.9m, lie in the E part of the strait, about 1 and 2 miles, respectively, E of the rocky bank.

9.98 Victoria Bay (3°20'S., 143°31'E.) indents the W side of

Kairiru Island for about 1 mile, and its entrance is about 1 mile

wide. There are depths of 22 to 31m in the central part of the

bay. Depths of less than 5.5m extend up to 0.15 mile offshore

in the E side of the bay, then deepen sharply to over 18.3m. In

the S part of the bay, depths shoal gradually to depths of 5.5m

0.15 mile offshore.

9.98 Anchorage.—Victoria Bay provides snug anchorage with

good anchorage in the SE season. Vessels up to 60 tons can

anchor, in a depth of 7m, close to the shore at the head of the

bay and also in the S corner. There is a salt hot spring on the S

side of the bay. 

9.99 Yuo Islet, Karasau Islet (Keresau Islet), and Unei Islet

(Buni Islet) lie in the W approach to Muschu Strait. Yuo Islet

lies about 3 miles WNW of Cape Samein, the SW extremity of

Muschu Island, and is very low, covered with coconut palms,

and inhabited. The channel between Yuo Islet and Muschu

Island is deep and free of dangers. A rock, existence doubtful,

is charted about 1 mile NW of YuoIslet.

9.99 Karasau Islet, wooded and inhabited, lies nearly 1.5 miles

WNW of Yuo Islet, and is about 1.5 miles long in a WSW-ESE

direction.

9.99 Unei Islet lies about 1.75 miles WNW of Karasau Islet, to

which it is almost connected by foul ground; foul ground extends about 0.5 mile WNW of Unei Islet. A light is shown from

Unei Islet.

9.99 Walis Island (3°14'S., 143°18'E.), 21m high, densely

wooded, and marked by a light, 6m in elevation on its S point,

lies about 11 miles WNW of the W extremity of Kairiru Island.

A reef, marked by breakers, extends about 2.5 miles E of the

island. Foul ground extends about 1 mile N of the E part of the

island and about 1 mile S of the W end of the island.
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 215

Pub. 164

9.99 Tarawai Island, also densely wooded, lies close WNW of

Walis Island, from which it is separated by a passage, 0.35 mile

wide, with a least depth of 5.8m.

9.99 Anchorage.—Protected anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge in a small bay on the SE side of

Tarawai Island, remaining clear of a bank, with a depth of

4.3m, extending about 0.2 mile SE of the W entrance point of

the bay.

Cape Pus to Aitape Roads

9.100 The coast between Cape Pus (3°29'S., 143°33'E.) and

the boundary between Papua New Guinea and Irian Jaya (the

141st meridian), about 163 miles WNW, is named the Finsch

Coast; it is high and densely wooded in places, with many

villages. There is no fringing reef as far as Lapar Point

(3°07'S., 142°21'E.), about 75 miles WNW of Cape Pus; anchorage may be obtained from 1 mile to 2 miles offshore. The

coast here, rising in places to steep cliffs, is backed by hills

from 183 to 244m high; farther inland, Mount Turu rises to an

altitude of 1,219m, about 16 miles SW of Cape Pus. Mount

Sapau rises to an altitude of 1,432m, about 18 miles SE of

Lapar Point.

9.100 The sea is of a bright to dark green appearance for a distance

of 3 or 4 miles off the coast, except for places where large

rivers color it yellow. Blue water is seen close to the coast only

between Robide Point, about 83 miles WNW of Lapar Point,

and Hook Germania, about 8.5 miles farther W. The discharge

from the Tami River discolors the water W of Hook Germania.

9.100 The mouths of rivers, lagoon, or brooks should not be used

for bearings, as their positions cannot be depended on.

9.100 Good anchorage may be obtained during the Southeast Trade

Winds all along the coast between Cape Pus and Altabe Roads.

During the Northwest Monsoon, anchorage may be obtained

between the off-lying islands.

9.100 The Hawain River (3°27'S., 153°05'E.) discharges about

4.25 miles WNW of Cape Pus; depths of less than 5.5m and

11m extend about 0.5 and 0.75 mile, respectively, off its

mouth.

9.100 Bogim Harbor, entered between the Hawain River and a

point, about 3 miles WNW, has depths of less than 11m extending up to 1.5 miles offshore.

9.100 Cape Karawop (3°25'S., 143°25'E.) lies about 2 miles

WNW of the W entrance point of Bogim Harbor. A conspicuous radio tower stands on the coast about 0.75 mile W of

Cape Karawop.

9.101 Aitape Roads (3°09'S., 149°29'E.) (World Port Index

No. 53280), the area enclosed by Seleo Island, Ali Island, and

Tumleo Island, E of Lapar Point (3°07'S., 142°21'E.), is

known as Aitape Roads. The harbor is located W of Soleo

Island. Aitape Roads provides shelter for all classes of vessels.

9.101 Lapar Point, the W entrance point of Aitape Roads, is the

termination of a spur of a hill, easily identified by black rocks

and stones lying in the vicinity. The wooded land in the vicinity is lower than the coast E of it, and the mountain ranges and

hills backing the point are also lower than those E.

9.101 Many villages are on the mainland and the islands. Aitape,

the principal settlement, lies near Rohm Point, about 1 mile SE

of Lapar Point. A mission and wharf lie about 5 miles ESE of

Rohm Point, and a signal station lies about 1 mile farther ESE.

9.101 Pilotage is not compulsory. Pilot boards vessels 0.5 miles S

of Tumleo Island. An airfield lies about 1 mile S of the wharf.

9.101 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents set E and W at a rate

of about 0.75 knot. The tidal range is approximately 1.4m.

9.101 Caution.—Foul ground extends from a position about 3.5

miles ESE of Seleo Island for about 8 miles ESE, lying about

2.5 miles offshore and parallel to the coast.

9.101 A reef was reported about 1 mile NW of the W end of the

above-described foul ground.

Islands and Dangers

9.102 Seleo Island (3°09'S., 142°29'E.), 30m high and

wooded, lies about 8.5 miles ESE of Lapar Point, and nearly 3

miles offshore; the reef, fringing the island, extends about 0.25

mile from its N side. Angel Islet lies about 0.4 mile S of Seleo

Island, on the W side of a detached reef extending 0.5 mile SE

of it. The channel between this reef and the reef fringing Seleo

Island is nearly 0.2 mile wide, with depths of 16.5 to 55m in

the fairway.

9.102 Babelsberg Strait (3°10'S., 142°28'E.) is about 2.5 miles

wide between the reef on which Angel Islet lies and the mainland. The strait leads into Aitape Roads, but is not recommended due to shoals in the fairway.

9.102 On the N side of the strait, Saer Laeing, a shoal, in a depth of

3m, lies about 0.55 mile SW of Angel Islet, and Dalton Shoal,

in a depth of 10.4m, lies 0.65 mile farther SW. Starkey Shoal

and Reeves Shoal, with depths of 5.5 and 7.3m, lie, respectively, about 1.25 and 2.25 miles W of Angel Islet. Robertson

Shoal, in a depth of 7.9m, lies about 1.5 miles farther WNW.

9.102 McGee Shoal (3°08'S., 142°26'E.), with a depth of 3.4m,

lies about 3 miles W of the W extremity of Seleo Island.

9.102 On the S side of the strait, Samoi Shoal, with a least depth of

2.4m, lies about 0.5 mile from the S shore, SSW of Angel Islet.

Cole Shoal, with 7.9m, lies about 1 mile WNW of Samoi

Shoal, and about 0.3 mile offshore.

9.102 Ali Island (3°08'S., 142°28'E.), a wooded island, 37m high,

lies about 1 mile NW of Seleo Island; reefs and shoals extend

up to 0.2 mile off the island. The channel between the two

islands is reduced to a width of about 0.25 mile by Middle Reef

and other dangers. Middle Reef lies on the S side of the channel, about 0.2 mile W of the reef extending W from Seleo

Island. A shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, and Tapel Rock, with a

depth of 3.4m, lie about 0.3 mile N and 0.4 mile W, respectively, of the N extremity of Middle Reef.

9.102 Sang Shoal, steep-to and in a depth 5.5m, lies about 1 mile

WNW of the N end of Ali Island. Warrego Shoal, steep-to, and

in a depth of 10.7m, lies about 0.5 mile farther NW.

9.103 Tumleo Island (Tamara Island) (3°07'S., 142°24'E.),

about 2.5 miles ENE of Rohm Point, has a conspicuous hill,

63m high, at its NW extremity. The channel between Tumleo

Island and Rohm Point is encumbered with dangers.

9.103 Tumleo Rock (Tamara Rock), 15m high, with some small trees

on it, lies about 1.25 miles W of the NW extremity of Tumleo

Island. It lies at the N end of a reef, with depths of less than 1.8m,

extending 0.35 mile SSE of the rock. Arak Rock, with less than

1.8m, lies about 0.5 mile E of Tumleo Rock; Knight Shoals, two
216 Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 

Pub. 164

patches with depths of 8.5m and 7.6m, lie 0.45 and 0.65 mile,

respectively, S of Arak Rock. Pultata Rock, 0.9m high, lies 0.35

mile SW of Tumleo Rock; Lamak Rock, 0.6m high, and Wolpei

Rock, with less than 1.8m, lie about 0.2 mile and 0.4 mile,

respectively SSE of Pultata Rock.

9.103 Stein Reef, 1.2m high, lies about 0.5 mile ENE of Rohm

Point. Hunter Rocks, 1.5m high, lie on the coastal bank, about

1.25 miles SE of Rohm Point.

9.103 Anchorage.—The best shelter during the Southeast Trade

Winds is in depths of 24 to 31m, in Aitape Harbor, close W of

Seleo Island. Anchorage may also be obtained W of the S end

of Tumleo Island during the SE season in less depths and off

the SE end of the island, in depths of 14.6 to 18.3m, in other

seasons of the year.

9.103 A certain amount of shelter can be obtained in 5.5 to 10m in

the bight S of Rohm Point, where cargo can be handled by surf

boats during the greater part of the year.

9.103 There are no pilots and fuel and water are not available.

9.103 Directions.—From any direction, the hill on Tumleo Island

is a good landmark and first appears as a cone above the horizon. There are several passages to the roads and harbor, the

passage between Seleo Island and Angel Islet is used by the

mail boats and is the one recommended.

9.103 The passage N of Seleo Island, though narrow, is sometimes

used by vessels approaching from E; a vessel bound for the

harbor may passon either side of Middle Reef, the channel to

the E is narrow but well-defined and clear of dangers, while

that to the W is encumbered by Tapel Rock.

9.103 The passage between Tumelo Island and Ali Island is deep

and nearly 4 miles wide, and may be used by vessels proceeding W from Aitape Harbor or coming from W, taking care

to avoid the previously-described dangers.

9.103 There are clear passages close W of Tumleo Island, and on

either side of Stein Reef, which may be used.

Aitape Harbor to Irian Jaya

9.104 Aitape Harbor (3°08'S., 142°21'E.) consists a pier

which extends 0.12 mile NE from the head of the bight S of

Rohm Point and has three berths at its head. Berth No. 1 lies on

the SE side of the pier and has a length of 18m, with a depth of

4.3m. Berth No. 2 and Berth 3 lie on the NW side of the pier

and have a length of 8m, with a depth of 4.3m.

9.104 The coast between Lapar Point (3°07'S., 142°21'E.) and

Cape Concordia, about 69 miles WNW, presents very few distinctive features. About 7 miles WNW of Lapar Point, a reef,

with a depth of 5.8m, on which the sea breaks in heavy

weather, lies about 0.75 mile off the mouth of the Yalingi

River.

9.104 The entrance to Sissano Lagoon (Norovu Lagoon) lies about

16.5 miles WNW of Lapar Point. Between the entrance, and a

position about 10 miles WNW, depths of 18.3m or less extend

up to 2.25 miles offshore.

9.104 At Prittwitz Point (2°55'S., 141°50'E.), about 17 miles

WNW of the entrance to Sissano Lagoon, a range of mountains, 373m high, approaches the coast and terminates in steep

rocks, 30.5m high. About 8.5 miles farther WNW, a coral

patch, in a depth of 12m, lies about 1.5 miles offshore. The

village of Leitre, with a lagoon, lies 12 miles WNW of Prittwitz Point.

9.104 The Neumayer River (2°45'S., 141°27'E.) discharges about

10 miles ESE of Cape Concordia; depths of less than 11m

extend up to 1 mile offshore for about 7 miles ESE of the river

mouth. Anchorage by vessels with local knowledge may be

obtained about 0.5 mile WNW of the river mouth. Two islands,

41 and 13.7m high, respectively, to the tops of the trees, lie

about 0.5 mile offshore, and 2 miles SE of Cape Concordia.

Two rocks, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie about 1.25 and

2.5 miles ENE of Narimuru Island, and about 0.5 and 1 mile,

respectively, offshore.

9.104 Daumlinge Bay (2°42'S., 141°19'E.) is entered between

Narimuru Islet and Cape Concordia, about 1.25 miles NW. Anchorage, sheltered from NW and N winds, may be obtained by

vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 9.1 to 18.3m.

9.105 Vanimo Harbor (2°41'S., 141°18'E.) (World Port

Index No. 53282) is entered between Cape Concordia

(2°40'S., 141°18'E.) and Vanimo Point, about 1.25 miles

WNW; reefs extend about 0.25 mile N from both entrance

points. Cape Concordia, the N extremity of a peninsula, rises to

an elevation of 82.6m and is densely wooded; it is marked by a

light. There is a village and mission station on the W side of

the harbor, and the government station of Vanimo lies in the SE

corner of the harbor. At the station, a causeway projects from

the shore. At the head of the causeway is a wharf 19m long,

with a depth alongside of 4.9m. The wharf is sheltered, though

occasionally a swell is felt alongside. A wreck, with a depth of

5.5m, lies 0.15 mile WNW of the wharf. An airfield is situated

S of Vanimo.

9.106 Mount Hartmann (2°46'S., 141°15'E.), about 610m

high, with a cone-shaped summit, is conspicuous about 6 miles

SSW of Cape Concordia.

9.106 The depths in the harbor decrease regularly from 31m in the

entrance towards the head of the harbor.

9.106 Anchorage.—Large vessels can anchor in any part of the

harbor in convenient depths, with good holding ground. Small

vessels anchor near either corner of the harbor, dependent on

the monsoon, fairly protected from the swell.

Entrance to Sissano Lagoon
Sector 9. North Coast of Papua New Guinea —East Cape to East Boundary of Irian Jaya 217

Pub. 164

9.106 For vessels approaching from the E and keeping along the

coast, Narimuru Islet and Buru Islet form the best guide to the

vicinity of the entrance. Vessels can enter without any difficulty by keeping midway between the entrance points; the

reefs fringing the entrance points should be given a berth of at

least 0.2 mile.

9.106 The coast between Vanimo Point and Robide Point (2°36'S.,

141°04'E.), about 14 miles W, is flat from 1 mile to 3 miles

inland, and consists of swampy ground and bushes; it is fronted

by a steep-to coral reef, drying nearly as far W as the point.

Farther inland is a range of hills.

9.106 West of Robide Point, the spurs of Mount Bougainville

approach the coast, which falls steeply to the sea, and the fringing reef becomes narrower. Mount Bougainville (2°39'S.,

141°02'E.), 1,204m high, conical, and with a flat summit, lies

about 4 miles SSW of Robide Point, and is conspicuous from

N or NW.

9.106 A vessel took anchorage in a bay 6 miles E of Robide Point,

in a depth of 14.6m, about 0.2 mile from the sandy beach. The

bay is easily recognized by an off-lying rock; in the E part of

the bay is a 4.6m patch, lying about 0.25 mile offshore.

9.107 Bougainville Bay (2°37'S., 141°01'E.), about 2.5

miles W of Robide Point, is about 1 mile wide at its entrance.

The village of Wutung lies on the W side of the bay, near a

creek discharging into the S side. Approaching the bay from E,

the cliffs immediately E of the entrance are steep and conspicuous.

9.107 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge, in depths of 18.3 to 22m. A vessel anchored, in 20.1m,

coral sand, about 0.2 mile offshore. Landing can be difficult if

there is a heavy NW swell. 

9.107 The 141st meridian is the boundary between Papua New

Guinea and Irian Jaya. The E boundary of Irian Jaya is marked

on the coast at the foot of a steep rocky cliff by a white stone

pyramid, visible from seaward.
Pub. 164

10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba

10.0Additional chart coverage may be found in NGA/DLIS Catalog of Maps, Charts, and Related Products (Unlimited Distribution).

SECTOR 10 — CHART INFORMATION
221

Pub. 164

SECTOR 10 

NORTH COAST OF IRIAN JAYA—EAST BOUNDARY OF IRIAN JAYA TO TANJUNG 

YAMURSBA

10.0 Plan.—This sector describes the N coast of Irian Jaya from

the E boundary of Irian Jaya, at the 141st E meridian, to

Tanjung Yamursba (0°20'S., 132°25'E.). The sector includes

Teluk Cenderawasih (2°20'S., 135°30'E.). The arrangement

of the sector is from E to W. 

General Remarks

10.1 The coast of Irian Jaya between its E boundary and

Teluk Cenderawasih, except for the E end, is low and monotonous, with a continuous line of trees behind the beach. The

line of trees is broken in places by small clumps of casuarina

trees or coconut plantations and by the mouths of rivers; behind

this is generally a wide plain, rising into hilly land, formed by

the spurs of mountains.

10.1 The entire area is sparsely populated.

10.1 Winds—Weather.—Between the E boundary and Teluk

Cenderawasih, as well as in Teluk Cenderawasih, the monsoons do not show the great difference between wet and dry

weather, which is such a strong feature for the middle and W

parts of the archipelago. The heavy showers of rain fall mostly

in July and August. 

10.1 During July, August, and September NW winds predominated in one year, and NE winds in another. These winds,

however, were then not nearly as strong as in other seasons of

the year and were nearly always varied in the evening by land

breezes, which continued until 2200; after that it is calm,

sometimes with much rain, until the early morning. During

December, January, and February the NW winds are very

strong day and night; they bring little rain, but cause a troublesome sea. April, May, October, and November are transition

months. 

10.1 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents are only noticeable off

the mouths of rivers. Elsewhere, the monsoon current sets E

during the Northwest Monsoon and W during the Southeast

Monsoon. This current is weak close to the coast between

Teluk Yos Sudarso and Teluk Tenahmerah; however, there is

sometimes a W or E current of from 2 to 3 knots after strong E

or W winds, respectively.

10.1 The greatest rate in the open sea was only 1.5 knots, except

on one occasion when a set of 2.5 knots was observed.

10.1 Caution.—Aids to navigation in this area are reported to be

unreliable. They may be missing, unlit, or out of position.

Eastern Boundary of Irian Jaya to Teluk Yos Sudarso

10.2 The coast between the E boundary of Irian Jaya, at the

141st meridian, to Germania Hook (Hoek Germania)

(2°37'S., 140°56'E.), about 4.5 miles W, is high and covered

with vegetation. Germania Hook is the steep termination of a

spur of mountain, 310m high, about 1.75 miles SE. A knob,

785m high, a spur of the Bougainville Mountains, is

conspicuous about 5 miles ESE of Germania Hook.

10.2 The Tami River, navigable only by boats, discharges close W

of Germania Hook. From seaward the mouth of the river is

easily recognized by the quantity of timber washed up on the

coast, particularly W of the mouth. Anchorage off the mouth of

the river can be recommended only in fine weather, and is dangerous during the Northwest Monsoon.

10.2 The coast between the mouth of the Tami River and Tanjong

Jar, about 8 miles W, is inaccessible due to the surf. Sko Sai,

about 2 miles W of the entrance to the Tami River, is one of

several villages along this coast, and is conspicuous due to a

temple with a high conical roof.

Teluk Yos Sudarso

10.3 Teluk Yos Sudarso (Teluk Jos Sudarso) (Humboldt

Baai) is entered between Tanjung Jar (Tanjung Djar) (2°36'S.,

140°47'E.) and Tanjung Suaja (Tanjung Soeaja), about 4.5

miles NNW. Teluk Jayapura (Hollandia Baai) and Teluk Imbi

(Imbi Baai) occupy the NW part of Teluk Yos Sudarso. Most of

the commercial activity is at the head of Teluk Jayapura, where

the city of Jayapura (Hollandia Haven) is situated. Teluk

Yautefa (Jautefa Bay), at the head of the bay, has a least depth

of 3m in the entrance, between drying sand banks.

10.3 Winds—Weather.—The monsoons are little felt in and off

Teluk Yos Sudarso. By day, there is a sea breeze; in the evenings there is a land breeze, which dies down about 2200.

During the Southeast Monsoon, the sea breeze starts fairly suddenly at 1000 and abates just as quickly at 1600. After a calm

period, the land breeze sets in after sunset. In the months of

Copyright http://www.info-indo.com

Teluk Yautefa (Jautefa Bay) (foreground) and Teluk Yos 

Sudarso (Humboldt Bay) (background) from NW
222 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

June and July, squalls with a force of 5 to 6, coming suddenly

from E, must be reckoned with. Strong gusts of wind occur

occasionally in the bay, probably due to the proximity of

Pegunungan Cycloop (Cycloop Mountains).

10.3 In Teluk Jayapura, variable winds predominate throughout

the year; from May to August inclusive, the winds are mainly E

by day, during the other months they are mostly NW to NE by

E, and mostly W in the evenings. The humidity at 92 per cent is

very high. 

10.3 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Teluk Jayapura is 1.2m

at mean higher HW and mean lower HW.

10.3 The tidal currents in Teluk Jayapura are weak, but there is

nearly always a slight S current between Entsjau and the coast

which must be allowed for when berthing at the wharves.

10.3 Aspect.—Tanjung Jar (Tanjung Djar) (2°36'S., 140°47'E.),

the SE entrance point of the bay, is the N termination of a

mountain which rises to an elevation of 318m about 1 mile

SSE.

10.3 A peak, 504m high, backs Teluk Yautefa, about 7 miles

WSW of Tanjung Jar. Leimok, a hill, 222m high, about 4 miles

N of the peak, is the N termination of a yellowish ridge; there

is a prominent radio mast on its summit.

10.3 Tanjung Suaja (Tanjung Soeadja) (2°32'S., 140°45'E.), the

NW entrance point of the bay, is the SE termination of a peninsula which attains an elevation of 204m about 0.5 mile WNW.

A light, from which a racon transmits, is shown on Tanjung

Suaja. Several radio towers are situated about 1.25 miles NNW

of Tanjung Suaja.

10.3 Tanjung Kassu (Tanjung Kassoe), steep and rocky, lies about

1 mile SW of Tanjung Jar. Sibir, a rocky islet, is conspicuous

about 0.25 mile farther SW. Pulau Pun (Poen Island), about

0.75 mile SW of Tanjung Kassu, is covered with vegetation.

10.3 The S and W shores of Teluk Yo Sudarso, to Hamadi, an islet

about 4.5 miles WNW of Tanjung Jar, are sandy and covered

with coconut palms.

10.3 Caution.—Cemperia (Tjemperia), a shoal, in a depth of

6.7m, lies about 1.5 miles NW of Tanjung Jar.

10.3 A shoal, with a depth of 5.5m, lies in the N approach to

Teluk Yos Sudarso, about 2.5 miles NNE of Tanjung Suaja, and

about 1.5 miles offshore.

10.3 Nembawewe, a shoal, with a least depth of 3.2m, lies about

1.5 miles SSW of Tanjung Suaja; a light marks the E side of

the shoal. The N side of this shoal is marked by a black buoy.

Seroibi, with a swept depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.7 mile W of

Nembawewe. Depths of 9.1m lie between the two shoals.

10.3 A 2.7m shoal, and a 3.2m shoal lie about 0.8 mile NE and

1.25 miles E, respectively, of Hamadi; other shoals lie farther

W. A shoal, with a least depth of 2.3m and marked by piles, lies

about 0.75 mile ESE of Tanjung Yogur, which lies about 1.25

miles N of Hamadi.

10.3 Several shoals, with depths of less than 5.5m, extend up to 1

mile off the entrance to Teluk Yautefa.

Teluk Jayapura and Teluk Imbi

10.4 Teluk Jayapura (Hollandia Baai) (2°32'S.,

140°43'E.) and Teluk Imbi (Imbi Baai), in the NW part of

Teluk Yos Sudarso, are separated by Tanjung Kayu Batu

(Tanjung Kajoe Batoe), a high point. Tanjung Yogur (Tanjung

Jogoer) (2°33'S., 140°43'E.), on the S side of Teluk Jayapura,

lies about 2 miles WSW of Tanjung Suaja, and is the termination of a spur from Jarremoh, a prominent mountain about

0.5 mile WSW.

Madurau (Madoerau) (2°33'S., 140°44'E.) and Entsyau

(Entsjau), two rather high islands, lie 0.35 mile ENE and 0.2

mile NE, respectively, of Tanjung Yogur. A reef, on which the

sea breaks in heavy weather, extends about 0.2 mile NW of

Entsyau. There is a lighted buoy, reported missing, moored on

the NW edge of this reef. A detached drying reef lies about

0.25 mile W of Entsyau.

10.4 Teluk Jayapura and its approaches, and the S part of Teluk

Imbi, have been wire-dragged to a depth of 14m. A patch in the

middle of Teluk Imbi, nearly 0.5 mile NE of Tanjung Kayu

Batu, has been wire-dragged to a depth of 12m. Lights, in

range 255°, lead to the anchorage at the head of Teluk

Jayapura. A lighted buoy, moored 0.3 mile ENE of the front

range light, marks the edge of a reef off the N shore in the bay.

The reef was reported to be extending S.

10.5 Jayapura (Hollandia) (2°32'S., 140°43'E.) (World

Port Index No. 53285) extends along the shores of Jayapura

Bay and 7 miles inland. Jayapura is the administrative capital

of Irian Jaya.

Teluk Jayapura (Hollandia Baai)
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 223

Pub. 164

10.5 Tides—Currents.—Tidal currents in Teluk Jayapura are

weak, but there is nearly always a slight S current between

Entsyau and the coast which must be allowed for when berthing.

10.5 Depths—Limitations.—Oil Pier, in the NW corner of Jayapura Bay, is a concrete jetty, in poor condition 32m long with a

depth of 4.9m at the accessible berthing section. This berth is

suitable for mooring vessels up to 2,500 grt only.

10.5 No. 1 Wharf is 132m long, with a depth of 8.8m alongside; a

vessel of 20,000 grt can berth there.

10.5 No. 2 Wharf is 116m long, with a depth 5.8m alongside.

10.5 Berthing for tankers is provided by two mooring buoys, in a

depth 13.7m. Cargo is discharged over the stern by floating

pipeline to storage tanks ashore. 

10.5 Aspect.—The village of Imbi, built on piles, stands on the E

side of Teluk Imbi. There are a number of fishing traps in Teluk

Imbi.

10.5 Beacons, with white triangular topmarks, in range 000°, lead

to the tanker berth on the W side of Teluk Imbi. A can buoy

marks a 9.1m patch, about 0.1 mile S of the front range beacon.

A cross range, consisting of two similar beacons, in range

276°, is situated about 0.3 mile N of Tanjung Kayu Batu.

Another beacon, close SE of the E beacon of this range, is on

the edge of a 4.6m shoal extending from the shore reef.

10.5 The offshore pipeline berth, on the W side of Teluk Imbi, is

in depths of 13.7m and consists of two stern mooring buoys. A

group of oil tanks stand on the shore about 0.1 mile W of the

berth.

10.5 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory and available 24 hours

for vessels over 70 grt. Vessels should send their ETA to the

Port Authority 72 hours, 48 hours, and 24 hours prior to arrival.

Requests for pilots should be sent 6 hours prior to arrival. The

Port Authority can be contacted on VHF channels 12 and 16,

while the oil terminals can be contacted on VHF channels 16,

9, and 19. Pilots board in position 2°32.2'S, 140°43.4'E. The

harbormaster’s office is situated at the head of the harbor.

10.5 On arrival at the entrance to Teluk Yos Sudarso, vessels are

usually advised by VHF to anchor SSW of Tanjung Suaja or

proceed to the pilot boarding point.

10.5 The harbor limits of Teluk Jayapura are lines joining Jarremoh and Tanjung Suaja to the NW extremity of Madurau.

10.5 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be taken, in depths of 40 to

46m, mud and sand, near the head of Teluk Jayapura.

10.5 Safe anchorage can be taken in Teluk Imbi, but the water is

rather deep. Vessels should keep clear of the 12m patch in the

middle of the harbor.

10.5 Caution.—Vessels approaching from N should give the

5.5m patch, about 2.5 miles NNE of Tanjung Suaja, a wide

berth.

10.5 Vessels approaching from N should give Tanjung Suaja a

good berth, as a bank, with a depth of 3.7m and an above-water

rock on its outer edge, extends about 135m SE from the point.

After rounding the point the vessel should bring the range

lights in line, bearing 255°, which leads to the anchorage.

10.5 Nembawewe should be given a berth of at least 0.2 mile.

Teluk Yos Sudarso to Tanjung Kamdara

10.6 The coast between Tanjung Suaja (2°32'S.,

140°45'E.) and Tanjung Tanahmerah, about 26 miles WNW, is

high, with numerous ridges extending N from the mountains,

and terminating in steep points and rocky cliffs at the coast.

There are small sandy beaches between the points, and there

are several villages on the coast.

10.6 Tanjung Suaja Light is shown at an elevation of 215m. A

racon transmits from the light structure. 

10.6 Merah Riboh, 680m high, lies about 3.5 miles WNW of Tanjung Suaja. Remor, about 10.5 miles farther W, is the highest of

three conspicuous peaks of Pegunungan Cycloop (Cycloop

Mountains) and attains an elevation of 2,056m. The Dafonsero

Mountains, with four peaks, lie at the W end of this section of

coast; the highest peak attains an elevation of 1,623m and is

conspicuous about 6 miles SE of Tanjung Tanahmerah.

10.6 Teluk Tanahmerah (Tanahmerah Baai) is entered W of Tanjung Tanahmerah (2°24'S., 140°21'E.), the E extremity of a

peninsula rising to an elevation of about 100m. The bay is

deep, with a generally rocky shore, with occasional beaches

and the hills rising steeply from the sea. A peak, 647m high,

and steep on its SE side, is distinctive about 4.5 miles SSW of

Tanjung Tanahmerah.

10.6 A tongue of land, 155m high at its N end, projects N from

the S side of the bay. Kwakeboh, 56m high, is the outermost of

several islets, lying on a partly drying reef which extends 0.67

mile N of the tongue of land. Teluk Demengong lies on the W

side of the tongue, and Teluk Depapre lies on the E side.

10.6 Siakammoko, a sharp conical peak, and Deparemoko, a

prominent double peak, lie about 1.75 miles and 1 mile,

respectively, S of the N extremity of the tongue.

10.6 Foul ground, with a small wooded islet within its outer edge,

extends 0.35 mile from the head of Teluk Demengong.

10.6 Anchorage.—It is reported that safe anchorage can be taken,

in 40m, in Teluk Demengong, close W of the small wooded

islet. There is also anchorage, in 40m, in Teluk Depapre, close

offshore. Strong continuous NW winds cause a heavy swell in

the bay, but at other times there is a calm sea. The coastal reef

is mostly marked by discoloration.

10.7 Teluk Iris (Iris Baai) (2°24'S., 140°13'E.) is entered

about 5.75 miles W of Tanjung Tanahmerah. The shores of the

bay show bright white rocky patches in places. Kiakebo, an

above-water rock, lies in the NE approach to the bay, nearly 0.5

mile NW of the E entrance point. Daidokopo, a rock above

water, lies in the N approach, nearly 1.5 miles NW of the E

entrance point; a patch, with a depth of 4.6m lies 0.35 mile N

of Daidokopo, with a 5.5m patch between. A reef, on which

there are three above-water rocks, lies about 0.3 mile N of

Tanjung Hadimoko (2°24'S., 140°14'E.), located about 1 mile

WSW of the E entrance point. The passage between Daidokopo and the three rocks is deep and clear of dangers. Anchorage, exposed N, can be taken at the head of the bay, in depths

of 12.8 to 16.5m, about 0.35 mile offshore, with good holding

ground. During the Northwest Monsoon, anchorage may be

obtained close off the mouth of the Marubu River (Maroeboe

River), in the SE corner of the bay by vessels with local knowledge.

Teluk Muris (Moeris Baai) (2°22'S., 140°10'E.) is entered

about 4.5 miles WNW of Daidokopo. Anchorage, with no shelter from N, may be obtained by small vessels in Teluk Muris,

with good holding ground.
224 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

10.7 Salean Segara is a reef, with a least depth of 2.7m, marked

by discoloration, lying about 2.25 miles ENE of the E entrance

point of Teluk Muris; it extends about 1 mile in a NW-SE

direction, is steep-to, and is usually marked by heavy breakers.

10.7 A patch, with a depth of 12m, lies about 1.75 miles E of the

E entrance point of Teluk Muris. A 4.9m patch, which is

seldom marked by discoloration, lies about 1 mile NE of the

same entrance point. Daidokopo bearing 110°, and in range

with the summit of the Dafonsero Mountains, leads between

the coast and the above two patches.

10.8 Teluk Demta (2°21'S., 140°09'E.) is separated from

Teluk Muris by a peninsula with Tanjung Ande at its N

extremity. The bay is entered between Tanjung Ande and

Tanjung Murugue (Tanjung Moeroegoee), about 0.2 mile NW.

A reef, with depths of less than 5.5m, and on which there are

several islets, extends about 0.5 mile N of Tanjung Ande. An

above-water rock lies on the shore reef, close E of Tanjung

Murugue. Several beacons, which cannot be relied on, mark

the edge of the reef on either side of the bay.

10.8 Anchorage.—Teluk Demta affords secure anchorage, sheltered from the heavy N swell by Pulau Besar (Poelau Besar) on

its W side. 

Mayee (Majee) (2°22'S., 140°08'E.), a sharp 676m high

peak nearly 2 miles WSW of Tanjung Ande, is a good

landmark in the approach to Teluk Demta. The flat summit of

Jembee, about 1 mile SE of Mayee, in range 211° with the

beach at the head of the bay, leads to the anchorage. As the

alignment leads rather close along the E side of Pulau Besar, it

is advisable to haul E before passing Tanjung Murugue, as the

reef extends about 135m from the point; then a mid-channel

course leads to the anchorage.

10.9 Teluk Matterer (Matterer Baai) (2°19'S., 140°08'E.)

is entered between Tanjung Korongwaab, at the NW end of

Pulau Besar, and Tanjung Kamdara, about 1.5 miles W. Reefs

and depths of less than 5.5m extend up to 0.3 mile N of Pulau

Besar.

10.9 Tanjung Kamdara (2°19'S., 140°07'E.) is fringed by reefs,

which extend nearly 0.75 mile ENE of the point; reefs and

depths of less than 5.5m extend up to 0.4 mile N of Tanjung

Kamdara.

10.9 Approaching from W, a good landmark is a hill, 90m high,

about 1.75 miles WSW of Tanjung Kamdara; this hill is a spur

of another hill, 119m high, close S. About 1.5 miles SE of the

90m hill, a short ridge, 443m high, is plainly visible.

10.9 Teluk Matterer, open N, does not afford good anchorage, as

winds from between NW and NE prevail by day throughout the

year, and the head of the bay is encumbered by reefs.

10.9 Anchorage.—Temporary anchorage can be taken, in 12 to

12.8m, good holding ground, mud and sand. There is a detached reef, with a depth of 1.8m, in the center of the harbor. A

vessel should approach with Mayee bearing 186°; the white

patch on the slope of the hill on the SW side of the bay is a

good mark when the vessel is closer in.

10.9 A good refuge harbor during the Northwest Monsoon for

vessels with local knowledge is in Tarfia Roads SE of Tanjung

Kamdara; the anchorage is in a depth of 4m, with the S extremity of the peninsula on which lies the village of Tarfia bearing

277° and the N extremity bearing 313°.

Tanjung Kamdara to Kepulauan Wakde

10.10 The coast between Tanjung Kamdara (2°19'S.,

140°07'E.) and the point abreast Kepulauan Wakde, about 70

miles WNW, is low and bordered by an almost continuous

sandy beach backed by trees; inland, marshy plains extend to

the hills, which approach the coast abreast Kepulauan Podena.

10.10 Teluk Walckenaer is the bight formed between Tanjung

Kamdara and Tanjung Wiruwai (2°17'S., 139°39'E.) about 28

miles W. Tanjung Wiruwai can be identified by the mouth of

the Wiruwai River (Wiroewai River) close E of it; the coast is

thickly populated in the vicinity of the river. Anchorage can be

taken in any part of Teluk Walckenaer, but there is always a

ground swell near the coast.

10.10 Pulau Kaicebo (Kaitjebo) (2°14'S., 139°34'E.), a sandy cay

covered with vegetation and high trees, and Pulau Mengge

(Mengge) (2°12'S., 139°32'E.), a low rocky islet with high

trees, lie about 1.5 miles offshore, about 5.75 and 8.75 miles,

respectively, NW of Tanjung Wiruwai. Mopkai and Warko,

each with a depth of 5.8m, lie about 0.5 mile and 1.25 miles,

respectively, NNW of Pulau Kaicebo; the reefs are not marked

by discoloration.

10.10 Kepulauan Podena (2°07'S., 139°29'E.), lying about 12

miles NW of Tanjung Wiruwai and within 5 miles of the coast,

consists of Pulau Anus (Anoes), 40m high; Pulau Yarsun

(Jarsoen); and Pulau Podena (Podena), 28m high. The islands

are covered with fairly high trees and there are small villages

on each island. A reef, with depths of less than 5m, extends

about 1.25 miles NNW from Pulau Anus; a patch, with a depth

of 8.8m, lies about 0.25 mile E of the E extremity of Pulau Yarsun.

10.10 Anchorage may be obtained, in 28m, about 135m from the S

extremity of Pulau Yarsun, but it is not recommended due to

the swell.

10.11 The coast SW of Kepulauan Podena is backed by the

Siduarsi Mountains (Sidoearsi Mountains), attaining an elevation of 851m about 9 miles inland. This range is especially

conspicuous from E, and appears from N as a chain of peaks

extending E-W. The Gauttier Mountains, farther SW, attain an

elevation of 2,272m, about 38 miles from the coast. The Gauttier Mountains are connected E to the Foja Mountains, 2,194m

high, by a high ridge. The latter two ranges can be identified in

clear weather.

10.11 Of the many rivers along this coast, the Biri River, entered

about 6 miles WSW of Pulau Podena, is the only one accessible by small craft; it is about 37m wide near its mouth.

10.11 Pulau Yamna (Jamna) (2°01'S., 139°15'E.) and Pulau Mademo (Mademo), two low islands, principally occupied by

coconut plantations, lie about 14 miles WNW of Kepulauan

Podena. A light is shown from the W extremity of Pulau Yamma.

10.11 A shoal, with a depth of 1.8m, slightly marked by discoloration, and a shoal, with a least depth of 12m at its N end, lie

about 0.5 mile N and 1.25 miles NNE, respectively, of Pulau

Yamma. A shoal, with a depth of 6.4m, and a shoal, with a

depth of 4m, lie about 1 mile ENE and 0.67 mile E, respectively, of the SW end of the same island. A 2.4m patch, with a

7m patch close S, lies about 0.25 mile SW of the W extremity

of Pulau Yamma. The shoals off Pulau Yamma are frequently
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 225

Pub. 164

marked by rips; with the wind against the current, the sea

appears to break over the 12m shoal NNE of the island. The

velocity of the tidal current is variable but does not exceed 1.5

knots.

10.11 A shoal area, with depths of 2.7m at the outer end, extends

about 0.7 mile NNE of Pulau Mademo. A 4.9m patch lies

about 0.3 mile SE of the SE end of Pulau Mademo, and a 5.8m

patch lies about 0.25 mile WNW of the N end of the same

island.

10.11 A 5.8m patch, with a 4.9m patch about 0.25 mile WSW of it,

lies about 1.25 miles SW of Pulau Mademo, about midway between the island and the mainland.

10.11 Anchorage can be taken in the bight on the SW coast of

Pulau Yamma, or farther offshore, in a depth of about 14.6m.

10.12 Pulau Masi-Masi (Masi Masi) (2°00'S., 139°08'E.),

an island, 52m high to the tops of the trees, lies about 6 miles

W of Pulau Yamma and about 1.5 miles offshore. A shoal, with

a depth of 4.6m, lies midway between the island and the mainland. Sefieri, a rock, awash, lies about 2 miles ESE of Pulau

Masi-Masi. A rock, with a depth of 0.3m, lies about 3.75 miles

W of the N end of Pulau Masi-Masi; a 0.9m patch lies about

1.25 miles farther NW; they are not marked by breakers and

show only slight discoloration.

10.12 Kepulauan Wakde (1°56'S., 139°01'E.) consists of Insumoar (Insoemoar) and Insumanai (Insoemanai), close S of it,

lying about 7.5 miles WNW of Pulau Masi-Masi, and about 1.5

miles offshore. Both islands are low and covered with coconut

trees, which attain an elevation of 41m on Insumoar. A patch,

with a depth of 5.5m, lies about 0.5 mile SSE of the S extremity of Insumoar.

10.12 Anchorage may be obtained, in 12 to 12.8m, between the

islands, where there is no swell. Tidal currents are irregular, but

never exceed velocities of 1.5 knots. A jetty, reported in poor

condition, is situated on the S side of Insumoar.

10.12 Rocks, with depths of 1.5 and 1.8m, lie about 1.5 miles W,

and 2.75 miles WSW, respectively, of the W end of Insumoar.

Kepulauan Wakde to Tanjung Perkham

10.13 The coast between the village of Arare (1°58'S.,

139°00'E.), on the coast abreast Kepulauan Wakde, and Tanjung Perkham, about 71 miles WNW, is entirely flat, and bordered by a wide dark-colored sand beach. Behind the beach,

there are high trees of uniform height; the coast presents no

noticeable features, except at Tanjung Verkami.

10.13 A peak, 610m high, SW of Kepulauan Wakde, and about 20

miles E, is conspicuous from NE. The Irier Mountains, running

in a N-S direction, lie between the peak and the coast; Basbassi, 688m high, is the highest peak of the range. Near the N

end of this range and 5 miles inland, a peak, 610m high, is

conspicuous from E.

10.13 The Tor River (1°57'S., 139°54'E.) flows into the sea about

6 miles W of Kepulauan Wakde, and can be entered by small

craft at HW. A dangerous spit extends about 1 mile N of the

entrance. The E entrance point of the river can be identified by

a group of high casuarina trees. There is a strong current in the

river, and muddy water extends from 4 to 5 miles offshore; the

dividing line between fresh and sea water is often marked by

heavy ripples, which frequently have the appearance of reefs.

10.13 Teluk Maffin (1°58'S., 138°52'E.) indents the coast about

1.5 miles WSW of the mouth of Tor River. Anchorage may be

obtained, in 13.7m, close off the village of Maffin, with good

holding ground of mud and sand, and out of the tidal current.

Anchorage can be taken, in 66m, farther offshore, but care

must be taken to avoid a deep gully, with depths of 92 to 110m,

which extends into the middle of the bay close W of Maffin.

10.13 The village of Sawar, about 8 miles WNW of the mouth of

the Tor River, is backed by coral stone, rising vertically to elevations of about 30.5 to 40m.

10.13 Sarmi Anchorage (1°51'S., 138°45'E.) is formed by a

peninsula extending from the coast, about 3.5 miles NW of

Sawar. The peninsula is fringed by reef which extends about

0.2 mile from its N end. There are conspicuous, high, roundtopped trees on the peninsula. The village of Sarmi, on the

peninsula, is the headquarters of a government official.

10.13 A light is shown from the N part of the peninsula.

10.13 Pulau Sarmi (Poeloe Sarmi) and Pulau Sawar (Poeloe

Sawar) are low reef-fringed islets lying nearly 1 mile NNW,

and 1.5 miles SSE, respectively, of the N end of the peninsula.

10.13 A reef, with a depth of 1.8m, lies 0.35 mile E of the N end of

the peninsula. A rock awash liesa bout 0.7 mile SSE of Pulau

Sawar. A sunken wreck, dangerous to navigation, lies 1.1 miles

SSE of the N end of the peninsula. This wreck is marked by an

obstruction buoy N and S of the position.

10.13 Anchorage.—Good anchorage may be obtained, in depths

of 7.6 to 12m, mud and sand, on either side of the peninsula.

During the Northwest Monsoon, some swell sets into the SE

anchorage. A stone pier for boats extends over the reef on the S

side of the peninsula.

10.14 Kepulauan Kumamba consists of Pulau Armo

(Armo) (1°41'S., 138°48'E.), 143m high and marked by a light,

and Pulau Liki (Liki), 328m high, about 4 miles NW, with the

small island, Pulau Lamsutu (Lamsoetoe), 104m high, midway

between. The islands are located on a plateau which is separated from the mainland by a deep passage. The S extremity of

Pulau Armo lies about 9 miles NNE of Sarmi.

10.14 There are patches, with depths of 2.8 to 11m, between Pulau

Liki and Pulau Armo. Isyuma Light is shown from the N extremity of Pulau Liki. A reef extends about 0.5 mile N of Pulau

Liki, and a rock lies 1 mile SSW of the S extremity of Pulau

Armo. These dangers are seldom marked by discoloration.

Vessels of deep draft should not pass between Pulau Armo and

Pulau Lamsutu. Kepulauan Kumamba has been reported to lie

3.3 miles 320° from its charted position.

10.14 Currents were reported to set W, with a velocity of 3 to 4

knots, off the S end of Pulau Armo. A maximum velocity of

1.5 knots was observed between the islands.

10.14 Anchorage may be obtained off the lee sides of the islands,

but the depths are considerable.

10.14 The coast between the peninsula of Sarmi and Tanjung Perkam, about 55 miles WNW, has regular depths, shoaling gradually shoreward. Anchorage may be taken fairly close offshore

along this coast. The coast in the vicinity of Tanjung Perkam

should not be approached within 3 miles as a bank fronts the

entrance of theMatabori River and the mouth of the Mamberamo River. The coast in the vicinity of the mouths of rivers is

constantly changing; during the Southeast Trade Wind, it silts
226 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

up, while during the Northwest Monsoon, the surf causes

erosion.

10.14 A moderate ESE current is usually experienced along this

coast and large trunks of trees are frequently encountered.

10.14 Tanjung Verkami (1°48'S., 138°41'E.), about 5 miles NW

of Sarmi, is conspicuous due to a group of high trees protruding above the surrounding foliage.

10.14 The Matabori River (1°31'S., 137°59'E.), entered about 5.5

miles SE of Tanjung Perkam, is accessible to small vessels

with local knowledge at HW. The ebb tidal current may attain a

velocity of 4 knots. There are high trees on the W entrance

point of the river and some low casuarina trees on the E entrance point.

Tanjung Perkam (Kaap d’Urville) (1°28'S., 137°55'E.) can

be identified by a very high clump of trees on its extremity and

also by the wide mouth of the Mamberamo River, close W,

when viewed from NNE.

The Mamberamo River

10.15 The Mamberamo River (1°28'S., 137°54'E.), one of

the largest rivers in Irian Jaya, is entered W of Tanjung Perkam. A deep channel leads to the river entrance from depths of

over 183m. Close outside the river entrance there are two

patches, in depths of 5.5m and 6.4m, respectively, in the

middle of the channel, with a deep channel on either side of

them. Close inside the patches there is a bar, with depths of 7 to

9.1m.

10.15 The banks of the river are sparsely populated. The village of

Teba lies on the E bank of the river, about 1 mile within the

entrance. There is a light on the W shore of the entrance.

10.15 The river has been safely navigated by a surveying vessel as

far as Kerkhoven Island and Morris Island, abut 50 miles from

its entrance. A vessel of 2.4m draft can reach Marine Falls,

nearly 50 miles farther upriver, but there are rapids and whirlpools on this stretch of river.

10.15 Tides—Currents.—The level of the river shows little varition at the different seasons, the greater difference so far recorded being 4m below Marine Falls.

10.15 The velocity of the outgoing fresh water current is 4 knots at

LW and 2.5 knots at HW. This layer of fresh water flows over

the salt water, which lies in the deep channel in the approach

and is not subject to this current.

10.15 Anchorage.—Good anchorage can be obtained, in 12m, off

the village of Teba, where the river is about 0.2 mile wide.

Vessels anchor E of the main stream where they are clear of the

ocean swell.

10.15 Directions.—The mouth of the Mamberamo River is not

easy to identify, but the clump of high trees on Tanjung Perkam

is a good guide. Approaching from W, several isolated trees on

the W entrance point are a good guide.

10.15 When about 4 miles N of Tanjung Perkam, keep the W entrance point in range with the inner point on the E side, bearing

202°, until the outer point on the E side of the entrance to the

Matabori River is in range with Tanjung Perkam, bearing 131°.

Then steer to make good a course of 180°, allowing for the

NNE stream of fresh water, in order to pass W of the 5.5m

patch close outside the entrance. When the outer point W is

shut in by the W entrance point of the river, steer for the inner

point on the E side, bearing 207°, until the first point on the W

side is abeam, and then keep near the W bank. A good lookout

should be kept for large tree trunks which are frequently

carried downstream.

Tanjung Perkam to Selat Kurudu

10.16 The coast between Tanjung Perkam (1°28'S.,

137°55'E.) and Tanjung Dombo, about 56 miles WSW, is low,

almost uninhabited, with several unimportant rivers entering

the sea. Mabri Hill (1°51'S., 137°15'E.), a hill, 169m high,

about 9.5 miles ENE of Tanjung Dombo, is the only elevated

land along this coast; it has high trees on its summit, and is a

good landmark due to its isolated position.

10.16 Depths on this coast are regular, shoaling gradually

shoreward. The coastline at the mouths of rivers are subject to

constant change; it silts up in the NE trade and in the Northwest Monsoon the surf causes portions to fall away.

Pulau Kurudu (Koeroedoe) (1°51'S., 137°00'E.), a hilly island, 169m high at its E end, lies about 3 miles WNW of Tanjung Dombo, from which it is separated by Selat Dombo

(Dombo Strait). A bank, with a least known depth of 0.9m, extends about 1.25 miles N from the NE extremity of Pulau Kurudu; depths of less than 7.8m extend about 2.5 miles farther N.

10.16 Anchorage.—Safe anchorage, during the Southeast Trade

Winds, may be obtained off the village of Kaipuri, situated in

the middle of the S coast of the island, and also off the village

of Kurudu, on the NE coast, W of the projecting bank. During

the Northwest Monsoon, there is a swell at both anchorages

and landing cannot be made.

10.17 Selat Kurudu (Koeroedoe Strait) (1°49'S.,

136°56'E.), deep and clear, separates the W extremity of Pulau

Kurudu from Tanjung Rainbawi (1°47'S., 136°54'E.), the E

extremity of Pulau Sorenarwa, nearly 4 miles NW. A reef, with

a depth of 3m at its outer extremity, extends about 0.75 mile

offshore from the W extremity of Pulau Kurudu; a reef, with a

depth of 0.9m, lies about 0.5 mile S of Tanjung Rainbawi.

10.17 A light is shown from Tanjung Rainbawi.

Copyright M. Moore

The Mamberamo River
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 227

Pub. 164

10.17 The strait is navigable at night with good visibility, care

being taken to avoid mistaking Selat Dombo for Selat Kurudu;

soundings, however, are a good guide.

10.17 Tides—Currents.—There are strong tidal currents in the

strait. During springs the tidal currents set constantly SW, with

a maximum velocity of 3.5 knots.

10.17 A shoal, with a depth of 8.8m, lies about 10 miles S of Tanjung Rainbawi.

Island in the Approach to Teluk Cenderawasih

10.18 Kepulauan Schouten (Schouten Islands) (1°00'S.,

136°00'E.), in the approaches to Teluk Cenderawasih (Teluk

Sarera), consist of Biak and Supiori, separated from each other

by a narrow channel; Kepulauan Padaido, SE of Biak; and

Bepondi and Ayawi, NE of Supiori. Biak and Supiori are

mountainous; the others are low and hilly, but most of them are

densely covered with high trees.

10.18 Farther S, the islands of Pulau Sorenarwa, Mios Num, and

Numfoor extend across the entrance of Teluk Cenderawasih,

and are separated from Kepulauan Schouten by Selat Sorenarwa.

10.18 During the Northwest Monsoon, the heavy seas in the E entrance to Selat Sorenarwa can be avoided by passing N of Kepulauan Padaido, taking care to avoid Wundumimas, then proceeding midway between Biak and Owi.

10.18 Winds—Weather.—In the vicinity of Kepulauan Schouten,

November and April are the transition months. The change

from the Northwest Monsoon to the Southeast Monsoon and

the beginning of this last season is characterized by a period of

long calm called "Wampasis" (quiet wind) by the natives. In

both monsoons, the sky is overcast and, especially near the

Equator, much rain was experienced. During the Southeast

Monsoon, there was often a thick mist over the sea for months

on end.

10.18 Land and sea breezes usually occur over Pulau Supiori and

Pulau Biak 3 hours after sunset and sunrise. They are only of

any importance during the periods that the monsoon wind is

less strong.

10.18 Tides—Currents.—During the Northwest Monsoon, the E

current divides into two branches W of the NW extremity of

Pulau Supiori. One branch sets N of Kepulauan Schouten; the

other branch sets SE between Pulau Supiori and Pulau Numfoor, then E through Selat Sorenarwa, and then NE out though

its E end. From the latter branch another branch sets between

NNE and NE, along the S coast of Pulau Biak, and unites off

the W end of Pulau Biak with the N branch. During the Southeast Monsoon, the reverse occurs. 

Kepulauan Padaido

10.19 Kepulauan Padaido (Padaido Islands) (1°15'S.,

136°35'E.) consist of a large number of wooded islands and islets. Some are hilly, with elevations up to 137m, and others are

low and sandy.

Pulau Workbondi (Mios Workbondi) (1°13'S., 136°42'E.),

56m high, the E island, lies about 37 miles NNW of Tanjung

Rainbawi. Urbinasi, a bright white sandy patch, lies on the W

extremity of a drying reef, S of Pulau Runi (Roeni), an islet

about 4 miles S of Pulau Workbondi. Urbinai (Oerbinai), an

extensive shoal, with a least depth of 4.6m, lies about 2 miles E

of Pulau Workbondi. Kassinampia is an extensive bank, with a

least depth of 5.8m at its NW extremity, about 2.75 miles

NNW of Pulau Workbondi.

10.19 Pulau Bromsi (1°13'S., 136°36'E.), about 5 miles W of

Pulau Workbondi, attains an elevation of 137m and is the highest of the group. Pulau Pakriki (Pakriki), about 3 miles farther

WSW, has a table-topped summit, 136m high, which is very

prominent. Pulau Manggwandi (Mios Manggwandi), about 2.5

miles S of Pulau Bromsi, is 77m high at its N end. Pulau Rasi

(Rasi), the S islet of the group, and a reef, with a depth of 0.9m

and plainly marked by discoloration, lie about 1.5 miles SE and

SW, respectively, of the S end of Pulau Manggwandi.

10.19 A light is shown from Pulau Rasi.

10.19 A coral patch, with a depth of 4.6m and a 7.6m patch about

0.5 mile E of it, lies about 6.5 miles WSW of the S extremity of

Pulau Manggwandi. A 0.9m patch lies about 1 mile SW of the

S end of Pulau Manggwandi.

10.19 A 7.9m patch, about 2 miles WNW of Pulau Pakriki, is

marked by eddies and tide rips, but does not discolor.

10.19 The passage between Pulau Manggwandi and Pulau Pasi

(Pasi), about 1 mile N, is clear of dangers. The narrow passage

between Pulau Pasi and Pulau Bromsi has a least depth of

18.3m in mid-channel; a current was reported setting W in the

passage, with a velocity of 1 to 3 knots. There is a least depth

of 6.9m in the fairway between Pulau Bromsiand and Pulau

Padaidori (Padaidori), the N island of the group; a strong current runs through this passage.

10.20 Pulau Pai (Pai) (1°13'S., 136°26'E.) lies at the NE

extremity of an atoll, about 3 miles W of Pulau Pakriki. Pulau

Nusi (Noesi), Pulau Wundi (Mios Woendi) and Pulau Auki

(Auki) also lie on the atoll; the above islands are inhabited.

Jumni, an islet, 42.4m high, lies about 1 mile E of Pulau Auki.

A shoal, which partly dries, lies about 1 mile SW of Pulau

Komori, an islet on the SW side of the atoll; it shows as a

bright white sand bank, and is plainly marked by discoloration

when covered. Pulau Wurki (Mios Woerki) (1°17'S.,

136°19'E.), about 3.5 miles WSW of Pulau Wundi, has coconut

plantations on it, and is uninhabited.

10.20 Anchorage.—Anchorage may be obtained, in 18.3 to 26m,

good holding ground of mud, sand and coral, by vessels with

local knowledge, in the lagoon off Pulau Wundi.

10.20 The entrance to the lagoon, at its S end, is marked on its W

side by a red conical buoy. The entrance to the lagoon, with a

least depth of 9m, lies between a patch, with a depth of 4.9m,

on the W side, and the S extremity of the reef extending about

1 mile S from Pulau Nusi, on the E side; there is often a strong

current setting across the entrance.

10.20 Vessels should enter the lagoon with the W side of Pulau

Wundi, bearing 332.5°, in range with Jumni, 0.75 mile from its

W end. When well within the entrance change course to 027°,

which leads to the anchorage.

10.21 Pulau Owi (Owi) (1°14'S., 136°13'E.), 94m high and

inhabited, lies about 3.75 miles W of Pulau Auki, and is the W

island of the group.

10.21 Pulau Rurbasbeba (Roerbasbeba), with Pulau Rurbaswedari

about 0.4 mile E, are the SW islets of the group and lie about 3
228 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

miles S of Pulau Owi. The islets have practically no coastal

reefs, and the pass between them is deep and clear of dangers.

10.21 Karana Wundumimas (Woendoemimas), with a swept depth

of 5.9m, lies about 4 miles N of Pulau Pai, in the passage between Kepulauan Padaido and Pulau Biak. A rectangular area,

extending about 0.6 mile N and W, and about 1.25 miles S and

E, respectively, of Karana Wundumimas, has a clear swept

depth of 17m.

10.21 Tides—Currents.—During a survey, the tidal currents set

strongly S with the falling tide and weakly N with the rising

tide, in the channels between Pulau Pakriki and the islands on

either side. In the vicinity of Pulau Pakriki, S of line joining

Pulau Padaidori and Pulau Pai, there were constant heavy tide

rips; at the same time there was a constant layer of water

setting S from the W side of Pulau Pakriki and a whirlpool E of

the line.

10.21 While anchored off the E side of Pulau Pasi, it was observed

on several occasions that there was a constant S set with a

maximum velocity of 2 knots.

10.21 During October and November, between Kepulauan Padaido

and the SE end of Pulau Biak, there was a constant SSW set,

with a maximum velocity of 2 knots, with a SW wind, which

raised a heavy sea, especially between Tanjung Warari, the E

extremity of Pulau Biak, and Pulau Padaidori.

10.21 During the Southeast Trade Wind, the current sets NW, dividing at Tanjung Warari and setting along both sides of Kepulauan Padaido.

Pulau Biak

10.22 Manseren Baken (0°44'S., 135°51'E.), 740m high,

and Sombunen, 695m high, the highest peaks in Pulau Biak

(Biak), lie about 3 miles SE and 2.75 miles S, respectively, of

Tanjung Praisbari, the N extremity of the island. The land then

slopes gradually to the SE end of the island. There are some

fairly conspicuous hills on the coast between Tanjung Praisbari

and the NW entrance point of Teluk Korim (Korim Bay), about

18 miles SE. A ridge, 412m high, lies about 2.25 miles S of

Tanjung Snerisbari, the S entrance point of Teluk Korim.

10.22 The NE coast of Pulau Biak is reported to be a good radar

target at a distance of 27 miles.

Pulau Biak—South and West Coasts

10.23 The S coast of Pulau Biak is mostly low and bordered

by sandy beaches. Some high white rocks are on the shore of

the bight E of Tanjung Samersbari (1°11'S., 135°54'E.).

There are numerous villages visible from seaward. Except at

Mokmer (1°12'S., 136°09'E.), where there is a steep cliff, conspicous from E, there are no outstanding features on this coast;

a light is shown at an elevation of 105m at Mokmer.

10.23 Tanjung Warari, the E extremity of Pulau Biak and marked

by a light, is low; a reef, on which there is an islet, extends

about 0.2 mile E of the point. There are whirlpools off the

point.

10.23 The village of Bosnik, the headquarters of a government

official, lies about 11.5 miles WSW of Tanjung Warari; a boat

pier extends to the edge of the coastal reef. Anchorage, in 20 to

40m, can be taken by vessels with local knowledge, about 0.1

mile off the head of the boat pier. Vessels should leave the anchorage when strong SW winds spring up. Working cargo is

difficult during the Northwest Monsoon.

10.23 Suanggarai Roads (Soeanggarai Roads) lie off the coast between Tanjung Faknik (1°11'S., 136°10'E.), about 3.75 miles

WSW of Bosnik, and the village of Mokmer, about 2 miles

farther WSW. Maidurip, an islet, lies on the coastal reef, about

0.6 mile SW of Tanjung Faknik, and is conspicuous due to its

light green color against the dark green rocky coast behind it.

A detached drying reef lies with its N extremity about 0.25

mile SE of Tanjung Faknik.

10.23 A patch, with a depth of 4.6m, and about 0.25 mile offshore,

lies about 0.3 mile E of Tanjung Sapori, which is located about

1 mile SW of Tanjung Faknik. A detached drying reef lies

between the patch and Tanjung Sapori; the edges of the reef are

steep-to and plainly marked by discoloration.

10.23 Anchorage.—The anchorage may be approached with the

W extremity of Pulau Owi (Kepulauan Padaido) bearing 161°

astern, in range with the E extremity of Pulau Rurbasbeba;

Tanjung Faknik will then be slightly on the starboard bow.

When Maidurip bears 292°, steer for it on that bearing and

anchor, in 40 to 50m, about 0.4 mile from the islet, where a

vessel will be almost outside the tidal current. Small vessels

can anchor farther in, in about 42m, with Maidurip bearing

323°, distant about 0.1 mile.

10.23 Small vessels with local knowledge can obtain fairly good

anchorage, in 29 to 40m, in a bight in the coastal reef NE of

Maidurip. Anchorage may also be obtained between the islet

and Tanjung Faknik. Both anchorages are protected NE by the

detached drying reef SE of Tanjung Faknik.

Sorido Lagoon

10.24 From Tanjung Sapori to the entrance of Sorido

Lagoon (1°12'S., 136°05'E.), about 3 miles W of Mokmer, the

fringing reef and shoals extend only about 0.25 mile offshore,

beyond which is deep water.

10.24 Sorido Lagoon, a natural harbor, lies between Pulau Biak

and a barrier reef which lies parallel to the coast until it joins

the coastal reef at Sorido (1°10'S., 136°03'E.), a village at the

head of the lagoon, 3.5 miles within the entrance. The lagoon is

0.25 mile wide at its entrance, widening gradually to 0.5 mile

opposite Waupenor, a town situated on the coast about 1.25

miles within the entrance, where there is a government wharf.

The barrier reef is plainly visible. From the entrance to a

position opposite the wharf it is submerged with occasional

drying patches; then to the head of the lagoon the reef dries

except for a secondary entrance through the reef, less than 0.1

mile wide, about 1.5 miles W of Waupenor.

10.24 Sorido Lagoon is the most important trading center of Kepulauan Schouten. Biak is the official name of the chain of settlements situated along the N side of the lagoon. The headquarters of the government officials of the Teluk Cenderawasih

area and the islands are located here.

Port of Biak

http://www.portina4.go.id/biak.htm
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 229

Pub. 164

10.24 Tides—Currents.—The tidal rise at Sorido Lagoon is 1.6m

at MHHW and MLHW.

10.24 The tidal currents are weak and do not exceed 0.5 knot. Inside the lagoon, the flood current sets W and the ebb current

sets E.

10.24 Winds—Weather.—Because of sudden heavy squalls, vessels may have to get underway on short notice. 

10.24 Aspect.—The channel to the wharf and for about 0.25 mile

W of the wharf has been swept to 11m. The berth is 142m long

and has depths of 11m alongside. Vessels up to 30,000 dwt can

use the harbor. The area NW of the swept area is encumbered

with reefs.

10.24 A lighted buoy, painted in red and white vertical stripes, with

a red cylindrical topmark, is moored on the W side of the entrance to the lagoon, and marks the E extremity of the barrier

reef.

10.24 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory, but is not undertaken at

night. The pilot boards in the anchorage in position 1°12.2'S,

136°°05.0'E.

10.24 Anchorage.—There are several anchorage berths in the E

part of the lagoon. To seaward there is an anchorage area with

good holding ground which should be approached with caution

due to strong currents.

10.24 Caution.—Several shoals lie outside the barrier reef S of

Sorido Lagoon. A 7.6m shoal, and an 8.2m shoal, lie 0.67 mile

S, and 1 mile SW, respectively, of Waupenor, and about 0.25

mile off the barrier reef. A 3.4m shoal lies 0.35 mile off the SW

part of the barrier reef.

10.24 White rocks lie about 0.25 mile offshore about 6 miles

WNW of Waupenor. A 3.4m patch lies about 0.75 mile W of

these rocks. Tanjung Sambersbari (1°11'S., 135°54'E.) lies

about 4 miles farther WSW. A high, gray rock lies on the coast

about 5 miles NW of Tanjung Sambersbari.

10.24 Between Tanjung Snerisbari, a low point, about 8 miles NW

of Tanjung Sambersbari, and the S entrance to Sorendidori,

about 18 miles farther NNW, there are no off-lying dangers,

except Japonda (1°03'S., 135°49'E.), a drying reef, about 0.5

mile offshore and 2.5 miles NNE of Tanjung Snerisbari.

10.24 Sorendidori, the narrow channel separating the NW end of

Pulau Biak from Pulau Supiori, has considerable depths at its S

end, but the N end is only navigable by small vessels with local

knowledge. A detached reef, plainly marked by discoloration,

lies in the S entrance; the channel lies between it and the E

shore, which is steep-to, with no coastal reef. A rock lies about

1.5 miles E of this detached reef at the entrance. Anchorage

may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge in the S

entrance, close to the detached reef. There is no tidal current in

the channel.

Pulau Biak—Northeast Coast

10.25 The coast between Tanjung Warari (1°05'S.,

136°23'E.) and Tanjung Snerisbari, about 23 miles NW, affords

no anchorage.

10.25 Korim Bay (0°53'S., 136°03'E.) is entered between Tanjung

Snerisbari and Tanjung Nubee (Tanjung Noebee), nearly 2

miles NNW. The bay is clear of dangers, and has steep sides.

Anchorage can be taken at the head of the bay, in depths

shoaling gradually from 20 to 5.5m; vessels lie safely during

the Southeast Monsoon, but in depths of less than 14.6m there

may be a ground swell. The town of Korim, where there is a

landing pier for boats, lies at the S entrance point of a shallow

lagoon in the SW corner of the bay.

10.25 Wari Bay, entered W of Tanjung Nubee, affords good anchorage, in about 20m, for small vessels during the Southeast

Monsoon. Reefs fringe the entrance points.

10.25 Tanjung Kwaree (0°48’S., 135°58’E.) is about 5.5 miles

NW of Wari Bay. A conspicuous waterfall, which shows as a

white rocky wall in the dry season, lies about 1 mile S of Tanjung Kwaree. The headquarters of a government official is at

Warsa, about 2 miles NW of Tanjung Kwaree. The coast between Wari Bay and Tanjung Praisbari, about 17 miles NW, is

densely populated; Tanjung Praisboro can be recognized by a

rock lying close off it.

Pulau Supiori

10.26 Pulau Supiori (Soepiori) (0°45'S., 135°33'E.) is

traversed by two mountain ranges, lying in a NW-SE direction

and parallel with one another. The island attains an elevation of

1,034m about 5 miles NNW of its SE extremity, and Bumbeffor (Boembeffor), 850m high, with a white rocky patch, at

an elevation of 681m, about 0.5 mile ESE of it, lies near the

NW extremity of the NE range. A peak, 454m high, in the SW

range, is fairly conspicuous about 4 miles SSE of Tanjung

Mandundi (Tanjung Mandoendi), the NW extremity of the island; the point is low, rising to a 303m hill, close inland.

Pulau Supiori—Southwest Coast

10.27 Korido Bay, entered between Tanjung Pimonsbari

(0°53'S., 135°39'E.), the SE extremity of Pulau Supiori, and

Tanjung Mankekesdi, about 6.5 miles W, is divided into two

parts. The inner part is encumbered with reefs. The outer part is

clear of dangers except for two small rocks close offshore close

WNW of Tanjung Pimonsbari, the reef fringing Tanjung

Mangkekesdi and the W shore, and a detached reef about 1.5

miles ESE of the latter point.

10.27 Anchorage.—The best anchorage is in 70m, coral, in Korido

Roads, off a break in the coastal reef off the village of Korida,

about 4.5 miles NW of Tanjung Pimonsbari. Bransfari, an islet,

lies on the coastal reef, close E of the break; a beacon,

surmounted by a triangle, lies about 0.1 mile SW of the islet,

on the SW corner of the coastal reef, and marks the E entrance

point of the break in the coastal reef. There is a pier, with a

depth of 0.9m alongside, at Korido, and a conspicuous roundtopped tree at the village of Ababiadi, about 1 mile NW.

10.27 Vessels should approach the anchorage with the conspicuous

round-topped tree at Ababiadi, in range with a sharp peak,

bearing 318°, and anchor when the pier at Korido bears 020°.

Small vessels can anchor closer in.

10.28 The SW coast of Pulau Supiori for about 10 miles NW

of Tanjung Mangkekesdi is fringed by a reef extending up to 1.5

miles offshore, and on which there are several above-water rocks.

10.28 Sowek Roads (0°50'S., 135°29'E.) is a basin inside the

coastal reef, about 4.5 miles NW of Tanjung Mangkekesdi, and

W of the village of Sowek, which is built on piles. Several islets lie on the coastal reef around the basin. The approach to
230 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

Sowek Roads, marked by a beacon, is about 35m wide, and is

always available to vessels not exceeding a draft of 1.8m.

10.28 Nearly 2 miles SW of Sowek, and nearly 1 mile outside the

entrance to the basin, there is a shoal, with a depth of 0.5m, and

a 1.8m patch about 0.25 mile farther E. The detached reefs and

coastal reef are usually marked by discoloration.

10.28 Anchorage.—Vessels with local knowledge may obtain

anchorage, in about 61m, sand and coral, between the detached

shoals and the entrance to Sowek Roads.

10.28 Caution.—An extensive drying reef lies with its SE

extremity about 9.5 miles SW of Tanjung Pimonsbari; it

extends NW, parallel with the SW coast of Pulau Supiori at a

distance of about 3.5 miles. Rani (0°57'S., 135°30'E.), a sandy

island covered with coconut palms, lies at the SE extremity of

the reef, with Insobabi, another islet, about 4 miles NW; both

islands are uninhabited, but the plantations on Rani are visited

periodically. A light is shown from the S extremity of Rani.

10.28 A ridge, with depths of 1 to 9.1m, extends about 16.5 miles

NW of the drying reef. Numerous shoals, with depths of less

than 9.1m and steep-to, lie between this ridge and the SW coast

of Pulau Supiori; vessels are recommended to avoid this area.

Pulau Supiori—North Coast

10.29 Anchorage may be obtained, in 62m, about 0.2 mile

offshore, off the N entrance to Sorendidori (0°44'S.,

135°45'E.).

10.29 Wafordori Bay (0°43'S., 135°42'E.) lies about 4 miles

WNW of N entrance to Sorendidori. A reef extends nearly 0.5

mile W of the E entrance point of the bay. Anchorage can be

taken by vessels with local knowledge, in about 20m, mud and

sand, in the bay.

10.29 Wabudori Bay (Waboedori Bay) is entered about 4.5 miles

WNW of Wafordori Bay. The E entrance point is hilly, and the

W entrance point is low; reefs fringe both entrance points,

leaving a deep channel, 0.23 mile between them. A steep-to

drying patch lies near the middle of the bay.

10.29 Anchorage.—The bay affords a safe anchorage at all times

to vessels with local knowledge. Anchorage may be obtained

in about 26m, with the village of Wabudori (Waboedori), on

the W shore of the bay, bearing 245°, distant about 0.3 mile;

this berth is about 0.2 mile S of the drying patch.

10.29 The coast between Wabudori Bay and Tanjung Imbieri

(0°37'S., 135°23'E.), a steep, red, rocky point, about 13 miles

WNW, is much indented and fronted by drying reefs, on which

lie the islands of Pulau Puri (Mios Poeri), Pulau Wundi, and

Pulau Pandi (Mios Pandi); the islands are low but covered with

high trees. The coastal reef extends up to 0.5 mile offshore for

about 6.5 miles W of Wabudori Bay, and there is foul ground

between the coastal reef and the islands.

10.29 A spit, extending about 3.5 miles WNW of Pulau Pandi, has

a least depth of 6.8m at its outer end, which is about 1.5 miles

offshore. A deep channel lies between the spit and the coast,

with Fando and Fanda, two conspicuous rocks, lying close

together, about 2 miles W of Pulau Pandi. A 5m patch lies

about 1 mile E of the rocks.

10.29 Anchorage by vessels with local knowledge can be taken, in

12.8m, sand, with the NW extremity of Pulau Pandi bearing

030° and the S extremity of Pulau Puri bearing 102°. The

anchorage should be approached on the latter bearing, which

leads S of Fando and Fanda.

Islands and Dangers Northwest of Pulau Supiori

10.30 Isabel Reef (0°30'S., 135°14'E.), with a least depth of

4.6m, lies about 12 miles NW of Tanjung Imbieri (0°38'S.,

135°23'E.). The reef is marked by discoloration and sometimes

by the sea breaking on it.

Pulau Bepondi (Bepondi) (0°24'S., 135°16'E.), about 14.5

miles NW of Tanjung Imbieri, has two summits, 137m high,

and is densely wooded. It lies on Bepondi Bank, which has

very irregular depths, and extends about 7.5 miles ENE of the

island; there is a least depth of 9.1m on the bank, about 2.5

miles NW of the N end of the island. Anchorage may be

obtained fairly close to the island on all sides, in depths of 10

to 20m, coral. A village on the SW side of the island is only

inhabited during the SE trade winds. A light is shown from the

SW extremity of the island.

Pulau Ayawi (Ajawi) (0°11'S., 134°59'E.), an island, 46m

high and covered with trees, lies about 21 miles NW of Pulau

Bepondi; it is uninhabited. The island lies on the SE extremity

of bank, extending about 13 miles NW, with depths of 5.8 to

39m. Due to the clear water the bottom can be seen at a depth

of about 26m.

10.30 Caution.—The island was reported to lie 2 miles SE of its

charted position.

Pulau Sorenarwa

10.31 Pulau Sorenarwa (Yapen) (1°45'S., 136°10'E.) is

separated from Pulau Kurudu at its E end by Selat Kurudu,

which was previously described in paragraph 10.17. A central

chain of mountains traverses the entire length of the island,

attaining an elevation of 1,496m about 29 miles from its E extremity, and sloping gradually at its E and W ends. Bumpekki

(Boempekki) (1°45'S., 136°19'E.), a sharp peak, 1,275m high,

about 6.5 miles WNW of its summit, is very conspicuous from

N or S.

10.31 Winds—Weather.—It is calm in both monsoons on the S

coast of Pulau Sorenarwa. During the Southeast Monsoon a

"Wambrau" from a SW direction is occasionally experienced.

10.31 Tides—Currents.—The tidal currents close off the N coast

of Pulau Sorenarwa, and off the S coast, except near the E and

W ends, set E and W and does not exceed a velocity of 1 knot.

Farther N they come under the influence of the currents.

10.31 In the month of December, a current setting NNE at a velocity of 1.25 knots was observed from Tanjung Perkam and W

through Selat Yapen until clear of the islands. 

Pulau Sorenarwa—North Coast

10.32 The coast between Tanjung Rainbawi (1°47'S.,

136°54'E.) and Tanjung Ormoana, about 43 miles W, is low

with high trees. At Tanjung Marapa, about 7.5 miles farther W,

the coast rises and remains steep as far as Serewen Bay, about

21 miles farther W. The coast is then flat to the village of

Saribi, about 9 miles farther W, and then is high and rocky to

Tanjung Woka, the W extremity of the island. A light is shown
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 231

Pub. 164

from Tanjung Woka. The N coast of Pulau Sorenarwa is more

sparsely populated than the S coast.

10.32 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge

in the bights off numerous small villages. Anchorage can be

taken off the village of Awek, about 5 miles W of Tanjung

Marapa, in a depth of about 37m, 0.25 mile offshore.

10.32 Pulau Indi (Mios Indi) (1°31'S., 135°50'E.), about 17 miles

WNW of Tanjung Marapa, lies on a drying reef, about 7 miles

offshore. Aibai, a reef-fringed islet, lies about 2.5 miles W of

Pulau Indi; both are densely wooded. Anchorage, in favorable

conditions, can be taken, in 37m, SSW of the village of Samberi, on the S side of Pulau Indi.

10.32 A shoal, with a depth of 9.1m, lies about 5.5 miles SE of

Pulau Indi, and about 2 miles off the coast of Pulau Sorenarwa.

A 7.8m shoal lies about 5.5 miles farther W, and about 1.5

miles offshore. Except for these dangers there is a deep channel

between Pulau Mios and Pulau Sorenarwa.

10.32 Teluk Pom, a small inlet, lies about 17 miles E of Tanjung

Woka. Pom (1°38'S., 135°42'E.) (World Port Index No. 52960)

lies on the drying shore reef in the bight on the S side of the E

entrance point. The landing place is on the W side of the bay.

Anchorage can be taken by vessels with local knowledge, in

46m, about 0.1 mile from the fringing shore reef. Vessels entering must take care to avoid the drying reef extending about 0.1

mile W from the E entrance point.

Pulau Sorenarwa—South Coast

10.33 The coast between Tanjung Rainbawa (1°47'S.,

136°54'E.) and Mampuri, a hill, 184m high, on the coast about

5 miles WSW, is low and covered with casuarina trees. Tanjung

Rainbawa was previously described with Selat Kurudu in paragraph 10.17.

10.33 Ambaijawappi (1°51'S., 136°54'E.), consisting of two

detached shoals, with depths of 1.8 and 2.4m, lie about 9.5

miles WSW of Tanjung Rainbawi, and about 1 mile offshore.

A depth of 0.6m lies about 0.75 mile ESE of Ambaijawappi.

10.33 Samberbaba Bay is entered E of Tanjung Tekopi, located

about 12.5 miles WSW of Tanjung Rainbawi. A detached reef

lies about 0.2 mile offshore, about 0.75 mile NE of Tanjung

Tekopi. The village of Samberbaba, the headquarters of a government official, and where there is a boat pier, lies about 1.25

miles N of the same point. Anchorage can be taken by vessels

with local knowledge, in 18.3m, with the point about 4 miles

W of Mampuri bearing 086°.

10.33 Randowaja Bay is entered N of Tanjung Arrareni, which is

located about 9.5 miles WSW of Tanjung Tekopi. A 3.4m shoal

lies 0.35 mile S of Tanjung Arrareni. Anchorage can be taken

by vessels with local knowledge, in convenient depths, in the

bay.

10.33 Obaurippi (1°53'S., 136°27'E.), a 203m high hill, is conspicuous on the coast about 6 miles W of Tanjung Arrareni.

Two mountains, 440 and 476m high, lie about 2 miles N and 3

miles NW, respectively, of Obaurippi.

10.34 Kepulauan Ambai (Ambai Islands) (1°55'S.,

136°20'E.) consists of a group of islands and islets lying off the

coast between Obaurippi and Tanjung Awokarupi, about 13

miles W, and extending about 5.5 miles from the coast. Pulau

Ambai (Ambai), the largest and most conspicuous of the

group, has three hills lying in a N-S direction, with Pakini, the

middle and highest, with an elevation of 326m. Pulau Monoparaiapi (Monoparaiapi) is the E island of the group. A patch,

with a depth of 0.3m, lies midway between the SW end of

Pulau Monoparaiapi and the E side of Pulau Ambai.

10.34 Urampi lies about 0.75 mile SE of Pulau Monoparaiapi.

Urang Kaitui (Oerang Kaitoei), a saddle-shaped islet, lies

about 1 mile farther SE. A detached 1.5m patch lies close off

the E side of Urampi.

10.34 Pulau Saweru (Saweroe), the W island, lies about 1.75 miles

W of Pulau Ambai, and is lower and slightly undulating. Three

islets, forming a chain, extend about 2.25 miles SE from the SE

end of Pulau Saweru.

10.34 Anchorage.—Sheltered anchorage may be obtained off the

N side of Pulau Monoparaiapi by vessels with local knowledge. Sheltered anchorage can be taken off the village of

Saweru, lying near the middle of the E side of Pulau Saweru;

farther N there are heavy squalls during the Northwest Monsoon; there is a 4.5m patch about 0.25 mile E of the village.

10.35 Teluk Serui (Seroei Bay) (1°54'S., 136°15'E.) is

entered between Tanjung Awokarupi (Abori) and a point about

1.75 miles E. Tanjung Awokarupi, a steep point, is the SE

extremity of a high peninsula. The E side of the bay is formed

by the spur which slopes gradually from the very prominent

Tafel van Serui, a flat-topped mountain, 318m high, about 1.5

miles N of the E entrance point. Mawampi, a rocky wooded

islet, lies 0.35 mile S of the E entrance point, and another islet

lies on the shore reef on the W side of the bay, about 0.5 mile N

of Tanjung Awokarupi.

10.35 Serui (Seroei) (1°53'S., 136°15'E.) (World Port Index No.

52940), the headquarters of a government official, lies at the

head of the bay. A pier, at the head of the bay, is marked at its

head by a light.

10.35 Anchorage can be taken, in 33m, S of the pier. During the

Southeast Trade Wind, there is a heavy sea in the bay at times.

Approaching Teluk Serui from S or SSW, Pulau Ambai will be

distinguished before Tafel van Serui, as the latter is not so

prominent from these directions.

10.35 The coast is flat and sandy from a position about 4 miles NW

of Teluk Serui to Pulau Janusi, the E entrance point of Teluk

Kanawa. Tanjung Worui (Tanjung Woroei), about 7.5 miles

WNW of Teluk Serui, and Tanjung Panduami (Tanjung Pandoeami), nearly 3 miles farther W, are covered with high trees.

The village of Mariarotu (Mariarotoe), with a waterfall about

0.5 mile NNW, lies about 3.5 miles WNW of Tanjung Panduami. Anchorage by vessels with local knowledge may be obtained off the latter village and other villages on this section of

coast, mostly with mud bottom but good holding ground.

10.35 A coral patch, with a depth of 3.4m, lies about 1 mile SSE of

Tanjung Worui. A patch, with a depth of 3.4m, lies about 1.25

miles offshore, about 2.5 miles SE of Pulau Janusi.

10.35 Teluk Kanawa (Kanawa Bay) is entered between Pulau

Janusi (1°48'S., 135°56'E.), a high island connected by a reef

to Tanjung Sumboi (Tanjung Soemboi), close NNE, and a point

about 2 miles WNW. The village of Kanawa is built on piles in

the water on the W side of the bay. Anchorage by vessels with

local knowledge can be obtained E or W of Uwan-deipi, an

islet lying on a reef in the middle of the bay close inside its

entrance.
232 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

Teluk Papuma (Papoema Bay) (1°36'S., 135°53'E.) lies W

of Teluk Kanawa, and is separated from it by a peninsula, from

which a reef, marked by discoloration, extends about 0.5 mile

from its S and W sides. Kwajuni, with a reef extending about

0.5 mile S, lies close SE of the W entrance point, to which it is

connected by a reef. Two patches, close together, with a least

depth of 0.3m, lie about 1.75 miles W of the E entrance point.

10.36 Teluk Parumi (Paroemi Bay) (1°46'S., 135°51'E.), W

of Teluk Papuma, is separated from it by a peninsula; a reef

extends about 0.75 miles SSW from the S extremity of the

peninsula. A reef, on which there are two islets, extends about

1.25 miles SSE from the W entrance point, and another reef

extends about 0.5 mile E of the same point. A 0.3m patch lies

about 1.25 miles S of the W entrance point.

10.36 Kepulauan Kuran (Koeran Islands) (1°53'S., 135°49'E.),

three in number, lie with Pulau Bawei (Bawei), 151m high, the

S and largest of the group, located about 9.5 miles SW of Pulau

Janusi. Pulau Karuati lies about 0.5 mile NE of Pulau Bawei, to

which it is joined by a reef; the islet is saddle-shaped, with a

settlement and coconut plantation on it. Anchorage maybe

taken, in 55m, E of Pulau Karuati. Pulau Nuori (Noeori) lies

about 1 mile NW of Pulau Bawei, with a deep channel between. A reef extends 0.5 mile NE from the island, and a reef,

with a depth of 2.7m, lies about 0.5 mile N of the island.

10.36 A shoal, with a depth of 5m, lies about 4.25 miles ENE of

Pulau Karuati, and another shoal, with a similar depth, lies

about 2.25 miles NNW of Pulau Nuori.

Pulau Manupampi (Manoepampi) (1°48'S., 135°48'E.), a

wooded and rocky island, lies about 6.25 miles W of Pulau

Janusi. It has two peaks conspicuous from E or W; the S peak

is 313m high.

10.36 Two 3.2m shoals lie about 3 and 5.5 miles, respectively, W

of the W extremity of Pulau Manupampi.

10.36 Ansus Bay lies on the NW side of Pulau Ansus (Ansoes)

(1°46'S., 135°46'E.) and Pulau Keiari, close NE; these islands are

connected by a reef, on which there are several islets. Pulau Ansus

lies about 1 mile NW of Pulau Manupampi. Tanjung Maraiworeh,

about 1 mile NW of Pulau Ansus, is the SW extremity of Marai,

the high peninsula forming the NW shore of the bay. A reef, with a

depth of 1.8m over its outer end, extends 0.67 mile S of Tanjung

Maraiworeh, and a reef, with a least known depth of 0.9m, lies

about 0.5 mile farther W.

10.36 Ansus (Ansoes), built on piles, and the largest village of

Irian Jaya, lies at the head of the bay; a prominent church is on

the hilly land in the vicinity.

10.36 The channel leading to Ansus is tortuous, with reefs on

either side, so that only vessels with local knowledge should

use it. A reef, with a depth of 1.2m, extends about 0.2 mile W

from the N end of Pulau Keiari.

10.36 The E approach to Ansus lies between Pulau Ansus and

Pulau Manupampa, passing W of a reef, with Nuwowa, an islet

at its S end, about 1 mile N of Pulau Manupampa; the reef is

about 1 mile long in a N-S direction. This channel is easier to

navigate, as the reefs are usually marked by discoloration, and

the channel is less tortuous, but there is a 3m patch lying about

0.4 mile WSW of Nuwowa. A reef, with two islets on it,

extends about 0.65 mile S from the SW end of Pulau Ansus.

10.36 Vessels approaching from W, should keep the S extremity of

Pulau Ansus in range with the N extremity of Pulau Manupampi, bearing 100°, until a short distance from Batu Pendita,

a group of rocks on the outer edge of the reef extending from

the W extremity of Pulau Ansus. Then alter course ENE into

the bay, being careful to avoid the 1.8m patch, about 0.5 mile S

of Tanjung Maraiworeh.

Copyright Papua Eco Tour

Ansus Village
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 233

Pub. 164

10.36 Pulau Janusi (Janoesi) (1°43'S., 135°41'E.), a high island,

lies about 6 miles NW of Pulau Ansus. Tanjung Orearo

(1°42'S., 135°37'E.), also high, lies about 4.5 miles farther

WNW. A rock, with a depth of 1.8m, lies about 1.5 miles

WSW of Pulau Janusi; a drying reef lies about midway

between the rock and the island. Another drying reef lies about

2.5 miles W of the island.

10.37 Teluk Jaimaria (Jaimaria Bay) (1°41'S., 135°36'E.),

entered between Tanjung Orearo and Tanjung Wopore, about 2

miles WNW, is fronted by four islets. The best entrance to the

bay is between Pulau Kariori, the large island in the W part of

the bay, and the first of two islets lying E of it. A drying reef

extends about 0.4 mile SW of Pulau Kariori, and shoal water,

with a depth of 2.4m extends about 0.2 mile NW from the islet

on the opposite side of the entrance.

10.37 Teluk Wooi (Wooi Bay) (1°41'S., 135°31'E.), entered about

3.75 miles W of Tanjung Wopore, is backed by high land. The

shores at the entrance are cliffy, but inside they are low and

covered with mangroves. Aroja, a rock covered with vegetation, lies about 0.75 mile W of the W entrance point, and is

difficult to identify; it lies on the coastal reef which extends

about 0.4 mile offshore. The reefs fronting the entrance points

are usually marked by discoloration. The village of Wooi, lies

on the W shore, about 0.4 mile NW of the W entrance point.

10.37 Anchorage may be obtained, in about 46m, NE of Wooi. A

vessel should approach the bay with the double peak of Marai,

536m high, located about 3.5 miles NNE of the E entrance

point, bearing 037.5°; only one peak will be seen on this bearing. There is sometimes a very strong current setting across the

entrance of the bay, so it is necessary to enter at a moderate

speed.

Islands and Dangers Northwest of Pulau Sorenarwa

10.38 Pulau Num (Mios Noem) (1°30'S., 135°11'E.) lies

with its E extremity about 8 miles NNW of the W extremity of

Pulau Sorenarwa. It is densely wooded and traversed by a

range of mountains, attaining an elevation of 448m about 6

miles from its W end. The island is uninhabited.

10.38 Kepulauan Pono Kabai (Pono Kabai Islands) consist of three

islets fringed by drying reefs lying within 2 miles of the E end

of Pulau Num. A 6.9m shoal lies between the E islet and Pulau

Num. A 12.8m depth lies about 5 miles E of the E extremity of

Pulau Num. A 7.8m shoal lies 1.25 miles W of the NE point of

Pulau Num. Navigation between the islets is dangerous due to

the moderately strong tidal currents.

10.38 The S coast of Pulau Num is steep-to and affords no anchorage.

Selat Pulau Num (Mios Noem Strait) (1°33'S., 135°23'E.),

separating Pulau Num and Pulau Sorenarwa, is clear of dangers, and can be navigated at night without difficulty. Tanjong

Woka, the W extremity of Pulau Sorenarwa, is steep-to, and

rocky.

10.38 Anchorage.—On the N coast of Pulau Num there are two

bays close together. Both bays can be safely entered by keeping in mid-channel. The W bay affords the better anchorage to

vessels with local knowledge, in 70m, sand.

10.38 A 7.8m patch lies about 1 mile E of the NW extremity of

Pulau Num.

10.39 Slamiapien (1°28'S., 135°06'E.), two rocky islets

covered with vegetation, lie about 1 mile W of the NW extremity of Pulau Num.

10.39 Sewandeh (1°29'S., 135°01'E.), an island, 104m high and

densely wooded, lies about 4.5 miles W of Pulau Num. It lies on

the SE edge of a drying reef, which extends about 1 mile NW of

the islet; numerous rocks, covered with vegetation, lie on the reef.

Selat Sewandeh (Sewandeh Strait) (1°29'S., 135°03'E.),

separating Sewandeh from Pulau Num, is deep and clear of

dangers.

10.39 An area of irregular depths, with a greatest width of about 9

miles, extends about 31 miles WNW of Sewandeh. It has a

least known depth of 10m, about 9 miles W of the island.

10.39 Tides—Currents.—In Selat Sewandeh and over the shoals

W of Sewandeh, the tidal currents attain a maximum velocity

of 2 knots.

Pulau Numfoor

10.40 Pulau Numfoor (Noemfoor) (1°00'S., 134°53'E.),

204m high, and densely wooded, lies about 23 miles NW of

Pulau Num. It has no prominent peaks and has a flat

appearance. The island is fringed by coral reef, except on its

SW side; on its S side the reef extends about 2.25 miles offshore. Several openings in the reef give access for boats to the

numerous coastal villages.

10.40 Manim, a low islet, covered with high trees, lies about 2.5

miles offshore, about 5 miles NW of Tanjung Aikar, the SW

extremity of Pulau Numfoor. A spit extends about 0.25 mile S

of Manim, and another spit, with a least known depth of 5.8m

extends 0.65 mile NNW of Manim.

10.40 A light is shown at the village of Jenmanu, on the NW side

of Pulau Numfoor.

10.40 Winds—Weather.—During the survey from June to October, the "Wambrau," a strong hot and dry mountain wind, was

only experienced from SW at the beginning of August and the

beginning of September; at both times it came through with

storm force for 3 to 4 days, after which the wind became

normal again from S to SE. On one occasion, a heavy SE squall

was experienced which came up rapidly, raising a troublesome

sea, with heavy rain. After a couple of hours, the squall was

over and not long afterwards the sea was calm. At the end of

September, there were some weak N winds, a long N swell was

felt on the N coast of Pulau Numfoor, and much rain fell;

sometimes the rain squalls, often accompanied by thick

weather, lasted a couple of hours and were so dense that visibility was nil.

10.40 Anchorage.—A vessel with local knowledge may obtain

anchorage, in 35m, sand, off Jenmanu. A boat can land on the

beach by passing through a nearby opening in the reef which is

easily found.

10.40 Anchorage can be obtained by vessels with local knowledge,

in 35m, sand, off the village of Jensamberi, about 5 miles SE of

Tanjung Keretsbari, the N extremity of the island. There is an

opening in the reef NE of the village, for which three pairs of

range beacons are established; the junction of the first two

pairs of range beacons is marked by a buoy, painted in black
234 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

and yellow stripes. Then a channel, marked by beacons, leads

to the village of Bawe, about 3 miles S, which is available for

power boats at HW. There is a pier at the village of Menggarai,

about 2.5 miles N of Bawe, with a depth of 1.8m at its head.

The tidal current may attain a velocity of 2 knots at springs off

the pier.

10.40 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge, in 26 to 35m, coral and sand, in Teluk Rumboi (Teluk

Roemboi), an open bay on the SW side of the island, entered

between Tanjung Indabandarai (1°06'S., 134°50'E.) and Tanjung Insowendi, about 1.25 miles NNW. There is a landing pier

for boats in the N part of the bay. A reef lies parallel to and up

to 0.25 mile off the reef-fringed N and NE shores of the bay.

10.40 A bank, with depths of 66m at its E end and 73m at its W

end, was reported about 10.5 miles N of Pulau Numfoor.

Teluk Cenderawasih

10.41 Teluk Cenderawasih (Sarera), lying between Tanjung

Dombo and Tanjung Saweba, about 205 miles WNW, is

fronted by two groups of islands which afford it considerable

protection against heavy seas. During both monsoons,

however, rough seas are encountered between the E end of

Selat Sorenarwa (Yapen Strait) and Tanjung Perkam (Cape

d’Urville).

10.41 The E coast of the bay is, in general, low and flat; a number

of large rivers discharge along it. The W coast, on the other

hand, is steep and high. The rivers that discharge into this bay

discolor the water for a distance of 5 to 6 miles offshore and

carry out large trees and other debris which constitute a distinct

menace to navigation. Furthermore, the E and S coasts of the

bay are subject to such constant change that the lead must be

the main reliance of vessels in these waters; it is deemed inadvisable to take a vessel into depths of less than 20m, particularly in the E and SE parts of the bay.

10.41 The densely-wooded shores of the bay are but sparsely

settled. The natives live in a very primitive manner. The

villages along the coast and on the various rivers consist of

houses built on poles. Vessels call at various places along the

shores of the bay where jungle products are gathered for shipment.

10.41 Winds—Weather.—In Teluk Cenderawasih, a warm, dry,

SW wind sometimes blows off the W shore, and is known as

the "Wambrau." As it sets in, the coast temperatures rise

considerably, the air becomes very dry and rather hazy at sea

level. It has been known to last a week, decreasing slightly in

strength at night. It usually blows force 4, but may reach gale

force for short periods. It sometimes raises a rough sea in the

bay.

10.41 During May and June, between Pulau Kurudu (Koeroedoe)

and Tanjung Worisanua, the direction of the wind was very

variable, the rainfall was considerable and generally occurred

at night.

10.41 Between Pulau Kurudu and Tanjung Bumi (Boemi)

(3°22'S., 135°25'E.) during the Southeast Monsoon, rain

squalls were repeatedly experienced, especially over the land.

Although during this monsoon the wind is generally E to SE,

force 1 to 2, W winds occurred many times. The state of the sea

was calm in both monsoons, especially in the N part. There is

much rainfall in both monsoons.

10.41 Tides—Currents.—Along the W shore of the bay there is

both a diurnal and semidiurnal tide, but the latter predominates.

The spring lows of the two tides may coincide. As a consequence of this coincidence the LW level occurs in December or

January and June or July. The maximum rise and fall that can

be expected are, respectively, about 0.79m above and 1.09m

below the mean sea level.

10.41 Fronting Teluk Cenderawasih, in Selat Sorenarwa and N

Kepulauan Schouten (Schouten Islands), there are no tidal currents, but there is a weak drift to the E during the Northwest

Monsoon and to the W during the Southeast Monsoon. The islands, however, cause some deflection from these general

directions. The maximum recorded velocity of this drift is 2

knots, although in the vicinity of the SE coast of Biaka velocity

of 3 knots has been reported.

10.41 Inside the bay there are weak tidal currents but no monsoon

drift. The general set of the currents is into the bay at flood tide

and out at ebb. In the S part of the bay the currents change

about 2 hours after HW and LW. The maximum recorded velocity of the currents is 1 knot.

10.41 The tidal currents between Tanjung Dombo and Tanjung

Worisanua are weak and irregular. S of Selat Dombo the most

perceptible current sets N, with a velocity of 1 knot.

10.41 The 10m curve extends S from the S shore of Pulau Kurudu

about 6.5 miles W of Tanjung Dombo and fronts the bight thus

formed by the coastline, and then irregularly follows the coastline from 1 to 5 miles offshore.

Selat Dombo (Dombo Strait) (1°52'S., 137°04'E.), separating Pulau Kurudu from the coast of W Irian Jaya N of Tanjung Dombo, has depths of 11 to 53m and is 2 miles wide. The

strait is approached from N, in depths of 11 to 12.8m, and from

the S over a bank with a least depth of 5.9m.

10.41 Caution.—Apparently the outermost dangers area 1.8m spot

lying about 3 miles offshore at a position 21.5 miles SW of

Tanjung Dombo, and a 4.6m patch lying 2 miles NE of Tanjung Waba (Geelvinks Oosthoek) (2°11'S., 136°31'E.).

Teluk Cenderawasih—Southeast Shore

10.42 The coast, trending SE from Tanjung Dombo

(1°54'S., 137°06'E.) to the mouth of the Kariferi River, a distance of 12 miles, and then WSW to Tanjung Worisanua

(Valsche Hoek), a distance of about 53 miles, is low, swampy,

and overgrown with mangroves which are submerged at HW.

Inasmuch as the land is subject to seaward extensions, by

reason of the rapid deposit of silt, alternating with periods of

destructive erosion, particularly during the Northwest Monsoon, the various points, such as Tanjung Waba, along this

coast are of no value as landmarks.

10.42 The principal landmark within this stretch of coast is Kamusopedai (Kamoesopedai) (Great Kerkberg), rising to 1,023m

about 37 miles ESE of Tanjung Worisanua. Other fairly prominent peaks are: Tolaterri, a dome-shaped peak 660m high,

about 8 miles W of Kamusopedai; Vandori, 281m high, located

20 miles ESE of Tanjung Worisanua; and Mambai, 178m high,

with a large round-topped tree on it, located 16.5 miles ESE of

Tanjung Worisanua. Within 3.25 miles SW of this point are

three hills, the NE of which is 185m.

10.42 Few villages are to be seen close along the shore. The principal coastal villages are Napuai (Napoeai), near the mouth of
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 235

Pub. 164

the Kai River, close SE of Tanjung Waba; Wonti (Wainoei),

near the mouth of the Wonti River (Wainoei River), 9.5 miles

ESE of Tanjung Waba; Dombo, on the W side of Pulau Dombo; and Pamai, on the E side of the island.

10.42 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in mud or muddy sand

anywhere along this coast. The preferable anchorages seem to

be in depths of 40 to 49m off Tanjung Waba and off the mouths

of the Kai River, the Sajati River, and the Wonti River, all of

which empty into the sea between 2.5 and 9 miles SE of Tanjung Waba. During the Northwest Monsoon, landing is generally impossible along the coast between Tanjung Worisanua

and Tanjung Waba.

10.43 The coast between Tanjung Worisanua and Ujung

Auri (Jacobus Opdekams Hoek) (2°47'S., 135°57'E.), 45 miles

to the SW consists of a wide coastal belt of low, marshy land

fronted by a narrow strip of tree-covered sand that is broken in

many places by wide river mouths. Inasmuch as the mud banks

fronting this coast extend off not more than 2 miles, vessels can

proceed along it closely enough to take bearings on the various

headlands and the mouths of the rivers.

10.43 The coast is bordered by a narrow strip of sand, overgrown

with casuarina trees, and interspersed by the wide mouths of

several rivers. The water from these rivers causes the sea to be

discolored for 5 or 6 miles offshore, and large trunks of trees,

stuck in the mud, are often encountered at this distance, and

may render navigation dangerous within depths of 10.1m.

10.43 Among the elevations along this coast that are useful landmarks are three hills, 117m, 145m, and 185m high, respectively, rising SW of Tanjung Worisanua. Sanoringga Hill, 125m

high, rises 13.25 miles SSW of Tanjung Worisanua. A group of

nine hills, of which the highest, named Olifant (Riwoi), has an

elevation of 302m and rises 8.5 miles E of Tanjung Karang

Senu (Olifants Hoek) (2°42'S., 136°01'E.). Groote Doodkist, a

hill 197m high, rises 6.5 miles SE of Tanjung Karang Senu.

Farther inshore, at a distance of about 30 miles ENE of Tanjung Karang Senu is Little (Kleine) Kerkberg, a group of

mountains consisting of three peaks with elevations of 610m,

617m, and 681m, respectively.

10.43 Tanjung Karang Senu is marked by a light

10.43 This coast is very sparsely settled; the only village along it is

a very small one named Waren, situated at the mouth of the

Waren River, 6 miles SW of Tanjung Worisanua.

10.43 Wai Poga (Wapongga), the largest river along this stretch of

coast, empties into the sea at a position about 2 miles NE of

Tanjung Karang Senu. It rises far in the interior and, for the last

50 miles of its course, flows through low marshy plains that are

generally flooded during the rainy season. In the lower reaches

the width of the river varies between 0.16 and 0.22 mile. On

the bar there is a depth of 1.8m but the depths inside increase to

18.3 or 20m. At 40 miles above its mouth the river branches

into two arms, one rapidly diminishing in depth and width and

the other continuing for a considerable distance into the hilly

hinterland.

Pulau Naufi (Naoefi) (Nawi) (2°14'S., 136°15'E.), lying

about 9.5 miles W of Tanjung Worisanua and marked by a

light, is an excellent landmark for the vicinity. It is a heavily

wooded island with several peaks,the highest of which has an

elevation of 99m. The island is surrounded by a drying reef, but

outside of that fringing reef there are no dangers.

10.43 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor everywhere along this

coast, in depths of 29 to 40m, but during the Northwest Monsoon these berths can be uncomfortable.

10.44 The coast between Ujung Auri and Teluk Rarewarai,

18 miles SW, is low and cut by the numerous mouths of the

Warenai River and the Siriwo River. A steep-to bank over

which the greatest depth is about 2.7m extends 1 to 1.5 miles

off the coast. The bottom in this vicinity is generally of mud,

but off Ujung Auri it consists of hard sand and stones.

Kepulauan Moor (Moor Islands) (2°56'S., 135°44'E.), two

large islands, Pulau Nuto Rutomorja (Noeto Roetomordja) and

Pulau Ratewo, and a small islet named Utaina (Oetaina) lie on

a bank of soundings that extends out from a line joining Ujung

Auri and Ujung Rarewa (Hodge Westhoek). These islands are

heavily wooded and the two larger ones are hilly but have no

conspicuous peaks. Nuto Rutomorja has a maximum elevation

of 125m, and Ratewo, the largest has a maximum height of

150m. Drying reefs extend out in places from all of the islands.

A detached patch of 1.4m lies nearly 1.5 miles NW of the NE

extremity of Nuto Rutomorja. Utaina is low, covered with high

trees, and uninhabited.

10.44 The bottom over the bank of soundings on which these islands lie consists of hard mud. The water around them is very

dirty and normally contains much debris that has been brought

down by the rivers; occasionally small islets consisting of

vegetable matter are seen floating around. During the Northwest Monsoon there is frequently a heavy sea over this bank.

10.44 Pulau Nuto Rutomorja is the only inhabited island of the

group; on its SE side is Moor village, around which there are

extensive coconut plantations.

10.45 Teluk Rarewarai (Rarewarai Bay) (3°02'S.,

135°48'E.) is an inlet formed between Pulau Nusariwe (Noesariwe Island) and the mainland. Tanjung Warisano, the NE

extremity of Pulau Nusariwe and the N entrance point of the

bay, is a good landmark, as is also a large tree on the island.

The branches of the Siriwo River that empty into the bay make

the water very dirty. A drying reef extends out a short distance

from Tanjung Warisano. On the E side of the bay is a wide

drying shore bank; off the outer edge of this bank, opposite

Tanjung Warisano and 0.65 mile off the E shore of the bay, is a

patch over which there is a depth of less than 0.3m.

10.45 About midway between Tanjung Warisano and Tanjung

Ufai, an inner entrance point about 0.55 mile to the S, there is a

small bight in which vessels can anchor, in 29m, mud. In the

inner part of the bay, beyond Tanjung Ufai, there are numerous

reefs which, because of the muddiness of the water, can not be

sighted. A small drying channel leads from the head of the bay

around the W end of Pulau Nusariwe and then into Weinami

inlet. Local knowledge is necessary.

10.45 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken anywhere around

Kepulauan Moor except to the NW of the group, where the

bottom rises too steeply. The currents between the islands are

sometimes strong.

10.45 Anchorage may be obtained by vessels with local knowledge, in a depth of about 29m, mud, midway between Tanjung

Warisano and Tanjung Ufai, about 0.5 mile S.

10.45 From Tanjung Warisano to Pulau Nusi, a distance of about

11.5 miles, the coast takes a general SW direction, but is
236 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

considerably indented between Ujung Rarewa and Pulau Nusi.

A sharp-topped hill, 340m high, rises 1.25 miles S of the

entrance to the Musario River (Moesario River), and is a good

landmark for the vicinity.

10.45 Close SW of Pulau Nusariwe (Noesariwe) is a peninsula

which terminates in Ujung Rarewa, and on which there is a hill

160m high closely backing the point. The shores of this peninsula are covered with mangroves except at three small villages,

named Weinami, Napan, and Masipawe. Near these villages

there are white sandy beaches. The houses at Weinami extend

along the shore of the inlet between the peninsula and Pulau

Nusariwe. This inlet is used by the schooners of the Chinese

traders who live at Weinami; it is connected by very shallow

channels with Teluk Rarewarai (Rarewarai). Two villages are

situated, respectively, at the mouths of the Legare River and the

Musario River. Between these two, on a steep sand and gravel

beach, is Makimi village.

10.46 Pulau Nusi (3°09'S., 135°40'E.) is a small thicklywooded island, 50m high, located close off the Irian Jaya coast.

It is not easily distinguished against the high coastal hills. On

the island is a settlement belonging to a European trading

company.

10.46 A shoal, with a depth of 3m, lies about 0.25 mile NW of the

W extremity of Pulau Nusariwe.

10.46 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 35m, between

Pulau Nusi and the mainland. In as much as several detached

reefs, one of which has a depth of only 0.5m, lie off the E end

of the island, vessels should approach the anchorage from the

W. Local knowledge is necessary.

10.46 Caution.—Vessels should exercise great caution in approaching this coast because the water is muddied by sediment carried down by the rivers. Furthermore, in the S part of

this stretch of coast, between the Musario River (Moesario

River) and Pulau Nusi, there are several reefs, some of which

dry.

10.46 Between Pulau Nusi and Tanjung Bumi (Boemi), 19 miles

SW, the coast is low, monotonously wooded, and very sparsely

settled. The only villages are at Teluk Kimi, a small inlet 1 mile

NE of Pinkster Oosthuk (Pinkster East Point), and 6.5 miles

SW of Pulau Nusi, and Nabire village, situated 4 miles E of

Tanjung Bumi.

10.46 A light is shown from the head of Teluk Kimi. At about 0.75

mile ENE of Nabire, a pier serves an oil depot.

10.47 Kepulauan Mamboor (Haarlem Islands) consist of

two large and several small islands lying 6.25 to 12 miles W of

Ujung Rarewa. Kopataar (3°05'S., 135°35'E.), Awaar, Kunur

(Koenoer), Her, and Numini (Noemini) islands are so grouped

as to form a basin about 1.5 miles in diameter and 37 to 46m

deep; in the center of this basin, however, there is a 4.6m patch.

The best entrance to this basin, which is a safe and spacious

anchorage, is from the N, between the N end of Kopataar and

the reef that projects W nearly 0.25 mile from the NW extremity of Awaar; the other entrance channels are somewhat restricted by the reefs and stones that extend from the islands.

The maximum elevation of the trees on the principal islands of

the group are Awaar, 110m; Kopataar, 100m; Her, 70m; and

Numini, 65m. Pulau Roin, located close off the SE extremity of

Awaar, is a small, wooded sand bank. Jaunan (Djaoenan), 33m

high, is a well-wooded islet located 1.75 miles SWof the W

extremity of Kopataar Island, near the E end of a drying reef

about 1 mile long. Pulau Waider, covered with high trees,

stands at the S end of a drying reef 0.75 mile W of the W end

of Kopataar.

10.47 A light is shown from Juanan.

10.47 A group of houses on the SE extremity of Kopataar and on

the N end of Numini comprise the village of Sihaam. On the

NE extremity of Kopataaris the village of Bore.

10.47 Winds—Weather.—There is sometimes a considerable sea

on the plateau on which Kepulauan Moor islands lie during the

Northwest Monsoon, but this quickly dies down as soon as the

wind drops.

10.47 Anchorage.—Vessels can anchor in a safe and spacious

basin formed by the islands of Kopataar, Awaar, Kunur, Her,

and Numini.

10.47 Small vessels can find good anchorage in Teluk Kimi, in

15m.

10.47 Caution.—Three reefs, with depths of less than 1.8m, lie

between 0.75 mile S and about 0.42 mile WSW of the E end of

Kopataar. Unofficial beacons, which are unreliable, mark the E

and W reefs. A drying reef lies about 0.5 mile S of the SE end

of Awaar, and a shoal with a depth of 0.9m, lies about 0.2 mile

S of the SW end of the same island. A 0.3m patch lies about

0.6 mile SW of the W end of Numini. A 0.9m patch lies about

0.75 mile NW of Jaunan, and a 3.2m shoal lies about 0.5 mile

W of Pulau Waider. A patch, with a depth of 4.6m, lies about

midway between Awaar and Kopataar. A rock lies about 0.75

mile SW of the S end of Numini.

Teluk Cenderawasih—South and West Shores

10.48 Between Tanjung Bumi and Tanjung Hamuku

(Hamoekoe), 15 miles to the W, is low and devoid of conspicuous points. A fairly wide mud bank skirts the shore here

and there, but no detached dangers have been discovered along

this stretch of coast. Vessels approaching the coast, however,

should exercise caution because the mud bottom shelves

steeply in many places, the water is, at times, muddied to a

distance of 5 or 6 miles by discharge from the rivers, and large,

heavy tree trunks may be encountered floating around at a considerable distance offshore. These tree trunks, which often are

seen with one end sticking in the mud, are a menace to navigation inside the 10m curve.

10.48 Among the villages along this sparsely-settled coast are

Wanggar, near the mouth of the Wanggar River 5.5 miles

WSW of Tanjung Bumi, and Hamuku (Hamoekoe), situated 2

miles W of Tanjung Hamuku which is a small but conspicuous

point. The Wanggar River can be ascended by flat-bottomed

proas for a considerable distance.

10.48 Winds—Weather.—Between Tanjung Bumi and Tanjung

Busurua (Boesoeroea), about 72 miles NW, from February to

June no predominating winds from any fixed direction were

observed. Land and sea breezes were however, noticeable. The

sea breeze blew from 1200 to 2000 from NE to NW, the land

breeze blew for the remainder of the day from SW to SE.

Heavy squalls occurred principally between 1600 and 1800,

mostly from W to NW. The rain fell chiefly between 1600 and

0800, and was heaviest between 2000 and 2400.
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 237

Pub. 164

10.48 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 6.9m, on the bank

at the E side of the trough-shaped depression abreast the mouth

of the Wanggar River. This area is for temporary anchorage.

10.49 Between Tanjung Hamuku and Tanjung Busurua the

coast sweeps around through a W, NW, and N direction for

about 80 miles. It is broken only by a few inlets and by two

peninsulas which terminate, respectively, in Tanjung Maniburu

(Maniboeroe) and Tanjung Mangguar (Manggoear).

10.49 Most of this stretch of coast is rather closely backed by high

hills and mountains. Among the more conspicuous of these are

the 204m hill S of Tanjung Maniburu, the 1,100m Jauer Peak,

6.25 miles S of Tanjung Mangguar, and the high mountain

ridge that lies along the longitudinal axis of the peninsula that

forms the E side of Teluk Wandamen (Wandamen Bay); this

ridge has numerous peaks the highest of which has an elevation

of 2,239m. Yauer Peak, one of the most remarkable points in

Teluk Cenderawih (Sarera), can be seen from all directions at a

great distance; the slopes of this peak extend N to the Drie

Gebruders (Gebroeders), 400m, 411m, and 428m, respectively,

located about 1.5 miles SW of Tanjung Mangguar; these peaks

are good landmarks from the N and SE. The S slopes of Yauer

Peak connect with a fairly high mountain ridge near the coast

about midway between Tanjung Maniburu and Tanjung Mangguar. South of this ridge and across the inlet W of Tanjung

Maniburu the land again rises near the coast; the highest peak

of this ridge has a flat top and rises to an elevation of 712m.

10.49 Vessels seldom if ever come into this part of Teluk Cenderawasih. Vessels do not, as a rule, come farther S than Teluk

Wandamen.

10.49 Caution.—A chain of islands, reefs, and banks extends from

a position abreast the coast about 8 miles W of Tanjung

Hamuku to about the parallel of Tanjung Busurua, roughly

paralleling the coast at an average distance of about 13 miles.

Northward of the parallel of Tanjung Busurua, at which

position there is a rather wide break in the chain of dangers,

they continue along a NE line to the reefs and islets comprising

Pulau Mios Auri (Aoeri). In the daytime the navigation of the

area along the E side of this barrier reef presents no difficulties.

10.49 The S end of the chain consists of a group of dangerous reefs

that extend for a distance of 2 to 4 miles off the shore between

Tanjung Hamuku and Tanjung Mariburu. Numburi (Noeboeri)

(3°18'S., 135°06'E.) is a small, wooded islet located near the S

end of a drying reef 9.75 miles WNW of Tanjung Hamuku and

3 miles offshore. Nu Sariwanni (Noe Sariwanni) is another

small wooded islet that lies on the central part of a drying reef

4.5 miles N of Nuburi; a drying reef nearly 2 miles long lies

about midway between these islets. A shoal, with a depth of

less than 0.3m, lies 0.75 mile W of Nu Sariwanni. Karei (Enkhuizer), located 7 miles N of Nu Sariwanni, is a large,

irregularly-shaped drying reef on which are two light-colored

sand banks; between Nu Sariwanni and Karei there are several

smaller drying reefs. Nu Tabari (Noe Tabari), lying 2.75 miles

E of the E edge of Karei and separated from it by a clear passage, is a small, wooded islet on a drying steep-to reef. Aikei, a

light-colored sand bank on a drying reef, lies 2.5 miles NW of

the NW extremity of Karei.

10.50 Kumbur (Koemboer) (3°01'S., 135°03'E.), located

near the center of an elongated drying reef about 3 miles N of

Aikei, is a low, sandy islet which, because of its high trees, is

the most important landmark on this part of the barrier reef. A

shoal with a depth of less than 0.3m lies 0.5 mile W of Kumbur. There is a 2.3m shoal 2.25 miles W of Kumbur and a 6.9m

shoal 0.75 mile S of this island.

10.50 Pasir Nabadi, a coral reef on which there is a large lightcolored drying sand bank, is located 14.5 miles NW of Kumbur. Between these two reefs there is a deep passage in which

the only danger is a 2.7m patch, located 7.5 miles E of Tanjung

Mangguar.

10.51 Pulau Angra Meos (2°42'S., 134°50'E.), located

about 11 miles N of Tanjung Mangguar, is a large hilly uninhabited island; it has a maximum elevation of 205m but has no

conspicuous peaks. The W, E, and NE points of the island are

sandy and covered with tall trees. A detached 7.8m patch lies 3

miles NE of the E extremity of Angra Meos.

Pulau Kabuai (Kaboeai) (2°33'S., 134°53'E.) is a low sandy

islet covered with tall trees, which makes it an important

landmark for the N end of the barrier reef; it is located at the S

end of a small steep-to drying reef 9.5 miles N of the E extremity of Angra Meos. Within a distance of 3 miles N and NW

of Kabuai are several reefs on two of which there are drying

sand banks that are marked by breakers at high tide. West of

Kabuai are several shoals, all lying within a distance of 4 miles

of the islet. A 1.8m patch lies 1 mile SE and a 7.8m shoal lies

3.5 miles SW of Kabuai.

10.51 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken near all of the abovementioned islets except Nu Tabari. All of these islets are uninhabited, but on some of them there are temporary shelters that

are used by the natives who occasionally come out to them on

fishing expeditions.

10.51 Care should, however, be taken to avoid the 0.3m patch

about 0.75 mile W of Nu Sariwanni, and a similar patch about

0.5 mile W of Kumbur; there are also other patches farther W.

Reference should be made to the chart.

10.52 The coast between Tanjung Hamuku and Tanjung

Maniburu, about 15 miles WNW has three unimportant indentations, the largest and westernmost of which is Tu Wasoi

(Toe Wasoi). It is very dangerous to attempt to approach this

stretch of coast, because it is fronted by numerous reefs and

has not been fully examined.

10.52 Tanjung Maniburu (Maniboeroe) (3°14'S., 134°57'E.), a

steep point that is closely backed by a 204m hill, is the extremity of the irregularly-shaped Kwatisore Peninsula.

Teluk Kwatisore (Kwatsore Bay) (3°15'S., 134°57'E.) is an

indentation, about 1.25 miles wide, in the W side of the

Kwatisore Peninsula immediately S of Tanjung Maniburu.

There are four detached reefs in the S and SW parts of the bay.

Three lie close together about 0.25 and 0.4 mile, respectively,

NNW of the village. About 0.4 mile NE of the middle of the

village lie the third and fourth detached reefs, which have

depths of less than 0.9m. Kwatisore village is situated on the S

side of the bay.

10.52 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken, in 38m, soft mud,

about 0.2 mile WSW from the village. This anchorage is unsheltered and the holding ground is poor. In order to avoid E

squalls which sometimes blow over the lowlands S of Tanjung
238 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

Maniburu, vessels should anchor N of the detached reef, in

about 40m.

10.52 Directions.—Vessels bound for Teluk Kwatisore from N

round Tanjung Mangguar at a distance of at least 1 mile and

then steer a course of 180° until Pulau Numangguri (Noemanggoeri Island), located 6.25 miles S of Tanjung Mangguar, is

abeam, when the 204m hill at Tanjung Maniburu, bearing 160°,

should be steered for. At that distance the point appears as a

small island. This course, on which the peaks of the Drie Gebruders, located close SW of Tanjung Mangguar, are directly

astern, is continued until Pulau Nusir, located about 5 miles

NW of Tanjung Maniburu, is abeam and then course 180° is

resumed. When Nu Sariwanni is almost in range with Tanjung

Maniburu course is changed to the SE in order to proceed to

the anchorage.

10.52 Vessels coming from the E pass through the barrier reef S of

Nu Sariwanni on course 279° and then steer toward Tanjung

Maniburu, rounding that point at sufficient distance to clear the

0.9m shoal that lies 0.5 mile NW of the point.

10.52 The coast between Teluk Kwatisore and Tanjung Mangguar

trends S, W, and N for a total distance of 28 miles; it is fronted

by several islands and has a number of indentations the largest

of which lies W of the Kwatisore Peninsula. Between Teluk

Kwatisore and Tanjung Womosisore, about 10.5 miles NW of

Tanjung Maniburu, the coast is covered with mangroves, and

almost uninhabited. The only settlement along this coast is a

small one on the S shore of Teluk Waobu (Waoboe), 5 miles

WSW of Tanjung Maniburu.

10.52 Tanjung Womosisore (3°06'S., 134°50'E.), located 10.5

miles NW of Tanjung Maniburu, is a very conspicuous, bare,

light green-colored point at the end of a small, low, and narrow

peninsula. Teluk Wororomi, an inlet just S of Tanjung Womosisore, dries over its greater part.

10.53 Pulau Nusir (Noesir), a drying reef 0.75 mile long

about 5 miles NW of Tanjung Maniburu, is high and wellwooded; it is a good landmark. Pulau Manimaje and Pulau

Nurage (Noerage) are two islands connected by a drying reef

and located in the bight N of Tanjung Womosisore at a distance

of about 2 miles offshore; Pulau Nurage is 252m high. About 1

mile E of Nurage is an elongated drying reef on which are three

wooded rocky islets, Kirkir, Rori, and Runggabor

(Roenggabor), and several other rocky formations. In a valley

on the NW shore of the inlet, W of the N end of Nurage, is

Jauer Manokwari village, off which small craft with local

knowledge can anchor. Close NE of Tanjung Yauer (Jauer),

located 1.5 miles NE of the N end of Pulau Nurage, is Pulau

Numangguri (Noemanggoeri), which is 82m high and is conspicuous from the N.

Tanjung Mangguar (Manggoear) (2°53'S., 134°51'E.) is a

high rocky point at the NE extremity of the peninsula that

forms the E side of Teluk Umar. A narrow reef on which there

are several rocky islets extends NE for a distance of 0.5 mile

from the point.

10.53 Caution.—Detached shoals and patches, which dry, extend

about 5.75 miles N of Tanjung Maniburu and in the bight

between this point and Pulau Nusir.

10.53 A patch, with a depth of 1.8m, and a patch with a depth of

4.1m lie about 1.25 miles SSE and 0.75 mile, respectively, of

Tanjung Womosisore.

10.54 Teluk Umar (Oemar Bay) (2°55'S., 134°44'E.) is a

roughly rectangular indentation in the coast S of the point at

the N end of the peninsula, close W of Tanjung Mangguar, and

Tanjung Woibi (2°54'S., 134°41'E.), located 9.75 miles to the

WSW. The bay ranges in width from 8.25 miles at the N end to

5.25 miles at its head, and it extends south 6 miles from the line

joining the entrance points.

10.54 Pulau Rorenggi is a rocky islet close off the E entrance point

of the bay. The E shore, S of Rorenggi, is likewise rocky and is

marked by two indentations, Teluk Nappan and Teluk Singgajebi, it is closely backed by a mountainous ridge. The S

shore of the bay is a steeply rising, sandy beach that is unbroken except at Tanjung Yarior, located at the head of the bay,

where there is a rocky section on which there is a conspicuous

white patch that can be made out at a considerable distance.

The W side of the bay to and including Tanjung Woibi, the W

entrance point, is low and covered with mangroves; immediately S of Tanjung Woibi is a small inlet named Teluk

Nanggu (Nanggoe Bay).

10.55 The land around Teluk Umar is moderately well

settled. On the W coast, just S of Teluk Nanggu, is the village

of Nanggubi. On the S shore of the bay are Jaratur (Jaratoer);

Armini, which is easily identified by a small group of trees;

Bawe; and Wakobi. On the E shore of Teluk Umar, at the head

of the small Teluk Nappan, is the village of Nappan. Boats can

land abreast Yaratuar (Jaratoear) village. Fresh fruit and vegetables are obtainable at the villages.

Mount Yauer (Jauer) (2°59'S., 134°48'E.), about 1,100m

high, rises about 6.5 miles SSW of Tanjung Mangguar; it is one

of the most prominent landmarks in Teluk Cenderawasih, and

can be identified from all directions. At the N end of the peninsula stand the Three Brothers, the highest of which attains an

elevation of 427m; these peaks are prominent from N and SE.

10.55 Anchorage.—Anchorage can be taken anywhere in the bay

close to the shore, in 29 to 49m. Vessels entering the bay

should steer in on course 180°, making directly for the white

patch near Tanjung Jarior. 

10.55 Caution.—An 8.2m shoal is located nearly midway between

the E and W shores 1.75 miles from the head of the bay;

although there are several shoals and rocks close to the shores

of the bay, this is the only detached off-lying shoal in the bay.

10.55 A reef, with a depth of 2.7m, marked by discoloration, lies

7.5 miles E of Tanjung Mangguar. Pasir Nabadi is a coral reef

on which there is a bright patch of sand which dries, lying 6.5

miles NE of Tanjung Mangguar. About 1.5 miles NE of the

reef is a shoal with a depth of 14.6m.

Teluk Cenderawasih—West Shore

10.56 The coast between Tanjung Woibi and Tanjung

Busurua (Boesoeroea) (2°29'S., 134°38'E.) is steep, uninhabited, and lacking in anchorage places. It is clear of dangers

N of Goni village, situated 2 miles NNW of Tanjung Woibi.

10.56 A detached 5m patch lies about 1.25 miles N of Goni village.

10.56 From Tanjung Busurua to Tanjung Oransbari, 71 miles to the

NNW, the coast is high and is fronted by the larger Pulau Roon,

Pulau Waar, and Pulau Rumberpon (Roemberpon), and a

number of smaller islands and reefs. Roon lies off the N end of

a peninsula which forms the large Teluk Wandamen (Wan-
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 239

Pub. 164

damen Bay). A deep and clear channel will be found off this

coast, leading E of Pulau Wairundi (Wairoendi) and Pulau

Waar into Teluk Wandammen, or E of those two islands and

Roon and to the S part of Teluk Cenderawasih.

Teluk Yoppingar (Joppingar) (2°29'S., 134°36'E.) is entered

between Tanjung Busurua and a point about 3.5 miles WNW.

10.56 The peninsula on the E side of Teluk Wandamen consists

mainly of Pegunungan Wondiwoi a range of mountains which

attains an elevation of 2,239m. At the head of this bay is a low

area with only a few elevated sections. Along the W side of the

bay and the coast to the N a range of hills and mountains lies a

short distance inland. These mountains are of little importance

as far as navigation is concerned, but the numerous points and

islands are sufficient for that purpose. Southwestward of

Tanjung Oransbari, however, where the land adjacent to the sea

is low, are two hills, Sek Fur (Foer) and Masimi, 468m and

200m high, which will serve as landmarks.

10.56 Pulau Roon (2°25'S., 134°35'E.) is a very irregularly-shaped

island, lying NW of Tanjung Busurua and separated from the

peninsula on the E side of Teluk Wandammen by Selat Numamuran (Noemanoeran Strait), which is deep and clear. The island is hilly and rises to a height of 380m.

10.56 Pulau Rariei, Pulau Mansineer, and Pulau Rariau are high

rocky islands on the NW side of Pulau Roon; Numberapi

(Noemberapi) and Auri (Aoeri), two rocky formations, 35m

and 23m high, lying N and NE of Pulau Rariau, constitute good

landmarks.

10.56 Rippon, and another islet E of it, lie close W of the SW point

of Roon and form part of the N shore of Selat Numamuran.

Pinai, a high islet 0.75 mile N of Rippon, lies 0.5 mile W of the

S entrance of Teluk Kayob to which it is connected by a reef

with a depth of 0.9m.

10.56 Labuan Yende (Jende Roads) (2°22'S., 134°32'E.) on the S

side of the large bight on the NW side of Pulau Roon, is best

approached from the W by passing S of Pulau Rariei. A

conspicuous church stands about 0.25 mile W of Jende.

10.56 Yende (Jende) village, abreast of the roads, consists of the

houses of the natives built on poles in the water, and the

dwellings of other people on the narrow sandy beach. In back

of it the steep cliffs rise to a considerable height. Drinking

water can be obtained from a waterfall.

10.57 Kepulauan Auri (Mios Aoeri) (2°02'S., 134°44'E.),

NE of Pulau Roon and E of Pulau Waar, is separated from

those islands by a deep and clear passage. The group consists

of several islands and a number of shoals lying on a bank of

soundings with very irregular depths. The W edge of the bank

is very steep-to and has practically a continuous shoal of 9.1m,

and less close within it. The three southernmost islands are

low, but the other islands, farther to the N, are steep and rocky.

Pulau Maransabadi, the largest, has a height of 125m. These

islands are not inhabited, but are frequently visited by people

from Pulau Roon.

10.57 Miei Village (2°44'S., 134°30'E.) (World Port Index No.

53000) is the storage place for products of the district on the E

side of Teluk Wandammen. The coastal section is rich in sago

palms; nutmeg and bark are brought down from the higher

sections. Fishing is carried on by the natives near the beach. A

Copyright Papua Eco Tour

Yende (Jende) village
240 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

government official is stationed at Miei, and a government

vessel makes regular call at the roads. The European houses

and mission school are situated on the hills beyond the village.

10.57 For the most part the tidal currents in the roads are negligible. There is a sandy beach, unobstructed by reef, in front of

Miei and lighters are landed here.

10.57 A 175m long stone pier is situated at Wassior, a place about

0.75 mile N of Miei, and there is a partially completed jetty

nearby.

10.57 Good drinking water can be obtained from a water line at

Miei.

10.58 Teluk Wandamen (Wandamen Bay) (2°45'S.,

134°28'E.) lies W of the peninsula off the extremity of which

Pulau Roon is located. Its W shore is steep but the E shore is

bordered by a strip of low land which is thickly populated

though little can be seen of the villages. The bay itself is comparatively clear and deep.

10.58 Pulau Yop (Jop) lies in the entrance to the bay and rises to a

height of 145m at its N end.

Labuan Miei (Miei Roads) (2°44'S., 134°30'E.) lie in a

bight of the E shore 12 miles SE of Pulau Yop. A light green

spot on the slopes of the mountains SE of the village

constitutes a good landmark.

Labuan Windissi (Windissi Roads) (2°25'S., 134°13'E.), 11

miles NW of Pulau Yop, may be located by the high Tanjung

Ronsore which lies SE of it. Off the village of Windissi are a

number of low but heavily-wooded islets, all surrounded by

drying reefs in which navigable channels and inlets are found.

10.58 Between Labuan Windissi and the S end of Pulau Rumberpon only a few scattered habitations are found along the

steep coast and there are no anchorages except that mentioned

below. Along the S part of this stretch of coast the reefs are

well marked by discoloration, but farther N where the islets

and reefs fronting it are more numerous discoloration cannot

be depended on to locate the reefs as the water is rather muddy.

Pulau Waar (Mios Waar) (2°05'S., 134°22'E.), NW of Pulau

Roon and about 12 miles off the N part of this stretch of coast,

is hilly and attains a height of 450m, but there are no conspicuous peaks; a red patch on the SE side 3 miles NNE of Tanjung

Riarwepam is a good landmark. The fairly large village of

Wandoswaar lies on the NW side, the small village of Nusumboni (Noesoemboni) lies on the W side, and the large village of

Yomber (Jomber) lies on the E side.

Pulau Wairundi (Wairoendi) (1°48'S., 134°26'E.), 11 miles

N of Pulau Waar, is located more toward the SE end of a

narrow bank of soundings. It is a low, sandy, uninhabited island

covered with tall trees; it constitutes an important landmark.

10.59 Pulau Rumberpon (Roemberpon) (1°50'S., 134°10'E.),

NW of Pulau Waar and close to the Irian Jaya coast, is hilly at its

N end and W side, but its eastern side is comparatively low and

covered with mangroves. The 224m hill at the N end of the island

constitutes a good landmark, even at a great distance. Yaliali

(Jaliali) and Senebuai (Seneboeai) villages on the E coast can be

reached by channels through the drying reefs; Yembekiri (Jembekiri) and Yamakaan (Jamakaan) villages lie on the W coast.

Jenimerai, a rocky islet, lies on the coastal reef close NE of

Tanjung Tjidi, the NW point of Rumberpon.

10.59 The Teluk Cenderawasih National Marine Park and Conservation Area has been established along 120 miles of coastline,

coastal waters and off-lying islands and reefs. The northernmost boundary of the park extends from the N coast of Pulau

Rumberpon SE towards the village of Hamuku.

10.59 Selat Rumberpon (Roemberpon Strait) (1°43'S.,

134°09'E.), which separates Pulau Rumberpon from the Irian

Jaya coast, has a large number of islets and dangers which

greatly encumber its narrow S end. This channel is tortuous

and demands local knowledge.

Teluk Mawi (Mawi Bay) (1°39'S., 134°07'E.) is located between Tanjung Syeri (Tanjung Sjeri) and Tanjung Runaki (Tanjung Roenaki), the N and S entrance points, respectively. The

1,400m peak of the Pegu-Nungan Mawi (Mawi Mountains)

rises 3 miles W of the bay. Anchorage may be obtained in

Teluk Mawi about 0.25 mile S of Tanjung Syeri, in a depth of

58m, sand.

Labuan Syeri (Sjeri Roads) (1°39'S., 134°06'E.) lies in the

N part of Teluk Mawi W of Tanjung Syeri. The roads are protected from the N swells that are encountered in Teluk Cenderawasih. With E or S winds there is a shore sea in the roads.

There is no current.

10.59 Tanjung Yori (Tanjung Jori), 7 miles NE of Tanjung Syeri, is

low and marked by high, dead tree trunks.

10.59 Rapaowi, a village on the coast, is situated about 2.5 miles N

of Tanjung Jori. A road connects Rapaowi and Ransiki, about 3

miles W. A government official resides at Ransiki. There is a

boat passage, about 0.12 mile wide, abreast of the village of

Rapaowi, which is entered through the coastal reef.

10.60 Tanjung Oransbari (1°20'S., 134°17'E.) is low but

has a tall, conspicuous tree on it. On the S side of the point is

an inlet where proas often wait for more favorable weather

before continuing their journey N. Vessels rounding the point

should pass either close to it or at a considerable distance off to

avoid the shoals. A light is shown from a white beacon on Tanjung Oransbari.

10.60 Winds—Weather.—Along the W coast of Teluk Cenderawasih between Teluk Wandamen and Tanjung Saweba

(0°43'S., 133°57'E.), the weather conditions are subject to

change both from place to place as well as from hour to hour.

During a survey in May and June, when proceeding SE from

Tanjung Saweba, SE winds were experienced, moderate at

first, later stiff, with a sea, but little swell. In December, there

was a heavy N swell as far S as the parallel of Tanjung Oransbari.

10.60 During a survey from Tanjung Onsbari to Tanjung Mangguar, in January and February the wind blew with moderate

force from a N and NW direction. Periods of strong NW winds,

locally known as "Timorlaut" occurred regularly; there was

much rain.

10.60 Tides—Currents.—Currents set across the shoals and

around Tanjung Oransbari sometimes cause a difficult sea

when the monsoon winds are strong.

10.60 Caution.—Off the W side of Pulau Roon are a number of

islands and several dangerous shoals and rocks. De Klerk Reef

(Karang Num) (2°15'S., 134°28'E.), the outer danger, lies 5.35

miles WNW of the N end of the island and has a depth of 11m.

10.60 In Teluk Yoppingar, a patch with a depth of 4.9m, marked by

discoloration, lies about 0.3 mile NNW of Tanjung Busuru.
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 241

Pub. 164

Three detached reefs extend on an E and W line from the W

shore of the bay. The easternmost reef, with a least known

depth of 9.1m, lies about 2.25 miles W of Tanjung Busuru;

each of the other reefs has least known depth of 3.0m.

10.60 A shoal, with a least depth of 5m, lies about 0.4 mile SW of

the S end of Pulau Rariau. Shoals, with depths of 6.8m and

5.9m, lie about 1.75 miles SW and 1 mile S, respectively, of the

S extremity of Pulau Rariau. A shoal, with a depth of 5.9m, lies

about 1.5 miles SE of the same point.

10.60 There are several detached shoals with depths of less than

5.9m within 15 miles NE through SE of Pulau Maransabadi. A

drying reef lies E of the S end of the bank.

10.60 A string of reefs, some of which dry at LW, extends about 20

miles SE from the bank of soundings mentioned above. Among

these reefs are two islets, Pulau Kuwom (Koewom) and Pulau

Rorebo, 7 and 16 miles SE of Pulau Matas, the southernmost

island of Pulau Auri. Both of these islets are low but wellwooded. The N end of this string of reefs is a drying reef 2.5

miles N of Pulau Kuwom; the S end consists of three small

drying patches 22 miles E of Tanjung Busurua. A deep channel

separates these reefs from those near Pulau Kabuai (Kaboeai).

There are patches in this area that uncover. Reference should

be made to the chart.

10.61 Tydeman Reefs (Karang Gajebi) (2°09'S.,

135°15'E.), about 20 miles E of Pulau Iweri, the southeasternmost island of Pulau Auri, is a string of reefs, 10 miles in

length, lying in an area which is normally deep and clear. They

consist of a number of drying and very shoal dangers. The

westernmost group of the string has a least depth of 1.4m; the

NE danger is a drying reef, marked by a light. 

10.61 Some shoals of 1.8 to 6.9m lie up to 3.4 miles off the E side

of Teluk Wandamen N of Tanjung Sobiei; near the shore are

several drying reefs. A wide mud bank and some islets front

the shore at the head of the bay. A reef, with a least depth of

2.7m, lies on the W shore about midway in the bay. The rivers

Wosimi and Ambbumi (Ambboemi) discharge here. About

2.25 miles from the head of the bay and nearly 1 mile from the

W shore lies Pulau Abuwami (Aboewami), a small islet with

reefs N and NW of it. Five miles farther to the N are two

patches of 0.9 and 1.5m. Uresi (Oeresi) is a drying rock near

the W shore 4.25 miles still farther to the N. A 2.7m shoal

patch lies close offshore, about 1.25 miles SSE of Uresi.

10.61 In the entrance to the bay is Pulau Yop with a drying reef

extending nearly 2 miles to the N; a 7.8m shoal lies 0.5 mile

farther to the N. There is a deep and clear channel on each side

of Pulau Jop.

10.61 In Labuan Miei (Miei Roads), an area from about 0.1 mile

offshore, W for about 2 miles, and N and S for about 3 miles,

has a clear swept depth of 14m.

10.61 About 2.5 miles SE of Tanjung Kananisoe is a reef with a

least depth of 1.5m, which discolors well; about 3 miles N of

the roads is a 7.3m shoal which is not marked by discoloration.

10.61 The N coast of Pulau Waar is clear, and along the E coast the

dangers with depths of 9.1m or less lie within a mile off the

shore. Shoals of less than 7.3m extend 3 miles off the S point.

Off the W coast the dangers are more numerous and shoals of

4.6 to 11m lie up to 6.5 miles offshore.

10.61 Reefs and shoals of less than 9.1m extend up to 3.4 miles

NW from Pulau Wairundi (Wairoendi).

10.61 The reefs near Pulau Rumberpon (Roemberpon) are not

marked by discoloration.

10.61 There is a least depth of 0.9m in the fairway of Selat Rumberpon (Roemberpon Strait); the reefs are usually well marked

by discoloration and there is not much current. Vessels entering

from the N must take care to avoid the dangers in the N part.

The fairway then leads W of Nusero Ketjiland and Nusero

Besar. When abreast of Kasibi and Tanjung Pekiriwaisai favor

the W shore, pass W and S of Apong, and then out at the S

entrance between Batu (Batoe) and Masoon or between the

latter and Tanjung Sassoi.

10.62 Tanjung Runaki (Roenaki) (1°41'S., 134°06'E.) is

formed by a sloping rock, off which a coastal reef extends

some distance. Surf breaks on this reef much of the time. A

detached 5.9m shoal and a 1.8m detached shoal lie about 0.5

mile NNE and close SE, respectively, of the coastal reef. A

18.7m bank lies between the above-mentioned shoals.

10.62 A bank of soundings, on which current rips are often seen,

extends about 5 miles SE of Tanjung Yori. On the bank are

three shoals of 11.9m, 9.6m, and 4.6m. Vessels can pass close

to the point, between it and the above shoals. A small military

garrison is situated at the village of Momi, 4 miles SW of the

point.

10.62 Batu Haiwai (Batoe Haiwai) is a drying reef 4.5 miles NNE

of Tanjung Yori. There is a deep and clear channel between it

and the coast.

10.62 Depths of from 6.1 to 20m extend up to 1 mile from Rapaowi.

10.62 Extending E from Tanjung Oransbari is a bank of soundings

on which are some shoal patches with depths as little as 5m.

10.62 Anchorage.—The only anchorage on the E coast of Pulau

Roon is in Teluk Menarbu (Menarboe Bay). On the W coast

there is anchorage, in a depth of 5.5m, at the head of Teluk

Kayob (Kajob Bay) and at several places in the large bight on

the NW side of the island.

10.62 In Labuan Yende (Jende Roads), a vessel that is not too large

can anchor, in 46m, between two projecting points of the shore

reef. The roads are dangerous during squally weather, as the

holding ground is not very good.

10.63 On the E side of Teluk Wandamen, at the N end of the

peninsula forming this side, are the two narrow bays of Teluk

Raimu (Raimoe) and Teluk Van Dosterzee (Ainsendammen),

which are deep and clear, and afford safe anchorage. There are

no permanent settlements on the high shores which form these

bays.

10.63 On the W side there is a safe anchorage W of Pulau Sombroko, an island 4 miles NW of Pulau Yop. Teluk Watiriraro

and Teluk Kurio, two narrow but clear inlets, lie 1 and 5 miles

S of Sombroko; their shores are uninhabited. These anchorages require local knowledge.

10.63 Other than the above, anchorage can be found most anywhere along the shores of the bay, in depths of 55 to 60m.

10.63 In Labuan Miei, suitable anchorage, in a depth of 29.3m,

mud, will be found abreast the village.

10.64 In Labuan Windissi, SE of the SE islet lying off the

village there is suitable anchorage for large vessels, in 46m.

Smaller vessels can proceed into the inlet W of this anchorage;
242 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

here there are depths of 10.1 to 11m. The edges of the reefs are

not very well marked by discoloration.

10.64 Anchorage may be found off Kali Werror, close S of Mamisi

village and 7.5 miles NNW of Windissi. At this place the rocky

coast is broken by a sandy beach, 0.35 mile in length, which

vessels can approach on a SW bearing. Anchorage can be taken

at most any depth and distance offshore, as the bottom rises

gradually and consists of sand and mud. Large vessels can

anchor in 35 to 40m. Local knowledge is necessary.

10.64 Anchorage may be found most anywhere near the drying

coastal reef off Pulau Rumberpon, even though the depths are

great.

10.64 Labuan Syeri (Labuan Sjeri) offers good anchorage, in

depths of 49 to 80m. The most protected anchorage lies about

0.25 mile due S of Syeri (Sjeri) village, in about 59m, mud and

sand. Elsewhere the sea and swells will be felt sooner. The

shore bank between Sjeri village and Tanjung Sjeri is steep,

composed of sand, and free of stones. Boats and lighters can be

landed on the beach here.

10.64 Anchorage may be taken, in 55m, about 0.15 mile offshore

abreast a small boat pier situated at the village of Momi about 4

miles SW of Tanjung Jori.

10.64 Anchorage can be obtained, in 7.3 to 14.6m, about 135m SE

of the entrance of the boat passage situated abreast the village

of Rapaowi.

10.65 The coast between Tanjung Oransbari and Tanjung

Saweba, a distance of 43 miles, is backed by high mountains,

some of which extend very close to the shore. Of these mountains, Pegunungan Arfak (Arfak Mountains), which rise to a

height of 2,950m, are rather prominent. These high mountains

are usually enveloped by clouds, which render them of little

value to navigation. The coastal hills may be of some use as

landmarks, however. In general, vessels can navigate close

along this coast.

10.65 The coast for about 28 miles NNW of Tanjung Oransbari is

generally low but the hills come close to the shore in some

places. About 5 miles NW of Tanjung Oransbari is Wantoki, a

conspicuous grove of trees near the end of a range of hills.

About 10 miles, 14 miles, and 22 miles NW of the point are

conspicuous openings in the woods at War Moi, War Nasi, and

War Mupi (Moepi). The bottom along this coast is too steep for

anchorage.

10.65 Tanjung Memori (0°52'S., 134°08'E.) is the NE projection

of the entrance to Teluk Doreh (Doreh Hum). It is the low

wooded point of a hilly peninsula with two rather vague summits; the W of these two summits is 230m in height and has a

conspicuous tree on it.

10.65 Pulau Mansinam (0°54'S., 134°06'E.) lies SW of Tanjung

Memori and forms the E side of Teluk Doreh, a hilly island that

rises to 75m at its N end. This latter elevation has a conspicuous tree on it.

 The reefs are hard to make out, but the E and N side of

Pulau Mansinam can be approached close to Pulau Wappi, W

of the N end of Pulau Mansinam, is low and covered with

coconut trees on the N side and with mangroves on the S side.

10.65 A small detached 9.1m shoal patch lies about 2 miles SSE of

Tanjung Memori Light.

Menokwari (Manokwari) (0°52'S., 134°05'E.)

World Port Index No. 53010

10.66 Menokwari, a commercial port and settlement, lies in

the inlet on the N side of Teluk Doreh. It is the administrative

capital of Irian Jaya. The housing area consists of rows of

houses on each side of a road extending along the shore. Menokwari is the site of a repair base.

10.66 Depths—Limitations.—New Wharf, situated on the W side

of the harbor to the N of the repair yard, is a T-head offshore

wharf. It will accomodate large vessels and has full facilities.

10.66 Old Government Pier, situated on the E side of the harbor,

has a berthing length of about 70m with a depth alongside of

about 4.3m.

10.66 A T-headed pier is situated at Tanjung Rarisamberi, about

0.5 mile SSE of Menokwari. A buoy is moored close off the

pier head.

10.66 The port can accommodate vessels up to 7,000 dwt, with a

maximum length of 150m and a maximum draft of 9.6m.

10.66 Fuel is available by road tanker. 

10.66 Aspect.—A light is shown from a white iron skeleton structure on the NE extremity of Tanjung Memori.

10.66 Range lights are shown on request at the port of Menokwari,

situated about 0.6 mile NNE of Tanjung Sanggen, the W entrance point of Labuan Menokwari. These lights in range

006.5° lead into the inlet clear of the dangers lying in the entrance.

10.66 Karang Butsuiri is a dangerous reef which lies about 0.3 mile

ESE of Tanjung Sanggen, the W entrance point to Menokwari.

10.66 Mooring buoys are situated in Labuan Menokwari, 0.25 and

0.5 mile, respectively, NNW of the light at the entrance.

Another mooring buoy is situated close SW of the range lights.

10.66 A beacon, from which a light is occasionally shown, lies

about 92m SSE of the front range beacon.

10.66 Pilotage.—Pilotage is compulsory in Menokwari for vessels

over 70 grt. Vessels should send their ETA 72 hours, 48 hours,

and 24 hours prior to arrival. Requests for pilots should be sent

6 hours prior to arrival and 3 hours prior to departure. Pilots

board in the following positons: 

1. South approach—W of Pulau Lemon.

2. East approach—N of Pulau Mansinam.

10.66 Anchorage.—Near the mouth of War Andai, in the bight S

of Teluk Doreh, there is anchorage in 35 to 55m. This little

river has a wide mouth and can be navigated for a short distance by small craft.

10.66 Anchorage in sheltered locations, with depths of 29 to 38m,

can be taken in the roads. The bottom is not good, and a vessel

may drag in strong gusts. In case of a prolonged stay or a

crowded berth, vessels should moor head and stern.

10.66 Directions.—Vessels pass S of Mansinam and W of Mios

Wappi, which is 4 miles NW of the NW point of Mansinam;

then steer 006.5° on the range to the anchorage.

Port of Manokwari

http://www.portina4.go.id/manok.htm
Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 243

Pub. 164

10.66 Mansinam and Mios Wappi may also be passed on their N

sides by steering for the light on Karang Butsuiri bearing 290°;

this leads through the swept channel. When Mios Wappi is

about abeam, alter course N to pass between Karang Butsiuri

and Tanjung Rarisamberi, the E entrance point of Menokwari,

and then to the anchorage.

10.66 From Tanjung Memori, the coast trends 14 miles NW to Tanjung Saweba. It is high and steep-to and vessels can proceed at

a short distance offshore. Only sailing proas and light-draft

vessels will find anchorage back of Pulau Auri (Mios Aoeri), a

small islet E of Tanjung Saweba. An islet, about 38m in diameter, lies about 0.5 mile 308° from the N tip of Pulau Auri.

The islet stands on a drying reef which is about 95m in diameter. Some dangers are charted off the S end of and near the

coast NW of Pulau Auri.

10.66 Tanjung Saweba, which can be approached within a short

distance, is low but is backed by hills of about 305m elevation.

The small Pulau Auri, about 3 miles SE of the point, is covered

with high trees and can be easily recognized.

10.66 A bank, with a depth of 73m, lies about 34 miles NE of Tanjung Saweba.

10.67 Kepulauan Mapia (Mapia Islands) (St. David)

(0°49'N., 134°17'E.), about 95 miles NNE of Tanjung Saweba,

consists of three islands, Pulau Pegun, Pulau Bras, and Pulau

Fanildo, which are located on an oval atoll, 9 miles in length, N

and S. The islands are low and have a number of high coconut

trees on them which can be seen from a considerable distance.

10.67 Pulau Fanildo reaches an elevation of 30m over the coconut

palms. Pulau Bras reaches a elevation of 40m and Pulau Pegun

an elevation of 30.5m over the coconut palms.

10.67 When approaching the islands, especially from the NE, great

caution should be exercised. This is especially true when approaching against a low sun or with smooth water, as the edges

of the atoll cannot be seen except at LW springs. The use of the

lead is out of the question as the atoll is steep-to.

10.67 There is usually a surf over the reef, but it does not mark the

outer edges, as it is, on the whole, inside them.

10.67 The edges of the reef dry at LW springs.

10.67 The lagoon within the atoll is filled with rocks. It is possible for

a boat to enter through a narrow winding channel on the W side,

more than 2 miles NNW of the N end of Pulau Pegun.

10.67 There is a settlement on the S part of Pulau Pegun.

10.67 Winds—Weather.—Winds observed from the middle of

June to the middle of August were principally from E and ESE.

They were often of considerable force, were accompanied by

much rain, and made landing difficult, or impossible, because

of the high surf and the rollers.

10.67 A W wind reportedly prevailed in mid-November and the

weather was in general brighter.

Menokwari—Auto-Tide Gauge
244 Sector 10. North Coast of Irian Jaya—East Boundary of Irian Jaya to Tanjung Yamursba 

Pub. 164

10.67 Tides—Currents.—During a survey, a 1.5 knot current

setting W was observed at Pulau Pegun; during another survey,

a current of the same strength was observed to be setting

constantly in a W by N direction.

10.67 Anchorage.—In general, there are no satisfactory anchorages, but small vessels can find temporary anchorage during

good weather off the N side of the atoll.

10.67 The usual landing place is near the settlement on the S part

of Pulau Pegun. Landing is accomplished at high tide but during inclement weather, or with high rollers, it is very dangerous, if not impossible.

10.67 Kepulauan Mapia is reported (1992) to lie 1 mile E of its

charted position. 

10.68 The coast between Tanjung Saweba and Tanjung

Boropen (0°43'S., 133°33'E.), 22.5 miles to the W, the coast is

very sparsely inhabited. The principal settlements along this

stretch of coast are Befoor, Warikau (which is conspicuous),

Maseni, and Sidai.

Teluk Siwi (Kleine Geelvink Bay) (0°44'S., 133°44'E.), 13

miles W of Tanjung Saweba and S of Tanjung Wibain (Wilbain), is much frequented by proas but cannot be used by larger

vessels as the shore is steep.

10.68 West of Tanjung Sidai, between the point of the same name

and Tanjung Boropen, there is a very small proa harbor, with a

depth of 14.6m.

10.68 Anchorage.—Suitable anchorage for large vessels can be

found W of Tanjung Boropen.

10.69 From Tanjung Boropen, the coast trends W for 11

miles and then NW for 12 miles to Tanjung Manganeki. The

settlements along this coast are Kaironi, S of Tanjung Boropen,

and Mubrani (Moebrani), in the angle of the coastline.

10.69 Byenkorf Mountain (0°46'S., 133°34'E.), 415m in height,

stands 3.5 miles S of Tanjung Boropen and is conspicuous.

10.69 About 4 miles W of Mubrani there is a conspicuous double

top, 430m high, with a conspicuous tree on its W side; about

4.5 to 5.5 miles farther NW are three conspicuous peaks, with

heights of 680m, 755m, and 735m, respectively.

10.69 Tanjung Manganeki (0°36'S., 133°14'E.) may be recognized by a hill, 210m high, close in back of it.

10.69 From Tanjung Manganeki, the shore trends W with several

indentations for 19 miles to Tanjung Saukris (Saoekris)

(0°27'S., 132°58'E.). There are several settlements on this

shore and between those of Saukorem (Saoekorem) and

Warpaperi; about 6.5 miles NW of Tanjung Manganeki, there

is a projecting reef, through which there is a channel that

enables boats to land regardless of the surf.

10.69 A light is shown from Saukorem.

10.69 A conspicuous flat-topped hill, 500m high, stands 3.5 miles

W of Tanjung Manganeki and is visible for a considerable distance from E.

10.69 Tanjung Srabapan (0°31'S., 133°05'E.), 3 miles WNW of

Warpaperi settlement, is low with high trees on it.

10.69 Boltop (0°33'S., 133°02'E.), a conspicuous round-topped

peak, 930m high, stands 4 miles WSW of Tanjung Srabapan.

Piekye (Piekje) (0°28'S., 132°55'E.), a 650m elevation

standing 2.5 miles SW of Tanjung Saukris, is very conspicuous

from the E.

10.69 From Tanjung Saukris, the coast trends WNW for 15 miles

to Tanjung Weios (Valsche Kaap). There are steep rocky

sections along this coast, interrupted by low, flat places.

10.69 About 4 miles W of Tanjung Saukris is a point on which the

settlement of Wau stands.

10.69 From Tanjung Weios, the shore trends W for 18 miles to

Tanjung Yamursba (Jamoersba) (Cape of Good Hope).

10.69 The 295m hill, which stands about 6 miles E of Tanjung

Yamursba has a conspicuous round top and drops sharply

toward the sea.

10.69 On the E side of the foot of Tanjung Weios, there is a chimney-shaped rock.

10.70 Tanjung Kambrini (0°21'S., 132°37'E.), 6.5 miles W

of Tanjung Weios, is a rocky formation, 50m high, at the end of

a chain of hills.

10.70 Warmandi settlement, 2 miles E of Tanjung Kambrini, is W

of a 130m hill which drops sharply to the sea.

10.70 Anchorage.—Under favorable weather conditions, vessels

can find anchorage in certain places between Tanjung Boropen

and Tanjung Manganeki.

10.70 Anchorage can be found, in 13.7m, inside the two patches of

5.9m and 5m mentioned below.

10.70 There is good temporary anchorage almost everywhere between Tanjung Saukris and Tanjung Yamursba; in favorable

weather vessels can even anchor between the 10m and 20m

curves.

10.70 Directions.—Byenkorf Mountain, seen open of the fairly

sharp 271m peak, one of the three distinct elevations in the

ridge in back of the coast, leads clear of the shallow patches

between Mubrani (Moebrani) and Tanjung Manganeki.

10.70 To keep outside the shallow patches between Tanjung Boropen and Mubrani, keep the 150m summit of Tanjung Wibain

open of Tanjung Boropen.

10.70 Caution.—Several shallow depths lie in the vicinity of the

20m curve between Tanjung Boropen and Tanjung Manganeke.

10.70 A 1.4m shoal lies 1.25 miles SE of Tanjung Srabapan. A

5.9m patch lies E of a point located 4 miles W of Tanjung

Saukris; a 5m lies SE of the same point. Another shoal, with a

depth of 7.8m, lies 2 miles ESE of this same point.
Pub. 164

Glossaries 245

Glossaries

Indonesian

INDONESIAN English

A

air .................................................................................water

air masin................................................................ salt water

air mentah ...........................................................fresh water

air pasang ................................................................high tide

air pelajaran................................................. bay, inlet, creek

air perpani .............................................................. neap tide

air surut ....................................................................low tide

ajer ......................................................................river, water

alang.................................................................................bar

alur ........................................................................... channel

ambang......................................................................... shoal

angin..............................................................................wind

api.................................................................................. light

arus............................................................................ current

B

baharu, baru ................................................................... new

bandar, bendar....................................................harbor, port

barat ................................................................west, western

batang............................................................................ river

batu............................................................. stone, rock, islet

bengawan .................................................river, large stream

besar....................................................................large, great

beting ..................................................reef, sandbank, shoal

biduk ..................................................................... river boat

biru.................................................................................blue

bukit ............................................................... hill, mountain

bulan.............................................................................moon

D

darerah tingkat ................................. administrative division

dalam............................................................................. deep

danau..............................................................................lake

dnagkal..................................................................... shallow

darat .......................................................................landward

delapan..........................................................................eight

dua...................................................................................two

E

empat..............................................................................four

enam.................................................................................six

G

gosong......................................................... shoal, sandbank

gunung ...................................................................mountain

gunung api................................................................ volcano

H

hari ..................................................................................day

hijau .............................................................................green

hilir.................................................................... downstream

hitam ...................................................................black, dark

hujan ...............................................................................rain

hulu ...................................................upper course of a river

hutan ................................................................jungle, forest

I

inggris ....................................................................... english

J

jalan .................................................................... street, road

jambatan .....................................................................bridge

jermal.................................................fishing stake, fish trap

jernih............................................................................. clear

K

kali ................................................................................ river

kampung ....................................................................village

kapal .............................................................................. ship

kapal api................................................................steamship

kapal dadang........................................................ cargo ship

kapal lajar ....................................................... sailing vessel

kapal mualim .........................................................pilot boat

kapal muatan........................................................... freighter

kapal pandu............................................................pilot boat

kapal penambang .......................................................... ferry

kapal pangangkut.............................................. cargo vessel

kapal penumpang....................................... passenger vessel

kapal perang............................................................. warship

kapal peronda............................................coastguard vessel

kapal tangki ................................................................tanker

kapal uap...............................................................steamship

kapal udara................................................................ aircraft

karang .................................................coral, coral reef, atoll

kelelap........................................................submerged, sunk

kepulauan.......................archipelago, large group of islands

kering...............................................................................dry

ketjil............................................................................. small

kota ............................................................... city, town, fort

kuala ............ estuary, river mouth, confluence of two rivers

kulon ..............................................................................west

kuning ........................................................................ yellow

L

labuan, labuhan.................................................... anchorage

lapan .............................................................................eight

laut ....................................................................sea, seaward

lebar ...................................................................broad, wide

lima ................................................................................. fire

lubuk ..................................................................... deep pool

lumpur............................................................................mud

lurah...................................................... valley, ravine, gully

M

malam ...........................................................................night

malim.............................................................................pilot

INDONESIAN English
Pub. 164 

246 Glossaries

mas.............................................................................golden

merah ...............................................................................red

mualim .......................................................................... pilot

muara ....................................................estuary, river mouth

musim ........................................................................season

N

nelajan...................................................................fisherman

nol ..............................................................................naught

nusa ............................................................................. island

O

ombak memetjah..................................................... breakers

ombak selabu ............................................................. rollers

P

pabean ..............................................................customhouse

pagi.......................................................................... morning

paja............................................................................ swamp

pangkalang............................anchorage, landing place, pier

panjang...........................................................................long

pantai...................................................... beach, coast, shore

pantjang................................................................ stake, pile

parigi ..................................................................well, spring

parit ........................................................ ditch, small stream

pasang kering ...................................................ebb, low tide

pasang naik .............................................................high tide

pasang purnama ...................................................spring tide

pasang surut ............................................................ the tides

pasanggrahan ........................................................rest house

pasir..........................................................sand, sandy beach

pegunungan..................................................mountain range

pelabuhan ............................................roadstead, anchorage

pelabuhan udara .........................................................airport

pendaratan..................................... landing place, quay, pier

pengkapalan ............................................................shipping

perahu.............................................................................boat

perahu majang.....................................deep-sea fishing boat

perahu tambang.................................................... ferry, boat

perkapalan.......................................................fleet shipyard

petang....................................................................... evening

pinggir laut................................................................... coast

pohon, pokok ..................................................................tree

prau .............................................................boat, small craft

propinsi ...................................................................province

pulau............................................................................ island

pulau-pulau ....................................... small group of islands

puntjak ............................................................ summit, peak

puri................................................................................town

putih .............................................................................white

INDONESIAN English

R

rujut........................................................................... fish net

rawa, rawang..................................................swamp, marsh

rendah .............................................................................low

riam.............................................................waterfall, rapids

rimba................................................................jungle, forest

rumah...........................................................................house

S

sampan................................................................. small boat

satu.................................................................................. one

selat..................................................strait, narrows, channel

selatan dajh ...........................................................southwest

sembilan.........................................................................nine

sepulah.............................................................................ten

sjarbandar ........................................................harbormaster

sumur .............................................................................well

sungai............................................................................ river

T

tanjung ........................................... cape, point, promontory

teluk ....................................................... bay, bend in a river

tengah ........................................................................middle

tenggara .................................................................southeast

tepi laut ........................................................................ south

terumbu.......................................... rock awash at low water

terusan.......................................................................... canal

tiga ................................................................................three

timur ...............................................................................east

timur laut ............................................................... northeast

tinggi..............................................................................high

tjetek .........................................................................shallow

tji................................................................................ stream

tjukuh.............................................................................cape

tohor..........................................................................shallow

tokong .............................................. reef, below-water bank

tongkang .................................................. lighter (for cargo)

tua ....................................................................................old

tujuh.............................................................................seven

U

ujung ...................................................cape, point, headland

ulu ................................................... upper reaches of a river

utara ............................................................................. north

utara barat ............................................................. northwest

W

waduk......................................................................reservoir

wai ................................................................................ river

wetan...............................................................................east

INDONESIAN English
Pub. 164

Glossaries 247

Dutch

DUTCH English

A

aan.......................................................................at, near, on

ankerplaats ........................................................... anchorage

archipel...............................................................archipelago

B

baai..................................................................................bay

baak........................................................................... beacon

bank.................................................................... bank, shoal

beloodsen .......................................................embark (pilot)

berg ........................................................................mountain

binnen........................................................................... inner

blauw..............................................................................blue

bocht............................................................................. bight

boei................................................................................buoy

bol ...................................................................................ball

boom ...............................................................................tree

bosch ............................................................................forest

brug ............................................................................ bridge

brul............................................................................ whistle

buiten ........................................................................... outer

bult ...............................................................................hump

D

dag...................................................................................day

dam.............................................................dam, breakwater

de, den..............................................................................the

diep................................................................................ deep

diepgaande ........................................................... deep-draft

dijk .................................................................................dike

donker ............................................................................dark

dorp ............................................................................village

draaikalk........................................................................eddy

dremel ..............................................................................bar

drie ................................................................................three

driehoek ................................................................... triangle

droogte ......................................................................... shoal

duin ................................................................ dune, sandhill

dwars.............................................................across, athwart

E

eiland........................................................................... island

eilanden......................................................................islands

eilandje...........................................................................islet

G

gat............................................................................. channel

geel.............................................................................yellow

gebergte........................................................mountain range

getijseinen ......................................................... tidal signals

geul...............................................................narrow channel

golf................................................................................. gulf

groen ............................................................................green

gronden ....................................................................grounds

groot..............................................................................great

H

haven.......................................................................... harbor

helft.................................................................................half

het ....................................................................................the

heuvel...............................................................................hill

hoek .................................................................... cape, point

hoofd...................................................................... headland

hoog ...............................................................................high

hout .............................................................................. wood

K

kaai ............................................................................... quay

kaap............................................................... cape, headland

kake............................................................................... quay

kanaal....................................................................... channel

kegel.............................................................................. cone

kil............................................................................. channel

klein, kleine ........................................................little, small

klip........................................................................ rock, cliff

kolen .............................................................................. coal

kop ................................................................................ head

kreek ............................................................................ creek

kust ...............................................................................coast

L

laag, lage.........................................................................low

lang ................................................................................long

licht ................................................................................light

lichtboei ................................................................light buoy

lichtenlijn................................... leading lights, range lights

loods ..............................................................................pilot

loodswegen ..............................................................pilotage

M

meer ............................................................. inland sea, lake

midden .......................................................................middle

moessan ................................................................. monsoon

modder...........................................................................mud

mond ............................................................. mouth, estuary

N

nauw ........................................................................ narrows

nieuw ............................................................................. new

nood ...................................................... distress, emergency

noordoost ............................................................... northeast

noordwest ............................................................. northwest

O

olie ....................................................................................oil

ondiepte ....................................................................... shoal

ontzeggen.............................................................. forbidden

DUTCH English
Pub. 164 

248 Glossaries

oranje .........................................................................orange

oud ...................................................................................old

P

peilschaal ............................................................. tide gauge

plaat.............................................................................. shoal

plat .................................................................................. flat

polder ............................................................reclaimed land

punt .............................................................................. point

R

rak ............................................................................ channel

rechthoekig..........................................................rectangular

reddingboote ............................................................ lifeboat

rede........................................................................ roadstead

rif.................................................................................... reef

riffen..............................................................................reefs

rivier.............................................................................. river

rood, ruode.......................................................................red

rots ...............................................................................rocks

rug ................................................................................ ridge

ruitvormig .................................................. diamond-shaped

S

schaar ....................................................................... channel

schiereiland ........................................................... peninsula

schor............................................................................. shoal

sein.............................................................................. signal

smal........................................................................... narrow

spits ...........................................................................pointed

spoorweg...................................................................railway

springtij ................................................................spring tide

staart..............................................................tail (of a bank)

stad................................................................................town

steen ............................................................................. stone

steiger.....................................................................jetty, pier

steile............................................................................. steep

stompe.......................................................................... blunt

stompe boei............................................................ can buoy

straat..............................................................................strait

DUTCH English

strand ................................................................beach, shore

stroom ...........................................................current, stream

T

tijstip ...............................................................................tide

toegang........................................................................access

topteken ...................................................................topmark

toren.............................................................................tower

U

uit.....................................................................................out

V

vaart ............................................................................. canal

vaarwater......................... fairway, channel, navigable water

valsch ............................................................................ false

van .....................................................................................of

veerpont, veerschuit...................................................... ferry

verbieden .............................................................. forbidden

verkeerseinen .................................................. traffic signals

verlikker.......................................................... warning light

vlakte ................................................plain, below water flat

vliegtingen ................................................................ aircraft

vulkaan .................................................................... volcano

W

wad.........................................................drying coastal bank

wal ....................................................................... bank, wall

waterweg............................................................... waterway

watergetijden .................................................... tidal current

weg................................................................................. way

werk ..............................................................................work

wit, witte ......................................................................white

wrak ............................................................................ wreck

Z

zand................................................................................sand

zandplaat................................................................sandbank

zee....................................................................................sea

zon .................................................................................. sun

zuidoost..................................................................southeast

zuidwest................................................................southwest

zwart ............................................................................ black

DUTCH English
249

Pub. 164

How to use the Index—Gazetteer

Geographic names of navigational features are generally those used by the nation having sovereignty and are listed

alphabetically. Diacritical marks, such as accents, cedillas, and circumflexes, which are related to specific letters in certain foreign

languages, are not used in the interest of typographical simplicity.

Geographic names or their spellings do not necessarily reflect recognition of the political status of an area by the United States

Government. Positions are approximate and are intended merely as locators to facilitate reference to the charts.

To use as a Gazetteer note the position and Sector number of the feature and refer to the Chart Information diagram for the

Sector. Plot the approximate position of the feature on this diagram and note the approximate chart number.

To use as an Index of features described in the text note the paragraph number at the right. To locate this feature on the best

scale chart use the Gazetteer procedure above. 

Index—Gazetteer

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

A

ABAGA GAHEIA ISLAND 11 10 S 152 55 E 8.25

ABOROE 3 36 S 128 31 E 3.44

ADAUT ROAD 8 08 S 131 06 E 4.93

ADELAIDE PEAK 9 59 S 150 57 E 9.18

ADELE ISLET 11 27 S 154 24 E 8.55

ADOEA 1 59 S 129 54 E 2.99

AIRD HILL 7 27 S 144 21 E 6.16

AITAPE HARBOR 3 08 S 142 21 E 9.104

AITAPE ROADS 3 09 S 149 29 E 9.101

AIWA BUNA REEF 11 02 S 152 31 E 8.14

AJAWI 0 11 S 134 59 E 10.30

AKE SELAKA ROADS 1 02 N 127 57 E 2.67

ALCESTER ISLANDS 9 28 S 152 28 E 9.6

ALDUNA 3 58 S 134 06 E 5.73

ALI ISLAND 3 08 S 142 28 E 9.102

ALICE MEAD LAGOON 8 08 S 146 05 E 6.20

ALJOEI 0 10 S 130 18 E 5.10

ALLIGATOR POINT 7 56 S 147 51 E 9.50

ALOTOA 10 19 S 150 27 E 7.27

AMAHAI 3 20 S 128 55 E 3.54

AMAMAPARE 4 49 S 136 58 E 5.80

AMAR ROADS 4 05 S 131 19 E 3.62

AMBAI ISLANDS 1 55 S 136 20 E 10.34

AMBAIJAWAPPI 1 51 S 136 54 E 10.33

AMBON 3 41 S 128 10 E 3.38

AMBON ISLAND 3 37 S 128 10 E 3.35

AMBON ROADS 3 42 S 128 10 E 3.37

AMBONIA 3 41 S 128 10 E 3.38

AMBUSH POINT 8 03 S 148 03 E 9.50

AMPHLETT GROUP 9 15 S 150 50 E 9.26

AMPLETT POINT 9 39 S 150 37 E 9.22

ANASARI HARBOR 9 01 S 149 09 E 9.43

ANCHOR PATCHES 11 20 S 152 34 E 8.9

ANCHORAGE REEFS 11 11 S 151 27 E 8.3

ANSOES 1 46 S 135 46 E 10.36

ARA GUM GUM PASSAGE 11 05 S 152 33 E 8.17

ARAR TERMINAL 1 02 S 131 14 E 5.39

ARARE 1 58 S 139 00 E 10.13

ARGYLE BAY 10 32 S 149 52 E 6.56

ARIS ISLAND 3 59 S 144 59 E 9.92

ARMO 1 41 S 138 48 E 10.14

ARNDT POINT 6 30 S 147 51 E 9.69

AROA RIVER 9 04 S 146 48 E 6.27

ASAUDI 3 08 S 127 56 E 3.19

ASAUDI ROADS 3 08 S 127 56 E 3.20

ASTUBUN 8 03 S 131 16 E 4.93

AU POINT 8 46 S 146 31 E 6.22

AURORA BANK 0 43 N 129 32 E 2.85

AVA POINT 10 34 S 149 53 E 6.57

B

BAAI VAN AMBOINA 3 43 S 128 07 E 3.35

BABELSBERG STRAIT 3 10 S 142 28 E 9.102

BADEN BAY 7 28 S 147 11 E 9.58

BADILA-BEDDA-BEDDA-BONARUA 10 46 S 150 23 E 7.3

BAGABAG ISLAND 4 48 S 146 14 E 9.85

BAGAMAN ISLAND 11 08 S 152 41 E 8.20

BAIBAI VILLAGE 10 41 S 150 43 E 7.10

BAIBARA ISLAND 10 22 S 149 36 E 6.54

BALBILI 1 06 S 131 11 E 5.41

BAM ISLAND 3 35 S 144 50 E 9.94

BAM ISLET 0 56 S 131 04 E 5.44

BAMU RIVER 8 09 S 143 42 E 6.14

BANDERA 2 07 N 128 16 E 2.57

BARA SADI 7 48 S 130 48 E 4.95

BAROI RIVER 7 48 S 144 58 E 6.17

BARTLE BAY 10 06 S 150 08 E 9.32

BASILAKI ISLAND 10 38 S 151 00 E 7.18

BASILISK PASSAGE 9 32 S 147 08 E 6.34

BASSES ISLANDS 10 57 S 152 43 E 8.29

BATANME 1 50 S 130 10 E 2.92

BATAVIA REEFS 6 19 S 134 00 E 4.43

BATAVIER REEF 5 24 S 132 45 E 4.15

BATOE ITAM 3 32 S 128 21 E 3.42

BATOEDJOENKO 3 26 S 127 15 E 3.11

BATOEKAPAL 3 22 S 128 01 E 3.48

BATOEPEKAT 3 51 S 126 44 E 3.7

BATTJAWAT 8 03 S 131 11 E 4.92

BATU ANYER 1 10 S 128 29 E 2.84

BATU DUEAR 3 32 S 128 21 E 3.42

BATU KAPAL 4 29 S 129 56 E 3.68

BATU KAPAL 6 04 S 134 50 E 4.51

BATU KUBU 1 28 N 128 01 E 2.65

BATU LAYAR 2 44 S 132 38 E 5.56

BATU LOMPA 3 35 S 128 21 E 3.42

BATU SOMBO 0 18 S 127 33 E 2.29

BATUMATA POINT 10 17 S 148 58 E 6.49

BAU ISLET 7 53 S 147 43 E 9.51

BAXTER BAY 10 16 S 148 51 E 6.49

BAXTER HARBOR 10 40 S 150 09 E 6.59

BAY OF PAJAHI 0 18 N 127 42 E 2.11

BEAGLE ENTRANCE 10 02 S 147 35 E 6.41

BEAGLE ROCK 11 13 S 153 00 E 8.27

BELL POINT 7 58 S 143 55 E 6.14

BENALLA BANKS 9 35 S 150 53 E 9.59

BENALLA POINT 9 35 S 150 53 E 9.26

BENSBACH RIVER 9 07 S 141 02 E 6.2

BENTLEY ISLAND 10 43 S 151 15 E 7.40

BEO 4 14 N 126 47 E 1.5

BEPONDI 0 24 S 135 16 E 10.30

BEREBERE ANCHORAGE 2 23 N 128 40 E 2.55

BERRI BERRI ANCHORAGE 2 23 N 128 40 E 2.55

BETING SEKARO 5 35 S 127 28 E 4.2

BEVAN SOUND 7 45 S 144 30 E 6.16

BIAN RIVER 8 08 S 139 57 E 5.90

BIENEN ISLETS 7 34 S 147 26 E 9.55

BILI BILI 5 18 S 145 47 E 9.79

BINAIJA 3 10 S 129 27 E 3.18

BIRA 2 10 S 132 10 E 5.50

BIRA BIRA BAY 10 41 S 150 26 E 7.4

BLACK HEADED ROCKS 9 14 S 149 25 E 9.41

BLACK ROCKS 9 35 S 149 34 E 9.38

BLACKBURN BANK 6 52 S 133 56 E 4.45

BLAKENEY ISLET 10 26 S 151 13 E 7.35
250 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

BLIND ROCK 11 08 S 153 01 E 8.32

BLUCHER POINT 6 14 S 147 42 E 9.70

BLUPBLUP ISLAND 3 33 S 144 37 E 9.94

BOBO EINA ISLAND 11 08 S 152 44 E 8.21

BOBOA ISLET 11 29 S 153 35 E 8.45

BOBO-HAI POINT 11 20 S 153 12 E 8.51

BOEAR ISLAND 5 26 S 134 27 E 4.38

BOEMI 3 22 S 135 25 E 10.41

BOEMPEKKI 1 45 S 136 19 E 10.31

BOERA HEAD 9 23 S 147 01 E 6.31

BOESOEROEA 2 29 S 134 38 E 10.56

BOGADYIM 5 27 S 145 45 E 9.79

BOGIA HARBOR 4 17 S 144 59 E 9.91

BOGIROHODOBI POINT 9 29 S 147 08 E 6.36

BOIA-BOIA-WAGA ISLAND 10 13 S 150 54 E 7.31

BOIGU ISLAND 9 16 S 142 14 E 6.5

BOIU PASSAGE 11 07 S 152 37 E 8.19

BOLTOP 0 33 S 133 02 E 10.69

BOMATU POINT 8 24 S 151 07 E 9.13

BOMBEDARI ISLET 0 04 S 131 06 E 5.15

BONA BONA ISLAND 10 30 S 149 51 E 6.55

BONNA WAN ISLAND 11 08 S 152 39 E 8.19

BONVOULOIR ISLANDS 10 23 S 151 57 E 8.70

BOO 2 13 S 130 35 E 2.98

BOOTLESS INLET 9 31 S 147 16 E 6.37

BORI ISLAND 0 35 S 127 36 E 2.30

BOSTREM BAY 5 05 S 145 47 E 9.83

BOUGAINVILLE BAY 2 37 S 141 01 E 9.107

BOUNCE POINT 11 14 S 153 06 E 8.34

BOUSQUET BAY 11 29 S 153 16 E 8.48

BRAMBLE CAY 9 09 S 143 53 E 6.9

BRAMBLE HAVEN 11 14 S 152 00 E 8.5

BRAMBLE PATCH 11 10 S 152 30 E 8.18

BRIDGE SHOALS 11 13 S 153 04 E 8.35

BRIERLY REEFS 11 18 S 153 00 E 8.37

BRIGHT ISLET 10 32 S 151 12 E 7.38

BRISTOW ISLAND 9 08 S 143 14 E 6.7

BROKEN WATER BAY 3 57 S 144 37 E 9.92

BROOKE BANKS 10 46 S 150 31 E 7.3

BROOKER ISLAND 11 03 S 152 27 E 8.12

BRUNSWICK HARBOR 7 29 S 147 16 E 9.57

BUAR ISLAND 5 26 S 134 27 E 4.38

BUDD ISLET 0 32 N 130 44 E 5.3

BUFFALO HORN 0 05 S 130 45 E 5.6

BUIUETA POINT 10 01 S 150 57 E 9.18

BUKIT BURU 4 13 S 134 56 E 5.77

BUKU BIBINOI 0 46 S 127 43 E 2.32

BULA 3 06 S 130 30 E 3.31

BULAKA RIVER 8 08 S 139 14 E 5.88

BULAMI PASSAGE 11 19 S 153 11 E 8.41

BULI ROADS 0 52 N 128 17 E 2.69

BUMPEKKI 1 45 S 136 19 E 10.31

BUNA 8 40 S 148 24 E 9.47

BUNSEN POINT 5 41 S 146 35 E 9.74

BURNUNG POINT 7 01 S 147 04 E 9.59

BURU 3 25 S 126 40 E 3.2

BUSHY ISLETS 10 56 S 152 39 E 8.28

BUYUASI BAY 9 06 S 152 58 E 9.9

BWAEIONA POINT 10 02 S 150 57 E 9.17

BWAGAOIA HARBOR 10 41 S 152 51 E 8.61

BYENKORF MOUNTAIN 0 46 S 133 34 E 10.69

C

CALVADOS CHAIN 11 10 S 152 45 E 8.10

CAMPEDAK BAY 2 54 S 129 04 E 3.25

CANNAC ISLET 9 17 S 153 28 E 9.3

CANTON PACKET 0 39 N 128 50 E 2.71

CAPE ARKONA 6 44 S 147 22 E 9.64

CAPE BAGANOWA 11 39 S 153 33 E 8.46

CAPE BARSCHTSCH 5 04 S 145 49 E 9.84

CAPE BLACKWOOD 7 46 S 144 30 E 6.15

CAPE BREDBOW 6 33 S 147 51 E 9.68

CAPE BREDOW 6 33 S 147 51 E 9.68

CAPE CHESTERFIELD 10 00 S 150 54 E 9.17

CAPE CONCORDIA 2 40 S 141 18 E 9.105

CAPE CRETIN 6 40 S 147 51 E 9.65

CAPE CROISILLES 4 51 S 145 48 E 9.84

CAPE CUPOLA 8 02 S 145 50 E 6.20

CAPE DAWSON 9 42 S 150 45 E 9.21

CAPE DEEDES 9 48 S 150 45 E 9.20

CAPE DELIVERANCE 11 23 S 154 13 E 8.55

CAPE EBOLA 10 38 S 152 31 E 8.60

CAPE EBORA 10 38 S 152 31 E 8.60

CAPE ENDAIADERE 8 41 S 148 26 E 9.46

CAPE FRANSESKI 3 51 S 144 34 E 9.93

CAPE FRERE 10 05 S 150 11 E 9.32

CAPE GERHARDS 6 45 S 147 34 E 9.65

CAPE GIRGIR 3 49 S 144 34 E 9.92

CAPE GOEBEN 7 28 S 147 13 E 9.57

CAPE GOURDON 4 23 S 145 19 E 9.89

CAPE HENRY 10 40 S 152 53 E 8.62

CAPE IRIS 5 34 S 146 21 E 9.75

CAPE KARAWOP 3 25 S 143 25 E 9.100

CAPE KILLERTON 8 37 S 148 20 E 9.47

CAPE KING WILLIAM 6 04 S 147 35 E 9.70

CAPE KUBUMI 7 30 S 147 22 E 9.56

CAPE LABILARDIERE 9 20 S 150 29 E 9.27

CAPE LAHAYE 9 11 S 150 12 E 9.28

CAPE MOEM 3 33 S 143 42 E 9.95

CAPE MOURILYAN 9 38 S 150 26 E 9.22

CAPE NELSON 9 00 S 149 15 E 9.42

CAPE OF GOOD HOPE 0 21 S 132 25 E 5.32

CAPE POSSESSION 8 35 S 146 23 E 6.21

CAPE PREVOST 10 06 S 150 57 E 7.41

CAPE PUS 3 29 S 143 33 E 9.100

CAPE RODNEY 10 12 S 148 24 E 6.43

CAPE ROOM 7 21 S 147 09 E 9.58

CAPE SAMEIN 3 26 S 143 33 E 9.98

CAPE SIRI 11 37 S 153 47 E 8.46

CAPE SUCKLING 9 02 S 146 38 E 6.26

CAPE SUDEST 8 44 S 148 28 E 9.46

CAPE TEREBU 3 37 S 143 51 E 9.95

CAPE TIWALIB 5 28 S 145 59 E 9.78

CAPE VAN DEN BOSCH 4 05 S 132 54 E 5.67

CAPE VARIETA 9 24 S 150 08 E 9.37

CAPE VENTENAT 10 12 S 151 13 E 7.41

CAPE VINALL 9 24 S 150 46 E 9.26

CAPE VOGEL 9 41 S 150 03 E 9.35

CAPE WARD HUNT 8 03 S 148 08 E 9.49

CAPE WATTS 9 31 S 150 21 E 9.37

CAPE WOM 3 31 S 143 36 E 9.97

CAPE WOMOBU 9 22 S 150 06 E 9.37

CAUTION POINT 8 16 S 148 12 E 9.48

CHALLIS HEAD 10 32 S 150 48 E 7.17

CHAMBINE BAY 11 21 S 154 01 E 8.54

CHAPMAN REEFS BEACON 10 18 S 148 42 E 6.48

CHESHUNT BAY 10 10 S 148 18 E 6.44

CHIARIA 8 49 S 146 31 E 6.24

CHUBUDI PASSAGE 11 06 S 153 02 E 8.32

CLAIRE SHOAL 8 26 S 148 23 E 9.49

CLAY REEF BEACON 10 14 S 148 44 E 6.48

CLOUDY BAY 10 12 S 148 41 E 6.47

COALING WHARF 3 42 S 128 10 E 3.37

COCONUT POINT 9 28 S 150 22 E 9.29

COGLAN HEAD 9 25 S 147 07 E 6.36

COLLINGWOOD BAY 9 25 S 149 30 E 9.38

CONDOR POINT 4 09 S 144 52 E 9.92

CONFLICT GROUP 10 46 S 151 48 E 8.68

CONFLICT PATCHES 11 14 S 152 55 E 8.26

CORAL HAVEN 11 19 S 153 19 E 8.39

CORMORANT CHANNEL 11 05 S 152 20 E 8.11

CORMORANT POINT 7 47 S 147 38 E 9.53

CROOK PATCH 9 07 S 150 54 E 9.26

CROWN ISLAND 5 06 S 146 57 E 9.76

CURTIS REEF 9 02 S 149 01 E 9.44

D

D'ENTRECASTEAUX ISLANDS 9 00 S 151 00 E 8.1

DALLMAN HARBOR 3 30 S 143 34 E 9.97

DALUA BAY 4 21 S 145 09 E 9.89

DANE 3 26 N 125 41 E 1.20

DAREBO HILL 9 16 S 146 57 E 6.31

DARK HILL POINT 9 36 S 149 39 E 9.36

DART REEFS 9 34 S 150 13 E 9.35

DARU 9 04 S 143 12 E 6.8

DARU ISLAND 9 06 S 143 12 E 6.7

DARU ROADS 9 15 S 143 16 E 6.7

DATOE REEF 5 25 S 132 43 E 4.15

DATU REEF 5 25 S 132 43 E 4.15

DAUAN ISLAND 9 25 S 142 32 E 6.5
Index—Gazetteer 251

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

DAUMLINGE BAY 2 42 S 141 19 E 9.104

DAWSON BANKS 11 12 S 152 48 E 8.24

DAWSON STRAIT 9 41 S 150 48 E 9.23

DAYMAN BANKS 11 15 S 152 49 E 8.24

DE KLERK REEF 2 15 S 134 28 E 10.60

DEBAGARAI PASSAGE 10 56 S 152 42 E 8.29

DEBANA POINT 10 30 S 149 55 E 6.54

DEBOYNE ISLANDS 10 44 S 152 22 E 8.63

DEBOYNE LAGOON 10 48 S 152 24 E 8.66

DEDELE POINT 10 14 S 148 44 E 6.47

DEIJEI RADI PASS 11 41 S 153 31 E 8.46

DEJONGS BANK 5 18 S 137 21 E 5.81

DELIVERANCE ISLAND 9 31 S 141 35 E 6.4

DIRECTION POINT 9 09 S 153 03 E 9.9

DISCOVERY BAY 10 25 S 150 24 E 7.26

DJARANG 6 12 S 134 46 E 4.54

DJEDAN EILANDEN 5 23 S 134 40 E 4.36

DJIKOE MERASA 3 10 S 127 02 E 3.3

DJOERSIAN 5 54 S 134 46 E 4.49

DJORONGA 1 06 S 128 23 E 2.16

DOBO 5 45 S 134 13 E 4.41

DOBO HARBOR 5 45 S 134 11 E 4.40

DOBU ISLAND 9 45 S 150 52 E 9.23

DOE ROWA 5 33 S 132 42 E 4.16

DOE ROWA STRAIT 5 35 S 132 43 E 4.17

DOESBORGH REEF 6 40 S 129 25 E 4.69

DOGUMUR BAY 4 23 S 145 13 E 9.91

DOINI ISLAND 10 42 S 150 43 E 7.10

DOMBO STRAIT 1 52 S 137 04 E 10.41

DONA CARMALITA 1 18 S 129 27 E 2.91

DOPIOR ISLET 0 53 S 131 14 E 5.36

DORASI SHOAL 10 31 S 150 42 E 7.23

DOT ISLET 7 07 S 147 05 E 9.59

DOUBLE PEAK 9 51 S 150 53 E 9.20

DOUGLAS HARBOR 8 05 S 148 08 E 9.48

DOVE POINT 4 35 S 145 33 E 9.88

DOWARA LAMO 0 51 N 128 05 E 2.15

DREGER HARBOR 6 38 S 147 52 E 9.66

DUCHATEAU ENTRANCE 11 18 S 152 28 E 8.9

DUCHATEAU ISLANDS 11 17 S 152 22 E 8.9

DUCHESS ISLET 9 57 S 150 51 E 9.20

DUGUMUR BAY 4 23 S 145 13 E 9.91

DUMAGA BAY 11 37 S 153 33 E 8.46

DUMOULIN ISLETS 10 55 S 150 46 E 7.8

DUNA LABWA PASSAGE 11 04 S 152 59 E 8.31

E

EAGLE POINT 10 33 S 149 51 E 6.56

EAST BROOKER PASSAGE 11 03 S 152 26 E 8.12

EAST CAPE 10 14 S 150 52 E 7.30

EBEOA POINT 9 43 S 150 50 E 9.23

EF KASYA 1 58 S 130 47 E 2.97

EF PIAN 2 02 S 130 45 E 2.97

EFMAN 0 55 S 131 07 E 5.41

EGERON REEF 3 05 S 132 18 E 5.63

EGUM ATOLL 9 25 S 151 57 E 9.10

EKA 2 59 S 132 07 E 5.63

EL FANUM 0 03 S 129 24 E 2.86

ELEVALA PENINSULA 9 28 S 147 08 E 6.37

ELLENGOWAN ROCK 9 00 S 143 31 E 6.9

ELPAPOETIH 3 17 S 128 51 E 3.52

EMERALD REEF 10 38 S 151 34 E 8.68

EMERALD SHOAL 11 08 S 152 33 E 8.18

ENDER REEF 5 20 S 132 41 E 4.15

EPAR 6 11 S 134 49 E 4.52

ESCAPE ROCK 11 21 S 153 20 E 8.42

EUNORA ISLET 10 25 S 149 28 E 6.52

EVE SHOAL 8 31 S 148 25 E 9.49

EXCELLENT POINT 10 13 S 150 33 E 9.31

F

FAIRFAX HARBOR 9 26 S 147 06 E 6.37

FAIRFAX REEFS 11 38 S 153 31 E 8.47

FAKFAK ROAD 2 57 S 132 17 E 5.64

FALLOWS REEF 10 14 S 151 00 E 7.35

FAN REEF 10 15 S 148 44 E 6.48

FER 5 57 S 132 51 E 4.27

FER ROADS 5 57 S 132 51 E 4.34

FERGUSSON ISLAND 9 30 S 150 40 E 9.22

FIFE BAY 10 38 S 150 00 E 6.58

FINSCH HARBOR 6 33 S 147 51 E 9.68

FIR TREE POINT 9 33 S 149 24 E 9.39

FIVE ISLANDS 1 01 S 128 09 E 2.17

FLAGGEN PENINSULA 6 34 S 147 51 E 9.68

FRIEDRICH KARL HARBOR 5 10 S 145 48 E 9.81

FWOJO 0 24 S 130 13 E 5.8

G

GABUGOGHI BAY 10 36 S 149 58 E 6.57

GABUSUAIARU BAY 10 35 S 149 56 E 6.57

GABUSUNAREA BAY 10 35 S 149 57 E 6.57

GADAISU VILLAGE 10 22 S 149 47 E 6.54

GAILE 9 40 S 147 24 E 6.39

GALELA ROADS 1 50 N 127 51 E 2.61

GALLEY REACH 9 07 S 146 35 E 6.28

GALLEY ROCK 11 08 S 153 02 E 8.32

GALLOWS REEF 10 17 S 151 09 E 7.36

GAMA RIVER 8 01 S 143 54 E 6.14

GANONE 1 05 S 128 18 E 2.17

GAWA ISLAND 8 58 S 151 59 E 9.11

GEAGEA DOUDOU 10 22 S 149 31 E 6.53

GEBOIA POINT 10 01 S 150 59 E 9.19

GEBROKEN ISLANDS 1 20 S 130 42 E 5.45

GEDGE SHOALS 11 12 S 152 41 E 8.20

GEELVINKS OOSTHOEK 2 11 S 136 31 E 10.41

GELANIT 5 39 S 132 41 E 4.14

GEMO ISLAND 9 29 S 147 06 E 6.35

GERMANIA HOOK 2 37 S 140 56 E 10.2

GESER (ISLAND) 3 53 S 130 54 E 3.58

GESER (PORT) 3 53 S 130 54 E 3.60

GESER ROADS 3 53 S 130 54 E 3.59

GESILA ISLAND 10 35 S 150 38 E 7.22

GIGILA ISLAND 11 10 S 152 57 E 8.25

GILI GILI ANCHORAGE 10 25 S 150 22 E 7.28

GILIGILI ANCHORAGE 10 25 S 150 22 E 7.28

GINETU ISLAND 9 27 S 152 38 E 9.5

GINGALA ISLANDS 6 39 S 147 52 E 9.66

GIRA RIVER 8 00 S 147 57 E 9.50

GLEN ISLET 9 44 S 150 03 E 9.34

GOARIBARI ISLAND 7 47 S 144 14 E 6.14

GOENOENG API 4 31 S 129 52 E 3.67

GOENOENG API 6 39 S 126 40 E 4.63

GOGOL RIVER 5 19 S 145 45 E 9.79

GOLD RUSH CHANNEL 11 23 S 153 20 E 8.44

GOMUMU ANCHORAGE 1 51 S 127 36 E 2.40

GOODENOUGH ISLAND 9 20 S 150 15 E 9.28

GORUE ISLET 7 31 S 147 20 E 9.57

GOSCHEN STRAIT 10 10 S 151 00 E 7.42

GOSONG KOLEPON 7 00 S 136 50 E 5.86

GOSONG TENGAH 0 45 S 127 57 E 2.13

GOVERNMENT PIER 3 32 S 129 53 E 3.69

GRACE ISLET 10 21 S 151 07 E 7.35

GRANAWE POINT 9 57 S 151 04 E 9.25

GRANGE ISLET 10 19 S 148 53 E 6.49

GRANT ISLET 10 33 S 151 02 E 7.21

GREAT DROMEDARIS 2 52 S 128 32 E 3.21

GREIG BANK 4 32 S 146 14 E 9.86

GRIFFEN REEF 6 37 S 129 47 E 4.69

GROOT BANDA 4 33 S 129 55 E 3.67

GROOT KARAWAIRA 5 58 S 134 50 E 4.51

GROOT KARAWEIRA ISLAND 5 58 S 134 50 E 4.46

GROOTE TAFELBERG 0 14 S 130 19 E 5.7

GUA AWANA PASSAGE 11 04 S 152 32 E 8.18

GUASOPA HARBOR 9 14 S 152 56 E 9.8

GUBA 0 16 N 128 53 E 2.73

GUBBINS POINT 8 57 S 146 34 E 6.26

GUIDE REEF 11 22 S 153 09 E 8.50

GULENWA ISLAND 11 03 S 152 31 E 8.18

GULEWA ISLAND 11 03 S 152 31 E 8.14

GULLY BANK 7 47 S 144 44 E 6.16

GUMBORO HILL 8 19 S 148 11 E 9.48

GUNUNG BINAIJA 3 10 S 129 27 E 3.18

GUNUNG BINAIYA 3 10 S 129 27 E 3.18

GUNUNG DAAB 5 35 S 133 04 E 4.27

GUNUNG GAMKONORA 1 23 N 127 32 E 2.6

GUNUNG MEJA BESAR 0 14 S 130 19 E 5.7

GUNUNG PELANA 1 49 S 130 22 E 2.96

GUNUNG RAJA 5 32 S 132 19 E 4.12
252 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

GUNUNG SIGEMERAI 2 02 S 133 37 E 5.58

GUNUNG STEENKOOL 2 04 S 133 32 E 5.57

GUNUNG STEENKOOLBERG 2 04 S 133 32 E 5.57

GURAICHI ISLANDS 0 01 N 127 11 E 2.23

GURUA BOSO 0 18 S 127 44 E 2.13

GWAINYU POINT 11 18 S 154 04 E 8.57

GWARE PASSAGE 11 25 S 154 12 E 8.55

GWE PASSAGE 11 25 S 154 01 E 8.55

H

HAIDANA ISLAND 9 27 S 147 02 E 6.32

HAINES ISLAND 10 41 S 151 04 E 7.19

HAJASA 3 17 S 127 31 E 3.14

HALL POINT 9 03 S 149 18 E 9.42

HALL SOUND 8 50 S 146 34 E 6.24

HALMAHERA SEA 1 00 S 129 00 E 2.84

HAM REEF 9 12 S 149 26 E 9.41

HANISCH HARBOR 6 44 S 147 36 E 9.65

HANKOW REEF 4 54 S 146 45 E 9.76

HANOEA 2 52 S 128 21 E 3.21

HANOVER ROCK 11 08 S 153 00 E 8.32

HANSA BAY 4 10 S 144 52 E 9.92

HANUDAMAVA ISLAND 9 29 S 147 06 E 6.35

HARDENBURG POINT 6 07 S 147 37 E 9.70

HARDMAN ISLETS 10 26 S 151 19 E 7.40

HARDY POINT 9 09 S 149 19 E 9.39

HAROEKOE 3 34 S 128 30 E 3.44

HASTINGS ISLAND 10 20 S 151 52 E 8.70

HASZARD ISLAND 10 35 S 151 22 E 7.38

HATZFELDT HARBOR 4 23 S 145 14 E 9.90

HAUGILI POINT 11 12 S 153 05 E 8.35

HAWAIN RIVER 3 27 S 153 05 E 9.100

HAZARD ROCK 10 30 S 149 52 E 6.56

HEATH BAY 9 10 S 141 24 E 6.3

HEI WOK ISLET 11 19 S 153 14 E 8.33

HELMHOLTZ POINT 5 36 S 146 27 E 9.72

HELY BANK 11 21 S 153 20 E 8.42

HEMENAHEI ISLAND 11 10 S 153 04 E 8.27

HEMHOLTZ POINT 5 36 S 147 27 E 9.74

HERLEI ROAD 7 53 S 129 33 E 4.79

HERWARTH POINT 5 32 S 146 10 E 9.75

HESKETH SHOAL 1 27 S 130 22 E 2.95

HESSEN BAY 7 23 S 147 09 E 9.58

HEWARTH POINT 5 32 S 146 10 E 9.75

HIGH ISLAND 11 18 S 154 02 E 8.54

HISCOCK REEF 11 07 S 153 01 E 8.32

HITOE LAMA 3 35 S 128 10 E 3.41

HOEK GERMANIA 2 37 S 140 56 E 10.2

HOEK LAMARCHE 0 10 S 131 18 E 5.11

HOLLANDIA BAAI 2 32 S 140 43 E 10.4

HOLLANDIA HAVEN 2 32 S 140 43 E 10.5

HOOD BAY 10 04 S 147 48 E 6.42

HOOD LAGOON 10 05 S 147 53 E 6.42

HOOD POINT 10 07 S 147 43 E 6.41

HORAKIRAKI PASSAGE 11 01 S 152 33 E 8.15

HORIEL 3 43 S 128 14 E 3.35

HORRARAGOWAN REEF 11 06 S 152 18 E 8.11

HOSIAI POINT 11 24 S 153 11 E 8.50

HOSKEN ISLANDS 7 38 S 147 32 E 9.54

HOWAHO AIMO PASSAGE 11 03 S 152 32 E 8.16

HUDUMU IWA PASSAGE 11 15 S 153 19 E 8.43

HUHULA 3 12 S 128 12 E 3.49

HURUANO 3 35 S 128 30 E 3.44

I

IABAMA ISLET 10 17 S 150 56 E 7.32

IAGA ISLET 8 44 S 150 58 E 9.14

IDLERS BAY 9 28 S 147 05 E 6.33

IE POINT 11 18 S 154 13 E 8.57

ILEI ISLET 10 46 S 150 41 E 7.9

IMUTA ISLET 10 24 S 149 35 E 6.52

IRIS BAAI 2 24 S 140 13 E 10.7

ISABEL REEF 0 30 S 135 14 E 10.30

ISULAILAI POINT 10 34 S 150 42 E 7.23

ISUMRUD STRAIT 4 47 S 145 51 E 9.87

ITO ISLAND 10 34 S 150 46 E 7.15

IWA ISLAND 8 42 S 151 41 E 9.12

IYIN ISLET 11 27 S 153 14 E 8.49

J

JABBERING ISLANDS 9 37 S 149 54 E 9.38

JACO ISLAND 8 26 S 127 20 E 4.70

JACOBUS OPDEKAMS HOEK 2 47 S 135 57 E 10.43

JAGANAN 2 03 S 130 24 E 2.98

JAIMARIA BAY 1 41 S 135 36 E 10.37

JAKO 8 26 S 127 20 E 4.70

JAMDENA 7 30 S 131 30 E 4.86

JAMNA 2 01 S 139 15 E 10.11

JAMTIMOERI 5 36 S 133 06 E 4.29

JAMTOE 1 40 S 130 20 E 2.96

JANOESI 1 43 S 135 41 E 10.36

JAPEN 1 45 S 136 10 E 10.31

JAPONDA 1 03 S 135 49 E 10.24

JARRAD ISLAND 9 35 S 149 29 E 9.39

JAUER 2 59 S 134 48 E 10.55

JAYAPURA 2 32 S 140 43 E 10.5

JEF BIE 2 04 S 130 09 E 2.100

JEF DOIF ISLANDS 0 46 N 129 47 E 2.88

JEF JAL 1 40 S 131 26 E 5.49

JEF JOES 1 45 S 131 08 E 5.49

JEF LIE 1 36 S 129 59 E 2.94

JEF NANAS 1 13 S 131 05 E 5.41

JENDE ROADS 2 22 S 134 32 E 10.56

JIKUMERASA 3 10 S 127 02 E 3.3

JOHNSTON PASS 11 41 S 153 31 E 8.46

JOMARD ENTRANCE 11 15 S 152 07 E 8.6

JOMARD ISLANDS 11 15 S 152 08 E 8.5

JOOS SUDARSO PIER 3 42 S 128 10 E 3.37

JOPPINGAR 2 29 S 134 36 E 10.56

K

KAAP D'URVILLE 1 28 S 137 55 E 10.14

KABENAU RIVER 5 28 S 145 55 E 9.78

KABOEAI 2 33 S 134 53 E 10.51

KADALAWA POINT 8 32 S 150 59 E 9.13

KADOVAR ISLAND 3 35 S 144 36 E 9.94

KAI TANIMBAR 6 02 S 132 27 E 4.20

KAILAKAT ROADS 4 03 S 131 26 E 3.63

KAILEUNA ISLAND 8 31 S 150 57 E 9.13

KAINGANA ISLET 6 43 S 147 47 E 9.65

KAITJEBO 2 14 S 139 34 E 10.10

KALIBOBO POINT 5 12 S 145 50 E 9.80

KAMARAU BAY 9 10 S 152 58 E 9.9

KAMPUNG ADAUT 8 08 S 131 07 E 4.93

KAMPUNG ADOLA 1 59 S 129 54 E 2.99

KAMPUNG AI 4 31 S 129 46 E 3.66

KAMPUNG AKE SALEKA 1 02 N 127 57 E 2.67

KAMPUNG ARNANAN 3 50 S 130 49 E 3.33

KAMPUNG ASBAKIN 0 45 S 131 41 E 5.34

KAMPUNG ASIMIRO 1 59 N 127 45 E 2.3

KAMPUNG BABO 2 33 S 133 26 E 5.60

KAMPUNG BANDA ELAT 5 39 S 132 59 E 4.33

KAMPUNG BANDAN ELI 3 25 S 133 09 E 4.29

KAMPUNG BATOEDJOENKO 3 26 S 127 15 E 3.11

KAMPUNG BATU MERAH 3 41 S 128 11 E 3.38

KAMPUNG BATUJUNGKOAR 3 26 S 127 15 E 3.11

KAMPUNG BATULA 0 01 S 127 42 E 2.12

KAMPUNG BERRIBERRI 2 34 N 128 26 E 2.53

KAMPUNG EKOR 0 49 N 127 50 E 2.66

KAMPUNG FAKFAK 2 56 S 132 17 E 5.65

KAMPUNG GALELA 1 50 N 127 51 E 2.61

KAMPUNG GETI 0 21 S 127 29 E 2.28

KAMPUNG GORAS 2 47 S 132 41 E 5.56

KAMPUNG HAPO 2 31 N 128 24 E 2.53

KAMPUNG HILA 3 35 S 128 05 E 3.41

KAMPUNG HITU LAMA 3 35 S 128 10 E 3.41

KAMPUNG HOLLAT 5 30 S 133 08 E 4.29

KAMPUNG HOR 5 21 S 133 05 E 4.31

KAMPUNG HULALIU 3 33 S 128 33 E 3.44

KAMPUNG ILAT 3 35 S 127 15 E 3.11

KAMPUNG ILMARANG 7 44 S 131 00 E 4.83

KAMPUNG JAMTIMOERI 5 36 S 133 06 E 4.29

KAMPUNG JAMTIMUR 5 36 S 133 06 E 4.29

KAMPUNG JEMBRO 5 32 S 132 19 E 4.11

KAMPUNG KACEPI 0 07 S 129 31 E 2.86

KAMPUNG KAIMANA 3 40 S 133 44 E 5.71

KAMPUNG KATJEPI 0 07 S 129 31 E 2.86

KAMPUNG KAU 1 10 N 127 54 E 2.66
Index—Gazetteer 253

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

KAMPUNG KILGAH 3 38 S 130 52 E 3.33

KAMPUNG KLIS 8 13 S 127 57 E 4.74

KAMPUNG KOKAS 2 42 S 132 26 E 5.51

KAMPUNG KOKUS 2 42 S 132 25 E 5.54

KAMPUNG LEKSULA 3 47 S 126 31 E 3.7

KAMPUNG LIANG 3 30 S 128 19 E 3.41

KAMPUNG LIBANO 2 29 N 128 21 E 2.53

KAMPUNG LIRUNG 3 56 N 126 42 E 1.7

KAMPUNG LONTOR 4 33 S 129 52 E 3.67

KAMPUNG LUHU 3 23 S 127 58 E 3.48

KAMPUNG MARLASSI 5 29 S 134 39 E 4.46

KAMPUNG MODAN 2 23 S 133 55 E 5.60

KAMPUNG MUTURI 2 11 S 133 41 E 5.58

KAMPUNG NAAM 5 33 S 132 48 E 4.23

KAMPUNG NAIRA 4 32 S 129 54 E 3.70

KAMPUNG NAMLEA 3 17 S 127 06 E 3.12

KAMPUNG NGAIBOR 6 43 S 134 04 E 4.44

KAMPUNG NJAULAKU 1 17 N 128 05 E 2.67

KAMPUNG NONIALI 2 52 S 128 24 E 3.22

KAMPUNG OHA 0 30 S 127 55 E 2.13

KAMPUNG OHOIWAIT 5 45 S 132 57 E 4.29

KAMPUNG PATANI 0 17 N 128 45 E 2.77

KAMPUNG PATI 8 13 S 127 52 E 4.74

KAMPUNG RITABEL 7 09 S 131 43 E 4.90

KAMPUNG ROEMAKAN 3 27 S 128 32 E 3.51

KAMPUNG RUMAKAI 3 27 S 128 32 E 3.51

KAMPUNG SAGEA 0 28 N 128 06 E 2.78

KAMPUNG SAID 3 35 S 128 02 E 3.41

KAMPUNG SAILOLOF 1 15 S 130 45 E 5.46

KAMPUNG SAMASURU 3 16 S 128 46 E 3.52

KAMPUNG SAMATE 0 58 S 131 04 E 5.44

KAMPUNG SAMGOWO 2 06 N 128 33 E 2.56

KAMPUNG SAONEK 0 28 S 130 47 E 5.19

KAMPUNG SAUMLAKI 7 59 S 131 18 E 4.93

KAMPUNG SEGET 1 24 S 130 58 E 5.47

KAMPUNG SEPA 3 21 S 129 07 E 3.54

KAMPUNG SERUAWAN 3 26 S 128 25 E 3.51

KAMPUNG SUPE 3 13 S 127 52 E 3.19

KAMPUNG TAMILAOE 3 23 S 129 12 E 3.54

KAMPUNG TANIWEL 2 51 S 128 28 E 3.22

KAMPUNG TELALORA 8 12 S 129 50 E 4.84

KAMPUNG TEPA 7 52 S 129 36 E 4.79

KAMPUNG TIFU 3 43 S 126 24 E 3.6

KAMPUNG TIHOELALE 3 27 S 128 31 E 3.51

KAMPUNG TIJO 2 25 N 128 18 E 2.53

KAMPUNG TOHULALA 3 27 S 128 31 E 3.51

KAMPUNG TOTOAD 5 45 S 132 41 E 4.18

KAMPUNG TUAL 5 38 S 132 44 E 4.25

KAMPUNG WAAI 3 34 S 128 19 E 3.42

KAMPUNG WAMSASI 3 33 S 126 10 E 3.4

KAMPUNG WARWAWANG 8 13 S 128 09 E 4.75

KAMPUNG WERKA 5 42 S 132 57 E 4.33

KAMPUNG YEMBRO 5 32 S 132 19 E 4.11

KANA KOPI BAY 10 29 S 150 39 E 7.26

KANIMENO POINT 9 01 S 149 06 E 9.43

KAOENOET SOLLON 2 10 S 130 20 E 2.98

KAPAKUPA 1 37 N 127 59 E 2.63

KAPAL 3 47 S 128 06 E 3.38

KAPALATMADA 3 16 S 126 12 E 3.3

KARAKITANG ISLANDS 3 10 N 125 29 E 1.25

KARANG BAIS 2 55 S 130 26 E 3.28

KARANG BATA 0 42 S 130 25 E 5.23

KARANG BATANTA 0 47 S 131 00 E 5.30

KARANG ELANG 1 20 S 130 31 E 2.95

KARANG ENDER 5 20 S 132 41 E 4.15

KARANG GAJEBI 2 09 S 135 15 E 10.61

KARANG LEGLI 0 14 N 128 49 E 2.75

KARANG MATALEL 0 22 N 128 29 E 2.77

KARANG NUM 2 15 S 134 28 E 10.60

KARANG PASIR TIDORE 0 19 N 127 59 E 2.81

KARANG SAARU ARRUNGESI 4 38 S 130 03 E 3.70

KARKAR ISLAND 4 39 S 145 58 E 9.86

KARUP 3 53 S 133 23 E 5.70

KASIEM 1 00 S 131 09 E 5.41

KASIM OIL TERMINAL 1 18 S 131 02 E 5.40

KATAPATJAN ROCK 0 56 S 131 06 E 5.44

KATHERINE ISLET 0 44 N 129 07 E 2.71

KAU KAU BAY 10 33 S 149 55 E 6.57

KAWA ROADS 2 56 S 128 08 E 3.20

KAWAI POINT 9 41 S 150 54 E 9.24

KAYELI ROADS 3 22 S 127 07 E 3.11

KAYOA ISLANDS 0 03 N 127 26 E 2.23

KEAUNA HILLS 8 00 S 145 48 E 6.19

KELANOA HARBOR 6 02 S 147 31 E 9.72

KELI BADIR 3 29 S 130 43 E 3.29

KELI DUKUN 3 25 S 130 44 E 3.29

KEPLER POINT 5 34 S 146 16 E 9.75

KEPPEL POINT 10 10 S 147 58 E 6.42

KEPPEL POINT 9 19 S 149 13 E 9.40

KEPULAUAN AMBAI 1 55 S 136 20 E 10.34

KEPULAUAN ARU 6 10 S 134 30 E 4.35

KEPULAUAN ASIA 1 03 N 131 15 E 5.2

KEPULAUAN AURI 2 02 S 134 44 E 10.57

KEPULAUAN AYU 0 30 N 131 07 E 5.2

KEPULAUAN BANDA 4 25 S 129 55 E 3.64

KEPULAUAN BOO 1 10 S 129 22 E 2.91

KEPULAUAN DARAM 2 07 S 130 53 E 2.97

KEPULAUAN DOEA 1 32 S 130 31 E 2.95

KEPULAUAN DOWORA 0 50 S 128 08 E 2.15

KEPULAUAN DUA 1 32 S 130 31 E 2.95

KEPULAUAN FAM 0 37 S 130 14 E 5.22

KEPULAUAN GORAITJI 0 01 N 127 11 E 2.23

KEPULAUAN GORONG 4 03 S 131 20 E 3.61

KEPULAUAN JEDAN 5 23 S 134 40 E 4.36

KEPULAUAN KAWIO 4 35 N 125 35 E 1.9

KEPULAUAN KUR 5 20 S 131 59 E 4.8

KEPULAUAN KURAN 1 53 S 135 49 E 10.36

KEPULAUAN KUSU 0 20 S 127 44 E 2.13

KEPULAUAN LETI 8 11 S 127 55 E 4.73

KEPULAUAN LOLODA UTARA 2 13 N 127 47 E 2.2

KEPULAUAN LUCIPARA 5 29 S 127 31 E 4.2

KEPULAUAN MAPIA 0 49 N 134 17 E 10.67

KEPULAUAN MENON 1 20 S 130 42 E 5.45

KEPULAUAN MOOR 2 56 S 135 44 E 10.44

KEPULAUAN NENUSA 4 45 N 127 08 E 1.3

KEPULAUAN OBI 1 30 S 127 35 E 2.39

KEPULAUAN PADAIDO 1 15 S 136 35 E 10.19

KEPULAUAN PENYU 5 23 S 127 47 E 4.3

KEPULAUAN PISANG 2 38 S 131 35 E 5.61

KEPULAUAN PODENA 2 07 S 139 29 E 10.10

KEPULAUAN ROMBOMBO 0 56 S 131 06 E 5.44

KEPULAUAN SCHOUTEN 1 00 S 136 00 E 10.18

KEPULAUAN SULA 1 50 S 125 20 E 2.46

KEPULAUAN TALAUD 4 08 N 126 46 E 1.4

KEPULAUAN TOADE 3 46 N 125 34 E 1.15

KEPULAUAN TOBELO 1 49 N 127 56 E 2.62

KEPULAUAN TUJUH 2 45 S 129 01 E 3.23

KEPULAUAN WAKDE 1 56 S 139 01 E 10.12

KEPULAUAN WATUBELA 4 33 S 131 43 E 4.5

KEPULAUAN WATULAI 5 49 S 134 46 E 4.48

KEPULAUAN WIDI 0 35 S 128 27 E 2.83

KEPULAUAN WODA 0 23 N 127 35 E 2.10

KEREMA BAY 7 58 S 145 45 E 6.19

KERKA 1 26 S 127 27 E 2.43

KERWIN REEF 10 14 S 148 45 E 6.48

KETAKERUA BAY 9 05 S 148 37 E 9.43

KETJITOT 2 03 S 130 17 E 2.98

KIBIRISI POINT 9 38 S 150 01 E 9.36

KILLERTON BAY 10 21 S 150 40 E 7.29

KILLERTON POINT 10 21 S 150 38 E 7.27

KILMOERI ROADS 3 40 S 130 27 E 3.56

KILMURI ROADS 3 40 S 130 27 E 3.56

KIMUTA ISLAND 10 51 S 152 59 E 8.58

KIRIWINA ISLAND 8 35 S 151 08 E 9.13

KISALAOET ROADS 3 36 S 130 19 E 3.56

KISALAUT ROADS 3 36 S 130 19 E 3.56

KISWUI 7 32 S 131 09 E 4.97

KITAVA ISLAND 8 37 S 151 20 E 9.13

KITIMULA POINT 6 20 S 147 49 E 9.70

KIVI KIVI PASSAGE 11 08 S 152 45 E 8.22

KIWAI ISLAND 8 37 S 143 29 E 6.13

KLEINE GEELVINK BAY 0 44 S 133 44 E 10.68

KOELTOEBAI ZUID 6 52 S 134 43 E 4.55

KOEMBOER 3 01 S 135 03 E 10.50

KOERAN ISLANDS 1 53 S 135 49 E 10.36

KOEROEDOE 1 51 S 137 00 E 10.16

KOEROEDOE STRAIT 1 49 S 136 56 E 10.17

KOIL ISLAND 3 20 S 144 14 E 9.94

KOKAS ROAD 2 42 S 132 25 E 5.54

KOKKA BAY 0 27 N 128 10 E 2.78

KOLFF BANK 7 00 S 136 50 E 5.86

KONSTANTIN HARBOR 5 29 S 145 50 E 9.78

KOPATAAR 3 05 S 135 35 E 10.47

KORIM BAY 0 53 S 136 03 E 10.25
254 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

KORIMORO POINT 8 13 S 143 43 E 6.11

KOSMANN ISLAND 11 04 S 151 32 E 8.3

KREI-LAMA 6 45 S 134 23 E 4.58

KRONPRINZ HARBOR 4 27 S 145 22 E 9.89

KUANAK ISLAND 11 10 S 152 55 E 8.25

KUBUI POINT 10 15 S 150 50 E 7.29

KULEFU 0 20 N 127 53 E 2.80

KULTUBAI SELATAN 6 52 S 134 43 E 4.55

KUMBE RIVER 8 22 S 140 15 E 5.91

KUMBUR 3 01 S 135 03 E 10.50

KUMUL ISLAND 5 47 S 134 46 E 4.49

KUMUL MARINE TERMINAL 8 0 S 144 6 E 6.15

KUMUSI POINT 8 28 S 148 12 E 9.47

KUPIANO 10 04 S 148 10 E 6.44

KURIER REEF 1 13 S 127 49 E 2.42

KWAIAPON BAY 9 05 S 152 43 E 9.5

KWAIAWATA ISLAND 8 55 S 151 55 E 9.11

KWAIPOMATA POINT 10 19 S 149 19 E 6.51

KWARAPAN BAY 9 05 S 152 43 E 9.5

KWATSORE BAY 3 15 S 134 57 E 10.52

L

LA CHER BANK 8 29 S 136 15 E 5.86

LA CHUR BANK 8 29 S 136 15 E 5.86

LABOEAN DABOE 5 17 S 133 09 E 4.30

LABU POINT 6 45 S 146 58 E 9.61

LABUAN DABU 5 17 S 133 09 E 4.30

LABUAN MIEI 2 44 S 134 30 E 10.58

LABUAN SYERI 1 39 S 134 06 E 10.59

LABUAN WINDISSI 2 25 S 134 13 E 10.58

LABUAN YENDE 2 22 S 134 32 E 10.56

LABUHA 0 38 S 127 28 E 2.34

LAE 6 44 S 147 00 E 9.63

LAGAVA ISLAND 9 17 S 146 55 E 6.29

LAIWAN ISLET 11 07 S 152 38 E 8.19

LAIWUI 1 20 S 127 38 E 2.44

LAIWUI ROADS 1 20 S 127 38 E 2.44

LAJONI 7 00 S 129 07 E 4.67

LANGEMAK BAY 6 35 S 147 51 E 9.67

LANNOKEA DOUDOU 10 20 S 149 26 E 6.51

LAPAR POINT 3 07 S 142 21 E 9.104

LARK PATCH 9 31 S 147 08 E 6.34

LASANGA ISLAND 7 25 S 147 15 E 9.57

LASEINIE ISLANDS 10 24 S 151 25 E 7.40

LASI 2 48 S 129 01 E 3.23

LATALATA ISLANDS 0 16 S 127 04 E 2.27

LAUGHLAN ISLANDS 9 17 S 153 40 E 9.2

LAUPUI POINT 7 05 S 147 04 E 9.59

LAWES BAY 10 38 S 150 03 E 6.58

LAWIN ISLANDS 1 31 S 128 43 E 2.45

LE CHUR BANK 8 30 S 136 15 E 4.35

LEBESSAN 3 30 N 125 40 E 1.19

LEEUWARDEN REEF 2 55 S 130 26 E 3.28

LEGOARANT ISLANDS 4 19 S 145 01 E 9.91

LEJEUNE ISLAND 11 10 S 151 49 E 8.4

LEKSOELA 3 47 S 126 31 E 3.6, 3.7

LEPSIUS POINT 5 51 S 146 52 E 9.73

LIBERTY PATCH 9 28 S 147 08 E 6.37

LIFOEMATOLA STRAIT 1 49 S 126 21 E 2.50

LIJI LIJI BAY 11 35 S 153 26 E 8.47

LILA ROSE SHOAL 7 58 S 148 09 E 9.50

LILINTA BAY 2 02 S 130 18 E 2.98

LITTLE DROMEDARIS 2 52 S 128 34 E 3.21

LITTLE GEELMUIDEN 1 05 S 128 18 E 2.17

LOA BOLOBA 11 27 S 154 24 E 8.55

LOBANG HAJA 3 09 S 127 50 E 3.16

LOBI ISLET 5 35 S 132 45 E 4.24

LOEANG ISLAND 8 11 S 128 42 E 4.77

LOGOLU MOTU MOTU 9 29 S 147 08 E 6.37

LOKI ROADS 3 17 S 128 04 E 3.49

LOLEO LAMO 1 13 N 127 50 E 2.66

LOLEODJAHA 1 01 S 128 09 E 2.17

LONG ISLAND 5 20 S 147 06 E 9.76

LONG REEF 11 10 S 151 39 E 8.4

LOPOM ISLAND 10 20 S 149 19 E 6.52

LOUISE REEF 4 03 N 125 21 E 1.12

LOW ISLANDS 5 23 S 137 43 E 5.82

LUANG ISLAND 8 11 S 128 42 E 4.77

LUNN ISLAND 10 47 S 152 00 E 8.69

LUSIALA HILL 2 57 S 129 06 E 3.24

M

MAAR ISLETS 5 57 S 134 47 E 4.50

MAARDJINJIN 6 52 S 134 41 E 4.55

MABNEIAN ISLET 11 08 S 152 46 E 8.21

MABRI HILL 1 51 S 137 15 E 10.16

MABUDAUAN HILL 9 16 S 142 43 E 6.6

MACGEE PATCH 9 10 S 150 50 E 9.26

MACLAREN HARBOR 9 04 S 149 18 E 9.42

MACLATCHIE POINT 7 57 S 145 24 E 6.19

MADAN ISLET 6 34 S 147 51 E 9.68

MADANG HARBOR 5 13 S 145 49 E 9.80

MADAU ISLAND 9 00 S 152 28 E 9.5

MADOERAU 2 33 S 140 44 E 10.4

MADURAU 2 33 S 140 44 E 10.4

MADUWA POINT 11 30 S 153 16 E 8.47

MAGERI POINT 7 36 S 147 28 E 9.54

MAGNUS POINT 4 28 S 145 24 E 9.88

MAIKA HARBOR 10 42 S 152 48 E 8.60

MAILU ISLAND 10 24 S 149 21 E 6.52

MAIOBARI BAY 9 56 S 150 53 E 9.19

MAJEE 2 22 S 140 08 E 10.8

MALAI ISLAND 5 53 S 147 56 E 9.76

MALAMAL ANCHORAGE 5 07 S 145 50 E 9.82

MALAUNA BAY 9 14 S 150 18 E 9.28

MAMBARE BAY 8 02 S 148 00 E 9.50

MAMBARE PATCHES 7 56 S 148 03 E 9.51

MAMBERAMO RIVER 1 28 S 137 54 E 10.15

MANAM ISLAND 4 06 S 145 03 E 9.92

MANGGOEAR 2 53 S 134 51 E 10.53

MANGGOER 5 35 S 132 00 E 4.10

MANGOLE 1 55 S 125 57 E 2.49

MANGOLI STRAIT 1 57 S 125 55 E 2.49

MANIBOEROE 3 14 S 134 57 E 10.52

MANIEN 5 43 S 134 47 E 4.48

MANOEK 5 33 S 130 18 E 4.4

MANOEPAMPI 1 48 S 135 48 E 10.36

MANOKWARI 0 52 S 134 05 E 10.66

MANSEREN BAKEN 0 44 S 135 51 E 10.22

MANUBADA ISLAND 9 31 S 147 10 E 6.35

MANUGA REEFS 11 00 S 153 21 E 8.57

MAPAS ISLAND 9 12 S 152 48 E 9.7

MAPIA ISLANDS 0 49 N 134 17 E 10.67

MARAGILI ISLAND 11 04 S 151 32 E 8.3

MARGARET ISLAND 10 40 S 150 53 E 7.16

MARIANNE STRAIT 8 00 S 138 53 E 5.87

MARKHAM RIVER 6 45 S 146 58 E 9.62

MARO RIVER 8 29 S 140 21 E 5.92

MARSEGOE 3 00 S 128 03 E 3.19

MARSHALL LAGOON 10 03 S 148 12 E 6.44

MARX REEF 11 24 S 153 27 E 8.44

MASI MASI 2 00 S 139 08 E 10.12

MATABORI RIVER 1 31 S 137 59 E 10.14

MATEBINAGUTU ISLET 7 44 S 147 38 E 9.53

MATTERER BAAI 2 19 S 140 08 E 10.9

MAURU MAURU REEF 8 51 S 146 33 E 6.24

MAWI BAY 1 39 S 134 07 E 10.59

MAYEE 2 22 S 140 08 E 10.8

MAYRI BAY 10 20 S 149 26 E 6.51

MCGEE SHOAL 3 08 S 142 26 E 9.102

MCGREGOR REEFS 11 21 S 153 16 E 8.41

MEATIMIARANG 8 20 S 128 30 E 4.76

MEATIY MIARANG 8 20 S 128 30 E 4.76

MEGA ROAD 0 40 S 131 51 E 5.33

MEHIL 1 07 S 131 10 E 5.41

MEI-MEI-ARA ISLAND 10 13 S 150 53 E 7.30

MEIMEIARA ISLAND 10 13 S 150 53 E 7.30

MEMYAI ISLET 0 22 S 131 11 E 5.17

MENALOE BAY 3 32 N 125 38 E 1.19

MENAPI BAY 9 46 S 149 56 E 9.34

MENGGE 2 12 S 139 32 E 10.10

MENOKWARI 0 52 S 134 05 E 10.66

MERAUKE 8 29 S 140 23 E 5.93

MERAUKE RIVER 8 29 S 140 21 E 5.92

MESA ROADS 0 24 N 128 17 E 2.78

MID SAND BANK 10 24 S 151 03 E 7.35

MIDDLE REEF 11 17 S 153 17 E 8.40

MIDDLE SAND 0 45 S 127 57 E 2.13

MIEI ROADS 2 44 S 134 30 E 10.58

MIEI VILLAGE 2 44 S 134 30 E 10.57

MIGEMMA GEMMA PASSAGE 11 08 S 152 39 E 8.19

MILLPORT HARBOR 10 21 S 149 28 E 6.53
Index—Gazetteer 255

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

MINISTER PATCH 11 20 S 153 16 E 8.42

MIOS AOERI 2 02 S 134 44 E 10.57

MIOS INDI 1 31 S 135 50 E 10.32

MIOS NOEM 1 30 S 135 11 E 10.38

MIOS NOEM STRAIT 1 33 S 135 23 E 10.38

MIOS SU 0 21 S 132 10 E 5.33

MIOS WAAR 2 05 S 134 22 E 10.58

MIOS WOERKI 1 17 S 136 19 E 10.20

MIOS WORKBONDI 1 13 S 136 42 E 10.19

MISIMA ISLAND 10 41 S 152 44 E 8.59

MISIMAI ISLAND 10 41 S 152 44 E 8.59

MISOOL 1 50 S 130 10 E 2.92,

2.93

MISOOL MARINE TERMINAL 1 33 S 130 31 E 2.93

MITDOEAN 5 31 S 133 00 E 4.31

MITDUAN 5 31 S 133 00 E 4.31

MITNALOA 4 36 S 133 01 E 4.31

MITOEWAT 5 30 S 133 01 E 4.31

MITROA REEF 6 00 S 132 43 E 4.21

MITUWAT 5 30 S 133 01 E 4.31

MODEWA BAY 10 41 S 150 20 E 7.2

MOERIS BAAI 2 22 S 140 10 E 10.7

MOESLENAR 5 57 S 132 43 E 4.21

MOFF 0 32 N 130 44 E 5.3

MOKMER 1 12 S 136 09 E 10.23

MONTEMONT ISLETS 11 18 S 152 18 E 8.8

MONUMBO HARBOR 4 14 S 144 57 E 9.91

MOOR ISLANDS 2 56 S 135 44 E 10.44

MORBAIT 5 52 S 132 56 E 4.26

MORESBY STRAIT 9 30 S 150 25 E 9.29

MOROTAI 2 20 N 128 28 E 2.53

MOTORINA ISLAND 11 05 S 152 34 E 8.16

MOTURINA ISLAND 11 05 S 152 34 E 8.16

MOUNT ARUMBI 11 34 S 153 41 E 8.38

MOUNT BOSSIM 10 37 S 150 33 E 7.4

MOUNT BOUGAINVILLE 2 39 S 141 02 E 9.106

MOUNT CLARENCE 9 53 S 148 37 E 6.49

MOUNT GANGULUA 11 25 S 153 16 E 8.38

MOUNT HANSEMANN 5 10 S 145 45 E 9.80

MOUNT HARTMANN 2 46 S 141 15 E 9.106

MOUNT JAUER 2 59 S 134 48 E 10.55

MOUNT KABATI 9 04 S 152 49 E 9.4

MOUNT LAWES 9 20 S 147 14 E 6.34

MOUNT LUGAUENG 6 37 S 147 50 E 9.65

MOUNT MADAU 11 22 S 153 12 E 8.38

MOUNT NASEN 5 30 S 145 37 E 9.77

MOUNT PULLEN 9 27 S 147 09 E 6.34

MOUNT RIU 11 31 S 153 26 E 8.38

MOUNT ROSSEL 11 21 S 154 14 E 8.52

MOUNT TRAFALGAR 9 10 S 152 46 E 9.38

MOUNT VICTORIA 8 55 S 147 33 E 6.22

MOUNT VICTORY 9 12 S 149 04 E 9.38

MOUNT YAUER 2 59 S 134 48 E 10.55

MOUNT YULE 8 12 S 146 47 E 6.22

MTU 0 24 N 128 18 E 2.78

MUGIL HARBOR 4 50 S 145 47 E 9.88

MUHUA BAY 11 22 S 153 18 E 8.41

MULLINS HARBOR 10 29 S 149 59 E 6.54

MUSA RIVER 9 05 S 148 54 E 9.44

MUSCHU ISLAND 3 25 S 143 35 E 9.98

MUSGRAVE REEF 8 53 S 146 31 E 6.24

MUSTERS PATCHES 11 15 S 152 53 E 8.25

MUYUWA ISLAND 9 07 S 152 50 E 9.4

MYRIAD SHOALS 11 06 S 152 59 E 8.31

N

NADA ISLANDS 9 17 S 153 40 E 9.2

NAGADA HARBOR 5 10 S 145 48 E 9.81

NAIRA ROADS 4 32 S 129 54 E 3.69

NAMLEA ROADS 3 16 S 127 05 E 3.11

NANUSA 4 45 N 127 08 E 1.3

NAOEFI 2 14 S 136 15 E 10.43

NAPA NAPA 9 28 S 147 06 E 6.34

NAPO TAROARE 4 03 N 125 21 E 1.12

NASARIRI 10 44 S 150 45 E 7.9

NASSAU BAY 7 18 S 147 08 E 9.58

NASSAU REEF 0 12 N 127 35 E 2.11

NATTER BAY 7 31 S 147 22 E 9.55

NAURIA ISLAND 8 34 S 150 17 E 9.15

NAWI 2 14 S 136 15 E 10.43

NELL ROCK 10 14 S 148 43 E 6.48

NEPTUNE POINT 4 30 S 145 27 E 9.88

NERONG 5 47 S 132 56 E 4.27

NEUMAYER RIVER 2 45 S 141 27 E 9.104

NEW VICTORIA FORT 3 41 S 128 11 E 3.37

NGEA ISLET 11 24 S 153 59 E 8.55

NGIDIOEN 5 36 S 132 36 E 4.18

NI EIVI REEF 11 18 S 153 10 E 8.33

NIBUB ISLET 10 51 S 152 26 E 8.64

NIGHT BANK 10 34 S 151 23 E 7.39

NIKA ISLET 6 42 S 129 31 E 4.68

NIL DESPERANDUM 6 37 S 129 47 E 4.69

NIMOA ISLAND 11 19 S 153 15 E 8.39

NINAN ISLET 11 04 S 152 35 E 8.16

NIVANI PASSAGE 10 49 S 152 52 E 8.65

NJATA 7 31 S 127 18 E 4.62

NO INA ISLET 11 05 S 152 21 E 8.11

NOEBOERI 3 18 S 135 06 E 10.49

NOEHOE EFROEAN 5 47 S 132 44 E 4.14

NOEHOE TAA 5 55 S 132 28 E 4.20

NOEMFOOR 1 00 S 134 53 E 10.40

NOES LEOER 7 14 S 128 23 E 4.67

NOESREEN 5 42 S 132 16 E 4.13

NORMANBY ISLAND 10 00 S 151 00 E 9.16

NORTH LOLODA ISLAND 2 13 N 127 47 E 2.2

NORTH PATCH 9 34 S 147 17 E 6.34

NORTH POINT 10 35 S 151 02 E 7.21

NUAKATA ISLAND 10 17 S 151 01 E 7.34

NUBARA ISLET 9 13 S 153 07 E 9.9

NUHU JANAT 5 33 S 132 43 E 4.24

NUMBURI 3 18 S 135 06 E 10.49

NUS LEUR 7 14 S 128 23 E 4.67

NUS LIMA 6 58 S 131 35 E 4.88

NUS TARAM 7 29 S 131 14 E 4.97

NUSA DOWORALAMO 0 51 N 128 05 E 2.15

NUSA LAUT 3 40 S 128 47 E 3.47

NUSA POKO POKO 0 20 S 127 18 E 2.37

NUSA RA 0 38 S 127 25 E 2.35

NUSA WULAN 4 07 S 132 57 E 5.69

NUSTABUN 8 02 S 131 12 E 4.92

O

OBAURIPPI 1 53 S 136 27 E 10.33

OBIT ISLANDS 0 39 S 127 21 E 2.35

OBSTRUCTION ISLANDS 10 19 S 150 57 E 7.33

OEHIWA 5 42 S 132 37 E 4.19

OELI 0 28 N 127 58 E 2.80

OELI 2 50 S 128 40 E 3.22

OEMAR BAY 2 55 S 134 44 E 10.54

OENDOER 3 47 S 130 36 E 3.55

OER ROADS 5 22 S 133 10 E 4.29

OERAN 4 46 S 131 52 E 4.6

OET 5 35 S 132 40 E 4.17

OKI ROADS 3 48 S 126 51 E 3.9

OLAT HILL 2 56 S 129 12 E 3.24

OLIFANTS HOEK 2 42 S 136 01 E 10.43

OME TOEJEF 1 10 S 131 04 E 5.41

ONDUR ROADS 4 00 S 131 23 E 3.63

ORANGERIE BAY 10 22 S 149 44 E 6.54

ORIOMO RIVER 9 03 S 143 10 E 6.7

ORO BAY 8 53 S 148 29 E 9.45

OROKOLO BAY 7 53 S 145 18 E 6.18

OSASAI ISLET 11 21 S 153 20 E 8.42

OTTILIEN PASS 5 05 S 145 49 E 9.83

OUD KREI 6 45 S 134 23 E 4.58

OWI 1 14 S 136 13 E 10.21

P

PADAIDO ISLANDS 1 15 S 136 35 E 10.19

PAHOTURI RIVER 9 17 S 142 45 E 6.6

PAI 1 13 S 136 26 E 10.20

PAIPAININA POINT 9 43 S 150 44 E 9.21

PAIRA POINT 10 00 S 147 38 E 6.41

PALLAS POINT 4 44 S 145 40 E 9.88

PALMAS 5 34 N 126 35 E 1.2

PALUMA ENTRANCE 10 17 S 148 14 E 6.45

PAMALI 2 48 S 129 30 E 3.26

PANA KRUSIMA ISLAND 11 10 S 152 52 E 8.23
256 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PANA MUN PASSAGE 11 08 S 152 40 E 8.20

PANA NIU 10 49 S 152 11 E 8.6

PANA NUMARA ISLAND 11 10 S 152 47 E 8.22

PANA SAGU SAGU ISLET 10 58 S 152 37 E 8.28

PANA TATONI ISLET 11 03 S 152 34 E 8.15

PANA TINANI ISLAND 11 14 S 153 10 E 8.33

PANA UDU UDI ISLAND 11 03 S 152 29 E 8.13

PANA VARA VARA ISLET 11 08 S 152 18 E 8.10

PANA WINA ISLAND 11 10 S 153 01 E 8.26

PANAETE ISLAND 10 41 S 152 21 E 8.63

PANANGARIBU ISLAND 11 08 S 152 49 E 8.23

PANANTANIAN ISLAND 11 09 S 152 50 E 8.23

PANARORA ISLAND 11 07 S 152 30 E 8.13

PANASIA ISLAND 11 08 S 152 20 E 8.11

PANA-UYA WANA ISLAND 10 44 S 152 25 E 8.63

PANNIET ISLAND 10 41 S 152 21 E 8.63

PANTAI WONRELI 8 05 S 127 09 E 4.72

PANTAI WONRELI ROAD 8 05 S 127 09 E 4.71

PANTAWI POINT 11 33 S 153 21 E 8.47

PANUA KEIKEISA ISLET 11 06 S 152 36 E 8.19

PAONI ROADS 2 52 S 129 05 E 3.24

PAPOEMA BAY 1 36 S 135 53 E 10.35

PARAMA ISLAND 9 00 S 143 23 E 6.9

PARAMA POINT 10 10 S 148 00 E 6.42

PAROEMI BAY 1 46 S 135 51 E 10.36

PASIR BALE 0 14 S 127 26 E 2.28

PASIR LAMO 0 53 N 127 27 E 2.8

PASIR RADJA 0 36 N 127 28 E 2.10

PASIR RADJA 1 47 S 127 32 E 2.40

PASIR RAJA 0 36 N 127 28 E 2.10

PASIR RAJA 1 47 S 127 32 E 2.40

PATAKI ISLAND 4 22 S 145 15 E 9.90

PATANI ROADS 0 16 N 128 45 E 2.76

PATINGROE 5 17 S 133 07 E 4.31

PATIPI 2 43 S 132 04 E 5.53

PENTAKO EF 1 25 S 130 29 E 2.95

PERRY ISLET 9 49 S 150 49 E 9.20

PESCHEL POINT 5 57 S 147 09 E 9.73

PETA 3 39 N 125 34 E 1.18

PHIPI REEF 9 33 S 142 36 E 6.5

PIEKJE 0 28 S 132 55 E 10.69

PIEKYE 0 28 S 132 55 E 10.69

PIROE 3 04 S 128 11 E 3.50

PIROE BAY 3 20 S 128 10 E 3.48

PIRU 3 04 S 128 11 E 3.50

PIRU ROADS 3 04 S 128 11 E 3.50

PISANG ISLET 4 30 S 129 56 E 3.68

PITT BAY 10 38 S 151 04 E 7.20

PLUM POINT 7 40 S 144 49 E 6.17

POCKLINGTON REEF 10 48 S 155 44 E 8.57

PODBIELSKY POINT 4 15 S 144 58 E 9.91

POEA 2 56 S 127 54 E 3.17

POELAU TOEDJOEH 2 45 S 129 01 E 3.23

POM 1 38 S 135 42 E 10.32

POMMERN BAY 5 32 S 146 09 E 9.75

POPULAI ISLAND 10 40 S 150 53 E 7.16

PORI PASSAGE 11 09 S 152 51 E 8.23

PORLOCK BAY 9 02 S 149 00 E 9.44

PORLOCK HARBOR 9 03 S 149 04 E 9.44

PORNANI PASSAGE 11 09 S 152 49 E 8.23

PORT CHALMERS 8 08 S 146 06 E 6.20

PORT GLASGOW 10 22 S 149 31 E 6.53

PORT HARVEY 8 54 S 148 31 E 9.44

PORT MORESBY 9 28 S 147 08 E 6.34

PORT ROMILLY 7 42 S 144 48 E 6.17

POSA POSA HARBOR ENTRANCE 9 36 S 149 47 E 9.39

PRITTWITZ POINT 2 55 S 141 50 E 9.104

PROTECTORATE REEFS 11 00 S 153 21 E 8.57

PROVIDENTIAL BANK 5 40 S 137 50 E 5.82

PUA 2 56 S 127 54 E 3.17

PULAK DOLAK 7 50 S 138 30 E 5.86

PULAU ABDON 0 30 N 131 07 E 5.3

PULAU ADUAR 5 45 S 134 47 E 4.48

PULAU AI 4 32 S 129 46 E 3.66

PULAU AIDUMA 3 58 S 134 06 E 5.73

PULAU ALDUNA 3 58 S 134 06 E 5.73

PULAU AMBELAU 3 51 S 127 12 E 3.9

PULAU ANGRA MEOS 2 42 S 134 50 E 10.51

PULAU ANSOES 1 46 S 135 46 E 10.36

PULAU ANSUS 1 46 S 135 46 E 10.36

PULAU ARAR KULA 5 36 S 134 46 E 4.47

PULAU ARMO 1 41 S 138 48 E 10.14

PULAU ASAP 2 28 S 133 19 E 5.57

PULAU AYAWI 0 11 S 134 59 E 10.30

PULAU AYEMI 0 48 S 130 54 E 5.21

PULAU BABAR 7 55 S 129 45 E 4.78

PULAU BABI 3 10 S 127 48 E 3.16

PULAU BABI 3 13 S 128 10 E 3.49

PULAU BABI 5 55 S 134 09 E 4.41

PULAU BAEER 5 27 S 132 42 E 4.16

PULAU BAMBU 0 46 N 129 47 E 2.88

PULAU BANDA BESAR 4 33 S 129 55 E 3.67

PULAU BATANPELE 0 18 S 130 13 E 5.8

PULAU BATANTA 0 51 S 130 40 E 5.25

PULAU BATOENDERANG 3 22 N 125 37 E 1.21

PULAU BATU PUTIH 2 57 S 131 58 E 5.62

PULAU BATUNDERANG 3 22 N 125 37 E 1.21

PULAU BEBALANG 3 20 N 125 34 E 1.21

PULAU BELANG BELANG 1 20 S 127 24 E 2.42

PULAU BEPONDI 0 24 S 135 16 E 10.30

PULAU BIARO 2 06 N 125 23 E 1.33

PULAU BISA 1 14 S 127 36 E 2.42

PULAU BOANO 2 58 S 127 55 E 3.17

PULAU BOEANG 3 53 N 125 43 E 1.14

PULAU BOEI 5 07 S 132 00 E 4.8

PULAU BROMSI 1 13 S 136 36 E 10.19

PULAU BUANG 3 53 N 125 43 E 1.14

PULAU BUI 5 07 S 132 00 E 4.8

PULAU CERAM LAOET 3 53 S 130 26 E 3.60

PULAU CERAM REI 3 52 S 130 51 E 3.58

PULAU DAI 7 34 S 129 41 E 4.83

PULAU DAJANG 0 47 S 130 30 E 5.21

PULAU DAMAR 1 01 S 128 23 E 2.15

PULAU DAMAR 7 08 S 128 36 E 4.64

PULAU DARAM 2 09 S 130 55 E 2.97

PULAU DAWELOOR 7 46 S 130 04 E 4.83

PULAU DEER 1 09 S 129 50 E 2.90

PULAU DITI 1 57 N 127 43 E 2.3

PULAU DJOEEDIN 6 52 S 134 37 E 4.55

PULAU DOE ROWA 5 33 S 132 42 E 4.16

PULAU DOOM 0 53 S 131 14 E 5.38

PULAU DRAMAI 4 01 S 134 14 E 5.74

PULAU DUMAREHE 4 14 N 125 42 E 1.12

PULAU DUROA 5 33 S 132 42 E 4.16

PULAU EGA 2 59 S 132 07 E 5.63

PULAU EKA 2 59 S 132 07 E 5.63

PULAU ENU 7 05 S 134 29 E 4.56

PULAU FADOL 5 40 S 131 56 E 4.10

PULAU FAM 0 39 S 130 17 E 5.23

PULAU FARNUSAN 7 05 S 131 39 E 4.88

PULAU FORDATE 7 02 S 131 58 E 4.90

PULAU FRINUN 7 03 S 131 34 E 4.88

PULAU GAG 0 30 S 129 52 E 2.88

PULAU GAM 0 30 S 130 35 E 5.20

PULAU GEBE 0 05 S 129 28 E 2.86

PULAU GEMIEN 0 19 S 130 30 E 5.8

PULAU GILALANG 0 18 S 127 33 E 2.29

PULAU GODON 5 34 S 132 35 E 4.19

PULAU GOFA 3 50 S 130 43 E 3.57

PULAU GOMUMU 1 50 S 127 36 E 2.40

PULAU GORONG 4 01 S 131 24 E 3.63

PULAU GROOT BANDA 4 33 S 129 55 E 3.67

PULAU GUMORGA 0 02 N 127 13 E 2.24

PULAU GUNANGE 0 02 N 127 13 E 2.24

PULAU GUNUNGAPI 4 31 S 129 52 E 3.67

PULAU GUNUNGAPI 6 39 S 126 40 E 4.63

PULAU HABEEKE 8 15 S 139 28 E 5.89

PULAU HAROEKOE 3 34 S 128 30 E 3.44

PULAU HIRI 0 54 N 127 19 E 2.18

PULAU HORUKU 3 34 S 128 30 E 3.44

PULAU INDI 1 31 S 135 50 E 10.32

PULAU INGAR 4 21 S 131 33 E 4.5

PULAU JAAN 2 08 S 130 07 E 2.98

PULAU JAMDENA 7 30 S 131 30 E 4.86

PULAU JANOESI 1 43 S 135 41 E 10.36

PULAU JANUSI 1 43 S 135 41 E 10.36

PULAU JANUSI 1 48 S 135 56 E 10.35

PULAU JAPEN 1 45 S 136 10 E 10.31

PULAU JEBEN 0 29 S 130 21 E 5.9

PULAU JEDAN 5 23 S 134 41 E 4.36

PULAU JEF 1 18 S 131 01 E 5.47

PULAU JERIEF 0 42 S 130 42 E 5.24

PULAU JIEW 0 44 N 129 07 E 2.71

PULAU JOE 0 03 S 129 37 E 2.87
Index—Gazetteer 257

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PULAU JORONGA 1 06 S 128 23 E 2.16

PULAU JU 0 03 S 129 37 E 2.87

PULAU JUEDIN 6 52 S 134 37 E 4.55

PULAU JURSIAN 5 54 S 134 46 E 4.49

PULAU KABUAI 2 33 S 134 53 E 10.51

PULAU KABURUANG 3 47 N 126 47 E 1.8

PULAU KAI BESAR 5 40 S 133 00 E 4.26

PULAU KAI DULAH 5 37 S 132 46 E 4.23

PULAU KAI KECIL 5 47 S 132 44 E 4.14

PULAU KAICEBO 2 14 S 139 34 E 10.10

PULAU KAIMEER 5 10 S 132 01 E 4.8

PULAU KAJUMERAH 4 01 S 132 23 E 5.74

PULAU KALAMA 3 15 N 125 27 E 1.25

PULAU KALBUR 6 39 S 131 35 E 4.87

PULAU KARAIRA-BESAR 5 58 S 134 50 E 4.46

PULAU KARAKITANG 3 10 N 125 31 E 1.26

PULAU KARANG 7 01 S 134 39 E 4.56

PULAU KARAS 3 28 S 132 40 E 5.66

PULAU KARAWAIRA-BESAR 5 58 S 134 50 E 4.51

PULAU KARI 6 42 S 129 31 E 4.68

PULAU KASA 3 18 S 128 09 E 3.49

PULAU KASIM 1 18 S 131 01 E 5.47

PULAU KASIRUTA 0 24 S 127 12 E 2.38

PULAU KASTEEL 5 15 S 137 39 E 5.81

PULAU KAWALOESOE 4 14 N 125 20 E 1.12

PULAU KAWALUSU 4 14 N 125 20 E 1.12

PULAU KAWE 0 04 S 130 08 E 5.4

PULAU KELANG 3 12 S 127 44 E 3.15

PULAU KESWU 7 32 S 131 09 E 4.97

PULAU KILWARU 3 53 S 130 54 E 3.59

PULAU KISAR 8 04 S 127 11 E 4.70

PULAU KOFIAU 1 11 S 129 50 E 2.89

PULAU KOLA 5 28 S 134 33 E 4.38

PULAU KONAN 5 34 S 134 46 E 4.46

PULAU KRI 0 34 S 130 41 E 5.24

PULAU KUR 5 21 S 131 59 E 4.9

PULAU KURUDU 1 51 S 137 00 E 10.16

PULAU LAAG 5 23 S 137 43 E 5.82

PULAU LAIBOBAR 7 13 S 131 23 E 4.98

PULAU LAIGOMA 0 08 N 127 13 E 2.25

PULAU LAKAHIA 4 04 S 134 36 E 5.76

PULAU LAKOR 8 15 S 128 10 E 4.75

PULAU LARAT 7 09 S 131 51 E 4.88

PULAU LAUT 7 32 S 127 33 E 4.62

PULAU LAWAK 0 01 S 130 57 E 5.13

PULAU LEER 6 12 S 134 51 E 4.52

PULAU LEN KAFAL 2 00 S 130 35 E 2.97

PULAU LETI 8 12 S 127 42 E 4.73

PULAU LIFUMATOLA 1 49 S 126 27 E 2.50

PULAU LIPANG 3 55 N 125 23 E 1.14

PULAU LOLEODJAHA 1 01 S 128 09 E 2.17

PULAU MAAR 5 57 S 134 47 E 4.51

PULAU MADORANG 3 39 S 131 04 E 3.33

PULAU MAIKOOR 6 13 S 134 15 E 4.43

PULAU MAJU 1 19 N 126 21 E 2.1

PULAU MAKALEHI 2 44 N 125 10 E 1.30

PULAU MAKIAN 0 20 N 127 24 E 2.22

PULAU MAMBUAT 0 36 S 127 23 E 2.35

PULAU MANAWOKA 4 07 S 131 20 E 3.62

PULAU MANDIOLI 0 43 S 127 15 E 2.36

PULAU MANGGOER 5 35 S 132 00 E 4.10

PULAU MANGGUR 5 35 S 132 00 E 4.10

PULAU MANGOLE 1 50 S 125 50 E 2.47

PULAU MANGOLI 1 50 S 125 50 E 2.47

PULAU MANIL 0 18 S 130 54 E 5.17

PULAU MANIPA 3 19 S 127 34 E 3.14

PULAU MANOEK 5 33 S 130 18 E 4.4

PULAU MANOEPAMPI 1 48 S 135 48 E 10.36

PULAU MANSINAM 0 54 S 134 06 E 10.65

PULAU MANSUAR 0 36 S 130 34 E 5.24

PULAU MANUK 5 33 S 130 18 E 4.4

PULAU MANUPAMPI 1 48 S 135 48 E 10.36

PULAU MANURAN 0 02 N 130 53 E 5.13

PULAU MAOPORA 7 35 S 127 36 E 4.63

PULAU MAR 6 54 S 134 31 E 4.56

PULAU MARE 0 35 N 127 24 E 2.22

PULAU MARORE 4 44 N 125 29 E 1.10

PULAU MARSEGOE 3 00 S 128 03 E 3.19

PULAU MARSEGU 3 00 S 128 03 E 3.19

PULAU MASELA 8 09 S 129 52 E 4.84

PULAU MASI-MASI 2 00 S 139 08 E 10.12

PULAU MATAN 0 58 S 131 09 E 5.39

PULAU MATOETOENG 4 27 N 125 42 E 1.11

PULAU MATUTUANG 4 27 N 125 42 E 1.11

PULAU MAYU 1 19 N 126 21 E 2.1

PULAU ME 0 07 S 130 15 E 5.10

PULAU MEIRANG 5 50 S 134 17 E 4.41

PULAU MEMANOEK 4 36 N 125 38 E 1.11

PULAU MEMANUK 4 36 N 125 38 E 1.11

PULAU MENGGE 2 12 S 139 32 E 10.10

PULAU MES 7 50 S 131 26 E 4.91

PULAU MIANGAS 5 34 N 126 35 E 1.2

PULAU MITAK 7 11 S 131 28 E 4.99

PULAU MITAN 7 38 S 127 26 E 4.62

PULAU MITI 1 34 N 128 03 E 2.64

PULAU MOA 8 12 S 128 00 E 4.74

PULAU MOLANA 3 38 S 128 36 E 3.45

PULAU MOLU 6 45 S 131 32 E 4.87

PULAU MOTI 0 27 N 127 24 E 2.22

PULAU NAIRA 4 31 S 129 54 E 3.68

PULAU NAMATOTE 3 47 S 133 52 E 5.72

PULAU NAMWAAN 7 07 S 131 27 E 4.99

PULAU NAUFI 2 14 S 136 15 E 10.43

PULAU NAURIO 4 56 S 136 50 E 5.81

PULAU NELAJAN 0 55 S 130 22 E 5.27

PULAU NGAF 5 38 S 132 35 E 4.19

PULAU NGELENGELE-KECIL 2 10 N 128 13 E 2.58

PULAU NILA 6 44 S 129 30 E 4.68

PULAU NJATA 7 31 S 127 18 E 4.62

PULAU NOESREEN 5 42 S 132 16 E 4.13

PULAU NUHU TAA 5 55 S 132 28 E 4.20

PULAU NUKAHA 7 05 S 131 59 E 4.90

PULAU NUM 1 30 S 135 11 E 10.38

PULAU NUMFOOR 1 00 S 134 53 E 10.40

PULAU NUSI 3 09 S 135 40 E 10.46

PULAU NUSREEN 5 42 S 132 16 E 4.13

PULAU NYATA 7 31 S 127 18 E 4.62

PULAU OBILATU 1 24 S 127 20 E 2.41

PULAU OEDJIR 5 36 S 134 17 E 4.39

PULAU OER 5 51 S 132 32 E 4.20

PULAU OERAN 4 46 S 131 52 E 4.6

PULAU OET 5 35 S 132 40 E 4.17

PULAU OGAR 2 39 S 132 28 E 5.55

PULAU OKI 3 49 S 126 51 E 3.8

PULAU OWI 1 14 S 136 13 E 10.21

PULAU PAI 1 13 S 136 26 E 10.20

PULAU PANDJANG 4 01 S 131 14 E 3.62

PULAU PANJANG 2 59 S 131 14 E 5.63

PULAU PANJANG 4 01 S 131 14 E 3.62

PULAU PARA 3 05 N 125 30 E 1.27

PULAU PARANG 3 19 S 130 47 E 3.32

PULAU PASIGE 2 21 N 125 19 E 1.32

PULAU PEF 0 26 S 130 26 E 5.7

PULAU PENAMBULAI 6 17 S 134 52 E 4.35

PULAU PENEMU 0 35 S 130 16 E 5.22

PULAU PENJURING 6 44 S 134 29 E 4.56

PULAU PILONGAN 0 44 N 127 37 E 2.9

PULAU PILONGGA 0 44 N 127 37 E 2.9

PULAU PISANG 1 23 S 128 55 E 2.45

PULAU POKAL 0 26 S 127 43 E 2.13

PULAU RAM 0 50 S 131 13 E 5.36

PULAU RAO 2 21 N 128 09 E 2.59

PULAU RAU 2 21 N 128 09 E 2.59

PULAU ROEMBERPON 1 50 S 134 10 E 10.59

PULAU ROEN 4 33 S 129 41 E 3.65

PULAU ROENG 2 18 N 125 22 E 1.32

PULAU ROMANG 7 35 S 127 25 E 4.60

PULAU ROMBOMBO 0 57 S 131 06 E 5.39

PULAU ROON 2 25 S 134 35 E 10.56

PULAU ROZENGAIN 4 35 S 130 02 E 3.70

PULAU RUANG 2 18 N 125 22 E 1.32

PULAU RUMBERPON 1 50 S 134 10 E 10.59

PULAU RUN 4 33 S 129 41 E 3.65

PULAU SAGEWIN 0 57 S 130 39 E 5.30

PULAU SALEBABU 3 56 N 126 40 E 1.7

PULAU SALOMAKIE 1 01 S 128 23 E 2.15

PULAU SAMBIKI 1 56 S 125 47 E 2.48

PULAU SANANA 2 03 S 125 59 E 2.51

PULAU SANGIHE 3 33 N 125 33 E 1.16

PULAU SANGIHE PULAU LENGGIS 3 23 N 125 38 E 1.21

PULAU SANGIR 3 33 N 125 33 E 1.16

PULAU SAPARUA 3 33 S 128 40 E 3.46

PULAU SAYANG 0 18 N 129 53 E 2.85

PULAU SEIRA 7 41 S 131 03 E 4.95
258 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

PULAU SELARU 8 12 S 130 58 E 4.94

PULAU SERAM LAUT 3 53 S 130 26 E 3.60

PULAU SERAM REI 3 52 S 130 51 E 3.58

PULAU SERMATA 8 12 S 128 55 E 4.77

PULAU SEROEA 6 19 S 130 01 E 4.69

PULAU SEROTTE 3 34 S 133 38 E 5.71

PULAU SERUA 6 19 S 130 01 E 4.69

PULAU SIAU 2 43 N 125 22 E 1.28

PULAU SIKO 0 04 N 127 09 E 2.25

PULAU SOEANGGI 4 19 S 129 42 E 3.65

PULAU SORENARWA 1 45 S 136 10 E 10.31

PULAU SUANGGI 4 19 S 129 42 E 3.65

PULAU SUKELER 7 38 S 130 57 E 4.96

PULAU SUPIORI 0 45 S 135 33 E 10.26

PULAU TAAM 5 44 S 132 11 E 4.13

PULAU TABAR 5 49 S 134 46 E 4.49

PULAU TAHULANDANG 2 21 N 125 22 E 1.31

PULAU TAJANDOE 5 33 S 132 19 E 4.11

PULAU TALIABOE 1 50 S 124 50 E 2.46

PULAU TALIABU 1 50 S 124 50 E 2.46

PULAU TANETI 0 06 S 127 14 E 2.23

PULAU TANIMBAR 6 02 S 132 27 E 4.20

PULAU TAPAT 1 10 S 127 25 E 2.42

PULAU TAYANDU 5 33 S 132 19 E 4.11

PULAU TELLANG 7 32 S 127 33 E 4.62

PULAU TEMAR 7 09 S 131 26 E 4.99

PULAU TENGAH 3 14 S 126 00 E 3.4

PULAU TENGAH 5 09 S 132 01 E 4.8

PULAU TEOEN 6 58 S 129 08 E 4.67

PULAU TERNATE 0 47 N 127 23 E 2.18

PULAU TEUN 6 58 S 129 08 E 4.67

PULAU TIDORE 0 42 N 127 25 E 2.20

PULAU TIFORE 1 00 N 126 00 E 2.1

PULAU TIGA 2 02 S 130 00 E 2.100

PULAU TIOOR 4 45 S 131 44 E 4.5

PULAU TOBALAI 1 38 S 128 20 E 2.39

PULAU TODUKU 0 20 S 127 17 E 2.37

PULAU TOLIMAO 0 01 S 127 10 E 2.24

PULAU TSIOF 0 53 S 131 12 E 5.37

PULAU TURTURJURING 6 38 S 134 45 E 4.53

PULAU UJIR 5 36 S 134 17 E 4.39

PULAU UNAGINIM 1 12 S 131 06 E 5.35

PULAU UR 5 51 S 132 32 E 4.20

PULAU URAN 4 46 S 131 52 E 4.6

PULAU UT 5 35 S 132 40 E 4.17

PULAU VATVURAT 7 07 S 131 27 E 4.99

PULAU WAAR 2 05 S 134 22 E 10.58

PULAU WAIGEO 0 10 S 131 00 E 5.6

PULAU WAIROENDI 1 48 S 134 26 E 10.58

PULAU WAIRUNDI 1 48 S 134 26 E 10.58

PULAU WALIR 5 37 S 132 18 E 4.12

PULAU WAMAR 5 48 S 134 12 E 4.39

PULAU WARATNEU 5 35 S 132 17 E 4.12

PULAU WARILAU 5 22 S 134 32 E 4.36

PULAU WASIR 5 31 S 134 15 E 4.39

PULAU WAYAG 0 10 N 130 03 E 5.4

PULAU WETAN 7 55 S 129 32 E 4.78

PULAU WONIN 5 35 S 131 55 E 4.10

PULAU WORKBONDI 1 13 S 136 42 E 10.19

PULAU WOTAP 7 20 S 131 15 E 4.98

PULAU WRUWAREZ 0 47 S 130 46 E 5.21

PULAU WURKI 1 17 S 136 19 E 10.20

PULAU YAAN 2 08 S 130 07 E 2.98

PULAU YAL 1 40 S 131 26 E 5.49

PULAU YAMDENA 7 30 S 131 30 E 4.86

PULAU YAMNA 2 01 S 139 15 E 10.11

PULAU YASBEKAR 0 24 S 130 13 E 5.8

PULAU YEBEN 0 29 S 130 21 E 5.7

PULAU YIEW 0 44 N 129 07 E 2.71

PULAU YU 0 03 S 129 37 E 2.87

PULAU YUS 1 45 S 131 08 E 5.49

PULAU-PULAU NENOENG 3 04 N 125 40 E 1.27

PULAU-PULAU NENONG 3 04 N 125 40 E 1.27

PULAU-PULAU SANGGELOEHANG 2 57 N 125 29 E 1.27

PULAU-PULAU SANGGELUHANG 2 57 N 125 29 E 1.27

PULAU-PULAU TOADE 3 46 N 125 34 E 1.15

PUNCAK JAYA 4 06 S 136 50 E 5.78

PWASIAI ISLAND 10 01 S 150 57 E 9.18

PWENNEGWA HARBOR 11 22 S 154 17 E 8.56

Q

QUESSANT ISLAND 11 09 S 151 15 E 8.2

QUILTY PATCH 10 41 S 150 33 E 7.5

R

RAAF BAY 3 45 S 133 54 E 5.73

RABOIN ISLET 3 30 S 143 36 E 9.97

RABUSO CREEK 11 29 S 153 33 E 8.45

RADJA 2 55 S 129 10 E 3.24

RANI 0 57 S 135 30 E 10.28

RAO STRAIT 2 20 N 128 12 E 2.59

RAREWARAI BAY 3 02 S 135 48 E 10.45

RASCH PASS 5 09 S 145 51 E 9.81

RAWA REEF 11 20 S 153 24 E 8.42

RAWDON BAY 9 46 S 149 53 E 9.33

RAYMONDE SHOAL 8 14 S 148 16 E 9.49

RECOVERY ISLET 0 40 N 129 02 E 2.71

REDLICK ISLANDS 10 50 S 152 33 E 8.66

REDLICK PASSAGE 10 48 S 152 30 E 8.64

REDSCAR BAY 9 09 S 146 50 E 6.27

REEDE HAJASA 3 17 S 127 31 E 3.14

REEDE HAYASA 3 17 S 127 31 E 3.14

REIGA SHOALS 11 08 S 152 51 E 8.24

REISS POINT 5 55 S 147 03 E 9.73

RELIEF OPENING 11 17 S 154 10 E 8.57

RENARD ISLANDS 10 52 S 153 04 E 8.58

REWAN 5 43 S 134 48 E 4.48

RICHARDS BAY 9 06 S 152 58 E 9.9

RIF VAN ROZENGAIN 4 38 S 130 03 E 3.70

ROBIDE POINT 2 36 S 141 04 E 9.106

ROBINSON ANCHORAGE 11 09 S 152 55 E 8.25

ROBINSON BAY 8 09 S 148 08 E 9.48

RODNEY ENTRANCE 10 16 S 148 26 E 6.45

ROEMAHKOEDA BAI 7 37 S 127 25 E 4.61

ROEMAKAN 3 27 S 128 32 E 3.51

ROEMBERPON 1 50 S 134 10 E 10.59

ROEMBERPON STRAIT 1 43 S 134 09 E 10.59

ROEN 4 33 S 129 41 E 3.65

ROENAKI 1 41 S 134 06 E 10.62

ROGEIA ISLAND 10 38 S 150 39 E 7.11

ROKIA POINT 10 37 S 152 47 E 8.62

RONI 0 59 N 127 56 E 2.66

ROSENBERG STRAIT 5 42 S 132 45 E 4.22

ROSSEL ISLAND 11 22 S 154 10 E 8.52

ROSSEL LAGOON 11 18 S 153 48 E 8.52

ROSSEL PASSAGE 11 21 S 153 39 E 8.52

ROSSEL SPIT 11 27 S 154 23 E 8.55

ROT REEF BEACON 10 16 S 148 42 E 6.48

ROTHERY PASSAGE 10 21 S 148 41 E 6.48

ROTHERYS REEF 6 58 S 147 00 E 9.59

ROUND HILL ENTRANCE 9 59 S 147 29 E 6.40

ROUND POINT 9 52 S 147 30 E 6.39

RUMAH LUSI 4 42 S 131 44 E 4.6

S

SABARI ISLAND 11 07 S 153 06 E 8.31

SABATANG ROADS 0 26 S 127 39 E 2.30

SABIRIBO DOUDOU 10 21 S 149 28 E 6.53

SABLE ISLANDS 11 11 S 151 21 E 8.3

SACHSEN BAY 7 20 S 147 08 E 9.58

SAIBAI ISLAND 9 24 S 142 42 E 6.6

SAILOLOF ANCHORAGE 1 15 S 130 46 E 5.46

SAJAFI ISLANDS 0 31 N 128 50 E 2.71

SALAHUTU 3 33 S 128 15 E 3.35

SALAMAUA HARBOR 7 02 S 147 03 E 9.60

SALAWATI 1 06 S 130 52 E 5.42

SALAWATI OIL TERMINAL 1 21 S 130 59 E 5.41

SALO ISLAND 1 05 N 127 24 E 2.6

SALUTA 2 04 N 127 58 E 2.60

SAMARAI 10 37 S 150 40 E 7.13

SAMARAI ISLAND 10 37 S 150 40 E 7.12

SAMBAK STRAIT 0 25 S 127 17 E 2.37

SAMOA POINT 4 23 S 145 16 E 9.89

SAMUMU REEFS 11 30 S 153 09 E 8.48

SAN ROQUE PASSAGE 10 31 S 149 50 E 6.56

SANANA 2 03 S 125 59 E 2.52

SANANA BAY 2 03 S 125 59 E 2.51
Index—Gazetteer 259

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SANAROA ISLAND 9 36 S 151 00 E 9.24

SANDBANK BAY 10 11 S 148 33 E 6.46

SANDERSON BAY 10 19 S 150 27 E 7.27

SAOEKRIS 0 27 S 132 58 E 10.69

SAONEK ROAD 0 28 S 130 45 E 5.18

SAPAROEA 3 35 S 128 35 E 3.45

SAPARUA 3 35 S 128 40 E 3.47

SAPARUA ROADS 3 35 S 128 40 E 3.47

SAPIKUNURI 10 42 S 150 36 E 7.9

SARAMO POINT 9 40 S 150 47 E 9.23

SARANG HARBOR 4 46 S 145 42 E 9.88

SARAONI HARBOR 10 29 S 150 39 E 7.26

SAREUAK BAY 5 51 S 146 45 E 9.73

SARI KILMASA 7 39 S 131 44 E 4.91

SARIBA ISLAND 10 36 S 150 42 E 7.14

SARMI ANCHORAGE 1 51 S 138 45 E 10.13

SARU NOM NOM ISLET 11 02 S 152 33 E 8.15

SASADAU 3 10 S 128 06 E 3.49

SAUMLAKI BAY 7 58 S 131 17 E 4.92

SAWAI 2 55 S 129 11 E 3.24

SAYAFI ISLANDS 0 31 N 128 50 E 2.71

SCHARNHORST POINT 5 58 S 147 27 E 9.72

SCHILDPAD ISLANDS 5 23 S 127 47 E 4.3

SCHLANGEN HARBOR 5 58 S 147 10 E 9.73

SCHNEIDER HARBOR 6 38 S 147 52 E 9.67

SCHOLLENBRUCH POINT 6 43 S 147 45 E 9.65

SCHOUTEN ISLANDS 1 00 S 136 00 E 10.18

SEITOE 3 26 S 129 34 E 3.54

SEK HARBOR 5 05 S 145 50 E 9.83

SELAT ADI 4 06 S 133 16 E 5.70

SELAT BACAN 0 48 S 127 23 E 2.33

SELAT BOANO 3 00 S 128 00 E 3.17

SELAT BOUGAINVILLE 0 08 S 130 12 E 5.5

SELAT CERAM 3 28 S 128 34 E 3.51

SELAT DAMPIER 0 37 S 130 45 E 5.21

SELAT DOMBO 1 52 S 137 04 E 10.41

SELAT DUROA 5 35 S 132 43 E 4.17

SELAT HAROEKOE 3 35 S 128 23 E 3.43

SELAT HORUKU 3 35 S 128 23 E 3.43

SELAT IRIS 3 58 S 134 09 E 5.74

SELAT KABUI 0 26 S 130 33 E 5.19

SELAT KABURUANG 3 50 N 126 43 E 1.8

SELAT KELANG 3 16 S 127 39 E 3.15

SELAT KURUDU 1 49 S 136 56 E 10.17

SELAT LAKOR 8 14 S 128 04 E 4.75

SELAT LIFUMATOLA 1 49 S 126 21 E 2.50

SELAT LIRUNG 3 58 N 126 41 E 1.6

SELAT MANGOLE 1 57 S 125 55 E 2.49

SELAT MANIPA 3 20 S 127 22 E 3.13

SELAT MOA 8 10 S 127 45 E 4.74

SELAT MOROTAI 2 17 N 128 06 E 2.59

SELAT MULI 8 00 S 138 53 E 5.87

SELAT NAUTILUS 4 06 S 133 16 E 5.70

SELAT ORAFRUAN 7 05 S 131 55 E 4.90

SELAT PATINTI 0 30 S 127 49 E 2.13

SELAT PULAU NUM 1 33 S 135 23 E 10.38

SELAT RAU 2 20 N 128 12 E 2.59

SELAT RUMBERPON 1 43 S 134 09 E 10.59

SELAT SAGEWIN 0 57 S 130 44 E 5.30

SELAT SAMBAKI 0 25 S 127 17 E 2.37

SELAT SAPARUA 3 35 S 128 35 E 3.45

SELAT SELE 1 10 S 131 10 E 5.35

SELAT SEWANDEH 1 29 S 135 03 E 10.39

SELAT TJAPALOELOE 1 50 S 125 20 E 2.46

SELAT TJAPALULU 1 50 S 125 20 E 2.46

SELAT UDJUNG MASARAN 0 37 S 127 24 E 2.35

SELAT WOTAP 7 23 S 131 11 E 4.97

SELAT YAMDENA 7 35 S 131 05 E 4.95

SELEMAN BAY 2 51 S 129 12 E 3.24

SELEMAN ROADS 2 57 S 129 07 E 3.25

SELEO ISLAND 3 09 S 142 29 E 9.102

SEROEA 6 19 S 130 01 E 4.69

SEROEI 1 53 S 136 15 E 10.35

SEROEI BAY 1 54 S 136 15 E 10.35

SERUI 1 53 S 136 15 E 10.35

SETAN 3 31 S 128 14 E 3.35

SEVEN ISLANDS 1 58 S 130 47 E 2.97

SEWANDEH 1 29 S 135 01 E 10.39

SEWANDEH STRAIT 1 29 S 135 03 E 10.39

SEYMOUR BAY 9 32 S 150 29 E 9.27

SHALLOW BANK 11 30 S 153 14 E 8.48

SHARK REEF 11 24 S 153 08 E 8.50

SHEPPARTON SHOAL 7 05 S 147 07 E 9.59

SHOALWATER POINT 9 14 S 141 08 E 6.2

SHORTLAND ISLET 10 32 S 151 05 E 7.36

SIBIRIBIRI ISLET 9 41 S 150 03 E 9.36

SIBIRIBIRI POINT 9 43 S 150 03 E 9.32

SIDANGA ISLAND 1 40 N 127 29 E 2.4

SIDEIA ISLAND 10 36 S 150 50 E 7.16

SIDNEY ISLETS 9 35 S 149 49 E 9.38

SIGA ISLET 10 51 S 151 08 E 7.7

SIMOLALA ISLET 7 15 S 147 09 E 9.58

SIWAI WA ISLAND 11 03 S 152 57 E 8.31

SJERI ROADS 1 39 S 134 06 E 10.59

SKARO REEF 5 35 S 127 28 E 4.2

SLADE ISLAND 10 35 S 151 12 E 7.37

SLAMIAPIEN 1 28 S 135 06 E 10.39

SLOSS ISLETS 11 03 S 152 23 E 8.11

SMITHS PASS 11 40 S 153 14 E 8.48

SOEANGGI 4 19 S 129 42 E 3.65

SOEPIORI 0 45 S 135 33 E 10.26

SOLOMANIA 9 45 S 150 48 E 9.21

SOPHIA REEF 1 47 S 127 32 E 2.40

SORENDIDORI 0 44 S 135 45 E 10.29

SORI 0 53 S 128 08 E 2.15

SORIDO 1 10 S 136 03 E 10.24

SORIDO LAGOON 1 12 S 136 05 E 10.24

SORONG 0 53 S 131 14 E 5.39

SOUTH CAPE 10 44 S 150 14 E 6.59

SOUTH PASSAGE 10 51 S 152 31 E 8.64

SOUTH PATCH 9 34 S 147 19 E 6.34

SOUTH POINT 10 41 S 151 02 E 7.19

SOWEK ROADS 0 50 S 135 29 E 10.28

SPEAR ISLAND 8 59 S 149 08 E 9.43

SPIRE ISLETS 11 05 S 152 29 E 8.13

ST. AIGAN ISLAND 10 41 S 152 44 E 8.59

ST. DAVID 0 49 N 134 17 E 10.67

ST. JOSEPH RIVER 8 48 S 146 34 E 6.25

STANTON PATCH 11 05 S 152 43 E 8.21

STARKEY PATCHES 7 56 S 147 56 E 9.51

STATION POINT 6 26 S 147 51 E 9.69

STATIONS POINT 7 45 S 147 36 E 9.52

STEENKOOL 2 07 S 133 33 E 5.58

STEENKOOLBERG 2 04 S 133 32 E 5.57

STEWART REEFS 9 08 S 149 23 E 9.41

STRACHAN ISLAND 9 05 S 142 08 E 6.5

STRAGGLING ISLANDS 7 31 S 147 24 E 9.55

STRATHORD ISLANDS 10 15 S 151 52 E 8.70

STRINGER BAY 10 18 S 150 24 E 7.28

STUERS ISLANDS 11 06 S 151 08 E 7.6

SUANGGI ISLAND LIGHT 3 18 S 127 28 E 3.14

SUAU ISLAND 10 43 S 150 15 E 7.2

SUGARLOAF 6 51 S 146 56 E 9.61

SULLIVAN PATCH 11 16 S 152 47 E 8.25

SULLIVAN PATCHES 10 22 S 150 45 E 7.29

SULOGA HARBOR 9 13 S 152 46 E 9.7

SUNDAY ENTRANCE 10 15 S 148 09 E 6.45

SUNDAY ISLET 9 16 S 150 30 E 9.27

SUNGAI JUGU 5 35 S 138 10 E 5.83

SUNGAI KARABRA 1 33 S 131 41 E 5.48

SUNGAI SEREMUK 1 36 S 131 45 E 5.48

SUNGAI SIGAROI 2 10 S 132 10 E 5.50

SUNGI BAKOR 2 17 S 133 45 E 5.60

SUNGI BARAT 5 23 S 137 52 E 5.82

SUNGI BARAT LAUT 5 27 S 138 01 E 5.82

SUNGI DIGUL 7 10 S 138 42 E 5.84

SUNGI DUMES 5 25 S 138 05 E 5.82

SUNGI HELLWIG 5 23 S 137 52 E 5.82

SUNGI KANGURMA 6 17 S 134 51 E 4.54

SUNGI KARUFA 3 53 S 133 23 E 5.70

SUNGI KARUP 3 53 S 133 23 E 5.70

SUNGI KASIRA 2 30 S 133 26 E 5.59

SUNGI KATERA 4 22 S 135 03 E 5.78

SUNGI LORENTZ 5 25 S 138 05 E 5.82

SUNGI MAIKOOR 6 09 S 134 06 E 4.43

SUNGI MANUMBAI 6 01 S 134 17 E 4.42

SUNGI MIMIKA 4 41 S 136 28 E 5.79

SUNGI MUTURI 2 15 S 133 38 E 5.58

SUNGI NORTHWEST 5 27 S 138 01 E 5.82

SUNGI PULAU 5 35 S 138 10 E 5.83

SUNGI SERWATU 6 26 S 134 06 E 4.44

SUNGI UTA 4 35 S 136 02 E 5.79

SUNGI WASIAN 2 13 S 133 33 E 5.58
260 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

SUNGI WORKAI 6 03 S 134 15 E 4.43,

4.54

SUPU BAY 2 11 N 127 59 E 2.60

SURU 3 46 S 130 46 E 3.32

SWINGER OPENING 11 16 S 153 58 E 8.53

T

TAB ANCHORAGE 5 10 S 145 50 E 9.81

TABLE BAY 10 17 S 149 05 E 6.50

TABLE POINT 10 17 S 148 58 E 6.49

TABLE TOP HILL 10 14 S 148 54 E 6.47

TAGULA 10 30 S 153 30 E 8.1

TAGULA ISLAND 11 30 S 153 26 E 8.38

TAHUNA 3 37 N 125 29 E 1.24

TAIFAUR ISLET 11 09 S 152 54 E 8.25

TAJANDOE 5 33 S 132 19 E 4.11

TAKAT LEM LEM 0 12 N 127 35 E 2.11

TAKAT MAIN MAIN 0 18 N 127 37 E 2.11

TAKAT SAPA 1 10 S 129 06 E 2.91

TAKUKU 3 34 S 128 37 E 3.46

TALBOT ISLANDS 9 14 S 142 10 E 6.4

TALEBA BAY 9 28 S 150 14 E 9.37

TALIRIN 3 02 S 130 23 E 3.29

TAMARA ISLAND 3 07 S 142 24 E 9.103,

9.104

TAMI 1 31 N 127 52 E 2.62

TAMI ISLANDS 6 45 S 147 54 E 9.65

TANAH MERAH 6 05 S 140 20 E 5.85

TANJONG FERAI 3 58 S 134 26 E 5.75

TANJUNG AILUSIHA 3 21 S 128 56 E 3.52

TANJUNG ALANG 3 46 S 128 00 E 3.35

TANJUNG AMBORA-BESAR 4 33 N 126 45 E 1.4

TANJUNG ARAT 5 55 S 132 40 E 4.18

TANJUNG AWURA 4 02 S 134 29 E 5.75

TANJUNG BAIN 6 51 S 134 05 E 4.44

TANJUNG BALATANJURING 6 05 S 134 45 E 4.53

TANJUNG BARTUTUI 3 54 S 127 13 E 3.9

TANJUNG BATU MERAH 3 41 S 128 11 E 3.37

TANJUNG BATUPEKAT 3 51 S 126 44 E 3.7

TANJUNG BATUTULIS 3 50 S 126 37 E 3.7

TANJUNG BAWIA 3 56 S 134 40 E 5.77

TANJUNG BEBEK 3 06 S 126 18 E 3.3

TANJUNG BILULU 0 47 S 127 54 E 2.32

TANJUNG BISOA 2 13 N 127 57 E 2.3

TANJUNG BOBO 1 02 N 127 24 E 2.6

TANJUNG BOBO 2 59 S 130 23 E 3.28

TANJUNG BOBORO 2 19 N 128 39 E 2.55

TANJUNG BOEMI 3 22 S 135 25 E 10.41

TANJUNG BOESOEROEA 2 29 S 134 38 E 10.56

TANJUNG BOEWOE 3 23 N 125 34 E 1.21

TANJUNG BOHIA 4 07 S 134 37 E 5.68

TANJUNG BOLEU 1 09 N 127 54 E 2.65

TANJUNG BOLU 1 09 N 127 54 E 2.65

TANJUNG BOMASI 0 10 S 131 18 E 5.11

TANJUNG BORANG 5 17 S 133 09 E 4.30

TANJUNG BOROPEN 0 43 S 133 33 E 10.68

TANJUNG BOTU 1 56 S 125 55 E 2.49

TANJUNG BUMI 3 22 S 135 25 E 10.41

TANJUNG BUOBE 0 40 S 128 00 E 2.13

TANJUNG BUSURUA 2 29 S 134 38 E 10.56

TANJUNG DANAMA 3 35 S 130 53 E 3.33

TANJUNG DEHEGILA 1 59 N 128 15 E 2.57

TANJUNG DJAR 2 36 S 140 47 E 10.3

TANJUNG DJODJEFA 2 12 N 128 04 E 2.60

TANJUNG DOAN 5 57 S 132 41 E 4.21

TANJUNG DOBEGASI 0 33 N 127 31 E 2.9

TANJUNG DOMBO 1 54 S 137 06 E 10.42

TANJUNG DORE 0 44 S 131 32 E 5.34

TANJUNG FAKNIK 1 11 S 136 10 E 10.23

TANJUNG FANADJURING 5 48 S 134 19 E 4.40

TANJUNG FARGATA 1 57 S 125 32 E 2.48

TANJUNG FATAGAR 2 46 S 131 56 E 5.52

TANJUNG FATUFAT 3 40 S 126 17 E 3.5

TANJUNG FATUJURING 6 00 S 134 08 E 4.41

TANJUNG FORONGKETO 2 01 S 130 28 E 2.98

TANJUNG FOYA 0 07 N 127 55 E 2.82

TANJUNG GILA 1 59 N 128 15 E 2.57

TANJUNG GOHADJODJARA 1 53 S 126 14 E 2.50

TANJUNG GOLDJURING 6 49 S 134 22 E 4.57

TANJUNG GORANGO 2 30 N 128 41 E 2.54

TANJUNG HADIMOKO 2 24 S 140 14 E 10.7

TANJUNG HANOEA 2 52 S 128 21 E 3.21

TANJUNG HANUA 2 52 S 128 21 E 3.21

TANJUNG HATAWANU 3 04 S 126 47 E 3.3

TANJUNG HATU SUPUN 2 57 S 129 10 E 3.24

TANJUNG HOAR 5 57 S 132 46 E 4.21

TANJUNG ILOR 3 25 S 130 48 E 3.29

TANJUNG IMBIERI 0 38 S 135 23 E 10.29

TANJUNG IMBIKWAN 0 23 S 131 15 E 5.16

TANJUNG INDABANDARAI 1 06 S 134 50 E 10.40

TANJUNG INDARI 0 26 S 127 18 E 2.37

TANJUNG ITEWI 3 56 S 134 39 E 5.77

TANJUNG JAMTOE 1 40 S 130 20 E 2.96

TANJUNG JAR 2 36 S 140 47 E 10.3

TANJUNG JARLEIER 5 36 S 133 01 E 4.31

TANJUNG JOGOER 2 33 S 140 43 E 10.4

TANJUNG JOJEFA 2 12 N 128 04 E 2.60

TANJUNG KALAWAI 2 51 S 128 15 E 3.21

TANJUNG KAMBRINI 0 21 S 132 37 E 10.70

TANJUNG KAMDARA 2 19 S 140 07 E 10.9

TANJUNG KANDORWA 0 50 S 130 54 E 5.21

TANJUNG KARANG SENU 2 42 S 136 01 E 10.43

TANJUNG KARBAU 3 17 S 127 07 E 3.3

TANJUNG KARBOU 3 17 S 127 07 E 3.3

TANJUNG KATUMIN 4 05 S 132 54 E 5.67

TANJUNG KAWASSI 1 37 S 127 24 E 2.41

TANJUNG KIRANA 3 14 S 132 35 E 5.66

TANJUNG KOMFANE 5 39 S 134 45 E 4.47

TANJUNG KOOL 8 23 S 138 56 E 5.87

TANJUNG LAMA 2 58 S 130 21 E 3.28

TANJUNG LAMANA 2 50 S 128 31 E 3.22

TANJUNG LATU 3 25 S 128 42 E 3.52

TANJUNG LEHE 3 37 N 125 35 E 1.18

TANJUNG LEITIN 5 31 S 134 41 E 4.46

TANJUNG LELAI 1 34 N 128 43 E 2.68

TANJUNG LELAR 6 46 S 134 02 E 4.44

TANJUNG LELEO BASSO 1 24 S 127 26 E 2.43

TANJUNG LIBOBO 0 55 S 128 27 E 2.14

TANJUNG LIBOLI 3 41 S 127 11 E 3.8

TANJUNG LIGUA MA DEHE 1 33 N 127 30 E 2.5

TANJUNG MABO 0 55 S 130 23 E 5.27

TANJUNG MAKINA 2 51 S 128 45 E 3.22

TANJUNG MANARE 0 16 S 130 19 E 5.7

TANJUNG MANGANEKI 0 36 S 133 14 E 10.69

TANJUNG MANGGOEAR 2 53 S 134 51 E 10.53

TANJUNG MANGGUAR 2 53 S 134 51 E 10.53

TANJUNG MANIBOEROE 3 14 S 134 57 E 10.52

TANJUNG MANIBURU 3 14 S 134 57 E 10.52

TANJUNG MARTAFONS 3 39 S 128 12 E 3.38

TANJUNG MASIWANG 3 27 S 130 50 E 3.33

TANJUNG MATAIA 3 26 S 129 58 E 3.54

TANJUNG MEIJURING 6 01 S 134 13 E 4.41

TANJUNG MEMORI 0 52 S 134 08 E 10.65

TANJUNG MENONKET 1 21 S 130 51 E 5.41

TANJUNG MOESLENAR 5 57 S 132 43 E 4.21

TANJUNG MUSLENAR 5 57 S 132 43 E 4.21

TANJUNG NAMAA 2 47 S 129 03 E 3.24

TANJUNG NAMARIPI 4 28 S 135 13 E 5.78

TANJUNG NARIKA 4 15 S 134 49 E 5.78

TANJUNG NASSAULANG 4 05 S 132 54 E 5.67

TANJUNG NGABORDAMLU 6 57 S 134 11 E 4.45

TANJUNG NGIDIOEN 5 36 S 132 36 E 4.18

TANJUNG NGIDIUN 5 36 S 132 36 E 4.18

TANJUNG NGOLOPOPO 0 13 N 128 54 E 2.73

TANJUNG NGONI 6 10 S 134 05 E 4.43

TANJUNG NUSANIVE 3 47 S 128 05 E 3.36

TANJUNG OEBULIE 0 04 S 129 22 E 2.86

TANJUNG OELI 2 50 S 128 40 E 3.22

TANJUNG OENDOER 3 47 S 130 36 E 3.55

TANJUNG OHISERKUM 5 23 S 133 04 E 4.31

TANJUNG OPMARAI 0 23 S 132 16 E 5.32

TANJUNG ORANSBARI 1 20 S 134 17 E 10.60

TANJUNG OREARO 1 42 S 135 37 E 10.36

TANJUNG PAISUMBAOS 0 36 S 127 22 E 2.35

TANJUNG PAMALI 2 48 S 129 22 E 3.24

TANJUNG PARAN 7 13 S 128 38 E 4.66

TANJUNG PARIGI 1 34 S 128 06 E 2.43

TANJUNG PATINGROE 5 17 S 133 07 E 4.31

TANJUNG PATINGRU 5 17 S 133 07 E 4.31

TANJUNG PERKAM 1 28 S 137 55 E 10.14

TANJUNG PIMONSBARI 0 53 S 135 39 E 10.27

TANJUNG POSIPOSI 2 06 N 128 34 E 2.54
Index—Gazetteer 261

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

TANJUNG RAINBAWA 1 47 S 136 54 E 10.33

TANJUNG RAINBAWI 1 47 S 136 54 E 10.17

TANJUNG ROENAKI 1 41 S 134 06 E 10.62

TANJUNG RONGI MHE 1 38 N 127 32 E 2.5

TANJUNG RUNAKI 1 41 S 134 06 E 10.62

TANJUNG SAALA 3 22 S 128 01 E 3.48

TANJUNG SABRA 2 17 S 132 18 E 5.50

TANJUNG SAFI 0 16 N 127 43 E 2.11

TANJUNG SALAKITI 2 40 S 132 07 E 5.51

TANJUNG SAMBERSBARI 1 11 S 135 54 E 10.24

TANJUNG SAMERSBARI 1 11 S 135 54 E 10.23

TANJUNG SANIANI 3 14 S 127 38 E 3.15

TANJUNG SAOBASAR 0 05 S 131 10 E 5.11

TANJUNG SAOEKRIS 0 27 S 132 58 E 10.69

TANJUNG SARMANA 3 25 S 126 02 E 3.4

TANJUNG SASELATA 0 21 N 127 39 E 2.10

TANJUNG SAUKRIS 0 27 S 132 58 E 10.69

TANJUNG SAWEBA 0 43 S 133 57 E 10.60

TANJUNG SEITU 3 26 S 129 34 E 3.54

TANJUNG SELE 1 26 S 130 56 E 5.47

TANJUNG SERBAT 5 31 S 132 48 E 4.24

TANJUNG SIDANGOLI 0 53 N 127 30 E 2.8

TANJUNG SIMORA 3 40 S 133 41 E 5.68

TANJUNG SISAL 3 04 S 130 27 E 3.30

TANJUNG SISI 3 10 S 128 10 E 3.49

TANJUNG SOEADJA 2 32 S 140 45 E 10.3

TANJUNG SOOS 1 10 S 129 58 E 5.21

TANJUNG SOPI 2 38 N 128 34 E 2.53

TANJUNG SORONG 0 49 S 131 13 E 5.36

TANJUNG SRABAPAN 0 31 S 133 05 E 10.69

TANJUNG STEENBOOM 4 56 S 136 50 E 5.79

TANJUNG SUAJA 2 32 S 140 45 E 10.3

TANJUNG TANAH MERAH 2 26 S 133 07 E 5.56

TANJUNG TANAHMERAH 2 24 S 140 21 E 10.6

TANJUNG TANDURU BESAR 2 52 S 128 10 E 3.19

TANJUNG TARONMETA 3 34 S 133 34 E 5.70

TANJUNG TAWA 0 43 S 128 04 E 2.13

TANJUNG TERUA 3 08 S 128 11 E 3.49

TANJUNG TOARDEFETE 5 55 S 134 17 E 4.41

TANJUNG TOKAKA 0 13 S 127 40 E 2.12

TANJUNG TONGERAI 3 38 S 132 43 E 5.66

TANJUNG TUTNEI 8 15 S 127 58 E 4.74

TANJUNG TUTPATEH 8 13 S 127 36 E 4.73

TANJUNG UAFA FENJURING 6 19 S 134 53 E 4.53

TANJUNG ULI 0 28 N 127 58 E 2.80

TANJUNG ULI 2 50 S 128 40 E 3.22

TANJUNG UNDUR 3 47 S 130 36 E 3.55

TANJUNG UWAMA 0 06 N 127 41 E 2.12

TANJUNG VALS 8 21 S 137 35 E 5.87

TANJUNG VERKAMI 1 48 S 138 41 E 10.14

TANJUNG WAARLANGIER 6 59 S 132 00 E 4.90

TANJUNG WABA 2 11 S 136 31 E 10.41

TANJUNG WADATUTU 8 08 S 130 56 E 4.94

TANJUNG WAFANI 2 03 S 130 15 E 2.98

TANJUNG WAFKALETTE 1 15 S 131 03 E 5.41

TANJUNG WAIROLE 3 41 S 127 55 E 3.40

TANJUNG WAJAMLI 1 04 N 128 42 E 2.69

TANJUNG WAJTETA 1 47 S 125 22 E 2.47

TANJUNG WALIMEN 3 29 S 126 05 E 3.4

TANJUNG WALWAWAT 3 37 S 126 12 E 3.4

TANJUNG WAMONKET 1 32 S 131 12 E 5.48

TANJUNG WAPOTI 3 04 S 126 41 E 3.3

TANJUNG WARARI 1 05 S 136 23 E 10.25

TANJUNG WATLOREN 5 35 S 132 20 E 4.12

TANJUNG WATULAIJURING 5 20 S 134 34 E 4.36

TANJUNG WAYABULA 2 17 N 128 12 E 2.53

TANJUNG WAYAMLI 1 04 N 128 42 E 2.69

TANJUNG WEDUAR 6 01 S 132 50 E 4.34

TANJUNG WETIN 2 42 S 132 05 E 5.53

TANJUNG WIRUWAI 2 17 S 139 39 E 10.10

TANJUNG WOIBI 2 54 S 134 41 E 10.54

TANJUNG WOKA 1 26 S 127 53 E 2.43

TANJUNG WOMOSISORE 3 06 S 134 50 E 10.52

TANJUNG YAMTU 1 40 S 130 20 E 2.96

TANJUNG YAMTUP 1 31 S 131 26 E 5.49

TANJUNG YAMURSBA 0 21 S 132 25 E 5.32

TANJUNG YOGUR 2 33 S 140 43 E 10.4

TAPALO 2 01 S 130 19 E 2.98

TARIWERWI ISLAND 11 09 S 151 15 E 8.2

TAROA 5 48 S 132 37 E 4.19

TAUARA SHOAL 11 07 S 152 54 E 8.24

TAURAMA HILL 9 32 S 147 14 E 6.34

TAUSCH ISLAND 5 06 S 145 48 E 9.82

TAWA TAWA MAL REEF 11 04 S 153 00 E 8.30

TAWAL REEF 11 04 S 152 21 E 8.11

TAWALI KECIL 0 14 S 127 18 E 2.28

TE POINT 11 18 S 154 13 E 8.57

TEGAL REEF 5 29 S 132 49 E 4.15

TEHORU ROADS 3 22 S 129 32 E 3.55

TELEGRAAF REEF 2 48 S 128 56 E 3.23

TELIATA POINT 5 56 S 147 20 E 9.72

TELUK ABORU 3 36 S 128 31 E 3.44

TELUK ALJOEI 0 10 S 130 18 E 5.10

TELUK ALYU 0 10 S 130 18 E 5.10

TELUK AMAHAI 3 20 S 128 55 E 3.53

TELUK AMBON 3 43 S 128 07 E 3.35

TELUK ARAGO 0 03 S 130 33 E 5.12

TELUK ARGUNI 3 23 S 133 39 E 5.71

TELUK ARGUNI 3 27 S 133 36 E 5.68

TELUK BABANG 0 37 S 127 36 E 2.31

TELUK BAGUALA 3 39 S 128 17 E 3.39

TELUK BARA 3 10 S 126 13 E 3.3

TELUK BELANG BELANG 0 37 S 127 25 E 2.35

TELUK BERAU 2 30 S 132 20 E 5.51

TELUK BINTUNI 2 20 S 133 25 E 5.57

TELUK BOBANE 0 53 N 127 40 E 2.66

TELUK BOELA 3 06 S 130 30 E 3.30

TELUK BONI 0 03 S 131 03 E 5.14

TELUK BULA 3 06 S 130 30 E 3.30

TELUK BULI 0 48 N 128 28 E 2.69

TELUK DAGO 3 26 N 125 33 E 1.22

TELUK DEMTA 2 21 S 140 09 E 10.8

TELUK DJAILOLO 1 02 N 127 28 E 2.7

TELUK DODINGA 0 49 N 127 33 E 2.9

TELUK ELAT 5 38 S 132 59 E 4.32

TELUK ELPAPUTIH 3 17 S 128 51 E 3.52

TELUK ESANG 4 28 N 126 43 E 1.4

TELUK ETNA 3 55 S 134 45 E 5.77

TELUK FLAMINGO 5 31 S 138 02 E 5.82

TELUK FOFAK 0 02 S 130 44 E 5.12

TELUK GAGAK 3 45 S 133 54 E 5.73

TELUK GALELA 1 53 N 127 55 E 2.60

TELUK GELANIT 5 38 S 132 41 E 4.23

TELUK HARIA 3 35 S 128 37 E 3.46

TELUK HATILING 2 48 S 129 31 E 3.27

TELUK HOH 5 17 S 133 09 E 4.30

TELUK INGELAS 3 03 S 130 27 E 3.30

TELUK IRIS 2 24 S 140 13 E 10.7

TELUK JAILOLO 1 02 N 127 28 E 2.7

TELUK JAIMARIA 1 41 S 135 36 E 10.37

TELUK JAYAPURA 2 32 S 140 43 E 10.4

TELUK JOPPINGAR 2 29 S 134 36 E 10.56

TELUK KABAREI 0 03 S 130 58 E 5.13

TELUK KABUI 0 22 S 130 38 E 5.19

TELUK KAIMANA 3 40 S 133 44 E 5.71

TELUK KAU 1 03 N 128 53 E 2.65

TELUK KAYELI 3 19 S 127 07 E 3.11

TELUK KOEMA 3 34 N 125 36 E 1.18

TELUK KOTANIA 3 03 S 128 02 E 3.20

TELUK KUMA 3 34 N 125 36 E 1.18

TELUK KWATISORE 3 15 S 134 57 E 10.52

TELUK LABUHA 0 38 S 127 23 E 2.34

TELUK LAPAN 0 42 S 127 40 E 2.31

TELUK LEKSULA 3 47 S 126 31 E 3.6

TELUK LELINTAH 2 02 S 130 18 E 2.98

TELUK LOLODA 1 41 N 127 33 E 2.4

TELUK MAFFIN 1 58 S 138 52 E 10.13

TELUK MANALU 3 32 N 125 38 E 1.19

TELUK MANGANITU 3 34 N 125 30 E 1.23

TELUK MARCHESA 0 49 S 130 53 E 5.29

TELUK MATTERER 2 19 S 140 08 E 10.9

TELUK MAWI 1 39 S 134 07 E 10.59

TELUK MAYALIBIT 0 21 S 130 56 E 5.17

TELUK MIOELOE 3 35 N 125 34 E 1.18

TELUK MURIS 2 22 S 140 10 E 10.7

TELUK NALAHIA 3 38 S 128 47 E 3.47

TELUK NAMROLE 3 51 S 126 43 E 3.8

TELUK PAPUMA 1 36 S 135 53 E 10.35

TELUK PARUMI 1 46 S 135 51 E 10.36

TELUK PATIPI 2 42 S 132 07 E 5.53

TELUK PAYAHI 0 18 N 127 42 E 2.11

TELUK PETAAR 3 39 N 125 34 E 1.17

TELUK PIRU 3 20 S 128 10 E 3.48

TELUK RAREWARAI 3 02 S 135 48 E 10.45
262 Index—Gazetteer

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

TELUK RUMAHKUDA 7 37 S 127 25 E 4.61

TELUK SAHU 1 09 N 127 24 E 2.6

TELUK SALAKITI 2 44 S 132 05 E 5.53

TELUK SARIPA 0 07 S 130 22 E 5.11

TELUK SAWAI 2 51 S 129 12 E 3.24

TELUK SAWAI 2 57 S 129 10 E 3.25

TELUK SEBAKOR 3 26 S 132 45 E 5.66

TELUK SEGUN 1 27 S 131 20 E 5.49

TELUK SEKAR 2 42 S 132 27 E 5.54

TELUK SENSONG 3 38 N 125 35 E 1.18

TELUK SERUI 1 54 S 136 15 E 10.35

TELUK SIWI 0 44 S 133 44 E 10.68

TELUK SOLAT 7 09 S 128 41 E 4.65

TELUK SOLOLO 0 47 N 128 14 E 2.69

TELUK SOPI 2 35 N 128 30 E 2.53

TELUK TAHUNA 3 36 N 125 29 E 1.23

TELUK TALENGAN 3 35 N 125 34 E 1.18

TELUK TALUTI 3 24 S 129 45 E 3.54

TELUK TAMAKO 3 27 N 125 30 E 1.23

TELUK TAMOELOL 1 55 S 130 25 E 2.96

TELUK TAMULOL 1 55 S 130 25 E 2.96

TELUK TELUTI 3 24 S 129 45 E 3.54

TELUK TIFU 3 43 S 126 24 E 3.5

TELUK TOFIRI 0 59 N 127 30 E 2.8

TELUK TOGARWATAN 2 55 S 131 59 E 5.63

TELUK UMAR 2 55 S 134 44 E 10.54

TELUK WAHAI 2 47 S 129 30 E 3.26

TELUK WAIR 5 17 S 133 08 E 4.30

TELUK WAISILE 1 12 N 128 06 E 2.67

TELUK WANDAMEN 2 45 S 134 28 E 10.58

TELUK WAP 3 58 S 132 49 E 5.67

TELUK WEDA 0 10 N 128 20 E 2.74

TELUK WILHELMUS 7 06 S 128 39 E 4.66

TELUK WOOI 1 41 S 135 31 E 10.37

TELUK YOPPINGAR 2 29 S 134 36 E 10.56

TELUK ZWAAN 7 30 S 127 24 E 4.60

TEOEN 6 58 S 129 08 E 4.67

TEPA ROAD 7 52 S 129 35 E 4.79

TERI 3 47 S 130 43 E 3.56

TERNATE 0 47 N 127 23 E 2.19

TERUMBA GORA 0 12 N 126 54 E 2.25

TERWISSIE 3 13 S 127 02 E 3.3

TETE 0 27 N 128 10 E 2.78

THOMPSON BAY 9 12 S 141 46 E 6.4

TIFOE 3 43 S 126 24 E 3.5

TIGALALU 0 04 N 127 25 E 2.23

TIGALULU 0 04 N 127 25 E 2.23

TIHOELALE 3 27 S 128 31 E 3.51

TIPIN ROAD 0 56 S 130 45 E 5.43

TJEF 0 34 N 128 37 E 2.70

TOBELO 1 44 N 128 01 E 2.64

TOBELO ROADS 1 44 N 128 01 E 2.63

TOERTOER DJOERING 6 38 S 134 45 E 4.53

TOET NEI 8 15 S 127 58 E 4.74

TOGOPLUN 0 40 N 129 02 E 2.71

TOLIMAGO 0 09 N 127 11 E 2.27

TOLOKIWA ISLAND 5 19 S 147 37 E 9.71

TONGGERAP 0 39 S 132 03 E 5.31

TONQUIN 5 47 S 132 34 E 4.19

TONU 3 13 S 127 45 E 3.15

TOR RIVER 1 57 S 139 54 E 10.13

TORLESSE ISLANDS 10 49 S 152 13 E 8.67

TOTOAD BIGHT 5 43 S 132 39 E 4.18

TREE ISLET 11 24 S 153 59 E 8.55

TRITON BANK 5 58 S 138 04 E 5.83

TSIRIA 8 49 S 146 31 E 6.24

TUAL ROADS 5 38 S 132 44 E 4.24

TUAPEN 0 12 S 127 02 E 2.27

TUBOA ISLAND 9 12 S 150 49 E 9.29

TUFI HARBOR 9 05 S 149 18 E 9.41

TUMAGABUNA ISLET 9 29 S 150 28 E 9.29

TUMLEO ISLAND 3 07 S 142 24 E 9.103

TUNLEAN 3 47 S 130 46 E 3.32

TUPUSELEIA HEAD 9 34 S 147 18 E 6.38

TUPUSULEI HEAD 9 34 S 147 18 E 6.34

TYDEMAN REEFS 2 09 S 135 15 E 10.61

TYRON BAY 11 21 S 154 01 E 8.54

U

UHIWA 5 42 S 132 37 E 4.19

UJUNG AURI 2 47 S 135 57 E 10.43

ULI BONNA BONNA PASSAGE 11 10 S 152 58 E 8.25

ULU 2 44 N 125 25 E 1.29

ULULINA ISLAND 11 05 S 152 32 E 8.16

ULUMA REEF 11 06 S 150 59 E 7.6

ULUWERU HILL 4 31 S 129 53 E 3.67

UMBOI ISLAND 5 38 S 147 55 E 9.76

UMBOI ISLAND 5 40 S 147 57 E 9.71

UMUDA FLOATING TERMINAL 8 40 S 141 01 E 6.12

UNDUR ROADS 3 47 S 130 36 E 3.56

UR ROADS 5 22 S 133 10 E 4.29

URIKA ISLAND 7 48 S 145 01 E 6.18

URUBA REEF 11 16 S 152 12 E 8.8

UTIAN ISLAND 11 03 S 152 27 E 8.12

V

VAILALA RIVER 7 57 S 145 24 E 6.18

VAKUTA ISLAND 8 51 S 151 11 E 9.13

VALSCHE PISANG ISLANDS 2 07 S 130 53 E 2.97

VANIMO HARBOR 2 41 S 141 18 E 9.105

VARIVARI ISLAND 9 15 S 146 53 E 6.30

VAROE REEF BEACON 10 15 S 148 45 E 6.48

VAROI RIVER 7 48 S 144 58 E 6.17

VATSORI 7 06 S 131 45 E 4.88

VEALE REEF 9 12 S 149 28 E 9.41

VEHI REEF 11 21 S 153 09 E 8.51

VELDMAN ROCK 0 27 S 128 31 E 2.83

VENARIWA ISLAND 11 04 S 152 32 E 8.18

VENUS POINT 4 01 S 144 41 E 9.92

VESUVIUS BAY 1 52 S 125 22 E 2.48

VIAI ISLAND 3 23 S 144 26 E 9.94

VICTORIA BAY 3 20 S 143 31 E 9.98

VINCKE POINT 5 55 S 147 16 E 9.72

VISCHERS ISLAND 0 55 S 130 22 E 5.27

VITIAZ STRAIT 5 50 S 146 45 E 9.71

VOKEO ISLAND 3 27 S 144 07 E 9.94

W

WADANA ISLET 8 56 S 150 50 E 9.14

WAFORDORI BAY 0 43 S 135 42 E 10.29

WAHAI 2 48 S 129 30 E 3.27

WAHROE 5 45 S 132 39 E 4.19

WAHRU 5 45 S 132 39 E 4.19

WAI BOBOT 3 23 S 129 58 E 3.54

WAI LOWER 1 44 S 127 36 E 2.40

WAI TOSU 2 58 S 128 07 E 3.20

WAIGAMA 1 50 S 129 49 E 2.94

WAIROENDI 1 48 S 134 26 E 10.58

WAJABULA 2 17 N 128 12 E 2.53

WALIS ISLAND 3 14 S 143 18 E 9.99

WALTER BAY 9 29 S 147 09 E 6.35

WALTERS REEF 10 21 S 151 00 E 7.33

WALUWEA POINT 9 25 S 150 26 E 9.27

WAMEA ISLAND 9 14 S 150 54 E 9.26

WANDAMEN BAY 2 45 S 134 28 E 10.58

WANIGELA 9 21 S 149 10 E 9.39

WANIM ISLAND 11 16 S 153 06 E 8.37

WARBALAR 5 50 S 132 35 E 4.19

WARD ROCK 11 07 S 152 56 E 8.25

WARI ISLAND 10 58 S 151 04 E 7.7

WARI TAMBRIAN 7 47 S 131 27 E 4.91

WARIA PATCHES 7 44 S 147 48 E 9.51

WARIA RIVER 7 50 S 147 41 E 9.52

WARILAOE 5 22 S 134 32 E 4.36

WAROE ROADS 3 24 S 130 40 E 3.32

WARU ROADS 3 24 S 130 40 E 3.32

WASU ANCHORAGE 5 58 S 147 13 E 9.72

WATMOMAL 7 08 S 131 43 E 4.88

WATOE 5 24 S 134 28 E 4.37

WATOELEIDJOERING 5 20 S 134 34 E 4.36

WATOTA ISLAND 9 18 S 150 42 E 9.26

WATU KELIANG 4 00 S 131 24 E 3.63

WATULAI ISLAND 5 49 S 134 47 E 4.49

WATUTU POINT 9 23 S 150 23 E 9.28

WATUWAI ROAD 7 46 S 130 02 E 4.83

WAYABULA ROADS 2 17 N 128 12 E 2.59

WEBB PATCH 11 13 S 152 39 E 8.20

WEBER POINT 5 46 S 146 42 E 9.74
Index—Gazetteer 263

Pub. 164

Position

° ' ° '

Position

° ' ° '

Sec.

Para

Sec.

Para

WEDA ROADS 0 20 N 127 53 E 2.80

WEDOEAR ROADS 5 50 S 132 56 E 4.29

WEDUAR ROADS 5 50 S 132 56 E 4.29

WEIBU ISLET 7 33 S 147 24 E 9.55

WEITOA ISLAND 10 40 S 150 56 E 7.18

WELLE ISLAND 9 36 S 151 00 E 9.24

WEST BROOKER PASSAGE 11 03 S 152 24 E 8.12

WEST CHANNEL 10 40 S 150 35 E 7.12

WEST HARBOR 3 33 S 143 37 E 9.97

WEST PASSAGE 10 48 S 152 17 E 8.65

WEWAK HARBOR 3 34 S 43 38 E 9.96

WINDISSI ROADS 2 25 S 134 13 E 10.58

WOLA ISLAND 11 18 S 154 02 E 8.54

WOLF ROCK 0 12 N 126 54 E 2.25

WOLVERINE ENTRANCE 10 05 S 147 40 E 6.41

WONGAT ISLAND 5 08 S 145 51 E 9.82

WOODFORD REEFS 0 42 S 130 25 E 5.23

WOODLARK ISLAND 9 00 S 152 50 E 8.1

WOODLARK ISLAND 9 07 S 152 50 E 9.4

WOOI BAY 1 41 S 135 31 E 10.37

WORI WORI PATCHES 11 06 S 152 44 E 8.21

WOTAI ROAD 6 45 S 129 29 E 4.69

WRIGHT PATCH 9 11 S 150 54 E 9.26

WURI WURI PASSAGE 10 58 S 152 46 E 8.30

Y

YARUMAN ISLAND 11 09 S 152 48 E 8.23

YEF 0 21 N 127 54 E 2.80

YEF DOIF 0 53 S 131 02 E 5.43

YEF DOIF ISLANDS 0 46 N 129 47 E 2.88

YEF MO 1 13 S 131 13 E 5.41

YEF PELEE 2 12 S 130 15 E 2.98

YEINA ISLAND 11 20 S 153 27 E 8.42

YELA ISLAND 11 22 S 154 10 E 8.52

YEMBRO 5 32 S 132 19 E 4.11

YONGA BAY 11 20 S 154 05 E 8.54

YULE ISLAND 8 50 S 146 32 E 6.23

YULE PATCHES 11 15 S 152 42 E 8.20

YUMA PASSAGE 11 21 S 153 23 E 8.44

Z

ZADEL BERG 1 49 S 130 22 E 2.96

ZEEMEEUW REEFS 1 20 S 130 31 E 2.95

ZOUTBERG 0 46 S 127 43 E 2.32